Tech Man 6110-6510s TR Op Test-TM4572

6110-6410,
6110L-6510L
and 6310S-6510S

Tractors
Operation and Tests
TECHNICAL MANUAL
6110-6410, 6110L-6510L and
6310S-6510S Tractors Operation
and Tests
TM4572 01APR01 (ENGLISCH)
For complete service information also see:

6110-6410, 6110L-6510L and
6310S-6510S Tractors
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM4724
6110-6410, 6110L-6510L and
6310S-6510S Tractors
Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM4574
Front Wheel Drive Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTM4509
POWERTECH Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . . . . CTM104
)"00 %'
Mechanical Fuel Injection Systems . . . . . . . CTM207
Fuel Injection Systems (Level 1) . . . . . . . . . CTM284
Alternators and Starting Motors . . . . . . . . . . CTM77
John Deere Werke Mannheim

TM4572 (01APR01)
North American Version
LITHO IN U.S.A
ENGLISCH
Introduction
Foreword
This “Operation and Tests” manual applies to the

This is the safety-alert symbol. When you see this
following tractor types:
symbol on the machine or in this manual, be alert to
the potential for personal injury.
6110, 6210, 6310, 6410,
Technical Manuals are concise guides for specific
6110L, 6210L, 6310L, 6410L, 6510L,
machines. They are on-the-job guides containing only
the vital information needed for diagnosis, analysis,
6310S, 6410S, 6510S
testing, and repair.
This manual is written for an experienced technician.
Fundamental service information is available from
Essential tools required in performing certain service
other sources covering basic theory of operation,
work are identified in this manual and are
fundamentals of troubleshooting, general maintenance,
recommended for use.
and basic type of failures and their causes.
Live with safety: Read the safety messages in the
introduction of this manual and the cautions presented
throughout the text of the manual.
LX24888,00003A9 –19–31JAN01–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Contents
210
SECTION 210—Safety Group 20A—Perma-Clutch II
Group 05—Safety Measures Group 20B—Gear Transmission
Group 20C—Creeper Transmission
SECTION 220—Engine Group 20D—Range Transmission
Group 10—Tests 220
SECTION 251—Power Reverser Transmission
SECTION 230—Fuel, Air Intake and Cooling Group 05—Operational Checkout
Systems Group 10—Troubleshooting
Group 10—System Diagnosis Group 15—Tests and Adjustments
Group 15—Tests and Adjustments Group 20—Power Reverser Transmission Operation
Group 20A—Fuel System Group 20A—Power Reverser Module 230
Group 20B—Air Intake System Group 20B—Gear Transmission
Group 20C—Cooling System
Group 20D—Cold Weather Starting Aids
SECTION 255—PowrQuad Transmission
Group 05—Operational Checkout
SECTION 240—Electrical System Group 10A—Troubleshooting PowrQuad 240
Group 05—General Transmission
Group 10—System Diagrams, ComfortGard and Group 10B—Troubleshooting Autoquad II
Low-Clearance Cabs Transmission
Group 10A—System Diagrams, 2-Post ROPS Group 15—Tests and Adjustments
Group 15—Sub-System Diagnostics, ComfortGard Group 20A—PowrQuad Transmission Operation 245
and Low Clearance Group 20B—Autoquad II Transmission Operation
Group 15A—Sub-System Diagnostics, 2-Post ROPS Group 20C—Creeper Transmission
Group 16A—Data-BUS-Systems –– Theory of Group 20D—Range Box
Operation
Group 16B—Data-BUS-Systems –– Diagnostics
Group 20—Adjustments SECTION 256—Drive Systems (Except
250
Group 25—Component Testing Transmission)
SECTION 245—Electronic Control Units Group 10—Troubleshooting
Group 05—Operation and General Diagnostic Group 15—Tests
Information Group 20A—Front Wheel Drive Clutch
Group 20B—Differential 251
Group BCU—BCU References
Group BIF—BIF References Group 20C—Final Drives
Group ECU—ECU References Group 20D—Rear PTO
Group HCU—HCU References Group 20E—Front PTO
Group PEC—PEC References
Group RCU—RCU References SECTION 260—Steering and Brakes 255
Group SFA—SFA References Group 05—Operational Checkout
Group 10—Troubleshooting
SECTION 250—SyncroPlus Transmission Group 15—Tests and Adjustments
Group 05—Operational Checkout Group 20A—Hydrostatic Steering
Group 10—Troubleshooting Group 20B—Hydraulic Brakes 256
Group 15—Tests and Adjustments
Group 20—SyncroPlus Transmission Operation Continued on next page
All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on

the latest information available at the time of publication. The right is
reserved to make changes at any time without notice. 260
COPYRIGHT  2001
DEERE & COMPANY
European Office Mannheim
All rights reserved
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION Manual
Previous Editions
Copyright  1999, 1998
TM4572 (01APR01) i 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1
Contents
210
SECTION 270—Hydraulic System
Group 05—Operational Checks
Group 10—System Diagnosis
Group 20—Hydraulic System
220
Group 20A—Charge Oil Pump
Group 20B—Hydraulic Pumps
Group 20C—Valves, Oil Cooler and Filter
Group 20D—Rockshaft
Group 20E—SCVs and Couplers
230 Group 20F—Independent Selective Control Valve
SECTION 280—Miscellaneous
Group 05—TLS Front Axle Operational Checkout
Group 10—TLS Front Axle Troubleshooting
Group 15—TLS Front Axle Tests and Adjustments
240
Group 20—TLS Front Axle Operation
SECTION 290—Cab
Group 05—Operational Checks
Group 10A—Air Conditioning — System Diagnosis
245 Group 10B—Ventilation and Heater — System
Diagnosis
Group 10C—Operator’s Seat — System Diagnosis
Group 20A—Air Conditioning System — Theory of
Operation
Group 20B—Ventilation and Heater — Theory of
250
Operation
SECTION 299—Special Tools (Dealer Fabricated)

Group 05—Special Tools (Dealer Fabricated)
251
255
256
260
TM4572 (01APR01) ii 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Contents
270
280
290
299
INDX
TM4572 (01APR01) iii 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=3
Contents
270
280
290
299
INDX
TM4572 (01APR01) iv 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=4
210
Section 210
Safety
Contents
Page
Group 05—Safety Measures

Recognize Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-1
Prevent Machine Runaway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-1
Handle Fluids Safely—Avoid Fires . . . . . . . . .210-05-1
Prevent Battery Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-2
Prepare for Emergencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-2
Prevent Acid Burns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-3
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-4
Service Cooling System Safely . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-4
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating . . . .210-05-5
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-5
Work In Ventilated Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-5
Wear Protective Clothing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-6
Practice Safe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-6
Park Machine Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-7
Use Proper Lifting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-7
Construct Dealer-Made Tools Safely . . . . . . . .210-05-7
Support Machine Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-8
Work in Clean Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-8
Illuminate Work Area Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-8
Service Machines Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-9
Use Proper Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-9
Service Tires Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-10
Service Front-Wheel Drive Tractor Safely . . .210-05-10
Avoid Eye Contact With Radar . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-11
Keep ROPS Installed Properly . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-11
Replace Safety Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-11
Dispose of Waste Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-12
Live With Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210-05-12
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1
Contents
210
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Group 05
Safety Measures
210
Recognize Safety Information 05
1
This is a safety-alert symbol. When you see this symbol

on your machine or in this manual, be alert to the
potential for personal injury.
–UN–07DEC88
Follow recommended precautions and safe operating
practices.
T81389
DX,ALERT –19–29SEP98–1/1
Prevent Machine Runaway
Avoid possible injury or death from machinery runaway.
Do not start engine by shorting across starter terminals.

Machine will start in gear if normal circuitry is bypassed.
–UN–11JAN89
NEVER start engine while standing on ground. Start
engine only from operator’s seat, with transmission in
neutral or park.
TS177
DX,BYPAS1 –19–29SEP98–1/1
Handle Fluids Safely—Avoid Fires
When you work around fuel, do not smoke or work near

heaters or other fire hazards.
Store flammable fluids away from fire hazards. Do not

incinerate or puncture pressurized containers.
–UN–23AUG88
Make sure machine is clean of trash, grease, and debris.
Do not store oily rags; they can ignite and burn
TS227
spontaneously.
DX,FLAME –19–29SEP98–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=7
Safety Measures
210
05 Prevent Battery Explosions
2
Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from

the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object

across the posts. Use a volt-meter or hydrometer.
–UN–23AUG88
Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm
battery to 16°C (60°F).
TS204
DX,SPARKS –19–03MAR93–1/1
Prepare for Emergencies
Be prepared if a fire starts.
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service,
–UN–23AUG88
hospital, and fire department near your telephone.
TS291
DX,FIRE2 –19–03MAR93–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=8
Safety Measures
210
Prevent Acid Burns 05
3
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong

enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause
blindness if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.

2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.

2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes. Get
medical attention immediately.
–UN–23AUG88
If acid is swallowed:
1. Do not induce vomiting.

2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not
TS203
exceed 2 L (2 quarts).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
DX,POISON –19–21APR93–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=9
Safety Measures
210
05 Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
4
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin

causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
–UN–23AUG88
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands
X9811
and body from high pressure fluids.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid

injected into the skin must be surgically removed within a
few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar with
this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable
medical source. Such information is available from Deere
& Company Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
DX,FLUID –19–03MAR93–1/1
Service Cooling System Safely
Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling

system can cause serious burns.
Shut off engine. Only remove filler cap when cool enough
to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to first stop
–UN–23AUG88
to relieve pressure before removing completely.
TS281
DX,RCAP –19–04JUN90–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=10
Safety Measures
210
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating 05
5
Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated

by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
–UN–23AUG88
Remove paint before heating:
• Remove paint a minimum of 76 mm (3 in.) from area to

be affected by heating.
TS220
• If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.
Wear an approved respirator.
• If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with
soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or
paint stripper containers and other flammable material
from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes
before welding or heating.
Do all work in an area that is ventilated to carry toxic

fumes and dust away.
Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
DX,PAINT –19–22OCT99–1/1
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines
Flammable spray can be generated by heating near

pressurized fluid lines, resulting in severe burns to
yourself and bystanders. Do not heat by welding,
soldering, or using a torch near pressurized fluid lines or
other flammable materials. Pressurized lines can be
–UN–15MAY90
accidentally cut when heat goes beyond the immediate
flame area.
TS953
DX,TORCH –19–03MAR93–1/1
Work In Ventilated Area
Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If it is

necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area, remove
the exhaust fumes from the area with an exhaust pipe
extension.
–UN–23AUG88
If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the

doors and get outside air into the area
TS220
DX,AIR –19–17FEB99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=11
Safety Measures
210
05 Wear Protective Clothing
6
Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment

appropriate to the job.
Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment

or loss of hearing.
–UN–23AUG88
Wear a suitable hearing protective device such as
earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or
uncomfortable loud noises.
TS206
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of
the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones
while operating machine.
DX,WEAR –19–10SEP90–1/1
Practice Safe Maintenance
Understand service procedure before doing work. Keep

area clean and dry.
Never lubricate, service, or adjust machine while it is

moving. Keep hands, feet , and clothing from
power-driven parts. Disengage all power and operate
controls to relieve pressure. Lower equipment to the
ground. Stop the engine. Remove the key. Allow machine
to cool.
Securely support any machine elements that must be

raised for service work.
Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed. Fix

damage immediately. Replace worn or broken parts.
Remove any buildup of grease, oil, or debris.
On self-propelled equipment, disconnect battery ground

cable (-) before making adjustments on electrical systems
–UN–23AUG88
or welding on machine.
On towed implements, disconnect wiring harnesses from

tractor before servicing electrical system components or
TS218
welding on machine.
DX,SERV –19–17FEB99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=12
Safety Measures
210
Park Machine Safely 05
7
Before working on the machine:
• Lower all equipment to the ground.

• Stop the engine and remove the key.
• Disconnect the battery ground strap.
–UN–24MAY89
• Hang a "DO NOT OPERATE" tag in operator station.
TS230
DX,PARK –19–04JUN90–1/1
Use Proper Lifting Equipment
Lifting heavy components incorrectly can cause severe

injury or machine damage.
Follow recommended procedure for removal and

installation of components in the manual.
–UN–23AUG88
TS226
DX,LIFT –19–04JUN90–1/1
Construct Dealer-Made Tools Safely
Faulty or broken tools can result in serious injury. When

constructing tools, use proper, quality materials, and good
workmanship.
–UN–01JUL97
Do not weld tools unless you have the proper equipment
and experience to perform the job.
LX1016749
DX,SAFE,TOOLS –19–10OCT97–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=13
Safety Measures
210
05 Support Machine Properly
8
Always lower the attachment or implement to the ground

before you work on the machine. If the work requires that
the machine or attachment be lifted, provide secure
support for them. If left in a raised position, hydraulically
supported devices can settle or leak down.
–UN–23AUG88
Do not support the machine on cinder blocks, hollow tiles,
or props that may crumble under continuous load. Do not
work under a machine that is supported solely by a jack.
TS229
Follow recommended procedures in this manual.
When implements or attachments are used with a

machine, always follow safety precautions listed in the
implement or attachment operator’s manual.
DX,LOWER –19–24FEB00–1/1
Work in Clean Area
Before starting a job:
• Clean work area and machine.

• Make sure you have all necessary tools to do your job.
–UN–18OCT88
• Have the right parts on hand.
• Read all instructions thoroughly; do not attempt
shortcuts.
T6642EJ
DX,CLEAN –19–04JUN90–1/1
Illuminate Work Area Safely
Illuminate your work area adequately but safely. Use a

portable safety light for working inside or under the
machine. Make sure the bulb is enclosed by a wire cage.
The hot filament of an accidentally broken bulb can ignite
spilled fuel or oil.
–UN–23AUG88
TS223
DX,LIGHT –19–04JUN90–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=14
Safety Measures
210
Service Machines Safely 05
9
Tie long hair behind your head. Do not wear a necktie,

scarf, loose clothing, or necklace when you work near
machine tools or moving parts. If these items were to get
caught, severe injury could result.
–UN–23AUG88
Remove rings and other jewelry to prevent electrical
shorts and entanglement in moving parts.
TS228
DX,LOOSE –19–04JUN90–1/1
Use Proper Tools
Use tools appropriate to the work. Makeshift tools and

procedures can create safety hazards.
Use power tools only to loosen threaded parts and

fasteners.
–UN–08NOV89
For loosening and tightening hardware, use the correct
size tools. DO NOT use U.S. measurement tools on
metric fasteners. Avoid bodily injury caused by slipping
TS779
wrenches.
Use only service parts meeting John Deere specifications.
DX,REPAIR –19–17FEB99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=15
Safety Measures
210
05 Service Tires Safely
10
Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause

serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the proper

equipment and experience to perform the job.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate

the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld or
heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause an
increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion.
Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension

hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety
cage if available.
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged

rims or missing lug bolts and nuts.
–UN–23AUG88
TS211
DX,RIM –19–24AUG90–1/1
Service Front-Wheel Drive Tractor Safely
When servicing front-wheel drive tractor with the rear

wheels supported off the ground and rotating wheels by
engine power, always support front wheels in a similar
manner. Loss of electrical power or transmission/
–UN–06AUG94
hydraulic system pressure will engage the front driving
wheels, pulling the rear wheels off the support if front
wheels are not raised. Under these conditions, front drive
wheels can engage even with switch in disengaged
position. L124515
LX,MFWD2 –19–01MAY91–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=16
Safety Measures
210
Avoid Eye Contact With Radar 05
11
Radar ground speed sensor emits a very low intensity

microwave signal. It will not cause any ill effects during
normal use. Although intensity is low, DO NOT look
directly into face of sensor while in operation, to avoid any
possible eye damage.
–UN–23AUG88
TS266
RX,SAFTY,RADAR1 –19–21SEP92–1/1
Keep ROPS Installed Properly
Make certain all parts are reinstalled correctly if the

roll-over protective structure (ROPS) is loosened or
removed for any reason. Tighten mounting bolts to proper
torque.
–UN–23AUG88
The protection offered by ROPS will be impaired if ROPS
is subjected to structural damage, is involved in an
overturn incident, or is in any way altered by welding,
bending, drilling, or cutting. A damaged ROPS should be
TS212
replaced, not reused.
DX,ROPS3 –19–03MAR93–1/1
Replace Safety Signs
Replace missing or damaged safety signs. See the

machine operator’s manual for correct safety sign
placement.
–UN–23AUG88
TS201
DX,SIGNS1 –19–04JUN90–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=17
Safety Measures
210
05 Dispose of Waste Properly
12
Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the

environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used
with John Deere equipment include such items as oil, fuel,
coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.
–UN–26NOV90
Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use
food or beverage containers that may mislead someone
into drinking from them.
TS1133
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into
any water source.
Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air can

damage the Earth’s atmosphere. Government regulations
may require a certified air conditioning service center to
recover and recycle used air conditioning refrigerants.
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste

from your local environmental or recycling center, or from
your John Deere dealer.
DX,DRAIN –19–03MAR93–1/1
Live With Safety
Before returning machine to customer, make sure

machine is functioning properly, especially the safety
systems. Install all guards and shields.
–19–07OCT88
TS231
DX,LIVE –19–25SEP92–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-12 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=18
Section 220
Engine
Contents 220
Page
Group 10—Tests
Preliminary Engine Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220-10-1
Dynamometer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220-10-2
TM4572 (01APR01) 220-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1
Contents
220
TM4572 (01APR01) 220-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Group 10
Tests
Preliminary Engine Tests
any water to seep out. A few drops could be due to

CAUTION: Always shut off the engine before
condensation, but any more than this would indicate
connecting test equipment to the tractor.
problems which require engine repairs rather than just
220
a tune-up. 10
Always engage the parking lock when
1
performing tests with the engine running.
With engine stopped, inspect engine coolant for an oil
film. With engine running, inspect coolant for air
When testing is performed with the engine
bubbles. Either condition would indicate problems
running there is a risk of injury from moving
which require engine repairs rather than just a tune-up.
parts.
Perform a dynamometer test as instructed below.
Before tuning a tractor engine, determine whether a
Repeat dynamometer test after tune-up so that
tune-up will restore operating efficiency. When there is
horsepower before and after tune-up can be
doubt, the following preliminary tests will help to
compared.
determine whether the engine can be tuned up.
Perform the following tests:
Measure compression as described in the Technical
Manual “Engines”.
After engine has been stopped for several hours,
carefully loosen crankcase drain plug and watch for
LX,22010 006443 –19–01JUL99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 220-10-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=21
Tests
Dynamometer Test
If possible, test the engine on a dynamometer before it is

tuned.
220
10 This test indicates whether a tune-up can restore the
2 engine or whether an overhaul is needed.
Good engine performance depends to a great extent on

the following:
• an adequate supply of clean air and fuel

• good compression
• proper valve and injection pump timing for good
combustion
• proper air and fuel temperatures
Perform dynamometer test as follows:
1. Connect the dynamometer to tractor PTO as described

in the manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Run engine at half load until coolant and engine oil

have reached normal operating temperature.
3. Run engine at fast idle speed1.
4. Gradually increase engine load until engine speed

drops to rated speed1.
5. Read the horsepower on dynamometer.
Compare reading with relevant PTO specifications.
1
See relevant Technical Manual “Repair” for engine speeds and
specifications
LX,22010 006445 –19–01APR94–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 220-10-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=22
Section 230
Fuel, Air Intake and Cooling Systems
Contents
Page Page
Group 10—System Diagnosis Electrical Starting Aid Operation . . . . . . . . . 230-20D-1

Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-10-1 Fuel Preheater - Theory of Operation . . . . . 230-20D-2 230
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-10-2 Coolant Preheater Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . 230-20D-2
Transmission Oil Preheater Operation. . . . . 230-20D-2
Explanation of Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-1
Safety Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-1
Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-4
Testing the Air Intake System . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-5
Testing the Low-Pressure Switch in Air Intake
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-6
Testing Cooling System for Leaks . . . . . . . . . .230-15-6
Checking Expansion Tank Cap . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-7
Test Thermostat Opening Temperature. . . . . .230-15-8
Checking the Viscous Fan Drive . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-9
Checking the Fuel Transfer Pump . . . . . . . . .230-15-10
Testing, Calibrating and Adjusting the
Engine Control Unit (ECU). . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-10
General Information on Diagnostics. . . . . . . .230-15-11
Diagnostics Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-11
ECU Tests and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-12
Service Code List (ECU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-13
Electronic Control Unit Identification
Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-16
Adjust Hand Throttle Lever and
Accelerator Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230-15-19
Group 20A—Fuel System

General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230-20A-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230-20A-1
Fuel Transfer Pump - Theory of
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230-20A-2
Group 20B—Air Intake System

Air Cleaner - Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . 230-20B-1
Group 20C—Cooling System

General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230-20C-1
Description of Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230-20C-1
Viscous Fan Drive - Theory of Operation . . 230-20C-2
Automatic Drive Belt Tensioner - Theory of
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230-20C-3
Group 20D—Cold Weather Starting Aids

General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230-20D-1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-1 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=1
Contents
230
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Group 10
System Diagnosis
Fuel System
Symptom Problem Solution
Fuel pump not working or Power supply interrupted Checking the Fuel Transfer Pump,
performing poorly see Group 15.
Insufficient fuel being transferred
(or none at all)
Screen plugged Clean the screen

230
Defective motor Change the fuel pump 10
1
Defective pump gear Change the fuel pump
Defective or kinked lines Change the lines
Lines incorrectly connected See Group 20A
Fuel filter contaminated Change the fuel filter, see the

operator’s manual
Fuel tank not venting properly Change the tank cap
Injection pump not working or Mechanical or electrical defect See the engine Technical Manual
performing poorly
Defective injection pump shut-off Check the shut-off valve, see

valve Section 240, Group 25.
Engine speed problem Speed control linkage improperly Check and adjust the speed control
adjusted Defective or stiff linkage, see Group 15
components
Injection pump problem See the engine Technical Manual
Engine cannot be shut off Defective injection pump shut-off Check the shut-off valve, see
valve Section 240, Group 25
LX23020 016826 –19–08FEB99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-10-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=25
System Diagnosis
Cooling System
Engine overheats Broken drive belt Change the drive belt, see the
Repair TM, Section 30, Group 20
Loose drive belt Defective belt tensioner, see the

Repair TM, Section 30, Group 20
230 Outside of radiator or condenser is Clean

10 dirty
2
Low coolant level Fill, see the operator’s manual
Low engine oil level Fill, see the operator’s manual
Defective cylinder head gasket See the engine Technical Manual
Faulty injection timing See the engine Technical Manual
Defective thermostat See the engine Technical Manual
Defective expansion tank cap Check, see Group 15
Defective water pump See the engine Technical Manual
Coolant lines blocked or See the engine Technical Manual

contaminated
Defective viscous fan drive Check, see Group 15
Low coolant level in system Inadequate maintenance Fill, see the operator’s manual
Damaged radiator Check the radiator, see Group 15
Defective expansion tank cap Check, see Group 15
Failed water pump gasket See the engine Technical Manual
Leaks Repair leaks
Defective cylinder head gasket See the engine Technical Manual
LX23010 015353 –19–08FEB98–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-10-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=26
Group 15
Tests and Adjustments
Explanation of Tests
The applicable test should be performed if a

CAUTION: Always follow the safety
component does not operate or operates poorly, or if a
measures outlined in this group when
component has been repaired.
performing tests on the fuel, air intake and
cooling systems.
In any case, follow the test sequence and use the
applicable test data.
The following tests are used to examine and adjust
individual engine components.
230
15
AG,OUOE003,9006 –19–11JUN99–1/1 1
Safety Measures
before disconnecting any lines from the

CAUTION: Shut off the engine before
system. Before restoring system pressure
checking any components located near
make sure that all connections are tight and
moving parts.
all lines are secure.

CAUTION: To avoid the possibility of severe
infection, seek medical assistance
immediately if injured by exposure to fuel
CAUTION: Always engage the parking lock under pressure.
when performing tests with the engine
running.
CAUTION: When testing is performed with
the engine running there is a risk of injury
CAUTION: Escaping fuel under pressure can from moving parts.
penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure
AG,OUOE003,9007 –19–01AUG00–1/1
Special or Essential Tools
NOTE: Order tools according to information given in the

U.S. SERVICEGARD Catalog or in the
European Microfiche Tool Catalog (MTC).
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company. Continued on next page AG,OUOE003,9008 –19–11JUN99–1/9
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=27
Pressure gauge kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10002
Measuring air pressure in intake system
–UN–13MAY96
FKM10002
230
15
2 AG,OUOE003,9008 –19–11JUN99–2/9
FKM10242 –UN–25JUL94
Pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10242
Measuring air pressure in intake system
AG,OUOE003,9008 –19–11JUN99–3/9
Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D05104ST
Checking the cooling system for leaks
–UN–09DEC96
D05104ST
AG,OUOE003,9008 –19–11JUN99–4/9
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JDG839
Checking the cooling system for leaks

–UN–09DEC96
D05104ST
Continued on next page AG,OUOE003,9008 –19–11JUN99–5/9
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=28
Hand-held digital tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05719
Checking the viscous fan drive
–UN–23MAR98
JT05719
230
15
AG,OUOE003,9008 –19–11JUN99–6/9 3
Performance monitor1 . . . . . . . . . . RE39569 or RE60389
Calibration and testing of electronic control devices.
–UN–10AUG94
RE39569
1
Available through normal parts channels
AG,OUOE003,9008 –19–11JUN99–7/9
Test line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JDG810
Calibration and testing of electronic control devices (with

the RE39569/RE60389 performance monitor)
–UN–17OCT95
JDG810
AG,OUOE003,9008 –19–11JUN99–8/9
Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05791A
Testing electrical circuits and components.

–UN–08JUN99
JT05791
AG,OUOE003,9008 –19–11JUN99–9/9
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=29
Specifications
Item Measurement Specification
Cooling system
Test pressure Pressure 50 to 60 kPa (0.5 to 0.6 bar; 7 to 8.7

psi)
Expansion tank cap—Pressure at High pressure 70 to 90 kPa (0.7 to 0.9 bar; 10 to

230 which high-pressure valve opens 13 psi)
15
4
Expansion tank cap—Pressure at Low pressure 10 kPa (0.1 bar; 1.5 psi)
which low-pressure valve opens
Air intake system
Test pressure Low pressure 1.5 kPa (0.15 bar; 0.22 psi)
Low-pressure switch in air intake Low pressure 5.6 to 6.4 kPa (0.56 to 0.64 bar; 0.81
to 0.93 psi)
Fuel transfer pump Operating pressure 15 kPa (0.15 bar; 2.18 psi)
Flow rate at operating pressure Volume 110 litres per hour (29 US.gal. per
hour)
AG,OUOE003,9009 –19–11JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=30
Testing the Air Intake System
NOTE: After engine has been adjusted or repaired,

always check air intake system and low-pressure
switch.
–UN–31OCT97
1. Clean air cleaner.
2. Remove heating element (if equipped). Connect
LX1018508
pressure gauge (A) as shown in the illustration.
230
3. Run engine until it reaches operating temperature. 15
5
4. Run engine at fast idle speed. A—Pressure gauge FKM10242

B—Adapter FKM103031
C—Connector JT054951
The low pressure shown on the gauge should be approx. D—Pressure hose FKM102091
1.5 kPa (0.15 bar; 0.22 psi), but never exceed 6.4 kPa E—Adapter FKM103021
(0.64 bar; 0.93 psi).
If this pressure is exceeded, there is a restriction in the air

intake system. Determine the cause, and remedy it.
1
Included in pressure gauge kit FKM10002
AG,OUOE003,9010 –19–11JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=31
Testing the Low-Pressure Switch in Air

Intake System
1. Perform the same preparations as described under

“Testing the Air Intake System”.
–UN–10DEC97
2. Run engine at fast idle speed.
3. Partly cover air cleaner intake (A) with a piece of
LX1018509
cardboard (B). Gradually increase the restriction.
230
15
4. Measure the low pressure when the warning light starts
6
glowing.
Low-pressure switch (C) should close at a low pressure of

5.6 to 6.4 kPa (0.56 to 0.64 bar; 0.81 to 0.93 psi). If it
does not, the switch must be replaced.
AG,OUOE003,9011 –19–11JUN99–1/1
Testing Cooling System for Leaks
1. Check radiator, expansion tank, coolant hoses, coolant

pump and engine for leaks and other damage, and
repair when necessary.
2. Clean exterior of radiator and straighten any bent fins.
AG,OUOE003,9012 –19–11JUN99–1/2
3. As shown in the illustration, connect pump D05104ST

and adapter JDG839 or a commercial radiator tester
(A) to the expansion tank (B).
4. Check the cooling system at a pressure of 50 to 60

kPa (0.5 to 0.6 bar; 7 to 8.7 psi).
–UN–28MAR96
NOTE: Radiator repairs should be carried out only by

experienced mechanics or in specialist
workshops.
LX014031
AG,OUOE003,9012 –19–11JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=32
Checking Expansion Tank Cap
1. Check rubber seal on cap for cracks and brittleness.

The sealing ring must be soft and seated securely.
AG,OUOE003,9013 –19–11JUN99–1/2
2. Remove expansion tank cap (A) and test it with pump

D05104ST and adapter JDG839 or with a commercial
radiator and pressure cap tester (B).
230
15
Pressure at which high-pressure valve opens
7
–UN–28MAR96
• High pressure: 70 to 90 kPa (0.7 to 0.9 bar; 10 to 13
psi)
Pressure at which low-pressure valve opens
LX014033
• Low pressure: 10 kPa (0.1 bar; 14.5 psi)
AG,OUOE003,9013 –19–11JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=33
Test Thermostat Opening Temperature
1. Remove thermostats.
2. Visually inspect thermostats for corrosion or damage.

Replace thermostats as a matched set as necessary.
CAUTION: DO NOT allow thermostat or

thermometer to rest against the side or bottom
of container when heating water. Either may
230
15 rupture if overheated.
8
3. Suspend thermostats and thermometer in a container
of water.
–UN–23NOV97
4. Stir the water as it heats. Observe opening action of
thermostat and compare temperatures with
specification given in chart below.
RG5971
NOTE: Due to varying tolerances of different suppliers,
initial opening and full open temperatures may
vary slightly from specified temperatures.
THERMOSTAT TEST SPECIFICATION

Rating Initial Opening (Range) Full Open
(Nominal)
82°C (180°F) 80-84°C (175-182°F) 94°C (202°F)
5. Remove thermostat from container and observe closing

action as thermostat cools. Thermostat should close
completely in ambient air. Closing action should be
smooth and slow.
6. Replace both thermostats if any one thermostat is

defective.
RX8000,THERMO –19–12DEC96–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=34
Checking the Viscous Fan Drive
This check requires the engine to be cold and under zero

load.
–UN–24MAR98
1. Remove the side panel and apply reflective tape
JT057091 to the fan.
2. Start the engine and run it at 2000 rpm for 3 minutes.
LX1019214
During this time, fan speed should increase and drop
again (the change can be heard). 230
15
9
3. Set engine speed to between 850 and 900 rpm (slow
idle).
Measure fan speed using hand-held digital tachometer

JT05719: fan speed should be at least 800 rpm, but a
drop to 600 rpm for approx. 30 seconds is permissible.
4. Set engine speed to 1200 rpm and let it run at this

speed or 4 minutes.
Fan speed should not drop below 1000 rpm.
5. Set engine speed to 1800 rpm and let it run at this

speed or 4 minutes.
Fan speed should not drop below 1000 rpm here

either.
1
Included in hand-held digital tachometer JT05719
AG,OUOE003,9014 –19–11JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=35
Checking the Fuel Transfer Pump
1. Take off the filler cap turn the key switch one If the pump is running but no fuel emerges:
position to the right (to “ON”). With the key in this
position, it should be possible to hear the fuel • Check if lines are crossed, pinched or blocked.
transfer pump running. • Check if pump is located properly in the tank.
• Check if the pump is blocked.
If you cannot hear the pump running: • Check if the pump gear is OK.
• If fuel is not being transfered properly:
• Check the electrical circuit (Cab Tractors: SE01 / • Check if the tank is venting properly (filler cap).
230 2-Post ROPS: SE02.
15 • Replace the pump (its motor is defective).
10
2. Open the vent screw on the fuel filter, and repeat

the check.
AG,OUOE003,9015 –19–08FEB99–1/1
Testing, Calibrating and Adjusting the Engine Control Unit (ECU)
Tractors with AutoQuad transmission The diagnostics program is started by placing a fuse in
fuse box 1.
The ECU adjusts engine fuel injection volumes on
AutoQuad transmission-equipped tractors; it contains The desired information is called up by accessing a
an integrated diagnostics program. diagnostics address. The table shown summarizes the
various addresses that can be accessed.
Among other functions, the diagnostic program is used
for troubleshooting. It can provide error messages, part Tests and adjustments are performed directly on the
number, model number and software version tractor using the digital display or the
information. RE39569/RE60389 performance monitor. All displays
show the same information, only the locations of the
Also there is a calibration sequence that can be used values shown differ.
to calibrate engine speed settings.
Calibrations should be performed if one or more

engine speed control components have been replaced
or readjusted, and in case of improper operation.
Diagnostics Designation Description - Information Displayed

Address
01 Error messages (Service Codes) Service Codes are displayed, see the Service Code list.
20 Calibration sequence Entry into calibration sequence.
72 to 91 Identification Part number, software version, serial number and model

number are displayed.
AG,OUOE003,9016 –19–11JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=36
General Information on Diagnostics
For functions that are the same on all electronic control

units, see the following:
“General Explanation of Testing on Electronic Control

Units”, Section 245, Group 05.
“Safety Measures”, Section 245, Group 05.
“Diagnosis with the Performance Monitor”, Section 245, 230

Group 05. 15
11
“Diagnosis with the Digital Display”, Section 245,

Group 05.
“Abbreviations Used on the Display”, Section 245,

Group 05.
“Entering Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05.
“Calling Up and Deleting Service Codes”, Section 245,

Group 05.
“Electronic Control Unit Identification Addresses”,

Section 245, Group 05.
AG,LX24888,291 –19–22MAR00–1/1
Diagnostics Program
ADDRESSES 01, 20 and 72 to 91 Before starting to troubleshoot, make sure the

following points are in order:
The diagnostics program can be used for
troubleshooting. 1. Is the power supply working? See “Checking
Electrical Circuit” section 240, group 15.
• Error messages can be queried at address 01. 2. Is the fuel system OK?
• Calibration can be performed at address 20. 3. Is the engine performing properly?
• Part number and software version information can
be obtained at addresses 72-91
LXECU 015502 –19–01MAY00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=37
ECU Tests and Calibration
Calibration mode
Calibration (Address 20) should be performed if one or more engine speed control components have been replaced
or readjusted, and in case of improper operation.
IMPORTANT: Prior to calibration the accelerator pedal and lever linkage must be correctly adjusted. See
the end of this group!
230
15
12 – – –1/1
1 Entering calibration Digital display: OK: Go to 2

mode Address 20
Move the turn signal lever up (right turn signal position) until the display shows: NOT OK: Was the fuse
inserted before starting
20 CAL the engine? The display
then changes to: 20:Err
Performance monitor: ECU Error.
Press the “2” Button (Up) until the display shows:
20 CAL
– – –1/1
2 Establishing Range of NOTE: Move hand throttle lever to low idle. OK: 20:End
Movement
Digital display: Confirm by switching the hazard warning light switch on and off. Go to 3
Performance monitor: Press the “Clear” button. NOT OK: Display: Err
NOTE: The display then alternates every 2—3 seconds. Range of movement
error. Repeat calibration
Display: LO or recall Service Code.
Move hand throttle lever to low idle.
Display: HI
Move hand throttle to high idle.
Display: LO
Move hand throttle lever to low idle.
DISPLAY: Ent
Digital display: Confirm by switching the hazard warning light switch on and off.
Performance monitor: Press the “Clear” button.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-12 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=38
3 End of Calibration Once calibration has been completed, remove the fuse from fuse box location F115 to OK: Calibration ended
store the calibration data in the unit.
Turn off the key switch to store the new calibration data.
Disconnect the performance monitor.

– – –1/1
4 Identification See “Enter Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. OK: After identification,
Addresses remove the fuse from
(Addresses 72 to 91) Display: 00:ECU or 00 ECU location F115.
230
Use the identification address list to determine the address of the required data. Turn the key switch OFF.
15
13
Performance monitor: Disconnect the
performance monitor.
Keep pressing key "2" until the desired address appears.
Digital display:
Move the turn signal lever up (right turn signal position) until the desired address
appears.
– – –1/1
Service Code List (ECU)
If a voltage or a sensor or potentiometer signal is not

in the valid range, the ECU will generate and store a
service code.
When the error is identified, check the applicable

components and replace as needed.
All ECU leads have a wire number beginning with 3

(section 23). Always check the power supply lead 622
and ground lead 050.
Continued on next page LXECUNA015348 –19–01MAR00–1/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-13 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=39
IMPORTANT: Do not use a test lamp when devices. Only use a multimeter
working with electronic control (JT05791A).
Service Fault Explanation Cause Solution

Codes
000 No service codes stored None necessary
011 Accelerator pedal potentiometer Check potentiometer (B57), lead 359 (contact 40)
ECU input voltage over 4.5 V Leads 343/364 (contact 37)
Lead 381/361 (contact 36)
012 Accelerator pedal potentiometer Check potentiometer (B57), lead 359 (contact 40)
230 ECU input voltage under 0.5 V Leads 343/364 (contact 37)
15 Leads 381/361 (contact 36)
14 013 Speed control potentiometer Check potentiometer (A19), lead 345 (contact 39)
Input voltage over 4.75 V Leads 364/374 (contact 37)
Leads 371/361 (contact 36)
014 Speed control potentiometer Check potentiometer (A19), lead 345 (contact 39)
Input voltage under 0.25 V Leads 364/374 (contact 37)
Leads 371/361 (contact 36)
018 Coolant temperature sensor for ECU Check sensor (B56; on cylinder head), lead 319 (contact 44)
ECU input voltage over 4.975 V Leads 371/361 (contact 36)
019 Coolant temperature sensor for ECU Check sensor (B56; on cylinder head), lead 319 (contact 44)
ECU input voltage under 0.05 V Leads 371/361 (contact 36)
021 Sensor supply voltage from ECU too high over 5 V Leads 364, 374, 343 (contact 37)
022 Sensor supply voltage from ECU too low under 5 V Leads 364/374/343 (contact 37)
Leads 361/381/371
039 Engine speed input signal fault Check engine speed sensor (B01), lead 325 (contact 45)
Lead 531 (BCU; contact 4)
041 Missing engine start signal Check leads for grounds/continuity: Check leads 308, 309
and diode V203
Check starter relay (K01), neutral start switch (B36), lead
506 (between B36 and K01) and lead 311 (between neutral
start switch and main (key) switch (S01)).
042 High idle speed too high; over 2800 rpm Check engine speed sensor, lead 355 (contact 28)
Grounded circuit or operator error
046 Engine start signal always high Check leads for conductor faults: Check leads 308, 309 and
diode V203
Check starter relay (K01), neutral start switch (B36), lead
506 (between B36 and K01) and lead 311 (between neutral
start switch and main (key) switch (S01)).
055 Service Code is not relevant to the ECU 1. Service code appears on its own—Service code has no
effect—Clear the service code
2. Service code does not appear on its own—Rectify all
other faults and clear the service codes
064 Failed hand throttle calibration Adjust accelerator pedal and calibrate throttle.
Calibration process started but not finished
Mechanical fault
065 Hand throttle calibration value error Calibrate throttle. Check pedal potentiometer. Lead 359
(contact 40)
Continued on next page LXECUNA015348 –19–01MAR00–2/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-14 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=40
Service Fault Explanation Cause Solution

Codes
081 Internal failure (ECU) If the service code appears on its own, the ECU must be
replaced
082 Internal failure (ECU) If the service code appears on its own, the ECU must be
replaced
083 Injection pump - Unstable current regulation for actuator Check actuator magnets, leads 354, 355 (cont. 27, 28)
magnet (speed variations)
084 Injection pump - Actuator magnet current regulation cannot Check actuator magnets, leads 354, 355 (cont. 27, 28)
be controlled (speed variations)
085 Excessive actuator magnet current regulation when engine is Check actuator magnets, leads 354, 355 (cont. 27, 28) 230
steady 15
091 CAN-BUS information (travel speed) from BIF is faulty or Check speed unit (km/h or mph). 15
non-existent. BIF and BCU must be the same (address 24).
Possible cause: Correct tire type entered? (for tractors with 50 km/h;
1.Index radius wrongly registered in BIF 31.1 mph), see "Address BCU 56 and 57", section 240,
2.The wrong BIF is being used group 20 und see "Address BIF 56 and 57", section 240,
Parts nos. AL114034 or AL114035 must be installed. group 20.
-Check BIF and BCU are at the same settings (specific
index radius)
(addresses 56/57 at BIF and BCU).
-BIF: Check that BIF/CAN-BUS is activated. See section
240, group 20 (address 66/67).
-Check BIF part number. See section 245, group 05,
addresses 80 and 81 (identification addresses).
092 Travel speed signal (input) from BCU to ECU is not identical Check lead 501 for continuity, grounded circuit and short
with the signal from the CAN-BUS to the ECU, or is circuit (between ECU and BIF).
non-existent. Check that correct number of teeth in transmission has been
Broken cable or loose wiring entered at BCU. See section 240, group 20.
NOTE: Sensor OK. See section 240, group 20 for check. (Calibration addresses of BCU/BIF: 58 and 59)
093 Internal miscalculation (appears with service code 091 and/or Clear service codes 91 and/or 92
092)
Excessive difference between the two CAN-BUS and
frequency input signals.
LXECUNA015348 –19–01MAR00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-15 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=41
Electronic Control Unit Identification Addresses
Unit Hardware and Software Information
The model, part, serial and software version numbers

can be stored for recall in unit addresses 72 to 91. The
numbers can have up to six digits. Since only three
digits can be displayed at a time, each number is
divided and shown using two addresses. For example,
addresses 80 and 81 contain the unit part number.
230 The RE71622 unit is shown as 71 at address 80 and
15 as 622 at address 81. X stands for a displayed digit.
16
LXECU 015352 –19–01MAR00–1/4
Tractor model ECU Part Number

6310 RE71622
RE502734a
RE503143b
6410 RE71623
RE502735a
RE503144b
RE504868c
6510 RE71624
RE502736a
RE503145b
6610 RE71625
RE502737a
RE503146b
RE504870c
6810 RE71626
RE502738a
RE503147b
RE504872c
a
Japan only (35 km/h top speed)
b
Tractors with 50 km/h top speed
c
Tractors with AutoPowr transmission
Continued on next page LXECU 015352 –19–01MAR00–2/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-16 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=42
Tractor model ECU Part Number

6910 RE71627d
RE502739e
RE503148f
RE502608g
RE503789h
RE503790i
RE504874c
6910S RE504875j
RE506634b
RE505635c
b
Tractors with 50 km/h top speed 230
c 15
Tractors with AutoPowr transmission
17
d
Tractors with 135 hp (99 kW)
e
Tractors with 135 hp (99 kW) and Japan (35 km/h top speed)
f
Tractors with 135 hp (99 kW) and tractors with 50 km/h top speed
g
Tractors with 140 hp (103 kW)
h
Tractors with 140 hp (103 kW) and Japan (35 km/h top speed)
i
Tractors with 140 hp (103 kW) and tractors with 50 km/h top speed
j
Tractors with 40 km/h top speed
Continued on next page LXECU 015352 –19–01MAR00–3/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-17 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=43
Address Information Displayed Display

72 Engine model number (6 digits) XXX
73 XXX
74 Engine serial number (6 digits) XXX
75 XXX
76 Injection pump model number (6 digits) XXX
77 XXX
78 Injection pump serial number (6 digits) XXX
79 XXX
80 ECU part number (6 digits) XXX
230 81 XXX
15 82 ECU serial number (6 digits) XXX
18 83 XXX
84 Software part number (6 digits) XXX
85 XXX
86 Software version number (6 digits) XXX
87 XXX
88 EOL parameter part number (6 digits) XXX
89 XXX
90 EOL parameter version number (6 digits) XXX
91 XXX
LXECU 015352 –19–01MAR00–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-18 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=44
Adjust Hand Throttle Lever and Accelerator

Pedal
Tractors with Cab
1. Remove the cable from the throttle lever (A).
2. Move the throttle lever to the low idle stop. Then move
the lever about 1 mm (0.0394 in.) toward the high idle
position.
230
15
IMPORTANT: To remove all play from the accelerator
19
pedal lever, the lever must reach
dimension “a” under its own weight, i.e.
do not force it.
3. Adjust the accelerator pedal lever (C) to provide a

dimension “a” of 92 mm (3.62 in.) between the floor
mat (D) and the lower edge of the accelerator pedal
lever at the bend (arrow).
–UN–20MAR98
4. Reinstall the cable making sure to maintain these
adjustments. Use the threads on the cable support (B)
to adjust the cable to the required length.
LX1019217
Lever (E) should not contact the cab frame tube. If the
cable has to be adjusted at the yoke or ball end, be
sure to maintain an adequate thread depth of at least 6
mm (0.236 in.).
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-19 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=45
Tractors without Cab
1. Remove the cable from the throttle lever (A).
2. Move the throttle lever to the low idle stop. Then move
the lever about 1 mm (0.0394 in.) toward the high idle
position.
IMPORTANT: To remove all play from the accelerator

pedal lever, the lever must reach
230 dimension “a” under its own weight, i.e.
15 do not force it.
20
3. Adjust the accelerator pedal lever (C) to provide a

dimension “a” of 107 mm (4.21 in.) between the floor
plate (D) and the lower edge of the accelerator pedal
lever (arrow).
4. Reinstall the cable making sure to maintain these

adjustments. Use the threads on the cable support (B)
–UN–16APR98
to adjust the cable to the required length.
Lever (E) should not contact the platform frame tube. If

the cable has to be adjusted at the yoke or ball end,
LX1020129
be sure to maintain an adequate thread depth of at
least 6 mm (0.236 in.).
AG,OUOE003,9026 –19–11JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-15-20 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=46
Group 20A
Fuel System
General Information
NOTE: Fuel injection pump and fuel injection nozzles

CAUTION: Do not smoke or permit live
are dealt with in the technical manual that
sparks or fire of any nature in the vicinity
covers engines.
while testing the fuel system.
230
20A
LX,23020A001196 –19–01MAY92–1/1 1
Description
–UN–28JUL94
LX001138
A—Fuel tank C—Fuel transfer pump E—Injection pump F—Injection nozzle

B—Fuel filter D—Fuel gauge sending unit
The fuel system consists of fuel tank (A), fuel gauge transfer pump and fed via the fuel filter to the injection
sending unit (D), fuel transfer pump (C) and fuel pump (E). Excess fuel passes from the injection pump
filter (B). Fuel is drawn from the fuel tank by the back to the tank along the return line.
LX,23020ANA0938 –19–01FEB93–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-20A-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=47
Fuel System
Fuel Transfer Pump - Theory of Operation
230
20A
2
–UN–28JUL94
LX000912
A—Fuel tank C—Electric motor D—Pump gear E—Screen
B—To fuel filter
The fuel transfer pump is located in the fuel tank (A). It The injection pump returns any excess fuel to the tank
is an electrically driven vane-type pump and consists via the return line.
of motor (C) and pump gear (D).
A screen (E) outside the inlet port prevents dirt from

entering the system.
LX,23020A000939 –19–01FEB93–1/1

111401
PN=48
Group 20B
Air Intake System
Air Cleaner - Theory of Operation
230
20B
1
–UN–28JUL94
LX002592
A—Air outlet C—Dust unloading valve E—Air inlet F—Low-pressure switch
B—Primary filter element D—Secondary (safety) filter
element
Under the influence of suction generated by the The secondary (safety) filter (D) prevents dirt from
engine, unfiltered air flows through air inlet tube (E) entering the engine when the primary filter is being
and is forced into a swirling motion by the curved serviced, and also ensures that should primary
passage. element (B) fail no unfiltered air is drawn into the
engine.
In this circular action around primary filter element (B),
centrifugal force separates most of the dirt and dust A low-pressure switch (F) located in the air outlet in
particles from the air and expels them via dust conjunction with a warning light indicates the current
unloading valve (C). service status (see Operator’s Manual).
The remaining dirt is removed as the air flows through NOTE: The turbocharger (if equipped) is dealt with in
primary filter element (B) and secondary (safety) filter the technical manual that covers engines.
(D) before being drawn into the engine at outlet tube
(A).
LX,23020B000979 –19–01FEB97–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-20B-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=49
Air Intake System
230
20B
2

111401
PN=50
Group 20C
Cooling System
General Information
NOTE: The thermostat and coolant pump are dealt with in

the technical manual that covers engines.
–UN–09DEC97
A—Radiator
B—Fan
C—Expansion tank
D—Coolant pump
E—Thermostat
LX1018510
230
20C
LX230AD 014168 –19–01NOV97–1/1 1
Description of Radiator
The engine radiator is of the conventional design with

cooling tubes through which the coolant passes, and
soldered, exterior fins.
–UN–06AUG94
The coolant in cooling tubes (A) is cooled by air (B) forced
through the radiator core by the fan blades. The cooling
surface of the tubes is greatly increased by means of fins
(C).
LX001133
A—Tubes
B—Air
C—Fins
LX,23020C001183 –19–03APR91–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-20C-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=51
Cooling System
Viscous Fan Drive - Theory of Operation
230
20C
2
A—Drive shaft E—Bimetallic coiled spring I—Groove L—Cap –UN–24AUG94

L119072
B—Fan carrier F—Driving clutch half J—Return channel M—Grooves
C—Studs (4 used) G—Grooves K—Reservoir
D—Driven clutch half H—Channels (operating
chamber)
The viscous fan drive is a temperature controlled Torque is transmitted by means of the inner friction
hydraulic fan clutch with speed control. It consists of between the fluid and the surface of the operating
driving clutch half (F) with drive shaft (A), driven clutch chamber. The operating chamber surface is enlarged
half (D) with reservoir (K) and fan carrier (B). The fan by means of grooves.
carrier is seated with bearings on drive shaft. The
channels (H) of both clutch halves form the operating
chamber. The system is filled with a silicone fluid.
Continued on next page LX,23020C001189 –19–03APR91–1/2

111401
PN=52
Cooling System
The amount of silicone fluid in viscous fan drive takes place, fluid being constantly forced back into the
exceeds the capacity of reservoir so that there is reservoir and at the same time fluid is flowing into the
always some fluid in the operating chamber. operating chamber.
Consequently, the driven clutch half turns even when
the radiator is cold, but at a slower speed than the Because of the high fan speed, the radiator
driving clutch half. temperature drops. The bimetallic spring coil contracts,
closing the reservoir cap and preventing further
As the radiator gets warm, bimetallic spring (E) silicone fluid from flowing to the operating chamber.
expands and opens reservoir cap (L). Centrifugal force Fluid continues to flow into the reservoir through
causes fluid to flow from the reservoir into the groove (I). The amount of fluid in the operating
operating chamber. The high friction of the fluid in the chamber decreases, reducing friction, and fan speed 230
operating chamber causes the speed of the driven slows. 20C
3
clutch half to increase until both halves are travelling at
approx. the same speed. Grooves (G and M) enable fluid to flow quicker out of
the operating chamber, enabling the viscous fan drive
Centrifugal force causes oil to be forced outwards to react more quickly to changes in the radiator
through groove (I) and, due to rotational speed, to be temperature.
carried via return channel (J) to the reservoir. A cycle
LX,23020C001189 –19–03APR91–2/2
Automatic Drive Belt Tensioner - Theory of

Operation
The drive belt is tensioned by means of idler roll (A),

which is itself held in place by a coil spring inside spring
dampener unit (B).
–UN–09DEC96
A—Idler roll
B—Spring dampener unit
C—Drive belt
LX013989
LX230AD 014169 –19–01NOV97–1/1

111401
PN=53
Cooling System
230
20C
4

111401
PN=54
Group 20D
Cold Weather Starting Aids
General Information
Since the engine depends on heat in the combustion transmission oil are preheated and starting in cold
chamber to ignite the fuel, starting the engine in cold weather is improved.
weather may be a problem.
By means of the cold weather starting aids the fuel,

the air drawn into the engine, the coolant and/or the
230
20D
LX,23020DNA1177 –19–01FEB97–1/1 1
Electrical Starting Aid Operation
The electrical heating element (A) prewarms intake air

during engine starts.
The heating element is installed in the air intake manifold
–UN–31OCT97
(B).
The heating element is rated for 1200 watts at 12 volts.
LX1018511
A—Heating Element
B—Air Intake Manifold
LX23020 016831 –19–01FEB98–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 230-20D-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=55
Fuel Preheater - Theory of Operation
An electrical heating element (B) is installed inside fuel

filter housing (A). The heating element prevents paraffin
wax from separating from the fuel.
If fuel temperature drops below 5°C (40°F), a thermal

switch turns the heating element on automatically.
A—Fuel filter housing

230 B—Heating element
20D
2
–UN–28JUL94
LX001130
LX,23020D001179 –19–01FEB97–1/1
Coolant Preheater Operation
To improve starting and to reduce warm-up time an

electrical element (A) is used to heat the engine coolant.
Coolant temperature is increased to about 50°C (120°F)
–UN–31OCT97
above ambient. The heating element is rated for 1000
watts at 110 volts.
LX1018512
LX23020 016832 –19–01FEB98–1/1
Transmission Oil Preheater Operation

–UN–05DEC96
LX1015992
Continued on next page LX23020 016833 –19–01FEB98–1/2

111401
PN=56
The charge pump (A) has a heating element (B) which

warms the transmission oil by heating the housing.
The clutch housing (C) has a heating element1 (D) which

warms the transmission oil by heating the housing. (The
cover has been removed for clarity in the photograph.)
–UN–05DEC96
The heating element is rated for 200 watts at 110 volts.
LX1015993
230
20D
3
1
Not on SyncroPlus transmission
LX23020 016833 –19–01FEB98–2/2

111401
PN=57
230
20D
4

111401
PN=58
Section 240
Electrical System
Contents
Page Page
Group 05—General 3-Pin Socket Wiring Harness (W30;

Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-1 AL114896) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-116
Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-2 Wiring Harness for Electronic Control Units
Troubleshooting on Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-3 (W34; AL150234). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-118
Procedure for Testing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-4 Wiring Harness for Stepper Motor Drivers
Battery Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-4 (W35; AL114802). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-130
Check Battery Electrolyte Level and Turn Signal Lever Wiring Harness (W5; 240
Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-5 AL77212) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-142
Starting with a Booster Battery . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-6 Windshield Wiper Switch Wiring Harness
Component Identification Table . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-6 without Intermittent Wipe (W6;
How to Read a Functional Schematic . . . . . . .240-05-9 AL112539) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-146
How to Read a Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . .240-05-10 Windshield Wiper Switch Wiring Harness
Wire Numbers and Color Codes . . . . . . . . . .240-05-11 with Intermittent Wipe (W6;
Symbols in Functional Schematic, Wiring and AL112652) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-150
Harness Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-12 Cab Roof Wiring Harness (W11; AL
Electrical System Visual Check . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-14 150707) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-154
Electrical Circuit Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-15 W56 — Wiring Harness — Turn Signal Light
Types of Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-15 Adapter (AL119802). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-166
Seven Step Electrical Test Procedure . . . . . .240-05-19 Front Cab Roof Worklight Wiring Harness
(W18; AL83139). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-168
Group 10—System Diagrams, ComfortGard and W7 Windshield Wiper Wiring Harness
Low-Clearance Cabs (AL79007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-170
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-1 W10 Rear Window Wiper Wiring Harness
Functional Schematic and Wiring Harness (AL116544) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-172
Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-7 Rear Window Wiper Adapter Harness (W38;
Identification of Sections in Functional AL116548) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-176
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-14 Air Conditioning and Fan Wiring Harness
Wiring Harness Identification in Wiring (W8; AL110248). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-178
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-15 W13 Transmission Wiring Harness
Functional Schematic — Complete (AL152964) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-182
Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-16 Transmission Wiring Harness with
W3 — Wiring Harness— Engine Electrical Reverser Control (W20;
(AL150218) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-41 AL112509) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-190
Wiring Harness for Electrical Starting Aid W40 — Wiring Harness — Back-Up Alarm
(W27; AL119472). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-50 (AL117624) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-192
Front Corner Worklight Wiring Harness (W14; W41 — Wiring Harness — Back-Up Alarm
AL81307) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-54 —Switch for SynchroPlus Transmission
TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle Wiring Harness (AL114955) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-196
(W36; AL113493). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-56 W42 — Wiring Harness —Switch for
Front PTO Wiring Harness (W39; PowrQuad Transmission Back-Up Alarm
AL110126) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-58 (AL115426) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-198
Cab Wiring Harness (W4; AL151379) . . . . . .240-10-60 W21 — Wiring Harness — Shift Console
W53 — Wiring Harness — Turn Signal Light Light— in Low-Clearance Cab
(AL150846) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-110 (AL115043) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-200
7-Pin Socket Wiring Harness (W28;
AL150291) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-114 Continued on next page
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1
Contents
Page Page
W22 — Wiring Harness — Dome Light— SE3-Horn, Functional and Diagnostic

in Low-Clearance Cab (AL115041) . . . . .240-10-202 Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-15
W24 — Wiring Harness — Windshield SE4-Cigarette Lighter and Operator Seat,
Wiper— in Low-Clearance Cab Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . . .240-15-19
(AL115094) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-204 SE5-Front PTO, Functional and Diagnostic
W23 — Wiring Harness — Rear Window Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-23
Wiper— in Low-Clearance Cab SE6-Lighting Circuits, Functional and
(AL115038) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-208 Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-29
SE7-Work Lights, Functional and Diagnostic
Group 10A—System Diagrams, 2-Post ROPS Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-35
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-1 SE8-Front Loader Plug, Functional and
Component Designations on Functional Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-40
Schematics and Wiring Harnesses . . . . . 240-10A-5 SE9-Radio, Digital Clock, Dome and
240 Section Designations on Functional Console Lights, Functional and Diagnostic
Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-8 Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-43
Wiring Harness Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-8 SE10-Fan and Air Conditioner, Functional
Functional Schematic — Complete and Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-48
SE11-Windshield Wiper/Washer,
Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-9
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . . .240-15-53
W3 — Wiring Harness— Engine (AL
SE12-Rear Window Wiper and Washer,
117076) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-18
Wiring Harness for Electrical Starting Aid
S13-Beacon, Functional and Diagnostic
(W27; AL119472). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-24
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-64
Front Corner Worklight Wiring Harness (W14;
SE14-3- and 7-Pin Receptacles,
AL81307) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-28
Platform Wiring Harness (W4; AL117225)
SE15-Electronic Hitch Control, Functional
up to Serial Number 249394 . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-30
and Diagnostic Schematic (Cab) . . . . . . . .240-15-71
SE16A-Basic Control Unit - Braking
from Serial Number 249395. . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-56
System, Functional and Diagnostic
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-76
AL150291) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-82
SE16B-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn Signal Unit) . . . . . . . . . .240-15-81
AL114896) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-84
SE16C-Basic Control Unit - Differential
Front Part of Transmission Wiring Harness
Lock, Functional and Diagnostic
(W32; AL115344). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-86
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-88
Rear Part of Transmission Wiring Harness
SE16D-Basic Control Unit - Radar,
(W33; AL116810). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-90
W40 — Wiring Harness — Back-Up Alarm SE16E-Basic Control Unit - Rear PTO
(AL117624) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-94 without HMS, Functional and Diagnostic
W41 — Wiring Harness — Back-Up Alarm Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-95
—Switch for SynchroPlus Transmission SE16F-Basic Control Unit - Seat Indicator,
(AL114955) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-98 Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . .240-15-101
W42 — Wiring Harness —Switch for SE16G-Basic Control Unit - Front Wheel
PowrQuad Transmission Back-Up Alarm Drive without HMS, Functional and Diagnostic
(AL115426) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10A-100 Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-103
SE16H-Basic Control Unit - Power Supply
Group 15—Sub-System Diagnostics, ComfortGard and Tachometer Sender, Functional and Diagnostic
and Low Clearance Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-108
Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-1 SE16I-Basic Control Unit - Headland
SE1 Starter and Charging Circuits, Management System, Functional and Diagnostic
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . . . .240-15-3 Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-111
SE2-Basic Informator, Functional and
Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-9 Continued on next page
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Contents
Page Page
SE17-Signal Socket, Functional and SE16B-Front Wheel Drive, Functional and

Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-116 Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-61
SE18-Performance Monitor, Functional and SE16C-Differential Lock, Functional and
Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-118 Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-63
SE19-Electrical Reverser Control, SE25-Back-Up Alarm, Functional and
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . .240-15-121 Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-69
SE20-TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle,
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . .240-15-126 Group 16A—Data-BUS-Systems –– Theory of
SE21A-AutoQuad Transmission Shift, Operation
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . .240-15-130 Data BUS Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16A-1
SE21B-Electronic Controlled Independent CCD BUS System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16A-3
Control Valves (EICV), Functional and Diagnostic CAN Bus System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16A-6
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-135 CCD BUS Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . 240-16A-12
SE21C-EICV Stepper Motor Driver, CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . 240-16A-13 240
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . .240-15-137 DATA BUS Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16A-14
SE21D-Stepper Motor Driver for Autoquad
Transmission, Functional and Diagnostic Group 16B—Data-BUS-Systems –– Diagnostics
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-143 Explanation of Data Bus System Tests . . . . 240-16B-1
SE22-Bus Terminator and Terminating Safety Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-1
Resistor, Functional and Diagnostic Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-2
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-145 Malfunctions in the Data BUS System. . . . . 240-16B-3
SE23-Electronic Engine Control, Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-3
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . .240-15-147 CCD - Test for 2-Post ROPS tractors . . . . . 240-16B-4
SE25-Back-Up Alarm, Functional and Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-6
Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15-151 CCD - Test for cab tractors without RCU
and/or SFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-9
Group 15A—Sub-System Diagnostics, 2-Post ROPS Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-11
Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-1 CCD - Test for cab tractors equipped with
SE1-Starting Motor and Charging Circuit, RCU and/or SFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-16
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . . 240-15A-3 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-18
SE2-Basic Informator, Functional and 11-BIT CAN BUS Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-24
Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-8 Test Procedure (11-BIT CAN BUS) . . . . . . 240-16B-26
SE3-Horn, Functional and Diagnostic 29-BIT CAN BUS Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-32
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-13 Test Procedure (29-BIT CAN BUS) . . . . . . 240-16B-33
SE5-Rear PTO, Functional and Diagnostic Electronic Control Units Supply Circuit
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-17 072 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-39
SE6-Lights, Functional and Diagnostic Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-16B-39
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-23
SE7-Work Lights, Functional and Diagnostic Group 20—Adjustments
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-29 Explanation of BCU, Basic Informator
SE8-Front Loader Plug, Functional and (BIF) and Performance Monitor (PRF)
Diagnostic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-35 Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-1
SE14-3-Pin- and 7-Pin Receptacle, Safety Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-1
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic . . 240-15A-37 Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-2
SE15-Electronic Hitch Control, Functional General Information on the Basic Control Unit
and Diagnostic Schematic (2-Post (BCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-3
ROPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-43 BCU Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-5
SE16A-Hazard Flashers and Turn Signals, Diagnostic Structure (BCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-6
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic Service Code List (BCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-7
(up to Serial No. 249394). . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-49 Diagnostic Address List (BCU) . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-10
SE16A-Hazard Flashers and Turn Signals, Diagnostic Addresses (BCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-13
Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
(from Serial No. 249395) . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-55 Continued on next page
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=3
Contents
Page Page
BCU Address 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-13 BIF Address 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-93

BCU Address 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-17 Display Address List (BIF). . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-104
BCU address 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-21 Display Addresses (BIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-106
BCU Address 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-25 BIF address 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-106
Display Address List (BCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-45 BIF address 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-109
Display Addresses (BCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-46 BIF address 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-110
BCU address 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-46 BIF address 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-111
240 BCU address 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-46 BIF addresses 40 to 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-112
BCU addresses 40 to 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-47 BIF addresses 43 to 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-112
BCU addresses 43 to 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-47 BIF addresses 62 and 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-113
BCU addresses 62 and 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-48 BIF addresses 64 and 65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-113
BCU addresses 64 and 65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-48 Calibration (BIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-115
Calibration (BCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-50 Perform calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-115
Perform calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-50 Calibration Address List (BIF) . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-117
Calibration Address List (BCU) . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-52 Calibration Addresses (BIF) . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-120
Calibration Addresses (BCU). . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-55 BIF Address 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-120
Address BCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-55 BIF Address 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-120
BCU addresses 56 and 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-60 BIF Address 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-124
BCU addresses 92 and 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-64 BIF Addresses 56 and 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-126
BCU addresses 94 and 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-65 BIF Addresses 58 and 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-128
General Information Concerning the Basic BIF Addresses 60 and 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-128
Informator (BIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-67 BIF Addresses 66 and 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-129
Basic Informator (BIF) Addresses . . . . . . . . .240-20-68 BIF Addresses 68 and 69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-130
Diagnostic Structure (BIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-69 BIF Addresses 70 and 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-131
Service Code List (BIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-70 BIF Addresses 92 and 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-132
Diagnostic Address List (BIF) . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-73 BIF Addresses 94 and 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-133
Diagnostic Addresses (BIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-76 General Information about the Performance
BIF Address 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-76 Monitor (PRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-135
BIF Address 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-77 Performance Monitor (PRF) Addresses . . . .240-20-136
BIF Address 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-78 Diagnostic Structure (PRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-137
BIF Address 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-79 Calibration (PRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-138
BIF Address 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-83 Perform calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-138
BIF Address 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-89
BIF Address 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-91 Continued on next page
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=4
Contents
Page Page
Calibration Address List (PRF) . . . . . . . . . .240-20-139 Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-46

Calibration Addresses (PRF) . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-140 SE16E-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Rear
PRF address 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-140 PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-47
PRF address 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-140 Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-47
PRF address 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-140 SE16G-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front
PRF address 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-141 Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-49
PRF addresses 60 and 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-141 Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-49
PRF addresses 92 and 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-142 SE16H-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Power
PRF addresses 94 and 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-143 supply). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-50
Calibrating the Ground Speed Sensor Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-50
(Radar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-145 SE16I-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Headland
Setting Wheel Slip Back to Zero . . . . . . . . .240-20-146 Management System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-51
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-51
Group 25—Component Testing SE19-Electrical Reverser Control . . . . . . . . .240-25-53 240
Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-1 Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-53
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-2 SE20-TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle . . . . . . . .240-25-55
SE1-Starting Motor and Charging Circuit. . . . .240-25-5 Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-55
Starter Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-5 SE23-Engine Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-56
Alternator Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-7 Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-56
Battery Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-12
SE1 - Component Test Specifications . . . . . .240-25-15
SE2-Instrument Unit and Lighting . . . . . . . . .240-25-19
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-19
SE3-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-23
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-23
SE4-Cigarette Lighter and Operator Seat . . .240-25-25
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-25
SE5-Front PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-27
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-27
SE6-Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-29
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-29
SE7-Work Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-31
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-31
SE9-Radio, Dome and Shift Console
Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-33
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-33
SE10-Fan and Air Conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-35
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-35
SE11 and SE12-Windshield Wiper and
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-38
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-38
S13-Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-40
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-40
SE15-Electronic Hitch Control (HCU) . . . . . .240-25-41
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-41
SE16A-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Braking
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-43
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-43
Flasher and Turn Signal Unit) . . . . . . . . . .240-25-44
Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-44
SE16C-Basic Control Unit (BCU)
(Differential Lock). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-25-46
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-5 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=5
Contents
240
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=6
Group 05
General

SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company. AG,OUOE003,9027 –19–11JUN99–1/2
Battery load tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05832

240
Battery, checking on 05
1
–UN–10AUG94
JT05832
AG,OUOE003,9027 –19–11JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=61
General
Battery Operation
A battery is a device for converting chemical energy to machine is not used for a period of time, the batteries
electrical energy. It is not a storage tank for electricity, must be maintained or stored in a cool place.
but stores electrical energy in chemical form.
Wipe batteries with a damp cloth. If terminals are
Because of the constant chemical to electrical change corroded, use a stiff brush and wash with an ammonia
(self-discharge, discharge, or charge), the battery has solution. After washing, flush battery and compartment
a limited life. Proper care (cleaning, adding water, with clear water. Keep caps in place when cleaning
charging) will extend the life of the battery. and charging.
The battery is made up of positive plates, negative Batteries should be maintained at an open circuit
plates, separators, plate straps, and chemical solution voltage of 12.40 volts or greater. To determine open
(electrolyte). The electrolyte is a solution of sulfuric circuit voltage use the following chart.
acid and water. Sulfuric acid is not lost during
overcharging; therefore, if the liquid solution is low, CHECK OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE FOR STATE OF
240
05 only water should be added. CHARGE
2
In a fully charged battery, the positive plate is lead NOTE: Stabilize voltage by turning on high beams 15
peroxide (PBQ2), the negative plate is “spongy” lead Amp load for 15 seconds.
(Pb), and the electrolyte solution is about 1.270 times
heavier than water. The amount that the solution is STABILIZED OPEN
heavier than water is called specific gravity. CIRCUIT VOLTAGE PERCENT CHARGED
12.6 Volts or More 100%
12.4 75%
All batteries will self discharge at a rate of .001 specific 12.2 50%
gravity point per 24 hour period at a constant 85 °F. 12.0 25%
The discharge rate increases as temperature increases 11.7 or less 0%
and decreases as temperature decreases. If the
AG,OUOE003,9028 –19–11JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=62
General
Troubleshooting on Battery
Capacity too low Cable connections loose or oxidized; Check cable

cable defective
Battery fluid level too low Top up battery fluid
Specific gravity of battery fluid too Change battery fluid

low
Defective regulator Replace regulator
Defective generator See component manual

240
Excessive water consumption Defective regulator Replace regulator 05
3
Battery case cracked Replace battery
Battery not charging Loose or corroded battery Check battery connections

connections
Loose or damaged fan belt Re-tension or replace fan belt
Sulfated or worn-out battery Replace battery
AG,OUOE003,9029 –19–11JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=63
General
Procedure for Testing Batteries
1. VISUAL CHECK If high and low readings vary LESS than 0.050 and
average specific gravity is between 1.20 and 1.28,
a. Check for damage such as cracked or broken battery is fully charged, go to LOAD TEST.
case and electrolyte leakage.
If high and low readings vary LESS than 0.050 and
If damage is seen, replace battery. average specific gravity is LESS than 1.20, charge
battery and repeat test. If average specific gravity is
b. Check electrolyte level. (See procedure in this still LESS than 1.20, replace battery.
group)
If high and low readings vary MORE than 0.050,
If low, add distilled water to specified level and charge battery and repeat test. If high and low
charge battery. readings still vary MORE than 0.050, replace
battery.
c. Check terminals for corrosion. If corroded, clean
240
05 using a wire brush or battery post cleaner. 3. LOAD TEST
4
d. Check posts for looseness. Check battery capacity with a load tester such as
JT05832 Battery Load Tester. Follow tester
If posts are loose, replace battery. manufacturer’s instructions for proper load test
procedures.
2. HYDROMETER TEST
If battery fails load test, replace.
Check specific gravity with a hydrometer.
Record specific gravity reading for each cell.
AG,OUOE003,9030 –19–11JUN99–1/1
Battery Specification
Specification
Battery—Nominal voltage ................................................................ 12 Volt
Nominal capacity ............................................................................. 110 Ah
Low temperature test current .................................... 500 A at -18°C (0°F)
Acid density ............................................................................. 1.20 to 1.28
NOTE: In the tropics, an acid density of 1.23 corresponds

to a full battery charge.
AG,OUOE003,9031 –19–11JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=64
General
Check Battery Electrolyte Level and

Terminals
CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep

sparks and flames away from batteries. Use a
flashlight to check battery electrolyte level.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal

object across the posts. Use a voltmeter or
hydrometer.
Always remove grounded (-) battery clamp first

and replace it last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous.

It is strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in 240
05
clothing, and cause blindness if splashed into
5
eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
–UN–23AUG88
• Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
• Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
• Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is
TS203
added.
• Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
• Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.

2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize
the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 10—30
minutes. Get medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Drink large amounts of water or milk (not

more than 2 liters; 2 qt).
2. Then drink milk of magnesia, beaten eggs, or
vegetable oil.
3. Get medical attention immediately.
1. Remove hold-down clamps.
2. Remove battery covers.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=65
General
IMPORTANT: During freezing weather, batteries must

be charged after water is added to
prevent battery freezing. Charge battery
using a battery charger or by running
the engine.
3. Fill each cell with distilled water until the level is just
above the mark. DO NOT overfill.
AG,OUOE003,9032 –19–11JUN99–2/2
Starting with a Booster Battery

240
05
6 CAUTION: Gas given off by batteries is highly
explosive. Keep sparks and naked flames away
from batteries. Be sure polarity is correct before
making connections: ground cable to negative
–UN–26JUL94
pole and starter cable to positive pole of
battery.
LX000399
Reversed polarity will damage the electrical
system. Always connect positive cable first and
then negative cable!
The tractor is equipped with connections to allow an

additional 12-volt battery to be brought into the circuit. Lift
up cover (A), and connect positive poles (B) before
connecting negative poles (C).
AG,OUOE003,9033 –19–11JUN99–1/1
Component Identification Table
Each component (electrical device) and main connector

will have an identification letter assigned to it. A number is
added to the letter to separate and indicate the total
components within that letter group.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=66
General
Identification Type Examples

Letter
A System, subassembly, parts group Control units, trigger boxes, two-way radios, logic module,
FNR logic module
B Transducer for conversion of non-electrical Speed sensors, pressure sensors, pressure switches horns,
variables to electrical and vice versa sensors, pickups, limit-value sensors, pulse generators,
loudspeakers, inductive pickups, probes, air-flow sensors,
oil-pressure switches, temperature sensors, ignition-voltage
pickups
C Condenser, capacitor Condensers and capacitors, general
D Binary device, memory Digital devices, integrated circuits, pulse counters, magnetic
tape recorders
E Various devices and equipment Heating devices, air conditioners, light, headlights, spark
plugs, ignition distributors
F Protection device Release mechanisms, polarity protection devices, fuses, 240

current protection circuits 05
7
G Power supply, generator Batteries, generators, alternators, charging units
H Monitor, alarm, signalling device Audible alarms, indicator lights, turn-signal lights, brake
lights, alarms, warning lights, buzzers
K Relay Battery relays, turn-signal relays, solenoid switches, starting

relays, warning flashers
L Inductor Choke coils, coils, windings
M Motor Blower motors, fan motors, starter motors
N Regulator, amplifier Regulators (electronic or electromechanical), voltage

stabilizers
P Measuring instrument Ammeter, diagnostic connectors, tachometers, fuel gauge,

pressure gauges, measuring points, test points,
speedometers
R Resistor Flame glow plugs, sheathed-element flame glow plugs, glow

plugs, heating resistors, NTC resistors, PTC resistors,
potentiometers, regulating resistors
S Switch Switches and pushbuttons, general key switch, light switch,

horn switch, flasher switch
T Transformer Ignition coil, ignition transformer
U Modulator, converter DC transformers
V Semiconductor, electron tubes Transistors, diodes, electron tubes, rectifiers,

semiconductors, thyristors, zener diodes
W Transmission path, conductor, antenna Antennas, shielding components, shielded conductors, cable
harnesses, conductors, ground conductors
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=67
General
Identification Type Examples

Letter
X Terminal, plug, plug and socket connection Terminal studs, electrical connections, connectors electrical
line couplers, line connectors, sockets, plugs, terminals,
plug-and-socket connections
Y Electrically actuated mechanical device Permanent magnets, (solenoid-operated) injection valves,

electromagnetic clutches and brakes, air valves, fuel pumps,
solenoids, switching valves, start valves, locking systems
Z Electrical filter Interference suppression filters
AG,OUOE003,9034 –19–11JUN99–3/3
240
05
8
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=68
General
How to Read a Functional Schematic
240
05
9
–UN–17MAR95
LX004837
A—Power supply wires: Wire B—Wire or cable number E—Section to which cable is F—Wire 310 (terminal 31),
012 (terminal 30), battery; C—Part designation routed ground
Wire 022 (terminal 15), D—Section designation
ignition; Wire 212 (terminal
54), not supplied with
power during engine
starting; Wire 072 (ELX),
power supply for
electronics; Wire 202
(ACC), power supply for
accessories
The functional schematic is divided into functional the wiring and harness diagram. Switches and relays
sections. The part designations, wire numbers and are shown in “OFF” position.
symbols are identical with the corresponding data in
AG,OUOE003,9035 –19–11JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=69
General
How to Read a Diagnostic Schematic
240
05
10
–UN–08AUG94
LX007759
A—Current supply from B—Symbol (connector) D—Wire number F—Plug designation (X...)
section (SE..) C—Symbol (ground) E—Splice point (SP...)
Like the functional schematic, the diagnostic schematic color and the relevant circuit. The letter at the end of a
is divided into functional sections. It contains wire number indicates that there are several wires with
information about plugs (X) and connectors. Each wire the same number but different letters.
is identified by a number that also indicates the cable
AG,OUOE003,9036 –19–11JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=70
General
Wire Numbers and Color Codes
Wire number
Wire no. Circuit

000—099 Power supply
100—199 Lights
200—299 Accessories
300—499 Engine
500—699 Transmission
700—799 Hydraulics
800—899 Rockshaft
900—999 Miscellaneous
Color code
NOTE: The last digit of the wire number indicates the

color. 240
05
Wire no. Color Application 11
x50 Black Battery ground
xx0 Black Ground
xx1 Brown Not defined
xx2 Red Power supply
xx3 Orange Not defined
xx4 Yellow “
xx5 Dark green ”
xx6 Light blue “
xx7 Pale purple ”
xx8 Gray “
xx9 White ”
AG,LX12234,199 –19–27JUL99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=71
General
Symbols in Functional Schematic, Wiring and Harness Diagrams
240
05
12
–UN–26JUL94
LX002044
A—Alternator with rectifier and E—Battery I—Radio N—Switch, actuated by
regulator F—Fuse K—Loudspeaker pressure
B—Starting motor with G—Bulb with one luminous L—Horn O—Switch, actuated by
solenoid element M—Valve, operated temperature
C—Fuel pump H—Bulb with two luminous electro-mechanically P—Variable resistor
D—Compressor elements
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-12 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=72
General
240
05
13
–UN–26JUL94
LX002045
A—Electric clutch F—Mechanical switch I—Hall sending unit N—Coolant/fuel gauge
B—Windshield wiper motor (microswitch) K—Resistor O—Battery ground
C—Buzzer G—Diode L—Engine speed meter P—Cable ground
D—Mechanical switch H—Sensor M—Tachometer Q—Vehicle ground
E—Center-zero relay
AG,OUOE003,9037 –19–11JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-13 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=73
General
Electrical System Visual Check
If a customer reports a problem, perform a visual be the smell of burnt insulation. Place your hand on
check of the electrical system before starting the the alternator. The presence of heat after the
tractor. engine has been off for some time is a sure sign of
a charging circuit problem.
1. Check for frayed leads.
7. If the visual check does not isolate a possible
2. Check for missing or worn insulation; this can point problem, but the results do not indicate the engine
to a conductor problem. should not be started, turn the ignition key to the
IGN position. Check the accessory circuits, indicator
3. Check for loose or broken connections and wiring lights, etc. How are these individual components
leads: working? Look for sparks or smoke as signs of
shorts.
4. Check the battery for:
8. Start the engine. Check all indicators for proper
240
05 • Corroded terminal connections operation; determine if the system is charging or
14 • Loose cable clamps or battery posts discharging.
• Dirty batteries
• Wet batteries 9. In short, check for any abnormal conditions.
• Cracks in the battery box
• Correct electrolyte level Many electrical faults cannot be identified unless
the engine is started. For this reason the electrical
5. Check the alternator belt tension. system should be systematically and completely
checked.
6. Check for overheated components five minutes
after the engine has been shut off. Often there will
AG,OUOE003,9039 –19–11JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-14 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=74
General
Electrical Circuit Malfunctions
Malfunctions
There are only four circuit malfunctions.
–UN–28FEB94
• High-Resistance Circuit (GO TO 1).
• Open Circuit (GO TO 1).
• Grounded Circuit (GO TO 2).
• Shorted Circuit (GO TO 3).
RW45155
There are only three sections in a simple circuit where
these malfunctions occur: Before the controlling switch
(A), between the controlling switch (A) and the load (B),
and after load (B).
240
Component malfunctions can easily be confused with 05
circuit malfunctions. Therefore, care must be exercised 15
when isolating the cause of the problem.
Example: A component may not operate before

disconnecting an electrical connection, but it operates
after reconnecting the connector. Reason: High resistance
created a voltage drop at the connector terminals which
prevented the proper amount of current from flowing to
the component.
RX150124005,10 –19–01MAY00–1/1
Types of Fault
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-15 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=75
General
1 High Resistance or NOT OK: Repeat

Open Circuit check-out procedure after
repair.
OK: See procedure for

“Grounded Circuit”: GO
TO 2.
See procedure for

“Shorted Circuit”: GO TO
3.
RW45156 –UN–28FEB94
A—Battery
B—Fuse
C—Switch
240
D—Component Terminal
05
E—Circuit Resistance
16
F—Circuit Connector
G—Circuit Connector
H—Component Terminal
I—Lamp
J—Ground
A High Resistance Circuit can result in slow, dim or no component operation (e.g.
loose, corroded, dirty or oily terminal, also if the gauge of the wire is too small or
broken strands exist).
An Open Circuit results in no component operation because the circuit is incomplete

(e.g. broken wire, terminals disconnected, open protective device on switch).
To isolate the location of a “high resistance” or “open circuit”:
1. With the controlling switch (C) ON and the load (I) connected into the circuit, check
for proper voltage at a location easily accessible between (D) and (H).
If voltage is low, move toward voltage source (A) to locate point of voltage drop.
NOTE: The example shows high resistance between (D) and (F) and open circuit
between (F) and (G).
If voltage is correct, move toward load (I) and ground terminal (J) to locate voltage
drop.
2. Repair circuit as required.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-16 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=76
General
2 Grounded Circuit NOT OK: Repeat

check-out procedure after
repair.
OK: See procedure for

“Shorted Circuit”: GO TO
3.
RW45157 –UN–28FEB94
A—Battery
B—Fuse Terminal
C—Fuse Terminal
240
D—Switch
05
E—Component Terminal
17
F—Grounded Circuit
G—Component Terminal
H—Lamp
A grounded circuit results in no component operation and the fuse or circuit breaker
open (e.g. power wire contacting ground).
To isolate the location of a grounded circuit:
1. With controlling switch (D) OFF, check for continuity to ground between (C) and (D).
If there is continuity, there is a grounded circuit between (C) and (D). Repair circuit.
No continuity, go to step 2.
2. Disconnect load (H) at (G).
3. With controlling switch (D) OFF, check continuity to ground between (D) and (F).
If there is continuity, there is a grounded circuit between (E) and (F). Repair circuit.
NOTE: The example is grounded between (E) and (F).
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-17 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=77
General
3 Shorted Circuit NOT OK: Repeat

check-out procedure after
repair.
RW45158 –UN–28FEB94
A—Switch
B—Lamp
C—Fuse
240
D—Switch
05
E—Component Terminal
18
F—Circuit Connector
G—Circuit Connector
H—Component Terminal
I—Lamp
A shorted circuit usually results in two components operating when one of two
switches is turned on (e.g. improper wire-to-wire contact). Components can also
become shorted. However, shorted components will usually open the circuit protection
device.
To isolate the location of a shorted circuit:
1. Turn Switch (A) ON for correct lamp (B) to operate.
2. Start at controlling switch (D) of lamp (I) that should not be operating and
disconnect the wire at terminal (E).
3. Follow circuit and disconnect wire at connectors (F, G or H) until the extra lamp (I)
stops operating.
4. The short or improper connection will be between the last two locations where the
wire was disconnected. In our example, it is between (F) and (G).
5. Repair circuit as follows:
Wires not in a loom: Wrap individual wire with electrical tape or replace the
damaged wire and band as required.
Wires in a loom: If hot spots exist in shorted area of loom, replace harness. If hot
spots are not noticeable, install a new wire of proper gauge between the last two
connections. Band wire to outside of harness.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-18 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=78
General
Seven Step Electrical Test Procedure
–UN–16AUG94
LX007765
A—Component Terminal C—Component Terminal D—Component Terminal E—Wire Lead
B—Component Terminal
240
05
19
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-19 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=79
General
Step 1—Switch ON
Check battery side of circuit breaker
(A) for battery voltage ................................................................................. Battery voltage normal. Go to step 2.
Low voltage, repair high resistance
or open circuit from battery.
Step 2—Switch OFF

Check load side of circuit breaker (B)
for battery voltage ....................................................................................... Battery voltage normal. Go to step 4.
Low voltage, replace circuit breaker.
No voltage. Go to step 3.
Step 3—Switch OFF
Check load side of circuit breaker (B) for Continuity to ground. Repair grounded
continuity to ground. Clip at battery voltage (A) ......................................... circuit at or before switch.
No continuity to ground, replace circuit
breaker.
Step 4—Switch ON
Check load side of circuit breaker (B)
240 for battery voltage ....................................................................................... Battery voltage normal. Go to step 6.
05 Low voltage, replace circuit breaker.
20 No voltage. Go to step 5.
Step 5a
Disconnect lead to component at (C).
Switch ON. Check lead (E) for battery voltage .......................................... Battery voltage, repair component.
No voltage, repair grounded circuit at
or after switch.
Step 6—Switch ON
Check lead to component at (C) for
battery voltage ............................................................................................. Battery voltage normal. Go to step 7.
Low voltage, repair high resistance in
circuit between fuse and component.
No voltage, repair high resistance or
open circuit between fuse and component.
Step 7—Switch ON
Check ground lead of component at (D) for
voltage .........................................................................................................
No voltage, good continuity to ground.Repair component.
Voltage, poor continuity to
ground. Repair high resistance or open ground
circuit.
a
A multimeter will not apply a load to the circuit at step 5. The multimeter result is tested as a voltage condition in the result column.
AG,OUOE003,9044 –19–11JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-05-20 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=80
Group 10
System Diagrams, ComfortGard and Low-Clearance Cabs
Fuses
The primary fuse is located under the right step in the • F01—160A Battery Circuit (Main Power Supply)
central plug (X03). • F06—60A Electrical Starting Aid
The fuse for the electrical starting aid heating element

is on the right side of the engine block.
AG,OUOE003,9045 –19–01JUL99–1/8
Replacing the Main Fuse

240
IMPORTANT: To avoid the possibility of electrical 10
system damage, never use a 1
replacement fuse with a rating higher
than the original fuse.
–UN–16FEB98
Disconnect the battery cables.
LX1019854
Remove pin (A) and mounting screw (C) from plug (B)
and pull the plug downwards.
Remove hex nut (D) and replace fuse (E).
Tighten pin (A) to 20 N•m (15 lb-ft) and hex. nut (D) to 10
N•m (7.5 lb-ft).
A—Pin (Positive)
–UN–16FEB98
B—Plug (X03/2)
C—Mounting Screw
D—Hex Nut
E—Fuse F01
LX1019855
Continued on next page AG,OUOE003,9045 –19–01JUL99–2/8
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=81
Replacing the Electrical Starting Aid Fuse
IMPORTANT: To avoid the possibility of electrical

system damage, never use a
–UN–17OCT97
Lift the fuse box cover (A).
LX1018078
Remove the two hex nuts (B).
Replace fuse (C).
A—Cover
B—Hex Nut
C—Fuse
240
10
2
–UN–17OCT97
LX1018079
AG,OUOE003,9045 –19–01JUL99–3/8
The other fuses are located in two load centers (fuse

boxes).
A—Load center 1
B—Load center 2
–UN–23SEP97
LX1016115
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=82
240
10
3
Fuses (Load Center 1) –UN–04NOV99

LX1024009
F110 — 10 A Right Tail Light and Left Clearance Light,
License Plate Light
IMPORTANT: To avoid the possibility of electrical F111 — 10 A BCU
system damage, never use a F112 — 20 A Brake Switch
replacement fuse with a rating F113 — 10 A Differential Lock, Front Wheel Drive,
higher than the original fuse. Blinker, Radar, Hall Sender for Tachometer and
Rear PTO
F101 — 30 A Key Switch (BAT pin) F114 — 30 A Electronics Power Supply Relay
F102 — 20 A Hazard Flashers F115 — Electronic Control Unit (Calibration Fuse)
F103 — 30 A Accessories (Horn, Front Loader 3-Pin F116 — 10 A HCU
Receptacle and 2-Pin Plug) F117 — 10 A Instruments, Alternator Indicator Light
F104 — 30 A Light Switch (Pin B) F118 — 20 A Cab Dome Light, Clock, Cigarette
F105 — 30 A Low and High Beam Lights Lighter, Instruments
F106 — 10 A Low Beam Light, Left F119 — 30 A Fuel Preheater, 3-Pin Receptacle
F107 — 10 A Low Beam Light, Right F120 — 30 A 3-Pin Receptacle and Signal Receptacle,
F108 — 20 A High Beam and Flash-To-Pass Receptacle Strip
F109 — 10 A Left Tail Light and Right Clearance Light
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=83
Diodes K103 — Headlight

K104 — 3-Pin Receptacle and Signal Receptacle
V105 — 1 A Electronics Power Supply K105 — Fuel Preheater and 3-Pin Plug
Relays K106 — Audible Alarm Sender
K108 — Turn signal lights
K101 — Electronics Power Supply K109 — Turn signal lights
K102 — Accessory
240
10
4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=84
240
10
5
–UN–11MAY00
LX1024585
Fuse (Load Center 2) F207 — 10A Cab frame work light

F208 — 30A Front and rear cab roof work lights
IMPORTANT: To prevent unnecessary damage to F211 — 10A Multi-function lever
the electrical system, never use a F212 — 20A Turn signal lights
fuse with a rating higher than the F213 — 20A Windshield wiper and washer
one already installed. F214 — 20A Rear window wiper/washer and air
compressor (operator seat)
F201 — 10A Electrical reverser control and engine F215 — 20A Front PTO, radio and back-up alarm
control unit (ECU) F216 — 15A Shift console light
F202 — 10A Electrical reverser control and engine F217 — 20A Cab ventilation and heater fan
control unit (SFA) F218 — 20A Cab ventilation and heater fan
F203 — 30A Stepper motor driver (multi-function lever) F219 — 10A Air conditioner
F204 — 10A Stepper motor driver (AutoQuad F220 — 20A Front loader, beacon
transmission) Diodes
F205 — 10A Data bus/transm. and electronic control
unit (PEC) V202 — 1A Electrical reverser control
F206 — 30A Front grille and rear fender work lights V203 — 1A Engine control unit (ECU)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=85
Circuit Relays K207 — Air conditioner

K210 — Reverse relay
K204 — Fan K211 — Forward relay
K205 — Work light K212 — Not-neutral relay
K206 — Work light K213 — Latch relay
AG,OUOE003,9045 –19–01JUL99–8/8
240
10
6
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=86
Functional Schematic and Wiring Harness Component Identification
A01 — Radio (SE9; W11) B31 — Operating Pressure Indicator Sender (SE2;
A03 — BCU (SE16; W4) W13)
A04 — HCU (SE15; W4) B35 — Magnetic Sender for Speedometer (SE16H;
A05 — Left Speaker (SE9) W13)
A06 — Right Speaker (SE9) B36 — Neutral Start Switch (SE1; W13)
A07 — RCU (SE19; W4) B37 — Handbrake Switch (SE5; W4)
A08 — SFA (SE20; W34) B39 — Radar Sensor (SE16D; W13)
A09 — (SE21A; W34) B41 — Draft Potentiometer (SE15; W13)
A10 — Stepper Motor Driver (SE21C; W35) B50 — Reverse Lockout Switch (SE19; W4)
A11 — Stepper Motor Driver (SE21C; W35) B51 — Parking Lock Switch (SE19; W4)
A12 — Stepper Motor Driver (SE21C; W35) B52 — Enable Pressure Switch (SE19; W4)
A13 — Stepper Motor Driver (SE21D; W35) B53 — Position Sensor (SE20; W36)
A14 — BUS Terminator with Power Supply (SE22; B56 — Coolant Temperature Sender (SE23; W3)
W34) B57 — Foot Throttle Potentiometer (SE23; W34)
240
A15 — BUS Terminator (SE22; W4) B58 — PTO Speed Sender (SE5; W3) 10
A16 — ECU (SE23; W34) B60 — Trans. Oil Temperature Sender (SE2; W13) 7
A17 — BUS Terminator with Power Supply (SE21A; E01 — Right Headlight (SE6; W3)
W34) E02 — Left Headlight (SE6; W3)
A18 — BUS Terminator (SE21C; W35) E03 — Left Clearance Light (SE6; W11)1
A19 — Cruise Control Potentiometer (SE23; W4) E04 — Right Clearance Light (SE6; W11)1
B01 — Tachometer Sender (SE16H; W3) E05 — Cigarette Lighter (SE4; W4)
B02 — Air Filter Indicator Sender (SE2; W2) E07 — Left Cab Frame Work Light (SE6A; W11)
B03 — Fuel Gauge Sender (SE2; W13) E08 — Right Cab Frame Work Light (SE6A; W11)
B04 — Engine Oil Pressure Light Sender (SE2; W3) E09 — Front Grille Work Light (SE7; W14)
B06 — PTO Speed Sender (SE16E; W13) E10 — Front Cab Roof Work Light (SE7; W11)
B07 — Oil Filter Light Sender (SE2; W13) E11 — Rear Cab Roof Work Light (SE7; W11)
B08 — Coolant Temperature Gauge Sender (SE2; W3) E12/1 — Dome Light (SE9; W11)
B09 — Speedometer Hall Sender (SE22H; W13) E12/2 — Shift Console Light (SE9; W11)
B14 — Thermostat Switch (SE10; W8) E13 — Left Tail Light (SE6; W11)
B15 — Pressure Switch (SE10; W4) E14 — Right Tail Light (SE6; W11)
B18/1 — Left Brake Light Switch (SE16A; W4) E15 — Rear Fender Work Light (SE7; W11)
B18/2 — Right Brake Light Switch (SE16A; W4) E20 — Cab Frame Work Light (SE7; W11)
B19 — Right Draft Sensor (SE15; W13) E21/1 — Left License Plate Light (SE6; W11)
B20 — Left Draft Sensor (SE15; W13) E21/2 — Right License Plate Light (SE6; W11)
B21 — Position Sensor (SE15; W13) E27 — Beacon (SE13; W11)
B26 — Height Sensitivity Potentiometer (SE15; W4) F01 — Fuse (SE1; W4)
B27 — Position Feedback Unit (SE15; W9) F06 — Fuse (SE1; W27)
B28 — Left and Right Door Switches for Dome Light F12 — Fuse (SE16B; W53)
(SE9; W11) F101 — Fuse (SE1; W4)
B29 — Low Temperature Switch (SE2; W13) F102 — Fuse (SE16B; W4)
B30 — High Temperature Switch (SE2; W13) F103 — Fuse (SE1; W4)
1
Europe only
Continued on next page AG,OUOE003,9048 –19–01MAY00–1/8
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=87
F104 — Fuse (SE6; W4) H17 — Differential Lock Indicator Light (SE16C; W4)
F105 — Fuse (SE6; W4) H19 — Front PTO Indicator Light (SE5; W4)
F106 — Fuse (SE6; W4) H21 — Oil Temperature Warning Light (SE3; W4)
F107 — Fuse (SE6; W4) H25 — Audible Alarm (SE16F; W4)
F108 — Fuse (SE6; W4) H32 — Left Brake Light (SE16A; W11)
F109 — Fuse (SE6; W4) H33 — Right Brake Light (SE16A; W11)
F110 — Fuse (SE6; W4) H34 — Left Front Turn Signal (SE16B; W11)
F111 — Fuse (SE16H; W4) H36 — Left Fender Turn Signal (SE16B; W11)
F112 — Fuse (SE16A; W4) H38 — Right Fender Turn Signal (SE16B; W11)
F113 — Fuse (SE16C,SE16D; W4) H41 — Beacon Indicator Light (SE13; W4)
F114 — Fuse (SE1; W4) H42 — Right Front Turn Signal (SE16B; W11)
F115 — Fuse (SE15; W4) H44 — Left Front Cab Roof Flasher1
F116 — Fuse (SE15; W4) H45 — Right Front Cab Roof Flasher1
F117 — Fuse (SE2; W4) H46 — Left Rear Cab Roof Flasher1
F118 — Fuse (SE2; W4) H47 — Right Rear Cab Roof Flasher1
F119 — Fuse (SE1A; W4) H55 — Rear PTO Preselector Indicator Light (SE16I;
240
10 F120 — Fuse (SE14; W4) W4)
8 F201 — Fuse (SE19; W4) H56 — Rear PTO Indicator Light (SE16E; W4)
F202 — Fuse (SE19; W4) H75 — AutoQuad II-Transmission Shift Indicator Light
F203 — Fuse (SE21C; W4) (SE21; W4)
F204 — Fuse (SE21D; W4) K01 — Starter Relay (SE1; W3)
F205 — Fuse (SE21A; W4) K24 — Injection Pump Shutoff Valve (SE1; W3)
F206 — Fuse (SE7; W4) K25 — Front PTO Relay (SE5; W4)
F207 — Fuse (SE7; W4) K26 — Interval Relay (SE11; W6)
F208 — Fuse (SE7; W4) K28 — Backup Alarm Relay (SE25; W40)
F209 — Fuse (SE6; W4) K36 — Electrical Starting Aid Relay (SE1; W27)
F210 — Fuse (SE6; W4) K44 — Turn Signal Trailer Relay SE16B; W53)
F211 — Fuse (SE21A; W4) K45 — Turn Signal Trailer Relay SE16B; W53)
F212 — Fuse (SE16B; W53) K101 — Electronics Power Supply Relay (SE1; W4)
F213 — Fuse (SE11; W4) K102 — Accessory Relay (SE1; W4)
F214 — Fuse (SE12; W4) K103 — Headlight Relay (SE6; W4)
F215 — Fuse (SE5; W4) K104 — 3-Pin Receptacle Relay (SE14; W4)
F216 — Fuse (SE9; W4) K105 — Fuel Preheater Relay (SE1A; W4)
F217 — Fuse (SE10; W4) K106 — Audible Alarm (SE16F; W4)
F218 — Fuse (SE10; W4) K107 — Headlight Relay (SE6; W4)1
F219 — Fuse (SE10; W4) K108 — Turn Signal Relay (SE16B; W53)
F220 — Fuse (SE8; W4) K109 — Turn Signal Relay (SE16B; W53)
G01 — Battery (SE1; W3) K203 — Stepper Motor Driver Relay (SE21B; W4)
G02 — Alternator (SE1; W3) K204 — Fan Motor Relay (SE10; W4)
H01 — Horn (SE3; W1) K205 — Work Light Relay (SE7; W4)
H09 — Front Wheel Drive Indicator Light (SE16G; W4) K206 — Work Light Relay (SE7; W4)
H13 — High Beam Indicator Light (SE6; W4) K207 — Air Conditioner Relay (SE10; W4)
H15 — Work Light Indicator Light (SE7; W4) K210 — Reverse Relay (SE19; W4)
1
Europe only
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=88
K211 — Forward Relay (SE19; W4) S31 — Left External Control Switch (SE15; W11)
K212 — Not-Neutral Relay (SE19; W4) S32 — Digital Instrument Set Switch (SE2; W4)
K213 — Latch Relay (SE19; W4) S35 — Cab Interior Light Switch (SE9; W11)
M01 — Starter (SE1; W3) S36 — Beacon Switch (SE13; W4)
M02 — Compressor Clutch (SE10; W3) S43 — Headland Management System Switch (SE16I;
M03 — Windshield Wiper (SE11; W7) W4)
M04 — Rear Window Wiper (SE12; W10) S46 — Electrical Reverser Control Switch (SE19; W4)
M05 — Windshield Washer Pump (SE11; W10) S48 — Shift Switch (SE21A; W4)
M06 — Rear Window Washer Pump (SE12; W10) S49 — Shift Switch (SE21A; W4)
M07 — Fan Motor (SE10; W8) S50 — AutoQuad Transmission Switch (SE21A; W4)
M08 — Stepper Motor (SE15; W13) S51 — Clutch Switch (SE21A; W13)
M09 — Air Compressor (SE4; W3) S57 — Work Light Switch (SE6A; W4)
M10 — Fan Motor (SE10; W8) S58 — Rear Cab Roof Work Light Switch (SE7; W11)
M12 — Stepper Motor (SE21C; W35) S59 — Front Grille Work Light Switch (SE7; W14)
M13 — Stepper Motor (SE21C; W35) S60 — Front Cab Roof Work Light Switch (SE7; W11)
M14 — Stepper Motor (SE21C; W35) S61 — Fender Work Light Switch (SE7; W11)
240
M15 — Stepper Motor (SE21D; W35) S62 — Hazard Flasher Switch (SE16B; W4) 10
P11 — Basic Informator (SE2; W4) S63 — Front Wheel Drive Switch (SE16I; W4) 9
P12 — Performance Monitor (SE18; W4) S64 — Multifunction Lever (SE21B; W37)
R01 — Start Aid Glow Plug (SE1; W3) S65 — Transport Lock Switch (SE21B; W37)
R02 — Fuel Preheater Heating Element (SE1; W3) S66 — Hazard Flasher Switch (SE16B; W4)1
R03 — Resistors (SE10; W8) S85 — AutoQuad II-Transmission Shift Switch (SE21;
R04 — BUS Terminating Resistor (SE22; W4) W4)
S01 — Key Switch (SE1; W4) V01 — Diode (SE10)
S04 — Horn Button (SE3; W4) V102 — Diode (SE6; W4)
S05 — Front Wheel Drive Switch (SE16I; W4) V105 — Diode (SE1; W4)
S06 — Front PTO Switch (SE5; W4) V202 — Diode (SE19; W4)
S08 — Turn signal Switch (SE16B; W4) V203 — Diode (SE23; W4)
S09 — Light Switch (SE6; W4) X02 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Connection
S10 — High/Low Beam Switch (SE6; W4) Point; W39)
S11 — Headlight Relay (SE6B; W4) X03 — 64-Pin Plug (Dash Unit Connection Point; W4)
S14 — Fan Switch (SE10; W4) X03/2 — 24-Pin Plug (Engine Connection Point; W3)
S15 — Windshield Wiper Switch (SE11; W4) X03/4 — 40-Pin Plug (Transmission Connection Point;
S16 — Windshield Washer Switch (SE11; W4) W13)
S17 — Windshield Switch (SE11; W7) X05 — 7-Pin Receptacle (W13)
S18 — Rear Window Wiper Switch (SE12; W4) X06 — 3-Pin Receptacle (W4)
S20 — Rear Window Switch (SE12; W10) X07 — 20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Connection Point; W4,
S21 — Rear PTO Switch (SE16I; W4) W11)
S22 — Differential Lock Switch (SE16C; W4) X07/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Connection Point; W4,
S23 — Right External Control Switch (SE15; W11) W11)
S24 — Rapid Raise/Lower Switch (SE15; W4) X13 — 30-Pin Plug (Electronic Control Unit Connection
S28 — Compressor Switch (SE10; W8) Point; W4)
S30 — Flash-to-Pass Switch (SE6; W4)
1
Europe only
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=89
X14/1 — 8-Pin Plug (Feedback Unit Connection Point; X48 — 6-Pin Plug (Resistor Connection Point; W8)
W4, W9) X49 — 2-Pin Plug (Fuse F207 Connection Point; W4,
X14/2 — 3-Pin Plug (Height Sensitivity Potentiometer W8)
Connection Point; W4, W9) X50 — 3-Pin Plug (Fan Wiring Harness Connection
X20A — 1-Pin Plug (Windshield Wiper Connection Point; W4, W8)
Point; W4, W7) X58 — 2-Pin Plug (Operator Seat Connection Point;
X20B — 3-Pin Plug (Windshield Washer and W4)
Multifunction Unit Connection Point; W4, W6) X59 — 1-Pin Plug (Horn Button Connection Point; W5)
X21 — 12-Pin Plug (Multifunction Unit Connection X60 — 1-Pin Plug (Horn Button Connection Point; W5)
Point; W4, W5) X61 — 1-Pin Plug (Flash-to-Pass Switch Connection
X25 — 26-Pin Plug (Basic Informator Connection Point, Point; W5)
Right; W4) X62 — 1-Pin Plug Flash-to-Pass Switch Connection
X26 — 26-Pin Plug (Basic Informator Connection Point, Point; W5)
Left; W4) X63 — 1-Pin Plug (Windshield Washer Switch
X27 — 26-Pin Plug (Control Unit Connection Point, Connection Point; W6)
Rear; W4) X64 — 1-Pin Plug (Windshield Washer Switch
240
10 X28 — 2-Pin Plug (Pressure Switch Connection Point; Connection Point; W6)
10 W4) X66/1 — 1-Pin Plug (Horn Connection Point; W1)
X29 — 4-Pin Plug (Service Plug; W4) X66/2 — 1-Pin Plug (Horn Connection Point; W1)
X30 — 2-Pin Plug (Radar Connection Point; W4) X67 — 3-Pin Plug (Right Headlight Connection Point;
X31 — 2-Pin Plug (Beacon Connection Point; W11) W3)
X34 — 6-Pin Plug (External Control Switch Connection X68 — 3-Pin Plug (Left Headlight Connection Point;
Point, Right; W11, W12) W3)
X35 — 6-Pin Plug (External Control Switch Connection X69/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Work Light Connection
Point; W11, W12) Point; W14)
X36 — 6-Pin Plug (External Control Connection Point; X69/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Work Light Connection
W4, W11) Point; W14)
X37 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Loader Connection Point; W4) X70/1 — 1-Pin Plug (Air Filter Indicator Light
X38 — 4-Pin Plug (Windshield Wiper Motor Connection Connection Point; W2)
Point; W7) X70/2 — 1-Pin Plug (Air Filter Indicator Light
X39 — 4-Pin Plug (Windshield Wiper and Multifunction Connection Point; W2)
Unit Connection Point; W4) X71 — 3-Pin Plug (Draft Potentiometer Connection
X40 — 1-Pin Plug (Rear Window Wiper and Cab Point
Connection Point; W4, W10) X72 — 1-Pin Plug (Pressure Switch Connection Point;
X42 — 5-Pin Plug (Rear Window Wiper Connection W8)
Point; W10) X73/1 — 1-Pin Plug (Thermostat Switch Connection
X43 — 4-Pin Plug (Rear Window Wiper Motor Point; W8)
Connection Point; W10) X73/2 — 1-Pin Plug (Thermostat Switch Connection
X44 — 2-Pin Plug (Rear Window Washer Motor Point; W8)
Connection Point; W10) X75 — 6-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Switch
X45/1 — 1-Pin Plug (Compressor Switch Connection Connection Point; W4)
Point; W4) X76 — 2-Pin Plug (Tachometer Connection Point; W3)
X45/2 — 1-Pin Plug (Compressor Switch Connection X77 — 1-Pin Plug (Coolant Temperature Sender
Point; W8) Connection Point; W3)
X46 — 2-Pin Plug (Fan Motor Connection Point; W8) X78 — 1-Pin Plug (Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
X47 — 2-Pin Plug (Fan Motor Connection Point; W8) Connection Point; W3)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=90
X79 — 2-Pin Plug (Fuel Preheater Element Connection X104 — 9-Pin Plug (Interval Relay Connection Point;
Point; W3) W6)
X80 — 2-Pin Plug (Oil Filter Indicator Light Connection X105 — 4-Pin Plug (Radio Connection Point; W11)
Point; W13) X106 — 4-Pin Plug (Right Tail and Turn Signal Light
X81 — 1-Pin Plug (Low Temperature Switch Connection Point; W11)
Connection Point; W13) X107 — 4-Pin Plug (Left Tail and Turn Signal Light
X82 — 2-Pin Plug (High Temperature Connection Connection Point; W11)
Point; W13) X112/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Left Fender Work Light
X83 — 2-Pin Plug (Working Pressure Warning Light Connection Point; W11)
Connection Point; W13) X112/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Right Fender Work Light
X84 — 2-Pin Plug (Clutch Cooling Relay Connection Connection Point; W11)
Point; W13) X113/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Left License Plate/Work Light
X86 — 3-Pin Plug (Fuel Gauge and Pump Connection Connection Point; W11)
Point; W13) X113/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Right License Plate/Work Light
X87 — 2-Pin Plug (Differential Lock Solenoid Connection Point; W11)
Connection Point; W13) X114/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Right Rear Cab Roof Work Light
240
X88 — 4-Pin Plug (Speedometer Sender Connection Connection Point; W11) 10
Point; W13) X114/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Left Rear Cab Roof Work Light 11
X89 — 3-Pin Plug (Left Draft Sensor Connection Point; Connection Point; W11)
W13) X117/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Work Light Connection
X90 — 3-Pin Plug (Right Draft Sensor Connection Point; W11)
Point; W13) X117/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Work Light Connection
X91 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Solenoid Point; W11)
Connection Point; W13) X118/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Work Light Connection
X92 — 4-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Connection Point; Point; W11)
W13) X118/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Work Light Connection
X93 — 2-Pin Plug (Neutral Start Switch Connection Point; W11)
Point; W13) X121 — 4-Pin Plug (Dome and Shift Console Light
X94 — 2-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Speed Indicator Connection Point; W11)
Connection Point; W13) X122 — 2-Pin Plug (Differential Lock Switch
X95 — 2-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Solenoid Connection Connection Point; W4)
Point; W13) X125 — 3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Switch Connection
X96 — 3-Pin Plug (Position Sensor Connection Point; Point; W4)
W13) X126 — 3-Pin Plug (Hazard Flasher Switch Connection
X99/1 — 1-Pin Plug (Beacon Switch Connection Point; Point; W4)
W4) X127 — 3-Pin Plug (Front PTO Switch Connection
X99/2 — 1-Pin Plug (Beacon Switch Connection Point; Point; W4)
W4) X128/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Cigarette Lighter Connection
X100 — 6-Pin Plug (Fan Switch Connection Point; W4, Point; W11)
W8) X130 — 1-Pin Plug (Compressor Clutch Connection
X101 — 6-Pin Plug (Headlight Connection Point; W4) Point; W3)
X101F — 6-Pin Plug with Wiring Bridge (Headlight X132 — 7-Pin Signal Receptacle; W4)
Connection Point) X133 — 45-Pin Plug (BCU Connection Point; W4)
X102 — 4-Pin Plug (Digital Clock Connection Point; X135 — 10-Pin Plug (Performance Monitor Connection
W4) Point; W4)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=91
X139 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Grille Work Light Connection X195 — 2-Pin Plug (Enable Solenoid Connection Point;
Point; W14) W20)
X142/1 — Prewiring for Beacon; W11) X196 — 2-Pin Plug (Forward Solenoid Connection
X142/2 — Ground Cable Terminal for Beacon Point; W20)
X160 — 2-Pin Plug (Left Front Turn Signal Connection X197 — 2-Pin Plug (Reverse Solenoid Connection
Point; W11) Point; W20)
X161 — 2-Pin Plug (Right Front Turn Signal X198 — 18-Pin Plug (RCU Connection Point; W20)
Connection Point; W11) rechts; W34)
X162/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Left Cab Frame Work Light X201 — 8-Pin Plug (Electrical Reverser Control
Connection Point; W11) Connection Point; W4)
X162/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Right Cab Frame Work Light X205 — 8-Pin Plug (TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle
Connection Point; W11) Wiring Harness; W36)
X163 — 2-Pin Plug (Left Rear Turn Signal Connection X206 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Axle Solenoid
X164 — 2-Pin Plug (Right Rear Turn Signal Connection X207 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Axle Solenoid
240
10 X165 — 2-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Connection Point; W18) X209 — 2-Pin Plug (Position Sensor Connection Point;
12 X166 — 2-Pin Plug (Front PTO Solenoid Connection W36)
Point; W39) X211 — 18-Pin Plug (SFA Control Unit Connection
X167 — 2-Pin Plug (PTO Speed Indicator Connection Point; W34)
Point; W39) X212 — 4-Pin Plug (Parking Lock and Reverse Range
X171/1 — 1-Pin Plug (Right Fender Work Light or Lockout Switch Connection Point; W4)
License Plate Light Connection Point; W11) X214 — 2-Pin Plug (Injection Pump Connection Point;
X171/2 — 1-Pin Plug (Left Fender Work Light or W3)
License Plate Light Connection Point; W11) X215 — 10-Pin Plug (Engine Connection Point; W3,
X175/1 — 1-Pin Plug (HMS Switch Connection Point; W4)
W4) X218 — 45-Pin Plug (ECU Connection Point; W34)
X175/2 — 1-Pin Plug (HMS Switch Connection Point; X219 — 6-Pin Plug (Multifunction Lever Connection
W4) Point; W34, W37)
X178/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Transmission Wiring Harness X220 — 8-Pin Plug (Multifunction Lever Wiring Harness
Switch Connection Point; W41) Connection Point; W34, W37)
X178/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Transmission Wiring Harness X221 — 45-Pin Plug (PEC Connection Point; W34)
Switch Connection Point; W41) X222 — 80-Pin Plug (Control Unit Wiring Harness
X185 — 2-Pin Plug (Backup Alarm Horn Connection Connection Point; W34)
Point; W40) X222M — 80-Pin Plug with Wiring Bridge (Control Unit
X186/1 — 1-Pin Plug (Backup Alarm Main Switch Harness Connection Point)
Connection Point; W40) X225 — 3-Pin Plug (Transport Lock Switch Connection
X186/2 — 1-Pin Plug (Backup Alarm Main Switch Point; W37)
Connection Point; W40) X226 — 7-Pin Plug (BUS Terminator Connection Point;
X186/3 — 1-Pin Plug (Backup Alarm Main Switch W34)
Connection Point; W40) X227 — 7-Pin Plug (BUS Terminator Connection Point;
X193 — 6-Pin Plug (Transmission Connection Point; W34)
W4,W20) X230 — 2-Pin Plug (Seat Switch Connection Point;
X194 — 2-Pin Plug (Enable Pressure Switch W4)
Connection Point; W20)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-12 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=92
X231 — 2-Pin Plug (Seat/Handbrake Switch X255 — 18-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Driver Connection
Connection Point; W4) Point; W35)
X232 — 7-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Driver Wiring X256 — 18-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Driver Connection
Harness Connection Point; (SE21D; W35) Point; W35)
X234 — 7-Pin Plug (7-Pin Receptacle Connection X257 — 6-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Connection Point;
Point; W29) W35)
X234/1 — 7-Pin Plug (Turn Signal Wiring Harness X258 — 7-Pin Plug (BUS Terminator Connection Point;
Connection Point; W53) W35)
X235 — 2-Pin Plug (Handbrake Switch Connection X260 — 10-Pin Plug (Work Light Switch Connection
Point; W4)1 Point; W4)
X236 — 4-Pin Plug (Cruise Control Potentiometer X261 — 2-Pin Plug (Coolant Temperature Sender
X238 — 3-Pin Plug (Foot Throttle Potentiometer X262 — 2-Pin Plug (Coolant Temperature Gauge
X239 — 3-Pin Plug (3-Pin Receptacle and Receptacle X263 — 15-Pin Plug (Multifunction Lever Connection
Strip Connection Point; W31) Point; W37)
240
X242 — 2-Pin Plug (HMS Switch Connection Point; X264 — 3-Pin Plug (Front Loader Wiring Harness 10
W4) Connection Point; W37) 13
X243 — 3-Pin Plug (PTO Preselector Switch X267 — 2-Pin Plug (Transmission Speed Sender
X243F — 3-Pin Plug with Wiring Bridge (PTO X268 — 2-Pin Plug (Clutch Switch Connection Point;
Preselector Switch Connection Point) W13)
X244 — 3-Pin Plug (AutoQuad Transmission Switch X269 — 3-Pin Plug (Parking Light Selector Connection
Connection Point; W4) Point; W4))
X245 — 3-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Switch X269F — 3-Pin Plug with Wiring Bridge (Parking Light
Connection Point; W4) Selector Connection Point)
X247 — 26-Pin Plug (Monitor Connection Point; W4) X270 — 7-Pin Plug (CAN BUS Terminator Connection
X248 — 26-Pin Plug (Light Control Connection Point; Point; W4)
W4) X304 — Receptacle Strip
X249 — 3-Pin Plug (Shift Switch Connection Point; W4) X305 — 1-Pin Plug (Connection Point for Ground
X250/1 — 3-Pin Plug (Left Brake Switch Connection Shunt to Radiator)
Point; W4) X306 — 2-Pin Plug (Electrical Starting Aid Connection
X250/2 — 3-Pin Plug (Right Brake Switch Connection Point; W27)
Point; W4) X307 — 2-Pin Plug (Transmission Oil Temperature
X251 — 6-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Connection Point; Sender Connection Point; W13)
W35) X303 — 4-Pin Plug (CAN Service Plug Connection
X252 — 6-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Connection Point; Point; W34)
W35) X316 — 6-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Connection Point;
X253 — 18-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Driver Connection W35)
Point; W35) X421 — 1-Pin Plug ( Turn Signal Wiring Harness
X254 — 18-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Driver Connection Connection Point ; W53)
Point; W35) XGND1 — Cab Ground Point (W4)
1
Europe only
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-13 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=93
XGND2 — Cab Ground Point (Electronics; W4) XGND38 — Cab Ground Point (W53)
XGND3 — Transmission Ground Point (W13) Y01 — Front PTO Solenoid; (W2)
XGND4 — Cab Ground Point (W4) Y02 — Fuel Pump; (W13)
XGND5 — Cab Ground Point (W4) Y03 — Front Wheel Drive Solenoid; (W13)
XGND6 — Rear Window Wiper Ground Point (W10) Y04 — Rear PTO Solenoid; (W13)
XGND7 — Rear Window Wiper Ground Point (W10) Y05 — Differential Lock Solenoid; (W13)
XGND9 — Engine Ground Point (W3) Y07 — Enable Solenoid; (W20)
XGND10 — Cab Roof Ground Point (W11) Y08 — Forward Solenoid; (W20)
XGND11 — Cab Roof Ground Point (W11) Y09 — Reverse Solenoid; (W20)
XGND12 — Cab Roof Ground Point (W11) Y10 — TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle Solenoid; (W36)
XGND13 — Cab Roof Ground Point (W11) Y11 — TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle Solenoid; (W36)
XGND14 — Cab roof Ground Point (W11) Y13 — Fuel Pump; (W23)
XGND15 — Fan Ground Point (W8)
240
10
14
AG,OUOE003,9048 –19–01MAY00–8/8
Identification of Sections in Functional Schematic
SE1 — Starter and Charging Circuit SE13 — Beacon

SE2 — Basic Informator SE14 — 3-Pin and 7-Pin Receptacle
SE3 — Horn SE15 — HCU
SE4 — Cigarette Lighter and Operator’s Seat SE16 — BCU
SE5 — Front PTO SE17 — Signal Receptacle
SE6 — Lights SE18 — Performance Monitor
SE7 — Work Lights SE19 — Electrical Reverser Control
SE8 — Front Loader Plug SE20 — SFA (for TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle)
SE9 — Radio, Digital Clock, Dome and Shift Console SE21 — PowrQuad Plus- and AutoQuad
Lights II-Transmission Shift
SE10 — Fan and Air Conditioner SE22 — BUS Terminator and Terminating Resistor
SE11 — Windshield Wiper and Washer SE23 — ECU
SE12 — Rear Window Wiper and Washer SE25 — Backup Alarm
AG,OUOE003,9055 –19–01MAY00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-14 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=94
Wiring Harness Identification in Wiring Diagrams
W3 — Engine Wiring Harness W20 — Transmission Wiring Harness

W4 — Cab Wiring Harness W27 — Electrical Starting Aid Wiring Harness
W5 — Turn Signal Wiring Harness W29 — 7-Pin Receptacle Wiring Harness
W6 — Windshield Wiper Switch Wiring Harness W31 — 3-Pin Receptacle Wiring Harness
W7 — Windshield Wiper Wiring Harness W34 — Electronic Control Unit Wiring Harness
W8 — Air Conditioner and Fan Wiring Harness W35 — Stepper Motor Driver Wiring Harness
W9 — Position Feedeback Unit W36 — TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle Wiring Harness
W10 — Rear Window Wiper Wiring Harness W39 — Front PTO Wiring Harness
W11 — Cab Roof Wiring Harness W40 — Backup Alarm Wiring Harness
W13 — Transmission Wiring Harness W41 — PowrQuad Transmission Switch Harness
W14 — Work Light Wiring Harness (Front Grille) W42 — SyncroPlus Transmission Switch Harness
W18 — Work Light Wiring Harness (Cab Roof) W53 — Turn Signal Light Wiring Harness
240
10
15
PowrQuad is a trademark of Deere & Company.
SyncroPlus is a trademark of Deere & Company. AG,OUOE003,9056 –19–01MAY00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-15 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=95
Functional Schematic — Complete Tractor
LX1025079 –UN–21DEC00
LX1025079
Functional Schematic (Complete Tractor; SE1)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–1/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-16 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=96
LX1019919 –UN–26MAR98
LX1019919
Functional Schematic-Cont. (Complete Tractor;

SE1A, SE2)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–2/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-17 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=97
LX1023956 –UN–08MAY00
LX1023956
SE2)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–3/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-18 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=98
LX1019920 –UN–26MAR98
LX1019920

SE3, SE4, SE5)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–4/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-19 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=99
LX1024819 –UN–21DEC00
LX1024819
SE6)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–5/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-20 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=100
LX1024820 –UN–21DEC00
LX1024820

SE7)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–6/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-21 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=101
LX1025078 –UN–21DEC00
LX1025078
SE8, SE9)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–7/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-22 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=102
LX1025081 –UN–21DEC00
LX1025081

SE10, SE11)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–8/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-23 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=103
LX1024824 –UN–21DEC00
LX1024824
SE12, SE13, SE14)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–9/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-24 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=104
LX1019583 –UN–26MAR98
LX1019583

SE15)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–10/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-25 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=105
Functional Schematic-Cont. (Complete Tractor; SE16)
240
10
26
–UN–21DEC00
LX1024587
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-26 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=106
LX1024588 –UN–21DEC00
LX1024588

SE16)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-27 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=107
LX1021684 –UN–18NOV98
LX1021684
SE16)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-28 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=108
LX1021608 –UN–18NOV98
LX1021608

SE16)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-29 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=109
LX1025082 –UN–21DEC00
LX1025082
SE16, SE17, SE18)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-30 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=110
LX1019595 –UN–26MAR98
LX1019595

SE19)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-31 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=111
LX1019596 –UN–18MAY99
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-32 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=112
LX1019597 –UN–15JUN99
LX1019597

SE20)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-33 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=113
LX1024586 –UN–21DEC00
A09
c c c c
LX1024586
SE21A)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-34 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=114
LX1025083 –UN–21DEC00
LX1025083

SE21B)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-35 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=115
LX1025084 –UN–21DEC00
LX1025084
SE21C)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-36 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=116
LX1025085 –UN–21DEC00
LX1025085

SE21D)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-37 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=117
LX1019933 –UN–26MAR98
LX1019933
SE22)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-38 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=118
LX1024167 –UN–10MAR00
LX1024167

SE23)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-39 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=119
240
10
40
–UN–30APR98
LX1020063

SE25)
AG,OUOE003,9057 –19–01MAY00–25/25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-40 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=120
W3 — Wiring Harness— Engine (AL150218)
240
10
41
–UN–12OCT98
LX1021560
Continued on next page AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–1/26
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-41 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=121
G02 Alternator
Terminal Wire Number Color of Wire To Plug or

Number and Component
Cross-Section
D+ ........... 306CA—1 .... light blue ...... X03—A7
30 ............ 002CA—25 .. red ............... M01—30, K01—3,
–UN–12DEC96
X03,1—F2E
LX013190
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–2/26
K01 Starter Motor Relay

240
10 Terminal Wire Number Color of Wire To Plug or
42 Number and Component
Cross-Section
1 .............. 506C—1,5 ... light blue ...... X03—B7
2 .............. 310CE—1,5 . black ............ XGND9, X79—B,
–UN–12DEC96
X215—J, X306—B
3 .............. 002CD—2.5 . red ............... G02—30, M01—30,
X03,1—F2E
4 .............. 309CA—2.5 . white ............ M01—50, X03—B12
LX013192
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–3/26
K24 Terminal with Ring,

for Injection Pump Shut-Off Valve

Cross-Section
–UN–19MAR98
(-) ............ 022C—1 ...... red ............... X03—B1
LX1019984
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–4/26
M01 Starter Motor

Cross-Section
30 ............ 002CC—50 .. red ............... G02—30, K01—3,
X03,1—F2E
–UN–12DEC96
50 ............ 309CB—2.5 . white ............ K01—4, X03—B12

LX013191
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-42 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=122
X02 4-Pin Plug - Front PTO Wiring Harness

Connection Point (W30)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 301C—1 ...... brown ........... X215—D
B ............. 550C—1 ...... black ............ X215—E
C ............. 607CA—1 .... pale purple .. X03—B6
D ............. 310CF—1 .... black ............ XGND9
LX1017887
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–6/26
X03/2 24-Pin Plug —

Engine Harness Connection Point (W4) 240
10
Terminal Wire Number Color of Wire To Plug or 43
Cross-Section
A1 ........... 325CA—1 .... dark green ... X76—A
A2 ........... 531CA—1 .... brown ........... X76—B
A3 ........... 329C—1 ...... white ............ X262—A
A4 ........... 347C—1 ...... pale purple .. X78—A
A5 ........... 351C—1 ...... brown ........... X70/2—A
A6 ........... 307C—2.5 ... pale purple .. X79—A
A7 ........... 306CA—1 .... light blue ...... G02—D+
A8 ........... 903CC—1 .... orange ......... X66/1—A
A9 ........... 124C—1 ...... yellow .......... X68—B
A10 ......... 114C—1 ...... yellow .......... X67—B
A11 ......... 139BC—1,5 . white ............ X67—A
A12 ......... 111CA—1 .... brown ........... X139—A
B1 ........... 022C—1 ...... red ............... K24
B2 ........... 708C—1 ...... gray ............. X205—B
B3 ........... 385C—1 ...... dark green ... X306—A
B4 ........... 703C—1 ...... orange ......... X205—A
B5 ........... 213C—1 ...... orange ......... X130—A
B6 ........... 607CA—1 .... pale purple .. X02—C
B7 ........... 506C—1,5 ... light blue ...... K01—1
B8 ........... 710C—1 ...... black ............ X205—C
–UN–10OCT97
B9 ........... 707C—1 ...... pale purple .. X205—F
B10 ......... 706C—1 ...... light blue ...... X205—E
B11 ......... vacant
B12 ......... 309CC—1 .... white ............ M01—50, K01—4
LX1017942
F2E ......... 002CB—50 .. red ............... G02—30, M01—30,
K01—3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-43 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=123
X66/1 1—Pin Plug for

Horn

Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 903CC—1 .... orange ......... X03—A8
LX013178
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–8/26

240 Horn
10
Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 310CN—1 .... black ............ X68—C
LX013178
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–9/26
X67 3—Pin Plug for

Right Headlight

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 139CA—1 .... white ............ X68—A
A ............. 139CB—1,5 . white ............ X03—A11
B ............. 114C—1 ...... yellow .......... X03—A10
C ............. 310CC—1,5 . black ............ XGND9
C ............. 310CP—1 .... black ............ X68—C
LX1017977
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–10/26

Left Headlight

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 139CA—1 .... white ............ X67—A

B ............. 124C—1 ...... yellow .......... X03—A9
C ............. 310CN—1,5 . black ............ X66/2—A
C ............. 310CP—1 .... black ............ X67—C
LX1017977
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-44 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=124

Air Cleaner Restriction Indicator Light

Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 310CJ—1 .... black ............ XGND9
LX013178
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–12/26

Air Cleaner Restriction Indicator Light 240
10
Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 351C—1 ...... brown ........... X03—A5
LX013178
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–13/26
X76 2—Pin Plug,

Sending Unit for Tachometer

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 325CA—1 .... dark green ... X03—A1
B ............. 531CA—1 .... brown ........... X03—A2
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–14/26
X78 1—Pin Plug,

Sending Unit for Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light

Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 347C—1 ...... pale purple .. X03—A4

LX013178
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-45 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=125
X79 2—Pin Plug, Heating

Element for Fuel Preheater

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 325CA—2.5 . dark green ... X03—A1
B ............. 310CM—2.5 black ............ XGND9, K01—2,
X215—J, X306—B
LX1017909
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–16/26

240 Compressor Clutch
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 213C—1 ...... orange ......... X03—B5
LX1017881
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–17/26
X139 2—Pin Plug

Front Grille Work Light Connection Point (W14)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 111CA—1 .... brown ........... X03—A12
B ............. 310CK—1 .... black ............ XGND9
LX1017948
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-46 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=126
X205 8-Pin Plug (Connection Point on

FWD Axle with TLS Wiring Harness; W36)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 703C—1 ...... orange ......... X03—B4
B ............. 708C—1 ...... gray ............. X03—B2
C ............. 710C—1 ...... black ............ X03—B8
D ............. vacant
E ............. 706C—1 ...... light blue ...... X03—B10
LX1017896
F .............. 707C—1 ...... pale purple .. X03—B9
G ............. vacant
H ............. 310CH—1 .... black ............ XGND9
240
10
47
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–19/26
X214 2-Pin Plug for

Fuel Injection Pump
–UN–20MAR98
Cross-Section
A ............. 354CA—1 .... yellow .......... X215—C
B ............. 355CA—1 .... dark green ... X215—B
LX1019985
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–20/26
X215 10-Pin Plug

Engine Harness Connection Point (W4)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. vacant
B ............. 355CA—1 .... dark green ... X214—B
C ............. 354CA—1 .... yellow .......... X214—A
D ............. 301C—1 ...... brown ........... X02—A
E ............. 550C—1 ...... black ............ X02—B
LX1017897
F .............. 319C—1 ...... white ............ X261—A

G ............. 371CR—1 .... brown ........... X261—B
H ............. vacant
J .............. 310CR—1 .... black ............ XGND9, K01—2,
X79—B, X306—B
K ............. 050C—1 ...... black ............ X262—B
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-47 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=127
X261 2-Pin Plug for

Coolant Temperature Sender
–UN–20MAR98
Cross-Section
A ............. 319C—1 ...... white ............ X215—F
B ............. 371CC—1 .... brown ........... X215—G
LX1019985
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–22/26
X262 2-Pin Plug for

240 Coolant Temperature Indicator
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 329C—1 ...... white ............ X03—A3
B ............. 050C—1 ...... black ............ X215—K
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–23/26
X305 1-Pin Plug for

Voltage-to-Ground on Radiator

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 310CQ—1.5 black ............ XGND9
LX1017944
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–24/26
X306 2-Pin Plug for Connection Point Electrical

Starting Aid
Wiring Harness (W27)

–UN–10OCT97
Cross-Section
A ............. 385C—1 ...... white ............ X03—B3
B ............. 310CS—1 .... black ............ XGND9, K01—2,
X79—B, X215—J
LX1017883
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-48 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=128
XGND9 Ground Point

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310CC—1,5 . black ............ X67—C
(-) ............ 310CF—1 .... black ............ X02—D
–UN–12DEC96
(-) ............ 310CH—1 .... black ............ X205—H
(-) ............ 310CJ—1 .... black ............ X70/1—A
(-) ............ 310CK—1 .... black ............ X139—B
(-) ............ 310CL—2.5 . black ............ K01—2, X79—B,
LX013685
X215—J, X306—B
(-) ............ 310CQ—1.5 black ............ X305—A
240
10
49
AG,LX25599,297 –19–01MAY00–26/26
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-49 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=129
Wiring Harness for Electrical Starting Aid (W27; AL119472)
240
10
50
–UN–27NOV97
LX1018301
Continued on next page AG,LX25599,15 –19–01FEB00–1/6
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-50 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=130
F06 Fuse for Electrical Starting Aid
Terminal Wire Number Wire Color To Plug or

Cross-Section
A ............. 002X—10 .... red ............... G02—30
–UN–08DEC97
B ............. 352X—10 .... red ............... K36—4
LX1017583
AG,LX25599,15 –19–01FEB00–2/6
K36 Relay for Electrical Starting Aid

240
Terminal Wire Number Wire Color To Plug or 10
Number and Component 51
Cross-Section
1 .............. 385X—1 ...... dark green ... X306—A
2 .............. 310X—1 ...... black ............ X306—B
–UN–12DEC96
3 .............. 342X—10 .... red ............... R15—A
4 .............. 352X—10 .... red ............... F06—B
LX013192
AG,LX25599,15 –19–01FEB00–3/6
G02 Terminal with Ring, for Alternator

Cross-Section
30 ............ 002X—10 .... red ............... F06—A
–UN–12DEC96
LX013190
AG,LX25599,15 –19–01FEB00–4/6
R15 Terminal with Ring, Heating Element for

Electrical Starting Aid

Cross-Section
–UN–18NOV97
A ............. 342X—10 .... red ............... K36—3

LX1017585
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-51 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=131
X306 2-Pin Plug for Electrical Starting Aid Wiring

Harness (W3)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 385X—1 ...... dark green ... K36—1
B ............. X310X—1 .... black ............ K36—2
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,15 –19–01FEB00–6/6
240
10
52
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-52 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=132
240
10
53
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-53 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=133
Front Corner Worklight Wiring Harness (W14; AL81307)
240
10
54
–UN–12MAR98
LX1020085
AG,LX25599,14 –19–01FEB00–1/4
X69/1 2-Pin Plug, Worklight at R.h. Front Corner
Terminal Lead Number Wire Color To Plug or

Number and Section Component
A ............. 111A—1 ...... brown ........... X139—A, X69/2—A
B ............. 310A—1 ...... black ............ X139—B, X69/2—B
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017905
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-54 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=134
X69/2 2-Pin Plug, Worklight at L.h. Front Corner

A ............. 111B—1 ...... brown ........... X139—A, X69/1—A
B ............. 310B—1 ...... black ............ X139—B, X69/1—B
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017905
AG,LX25599,14 –19–01FEB00–3/4
X139 2-Pin Plug (Front Corner Worklight Connection

Point; W3) 240
10
Terminal Lead Number Wire Color To Plug or 55
A ............. 111A—1 ...... brown ........... X69/1—A
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 111B—1 ...... brown ........... X69/2—A
B ............. 310A—1 ...... black ............ X69/1—B
B ............. 310B—1 ...... black ............ X69/2—B
LX1017949
AG,LX25599,14 –19–01FEB00–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-55 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=135
TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle Wiring Harness (W36; AL113493)
240
10
56
–UN–12MAR98
LX1020073
AG,LX25599,16 –19–01FEB00–1/5
X205 8-Pin Plug (Connection Point on FWD Axle with

TLS; W3)

A ............. 703X—1 ...... orange ......... X209—C
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 708X—1 ...... gray ............. X209—B

C ............. 710X—1 ...... black ............ X209—A
D ............. not applicable
E ............. 706X—1 ...... light blue ...... X209—A
F .............. 707X—1 ...... pale purple .. X207—A
LX1017895
G ............. not applicable

H ............. 310XN—1 .... black ............ X206—B, X207—B
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-56 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=136
X206 2-Pin Plug for Solenoid

A ............. 706X—1 ...... light blue ...... X205—E
B ............. 310XR—1 .... black ............ X205—H, X207—B
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,16 –19–01FEB00–3/5

240
Number and Section Component 57
A ............. 707X—1 ...... pale purple .. X205—F
B ............. 310XP—1 .... black ............ X205—H, X206—B
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,16 –19–01FEB00–4/5
X209 3-Pin Plug for Position Sensor

A ............. 710X—1 ...... black ............ X205—C
B ............. 708X—1 ...... gray ............. X205—B
–UN–10OCT97
C ............. 703X—1 ...... orange ......... X205—A
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,16 –19–01FEB00–5/5
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-57 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=137
Front PTO Wiring Harness (W39; AL110126)
240
10
58
–UN–09APR98
LX1020074
AG,LX25599,4 –19–01FEB00–1/4
X02 4-Pin Plug - Front PTO Wiring Harness


A ............. 301N—1 ...... brown ........... X167—B
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 550N—1 ...... black ............ X167—A

C ............. 607N—1 ...... pale purple .. X166—A
D ............. 310N—1 ...... black ............ X166—B
LX1017886
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-58 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=138

A ............. 607N—1 ...... pale purple .. X02—C
B ............. 310N—1 ...... black ............ X02—D
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,4 –19–01FEB00–3/4
X167 2-Pin Plug for Front PTO Speed Indicator

240
Number and Section Component 59
A ............. 550N—1 ...... black ............ X02—B
B ............. 301N—1 ...... brown ........... X02—A
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017901
AG,LX25599,4 –19–01FEB00–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-59 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=139
Cab Wiring Harness (W4; AL151379)
240
10
60
–UN–12JUL00
LX1025162
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-60 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=140
F101 — F120 Fuses

(Fuse Box 1)

Cross-Section
F101A ..... 092AC—4 .... red ............... S01—BAT1, S01—
BAT2
F101E ..... 012AC—4 .... red ............... X03—F1A, F114E,
F103E, F120E,
F104E, F102E,
F105E, F118E, F119E
F102A ..... 112AB—1,5 . red ............... X133—23, X126—B
F102E ..... 012AH—1,5 . red ............... X03—F1A, F114E,
F101E, F103E,
F120E, F104E,
F105E, F118E, F119E
F103A ..... 262A—4 ...... red ............... K102—30
F103E ..... 012AD—4 .... red ............... X03—F1A, F114E, 240
F101E, F120E, 10
–UN–10OCT97
F104E, F102E, 61
F105E, F118E, F119E
F104A ..... 142A—4 ...... red ............... S09—B
F104E ..... 012AF—4 .... red ............... X03—F1A, F114E,
F101E, F103E,
LX1017939
F120E, F102E,
F105E, F118E, F119E
F105A ..... 152AB—2.5 . red ............... X21—10, K107—30,
K103—30
F105E ..... 012AG—2.5 . red ............... X03—F1A, F114E,
F101E, F103E,
F120E, F104E,
F102E, F118E, F119E
F106A ..... 124AA—1 .... yellow .......... X03—A9, X248—13
F106E ..... 164AB—1 .... yellow .......... F107E, X101M—F
F107A ..... 114A—1 ...... yellow .......... X03—A10
F107E ..... 164AA—1 .... yellow .......... F106E, X101M—F
F108A ..... 189A—1 ...... white ............ X101M—B
F108E ..... 159AA—1 .... white ............ X26—22, X21—3
F109A ..... 128AA—1 .... gray ............. X234—A, X07—2,
X120/1—A
F109E ..... 157AA—1 .... pale purple .. F110E, X269M—C
F110A ..... 118AB—1 .... gray ............. X234—C, X07—1
F110E ..... 157AB—1 .... pale purple .. F109E, X269M—C
F111A ..... 571A—1 ...... brown ........... X133—5
F111E ..... 072AB—1 .... red ............... K101—87, F211E,
F215E, K106—86,
X247—8, F112E,
F113E, F115E,
F116E, F117E,
F202E, F205E
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-61 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=141
F101 — F120 Fuses

(Fuse Box 1)
(continued)

Cross-Section
F112A ..... 273AC—1,5 . orange ......... X250/2—A, X250/1—A
F112E ..... 072AC—1,5 . red ............... K101—87, F211E,
F215E, K106—86,
X247—8, F111E,
F113E, F115E,
F116E, F117E,
F202E, F205E
F113A ..... 973AH—1 .... orange ......... X07—9, X21—6,
X242—B, X245—C,
X03—J7, X125—A,
X122—B
240 F113E ..... 072AD—1 .... red ............... K101—87, F211E,
10 F215E, K106—86,
–UN–10OCT97
62 X247—8, F111E,
F112E, F115E,
F116E, F117E,
F202E, F205E
F114A ..... 902A—4 ...... red ............... K101—30
LX1017939
F114E ..... 012AB—4 .... red ............... X03—F1A, F101E,
F103E, F120E,
F104E, F102E,
F105E, F118E, F119E
F115A ..... 886AB—1 .... light blue ...... X222—D3, X13—H2,
X135—6, X133—35
F115E ..... 072AE—1 .... red ............... K101—87, F211E,
F215E, K106—86,
X247—8, F111E,
F112E, F113E,
F116E, F117E,
F202E, F205E
F116A ..... 856AB—1 .... light blue ...... X13—A2, X29—A
F116E ..... 072AF—1 .... red ............... K101—87, F211E,
F215E, K106—86,
X247—8, F111E,
F112E, F113E,
F115E, F117E,
F202E, F205E
F117A ..... 971AB—0,5 . brown ........... X26—14, X135—10
F117E ..... 072AG—0,5 . red ............... K101—87, F211E,
F215E, K106—86,
X247—8, F111E,
F112E, F113E,
F115E, F116E,
F202E, F205E
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-62 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=142
F101 — F120 Fuses

(Fuse Box 1)
(continued)

Cross-Section
F118A ..... 912AB—1,5 . red ............... X26—10, X128/1—A,
X07—7
F118E ..... 012AE—1,5 . .................... X03—F1A, F114E,
red F101E, F103E,
F120E, F104E,
F102E, F105E, F119E
F119A ..... 332A—2.5 ... red ............... K105—30
F119E ..... 012AJ—2.5 .. red ............... X03—F1A, F114E,
F101E, F103E,
F120E, F104E,
F102E, F105E, F118E
F120A ..... 292A—2.5 ... red ............... K104—30 240
F120E ..... 012AK—4 .... red ............... X03—F1A, F114E, 10
–UN–10OCT97
F101E, F103E, 63
F104E, F102E,
F105E, F118E, F119E
LX1017939
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-63 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=143
F201 — F220 Fuses

(Fuse Box 2)

Cross-Section
F201A ..... 622AB—1 .... red ............... X222—E2, X201—A
F201E ..... 022AA—1,5 . red ............... S01—IGN, X03—F7,
X03—B1, K105—86
F202A ..... 672AB—1 .... red ............... X222—L6, X201—C,
X212—B, K212—30,
K213—30, X193—A
F202E ..... 072AH—1 .... red ............... K101—87, F211E,
F215E, K106—86,
X247—8, F111E,
F112E, F113E,
F115E, F116E,
F117E, F205E
240 F203A ..... 349AB—4 .... white ............ F204E, K203—87
10 F203E ..... 255A—4 ...... dark green ... X232—E
–UN–10OCT97
64 F204A ..... 260A—1 ...... black ............ X232—F
F204E ..... 349AA—1 .... white ............ F203A, K203—87
F205A ..... 562AA—1 .... red ............... X222—J3, K203—86
F205E ..... 072AJ—1 ..... red ............... K101—87, F211E,
F215E, K106—86,
LX1017940
X247—8, F111E,
F112E, F113E,
F115E, F116E,
F117E, F202E
F206A ..... 162A—2.5 ... red ............... K205—30
F206E ..... 012AM—2.5 red ............... X03—F1A, F208E,
F212E, K204—30,
K203—30
F207A ..... 104AD—1 .... yellow .......... X101M—D, F210E,
F209E
F207E ..... 135AD—1,5 . dark green ... K206—86, D122E,
X25—21, K205—86,
S09—H
F208A ..... 132A—2.5 ... red ............... K206—30
F208E ..... 012AL—2.5 . red ............... X03—F1A, F206E,
F212E, K204—30,
K203—30
F209A ..... 174A—1 ...... yellow .......... X07—18
F209E ..... 104AC—1 .... yellow .......... X101M—D, F210E,
F207A
F210A ..... 184AA—1 .... yellow .......... X248—11, X07—19
F210E ..... 104AB—1 .... yellow .......... X101M—D, F209E,
F207A
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-64 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=144
F201 — F220 Fuses

(Fuse Box 2) - (continued) -

Cross-Section
F211A ..... 572AB—1 .... red ............... X222—H3, X03—C3,
X244—B, X249—C
F211E ..... 072AK—1 .... red ............... K101—87, F215E,
K106—86, X247—8,
F111E, F112E,
F113E, F115E,
F116E, F117E,
F202E, F205E
F212A ..... 122AA—1,5 . red ............... X421—A
F212E ..... 012AR—1.5 . red ............... X03—F1A, F206E,
F208E, K204—30,
K203—30
F213A ..... 236A—1,5 ... light blue ...... X20A—A 240
F213E ..... 212AA—1,5 . red ............... F214E, F219E, S01— 10
–UN–10OCT97
ACC, K204—86 65
F214A ..... 246AB—1,5 . light blue ...... X40—A, X58—A
F214E ..... 212AB—1,5 . red ............... F213E, F219E, S01—
ACC, K204—86
F215A ..... 545AA—1,5 . dark green ... X127—A, K25/1—8,
LX1017940
X230—A, X07—16
F215E ..... 072AL—1,5 . red ............... K101—87, F211E,
K106—86, X247—8,
F111E, F112E,
F113E, F115E,
F116E, F117E,
F202E, F205E
F216A ..... 138AC—1 .... gray ............. X135—7, X25—2,
X07—6
F216E ..... 158AB—1 .... gray ............. K103—86, X269M—B,
S09—C
F217A ..... 222A—2.5 ... red ............... X50—1
F217E ..... 242AB—2.5 . red ............... F218E, K204—87,
K207—86
F218A ..... 231A—2.5 ... brown ........... X50—2
F218E ..... 242AA—2.5 . red ............... F217E, K204—87,
K207—86
F219A ..... 203A—1 ...... orange ......... K207—30
F219E ..... 212AC—1 .... red ............... F213E, F214E, S01—
ACC, K204—86
F220A ..... 204AC—1,5 . yellow .......... X260—C, X37—A
F220E ..... 202AC—1,5 . red ............... K104—86, X21—11,
K102—87
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-65 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=145
V101 — V105 Diodes

(Fuse Box 1)

Cross-Section
D121A ..... vacant
D121E ..... vacant
D122A ..... 103AB—1 .... orange ......... S09—M, K107—86
D122E ..... 135AB—1 .... dark green ... K206—86, X25—21,
F207E, K205—86,
S09—H
D123A ..... vacant
D123E ..... vacant
D124A ..... vacant
D124E ..... vacant
D125A ..... 310AP—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K107—85,
K104—85, K105—85,
240 K103—85, K102—85
10 D125E ..... 085A—1 ...... dark green ... K101—85
–UN–10OCT97
66
LX1017939
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–7/91

(Fuse Box 2)

Cross-Section
D221A ..... vacant
D221E ..... vacant
D222A ..... 309AA—1 .... white ............ X03—B12, D223E
D222E ..... 692A—1 ...... red ............... K213—85
D123A ..... 308A—1 ...... gray ............. X222—H1
D123E ..... 309AC—1 .... white ............ D222A, X03—B12
D124A ..... vacant
D124E ..... vacant
D125A ..... vacant
D125E ..... vacant
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017940
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-66 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=146
K25/1 9-Pin Plug for

Front PTO Relay

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. vacant
2 .............. vacant
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. 550A—1 ...... black ............ X215—E
5 .............. 050AD—1 .... black ............ XGND2
LX1017994
6 .............. 907AA—1 .... pale purple .. X235—A, X230—B
7 .............. 301A—1 ...... brown ........... X215—D
8 .............. 545AC—1 .... dark green ... F215A, X127—A,
X230—A, X07—16
9 .............. vacant
240
10
67
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–9/91
K25/2 9-Pin Plug for

Front PTO Relay

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. vacant
2 .............. 901A—1 ...... brown ........... X127—B
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. vacant
5 .............. 178A—0,5 ... gray ............. X247—9
LX1017994
6 .............. 607AA—1 .... pale purple .. X25—9, X03—B6
7 .............. 228AC—1 .... gray ............. X133—41, K106—85,
X222—K4
8 .............. 505AA—0,5 . dark green ... X25—26
9 .............. 904A—1 ...... yellow .......... X127—C
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-67 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=147
K101 — K113 Relays

(Fuse Box 1)

Cross-Section
K101 Power Supply Relay for Electronics
30 ............ 902A—4 ...... red ............... F114A

85 ............ 085A—1 ...... dark green ... D125E
86 ............ 192AB—1 .... red ............... K102—86, S01—ELX
87 ............ 072AA—4 .... red ............... F211E, F215E,
K106—86, X247—8,
F111E, F112E,
F113E, F115E,
F116E, F117E,
240 F202E, F205E
10 87A ......... vacant
–UN–10OCT97
68
K102 Relay for Accessories
30 ............ 262A—4 ...... red ............... F103A
LX1017939
85 ............ 310AN—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K107—85,
D125A, K104—85,
K105—85, K103—85
86 ............ 192AA—1 red ............... K101—86, S01—ELX
....................
87 ............ 202AD—4 .... red ............... K104—86, X21—11,
F220E
87A ......... vacant
K103 Headlight Relay
30 ............ 152AD—4 .... red ............... X21—10, F105A,

K107—30
85 ............ 310BL—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K107—85,
D125A, K104—85,
K105—85, K102—85
86 ............ 158AA—1 .... gray ............. F216E, X269M—B,
S09—C
87 ............ 113AC—4 .... orange ......... K107—87, X21—1
87A ......... vacant
K104 Relay for 3-Pin Power Outlet Socket
30 ............ 292A—4 ...... red ............... F120A

85 ............ 310AQ—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K107—85,
D125A, K105—85,
K103—85, K102—85
86 ............ 202AA—1,5 . red ............... X21—11, F220E,
K102—87
87 ............ 312AB—4 .... red ............... X234—E, X132—6,
X239—A
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-68 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=148
K101 — K113 Relays (Fuse Box 1)

(continued)

Cross-Section
K105 Fuel Preheater Relay
30 ............ 332A—2.5 ... red ............... F119A

85 ............ 310AR—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K107—85,
D125A, K104—85,
K103—85, K102—85
86 ............ 022AE—1 .... red ............... F201E, S01—IGN,
X03—F7, X03—B1
87 ............ 307AC—2.5 . pale purple .. X239—B, X03—A6
87A ......... vacant
240
10
K106 Acoustic Alarm
–UN–10OCT97
69
85 ............ 228AD—1 .... gray ............. X133—41, K25/2—7,

X222—K4
86 ............ 072AM—1 ... red ............... K101—87, F211E,
LX1017939
F215E, X247—8,
F111E, F112E,
F113E, F115E,
F116E, F117E,
F202E, F205E
K107 Vacant
30 ............ 152AC—2.5 . red ............... X21—10, F105A,

K103—30
85 ............ 310AO—1 .... black ............ XGND1, D125A,
K104—85, K105—85,
K103—85, K102—85
86 ............ 103AC—1 .... orange ......... S09—M, D122A
87 ............ 113AA—2.5 . orange ......... K103—87, X21—1
87A ......... vacant
K108 Right Turn Signal Relay
30 ............ 125AE—1 .... dark green ... X133—1, X26—6,

X234—D, X07—4
85 ............ 155AD—1 .... dark green ... K109—85, X21—9,
X133—10
86 ............ 127AD—1 .... pale purple .. X21—4, X133—33,
K109—86
87 ............ 126A—1 ...... light blue ...... X07/1—A
87A ......... vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-69 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=149

(Fuse Box 1)
(continued)

Cross-Section
K109 Left Turn Signal Relay
30 ............ 107AE—1 .... pale purple .. X07—3, X234—F,

X133—7, X25—20
85 ............ 155AC—1 .... dark green ... X21—9, K108—85,
X133—10
86 ............ 127AC—1 .... pale purple .. X21—4, X133—33,
K108—86
87 ............ 119A—1 ...... white ............ X07/1—B
240
87A ......... vacant
10
–UN–10OCT97
70
K110 Vacant
K111 Vacant
LX1017939
K112 Vacant
K113 Vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-70 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=150

(Fuse Box 2)

Cross-Section
K201 Vacant
K202 Vacant
K203 Relay for Stepper Motor Drivers
30 ............ 012AP—4 .... red ............... X03—F1A, F206E,

F208E, F212E,
K204—30
85 ............ 310AS—0,5 . black ............ K205—85, K211—85, 240
K210—85, K212—85, 10
–UN–10OCT97
K206—85, XGND5 71
86 ............ 562AC—0,5 . red ............... F205A, X222—J3
87 ............ 349A—4 ...... white ............ F204E, F203A
87A ......... vacant
LX1017940
K204 Fan Relay
30 ............ 012AN—4 .... red ............... X03—F1A, F206E,

F208E, F212E,
K203—30
85 ............ 226AD—1 .... light blue ...... K207—85, X50—3
86 ............ 212AE—1 .... red ............... F213E, F214E,
F219E, S01—ACC
87 ............ 242AC—4 .... red ............... F218E, F217E,
K207—86
K205 Worklight Relay
30 ............ 162A—2.5 ... red ............... F206A

85 ............ 310AK—1 .... black ............ K203—85, K211—85,
K210—85, K212—85,
K206—85, XGND5
86 ............ 135AE—1 .... dark green ... K206—86, D122E,
X25—21, F207E,
S09—H
87 ............ 199AC—2.5 . white ............ X260—E, X260—A
87A ......... vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-71 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=151

(Fuse Box 2)
(continued)

Cross-Section
K206 Worklight Relay
30 ............ 132A—2.5 ... red ............... F208A

85 ............ 310AY—1 .... black ............ K205—85, K203—85,
K211—85, K210—85,
K212—85, XGND5
86 ............ 135AA—0,5 . dark green ... D122E, X25—21,
F207E, K205—86,
S09—H
240
87 ............ 198AA—2.5 . gray ............. X260—D, X260—B
10
–UN–10OCT97
87A ......... vacant
72
K207 Air Conditioning Relay
30 ............ 203A—1 ...... orange ......... F219A
LX1017940
85 ............ 226AB—1 .... light blue ...... X50—3, K204—85
86 ............ 242AD—1,5 . red ............... F218E, F217E,
K204—87
87 ............ 205A—1 ...... dark green ... X45/1—A
87A ......... vacant
K208 Vacant
K209 Vacant
K210 Reverse Relay
30 ............ 687AC—1 .... pale purple .. X222—M4, X201—E

85 ............ 310AV—1 .... black ............ K205—85, K203—85,
K211—85, K212—85,
K206—85, XGND5
86 ............ 698AD—1 .... gray ............. X193—D, X222—L5,
K211—86
87 ............ 697A—1 ...... pale purple .. X193—C
87A ......... vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-72 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=152

(Fuse Box 2)
(continued)

Cross-Section
K211 Forward Relay
30 ............ 686AC—1 .... light blue ...... X201—D, X222—M6,

K211—30
85 ............ 310AU—1 .... black ............ K205—85, K203—85,
K210—85, K212—85,
K206—85, XGND5
86 ............ 698AC—1 .... gray ............. X193—D, X222—L5,
K210—86
240
87 ............ 696A—1 ...... light blue ...... X193—B
10
–UN–10OCT97
87A ......... vacant
73
K212 Not-Neutral Relay
30 ............ 672AF—1 .... red ............... F202A, X222—L6,
LX1017940
X201—C, X212—B,
K213—30, X193—A
85 ............ 310AW—1 ... black ............ K205—85, K203—85,
K211—85, K210—85,
K206—85, XGND5
86 ............ 691AC—1 .... brown ........... X201—B, X222—M7
87 ............ 693AA—1 .... orange ......... X222—M3
87A ......... 694AA—1 .... yellow .......... X222—M1, K213—86,
K213—87
K213 Latch Relay
30 ............ 672AE—1 .... red ............... F202A, X222—L6,

X201—C, X212—B,
K212—30, X193—A
85 ............ 692A—1 ...... red ............... D222E
86 ............ 694AC—1 .... yellow .......... K212—87A, X222—
M1, K213—87
87 ............ 694AD—1 .... yellow .......... K212—87A, X222—
M1, K213—86
87A ......... vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-73 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=153
R04 Terminating Resistor CCD-BUS

Cross-Section
A ............. 924AO—1 .... yellow .......... X29—C, X222—B7,
–UN–16OCT97
X133—22, X13—C3,
X135—9, X425M—B
B ............. 925AO—1 .... dark green ... X29—B, X222—B6,
X133—45, X13—B2,
X135—4, X425M—A
LX1016165
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–17/91
S01 8-Pin Plug for

240 Key Switch
10
Cross-Section
–UN–13MAY98
ACC ........ 212AD—4 .... red ............... F213E, F214E,
F219E, K204—86
AID .......... 385A—1 ...... dark green ... X03—B3
BAT1 ....... 092AA—2.5 . red ............... F101A, S01—BAT2
BAT2 ....... 092AB—2.5 . red ............... F101A, S01—BAT1
LX1020444
ELX ......... 192AC—1,5 . red ............... K102—86, K101—86
GND ........ vacant
IGN ......... 022AB—2.5 . red ............... F201E, X03—F7,
X03—B1, K105—86
ST ........... 311AC—1,5 . brown ........... X222—M2, X133—12,
X03—C1
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–18/91
S09 5-Pin Plug for

Light Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 142A—4 ...... red ............... F104A

C ............. 158AD—1 .... gray ............. K103—86, F216E,
X269M—B
H ............. 135AF—2.5 . dark green ... K206—86, D122E,
X25—21, F207E,
LX1017980
K205—86
L .............. 143AB—1 .... orange ......... X126—C, X269M—A
M ............. 103AA—1 .... orange ......... D122A, K107—86
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-74 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=154
240
10
75
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017943
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-75 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=155
X03 64-Pin Plug - Cab Wiring Harness

Connection Point (W3 and W13)

Cross-Section
A1 ........... 325AB—0,5 . dark green ... X222—F2, X133—40
A2 ........... 531AC—1 .... brown ........... X03—D4, X133—4
A3 ........... 329A—0,5 ... white ............ X25—4
A4 ........... 347A—0,5 ... pale purple .. X26—23
A5 ........... 351A—0,5 ... brown ........... X25—24
A6 ........... 307AB—2.5 . pale purple .. X239—B, K105—87
A7 ........... 306AB—0,5 . light blue ...... X25—25
A8 ........... 903AA—1 .... orange ......... X21—5
A9 ........... 124AB—1 .... yellow .......... F106A, X248—13
A10 ......... 114A—1 ...... yellow .......... F107A
A11 ......... 139AB—1,5 . white ............ X248—12, X101M—A
A12 ......... 111AB—1 .... white ............ X260—K, X248—9
240 B1 ........... 022AD—1,5 . red ............... F201E, S01—IGN,
10 X03—F7, K105—86
76 B2 ........... 708A—1 ...... gray ............. X222—D4
B3 ........... 385A—1 ...... dark green ... S01—AID
B4 ........... 703A—1 ...... orange ......... X222—D5
B5 ........... 213A—1 ...... orange ......... X72—A
B6 ........... 607AC—1 .... pale purple .. K25/2—6, X25—9
B7 ........... 506AA—1 .... light blue ...... X03—C2
B8 ........... 710A—1 ...... black ............ X222—C5
B9 ........... 707A—1 ...... pale purple .. X222—B4
B10 ......... 706A—1 ...... light blue ...... X222—B5
B11 ......... vacant
B12 ......... 309AB—1 .... white ............ D222A, D223E
C1 ........... 311AD—1 .... brown ........... X222—M2, X133—12,
S01—ST
C2 ........... 506AA—1 .... light blue ...... X03—B7
C3 ........... 572AC—1 .... red ............... X222—H3, F211A,
X244—B, X249—C
C4 ........... 587AA—1 .... pale purple .. X222—J7
C5 ........... 512AA—1 .... red ............... X133—44, X132—1
C6 ........... 541AA—0,5 . brown ........... X222—K7
C7 ........... 527AA—1 .... pale purple .. X133—24
D1 ........... 555AA—1 .... dark green ... X133—2
D2 ........... 575A—1 ...... dark green ... X133—3
D3 ........... 574A—0,5 ... yellow .......... X133—42
D4 ........... 531AA—1 .... brown ........... X133—4, X03—A2
D5 ........... 353A—0,5 ... orange ......... X26—17
D6 ........... 602A—0,5 ... red ............... X26—26
D7 ........... 595AA—0,5 . dark green ... X222—K5
D8 ........... 515A—0,5 ... dark green ... X26—24
E1 ........... vacant
E2 ........... 509A—0,5 ... white ............ X25—15
E7 ........... 310AH—1 .... black ............ XGND1
E8 ........... vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-76 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=156

Cross-Section
F2 ............ vacant
F7 ............ 022AC—1,5 . red ............... F201E, S01—IGN,
X03—B1, K105—86
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–22/91
X03 64-Pin Plug - Cab Wiring Harness

Connection Point (W3 and W13)
(continued)

Cross-Section
G1 ........... vacant
G2 ........... vacant
G7 ........... vacant 240
G8 ........... vacant 10
H1 ........... 606A—0,5 ... light blue ...... X25—22 77
H2 ........... 502A—0,5 ... red ............... X133—20
H3 ........... vacant
H4 ........... 873AA—1 .... orange ......... X14/2—C, X14/1—B,
X13—K3
H5 ........... 878A—1 ...... gray ............. X13—F3
H6 ........... 883A—1 ...... orange ......... X13—K2
H7 ........... 885A—1 ...... dark green ... X13—G2
H8 ........... 884A—1 ...... yellow .......... X13—F1
J2 ............ 855A—1 ...... dark green ... X13—J1
J3 ............ 854A—1 ...... yellow .......... X13—K1
J4 ............ 859A—1 ...... white ............ X13—A1
J5 ............ 858A—1 ...... gray ............. X13—B1
J6 ............ 050AN—1 .... black ............ XGND2
J7 ............ 973AE—1 .... orange ......... X07—9, X21—6,
X242—B, X245—C,
X125—A, X122—B,
F113A
J8 ............ 871AA—1 .... brown ........... X14/1—A, X14/2—A,
–UN–10OCT97
X13—B3
F1A ......... 012AA—10 .. red ............... F114E, F101E,

F103E, F120E,
F104E, F102E,
LX1017943
F105E, F118E, F119E
F1A ......... 012AO—10 .. red ............... F206E, F208E,
F212E, K204—30,
K203—30
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-77 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=157
X07 20-Pin Plug

Cab Roof Connection Point (W11)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. 118AC—1 .... gray ............. X234—C, F110A
2 .............. 128AC—1 ... gray ............. F109A, X234—A,
X120/1—A
3 .............. 107AA—1 .... pale purple .. K109—30, X234—F,
X133—7, X25—20
LX1017959
4 .............. 125AD—1 .... dark green ... X133—1, X26—6,
X234—D, K108—30
5 .............. 106AD—1,5 . light blue ...... X250/1—B, X250/2—
B, X234—B
6 .............. 138AD—1 .... gray ............. X135—7, X25—2,
F216A
7 .............. 912AE—1,5 . red ............... X26—10, F118A,
240 X128/1—A
10 8 .............. 137AC—1 .... pale purple .. X260—H, X248—19
78 9 .............. 973AA—1 .... orange ......... X21—6, X242—B,
X245—C, X03—J7,
X125—A, X122—B,
F113A
10 ............ 136AA—1 .... light blue ...... X248—18, X260—G
11 ............ 547A—1 ...... pale purple .. X133—34
12 ............ 133AA—1 .... orange ......... X248—15, X260—F
13 ............ vacant
14 ............ 208A—1 ...... gray ............. X20B—A
15 ............ 528AB—1 .... gray ............. X243M—B, X125—C
16 ............ 545AE—1 .... dark green ... F215A, X127—A,
K25/1—8, X230—A
17 ............ 147AB—1 .... pale purple .. X260—J, X248—20
18 ............ 174A—1 ...... yellow .......... F209A
19 ............ 184AC—1 .... yellow .......... F210A, X248—11
20 ............ 129AB—1 .... white ............ X101M—C, X248—10
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–24/91
X07/1 2-Pin Plug

Cab Roof Connection Point (W11)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 126A—1 ...... light blue ...... K108—87

B ............. 119A—1 ...... white ............ K109—87
LX1017883
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-78 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=158
X13 30-Pin Plug for

Hitch Control Unit (HCU)

Cross-Section
A1 ........... 859A—1 ...... white ............ X03—J4
A2 ........... 856AA—1 .... light blue ...... F116A, X29—A
A3 ........... 050AC—1 .... black ............ XGND2
B1 ........... 858A—1 ...... gray ............. X03—J5
B2 ........... 925AM—1 ... dark green ... X29—B, X222—B6,
X133—45, R04—B,
X135—4, X425M—A
B3 ........... 871AD—1 .... brown ........... X03—J8, X14/1—A,
X14/2—A
C1 ........... 826A—1 ...... light blue ...... X36—D
C2 ........... 823A—1 ...... orange ......... X36—B
C3 ........... 924AM—1 ... yellow .......... X29—C, X222—B7,
X133—22, R04—A, 240
X135—9, X425M—B 10
–UN–25SEP98
D1 ........... vacant 79
D2 ........... 824A—1 ...... yellow .......... X36—C
D3 ........... 821A—1 ...... brown ........... X36—A
E1 ........... 875A—1 ...... dark green ... X14/1—C
E2 ........... 876A—1 ...... light blue ...... X14/1—H
LX1021456
E3 ........... vacant
F1 ............ 884A—1 ...... yellow .......... X03—H8
F2 ............ 877A—1 ...... pale purple .. X14/1—E
F3 ............ 878A—1 ...... gray ............. X03—H5
G1 ........... vacant
G2 ........... 885A—1 ...... dark green ... X03—H7
G3 ........... 869A—1 ...... white ............ X14/2—B
H1 ........... vacant
H2 ........... 886AC—1 .... light blue ...... X222—D3, F115A,
X135—6, X133—35
H3 ........... 834A—1 ...... yellow .......... X14/1—F
J1 ............ 855A—1 ...... dark green ... X03—J2
J2 ............ 838A—1 ...... gray ............. X14/1—D
J3 ............ 839A—1 ...... white ............ X14/1—G
K1 ........... 854A—1 ...... yellow .......... X03—J3
K2 ........... 883A—1 ...... orange ......... X03—H6
K3 ........... 873AC—1 .... orange ......... X14/2—C, X03—H4,
X14/1—B
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-79 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=159
X14/1 8-Pin Plug for

Feedback Unit

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 871AB—1 .... brown ........... X03—J8, X14/2—A,
X13—B3
B ............. 873AB—1 .... orange ......... X14/2—C, X03—H4,
X13—K3
C ............. 875A—1 ...... dark green ... X13—E1
LX1017895
D ............. 838A—1 ...... gray ............. X13—J2
E ............. 877A—1 ...... pale purple .. X13—F2
F .............. 834A—1 ...... yellow .......... X13—H3
G ............. 839A—1 ...... white ............ X13—J3
B ............. 876A—1 ...... light blue ...... X13—E2
240
10
80
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–27/91

Height Sensitivity Potentiometer

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 871AC—1 .... brown ........... X03—J8, X14/1—A,
X13—B3
B ............. 869A—1 ...... white ............ X13—G3
C ............. 873AD—1 .... orange ......... X03—H4, X14/1—B,
X13—K3
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–28/91
X20A 1-Pin Plug,

Windshield Wiper Harness Connection Point (W7)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 236A—1,5 ... light blue ...... F213A

LX1017945
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-80 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=160
X20B 3-Pin Plug, Connection Point for

Windshield Washer and Multi-Function Wiring
Harness (W6)

–UN–10OCT97
Cross-Section
A ............. 208A—1 ...... gray ............. X07—14
B ............. 905A—0,5 ... dark green ... X25—6
C ............. 050AA—1 .... black ............ XGND2
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–30/91
X21 12-Pin Plug, Connection Point for

Multi-function Unit Wiring Harness (W5) 240
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. 113AB—2.5 . orange ......... K103—87, K107—87
2 .............. 144A—1 ...... yellow .......... X101M—E
3 .............. 159AC—1,5 . white ............ F108E, X26—22
4 .............. 127AA—0,5 . pale purple .. X133—33, K108—86,
K109—86
LX1017956
5 .............. 903AA—1 .... orange ......... X03—A8
6 .............. 973AB—1 .... orange ......... X07—9, X242—B,
X245—C, X03—J7,
X125—A, X122—B,
F113A
7 .............. 310BO—1 .... black ............ X201—G, X25—14,
X25—1, XGND1,
X120/2—A
8 .............. vacant
9 .............. 155AA—0,5 . dark green ... K109—85, K108—85,
X133—10
10 ............ 152AA—1 .... red ............... F105A, K107—30,
K103—30
11 ............ 202AB—1,5 . red ............... K104—86, F220E,
K102—87
12 ............ vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-81 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=161
X25 26-Pin Plug for

Basic Informator

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. 310AC—0,5 . black ............ X201—G, X25—14,
XGND1, X21—7,
X120/2—A
2 .............. 138AB—0,5 . gray ............. X135—7, F216A,
X07—6
LX1017998
3 .............. 050AE—0,5 . black ............ XGND2
4 .............. 329A—0,5 ... white ............ X03—A3
5 .............. 925AG—0,5 . dark green ... X222—C7, X425F—A
6 .............. 905A—0,5 ... dark green ... X20B—B
7 .............. 924AG—0,5 . yellow .......... X222—C6, X425F—B
8 .............. vacant
9 .............. 607AB—0,5 . pale purple .. K25/2—6, X03—B6
240 10 ............ vacant
10 11 ............ 341A—0,5 ... brown ........... X133—19
82 12 ............ 149A—0,5 ... white ............ X133—18
13 ............ vacant
14 ............ 310AB—0,5 . black ............ X201—G, X25—1,
XGND1, X21—7,
X120/2—A
15 ............ 509A—0,5 ... white ............ X03—E2
16 ............ vacant
17 ............ 134A—0,5 ... yellow .......... X133—39
18 ............ 146A—0,5 ... light blue ...... X133—16
19 ............ 188A—0,5 ... gray ............. X133—17
20 ............ 107AD—0,5 . pale purple .. X07—3, K109—30,
X234—F, X133—7
21 ............ 135AC—0,5 . dark green ... K206—86, D122E,
F207E, K205—86,
S09—H
22 ............ 606A—0,5 ... light blue ...... X03—H1
23 ............ vacant
24 ............ 351A—0,5 ... brown ........... X03—A5
25 ............ 306AB—0,5 . light blue ...... X03—A7
26 ............ 505AA—0,5 . dark green ... K25/2—8
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-82 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=162
X26 26-Pin Plug for

Basic Informator

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. vacant
2 .............. 156A—0,5 ... light blue ...... X247—17
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. vacant
5 .............. 153A—0,5 ... orange ......... X247—22
LX1017998
6 .............. 125AB—0,5 . dark green ... X133—1, X234—D,
X07—4, K108—30
7 .............. vacant
8 .............. vacant
9 .............. 151A—0,5 ... brown ........... X133—14
10 ............ 912AA—0,5 . red ............... F118A, X128/1—A,
X07—7
11 ............ vacant 240
12 ............ vacant 10
13 ............ 932AE—0,5 . red ............... X270—F, X222—L1 83
14 ............ 971AC—0,5 . brown ........... X135—10, F117A
15 ............ 935AG—0,5 . dark green ... X270—B, X222—K2
16 ............ 934AG—0,5 . yellow .......... X270—G, X222—K1
17 ............ 353A—0,5 ... orange ......... X03—D5
18 ............ 930AE—0,5 . black ............ X270—C, X222—L2
19 ............ vacant
20 ............ vacant
21 ............ 501AA—0,5 . brown ........... X132—2, X133—43,
X222—H2
22 ............ 159AB—0,5 . white ............ F108E, X21—3
23 ............ 347A—0,5 .. pale purple .. X03—A4
24 ............ 515A—0,5 ... dark green ... X3—D8
25 ............ 154A—0,5 ... yellow .......... X247—13
26 ............ 602A—0,5 ... red ............... X3—D6
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-83 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=163
X29 4-Pin
CCD-BUS Service Plug

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 856AC—1 ... light blue ...... X13—A2, F116A
B ............. 925AI—1 ..... dark green ... X222—B6, X133—45,
X13—B2, R04—B,
X135—4, X425M—A
C ............. 924AI—1 ..... yellow .......... X222—B7, X133—22,
LX1017887
X13—C3, R04—A,
X135—9, X425M—B
D ............. 050AB—1 .... black ............ XGND2
240
10
84
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–34/91
X36 6-Pin Plug, connection point

External Control (W11)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 821A—1 ...... brown ........... X13—D3
B ............. 823A—1 ...... orange ......... X13—C2
C ............. 824A—1 ...... yellow .......... X13—D2
D ............. 826A—1 ...... light blue ...... X13—C1
E ............. 050AK—1 .... black ............ XGND2
LX1017894
F .............. vacant
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–35/91
X37 2-Pin Plug,

Front Loader Connection Point

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 204AB—1 .... yellow .......... X260—C, F220A

B ............. 310BG—1 .... black ............ XGND5
LX1017883
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-84 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=164
X40 1-Pin Plug,

Rear Window Wiper Harness Connection Point (W10)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 246AA—1,5 . light blue ...... F214A, X58—A
LX1017945
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–37/91

Compressor Switch 240
10
Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 205A—1 ...... dark green ... K207—87
LX013178
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–38/91

Fan Harness (W8)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. 222A—2.5 ... red ............... F217A
2 .............. 231A—2.5 ... brown ........... F218A
3 .............. 226AC—1 .... light blue ...... K207—85, K204—85
LX1017950
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–39/91
X58 2-Pin Plug for

Operator’s Seat

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 246AC—1 .... light blue ...... X40—A, F214A

B ............. 310BE—1 .... black ............ XGND5
LX1017883
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-85 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=165
X72 1-Pin Plug,

Pressure Switch Connection Point (W8)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 213A—1 ...... orange ......... X03—B5
LX1017945
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–41/91
X101M 6-Pin Plug for

240 Headlight Switch
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 139AC—1 .... white ............ X248—12, X03—A11
B ............. 189A—1 ...... white ............ F108A
C ............. 129AA—1 .... white ............ X07—20, X248—10
D ............. 104AA—1 .... yellow .......... F210E, F209E, F207A
E ............. 144A—1 ...... yellow .......... X21—2
LX1017893
F .............. 164AC—1 .... yellow .......... F107E, F106E
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–42/91
X101F 6-Pin Plug with Bridging Wires for

Headlight Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. XX9—1 ........ white ............ X101F—B

B ............. XX9—1 ........ white ............ X101F—A
C ............. vacant
D ............. vacant
E ............. XX4—1 ........ yellow .......... X101F—F
LX1017894
F .............. XX4—1 ........ yellow .......... X101F—E
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-86 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=166

Pressure Gauge of the Compressed Air Brake

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 128AD—1 .... gray ............. F109A, X234—A,
X07—2
NOTE: not used.
LX1017945
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–44/91

Pressure Gauge of the Compressed Air Brake 240
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 310BN—1 .... black ............ X201—G, X25—14,
X25—1, XGND1,
X21—7
NOTE: not used.
LX1017945
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–45/91
X122 2-Pin Plug for

Differential Lock Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 522A—0,5 ... red ............... X133—28
B ............. 973AG—1 .... orange ......... X07—9, X21—6,
X242—B, X245—C,
X03—J7, X125—A,
F113A
LX1017883
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-87 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=167
X125 3-Pin Plug for

Rear PTO Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 973AF—1 .... orange ......... X07—9, X21—6,
X242—B, X245—C,
X03—J7, X122—B,
F113A
B ............. 525A—0,5 ... dark green ... X133—26
LX1017884
C ............. 528AC—1 .... gray ............. X243M—B, X07—15
240
10
88
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–47/91
X126 3-Pin Plug for

Hazard Flasher Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 102A—1 ...... red ............... X133—11
B ............. 112AC—1 .... red ............... X133—23, F102A
C ............. 143AA—1 .... orange ......... S09—L, X269M—A
LX1017884
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–48/91
X127 3-Pin Plug for

Front PTO Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 545AB—1 .... dark green ... F215A, K25/1—8,

X230—A, X07—16
B ............. 901A—1 ...... brown ........... K25/2—2
C ............. 904A—1 ...... yellow .......... K25/2—9
LX1017884
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-88 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=168

Cigarette Lighter

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 912AD—1,5 . red ............... X26—10, F118A,
X07—7
B ............. 310BF—1,5 . black ............ XGND5
LX1017948
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–50/91
X132 7-Pin Signal Socket

240
Cross-Section
1 .............. 512AC—1 .... red ............... X03—C5, X133—44
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 501AC—1 .... brown ........... X26—21, X133—43,
X222—H2
3 .............. 523A—0,5 ... orange ......... X133—21
4 .............. vacant
5 .............. vacant
LX1017969
6 .............. 312AC—1,5 . red ............... X234—E, K104—87,
X239—A
7 .............. 050AJ—1 ..... black ............ XGND2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-89 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=169
X133 45-Pin Plug for

Basic Control Unit (BCU)

Cross-Section
1 .............. 125AA—0,5 . dark green ... X26—6, X234—D,
X07—4, K108—30
2 .............. 555AA—1 .... dark green ... X03—D1
3 .............. 575A—1 ...... dark green ... X03—D2
4 .............. 531AB—0,5 . brown ........... X03—D4, X03—A2
5 .............. 571A—1 ...... brown ........... F111A
6 .............. 535A—1 ...... dark green ... X243M—A
7 .............. 107AC—1 .... pale purple .. X07—3, K109—30,
X234—F, X25—20
8 .............. 542A—0,5 ... red ............... X242—A
9 .............. 244A—1 ...... yellow .......... X250/1—C
10 ............ 155AB—0,5 . dark green ... K109—85, X21—9,
240 K108—85
10 11 ............ 102A—1 ...... red ............... X126—A
–UN–10OCT97
90 12 ............ 311AB—0,5 . brown ........... X222—M2, S01—ST,
X03—C1
13 ............ 927A—0,5 ... pale purple .. X247—6
14 ............ 151A—0,5 ... brown ........... X26—9
15 ............ 517A—0,5 ... pale purple .. X247—3
LX1017938
16 ............ 146A—0,5 ... light blue ...... X25—18
17 ............ 188A—0,5 ... gray ............. X25—19
18 ............ 149A—0,5 ... white ............ X25—12
19 ............ 341A—0,5 ... brown ........... X25—11
20 ............ 502A—0,5 ... red ............... X03—H2
21 ............ 523A—0,5 ... orange ......... X132—3
22 ............ 924AK—1 .... yellow .......... X29—C, X222—B7,
X13—C3, R04—A,
X135—9, X425M—B
23 ............ 112AA—1 .... red ............... F102A, X126—B
24 ............ 527AA—1 .... pale purple .. X03—C7
25 ............ 567A—0,5 ... pale purple .. X247—4
26 ............ 525A—0,5 ... dark green ... X125—B
27 ............ 050AH—1 .... black ............ XGND2
28 ............ 522A—0,5 ... red ............... X122—A
29 ............ 511A—0,5 ... brown ........... X245—B
30 ............ 557A—0,5 ... pale purple .. X245—A
31 ............ 586A—0,5 ... light blue ...... X243M—C
32 ............ 245A—1 ...... dark green ... X250/2—C
33 ............ 127AB—0,5 . pale purple .. X21—4, K108—86,
K109—86
34 ............ 547A—1 ...... pale purple .. X07—11
35 ............ 886AD—0,5 . light blue ...... X222—D3, F115A,
X13—H2, X135—6
36 ............ 906A—0,5 ... light blue ...... X235—B
37 ............ vacant
38 ............ 552A—0,5 ... red ............... X247—5
39 ............ 134A—0,5 ... yellow .......... X25—17
40 ............ 325AC—0,5 . dark green ... X222—F2, X3—A1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-90 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=170

Basic Control Unit (BCU)
(continued)

Cross-Section
41 ............ 228AB—0,5 . gray ............. K25/2—7, K106—85,
X222—K4
42 ............ 574A—0,5 ... yellow .......... X03—D3
43 ............ 501AB—0,5 . brown ........... X26—21, X132—2,
X222—H2
44 ............ 512AB—0,5 . red ............... X03—C5, X132—1
45 ............ 925AK—0,5 . dark green ... X29—B, X222—B6,
X13—B2, R04—B,
X135—4, X425M—A
240
10
–UN–10OCT97
91
LX1017938
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–53/91

Performance Monitor

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. vacant
2 .............. vacant
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. 925AP—0.5 . dark green ... X29—B, X222—B6,
X133—45, X13—B2,
LX1017986
R04—B, X425M—A
5 .............. 050AL—0,5 . black ............ XGND2
6 .............. 886AE—0,5 . light blue ...... X222—D3, F115A,
X13—H2, X133—35
7 .............. 138AA—0,5 . gray ............. X25—2, F216A, X07—
6
8 .............. vacant
9 .............. 924AP—0.5 . yellow .......... X29—C, X222—B7,
X133—22, X13—C3,
R04—A, X425M—B
10 ............ 971AA—0,5 . brown ........... X26—14, F117A
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-91 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=171
X176 3-Pin Plug with Wiring Bridge for

PTO Preselector Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. vacant
B ............. 528E—1 ...... gray ............. X243F—C
C ............. 528E—1 ...... gray ............. X243F—B
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–55/91
X193 6-Pin Plug,

240 Transmission Wiring Harness (W20)
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 672AH—1 .... red ............... F202A, X222—L6,
X201—C, X212—B,
K212—30, K213—30
B ............. 696A—1 ...... light blue ...... K211—87
C ............. 697A—1 ...... pale purple .. K210-87
LX1017894
D ............. 698AA—1 .... gray ............. X222—L5, K211—86,
K210—86
E ............. 699A—1 ...... white ............ X222—L3
F .............. 310AE—1 .... black ............ XGND1
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–56/91
X201 8-Pin Plug for

Electrical Reverser Control Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 622AC—1 .... red ............... X222—E2, F201A

B ............. 691AA—1 .... brown ........... X222—M7, K212—86
C ............. 672AC—1 .... red ............... F202A, X222—L6,
X212—B, K212—30,
K213—30, X193—A
LX1017896
D ............. 686AA—1 .... light blue ...... X222—M6, K211—30

E ............. 687AB—1 .... pale purple .. X222—M4, K210—30
F .............. 688A—1 ...... gray ............. X222—L4
G ............. 310AA—1 .... black ............ X25—14, X25—1,
XGND1, X21—7,
X120/2—A
H ............. vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-92 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=172
X212 4-Pin Plug for

Parking Lock Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 685A—1 ...... dark green ... X222—L7
B ............. 672AD—1 .... red ............... F202A, X222—L6,
X201—C, K212—30,
K213—30, X193—A
C ............. 684A—1 ...... yellow .......... X222—M5
LX1017886
D ............. 050AG—1 .... black ............ XGND2
240
10
93
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–58/91
X215 10-Pin Plug,

Engine Harness Connection Point (W3)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. vacant
B ............. 355AA—1 .... dark green ... X222—J2
C ............. 354AA—1 .... yellow .......... X222—J1
D ............. 301A—1 ...... brown ........... K25/1—7
E ............. 550A—1 ...... black ............ K25/1—4
LX1017898
F .............. 319AA—1 .... white ............ X222—E3
G ............. 371AB—1 .... brown ........... X236—A, X222—E5
H ............. vacant
J .............. vacant
K ............. 050AM—1 ... black ............ XGND2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-93 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=173
240
10
–UN–10OCT97
94
LX1017936
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-94 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=174
X222 78-Pin Plug,

Control Unit Harness Connection Point (W34)

Cross-Section
A1 ........... 050AF—4 .... black ............ XGND2
A2 ........... vacant
A3 ........... vacant
A4 ........... vacant
A5 ........... vacant
A6 ........... vacant
B1 ........... 593A—1 orange X244—A
B2 ........... 345A—0,5 ... dark green ... X236—C
B3 ........... 701A—0,5 ... brown ........... X247—2
B4 ........... 707A—1 ...... pale purple .. X03—B9
B5 ........... 706A—1 ...... light blue ...... X03—B10
B6 ........... 925AH—1 .... dark green ... X29—B, X133—45,
X13—B2, R04—B, 240
X135—4, X425M—A 10
B7 ........... 924AH—1 .... yellow .......... X29—C, X133—22, 95
X13—C3, R04—A,
X135—9, X425M—B
C1 ........... 944AD—1 .... yellow .......... X232—A
C2 ........... 945AD—1 .... dark green ... X232—B
C3 ........... vacant
C4 ........... vacant
C5 ........... 710A—1 ...... black ............ X03—B8
C6 ........... 924AG—0,5 . yellow .......... X25—7, X425F—B
C7 ........... 925AG—0,5 . dark green ... X25—5, X425F—A
D1 ........... 942AD—1 .... red ............... X232—C
D2 ........... 940AD—1 .... black ............ X232—D
D3 ........... 886AA—1 .... light blue ...... F115A, X13—H2,
X135—6, X133—35
D4 ........... 708A—1 ...... gray ............. X03—B2
D5 ........... 703A—1 ...... orange ......... X03—B4
D6 ........... vacant
D7 ........... vacant
E1 ........... 588A—0,5 ... gray ............. X247—15
E2 ........... 622AA—1 .... red ............... F201A, X201—A
E3 ........... 319AA—1 .... white ............ X215—F
E4 ........... 359A—0,5 ... white ............ X238—B
E5 ........... 371AC—0,5 . brown ........... X236—A, X215—G
E6 ........... vacant
E7 ........... 374A—1 ...... yellow .......... X236—D
F1 ............ 343A—0,5 ... orange ......... X238—C
F2 ............ 325AA—1 .... dark green ... X03—A1, X133—40
F3 ............ 568A—0,5 ... gray ............. X247—25
F4 ............ 381A—0,5 ... brown ........... X238—A
G1 ........... vacant
G2 ........... 310BC—4 .... black ............ XGND5
H1 ........... 308A—1 ...... gray ............. D223A
H2 ........... 501AD—1 .... brown ........... X26—21, X132—2,
X133—43
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-95 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=175

Cross-Section
H3 ........... 572AA—1 .... red ............... F211A, X03—C3,
X244—B, X249—C
H4 ........... vacant
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–62/91
X222 78-Pin Plug,

Control Unit Harness Connection Point (W34)
(continued)

Cross-Section
J1 ............ 354AA—1 .... yellow .......... X215—C
J2 ............ 355AA—1 .... dark green ... X215—B
240 J3 ............ 562AB—1 .... red ............... F205A, K203—86
10 J4 ............ 581AA—1 .... brown ........... X249—B
96 J5 ............ 583AA—1 .... orange ......... X249—A
J6 ............ 585AA—1 .... dark green ... X244—C
J7 ............ 587AA—1 .... pale purple .. X03—C4
K1 ........... 934AF—1 .... yellow .......... X270—G, X26—16
K2 ........... 935AF—1 .... dark green ... X270—B, X26—15
K3 ........... vacant
K4 ........... 228AE—1 .... gray ............. X133—41, K25/2—7,
K106—85
K5 ........... 595AA—0,5 . dark green ... X03—D7
–UN–10OCT97
K6 ........... vacant
K7 ........... 541AA—0,5 . brown ........... X03—C6
L1 ............ 932AD—1 .... red ............... X270—F, X26—13
L2 ............ 930AD—1 .... black ............ X270—C, X26—18
L3 ............ 699A—1 ...... white ............ X193—E
LX1017936
L4 ............ 688A—1 ...... gray ............. X201—F
L5 ............ 698AB—1 .... gray ............. X193—D, K211—86,
K210—86
L6 ............ 672AA—1 .... red ............... F202A, X201—C,
X212—B, K212—30,
K213—30, X193—A
L7 ............ 685A—1 ...... dark green ... X212—A
M1 ........... 694AB—1 .... yellow .......... K212—87A, K213—
86, K213—87
M2 ........... 311AA—1 .... brown ........... X133—12, S01—ST,
X03—C1
M3 ........... 693AA—1 .... orange ......... K212—87
M4 ........... 687AA—1 .... pale purple .. X201—E, K210—30
M5 ........... 684A—1 ...... yellow .......... X212—C
M6 ........... 686AB—1 .... light blue ...... X201—D, K211—30
M7 ........... 691AB—1 .... brown ........... X201—B, K212—86
N1 ........... vacant
N2 ........... vacant
N3 ........... vacant
N4 ........... vacant
N5 ........... vacant
N6 ........... vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-96 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=176
X230 2-Pin Plug for

Seat Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 545AD—1 .... dark green ... F215A, X127—A,
K25/1—8, X07—16
B ............. 907AC—1 .... pale purple .. K25/1—6, X235—A
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–64/91
X231 2-Pin Plug,

Seat/Handbrake Switch Connection Point 240
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 908A—1 ...... gray ............. X231—B
B ............. 908A—1 ...... gray ............. X231—A
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–65/91

Stepper Motor Driver Harness (W35)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 944AD—1 .... yellow .......... X222—C1
B ............. 945AD—1 .... dark green ... X222—C2
C ............. 942AD—1 .... red ............... X222—D1
D ............. 940AD—1 .... black ............ X222—D2
E ............. 255A—4 ...... dark green ... F203E
LX1017900
F .............. 260A—1 ...... black ............ F204A
G ............. 310BJ—4 ... black ............ XGND5
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-97 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=177
X234 7-Pin Plug Connection Point,

7-Pin Socket Harness (W28)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 128AB—1 .... gray ............. F109A, X07—2,
X120/1—A
B ............. 106AB—1 .... light blue ...... X250/1—B, X250/2—
B, X07—5
C ............. 118AA—1 .... gray ............. F110A, X07—1
LX1017899
D ............. 125AC—1 .... dark green ... X133—1, X26—6,
X07—4, K108—30
E ............. 312AA—2.5 . red ............... K104—87, X132—6,
X239—A
F .............. 107AB—1 .... pale purple .. X07—3, K109—30,
X133—7, X25—20
G ............. 310BH—2.5 . black ............ XGND5
240
10
98
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–67/91
X235 2-Pin Plug for

Handbrake Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 907AB—1 .... pale purple .. K25/1—6, X230—B
B ............. 906A—0,5 ... light blue ...... X133—36
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–68/91
X236 4-Pin Plug for

Cruise Control Potentiometer

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 371AA—0,5 . brown ........... X215—G, X222—E5

B ............. vacant
C ............. 345A—0,5 ... dark green ... X222—B2
D ............. 374A—0,5 ... yellow .......... X222—E7
LX1017886
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-98 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=178
X238 3-Pin Plug for

Foot Throttle Potentiometer

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 381A—0,5 ... brown ........... X222—F4
B ............. 359A—0,5 ... white ............ X222—E4
C ............. 343A—0,5 ... orange ......... X222—F1
LX1017884
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–70/91

3-Pin Socket Harness (W30) 240
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 312AD—2.5 . red ............... X234—E, K104—87,
X132—6
B ............. 307AA—2.5 . pale purple .. X03—A6, K105—87
C ............. 310BD—4 .... black ............ XGND1
LX1017911
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–71/91
X242 3-Pin Plug for

HMS Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 542A—0,5 ... red ............... X133—8
B ............. 973AC—1 .... orange ......... X07—9, X21—6,
X245—C, X03—J7,
X125—A, X122—B,
F113A
LX1017884
C ............. vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-99 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=179

PTO Preselector Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 535A—1 ...... dark green ... X133—6
B ............. 528AA—1 .... gray ............. X07—15, X125—C
C ............. 586A—0,5 ... light blue ...... X133—31
LX1017884
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–73/91
X243F 3-Pin Plug with Wiring Bridge for

240 PTO Preselector Switch
10
,100 Terminal Wire Number Color of Wire To Plug or
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. vacant
B ............. 528E—1 ...... gray ............. X243F—C
C ............. 528E—1 ...... gray ............. X243F—B
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–74/91
X244 3-Pin Plug for

AutoQuad II Transmission Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 593A—1 ...... orange ......... X222—B1
B ............. 572AD—1 .... red ............... X222—H3, F211A,
X03—C3, X249—C
C ............. 585AA—1 .... dark green ... X222—J6
LX1017884
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-100 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=180
X245 3-Pin Plug for

Front Wheel Drive Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 557A—0,5 ... pale purple .. X133—30
B ............. 511A—0,5 ... brown ........... X133—29
C ............. 973AD—1 .... orange ......... X07—9, X21—6,
X242—B, X03—J7,
X125—A, X122—B,
LX1017884
F113A
240
10
,101
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-101 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=181

Monitor Unit

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. vacant
2 .............. 701A—0,5 ... brown ........... X222—B3
3 .............. 517A—0,5 ... pale purple .. X133—15
4 .............. 567A—0,5 ... pale purple .. X133—25
5 .............. 552A—0,5 .. red ............... X133—38
LX1017998
6 .............. 927A—0,5 ... pale purple .. X133—13
7 .............. vacant
8 .............. 072AN—0,5 . red ............... K101—87, F211E,
F215E, K106—86,
F111E, F112E,
F113E, F115E,
F116E, F117E,
240 F202E, F205E
10 9 .............. 178A—0,5 ... gray ............. K25/2—5
,102 10 ............ vacant
11 ............ vacant
12 ............ vacant
13 ............ 154A—0,5 ... yellow .......... X26—25
14 ............ vacant
15 ............ 588A—0,5 ... gray ............. X222—E1
16 ............ 310AF—0,5 . black ............ XGND1
17 ............ 156A—0,5 ... light blue ...... X26—2
18 ............ vacant
19 ............ vacant
20 ............ vacant
21 ............ vacant
22 ............ 153A—0,5 ... orange ......... X26—5
23 ............ vacant
24 ............ 310AL—0,5 . black ............ XGND1
25 ............ 568A—0,5 ... gray ............. X222—F3
26 ............ vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-102 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=182

Lighting Monitor Unit

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. vacant
2 .............. vacant
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. vacant
5 .............. vacant
LX1017998
6 .............. vacant
7 .............. vacant
8 .............. vacant
9 .............. 111AC—0,5 . brown ........... X03—A12, X260—K
10 ............ 129AC—0,5 . white ............ X101M—C, X07—20
11 ............ 184AB—0,5 . yellow .......... F210A, X07—19
12 ............ 139AA—0,5 . white ............ X03—A11, X101M—A
13 ............ 124AC—0,5 . yellow .......... X03—A9, F106A 240
14 ............ vacant 10
15 ............ 133AC—0,5 . orange ......... X07—12, X260—F ,103
16 ............ vacant
17 ............ 310AG—0,5 . black ............ XGND1
18 ............ 136AB—0,5 . light blue ...... X07—10, X260—G
19 ............ 137AB—0,5 . pale purple .. X260—H, X07—8
20 ............ 147AC—0,5 . pale purple .. X260—J, X07—17
21 ............ vacant
22 ............ vacant
23 ............ vacant
24 ............ vacant
25 ............ vacant
26 ............ vacant
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–78/91
X249 3-Pin Plug for

Gear Shift Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 583AA—1 .... orange ......... X222—J5
B ............. 581AA—1 .... brown ........... X222—J4
C ............. 572AE—1 .... red ............... X222—H3, F211A,
X03—C3, X244—B
LX1017885
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-103 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=183

Left Brake Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 273AB—1 .... orange ......... X250/2—A, F112A
B ............. 106AA—1 .... light blue ...... X250/2—B, X234—B,
X07—5
C ............. 244A—1 ...... yellow .......... X133—9
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–80/91

240 Right Brake Switch
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 273AA—1 .... orange ......... X250/1—A, F112A
B ............. 106AC—1 .... light blue ...... X250/1—B, X234—B,
X07—5
C ............. 245A—1 ...... dark green ... X133—32
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–81/91

Worklight Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 199AB—1 .... white ............ X260—E, K205—87
B ............. 198AC—1 .... gray ............. K206—87, X260—D
C ............. 204AA—1 .... yellow .......... X37—A, F220A
D ............. 198AB—1 .... gray ............. K206—87, X260—B
E ............. 199AA—1 .... white ............ X260—A, K205—87
LX1017897
F .............. 133AB—1 .... orange ......... X248—15, X07—12
G ............. 136AC—1 .... light blue ...... X07—10, X248—18
H ............. 137AA—1 .... pale purple .. X248—19, X07—8
J .............. 147AA—1 .... pale purple .. X07—17, X248—20
K ............. 111AA—1 .... brown ........... X03—A12, X248—9
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-104 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=184

Headlight Selector

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 143AC—1 .... orange ......... X126—C, S09—L
B ............. 158AC—1 .... gray ............. K103—86, F216E,
S09—C
C ............. 157AC—1 .... pale purple .. F109E, F110E
LX1017884
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–83/91
X269F 3-Pin Plug with Wiring Bridge for

Headlight Selector 240
10
Terminal Wire Number Color of Wire To Plug or ,105
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. XX3—1 ........ orange ......... X269F—C
B ............. vacant
C ............. XX3—1 ........ orange ......... X269F—A
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–84/91
X270 7-Pin Plug for

CAN-BUS Terminator (29-bit)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. vacant
B ............. 935AH—1 .... dark green ... X26—15, X222—K2
C ............. 930AF—1 .... black ............ X26—18, X222—L2
D ............. vacant
E ............. vacant
LX1017991
F .............. 932AF—1 .... red ............... X222—L1, X26—13
G ............. 934AH—1 .... yellow .......... X222—K1, X26—16
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-105 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=185

Turn Signal Harness (W53)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 122AA—1,5 . red ............... F212A
LX1017945
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–86/91
X425F 2-Pin Plug, Connection Point at

240 Connecting Plug for CCD BUS
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 925AA—1 .... dark green ... X25—5, X222—C7
B ............. 924AA—1 .... yellow .......... X25—7, X222—C6
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–87/91
X425M 2-Pin Plug, Connection Point at

Connecting Plug for CCD BUS

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 925AC—1 .... dark green ... X29—B, X222—B6,
X133—45, X13—B2,
R04—B, X135—4
B ............. 924AC—1 .... yellow .......... X29—C, X222—B7,
X133—22, X13—C3,
LX1017882
R04—A, X135—9
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-106 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=186
XGND1 Ground Point

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310AE—1 .... black ............ X193—F
(-) ............ 310AF—0,5 . black ............ X247—16
–UN–12DEC96
(-) ............ 310AG—0,5 . black ............ X248—17
(-) ............ 310AH—1 .... black ............ X03—E7
(-) ............ 310AL—0,5 . black ............ X247—24
-) ............. 310AM—1 ... black ............ K107—85, D125A,
LX013685
K104—85, K105—85,
K103—85, K102—85
-) ............. 310BB—4 .... black ............ XGND5
(-) ............ 310AJ—1 ..... black ............ X201—G, X25—14,
X25—1, X21—7,
X120/2—A
(-) ............ 310BD—4 .... black ............ X239—C
240
10
,107
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–89/91
XGND2 Ground Point for Electronics

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 050AB—1 .... black ............ X29—D
(-) ............ 050AL—0,5 . black ............ X135—5
–UN–12DEC96
(-) ............ 050AM—1 ... black ............ X215—K
(-) ............ 050AN—1 .... black ............ X03—J6
(-) ............ 050AA—1 .... black ............ X20B—C
(-) ............ 050AC—4 .... black ............ X13—A3
LX013685
(-) ............ 050AD—1 .... black ............ K25/1—5
(-) ............ 050AE—0,5 . black ............ X25—3
(-) ............ 050AF—4 .... black ............ X222—A1
(-) ............ 050AG—1 .... black ............ X212—D
(-) ............ 050AH—1 .... black ............ X133—27
(-) ............ 050AJ—1 ..... black ............ X132—7
(-) ............ 050AK—1 .... black ............ X36—E
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-107 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=187
XGND5 Ground Point

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310BB—4 .... black ............ XGND1
(-) ............ 310BA—1 .... black ............ K205—85, K203—85,
–UN–12DEC96
K211—85, K210—85,
K212—85, K206—85
(-) ............ 310BC—4 .... black ............ X222—G2
(-) ............ 310BJ—4 ..... black ............ X232—G
LX013685
(-) ............ 310BE—1 .... black ............ X58—B
(-) ............ 310BF—1,5 . black ............ X128/1—B
(-) ............ 310BG—1 .... black ............ X37—B
(-) ............ 310BH—2.5 . black ............ X234—G
240
10
,108
AG,LX25599,302 –19–01MAY00–91/91
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-108 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=188
240
10
,109
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-109 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=189
W53 — Wiring Harness — Turn Signal Light (AL150846)
240
10
,110
–UN–05DEC00
LX1024564
AG,LX25599,287 –19–24MAY00–1/7
K44 Relay for Right Trailer Turn Signal Light

Cross-Section
30 ............ 122XB—1 .... red ............... X421—A
–UN–10OCT97
85 ............ 310XE—1 .... black ............ XGND38

86 ............ 125X—1 ...... dark green ... X234—D
87 ............ 115X—1 ...... dark green ... X234/1—D
87A ......... vacant
LX1017996
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-110 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=190
K45 Relay for Left Trailer Turn Signal Light

Cross-Section
30 ............ 122XA—1 .... red ............... X421—A
–UN–10OCT97
85 ............ 310XD—1 .... black ............ XGND38
86 ............ 107X-1 ......... pale purple .. X234—F
87 ............ 117X—1 ...... pale purple .. X234/1—F
87A ......... vacant
LX1017996
AG,LX25599,287 –19–24MAY00–3/7
X234 7-Pin Plug,

7-Pin Socket Harness Connection Point (W4) 240
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. vacant
B ............. vacant
C ............. 118X—1 ...... gray ............. X234/1—C
D ............. 125X—1 ...... dark green ... K44—86
E ............. 312X—2.5 ... red ............... X234/1—E
LX1017900
F .............. 107X—1 ...... pale purple .. K45—86
G ............. 310XG—2.5 . black ............ X234/1—G
AG,LX25599,287 –19–24MAY00–4/7
X234/1 7-Pin Plug,

7-Pin Socket Harness Connecting Point (W29)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. vacant
B ............. vacant
C ............. 118X—1 ...... gray ............. X234—C
D ............. 115X—1 ...... dark green ... K44—87
E ............. 312X—2.5 ... red ............... X234—E
LX1017899
F .............. 117X—1 ...... pale purple .. K45—87

G ............. 310XG—2.5 . black ............ X234—G
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-111 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=191

Turn Signal Harness (W4)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 122XA—1 .... red ............... K45—30
A ............. 122XB—1 .... red ............... K44—30
LX1017944
AG,LX25599,287 –19–24MAY00–6/7
XGND38 Ground Point

240
,112 Number and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310XD—1 .... black ............ K45—85
(-) ............ 310XE—1 .... black ............ K44—85
–UN–12DEC96
LX013685
AG,LX25599,287 –19–24MAY00–7/7
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-112 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=192
240
10
,113
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-113 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=193
7-Pin Socket Wiring Harness (W28; AL150291)
240
10
,114
–UN–15APR98
LX1020131
AG,LX25599,282 –19–01MAY00–1/3
X05 7-Pin Plug for 7-Pin Socket

Cross-Section
1 .............. 339HD—2.5 . white ............ X234—G
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. vacant
3 .............. 194HD—1 .... yellow .......... X234—D
4 .............. 312HS—2.5 . red ............... X234—E, X23—7
5 .............. 105HD—1 .... dark green ... X234—F
6 .............. 101HD—1 .... brown ........... X234—C
LX1017968
7 .............. 316HD—2.5 . light blue ...... X234—E, X23—4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-114 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=194
X234 7-Pin Plug,

7-Pin Socket Harness Connection Point (W4)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. vacant
B ............. vacant
C ............. 101HD—1 .... brown ........... X23—6
D ............. 194HD—1 .... yellow .......... X23—3
E ............. 312HR—2.5 . red ............... X23—4, X23—7
LX1017900
F .............. 105HD—1 .... dark green ... X23—5
G ............. 339HD—2.5 . white ............ X23—1
240
10
,115
AG,LX25599,282 –19–01MAY00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-115 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=195
240
10
,116
–UN–15APR98
LX1020132
AG,LX25599,283 –19–01MAY00–1/3
X06 3-Pin Socket

Cross-Section
1 .............. 312HC—2.5 . red ............... X239—A
–UN–12JAN98
2 .............. 307HC—2.5 . pale purple .. X239—B

3 .............. 310HC—4 .... black ............ X239—C
LX1017966
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-116 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=196
X239 3-Pin Plug, 3-Pin Socket Harness


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 312HC—2.5 . red ............... X06—1
B ............. 307HC—2.5 . pale purple .. X06—2
C ............. 310HC—4 .... black ............ X06—3
LX1017910
AG,LX25599,283 –19–01MAY00–3/3
240
10
,117
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-117 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=197
Wiring Harness for Electronic Control Units (W34; AL150234)
240
10
,118
–UN–12NOV98
LX1021563
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-118 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=198
X198 18-Pin Plug for Reverser Control Unit (RCU)

A1 ........... not applicable
A2 ........... 886EB—1 .... Light Blue .... X211—E2, X222—D3
B1 ........... 925EB—1 .... Dark Green .. X211—B2, X222—B6,
X222—C7
–UN–10OCT97
B2 ........... 924EB—1 .... Yellow .......... X211—C1, X222—B7,
X222—C6,
B3 ........... 699E—1 ...... White ........... X222—L3
C1 ........... 688E—1 ...... Gray ............. X222—L4
C2 ........... 698E—1 ...... Gray ............. X222—L5
LX1017925
C3 ........... 050EG—1 .... Black ............ X211—D1, X218—24,
X219—D, X221—1,
X222—A1, X226—E,
X227—E, X303—D
D1 ........... 672EB—1 .... Red .............. X211—E1, X222—L6 240
D2 ........... 685E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X222—L7 10
D3 ........... 694E—1 ...... Yellow .......... X222—M1 ,119
E1 ........... 311EA—1 .... Brown .......... X222—M2
E2 ........... 693E—1 ...... Orange ........ X222—M3
E3 ........... 687E—1 ...... Gray ............. X222—M4
F1 ............ 684E—1 ...... Yellow .......... X222—M5
F2 ............ 686E—1 ...... Light Blue .... X222—M6
F3 ............ 691E—1 ...... Brown .......... X222—M7
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-119 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=199
X211 18-Pin Plug for SFA Control Unit

A1 ........... 701E—1 ...... Brown .......... X222—B3
A2 ........... 707E—1 ...... Purple .......... X222—B4
A3 ........... 706E—1 ...... Light Blue .... X222—B5
B1 ........... 501EB—1 .... Brown .......... X218—23, X222—H2
B2 ........... 925ED—1 .... Dark Green .. X198—B1, X222—B6,
–UN–10OCT97
X222—C7
B3 ........... not applicable
C1 ........... 924ED—1 .... Yellow .......... X198—B2, X222—B7,
X222—C6
C2 ........... not applicable
LX1017925
D1 ........... 050EF—1 .... Black ............ X198—C3, X218—24,
X219—D, X221—1,
X222—A1, X226—E,
240 X227—E, X303—D
10 D2 ........... 710E—1 ...... Black ............ X222—C5
,120 D3 ........... 228E—1 ...... Gray ............. X222—K4
E1 ........... 672EA—1 .... Red .............. X198—D1, X222—L6
E2 ........... 886EA—1 .... Light Blue .... X198—A2, X222—D3
E3 ........... 708E—1 ...... Gray ............. X222—D4
F1 ............ 703E—1 ...... Orange ........ X222—D5
F2 ............ not applicable
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-120 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=200
X218 45-Pin Plug for Engine Control Unit (ECU)

1 .............. 622E—1 ...... Red .............. X222—E2
2 .............. not applicable
10 ............ not applicable
15 ............ not applicable 240
16 ............ not applicable 10
–UN–10OCT97
17 ............ not applicable ,121
LX1017938
23 ............ 501EC—1 .... Brown .......... X211—B1, X222—H2
24 ............ 050EE—1 .... Black ............ X198—C3, X211—D1,
X219—D, X221—1,
X222—A1, X226—E,
X227—E, X303—D
27 ............ 354E—1 ...... Yellow .......... X222—J1
28 ............ 355E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X222—J2
29 ............ 934ED—1 .... Yellow .......... X221—21, X222—K1,
X227—G, X303—C
30 ............ 935ED—1 .... Dark Green .. X221—44, X222—K2,
X227—B, X303—B
35 ............ 308E—1 ...... Gray ............. X222—H1
36 ............ 361EA—1 .... Brown .......... X222—E5, X222—F4
37 ............ 364EA—1 .... Yellow .......... X222—E7, X222—F1
39 ............ 345E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X222—B2
40 ............ 359E—1 ...... White ........... X222—E4
44 ............ 319E—1 ...... White ........... X222—E3
45 ............ 325E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X222—F2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-121 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=201
X219 6-Pin Plug for Multi-function Lever

A ............. 573E—1 ...... Orange ........ X221—33
B ............. 572E—1 ...... Red .............. X222—H3
–UN–10OCT97
C ............. 576E—1 ...... Light Blue .... X221—10
D ............. 050EA—1 .... Black ............ X198—C3, X211—D1,
X218—24, X221—1,
X222—A1, X226—E,
X227—E, X303—D
LX1017893
E ............. 604E—1 ...... Yellow .......... X221—9
F .............. 605E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X221—32
240
10
,122
AG,LX25599,40 –19–02FEB00–5/13
X220 8-Pin Plug for Multi-function Lever

A ............. 533E—0.5 ... Orange ........ X221—3
B ............. 541EC—0.5 . Brown .......... X221—24, X222—K7
–UN–10OCT97
C ............. 565E—0.5 ... Dark Green .. X221—26
D ............. 566E—0.5 ... Light Blue .... X221—14
E ............. 564E—0.5 ... Yellow .......... X221—4
F .............. 577E—0.5 ... Purple .......... X221—37
G ............. 579E-0.5 ...... White ........... X221—27
LX1017895
H ............. 578E—0.5 ... Gray ............. X221—15
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-122 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=202
X221 45-Pin Plug for PEC

1 .............. 050EB—1 .... Black ............ X198—C3, X211—D1,
X218—24, X219—D,
X222—A1, X226—E,
X227—E, X303—D
3 .............. 535E—0.5 ... Dark Green .. X220—A
4 .............. 564E—0.5 ... Yellow .......... X220—E
9 .............. 604E—1 ...... Yellow .......... X219—E
10 ............ 576E—1 ...... Light Blue .... X219—C
11 ............ 585E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X222—J6
12 ............ not applicable 240
13 ............ 581E—1 ...... Brown .......... X222—J4 10
–UN–10OCT97
14 ............ 566E—0.5 ... Light Blue .... X220—D ,123
15 ............ 578E—0.5 ... Gray ............. X220—H
18 ............ 940EB—1 .... Black ............ X222—D2, X226—C
LX1017938
19 ............ 944EB—1 .... Yellow .......... X222—C1, X226—G
20 ............ 930EC—1 .... Black ............ X222—L2, X227—C
21 ............ 934EC—1 .... Yellow .......... X218—29, X222—K1,
X227—G, X303—C
22 ............ 568E—1 ...... Gray ............. X222—F3
23 ............ 562EA—1 .... Red .............. X222—J3, X226—D,
X227—D, X303—A
24 ............ 541EA—0.5 Brown .......... X220—B, X222—K7
....................
26 ............ 565E—0.5 ... Dark Green .. X220—C
27 ............ 579E—0.5 ... White ........... X220—G
31 ............ 593E—1 ...... Orange ........ X222—B1
32 ............ 605E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X219—F
33 ............ 573E—1 ...... Orange ........ X219—A
34 ............ 587E—1 ...... Purple .......... X222—J7
36 ............ 583E—1 ...... Orange ........ X222—J5
37 ............ 577E—0.5 ... Purple .......... X220—F
40 ............ 595E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X222—K5
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-123 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=203
X221 45-Pin Plug for PEC - Continued -

41 ............ 942EB—1 .... Red .............. X222—D1, X226—F
42 ............ 945EB—1 .... Dark Green .. X222—C2, X226—B
43 ............ 932EC—1 .... Red .............. X222—L1, X227—F
44 ............ 935EB—1 .... Dark Green .. X218—30, X222—K2,
X227—B, X303—B
45 ............ 588E—1 ...... Gray ............. X222—E1
240
10
–UN–10OCT97
,124
LX1017938
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-124 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=204
X222 78-Pin Plug, Control Unit Harness Connection

Point (W4)

A1 ........... 050EH—4 .... Black ............ X198—C3, X211—D1,
X218—24, X219—D,
X221—1, X226—E,
X227—E, X303—D
B1 ........... 593E—1 ...... Orange ........ X221—31
B2 ........... 345E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X218—39
B3 ........... 701E—1 ...... Brown .......... X211—A1
B4 ........... 707E—1 ...... Purple .......... X211—A2
B5 ........... 706E—1 ...... Light Blue .... X211—A3 240
B6 ........... 925EE—1 .... Dark Green .. X198—B1, X211—B2, 10
–UN–10OCT97
X222—C7 ,125
B7 ........... 924EE—1 .... Yellow .......... X198—B2, X211—C1,
X222—C6
C1 ........... 944EA—1 .... Yellow .......... X221—19, X226—G
C2 ........... 945EA—1 .... Dark Green .. X221—42, X226—B
LX1017937
C5 ........... 710E—1 ...... Black ............ X211—D2
C6 ........... 924EA—1 .... Yellow .......... X198—B2, X211—C1,
X222—B7
C7 ........... 925EA—1 .... Dark Green .. X198—B1, X211—B2,
X222—B6
D1 ........... 942EA—1 .... Red .............. X221—41, X226—F
D2 ........... 940EA—1 .... Black ............ X221—18, X226—C
D3 ........... 886EC—1 .... Light Blue .... X198—A2, X211—E2
D4 ........... 708E—1 ...... Gray ............. X211—E3
D5 ........... 703E—1 Orange ........ X211—F1
....................
D6 ........... not applicable
D7 ........... not applicable
E1 ........... 588E—1 ...... Gray ............. X221—45
E2 ........... 622E—1 ...... Red .............. X218—1
E3 ........... 319E—1 ...... White ........... X218—44
E4 ........... 359E—1 ...... White ........... X218—40
E5 ........... 361EB—1 .... Brown .......... X218—36, X222—F4
E6 ........... not applicable
E7 ........... 364EB—1 .... Yellow .......... X218—37, X222—F1
F1 ............ 364EC—1 .... Yellow .......... X218—37, X222—E7
F2 ............ 325E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X218—45
F3 ............ 568E—1 ...... Gray ............. X221—22
F4 ............ 361EC—1 .... Brown .......... X218—36, X222—E5
G1 ........... not applicable
G2 ........... not applicable
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-125 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=205
X222 78-Pin Plug, Control Unit Harness Connection

Point (W4) - Continued -

H1 ........... 308E—1 ...... Gray ............. X218—35
H2 ........... 501EA—1 .... Brown .......... X211—B1, X218—23
H3 ........... 572E—1 ...... Red .............. X219—B
H4 ........... not applicable
J1 ............ 354E—1 ...... Yellow .......... X218—27
J2 ............ 355E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X218—28
J3 ............ 562EB—1 .... Red .............. X221—23, X226—D,
X227—D, X303—A
J4 ............ 581E—1 ...... Brown .......... X221—13
J5 ............ 583E—1 ...... Orange ........ X221—36
J6 ............ 585E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X221—11
J7 ............ 587E—1 ...... Purple .......... X221—34
K1 ........... 934EA—1 .... Yellow .......... X218—29, X221—21,
240 X227—G, X303—C
10 K2 ........... 935EA—1 .... Dark Green .. X218—30, X221—44,
–UN–10OCT97
,126 X227—B, X303—B
K3 ........... not applicable
K4 ........... 228E—1 ...... Gray ............. X211—D3
K5 ........... 595E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X221—40
K6 ........... not applicable
LX1017937
K7 ........... 541EB—0.5 . Brown .......... X220—B, X221—24
L1 ............ 932EA—1 .... Red .............. X221—43, X227—F
L2 ............ 930EA—1 .... Black ............ X221—20, X227—C
L3 ............ 699E—1 ...... White ........... X198—B3
L4 ............ 688E—1 ...... Gray ............. X198—C1
L5 ............ 698E—1 ...... Gray ............. X198—C2
L6 ............ 672EC—1 .... Red .............. X198—D1, X211—E1
L7 ............ 685E—1 ...... Dark Green .. X198—D2
M1 ........... 694E—1 ...... Yellow .......... X198—D3
M2 ........... 311EA—1 .... Brown .......... X198—E1
M3 ........... 693E—1 ...... Orange ........ X198—E2
M4 ........... 687E—1 ...... Purple .......... X198—E3
M5 ........... 684E—1 ...... Yellow .......... X198—F1
M6 ........... 686E—1 ...... Light Blue .... X198—F2
M7 ........... 691E—1 ...... Brown .......... 198—F3
N1 ........... not applicable
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-126 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=206
X226 7-Pin Plug for 11-bit CAN-BUS Terminator

A ............. not applicable
B ............. 945EC—1 .... Dark Green .. X221—42, X222—C2
–UN–10OCT97
C ............. 940EC—1 .... Black ............ X221—18, X222—D2
D ............. 562EC—1 .... Red .............. X221—23, X222—J3,
X227—D, X303—A
E ............. 050EC—1 .... Black ............ X198—C3, X211—D1,
X218—24, X219—D,
LX1017991
X221—1, X222—A1,
X227—E, X303—D
F .............. 942EC—1 .... Red .............. X221—41, X222—D1
G ............. 944EC—1 .... Yellow .......... X221—19, X222—C1
240
10
,127
AG,LX25599,40 –19–02FEB00–11/13

B ............. 935EG—1 .... Dark Green .. X218—30, X221—44,
–UN–10OCT97
X222—K2, X303—B
C ............. 930EG—1 .... Black ............ X221—20, X222—L2
D ............. 562ED—1 .... Red .............. X221—23, X222—J3,
X226—D, X303—A
E ............. 050ED—1 .... Black ............ X198—C3, X211—D1,
LX1017991
X218—24, X219—D,
X221—1, X222—A1,
X226—E, X303—D
F .............. 932EB—1 .... Red .............. X221—43, X222—L1
G ............. 934EG—1 .... Yellow .......... X218—29, X221—21,
X222—K1, X303—C
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-127 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=207
X303 4-Pin Plug for 29-bit CAN-BUS Service

A ............. 562EE—1 .... Red .............. X221—23, X222—J3,
X226—D, X227—D
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 935EF—1 .... Dark Green .. X218—30, X221—44,
X222—K2, X227—B
C ............. 934EF—1 .... Yellow .......... X218—29, X221—21,
X222—K1, X227—G
D ............. 050EJ—1 ..... Black ............ X198—C3, X211—D1,
LX1017887
X218—24, X219—D,
X221—1, X222—A1,
X226—E, X227—E
NOTE: Not used
240
10
,128
AG,LX25599,40 –19–02FEB00–13/13
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-128 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=208
240
10
,129
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-129 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=209
Wiring Harness for Stepper Motor Drivers (W35; AL114802)
240
10
,130
–UN–12OCT98
LX1021564
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-130 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=210
X232 7-Pin Plug, Connection Point for Stepper Motor

Driver Harness (W4)

A ............. 944MA—1 ... Yellow .......... X253—D3, X254—D3,
–UN–10OCT97
X255—D3, X256—D3,
X258—G
B ............. 945MA—1 ... Dark Green .. X253—E3, X254—E3,
X255—E3, X256—E3,
X258—B
LX1017899
C ............. 942MA—1 ... Red .............. X253—E2, X254—E2,
X255—E2, X256—E2,
X258—F
D ............. 940MA—1 ... Black ............ X253—D2, X254—D2,
X255—D2, X256—D2,
X258—C
E ............. 255MH—4 ... Dark Green .. X253—A3, X253—C1,
X254—B3, X254—C1, 240
X255—A3, X255—B3, 10
X255—C1 ,131
F .............. 266M—1 ...... Light Blue .... X256—C1
G ............. 310MS—4 ... Black ............ X253—A2, X253—B3,
X253—C3, X253—D1,
X254—A2, X254—A3,
X254—C3, X254—D1,
X255—A2, X255—C3,
X255—D1, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
AG,LX25599,39 –19–01FEB00–2/19
X318 6-Pin Plug for E-ICV 1 Stepper Motor (M12)

B ............. 864M—1 ...... Yellow .......... X253—E1
C ............. 863M—1 ...... Orange ........ X255—B1 –UN–10OCT97
D ............. 861M—1 ...... Brown .......... X253—A1
E ............. 865M—1 ...... Dark Green .. X253—F1
F .............. not applicable
LX1017894
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-131 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=211

B ............. 867M—1 ...... Purple .......... X254—E1
–UN–10OCT97
C ............. 866M—1 ...... Light Blue .... X254—B1
D ............. 862M—1 ...... Red .............. X254—A1
E ............. 868M—1 ...... Gray ............. X254—F1
LX1017894
AG,LX25599,39 –19–01FEB00–4/19

240
10 Terminal Lead Number Wire Color To Plug or
,132 Number and Section Component
B ............. 853M—1 ...... Orange ........ X255—E1
–UN–10OCT97
C ............. 852M—1 ...... Red .............. X255—B1
D ............. 851M—1 ...... Brown .......... X255—A1
E ............. 857M—1 ...... Purple .......... X255—F1
LX1017894
AG,LX25599,39 –19–01FEB00–5/19
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017925
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-132 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=212
X253 18-Pin Plug for E-ICV 1 Stepper Motor Driver

(A10)

A1 ........... 861M—1 ...... Brown .......... X318—D
A2 ........... 310MM—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—B3,
X253—C3, X253—D1,
X254—A2, X254—A3,
X254—C3, X254—D1,
X255—A2, X255—C3,
X255—D1, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
A3 ........... 255MB—1 ... Dark Green .. X232—E, X253—C1,
X254—B3, X254—C1,
X255—A3, X255—B3,
X255—C1
B1 ........... 863A—1 ...... Orange ........ X318—C 240
B2 ........... not 10
applicable .... ,133
B3 ........... 310MP—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—C3, X253—D1,
X254—A2, X254—A3,
X254—C3, X254—D1,
X255—A2, X255—C3,
X255—D1, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
C1 ........... 255MA—1 Dark Green .. X232—E, X253—C1,
.................... X254—B3, X254—C1,
X255—A3, X255—B3,
X255—C1
C3 ........... 310MO—1 Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
.................... X253—B3, X253—D1,
X254—A2, X254—A3,
X254—C3, X254—D1,
X255—A2, X255—C3,
X255—D1, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
D1 ........... 310MR—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X254—A2, X254—A3,
X254—C3, X254—D1,
X255—A2, X255—C3,
X255—D1, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-133 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=213

D2 ........... 940MD—1 Black ............ X232—D, X254—D2,
.................... X255—D2, X256—D2,
X258—C
D3 ........... 944MD—1 ... Yellow .......... X232—A, X254—D3,
X255—D3, X256—D3,
X258—G
AG,LX25599,39 –19–01FEB00–8/19

240 (A10) - Continued -
10
,134 Terminal Lead Number Wire Color To Plug or
E1 ........... 864M—1 ...... Yellow .......... X318—B
E2 ........... 942MD—1 ... Red .............. X232—C, X254—E2,
X255—E2, X256—E2,
X258—F
–UN–10OCT97
E3 ........... 945MD—1 ... Dark Green .. X232—B, X254—E3,
X255—E3, X256—E3,
X258—B
F1 ............ 865M—1 ...... Dark Green .. X318—E
LX1017925
AG,LX25599,39 –19–01FEB00–9/19
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017925
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-134 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=214

(A11)

A1 ........... 862M—1 ...... Red .............. X251—D
A2 ........... 310MK—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A3,
X254—C3, X254—D1,
X255—A2, X255—C3,
X255—D1, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
A3 ........... 310MJ—1 .... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A2,
X254—C3, X254—D1,
X255—A2, X255—C3, 240
X255—D1, X256—A2, 10
X256—A3, X256—B3, ,135
X256—C3, X256—D1
B1 ........... 866M—1 ...... Light Blue .... X251—C
B3 ........... 255MD—1 ... Dark Green .. X232—E, X253—A3,
X253—C1, X254—C1,
X255—A3, X255—B3,
X255—C1
C1 ........... 255MC—1 ... Dark Green .. X232—E, X253—A3,
X253—C1, X254—B3,
X255—A3, X255—B3,
X255—C1
C3 ........... 310ML—1 .... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A2,
X254—A3, X254—D1,
X255—A2, X255—C3,
X255—D1, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
D1 ........... 310MM—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A2,
X254—A3, X254—C3,
X255—A2, X255—C3,
X255—D1, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-135 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=215

D2 ........... 940MF—1 Black ............ X232—D, X253—D2,
.................... X255—D2, X256—D2,
X258—C
D3 ........... 944MF—1 .... Yellow .......... X232—A, X253—D3,
X255—D3, X256—D3,
X258—G
AG,LX25599,39 –19–01FEB00–12/19

240 (A11) - Continued -
10
E1 ........... 867M—1 ...... Purple .......... X251—B
E2 ........... 942MF—1 .... Red .............. X232—C, X253—E2,
X255—E2, X256—E2,
X258—F
–UN–10OCT97
E3 ........... 945MF—1 .... Dark Green .. X232—B, X253—E3,
X255—E3, X256—E3,
X258—B
F1 ............ 868M—1 ...... Gray ............. X251—E
LX1017925
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-136 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=216

(A12)

A1 ........... 851M—1 ...... Brown .......... X252—D
A2 ........... 310MF—1 .... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A2,
–UN–10OCT97
X254—A3, X254—C3,
X254—D1, X255—C3,
X255—D1, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
LX1017925
X256—C3, X256—D1
A3 ........... 255MG—1 ... Dark Green .. X232—E, X253—A3,
X253—C1, X254—B3,
X254—C1, X255—B3,
X255—C1
B1 ........... 852M—1 ...... Red .............. X252—C 240
B2 ........... not applicable 10
B3 ........... 255MF—1 .... Dark Green .. X232—E, X253—A3, ,137
X253—C1, X254—B3,
X254—C1, X255—A3,
X255—C1
C1 ........... 255ME—1 ... Dark Green .. X232—E, X253—A3,
X253—C1, X254—B3,
X254—C1, X255—A3,
X255—B3
C3 ........... 310MG—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A2,
X254—A3, X254—C3,
X254—D1, X255—A2,
X255—D1, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
D1 ........... 310MH—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A2,
X254—A3, X254—C3,
X254—D1, X255—A2,
X255—C3, X256—A2,
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
D2 ........... 940MB—1 Black ............ X232—D, X253—D2,
.................... X254—D2, X256—D2,
X258—C
D3 ........... 944MB—1 ... Yellow .......... X232—A, X253—D3,
X254—D3, X256—D3,
X258—G
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-137 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=217

(A12) - Continued -

E1 ........... 8653—1 ....... Orange ........ X252—B
E2 ........... 942MB—1 ... Red .............. X232—C, X253—E2,
X254—E2, X256—E2,
X258—F
–UN–10OCT97
E3 ........... 945MB—1 ... Dark Green .. X232—B, X253—E3,
X254—E3, X256—E3,
X258—B
F1 ............ 857M—1 ...... Purple .......... X252—E
LX1017925
240
10
,138
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-138 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=218
X256 18-Pin Plug for Stepper Motor Driver with

PowrQuad Plus or AutoQuad or AutoQuad II
Transmission (A13)

A1 ........... 895M—1 ...... Brown .......... X257—D
A2 ........... 310MB—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
–UN–10OCT97
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A2,
X254—A3, X254—C3,
X254—D1, X255—A2,
X255—C3, X255—D1,
LX1017925
X256—A3, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
A3 ........... 310MA—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A2,
X254—A3, X254—C3, 240
X254—D1, X255—A2, 10
X255—C3, X255—D1, ,139
X256—A2, X256—B3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
B1 ........... 896M—1 ...... Brown .......... X257—C
B3 ........... 310MD—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A2,
X254—A3, X254—C3,
X254—D1, X255—A2,
X255—C3, X255—D1,
X256—A2, X256—A3,
X256—C3, X256—D1
C1 ........... 260M—1 ...... Black ............ X232—F
C3 ........... 310MC—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
X253—D1, X254—A2,
X254—A3, X254—C3,
X254—D1, X255—A2,
X255—C3, X255—D1,
X256—A2, X256—A3,
X256—B3, X256—D1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-139 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=219
X256 18-Pin Plug for Stepper Motor Driver with

PowrQuad Plus or AutoQuad or AutoQuad II
Transmission (A13) - Continued -

D1 ........... 310MH—1 ... Black ............ X232—G, X253—A2,
X253—B3, X253—C3,
–UN–10OCT97
X253—D1, X254—A2,
X254—A3, X254—C3,
X254—D1, X255—A2,
X255—C3, X255—D1,
X256—A2, X256—A3,
LX1017925
X256—B3, X256—C3
D2 ........... 940MJ—1 Black ............ X232—D, X253—D2,
.................... X254—D2, X255—D2,
X258—C
D3 ........... 944MJ—1 .... Yellow .......... X232—A, X253—D3,
240 X254—D3, X255—D3,
10 X258—G
,140 E1 ........... 897M—1 ...... Purple .......... X257—B
E2 ........... 942MJ—1 .... Red .............. X232—C, X253—E2,
X254—E2, X255—E2,
X258—F
E3 ........... 945MJ—1 .... Dark Green .. X232—B, X253—E3,
X254—E3, X255—E3,
X258—B
F1 ............ 898M—1 ...... Gray ............. X257—E
F2 ............ 899M—1 ...... White ........... X257—A
F3 ............ 874M—1 ...... Yellow .......... X257—F
AG,LX25599,39 –19–01FEB00–17/19
X257 6-Pin Plug for Stepper Motor with PowrQuad or

AutoQuad or AutoQuad II Transmission (M15)

A ............. 899M—1 ...... White ........... X257—F2
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 897M—1 ...... Purple .......... X257—E1

C ............. 895M—1 ...... Dark Green .. X257—A1
D ............. 896M—1 ...... Light Blue .... X257—B1
E ............. 898M—1 ...... Gray ............. X257—F1
F .............. 874M—1 ...... Yellow .......... X257—F3
LX1017894
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-140 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=220

B ............. 945MH—1 ... Dark Green .. X232—B, X253—E3,
–UN–10OCT97
X254—E3, X255—E3,
X256—E3
C ............. 940MH—1 Black ............ X232—D, X253—D2,
.................... X254—D2, X255—D2,
X256—D2
LX1017991
D ............. not applicable
E ............. not applicable
F .............. 942MH—1 ... Red .............. X232—C, X253—E2,
X254—E2, X255—E2,
X256—E2
G ............. 944MH—1 ... Yellow .......... X232—A, X253—D3,
X254—D3, X255—D3,
X256—D3 240
10
,141
AG,LX25599,39 –19–01FEB00–19/19
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-141 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=221
Turn Signal Lever Wiring Harness (W5; AL77212)
240
10
,142
–UN–21MAR00
LX1024261
AG,LX25599,195 –19–01FEB00–1/9
S08/LH Left Turn Signal Switch

C1 ........... 115—1 ......... Dark Green .. X21—9
NC2 ......... 151B—1 ...... Brown .......... X21—7, S08/RH—
–UN–10OCT97
NC2
NO4 ........ 149B—1 ...... White ........... X21—6, S08/RH—
NO4
LX1017962
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-142 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=222
S08/RH Right Turn Signal Switch

C1 ........... 127—1 ......... Purple .......... X21—4
NC2 ......... 151C—1 ...... Brown .......... X21—7, S08/LH—NC2
–UN–10OCT97
NO4 ........ 149C—1 ...... White ........... X21—6, S08/LH—
NO4
LX1017962
AG,LX25599,195 –19–01FEB00–3/9
S10 Low/High Beam Switch

240
Number and Section Component ,143
C1 ........... 103—1 ......... Orange ........ X21—1
NC2 ......... 144—1 ......... Yellow .......... X21—2
–UN–10OCT97
NO4 ........ 139B—1 ...... White ........... X21—3, X61—A
LX1017962
AG,LX25599,195 –19–01FEB00–4/9
X21 12-Pin Plug, Multi-function Lever Harness


1 .............. 103—1 ......... Orange ........ S10—C1
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 144—1 ......... Yellow .......... S10—NC2
3 .............. 139A—1 ...... White ........... S10—NO4, X61—A
4 .............. 127—1 ......... Purple .......... S08/RH—C1
5 .............. 903—1 ......... Orange ........ X59—A
6 .............. 149A—1 ...... White ........... S08/LH—NO4,
LX1017957
S08/RH—NO4
7 .............. 151A—1 ...... Brown .......... S08/LH—NC2,
S08/RH—NC2
8 .............. 115—1 ......... Dark Green .. S08/LH—C1
10 ............ 012—1.5 ...... Red .............. X62—A
11 ............ 262—1.5 ...... Red .............. X60—A
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-143 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=223
X59 1-Pin Plug for Horn Switch

A ............. 903—1 ......... Orange ........ X21—5
–UN–12DEC96
LX013182
AG,LX25599,195 –19–01FEB00–6/9
X60 1-Pin Plug for Horn Switch

240
10 Terminal Lead Number Wire Color To Plug or
,144 Number and Section Component
A ............. 262—1.5 ...... Red .............. X21—11
–UN–12DEC96
LX013182
AG,LX25599,195 –19–01FEB00–7/9
X61 1-Pin Plug for "Flash-to-Pass" Switch

A ............. 139C—1 ...... White ........... X21—3, S10—NO4
–UN–20MAR98
LX1018500
AG,LX25599,195 –19–01FEB00–8/9
X62 1-Pin Plug for "Flash-to-Pass" Switch

A ............. 012—1.5 ...... Red .............. X21—10
–UN–20MAR98
LX1018500
AG,LX25599,195 –19–01FEB00–9/9
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-144 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=224
240
10
,145
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-145 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=225
Windshield Wiper Switch Wiring Harness without Intermittent Wipe (W6; AL112539)
240
10
,146
–UN–21MAR00
LX1023782
AG,LX25599,56 –19–02FEB00–1/7
S15 5-Pin Plug for

Windshield Wiper Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 227—1 ......... pale purple .. X39—A

C ............. 218—1 ......... gray ............. X64—A
H ............. 224—1 ......... yellow .......... X39—B
L .............. 235—1 ......... dark green ... X39—D
M ............. 229—1 ......... white ............ X39—C
LX1017980
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-146 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=226
S31
Digital Instrument Set Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
C1 ........... 310CM—1 ... black ............ X20B—C
NC2 ......... 905—1 ......... dark green ... X20B—B
NO4 ........ vacant
LX1017962
AG,LX25599,56 –19–02FEB00–3/7

Windshield Washer and Multi-Function Wiring 240
Harness (W4) 10
,147
–UN–10OCT97
Cross-Section
A ............. 208—1 ......... gray ............. X63—A
B ............. 905—1 ......... dark green ... S31—NC2
C ............. 310CM—1 ... black ............ S31—C1
LX1017884
AG,LX25599,56 –19–02FEB00–4/7
X39 4-Pin Plug,


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 227—1 ......... pale purple .. S15—B
B ............. 224—1 ......... yellow .......... S15—H
C ............. 229—1 ......... white ............ S15—M
D ............. 235—1 ......... dark green ... S15—L
LX1017886
AG,LX25599,56 –19–02FEB00–5/7
X63 1-Pin Plug for

Windshield Washer Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–20MAR98
A ............. 208—1 ......... gray ............. X20B—A

LX1018500
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-147 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=227
X64 1-Pin Plug for


Cross-Section
–UN–20MAR98
A ............. 218—1 ......... gray ............. S15—C
LX1018500
AG,LX25599,56 –19–02FEB00–7/7
240
10
,148
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-148 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=228
240
10
,149
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-149 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=229
Windshield Wiper Switch Wiring Harness with Intermittent Wipe (W6; AL112652)
240
10
,150
–UN–21MAR00
LX1023783
AG,LX25599,57 –19–02FEB00–1/8
K26 Intermittent Wipe Relay

Cross-Section
1 .............. 227B—1 ...... pale purple .. S15—B
–UN–20MAR98
2 .............. 233—1 ......... orange ......... S15—L

3 .............. 201—1 ......... brown ........... S15—M
4 .............. 216—1 ......... light blue ...... S15—H
5 .............. 050C—1 ...... black ............ X20B—C, S31—C
6 .............. 227A—1 ...... pale purple .. X39—A
LX1018502
7 .............. 224—1 ......... yellow .......... X39—B

8 .............. 235—1 ......... dark green ... X39—D
9 .............. 229—1 ......... white ............ X39—C
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-150 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=230
S15 5-Pin Plug for

Windshield Wiper Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 227B—1 ...... pale purple .. K26—1
C ............. 218—1 ......... gray ............. X64—A
H ............. 216—1 ......... light blue ...... K26—4
L .............. 233—1 ......... orange ......... K26—2
M ............. 201—1 ......... brown ........... K26—3
LX1017980
AG,LX25599,57 –19–02FEB00–3/8
S31
Digital Instrument Set Switch 240
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
C1 ........... 050B—1 ...... black ............ X20B—C, K26—5
NC2 ......... 905—1 ......... dark green ... X20B—B
NO4 ........ vacant
LX1017962
AG,LX25599,57 –19–02FEB00–4/8

Windshield Washer and Multi-Function Wiring
Harness (W4)

–UN–10OCT97
Cross-Section
A ............. 208—1 ......... gray ............. X63—A
B ............. 905—1 ......... dark green ... S31—NC2
C ............. 050A—1 ...... black ............ S31—C1, K26—5
LX1017884
AG,LX25599,57 –19–02FEB00–5/8
X39 4-Pin Plug,


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 227A—1 ...... pale purple .. K26—6

B ............. 224—1 ......... yellow .......... K26—7
C ............. 229—1 ......... white ............ K26—9
D ............. 235—1 ......... dark green ... K26—8
LX1017886
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-151 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=231
X63 1-Pin Plug for


Cross-Section
–UN–20MAR98
A ............. 208—1 ......... gray ............. X20B—A
LX1018500
AG,LX25599,57 –19–02FEB00–7/8
X64 1-Pin Plug for

240 Windshield Washer Switch
10
Cross-Section
–UN–20MAR98
A ............. 218—1 ......... gray ............. S15—C
LX1018500
AG,LX25599,57 –19–02FEB00–8/8
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-152 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=232
240
10
,153
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-153 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=233
Cab Roof Wiring Harness (W11; AL 150707)
240
10
,154
–UN–05DEC00
LX1024562
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-154 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=234
B28/LH Left Door Dome Light Switch

Cross-Section
C1 ........... 310JC—1 .... black ............ XGND10, X121—3,
–UN–10OCT97
B28/RH—C1,
X114/2—B, X114/1—
B, X142/2—A, X105—
D, X163—B, X164—B
NC2 ......... 274JB—1 ..... yellow .......... X121—4
LX1017963
NO4 ........ vacant
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–2/31
B28/RH Right Door Dome Light Switch

240
Number and Component ,155
Cross-Section
C1 ........... 310JW—1 .... black ............ XGND10, X121—3,
–UN–10OCT97
B28/LH—C1,
X114/2—B, X114/1—
B, X142/2—A, X105—
D, X163—B, X164—B
NC2 ......... 274JA—1 ..... yellow .......... X121—4
LX1017963
NO4 ........ vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-155 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=235
X07 20-Pin Plug for

Cab Roof Harness Connection Point (W4)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. 118JA—1 ..... gray ............. X106—B
2 .............. 128JA—1 ..... gray ............. X107—B
3 .............. 107JC—1 .... pale purple .. X408M—B, X164—A,
X161—A
4 .............. 125JC—1 .... dark green ... X408M—A, X163—A,
LX1017958
X160—A
5 .............. vacant
6 .............. 138JB—1 ..... gray ............. X121—1
7 .............. 912JB—1 ..... red ............... X121—2
8 .............. 137J—1,5 .... pale purple .. X142/1
9 .............. vacant
10 ............ 136JA—1 ..... light blue ...... X114/1—A
240 10 ............ 136JB—1 ..... light blue ...... X114/2—A
10 11 ............ vacant
,156 12 ............ 133JA—1 ..... orange ......... X112/1—A
12 ............ 133JB—1 ..... orange ......... X112/2—A
13 ............ vacant
14 ............ 208J—1 ....... gray ............. X285—A
15 ............ vacant
16 ............ 545J—1 ....... dark green ... X105—C
17 ............ 147J—1,5 .... pale purple .. X165—A
18 ............ vacant
19 ............ vacant
20 ............ 129JC—1 .... white ............ X162/1—A, X162/2—A
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–4/31
X07/1M 2-Pin Plug Connection Point

Cab Roof Wiring Harness (W4 or W56)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 126JA—1 ..... light blue ...... X107—A

B ............. 119J—1 ....... white ............ X106—A
LX1017882
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-156 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=236
X35 6-Pin Plug for

External Control Switch, Left

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 821JA—1 ..... white ............ X36—A
B ............. 050JB—1 ..... black ............ X36—E, X35—E
C ............. 824JA—1 ..... yellow .......... X36—C
D ............. 826JA—1 ..... light blue ...... X36—D
E ............. 050JC—1 .... black ............ X36—E, X35—B
LX1017894
F .............. 823JA—1 ..... orange ......... X36—B
240
10
,157
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–6/31
X36 6-Pin Plug, connection point

External Control (W4)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 821JA—1 ..... brown ........... X35—A
B ............. 823JA—1 ..... orange ......... X35—F
C ............. 824JA—1 ..... yellow .......... X35—C
D ............. 826JB—1 ..... light blue ...... X35—D
E ............. 050JA—1 ..... black ............ X35—B, X35—E
LX1017893
F .............. vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-157 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=237
X105 4-Pin Plug for

Radio

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 138JA—1 ..... gray ............. X121—1
B ............. 912JA—1 ..... red ............... X121—2
C ............. 545J—1 ....... dark green ... X07—16
D ............. 310JG—1 .... black ............ XGND10, X121—3,
B28/RH—C1,
LX1017886
B28/LH—C1,
X114/2—B, X114/1—
B, X142/2—A, X163—
B, X164—B
240
10
,158
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–8/31
X106 4-Pin Plug for

Tail, Turn Signal and Brake Lights, Right

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 119J—1 ....... white ............ X07/1M—B
B ............. 118JA—1 ..... gray ............. X07—1
C ............. vacant
D ............. 310JN—1 .... black ............ XGND12
LX1017903
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–9/31
X107 4-Pin Plug for

Tail and Turn Signal, Left

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 126JA—1 ..... light blue ...... X07/1M—A

B ............. 128JA—1 ..... gray ............. X07—2
C ............. vacant
D ............. 310JO—1 .... black ............ XGND13
LX1017903
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-158 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=238

Work Light on Left Rear Fender

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 133JA—1 ..... orange ......... X07—12
B ............. 310JU—1 .... black ............ XGND13
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–11/31

Work Light on Right Rear Fender 240
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 133JB—1 ..... orange ......... X07—12
B ............. 310JV—1 ..... black ............ XGND12
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–12/31

Right Rear Cab Roof Worklight

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 136JA—1 ..... light blue ...... X07—10
B ............. 310JE—1 ..... black ............ XGND10, X121—3,
B28/RH—C1,
B28/LH—C1,
X114/2—B, X142/2—
LX1017883
A, X105—D, X163—B,
X164—B
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-159 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=239

Left Rear Cab Roof Worklight

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 136JB—1 ..... light blue ...... X07-10
B ............. 310JD—1 .... black ............ XGND10, X121—3,
B28/RH—C1,
B28/LH—C1,
X114/1—B, X142/2—
LX1017883
A, X105—D, X163—B,
X164—B
240
10
,160
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–14/31
X121 4-Pin Plug for

Dome and Shift Console Lights

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. 138JA—1 ..... gray ............. X105—A
1 .............. 138JB—1 ..... gray ............. X07—6
2 .............. 912JA—1 ..... red ............... X105—B
2 .............. 912JB—1 ..... red ............... X07—7
3 .............. 310JA—1 ..... black ............ XGND10, B28/RH—
LX1017952
C1, B28/LH—C1,
X114/2—B, X114/1—
B, X142/2—A, X105—
D, X163—B, X164—B
4 .............. 274JA—1 ..... yellow .......... B28/RH—NC2
4 .............. 274JB—1 ..... yellow .......... B28/LH—NC2
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–15/31
X142/1 Prewiring for Beacon

no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 137J—1,5 .... pale purple .. X07—8
–UN–23FEB98
LX1020038
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-160 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=240
X142/2 Ground Cable Grommet Terminal for Beacon

no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310JF—1,5 .. black ............ XGND10, X121—3,
B28/RH—C1,
–UN–12DEC96
B28/LH—C1,
X114/2—B, X114/1—
B, X142/2—A, X105—
D, X163—B, X164—B
LX013660
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–17/31

Turn Signal Light in Left Front Roof 240
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 125JB—1 ..... dark green ... X408M—A, X07—4,
X163—A
B ............. 310JK—1 ..... black ............ XGND11
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–18/31

Turn Signal Light in Right Front Roof

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 107JB—1 ..... pale purple .. X408M—B, X07—3,
X164—A
B ............. 310JP—1 ..... black ............ XGND11
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–19/31

Worklight on Right Cab Frame

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 129JB—1 ..... white ............ X07—20, X162/2—A

B ............. 310JJ—1 ..... black ............ XGND11
LX1017883
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-161 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=241

Worklight on Left Cab Frame

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 129JA—1 ..... white ............ X07—20, X162/1—A
B ............. 310JH—1 .... black ............ XGND11
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–21/31

240 Turn Signal Light in Left Rear Roof
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 125JA—1 ..... dark green ... X408M—A, X07—4,
X160—A
B ............. 310JR—1 .... black ............ XGND10, X121—3,
B28/RH—C1,
B28/LH—C1,
LX1017882
X114/2—B, X114/1—
B, X142/2—A, X105—
D, X164—B
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–22/31

Turn Signal Light in Right Rear Roof

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 107JA—1 ..... pale purple .. X408M—B, X07—3,

X161—A
B ............. 310JT—1 ..... black ............ XGND10, X121—3,
B28/RH—C1,
B28/LH—C1,
LX1017882
X114/2—B, X114/1—
B, X142/2—A, X105—
D, X163—B
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-162 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=242
X165 2-Pin Plug, Front Cab Roof Worklight Wiring

Harness Connection Point (W18)

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 147J—1,5 .... pale purple .. X07—17
B ............. 310JM—1,5 . black ............ XGND11
LX1017948
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–24/31
X285 2-Pin Plug for

Windshield Washer Pump 240
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 208J—1 ....... gray ............. X07—14
B ............. 310JS—1 ..... black ............ XGND12
LX1017948
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–25/31
X408M 2-Pin Plug,

Adapter Wiring Harness Connection Point (W56)

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 125JD—1 .... dark green ... X07—4, X163—A,
X160—A
B ............. 107JD—1 .... pale purple .. X07—3, X164—A,
X161—A
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–26/31
XGND10 Ground Point

no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310JZ—10 ... black ............ X121—3, B28/RH—
C1, B28/LH—C1,
–UN–12DEC96
X114/2—B, X114/1—
B, X142/2—A, X105—
D, X163—B, X164—B
LX013685
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-163 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=243
XGND11 Ground Point

no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310JH—1 .... black ............ X162/2—B
(-) ............ 310JJ—1 ..... black ............ X162/1—B
–UN–12DEC96
(-) ............ 310JK—1 ..... black ............ X160—B
(-) ............ 310JL—1.5 .. black ............ XGND14
(-) ............ 310JM—1,5 . black ............ X165—B
(-) ............ 310JP—1 ..... black ............ X161—B
LX013685
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–28/31
XGND12 Ground Point

240
,164 no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310JN—1 .... black ............ X106—D
(-) ............ 310JS—1 ..... black ............ X285—B
–UN–12DEC96
(-) ............ 310JV—1 ..... black ............ X112/2—B
LX013660
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–29/31
XGND13 Ground Point

no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310JO—1 .... black ............ X107—D
(-) ............ 310JU—1 .... black ............ X112/1—B
–UN–12DEC96
LX013660
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–30/31
XGND14 Ground Point

no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310JL—1 ..... black ............ XGND11
–UN–12DEC96
LX013660
AG,LX25599,285 –19–01MAY00–31/31
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-164 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=244
240
10
,165
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-165 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=245
W56 — Wiring Harness — Turn Signal Light Adapter (AL119802)
240
10
,166
–UN–05DEC00
LX1024563
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-166 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=246
X07/1F 2-Pin Plug

Cab Roof Wiring Harness Connection Point (W11)

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. XX5—1 ........ dark green ... X408F—A
B ............. XX7—1 ........ pale purple .. X408F—B
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,286 –19–24MAY00–2/3
X408F 2-Pin Plug,

Adapter Wiring Harness Connection Point (W11) 240
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. XX5—1 ........ dark green ... X07/1F—A
B ............. XX7—1 ........ pale purple .. X07/1F—B
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,286 –19–24MAY00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-167 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=247
Front Cab Roof Worklight Wiring Harness (W18; AL83139)
–UN–17SEP97
240
LX1016207
10
,168
AG,LX25599,20 –19–01FEB00–1/6
X117/1 2-Pin Plug for Right Front Cab Roof Worklight

A ............. 147C—1 ...... pale purple .. X165—A, X117/2—A,
X118/1—A, X118/2—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310DY—1 .... black ............ X165—B, X117/2—B,
X118/1—B, X118/2—B
LX1017976
AG,LX25599,20 –19–01FEB00–2/6
X117/2 2-Pin Plug for Right Front Cab Roof Worklight

A ............. 147D—1 ...... pale purple .. X165—A, X117/1—A,
X118/1—A, X118/2—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310DZ—1 .... black ............ X165—B, X117/1—B,

X118/1—B, X118/2—B
LX1017976
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-168 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=248
X118/1 2-Pin Plug for Left Front Cab Roof Worklight

A ............. 147E—1 ...... pale purple .. X165—A, X118/2—A,
X117/1—A, X117/2—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310EA—1 .... black ............ X165—B, X118/2—B,
X117/1—B, X117/2—B
LX1017976
AG,LX25599,20 –19–01FEB00–4/6
X118/2 2-Pin Plug for Left Front Cab Roof Worklight

240
A ............. 147F—1 ....... pale purple .. X165—A, X118/1—A,
X117/1—A, X117/2—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310EB—1 .... black ............ X165—B, X118/1—B,
X117/1—B, X117/2—B
LX1017976
AG,LX25599,20 –19–01FEB00–5/6
X165 2-Pin Plug - Front Cab Roof Worklight Wiring

Harness Connection Point (W11)

A ............. 147B—1.5 ... pale purple .. X117/1—A, X117/2—
–UN–10OCT97
A, X118/1—A,
X118/2—A,
B ............. 310EK—1.5 . black ............ X117/1—B, X117/2—
B, X118/1—B,
X118/2—B,
LX1017949
AG,LX25599,20 –19–01FEB00–6/6
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-169 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=249
W7 Windshield Wiper Wiring Harness (AL79007)
240
10
,170
–UN–21MAR00
LX1023415
AG,LX25599,284 –19–01MAY00–1/4
X20A 1-Pin Plug,

Windshield Wiper Connection Point (W4)

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–16OCT97
A ............. 227—1 ......... pale purple .. X39—A

A ............. 232—1 ......... red ............... X38—A
LX1017067
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-170 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=250
X38 4-Pin Plug for

Windshield Wiper Motor

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 232—1 ......... red ............... X20A—A
B ............. 235—1 ......... dark green ... X39—D
C ............. 229—1 ......... white ............ X39—C
D ............. 224—1 ......... yellow .......... X39—B
LX1017887
AG,LX25599,284 –19–01MAY00–3/4
X39 4-Pin Plug,

Windshield Wiper Connection Point (W4) 240
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 227—1 ......... pale purple .. X20A—A
B ............. 224—1 ......... yellow .......... X38—D
C ............. 229—1 ......... white ............ X38—C
D ............. 235—1 ......... dark green ... X38—B
LX1017887
AG,LX25599,284 –19–01MAY00–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-171 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=251
W10 Rear Window Wiper Wiring Harness (AL116544)
240
10
,172
–UN–21MAR00
LX1023471
AG,LX25599,32 –19–02FEB00–1/8
S20 Rear
Window Switch

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
C1 ........... 267L—1 ....... pale purple .. X42M—E

NC2 ......... 294LB—1 .... yellow .......... X42M—A, X43—D
NO4 ........ 246LB—1 .... light blue ...... X43—A, X40—A
LX1017963
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-172 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=252
X40 1-Pin Plug,

Windshield Wiper Connection Point (W4)

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–16OCT97
A ............. 246LC—1 .... light blue ...... X43—A, S20—NO4
LX1017067
AG,LX25599,32 –19–02FEB00–3/8
X42M 6-Pin Plug, Rear Window Wiper

Adapter Wiring Harness Connection Point (W38) 240
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 294LA—1 .... yellow .......... S20—NC2, X43—D
B ............. 275LB—1 .... dark green ... X42M—D, X43—B
C ............. 258L—1 ....... gray ............. X44—A
D ............. 275LA—1 .... dark green ... X42M—B, X43—B
E ............. 267L—1 ....... pale purple .. S20—C1
LX1017893
F .............. 239L—1 ....... white ............ X43—C
AG,LX25599,32 –19–02FEB00–4/8
X43 4-Pin Plug for

Rear Window Wiper Motor

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 246LA—1 .... light blue ...... X40—A, S20—NO4
B ............. 275LC—1 .... dark green ... X43—B, X42M—D
C ............. 239L—1 ....... white ............ X42M—F
D ............. 294LC—1 .... yellow .......... X42M—A, S20—NC2
LX1017887
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-173 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=253
X44 2-Pin Plug for

Rear Window Washer Pump

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 248L—1 ....... gray ............. X42M—C
B ............. 310LB—1 .... black ............ XGND6
LX1017948
AG,LX25599,32 –19–02FEB00–6/8
XGND6 Ground Point

240
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310LA—1 .... black ............ XGND7
(-) ............ 310LB—1 .... black ............ X44—B
–UN–12DEC96
LX013660
AG,LX25599,32 –19–02FEB00–7/8
XGND7 Ground Point

no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310LA—1 .... black ............ XGND6
–UN–12DEC96
LX013660
AG,LX25599,32 –19–02FEB00–8/8
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-174 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=254
240
10
,175
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-175 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=255
Rear Window Wiper Adapter Harness (W38; AL116548)
240
10
,176
–UN–21MAR00
LX1023472
AG,LX25599,33 –19–01FEB00–1/3
X42 7-Pin Plug for Rear Window Wiper Switch

1 .............. 275LG—1 .... dark green ... X42F—D
2 .............. 239LG—1 .... white ............ X42F—F
–UN–10OCT97

4 .............. 258LG—1 .... gray ............. X42F—C
B ............. 267LG—1 .... pale purple .. X42F—E
L .............. 275LH—1 .... dark green ... X42F—B
P ............. 294LG—1 .... yellow .......... X42F—A
LX1017988
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-176 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=256
X42F 6-Pin Plug, Rear Window Wiper Harness


A ............. 294LG—1 .... yellow .......... X42—PD
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 275LH—1 .... dark green ... X42—L
C ............. 258LG—1 .... gray ............. X42—4
D ............. 275LG—1 .... dark green ... X42—1
E ............. 267LG—1 .... pale purple .. X42—B
F .............. 239LG—1 .... white ............ X42—2
LX1017894
AG,LX25599,33 –19–01FEB00–3/3
240
10
,177
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-177 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=257
Air Conditioning and Fan Wiring Harness (W8; AL110248)
240
10
,178
–UN–12MAR98
LX1018503
AG,LX25599,34 –19–01FEB00–1/12
X28 2-Pin Plug for Air Conditioning Pressure Switch

A ............. 215B—1 ...... dark green ... X73/1—A
B ............. 213B—1 ...... orange ......... X72—A
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017883
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-178 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=258
X45/2 1-Pin Plug for Air Conditioning Compressor

Switch

A ............. 211B—1 ...... brown ........... X73/2—A
–UN–12DEC96
LX013178
AG,LX25599,34 –19–01FEB00–3/12
X46 2-Pin Plug for Fan Motor

240
A ............. 231—2.5 ...... brown ........... X50—2
B ............. 234B—2.5 ... yellow .......... X47—B, X48—1,
–UN–10OCT97
X100—2
LX1017909
AG,LX25599,34 –19–01FEB00–4/12
X47 2-Pin Plug for Fan Motor

A ............. 222—2.5 ...... red ............... X50—1
B ............. 234C—2.5 ... yellow .......... X46—B, X48—1,
–UN–10OCT97
X100—2
LX1017909
AG,LX25599,34 –19–01FEB00–5/12
X48 4-Pin Plug for Resistors

1 .............. 234A—2.5 ... yellow .......... X46—B, X47—B,
X100—2
–UN–20MAR98
2 .............. 221—1.5 ...... brown ........... X100—4

3 .............. 226A—1.5 ... light blue ...... X100—1
4 .............. 223—2.5 ...... orange ......... X100—5
LX1018504
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-179 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=259
X50 3-Pin Plug, Connection Point for Fan Harness

(W4)

1 .............. 222—2.5 ...... red ............... X47—A
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 231—2.5 ...... brown ........... X46—4
3 .............. 226B—1 ...... orange ......... X100—1
LX1017951
AG,LX25599,34 –19–01FEB00–7/12
X72 1-Pin Plug, Pressure Switch Connection Point

240 (W4)
10
A ............. 213B—1 ...... orange ......... X28—B
–UN–16OCT97
LX1017067
AG,LX25599,34 –19–01FEB00–8/12
X73/1 1-Pin Plug for Thermostat Switch

A ............. 215B—1 ...... dark green ... X28—A
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017945
AG,LX25599,34 –19–01FEB00–9/12
X73/2 1-Pin Plug for Thermostat Switch

A ............. 211B—1 ...... brown ........... X45/2—A
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017945
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-180 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=260
X100 6-Pin Plug for Fan Switch

1 .............. 226A—1.5 ... light blue ...... X48—3
1 .............. 226B—1 ...... light blue ...... X50—3
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 234D—4 ...... yellow .......... X46—B, X47—B
3 .............. 310CG—2.5 black ............ XGND15
4 .............. 221—1.5 ...... brown ........... X48—2
5 .............. 223—2.5 ...... orange ......... X48—4
6 .............. 310CF—2.5 . black ............ XGND15
LX1017983
AG,LX25599,34 –19–01FEB00–11/12
XGND15 Ground Point

240
(-) ............ 310CF—2.5 . black ............ X100—6
(-) ............ 310GC—2.5 black ............ X100—3
–UN–12DEC96
LX013660
AG,LX25599,34 –19–01FEB00–12/12
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-181 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=261
W13 Transmission Wiring Harness (AL152964)
240
10
,182
–UN–05DEC00
LX1024573
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-182 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=262
X03/4 40-Pin Plug,

Transmission Connection Point (W4)

no. and Component
Cross-Section
C1 ........... 311D—1 ..... brown ........... X93—A
C2 ........... 506D—1 ...... light blue ...... X93—B
C3 ........... 572DA—1 .... red ............... X268—A
C4 ........... 587DA—1 .... pale purple .. X268—B
–UN–10OCT97
C5 ........... 512DA—1 .... red ............... X30—2
C6 ........... 541D—1 ...... brown ........... X267—A
C7 ........... 527D—1 ...... pale purple .. X87—A
D1 ........... 555D—1 ...... dark green ... X91—A
D2 ........... 575D—1 ...... dark green ... X95—A
LX1017941
D3 ........... 574D—1 ...... yellow .......... X94—A
D4 ........... 531DA—1 .... brown ........... X30—1, X88—B,
X88—D, X94—B
D5 ........... 353D—1 ...... orange ......... X86—A 240
D6 ........... 602D—1 ...... red ............... X307—A 10
D7 ........... 595D—1 ...... dark green ... X267—B ,183
D8 ........... 515D—1 ...... dark green ... X83—A
E1 ........... vacant
E2 ........... 509D—1 ...... white ............ X81-A
E7 ........... 310DO—2.5 black ............ XGMD26, X80—B,
X83—B, X86—B,
X87—B, X91—B,
X95—B
E8 ........... vacant
F2 ............ vacant
F7 ............ 022DA—1 .... red ............... X86—B
G1 ........... vacant
G2 ........... vacant
G7 ........... vacant
G8 ........... vacant
H1 ........... 606D—1 ...... light blue ...... X80—A
H2 ........... 502D—1 ...... red ............... X88—A
H3 ........... vacant
H4 ........... 873DA—1 .... orange ......... X96—A
H5 ........... 878DA—1 .... gray ............. X96—B
H6 ........... 883DB—1 .... orange ......... X89—A, X90—A
H7 ........... 885D—1 ...... dark green ... X89—B
H8 ........... 884D—1 ...... yellow .......... X90—B
J2 ............ 855D—1 ...... dark green ... X92—C
J3 ............ 854D—1 ...... yellow .......... X92—D
J4 ............ 859D—1 ...... white ............ X92—A
J5 ............ 858D—1 ...... gray ............. X92—B
J6 ............ 050D—1 ...... black ............ X307—B
J7 ............ 973DB—1 .... orange ......... X30—3, X30—4,
X88—C
J8 ............ 871DC—1 .... brown ........... X89—C, X90—C,
X96—C
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-183 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=263
X30 Prewiring for Radar Connection

no. and Component
Cross-Section
1 .............. 531DC—1 .... brown ........... X03/4—D4, X88—B,
–UN–23FEB98
X88—D, X94—B
2 .............. 512DA—1 .... red ............... X03/4—C5
3 .............. 973DC—1 .... orange ......... X03/4—J7, X30—4,
X88—C
4 .............. 973DD—1 .... orange ......... X03/4—J7, X30—3,
LX1020049
X88—C
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–3/21
X80 2-Pin Plug for Oil Filter Indicator

240 Light Sender
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 606D—1 ...... light blue ...... X03/4—H1
B ............. 310DD—1 .... black ............ XGMD26, X03/4—E7,
X83—B, X86—B,
X87—B, X91—B,
X95—B
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–4/21
X81 1-Pin Plug for

Low-Temperature Switch

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 509D—1 ...... white ............ X03/4—E2
LX1017944
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–5/21
X83 2-Pin Plug for Engagement Oil

Indicator Light Sender

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 515D—1 ...... dark green ... X03/4—D8

B ............. 310DK—1 .... black ............ XGMD26, X03/4—E7,
X80—B, X86—B,
X87—B, X91—B,
X95—B
LX1017882
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-184 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=264
X86 3-Pin Plug for

Fuel Gauge and Fuel Pump Sender

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 353D—1 ...... orange ......... X03/4—D5
B ............. 022DA—1 .... red ............... X03/4—F7
C ............. 310DE—1 .... black ............ XGMD26, X03/4—E7,
X80—B, X83—B,
X87—B, X91—B,
LX1017885
X95—B
240
10
,185
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–7/21
X87 2-Pin Plug for

Differential Lock Solenoid Valve

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 527D—1 ...... pale purple .. X03/4—C7
B ............. 310DM—1 ... black ............ XGMD26, X03/4—E7,
X80—B, X83—B,
X86—B, X91—B,
X95—B
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–8/21
X88 4-Pin Plug for

Speedometer Sender

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 502D—1 ...... red ............... X03/4—H2
B ............. 531DE—1 .... brown ........... X03/4—D4, X30—1,
X88—D, X94—B
C ............. 973DA—1 .... orange ......... X03/4—J7, X30—3,
X30—4
LX1017903
D ............. 531DB—1 .... brown ........... X03/4—D4, X30—1,

X88—B, X94—B
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-185 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=265
X89 3-Pin Plug for

Left Draft Sensor

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 883DC—1 .... orange ......... X03/4—H6, X90—A
B ............. 885D—1 ...... dark green ... X03/4—H7
C ............. 871DD—1 .... brown ........... X03/4—J8, X90—C,
X96—C
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–10/21
X90 3-Pin Plug for

240 Right Draft Sensor
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 883DA—1 .... orange ......... X03/4—H6, X89—A
B ............. 884D—1 ...... yellow .......... X03/4—H8
C ............. 871DB—1 .... brown ........... X03/4—J8, X89—C,
X96—C
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–11/21
X91 2-Pin Plug for

FWD Solenoid Valve

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 555D—1 ...... dark green ... X03/4—D1
B ............. 310DL—1 .... black ............ XGMD26, X03/4—E7,
X80—B, X83—B,
X86—B, X87—B,
X95—B
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–12/21
X92 4-Pin Plug for

Stepper Motor

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 859D—1 ...... white ............ X03/4—J4

B ............. 858D—1 ...... gray ............. X03/4—J5
C ............. 855D—1 ...... dark green ... X03/4—J2
D ............. 854D—1 ...... yellow .......... X03/4—J3
LX1017887
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-186 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=266
X93 2-Pin Plug for

Neutral Start Switch

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 311D—1 ...... brown ........... X03/4—C1
B ............. 506D—1 ...... light blue ...... X03/4—C2
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–14/21
X94 2-Pin Plug for Rear

PTO Speed Sender 240
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 574D—1 ...... yellow .......... X03/4—D3
B ............. 531DD—1 .... brown ........... X03/4—D4, X30—1,
X88—B, X88—D
LX1017901
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–15/21
X95 2-Pin Plug for

Rear PTO Solenoid

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 575D—1 ...... dark green ... X03/4—D2
B ............. 310DG—1 ... black ............ XGMD26, X03/4—E7,
X80—B, X83—B,
X86—B, X87—B,
X91—B
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–16/21
X96 3-Pin Plug for

Position Sensor

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 873DA—1 .... orange ......... X03/4—H4

B ............. 878DA—1 .... gray ............. X03/4—H5
C ............. 871DA—1 .... brown ........... X03/4—J8, X89—C,
X90—C
LX1017885
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-187 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=267
X267 4-Pin Plug for

Transmission Speed Sender

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 541D—1 ...... brown ........... X03/4—C6
B ............. 595D—1 ...... dark green ... X03/4—D7
C ............. vacant
D ............. vacant
LX1017903
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–18/21
X268 2-Pin Plug for

240 Clutch Switch
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 572DA—1 .... red ............... X03/4—C3
B ............. 587DA—1 .... pale purple .. X03/4—C4
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–19/21
X307 2-Pin Plug for

Transmission Oil Temperature Sender

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 602D—1 ...... red ............... X03/4—D6
B ............. 050D—1 ...... black ............ X03/4—J6
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–20/21
XGND26 Ground Point

no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310DA—1 .... black ............ X03/4—E7, X80—B,
X83—B, X86—B,
–UN–12DEC96
X87—B, X91—B,
X95—B
LX013660
AG,LX25599,295 –19–01MAY00–21/21
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-188 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=268
240
10
,189
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-189 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=269
Transmission Wiring Harness with Electrical Reverser Control (W20; AL112509)
240
10
,190
–UN–23MAY97
LX1016174
AG,LX25599,193 –19–28JAN00–1/6
X193 6-Pin Plug, Transmission Harness Connection

Point (W4)

A ............. 672I—1 ........ Red .............. X194—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 696E—1 ...... Light Blue .... X196—A
C ............. 697E—1 ...... Purple .......... X197—A
D ............. 698C—1 ...... Gray ............. X195—A
E ............. 699C—1 ...... White ........... X194—B
F .............. 310I—1 ........ Black ............ X195—B, X196—B,
LX1017893
X197—B
Continued on next page AG,LX25599,193 –19–28JAN00–2/6
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-190 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=270
X194 2-Pin Plug for Enable Pressure Switch

A ............. 672I—1 ........ Red .............. X193—A
B ............. 699C—1 ...... White ........... X193—E
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,193 –19–28JAN00–3/6
X195 2-Pin Plug for Enable Solenoid

240
A ............. 698C—1 ...... Gray ............. X193—D
B ............. 310J—1 ....... Black ............ X193—F, X196—B,
–UN–10OCT97
X197—B
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,193 –19–28JAN00–4/6
X196 2-Pin Plug for Forward Solenoid

A ............. 696E—1 ...... Light Blue .... X193—B
B ............. 310K—1 ...... Black ............ X193—F, X195—B,
–UN–10OCT97
X197—B
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,193 –19–28JAN00–5/6
X197 2-Pin Plug for Reverse Forward Solenoid

A ............. 697E—1 ...... Purple .......... X193—C
B ............. 310L—1 ....... Black ............ X193—F, X195—B,
–UN–10OCT97
X196—B
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,193 –19–28JAN00–6/6
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-191 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=271
W40 — Wiring Harness — Back-Up Alarm (AL117624)
240
10
,192
–UN–07DEC00
LX1024565
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–1/11
K28 9-Pin Plug for Back-Up Alarm Relay

Cross-Section
1 .............. vacant
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 545YD—1 .... dark green ... X186/2—A
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. 956YC—1 .... light blue ...... X178/1—B, X178/2—B
5 .............. 3
vacant
LX1017994
6 .............. 310YC—1 .... black ............ X186/1—A
7 .............. vacant
8 .............. 966Y—1 ...... light blue ...... X185—A
9 .............. vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-192 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=272
X178/1 2-Pin Plug, Connection Point for

SynchroPlus Transmission Harness Switch (W41)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 946YB—1 .... light blue ...... X178/2—A, X186/3—A
B ............. 956YB—1 .... light blue ...... X178/2—B, K28—4
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–3/11

PowrQuad Transmission Harness Switch (W42) 240
10
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 946YA—1 .... light blue ...... X178/1—A, X186/3—A
B ............. 956YA—1 .... light blue ...... X178/1—B, K28—4
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–4/11
X185 2-Pin Plug for Back-Up Alarm Horn

Cross-Section
A ............. 966Y—1 ...... light blue ...... K28—8
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310YA—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017916
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–5/11
X186/1 1-Pin Plug for Back-Up Alarm Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 310YB—1 .... black ............ XGND4
A ............. 310YC—1 .... black ............ K28—6
–UN–12DEC96
LX013178
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-193 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=273

Cross-Section
A ............. 545YC—1 .... dark green ... X230/1—A, X230/2—A
A ............. 545YD—1 .... dark green ... K28—2
–UN–12DEC96
LX013178
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–7/11

240
,194 Number and Component
Cross-Section
A ............. 946YC—1 .... light blue ...... X178/1—A, X178/2—A
–UN–12DEC96
LX013178
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–8/11
X230/1 2-Pin Plug, Seat Switch Connection Point (W4)

Cross-Section
A ............. 545YA—1 .... dark green ... X230/2—A, X186/2—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 907Y—1 ...... pale purple .. X230/2—B
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–9/11
X230/2 2-Pin Plug for Seat Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 545YB—1 .... dark green ... X230/1—A, X186—B
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 907Y—1 ...... pale purple .. X186/1—A

LX1017883
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-194 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=274
XGND4 Ground Point

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310YA—1 .... black ............ X185—B
(-) ............ 310YB—1 .... black ............ X186/1—A
–UN–12DEC96
LX013685
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–11/11
240
10
,195
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-195 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=275
W41 — Wiring Harness — Back-Up Alarm —Switch for SynchroPlus Transmission

(AL114955)
240
10
,196
–UN–07DEC00
LX1024566
AG,LX25599,289 –19–01MAY00–1/3
B47 Back-Up Alarm Switch

Cross-Section
C1 ........... 906XA—1 .... light blue ...... X178/1—B
–UN–10OCT97
NC2 ......... vacant

NO4 ........ 907XA—1 .... pale purple .. X178/1—A
LX1017963
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-196 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=276


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 907XA—1 .... pale purple .. B47—NO4
B ............. 906XA—1 .... light blue ...... B47—C1
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,289 –19–01MAY00–3/3
240
10
,197
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-197 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=277
W42 — Wiring Harness —Switch for PowrQuad Transmission Back-Up Alarm (AL115426)
240
10
,198
–UN–05DEC00
LX1024567
AG,LX25599,290 –19–01MAY00–1/3
X178/2 2-Pin Plug, Connection Point for PowrQuad

Transmission Harness Switch (W40)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 946YY—1 .... light blue ...... X187—A

B ............. 956YY—1 .... light blue ...... X187—B
LX1017883
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-198 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=278
X187 2-Pin Plug for Back-Up Alarm Pressure Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 946YY—1 .... light blue ...... X178/2—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 956YY—1 .... light blue ...... X178/2—B
LX1017916
AG,LX25599,290 –19–01MAY00–3/3
240
10
,199
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-199 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=279
W21 — Wiring Harness — Shift Console Light— in Low-Clearance Cab (AL115043)
–UN–05DEC00
240
10
,200
LX1024568
AG,LX25599,291 –19–01MAY00–1/4
X121 4-Pin Plug for

Dome and Shift Console Light (W11)

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
1 .............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... E28/2—A
2 .............. vacant
3 .............. XX1—1 ........ brown ........... E28/2—B
4 .............. vacant
LX1017953
AG,LX25599,291 –19–01MAY00–2/4
E28/2 Shift Console Light

no. and Component
Cross-Section
A ............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X121—1
–UN–12DEC96
LX013182
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-200 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=280

no. and Component
Cross-Section
B ............. XX1—1 ........ brown ........... X121—3
–UN–12DEC96
LX013182
AG,LX25599,291 –19–01MAY00–4/4
240
10
,201
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-201 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=281
W22 — Wiring Harness — Dome Light— in Low-Clearance Cab (AL115041)
–UN–05DEC00
240
10
,202
LX1024569
AG,LX25599,292 –19–01MAY00–1/7

no. and Component
Cross-Section
A ............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X121—2
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017944
AG,LX25599,292 –19–01MAY00–2/7

no. and Component
Cross-Section
B ............. XX1—1 ........ brown ........... X121—4
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017944
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-202 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=282

no. and Component
Cross-Section
C ............. XX1—1 ........ brown ........... XGND28
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017944
AG,LX25599,292 –19–01MAY00–4/7
X121 Plug Set-up for

Dome and Shift Console Light Connection Point (W11) 240
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–05DEC00
2 .............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... E28/1—A
LX1024570
AG,LX25599,292 –19–01MAY00–5/7
X121 Plug Set-up for

Dome and Shift Console Light Connection Point (W11)

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–05DEC00
4 .............. XX1—1 ........ brown ........... E28/1—B
LX1024570
AG,LX25599,292 –19–01MAY00–6/7
XGND28 Ground Point

no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ XX1—1 ........ brown ........... E28/1—C
–UN–12DEC96
LX013660
AG,LX25599,292 –19–01MAY00–7/7
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-203 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=283
W24 — Wiring Harness — Windshield Wiper— in Low-Clearance Cab (AL115094)
240
10
,204
–UN–05DEC00
LX1024571
AG,LX25599,293 –19–01MAY00–1/7
R14 Resistor

no. and Component
Cross-Section
A ............. XX5—1 ........ dark green ... X38—B
–UN–12DEC96
LX013182
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-204 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=284
R14 Resistor

no. and Component
Cross-Section
B ............. XX6—1 ........ light blue ...... X276—6
–UN–12DEC96
LX013182
AG,LX25599,293 –19–01MAY00–3/7
X38 4-Pin Plug,

Windshield Wiper Harness Connection Point (W7) 240
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X276—4
B ............. XX5—1 ........ dark green ... R14—A
C ............. XX9—1 ........ white ............ X276—6
D ............. XX4—1 ........ yellow .......... X276—1
LX1017886
AG,LX25599,293 –19–01MAY00–4/7
X276 6-Pin Plug for

Windshield Wiper Motor

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–11JUN97
1 .............. vacant
2 .............. XX4—1 ........ yellow .......... X38—D
3 .............. XX1—1 ........ brown XGND28
3 .............. XX1—1 ........ brown ........... X277—B
4 .............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X38—A
LX1016236
4 .............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X277—A
5 .............. vacant
6 .............. XX6—1 ........ light blue ...... R14—B
6 .............. XX9—1 ........ white ............ X38—C
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-205 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=285
X277 2-Pin Plug — Windshield Wiper Motor

Connection Point and Rear Window Wiper Switch

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X276—4
B ............. XX1—1 ........ brown ........... X276—3
LX1017949
AG,LX25599,293 –19–01MAY00–6/7
XGND28 Ground Point

240
Cross-Section
(-) ............ XX1—1 ........ brown ........... X276—3
–UN–12DEC96
LX013660
AG,LX25599,293 –19–01MAY00–7/7
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-206 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=286
240
10
,207
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-207 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=287
W23 — Wiring Harness — Rear Window Wiper— in Low-Clearance Cab (AL115038)
240
10
,208
–UN–07DEC00
LX1024572
AG,LX25599,294 –19–01MAY00–1/8
M17 Rear Window Wiper Motor

no. and Component
Cross-Section
A ............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X274—6
–UN–12DEC96
LX013182
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-208 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=288
M17 Rear Window Wiper Motor

no. and Component
Cross-Section
B ............. XX1—1 ........ brown ........... X275—10
–UN–12DEC96
LX013182
AG,LX25599,294 –19–01MAY00–3/8
M18 2-Pin Plug for

Rear Window Washer Pump 240
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X274—3
B ............. XX1—1 ........ brown ........... XGND27
LX1017974
AG,LX25599,294 –19–01MAY00–4/8
X274 8-Pin Plug for

Rear Window Wiper Switch

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–12JUN97
1 .............. vacant
2 .............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X277—A
3 .............. XX2—1 ........ red M18—A
4 .............. vacant
5 .............. vacant
LX1016234
6 .............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... M17—A
6 .............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X275—9
7 .............. vacant
8 .............. vacant
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-209 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=289
X275 2-Pin Plug for

Rear Window Wiper Switch

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–11JUN97
9 .............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X274—6
10 ............ XX1—1 ........ brown ........... X277—B
10 ............ XX1—1 ........ brown ........... M17—B
LX1016235
AG,LX25599,294 –19–01MAY00–6/8
X277 2-Pin Plug — Windshield Wiper Motor

240 Connection Point and Rear Window Wiper Switch
10
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. XX2—1 ........ red ............... X274—2
B ............. XX1—1 ........ brown ........... X275—10
LX1017948
AG,LX25599,294 –19–01MAY00–7/8
XGND27 Ground Point

no. and Component
Cross-Section
(-) ............ XX1—1 ........ brown ........... M18—B
–UN–12DEC96
LX013660
AG,LX25599,294 –19–01MAY00–8/8
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-10-210 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=290
Group 10A
System Diagrams, 2-Post ROPS
Fuses
The main fuse is mounted on the dash unit over the

master cylinder.
The fuse for the electrical starting aid heating element is

on the right side of the engine block.
• F01—100 A Battery Circuit (Main Power Supply)

• F02—70 A Electrical Starting Aid
AG,OUOE003,9132 –19–01MAY00–1/5
Replacing the Main Fuse

240
IMPORTANT: To avoid the possibility of electrical 10A
system damage, never use a 1
–UN–17OCT97
Remove the dash unit cover.
LX1018058
Open the side covers.
Remove the fuse box cover (A).
Remove the protective cover from the fuse.
Replace fuse (C).
–UN–17OCT97
Tighten the fuse nuts to 15 N•m (11 lb-ft).
A—Cover
LX1018077
B—Hex Nut
C—Fuse

111401
PN=291
Replacing the Electrical Starting Aid Fuse
IMPORTANT: To avoid the possibility of electrical

system damage, never use a
–UN–17OCT97
Lift the fuse box cover (A).
LX1018078
Replace fuse (C).
A—Cover
B—Hex Nut
C—Fuse
240
10A
2
–UN–17OCT97
LX1018079

111401
PN=292
240
10A
3
–UN–22AUG01
LX1025187
Load Center F112 — 20 A Low/high beam headlights
F113 — 10 A Instruments
Fuses F114 — 30 A Fuel preheater
F115 — Fuse for calibrating electronic control units
IMPORTANT: To prevent unnecessary damage to F116 — 30 A Relay for power supply to electronics
the electrical system, never use a F117 — 10 A Hitch control unit (HCU)
fuse with a higher rating than the F118 — 10 A Horn
one already installed. F119 — 10 A Rear PTO
F120 — 30 A 3-terminal power outlet (terminal 1)
F101 — 30 A Main switch (terminal BAT)
F102 — 30 A 7-terminal power outlet
F103 — 20 A Work lights Diodes
F104 — 10 A Differential lock, FWD
F105 — 10 A Acoustic alarm V101 — Vacant
F106 — 10 A Hazard warning lights V102 — Turn signal light
F107 — 20 A Turn signal lights V103 — Turn signal light
F108 — 10 A L.h. tail light V104 — Lights
F109 — 10 A R.h. tail light V105 — Relay for power supply to electronics
F110 — 30 A 3-terminal power outlet (terminal 2)
F111 — 30 A Light switch (terminal B)

111401
PN=293
Relays K107 — Headlights

K108 — L.h. turn signal
K101 — Power supply to electronics K109 — R.h. turn signal
K102 — Work lights K110 — Differential lock
K103 — Time delay - transmission oil pressure K111 — Hazard warning lights
K104 — 3-terminal power outlet K112 — L.h. turn signal
K105 — Fuel preheater K113 — R.h. turn signal
K106 — 7-terminal power outlet
AG,OUOE003,9132 –19–01MAY00–5/5
240
10A
4

111401
PN=294
Component Designations on Functional Schematics and Wiring Harnesses
A04 — HCU (SE15; W4) F109 — Fuse (SE6; W4)

B01 — Tachometer Sender (SE2; W3) F110 — Fuse (SE14; W4)
B02 — Air Filter Indicator Sender (SE2; W3) F111 — Fuse (SE6; W4)
B03 — Fuel Gauge Sender (SE2; W4) F112 — Fuse (SE6; W4)
B04 — Engine Oil Pressure Light Sender (SE2; W3) F113 — Fuse (SE2; W4)
B07 — Oil Filter Light Sender (SE2; W13) F114 — Fuse (SE1A; W4)
B08 — Coolant Temperature Gauge Sender (SE2; W3) F115 — Fuse (SE15; W4)
B18/1 — Left Brake Switch (SE16C; W4) F116 — Fuse (SE1; W4)
B18/2 — Right Brake Switch (SE16C; W4) F117 — Fuse (SE15; W4)
B19 — Right Draft Sensor (SE15; W33)1 F118 — Fuse (SE3; W4)
B20 — Left Draft Sensor (SE15; W33)1 F119 — Fuse (SE5; W4)
B21 — Position Sensor (SE15; W4) F120 — Fuse (SE14; W4)
B26 — Height Sensitivity Potentiometer (SE15; W4) G01 — Battery (SE1; W3)
B27 — Position Unit (SE15; W4) G02 — Alternator (SE1; W3)
240
B29 — Low Temperature Switch (SE2; W32) H01 — Horn (SE3; W3) 10A
B30 — High Temperature Switch (SE2; W32) H25 — Audible Alarm (SE5; W4) 5
B31 — Operating Pressure Indicator Sender (SE2; W3) H52/1 — Left Turn Signal (SE16A; W4)
B36 — Neutral Start Switch (SE1; W32) H52/2 — Right Turn Signal (SE16A; W4)
B42 — Rear PTO Speed Sender (SE5; W33) H53/1 — Left Front and Rear Turn Signals (SE16A;
B47 — Backup Alarm Switch (SE25; W40, W41) W4)
B49 — Backup Alarm Switch (SE25; W40, W42) H53/2 — Right Front and Rear Turn Signals (SE16A;
E01 — Right Headlight (SE6; W3) W4)
E02 — Left Headlight (SE6; W3) H74/1 — 2-Post-Mounted Turn Signal, Left (SE16A;
E09/LH — Front Grille Work Light (SE7; W14) W4)
E09/RH — Front Grille Work Light (SE7; W14) H74/2 — 2-Post-Mounted Turn Signal, Right (SE16A;
E15/LH — Rear Fender Work Light (SE7; W4) W4)
E15/RH — Rear Fender Work Light (SE7; W4) H67 — Backup Alarm Horn (SE25; W40)
E24/LH — Front Fender Work Light (SE7; W4) K01 — Starter Relay (SE1; W4)
E24/RH — Front Fender Work Light (SE7; W4) K22 — Flasher (SE16A; W4)
E25/1 — Left Tail Light (SE6; W4) K23 — Rear PTO Relay (SE5; W4)
E25/2 — Right Tail Light (SE6; W4) K24 — Fuel Injection Pump Shutoff Valve (SE1; W3)
F01 — Fuse (SE1; W4) K28 — Backup Alarm Relay (SE25; W40)
F06 — Fuse (SE1; W27) K36 — Electrical Starting Aid Relay (SE1; W27)
F101 — Fuse (SE1; W4) K42 — Flasher Relay (SE16A; W4)
F102 — Fuse (SE14; W4) K101 — Electronics Power Supply Relay (SE1; W4)
F103 — Fuse (SE7; W4) K102 — Work Light Relay (SE7; W4)
F104 — Fuse (SE16C; W4) K103 — Timer (SE2; W4)
F105 — Fuse (SE2; W4) K104 — 3-Pin Receptacle Relay (SE14; W4)
F106 — Fuse (SE16A; W4) K105 — Fuel Preheater Relay (SE1A; W4)
F107 — Fuse (SE16A; W4) K106 — 7-Pin Receptacle Relay (SE14; W4)
F108 — Fuse (SE6; W4) K107 — Headlight Relay (SE6; W4)
1
If equipped

111401
PN=295
K108 — Left Turn Signal Relay (SE16A; W4) X69/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Work Light Connection
K109 — Right Turn Signal Relay (SE16A; W4) Point; W14)
K110 — Differential Lock Switch (SE16C; W4) X70/1 — 1-Pin Plug (Air Filter Indicator Light Sender;
K111 — Hazard Flasher Relay (SE16A; W4) W3)
K112 — Left Turn Signal Relay (SE16A; W4) X70/2 — 1-Pin Plug (Air Filter Indicator Light Sender;
K113 — Right Turn Signal Relay (SE16A; W4) W3)
M01 — Starter (SE1; W3) X75 — 6-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Switch
M08 — Stepper Motor (SE15; W4) Connection Point; W4)
P13 — Basic Informator (SE2; W4) X76 — 2-Pin Plug (Tachometer Sender Connection
R15 — Electrical Starting Aid Heating Element (SE1; Point; W3)
W3) X77 — 1-Pin Plug (Coolant Temperature Gauge
S01 — Key Switch (SE1; W4) Sender; W3)
S04 — Horn Button (SE3; W4) X78 — 1-Pin Plug (Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
S05 — Front Wheel Drive Switch (SE16B; W4) Sender Connection Point; W3)
S08 — Turn Signal Switch (SE16A; W4) X79 — 3-Pin Plug (Fuel Preheater Element Connection
S09 — Light Switch (SE6; W4) Point; W3)
240
10A S10 — High/Low Beam Switch (SE6; W4) X80 — 2-Pin Plug (Oil Filter Indicator Sender
6 S21 — Rear PTO Switch (SE5; W4) Connection Point; W32)
S22 — Differential Lock Switch (SE16C; W4) X81 — 1-Pin Plug (Low Temperature Switch
S24 — Rapid Raise/Lower Switch (SE15; W4) Connection Point; W32)
S40 — Rear PTO Seat Switch (SE5; W4) X82 — Ring Terminal (High Temperature Switch
V101 — not applicable Connection Point; W32)
V102 — Diode (SE16A; W4) X83 — 2-Pin Plug (Operating Pressure Warning Light
V103 — Diode (SE16A; W4) Sender Connection Point; W32)
V104 — Diode (SE6; W4) X86 — 3-Pin Plug (Fuel Gauge and Pump Sender
V105 — Diode (SE1; W4) Connection Point; W4)
X13 — 30-Pin Plug (HCU Connection Point; W4) X87 — 2-Pin Plug (Differential Lock Solenoid
X14A — 8-Pin Plug (Feedback Unit Connection Point; Connection Point; W33)
W4) X89 — 3-Pin Plug (Left Draft Sensor Connection Point;
X14B — 3-Pin Plug (Height Sensitivity Potentiometer W33)
Connection Point; W4) X90 — 3-Pin Plug (Right Draft Sensor Connection
X17 — 3-Pin Receptacle (SE14; W30) Point; W33)
X23 — 7-Pin Receptacle (SE15; W28) X91 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Drive Solenoid Connection
X29 — 4-Pin Plug (Service Plug Connection Point; W4) Point; W33)
X37 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Loader Connection Point; W4) X92 — 4-Pin Plug (Stepper Motor Connection Point;
X58/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Operator Seat Connection Point; W4)
W4) X93 — 2-Pin Plug (Neutral Start Switch Connection
X66/1 — 1-Pin Plug (Horn Connection Point; W3) Point; W32)
X66/2 — 1-Pin Plug (Horn Connection Point; W3) X94 — 2-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Speed Sender
X67 — 3-Pin Plug (Right Headlight Connection Point; Connection Point; W33)
W3) X95 — 2-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Solenoid Connection
X68 — 3-Pin Plug (Left Headlight Connection Point; Point; W33)
W3) X96 — 3-Pin Plug (Position Sensor Connection Point;
X69/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Front Work Light Connection W4)
Point; W14)

111401
PN=296
X112/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Left Rear Fender Work Light X250/1 — 3-Pin Plug (Right Brake Switch Connection
X112/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Right Rear Fender Work Light X250/2 — 3-Pin Plug (Left Brake Switch Connection
X122 — 2-Pin Plug (Differential Lock Switch X280 — 9-Pin Plug (Backup Alarm Relay Connection
X123/1 — 3-Pin Plug (Left Tail Light/Turn Signal X286 — 6-Pin Plug (Transmission Front Harness
Connection Point; W4) Connection Point; W4-W32)
X123/2 — 3-Pin Plug (Right Tail Light/Turn Signal X287 — 10-Pin Plug (Transmission Rear Harness
X124/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Left Front Fender Work Light X288 — 10-Pin Plug (Engine Wiring Harness
X124/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Right Front Fender Work Light X289 — 7-Pin Plug (Engine Wiring Harness Connection
Connection Point; W4) Point; W4-W3)
X125 — 3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Switch Connection X290 — 8-Pin Plug (Basic Informator Connection Point;
Point; W4) W4)
240
X134 — 2-Pin Plug (Roof Wiring Harness Connection X291 — 6-Pin Plug (Basic Informator Connection Point; 10A
Point; W4-W15) W4) 7
X139 — 2-Pin Plug (Work Light Harness Connection X292 — 10-Pin Plug (Basic Informator Connection
Point; W3-W14) Point; W4)
X178/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Transmission Harness Switch X305 — 1-Pin Plug (Radiator Ground Connection Point;
Connection Point; W41) W3)
X178/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Transmission Harness Switch X306 — 2-Pin Plug (Electrical Starting Aid Connection
Connection Point; W41) Point; W3-W27)
X185 — 2-Pin Plug (Backup Alarm Horn Connection X407/1 — 2-Pin Plug (Left 2-Post-Mounted Turn Signal
X187 — 2-Pin Plug (Backup Alarm Switch Connection X407/2 — 2-Pin Plug (Right 2-Post-Mounted Turn
Point; W42) Signal Connection Point; W4)
X186/1 — 1-Pin Plug (Backup Alarm Main Switch Y02 — Fuel Pump; (W4)
Connection Point; W40) Y03 — Front Wheel Drive Solenoid; (W33)
X186/2 — 1-Pin Plug (Backup Alarm Main Switch Y04 — Rear PTO Solenoid; (W33)
Connection Point; W40) Y05 — Differential Lock Solenoid; (W33)
X186/3 — 1-Pin Plug (Backup Alarm Main Switch XGND1 — Platform Ground Point; (W4)
Connection Point; W40) XGND2 — Electronics Ground Point; (W4)
X234 — 7-Pin Plug (7-Pin Receptacle Harness XGND4 — Platform Ground Point; (W4)
Connection Point; W4-W28) XGND5 — Platform Ground Point; (W4)
X239 — 3-Pin Plug (3-Pin Receptacle Harness XGND9 — Engine Ground Point; (W3)
Connection Point; W4-W30)
AG,OUOE003,9134 –19–01MAY00–3/3

111401
PN=297
Section Designations on Functional Schematics
SE1 — Starter and Charging Circuits SE8 — Front Loader

SE1A — Fuel Preheater SE14 — 3-Pin and 7-Pin Receptacle
SE2 — Basic Informator SE15 — HCU
SE3 — Horn SE16A — Flashers and Turn Signals
SE4 — Cigarette Lighter and Operator Seat SE16B — Front Wheel Drive
SE5 — Rear PTO SE16C — Differential Lock
SE6 — Lights SE25 — Backup Alarm
SE7 — Work Light
AG,OUOE003,9138 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Wiring Harness Identification

240
10A W3 — Engine Wiring Harness W30 — 3-Pin Receptacle Wiring Harness
8 W4 — Platform Wiring Harness W32 — Transmission Wiring Harness-Front
W14 — Work Light Wiring Harness (Front Grille) W33 — Transmission Wiring Harness-Rear
W15 — Roof Wiring Harness W40 — Backup Alarm Wiring Harness
W27 — Starting Aid Wiring Harness W41 — Backup Alarm Switch Wiring Harness1
W28 — 7-Pin Receptacle Wiring Harness W42 — Backup Alarm Switch Wiring Harness2
1
SyncroPlus transmission
2
PowrQuad transmission
AG,OUOE003,9140 –19–12JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=298
Functional Schematic — Complete Tractor

LX1020040 –UN–23APR98
Functional Schematic (Complete Tractor; SE1,

SE1A)
AG,OUOE003,9141 –19–01MAY00–1/9

111401
PN=299
LX1020041 –UN–23APR98
SE2)
AG,OUOE003,9141 –19–01MAY00–2/9
111401
PN=300
LX1020042 –UN–23APR98

SE3, SE5)
AG,OUOE003,9141 –19–01MAY00–3/9

111401
PN=301
LX1020043 –UN–23APR98
SE6, SE7)
AG,OUOE003,9141 –19–01MAY00–4/9
111401
PN=302
LX1020044 –UN–23APR98

SE8, SE14A, SE14B)
AG,OUOE003,9141 –19–01MAY00–5/9

111401
PN=303
LX1020045 –UN–23APR98
SE15)
AG,OUOE003,9141 –19–01MAY00–6/9
111401
PN=304
LX1025186 –UN–21DEC00

SE16A)
AG,OUOE003,9141 –19–01MAY00–7/9

111401
PN=305
LX1025148 –UN–21DEC00
LX1025148
SE16A)
AG,OUOE003,9141 –19–01MAY00–8/9
111401
PN=306
LX1020047 –UN–23APR98

SE16B, SE16C, SE25)
AG,OUOE003,9141 –19–01MAY00–9/9

111401
PN=307
W3 — Wiring Harness— Engine (AL 117076)
240
10A
18
–UN–07DEC00
LX1024574
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–1/19
G02 Alternator

no. and Component
Cross-Section
D+ ........... 306C—1 ...... light blue ...... X288—H
–UN–12DEC96
LX013190

111401
PN=308
K24 Terminal with Ring,

for Injection Pump Shut-Off Valve

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–19MAR98
(-) ............ 022C—1 ...... red ............... X289—A
LX1019984
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–3/19

Horn 240
10A
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 903C—1 ...... orange ......... X288—J
LX013178
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–4/19

Horn

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 310CA—1 .... black ............ X68—C
LX013178
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–5/19

Right Headlight

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 139CA—1,5 . white ............ X289—E

A ............. 139CB—1 .... white ............ X68—A
B ............. 114C—1 ...... yellow .......... X288—B
C ............. 310CB—1,5 . black ............ X68—C
C ............. 310CC—1 .... black ............ XGND9
LX1017977

111401
PN=309

Left Headlight

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 139CB—1 .... white ............ X67—A
B ............. 124C—1 ...... yellow .......... X288—H
C ............. 310CA—1 .... black ............ X66/2—A
C ............. 310CB—1,5 . black ............ X67—C
LX1017977
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–7/19

240 Air Cleaner Restriction Indicator Light
10A
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 310CE—1 .... black ............ XGND9
LX013182
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–8/19

Air Cleaner Restriction Indicator Light

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 351C—1 ...... brown ........... X288—G
LX013182
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–9/19
X76 2—Pin Plug,

Sending Unit for Tachometer

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 325C—1 ...... dark green ... X288—A

B ............. 310CG—1 ... brown ........... XGND9, X288—D,
X79—B
LX1017904

111401
PN=310
X77 1-Pin Plug, Sending Unit for

Coolant Temperature Gauge

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 329C—1 ...... white ............ X288—E
LX013178
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–11/19
X78 1—Pin Plug,

Sending Unit for Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light 240
10A
no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 347C—1 ...... pale purple .. X288—F
LX013178
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–12/19
X79 2—Pin Plug, Heating

Element for Fuel Preheater

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 312C—2.5 ... red ............... X289—G
B ............. 310CH—2.5 . black ............ XGND9, X76—B,
X288—D
LX1017909
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–13/19
X139 2—Pin Plug

Front Grille Work Light Connection Point (W14)

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 111CA—1 .... brown ........... X288—C

B ............. 310CD—1 .... black ............ XGND9
LX1017948

111401
PN=311
X288 10-Pin Plug (Engine Harness Connection Point;

W4)

no. and Component
–UN–10OCT97
Cross-Section
A ............. 325C—1 ...... dark green ... X76—A
B ............. 114C—1 ...... yellow .......... X67—B
C ............. 111CA—1 .... brown ........... X139—A
D ............. 310CJ—1 .... black ............ XGND9, X76—B,
LX1017897
X79—B
E ............. 329C—1 ...... white ............ X77—A
F .............. 347C—1 ...... pale purple .. X78—A
G ............. 351C—1 ...... brown ........... X70/2—A
H ............. 306C—1 ...... light blue ...... G02—D+
J .............. 903C—1 ...... orange ......... X66/1—A
K ............. 124C—1 ...... yellow .......... X68—B
240
10A
22
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–15/19
X289 7-Pin Plug (Engine Harness Connection Point;

W4)

no. and Component
–UN–10OCT97
Cross-Section
A ............. 022C—1 ...... red ............... K24—A
B ............. 385CA—1 .... dark green ... X306—A
C ............. vacant
D ............. vacant
LX1017900
E ............. 139CA—1,5 . white ............ X67—A, X68—A
F .............. vacant
G ............. 312C—2.5 ... red ............... X79—A
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–16/19
X305 1-Pin Plug for

Voltage-to-Ground on Radiator

no. and Component
Cross-Section
–UN–14OCT97
A ............. 310CK—1,5 . black ............ XGND9

LX1017545

111401
PN=312
X306 2-Pin Plug for Connection Point Electrical

Starting Aid
Wiring Harness (W27)

no. and Component
–UN–10OCT97
Cross-Section
A ............. 385CA—1 .... dark green ... X289—B
B ............. 310CL—1 .... black ............ XGND9
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–18/19
XGND9 Ground Point

240
Terminal Wire Number Color of Wire To Plug or 10A
no. and Component 23
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310CC—1,5 . black ............ X67—C
(-) ............ 310CD—1 .... black ............ X139—B
–UN–12DEC96
(-) ............ 310CE—1 .... black ............ X70/1—A
(-) ............ 310CF—2.5 . black ............ X76—B, X288—D,
X79—B
(-) ............ 310CK—1,5 . black ............ X305—A
LX013685
(-) ............ 310CL—1 .... black ............ X306—B
AG,LX25599,296 –19–01MAY00–19/19

111401
PN=313
Wiring Harness for Electrical Starting Aid (W27; AL119472)
240
10A
24
–UN–27NOV97
LX1018301

111401
PN=314
F06 Fuse for Electrical Starting Aid

Cross-Section
A ............. 002X—10 .... red ............... G02—30
–UN–08DEC97
B ............. 352X—10 .... red ............... K36—4
LX1017583
AG,LX25599,15 –19–01FEB00–2/6
K36 Relay for Electrical Starting Aid

240
Terminal Wire Number Wire Color To Plug or 10A
Cross-Section
1 .............. 385X—1 ...... dark green ... X306—A
2 .............. 310X—1 ...... black ............ X306—B
–UN–12DEC96
3 .............. 342X—10 .... red ............... R15—A
4 .............. 352X—10 .... red ............... F06—B
LX013192
AG,LX25599,15 –19–01FEB00–3/6
G02 Terminal with Ring, for Alternator

Cross-Section
30 ............ 002X—10 .... red ............... F06—A
–UN–12DEC96
LX013190
AG,LX25599,15 –19–01FEB00–4/6
R15 Terminal with Ring, Heating Element for

Electrical Starting Aid

Cross-Section
–UN–18NOV97
A ............. 342X—10 .... red ............... K36—3

LX1017585

111401
PN=315
X306 2-Pin Plug for Electrical Starting Aid Wiring

Harness (W3)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 385X—1 ...... dark green ... K36—1
B ............. X310X—1 .... black ............ K36—2
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,15 –19–01FEB00–6/6
240
10A
26

111401
PN=316
240
10A
27

111401
PN=317
Front Corner Worklight Wiring Harness (W14; AL81307)
240
10A
28
–UN–12MAR98
LX1020085
AG,LX25599,14 –19–01FEB00–1/4
X69/1 2-Pin Plug, Worklight at R.h. Front Corner

A ............. 111A—1 ...... brown ........... X139—A, X69/2—A
B ............. 310A—1 ...... black ............ X139—B, X69/2—B
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017905

111401
PN=318
X69/2 2-Pin Plug, Worklight at L.h. Front Corner

A ............. 111B—1 ...... brown ........... X139—A, X69/1—A
B ............. 310B—1 ...... black ............ X139—B, X69/1—B
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017905
AG,LX25599,14 –19–01FEB00–3/4
X139 2-Pin Plug (Front Corner Worklight Connection

Point; W3) 240
10A
A ............. 111A—1 ...... brown ........... X69/1—A
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 111B—1 ...... brown ........... X69/2—A
B ............. 310A—1 ...... black ............ X69/1—B
B ............. 310B—1 ...... black ............ X69/2—B
LX1017949
AG,LX25599,14 –19–01FEB00–4/4

111401
PN=319

up to Serial Number 249394
240
10A
30
–UN–11DEC00
LX1024577

111401
PN=320
F01 Main Fuse

Cross-Section
A ............. 002AB—16 .. red ............... M01—30
–UN–18NOV97
A ............. 002AA—2.5 . red ............... K01—3
B ............. 012AM—10 . red ............... F111E, F112E,
F114E, F116E,
F120E, F118E
B ............. 012AN—10 .. red ............... F101E, F102E,
LX1017668
F107E, F110E, F103E
C ............. vacant
240
10A
31

111401
PN=321
F101 — F120 Fuses

Cross-Section
F101A ..... 092AA—4 .... red ............... S01—BAT1, S01—
BAT2
F101E ..... 012AA—4 .... red ............... F102E, F107E,
F110E, F103E, F01—
B
F102A ..... 252A—2.5 ... red ............... K106—30
F102E ..... 012AB—2.5 . red ............... F101E, F107E,
F110E, F103E, F01—
B
F103A ..... 124A—2.5 ... yellow .......... K102—30
F103E ..... 012AE—2.5 . red ............... F101E, F102E,
F107E, F110E, F01—
B
240 F104A ..... 525AA—1 .... dark green ... X75—B, X250/2—A
10A F104E ..... 072AA—1 .... red ............... F117E, F119E,
–UN–10OCT97
32 K101—87
F105A ..... 264A—1 ...... yellow .......... H25—3
F105E ..... 022AA—1 .... red ............... K105—86, S01—IGN,
X86—B, X289—A,
F113E
LX1017939
F106A ..... 169AC—1 .... white ............ K104—86, K106—86,
K111—87A, S08—2
F106E ..... 212A—1 ...... red ............... S01—ACC
F107A ..... 115AA—1 .... dark green ... K112—30, K113—30
F107E ..... 012AC—1 .... red ............... F101E, F102E,
F110E, F103E, F01—
B
F108A ..... 118AA—1 .... gray ............. X123/1—B, X234—C
F108E ..... 159AA—1 .... white ............ F109E, D124E, S09—
M, K107—87A
F109A ..... 128AB—1 .... gray ............. X123/2—B, X234—A
F109E ..... 159AB—1 .... white ............ F108E, D124E, S09—
M, K107—87A
F110A ..... 307A—2.5 ... pale purple .. X239—B
F110E ..... 012AD—2.5 . red ............... F101E, F102E,
F107E, F103E, F01—
B

111401
PN=322
F101 — F120 Fuses - Continued -

Cross-Section
F111A ..... 142A—4 ...... red ............... S09—B
F111E ..... 012AF—4 .... red ............... F112E, F114E,
F116E, F120E,
F118E, F01—B
F112A ..... 103A—1.5 ... orange ......... K107—87
F112E ..... 012AG—1.5 . red ............... F111E, F114E,
F116E, F120E,
F118E, F01—B
F113A ..... 982A—1 ...... red ............... X292—A
F113E ..... 022AF—1 .... red ............... F105E, K105—86,
S01—IGN, X86—B,
X289—A
F114A ..... 332A—2.5 ... red ............... K105—30
F114E ..... 012AH—2.5 . red ............... F111E, F112E, 240
F116E, F120E, 10A
–UN–10OCT97
F118E, F01—B1 33
F115A ..... 886A—1 ...... light blue ...... X13—H2
F115E ..... 856AA—1 .... light blue ...... F117A, X13—A2,
X29—A
F116A ..... 902A—2.5 ... red ............... K101—30
LX1017939
F116E ..... 012AJ—2.5 .. red ............... F111E, F112E,
F114E, F120E,
F118E, F01—B
F117A ..... 856AB—1 .... light blue ...... F115E, X13—A2,
X29—A
F117E ..... 072AC—1 .... red ............... F104E, F119E,
K101—87
F118A ..... 179A—1.5 ... white ............ S04—A
F118E ..... 012AL—1.5 . red ............... F111E, F112E,
F114E, F116E,
F120E, F01—B
F119A ..... 545AA—1 .... dark green ... X125—A, X58/2—A,
K23/1—8
F119E ..... 072AD—1 .... red ............... F104E, F117E,
K101—87
F120A ..... 292A—4 ...... red ............... K104—30
F120E ..... 012AK—4 .... red ............... F111E, F112E,
F114E, F116E,
F118E, F01—B

111401
PN=323

Cross-Section
D121A ..... vacant
D121E ..... vacant
D122A ..... 151AA—1 .... brown ........... D123A, K22—5
D122E ..... 125AA—1 .... dark green ... K112—87, X123/1—A,
X134—B, S08—3,
X291—E, X234—D
D123A ..... 151AB—1 .... brown ........... D122A, K22—5
D123E ..... 107AA—1 .... pale purple .. K113—87, X134—A,
X123/2—A, S08—1,
X291—D, X234—F
D124A ..... 117AA—1 .... pale purple .. K111—86, K22—1,
S09—L
D124E ..... 159AC—1 .... white ............ F108E, F109E, S09—
240 M, K107—87A
10A D125A ..... 310AB—1 .... black ............ XGND4, K111—85,
–UN–10OCT97
34 K110—85, K102—85,
K104—85, K105—85,
K106—85, K107—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
LX1017939
K23/1—5
D125E ..... 085A—1 ...... dark green ... K101—85
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–5/56
H25 3-Pin Plug for Acoustic Alarm

Cross-Section
1 .............. vacant
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 913A—1 ...... orange ......... K23/2—7

3 .............. 264A—1 ...... yellow .......... F105A
LX1017978

111401
PN=324

Cross-Section
1 .............. 506A—1 ...... light blue ...... X286—C
2 .............. 310BB—1.5 . black ............ XGND1
–UN–12DEC96
3 .............. 002AA—2.5 . red ............... F01—A
4 .............. 309A—2.5 ... white ............ M01–50
LX013192
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–7/56
K22 9-Pin Plug for Flasher

240
Cross-Section
1 .............. 117AC—1 .... pale purple .. D124A, K111—86,
–UN–10OCT97
S09—L
2 .............. 310AQ—1 .... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K111—85, K110—85,
K102-85, K104—85,
K105—85, K106—85,
LX1017994
K107—85, K112—85,
K113—85, X234—G,
K23/1—5
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. 102AC—1 .... red ............... K112—86, K113—86
5 .............. 151AC—1 .... brown ........... D122A, D123A
6 .............. vacant
7 .............. vacant
8 .............. 105A—1 ...... dark green ... K111—30
9 .............. vacant

111401
PN=325
K23/1 9-Pin Plug for Rear PTO Relay

Cross-Section
1 .............. vacant
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. vacant
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. 550A—1 ...... black ............ X287—E
5 .............. 310BG—1 .... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K111—85, K110—85,
LX1017994
K102—85, K104—85,
K105—85, K106—85,
K107—85, K112—85,
K113—85, K22—3,
X234—G
6 .............. 254A—1 ...... yellow .......... X58/2—B
7 .............. 574A—1 ...... yellow .......... X287—D
240 8 .............. 545AD—1 .... dark green ... F119A, X125—A,
10A X58/2—A
36 9 .............. vacant
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–9/56

Cross-Section
1 .............. vacant
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 536A—1 ...... light blue ...... X125—B
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. vacant
5 .............. 552A—1 ...... red ............... X291—A
6 .............. 575A—1 ...... dark green ... X287—C
LX1017994
7 .............. 913A—1 ...... orange ......... H25—2
8 .............. vacant
9 .............. 154A—1 ...... yellow .......... X125—C

111401
PN=326

Cross-Section
30 ............ 902A—2.5 ... red ............... F116A

85 ............ 085A—1 ...... dark green ... D125E
86 ............ 192A—1 ...... red ............... S01—ELX
87 ............ 072AE—2.5 . red ............... F104E, F117E, F119E
87A ......... vacant
K102 Work Light Relay
30 ............ 124A—2.5 ... yellow .......... F103A

240
85 ............ 310AE—1 .... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
10A
–UN–10OCT97
K111—85, K110—85,
37
K104—85, K105—85,
K106—85, K107—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
LX1017939
K23/1—5
86 ............ 111AA—1 .... brown ........... K107—86, S09—H,
X290—F, X288—C
87 ............ 121AD—2.5 . brown ........... X124/2—A, X112/1—
A, X124/1—A,
X112/2—A
87A ......... vacant
K103 Timer Relay
L .............. 515A—1 ...... dark green ... X286—A

S ............. 503A—1 ...... orange ......... X290—A

111401
PN=327
K101 — K113 Relays (Continued)

Cross-Section
30 ............ 292A—4 ...... red ............... F120A

85 ............ 310AF—1 .... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K111—85, K110—85,
K102—85, K105—85,
K106—85, K107—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
K23/1—5
86 ............ 169AA—1 .... white ............ K106—86, F106A,
240 K111—87A, S08—2
10A 87 ............ 312AA—4 .... red ............... X239—A, X37—A
–UN–10OCT97
38
K105 Relay for Fuel Preheater
30 ............ 332A—2.5 ... red ............... F114A
LX1017939
85 ............ 310AG—1 .... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K111—85, K110—85,
K102—85, K104—85,
K106—85, K107—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
K23/1—5
86 ............ 022AB—1 .... red ............... F105E, S01—IGN,
X86—B, X289—A,
F113E
87 ............ 407A—2.5 ... pale purple .. X289—G
87A ......... vacant
30 ............ 252A—2.5 ... red ............... F102A

85 ............ 310AH—1 .... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K111—85, K110—85,
K102—85, K104—85,
K105—85, K107—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
K23/1—5
86 ............ 169AB—1 .... white ............ K104—86, F106A,
K111—87A, S08—2
87 ............ 244A—2.5 ... yellow .......... X234—E
87A ......... vacant

111401
PN=328

Cross-Section
30 ............ 133A—1.5 ... orange ......... S10/1—A

85 ............ 310AJ—1 ..... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K111—85, K110—85,
K102—85, K104—85,
K105—85, K106—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
K23/1—5
86 ............ 111AB—1 .... brown ........... K102—86, S09—H,
X290—F, X288—C 240
87 ............ 103A—1.5 ... orange ......... F112A 10A
–UN–10OCT97
87A ......... 159AE—1.5 . white ............ F108E, F109E, 39
D124E, S09—M
K108 Vacant
LX1017939
K109 Vacant
K110 Differential Lock Relay
30 ............ 527AF—1 .... pale purple .. K110—86, X287—A,

X122—A, X292—J
85 ............ 310AD—1 .... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K111—85, K102—85,
K104—85, K105—85,
K106—85, K107—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
K23/1—5
86 ............ 527AA—1 .... pale purple .. X287—A, X122—A,
X292—J, K110—30
87 ............ 555AA—1 .... dark green ... X250/1—C, X122—B
87A ......... vacant

111401
PN=329
K101 — K113 Relays (Fuse Box 1) - Continued -

Cross-Section
K111 Relay for Hazard Warning Flasher
30 ............ 105A—1 ...... dark green ... K22—8

85 ............ 310AC—1 .... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K110—85, K102—85,
K104—85, K105—85,
K106—85, K107—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
K23/1—5
86 ............ 117AB—1 .... pale purple .. D124A, K22—1,
240 S09—L
10A 87 ............ 138AA—1 .... gray ............. X292—B, S09—C
–UN–10OCT97
40 87A ......... 169AD—1 .... white ............ K104—86, K106—86,
F106A, S08—2
LX1017939
30 ............ 115AB—1 .... dark green ... F107A, K113—30
85 ............ 310AK—1 .... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K111—85, K110—85,
K102—85, K104—85,
K105—85, K106—85,
K107—85, K113—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
K23/1—5
86 ............ 102AA—1 .... red ............... K113—86, K22—4
87 ............ 125AB—1 .... dark green ... D122E, X123/1—A,
X134—B, S08—3,
X291—E, X234—D
87A ......... vacant
30 ............ 115AC—1 .... dark green ... F107A, K112—30

85 ............ 310AL—1 .... black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K111—85, K110—85,
K102—85, K104—85,
K105—85, K106—85,
K107—85, K112—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
K23/1—5
86 ............ 102AB—1 .... red ............... K112—86, K22—4
87 ............ 107AB—1 .... pale purple .. D123E, X134—A,
X123/2—A, S08—1,
X291—D, X234—F
87A ......... vacant

111401
PN=330
M01 Starter Motor

Cross-Section
30 ............ 002AB—16 .. red ............... F01—A
50 ............ 309A—2.5 ... white ............ K01—4
–UN–12DEC96
LX013191
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–15/56
S01 8-Pin Plug for Key Switch

240
Cross-Section
ACC ........ 212A—1 ...... red ............... F106E
–UN–13MAY98
AID .......... 385A—1 ...... dark green ... X289—B
BAT1 ....... 092AB—2.5 . red ............... F101A, S01—BAT2
BAT2 ....... 092AC—2.5 . red ............... F101A, S01—BAT1
ELX ......... 192A—1 ...... red ............... K101—86
GND ........ 167A—1 ...... pale purple .. X292—H
LX1020444
IGN ......... 022AC—2.5 . red ............... F105E, K105—86,
X86—B, X289—A,
F113E
ST ........... 311A—1 ...... brown ........... X286—B
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–16/56
S04 2-Pin Plug for Horn Button

Cross-Section
A ............. 179A—1.5 ... white ............ F118A
B ............. 903A—1 ...... orange ......... X288—J –UN–10OCT97
LX1017975

111401
PN=331
S08 3-Pin Plug for Flasher Switch

Cross-Section
1 .............. 107AE—1 .... pale purple .. D123E, K113—87,
–UN–10OCT97
X134—A, X123/2—A,
X291—D, X234—F
2 .............. 169AE—1 .... white ............ K104—86, K106—86,
F106A, K111—87A
3 .............. 125AE—1 .... dark green ... D122E, K112—87,
LX1017979
X123/1—A, X134—B,
X291—E, X234—D
240
10A
42
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–18/56
S09 5-Pin Plug for Light Switch

Cross-Section
B ............. 142A—4 ...... red ............... F111A
–UN–10OCT97
C ............. 138AB—1 .... gray ............. X292—B, K111—87
H ............. 111AC—2.5 . brown ........... K102—86, K107—86,
X290—F, X288—C
L .............. 117AD—1 .... pale purple .. D124A, K111—86,
K22—1
LX1017980
M ............. 159AD—2.5 . white ............ F108E, F109E,
D124E, K107—87A
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–19/56
S10/1 1-Pin Plug for High/Low Beam Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 133A—1.5 ... orange ......... K107—30
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017945

111401
PN=332

Cross-Section
A ............. 114AC—1.5 . yellow .......... X288—K, X288—B
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017945
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–21/56

240
Cross-Section
A ............. 119AC—1.5 . white ............ X290—G, X289—E
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017945

111401
PN=333
X13 30-Pin Plug for Hitch Control Unit

Cross-Section
A1 ........... 859A—1 ...... white ............ X92—A
A2 ........... 856AC—1 .... light blue ...... F115E, F117A, X29—
A
A3 ........... 050AC—1 .... black ............ XGND2
B1 ........... 858A—1 ...... gray ............. X92—B
B2 ........... 925AA—1 .... dark green ... X29—B, X290—C
B3 ........... 871AA—1 .... brown ........... X96—A, X287—K,
X14/1—A, X14/2—A
C1 ........... vacant
C2 ........... vacant
C3 ........... 924AA—1 .... yellow .......... X29—C, X290—B
D1 ........... vacant
D2 ........... vacant
240 D3 ........... vacant
10A E1 ........... 875A—1 ...... dark green ... X14/1—C
–UN–25SEP98
44 E2 ........... 876A—1 ...... light blue ...... X14/1—H
E3 ........... vacant
F1 ............ 884A—1 ...... yellow .......... X287—G
F2 ............ 877A—1 ...... pale purple .. X14/1—E
F3 ............ 878A—1 ...... gray ............. X96—B
LX1021456
G1 ........... vacant
G2 ........... 885A—1 ...... dark green ... X287—J
G3 ........... 869A—1 ...... white ............ X14/2—B
H1 ........... vacant
H2 ........... 886A—1 ...... light blue ...... F115A
H3 ........... 834A—1 ...... yellow .......... X14/1—F
J1 ............ 855A—1 ...... dark green ... X92—C
J2 ............ 838A—1 ...... gray ............. X14/1—D
J3 ............ 839A—1 ...... white ............ X14/1—G
K1 ........... 854A—1 ...... yellow .......... X92—D
K2 ........... 883A—1 ...... orange ......... X287—H
K3 ........... 873AA—1 .... orange ......... X96—C, X14/1—B,
X14/2—C

111401
PN=334
X14/1 8-Pin Plug for Feedback Unit

Cross-Section
A ............. 871AD—1 .... brown ........... X13—B3, X96—A,
–UN–10OCT97
X287—K, X14/2—A
B ............. 873AC—1 .... orange ......... X13—K3, X96—C,
X14/2—C
C ............. 875A—1 ...... dark green ... X13—E1
D ............. 838A—1 ...... gray ............. X13—J2
LX1017895
E ............. 877A—1 ...... pale purple .. X13—F2
F .............. 834A—1 ...... yellow .......... X13—H3
G ............. 839A—1 ...... white ............ X13—J3
H ............. 876A—1 ...... light blue ...... X13—E2
240
10A
45
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–24/56
X14/2 3-Pin Plug for Height Sensitivity Potentiometer

Cross-Section
A ............. 871AE—1 .... brown ........... X13—B, X96—A,
–UN–10OCT97
X287—K, X14/1—A
B ............. 869A—1 ...... white ............ X13—G3
C ............. 873AD—1 .... orange ......... X13—K3, X96—C,
X14/1—B
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–25/56
X29 4-Pin Service Plug

Cross-Section
A ............. 856AD—1 .... light blue ...... F115E, F117A, X13—
A2 –UN–10OCT97
B ............. 925AB—1 .... dark green ... X13—B2, X290—C
C ............. 924AB—1 .... yellow .......... X13—C3, X290—B
D ............. 050AD—1 .... black ............ XGND2
LX1017887

111401
PN=335
X37 2-Pin Plug for Front Loader

Cross-Section
A ............. 312AC—1 .... red ............... K104—87, X239—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310AR—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–27/56
X58/2 2-Pin Plug for Operator’s Seat

240
10A Terminal Wire Number Color of Wire To Plug or
Cross-Section
A ............. 545AC—1 .... dark green ... F119A, X125—A,
–UN–10OCT97
K23/1—8
B ............. 254A—1 ...... yellow .......... K23/1—6
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–28/56
X75 6-Pin Plug for Front Wheel Drive Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 535A—1 ...... dark green ... X287—B
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 525AB—1 .... dark green ... F104A, X250/2—A
C ............. 504A—1 ...... yellow .......... X290—E
D ............. vacant
E ............. vacant
F .............. vacant
LX1017893
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–29/56
X86 3-Pin Plug for Fuel Gauge and Fuel Pump

Cross-Section
A ............. 353A—1 ...... orange ......... X292—C
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 022AD—1 .... red ............... F105E, K105—86,

S01—IGN, X289—A,
F113E
C ............. 310BC—1 .... black ............ XGND1
LX1017885

111401
PN=336
X92 4-Pin Plug for Stepper Motor

Cross-Section
A ............. 859A—1 ...... white ............ X13—A1
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 858A—1 ...... gray ............. X13—B1
C ............. 855A—1 ...... dark green ... X13—J1
D ............. 854A—1 ...... yellow .......... X13—K1
LX1017887
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–31/56

240
Cross-Section
A ............. 871AB—1 .... brown ........... X13—B3, X287—K,
–UN–10OCT97
X14/1—A, X14/2–A
B ............. 878A—1 ...... gray ............. X13—F3
C ............. 873AB—1 .... orange ......... X13—K3, X14/1—B,
X14/2—C
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–32/56
X112/1 2-Pin Plug for Work Light on

Rear Left Fender

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 121AC—1 .... brown ........... X124/2—A, X124/1—
A, K102—87,
X112/2—A
B ............. 310AM—1 ... black ............ XGND4
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–33/56

Rear Right Fender

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 121AA—1 .... brown ........... X124/2—A, X124/1—

A, K102—87,
X112/1—A
B ............. 310AZ—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017883

111401
PN=337
X122 2-Pin Plug for Differential Lock Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 527AC—1 .... pale purple .. K110—86, X287—A,
–UN–10OCT97
X292—J, K110—30
B ............. 555AC—1 .... dark green ... K110—87, X250/1—C
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–35/56

240 Turn Signal Light and Tail Light, Left
10A
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 125AC—1 .... dark green ... D122E, K112—87,
X134—B, S08—3,
X291—E, X234—D
B ............. 118AB—1 .... gray ............. F108A, X234—C
C ............. 310AP—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017884
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–36/56

Turn Signal Light and Tail Light, Right

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 107AD—1 .... pale purple .. D123E, K113—87,
X134—A, S08—1,
X291—D, X234—F
B ............. 128AA—1 .... gray ............. F109A, X234—A
C ............. 310AT—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017884
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–37/56

Front Left Fender

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 121AB—1 .... brown ........... X124/2—A, X112/1—

A, K102—87,
X112/2—A
B ............. 310AO—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017883

111401
PN=338

Right Front Fender

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 121AE—1 .... brown ........... X124/1—A, X112/1—
A, K102—87,
X112/2—A
B ............. 310AN—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–39/56
X125 3-Pin Plug for Rear PTO Switch

240
Cross-Section
A ............. 545AB—1 .... dark green ... F119A, X58/2—A,
–UN–10OCT97
K23/1—8
B ............. 536A—1 ...... light blue ...... K23/2—2
C ............. 154A—1 ...... yellow .......... K23/2—9
LX1017884
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–40/56
X134 2-Pin Plug (Connection Point, Roof Wiring

Harness; W15)

–UN–10OCT97
Cross-Section
A ............. 107AC—1 .... pale purple .. D123E, K113—87,
X123/2—A, S08—1,
X291—D, X234—F
B ............. 125AD—1 .... dark green ... D122E, K112—87,
LX1017882
X123/1—A, S08—3,
X291—E, X234—D

111401
PN=339
X234 7-Pin Plug Connection Point, 7-Pin Socket

Harness (W28)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 128AC—1 .... gray ............. X123/2—B, F109A
B ............. vacant
C ............. 118AC—1 .... gray ............. F108A, X123/1—B
D ............. 125AG—1 .... dark green ... D122E, K112—87,
X123/1—A, X134—B,
LX1017899
S08—3, X291—E
E ............. 244A—2.5 ... yellow .......... K106—87
F .............. 107AG—1 .... pale purple .. D123E, K113—87,
X134—A, X123/2—A,
S08—1, X291—D
G ............. 310BF—2.5 . black ............ XGND4, D125A,
K111—85, K110—85,
240 K102—85, K104—85,
10A K105—85, K106—85,
50 K107—85, K112—85,
K113—85, K22—3,
K23/1—5
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–42/56


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 312AB—2.5 . red ............... K104—87, X37—A
B ............. 307A—2.5 ... pale purple .. F110A
C ............. 310AS—4.0 . black ............ XGND4
LX1017911
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–43/56
X250/1 3-Pin Plug for Right Brake Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 514A—1 ...... yellow .......... X250/2—C

B ............. vacant
C ............. 555AB—1 .... dark green ... K110—87, X122—B
LX1017885

111401
PN=340
X250/2 3-Pin Plug for Left Brake Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 525AC—1 .... dark green ... F104A, X75—B
B ............. vacant
C ............. 514A—1 ...... yellow .......... X250/1—A
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–45/56

Front Part of Transmission Harness (W32) 240
10A
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 515A—1 ...... dark green ... K103—L
B ............. 311A—1 ...... brown ........... S01—ST
C ............. 506A—1 ...... light blue ...... K01—1
D ............. 310BA—1 .... black ............ XGND1
E ............. 602A—1 ...... red ............... X291—F
LX1017894
F .............. 606A—1 ...... light blue ...... X291—C
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–46/56

Rear Part of Transmission Harness (W33)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 527AB—1 .... pale purple .. K110—86, X122—A,
X292—J, K110—30
B ............. 535A—1 ...... dark green ... X75—A
C ............. 575A—1 ...... dark green ... K23/2—6
D ............. 574A—1 ...... yellow .......... K23/1—7
LX1017898
E ............. 550A—1 ...... black ............ K23/1—4

F .............. 310AX—1 .... black ............ XGND1
G ............. 884A—1 ...... yellow .......... X13—F1
H ............. 883A—1 ...... orange ......... X13—K2
J .............. 885A—1 ...... dark green ... X13-G2
K ............. 871AC—1 .... brown ........... X13—B3, X96—A,
X14/1—A, X14/2—A

111401
PN=341

Engine Wiring Harness (W3)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 325A—1 ...... dark green ... X292—F
B ............. 114AB—1 .... yellow .......... X288—K, S10/2—A
C ............. 111AE—1 .... brown ........... K102—86, K107—86,
S09—H, X290—F
D ............. 310AV—1 .... black ............ XGND1
LX1017898
E ............. 329A—1 ...... white ............ X292—E
F .............. 347A—1 ...... pale purple .. X290—D
G ............. 351A—1 ...... brown ........... X292—G
H ............. 306A—1 ...... light blue ...... X291—B
J .............. 903A—1 ...... orange ......... S04—B
K ............. 114AA—1 yellow .......... X288—B, S10/2—A
....................
240
10A
52
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–48/56


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 022AE—1 .... red ............... F105E, K105—86,
S01—IGN, X86—B,
F113E
B ............. 385A—1 ...... dark green ... S01—AID
C ............. vacant
LX1017899
D ............. vacant
E ............. 119AB—1.5 . white ............ X290—G, S10/4—A
F .............. vacant
G ............. 407A—2.5 ... pale purple .. K105—87

111401
PN=342
X290 8-Pin Plug for Instrument Panel

Cross-Section
A ............. 503A—1 ...... orange ......... K103—S
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 924AC—1 .... yellow .......... X13—C3, X29—C
C ............. 925AC—1 .... dark green ... X13—B2, X29—B
D ............. 347A—1 ...... pale purple .. X288—F
E ............. 504A—1 ...... yellow .......... X75—C
F .............. 111AD—1 .... brown ........... K102—86, K107—86,
LX1017896
S09—H, X288—C
G ............. 119AA—1 white ............ X289—E, S10/4—A
....................
H ............. vacant
240
10A
53
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–50/56

Cross-Section
A ............. 552A—1 ...... red ............... K23/2—5
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 306A—1 ...... light blue ...... X288—H
C ............. 606A—1 ...... light blue ...... X286—F
D ............. 107AF—1 .... pale purple D123E, K113—87,
.................... X134—A, X123/2—A,
S08—1, X234—F
LX1017894
E ............. 125AF—1 .... dark green ... D122E, K112—87,
X123/1—A, X134—B,
S08—3, X234—D
F .............. 602A—1 ...... red ............... X286—E

111401
PN=343

Cross-Section
A ............. 982A—1 ...... red ............... F113A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 138A—1 ...... gray ............. K111—87, S09—C
C ............. 353A—1 ...... orange ......... X86—A
D ............. 310BD—1 .... black ............ XGND1
E ............. 329A—1 ...... white ............ X288—E
F .............. 325A—1 ...... dark green ... X288—A
LX1017898
G ............. 351A—1 ...... brown ........... X288—G
H ............. 167A—1 ...... pale purple .. S01—GND
J .............. 527AD—1 .... pale purple .. K110—86, X287—A,
X122—A, K110—30
K ............. vacant
240
10A
54
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–52/56
XGND1 Ground Point

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310AU—4 .... black ............ XGND4
(-) ............ 310AV—1 .... black ............ X288—D
–UN–12DEC96
(-) ............ 310AX—1 .... black ............ X287—F
(-) ............ 310AY—1 .... black ............ XGND5
(-) ............ 310BA—1 .... black ............ X286—D
(-) ............ 310BB—1.5 . black ............ K01—2
LX013685
(-) ............ 310BC—1 .... black ............ X86—C
(-) ............ 310BD—1 .... black ............ X292—D
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–53/56

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 050AC—1 .... black ............ X13—A3
(-) ............ 050AD—1 .... black ............ X29—D
–UN–12DEC96
LX013660

111401
PN=344
XGND4 Ground Point

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310AA—2.5 . black ............ D125A, K111—85,
K110—85, K102—85,
–UN–12DEC96
K104—85, K105—85,
K106—85, K107—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K22—3, X234—G,
LX013685
K23/1—5
(-) ............ 310AM—1 ... black ............ X112/1—B
(-) ............ 310AN—1 .... black ............ X124/2—B
(-) ............ 310AO—1 .... black ............ X124/1—B
(-) ............ 310AP—1 .... black ............ X123/1—C
(-) ............ 310AR—1 .... black ............ X37—B
(-) ............ 310AS—4 .... black ............ X239—C
(-) ............ 310AT—1 .... black ............ X123/2—C 240
(-) ............ 310AU—4 .... black ............ XGND1 10A
(-) ............ 310AZ—1 .... black ............ X112/2—B 55
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–55/56
XGND5 Ground Point

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310AY—1 .... black ............ XGND1
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017945
AG,LX25599,300 –19–01MAY00–56/56

111401
PN=345

from Serial Number 249395
240
10A
56
–UN–29AUG00
LX1025160

111401
PN=346
F01 Main Fuse

Cross-Section
A1 ........... 002AB—16 .. red ............... M01—30
–UN–14AUG00
A2 ........... 002AA—2.5 . red ............... K01—3
B1 ........... 012AM—10 . red ............... F112E, F118E,
F111E, F114E,
F116E, F120E
B2 ........... 012AN—10 .. red ............... F103E, F110E,
LX1025161
F107E, F102E, F101E
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–2/59
F101 — F120 Fuses

240
Cross-Section
F101A ..... 092AA—4 .... red ............... S01—BAT1, S01—
BAT2
F101E ..... 012AA—4 .... red ............... F01—B2, F103E,
F110E, F107E, F102
F102A ..... 252A—2.5 ... red ............... K106—30
F102E ..... 012AB—2.5 . red ............... F01—B2, F103E,
F110E, F107E, F101E
F103A ..... 124A—2.5 ... yellow .......... K102—30
F103E ..... 012AE—2.5 . red ............... F01—B2, F110E,
F107E, F102E, F101E
F104A ..... 525AA—1 .... dark green ... X75—B, X250/2—A
F104E ..... 072AA—1 .... red ............... K101—87, F117E,
F119E
F105A ..... 264A—1 ...... yellow .......... H25—3
F105E ..... 022AA—1 .... red ............... K105—86, S01—IGN,
–UN–10OCT97
X86—B, X289—A,
F113E
F106A ..... 169AC—1 .... white ............ K106—86, K104—86,
K111—87A, S08—2
F106E ..... 212A—1 ...... red ............... S01—ACC
LX1017939
F107A ..... 115AA—1 .... dark green ... K42—30, K112—87,
K113—87
F107E ..... 012AC—1 .... red ............... F01—B2, F103E,
F110E, F102E, F101E
F108A ..... 118AA—1 .... gray ............. X234—C, X123/1—B
F108E ..... 159AA—1 .... white ............ K107—87A, F109E,
D124E, S09—M
F109A ..... 128AB—1 .... gray ............. X234—A, X123/2—B
F109E ..... 159AB—1 .... white ............ K107—87A, F108E,
D124E, S09—M
F110A ..... 307A—2.5 ... pale purple .. X239—B
F110E ..... 012AD—2.5 . red ............... F01—B2, F103E,
F107E, F102E, F101E

111401
PN=347
F101 — F120 Fuses - Continued -

Cross-Section
F111A ..... 142A—4 ...... red ............... S09—B
F111E ..... 012AF—4 .... red ............... F01—B1, F112E,
F118E, F114E,
F116E, F120E
F112A ..... 103A—1.5 ... orange ......... K107—87
F112E ..... 012AG—1.5 . red ............... F01—B1, F118E,
F111E, F114E,
F116E, F120E
F113A ..... 982A—1 ...... red ............... X292—A
F113E ..... 022AF—1 .... red ............... F105E, K105—86,
S01—IGN, X86—B,
X289—A
F114A ..... 332A—2.5 ... red ............... K105—30
240 F114E ..... 012AH—2.5 . red ............... F01—B1, F112E,
10A F118E, F111E,
–UN–10OCT97
58 F116E, F120E
F115A ..... 886A—1 ...... light blue ...... X13—H2
F115E ..... 856AA—1 .... light blue ...... X29—A, X13—A2,
F117A
F116A ..... 902A—2.5 ... red ............... K101—30
LX1017939
F116E ..... 012AJ—2.5 .. red ............... F01—B1, F112E,
F118E, F111E,
F114E, F120E
F117A ..... 856AB—1 .... light blue ...... X29—A, X13—A2,
F115E
F117E ..... 072AC—1 .... red ............... K101—87, F104E,
F119E
F118A ..... 179A—1.5 ... white ............ S04—A
F118E ..... 012AL—1.5 . red ............... F01—B1, F112E,
F111E, F114E,
F116E, F120E
F119A ..... 545AA—1 .... dark green ... K23/1—8, X230—A,
X125—A
F119E ..... 072AD—1 .... red ............... K101—87, F104E,
F117E
F120A ..... 292A—4 ...... red ............... K104—30
F120E ..... 012AK—4 .... red ............... F01—B1, F112E,
F118E, F111E,
F114E, F116E

111401
PN=348

Cross-Section
D121A ..... vacant
D121E ..... vacant
D122A ..... 151AA—1 .... brown ........... K22—5, K108—86,
K109—86, D123A
D122E ..... 126AC—1 light blue S08—3, K112—86
D123A ..... 151AB—1 .... brown ........... K22—5, K108—86,
K109—86, D122A
D123E ..... 108AC—1 gray S08—1, K113—86
D124A ..... 117AA—1 .... pale purple .. S09—L, K22—1,
K111—86
D124E ..... 159AC—1 .... white ............ K107—87A, F108E,
F109E, S09—M
D125A ..... 310AB—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
K109—85, K112—85, 240
K113—85, K108—85, 10A
–UN–10OCT97
K107—85, K104—85, 59
K106—85, K102—85,
K110—85, K111—85
D125E ..... 085A—1 ...... dark green ... K101—85
LX1017939
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–5/59
H25 3-Pin Plug for Acoustic Alarm

Cross-Section
1 .............. vacant
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 913A—1 ...... orange ......... K23/2—7
3 .............. 264A—1 ...... yellow .......... F105A
LX1017978
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–6/59

Cross-Section
1 .............. 506A—1 ...... light blue ...... X286—C
2 .............. 310BB—1.5 . black ............ XGND1
–UN–12DEC96
3 .............. 002AA—2.5 . red ............... F01—A2

4 .............. 309A—2.5 ... white ............ M01–50
LX013192

111401
PN=349
K22 9-Pin Plug for Flasher

Cross-Section
1 .............. 117AC—1 .... pale purple .. S09—L, K111—86,
–UN–10OCT97
D124A
2 .............. 310AQ—1 .... black ............ X287—F, XGND1,
X234—G, K23/1—5,
K42—85
3 .............. vacant
LX1017994
4 .............. 102A—1 ...... red ............... K42—86
5 .............. 151AC—1 .... brown ........... K108—86, K109—86,
D122A, D123A
6 .............. vacant
7 .............. vacant
8 .............. 105A—1 ...... dark green ... K111—30
9 .............. vacant
240
10A
60
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–8/59

Cross-Section
1 .............. vacant
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. vacant
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. 550A—1 ...... black ............ X287—E
5 .............. 310BG—1 .... black ............ X287—F, XGND1,
X234—G, K22—2,
LX1017994
K42—85
6 .............. 254A—1 ...... yellow .......... X230—B
7 .............. 574A—1 ...... yellow .......... X287—D
8 .............. 545AD—1 .... dark green ... X230—A, X125—A,
F119A
9 .............. vacant

111401
PN=350

Cross-Section
1 .............. vacant
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 536A—1 ...... light blue ...... X125—B
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. vacant
5 .............. 552A—1 ...... red ............... X291—A
6 .............. 575A—1 ...... dark green ... X287—C
LX1017994
7 .............. 913A—1 ...... orange ......... H25—2
8 .............. vacant
9 .............. 154A—1 ...... yellow .......... X125—C
240
10A
61
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–10/59
K42 5-Pin Plug for Turn Signal Light Relay

Cross-Section
30 ............ 115AB—1 .... dark green ... F107A, K112—87,
–UN–10OCT97
K113—87
85 ............ 310AW—1 ... black ............ X287—F, XGND1,
X234—G, K23/1—5,
K22—2
86 ............ 102A—1 ...... red ............... K22—4
LX1017995
87 ............ 123AC—1 .... orange ......... K112—87A, K113—
87A
87A ......... vacant

111401
PN=351

Cross-Section
30 ............ 902A—2.5 ... red ............... F116A

85 ............ 085A—1 ...... dark green ... D125E
86 ............ 192A—1 ...... red ............... S01—ELX
87 ............ 072AE—2.5 . red ............... F104E, F117E, F119E
87A ......... vacant
K102 Work Light Relay
30 ............ 124A—2.5 ... yellow .......... F103A

240
85 ............ 310AE—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
10A
–UN–10OCT97
K109—85, K112—85,
62
K113—85, K108—85,
K107—85, K104—85,
K106—85, K110—85,
K111—85, D125A
LX1017939
86 ............ 111AA—1 .... brown ........... X288—C, X290—F,
S09—H, K107—86
87 ............ 121AD—2.5 . brown ........... X124/2—A, X112/1—
A, X124/1—A,
X112/2—A
87A ......... vacant
K103 Timer Relay
L .............. 515A—1 ...... dark green ... X290—A

S ............. 503A—1 ...... orange ......... X286—A
30 ............ 292A—4 ...... red ............... F120A

85 ............ 310AF—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
K109—85, K112—85,
K113—85, K108—85,
K107—85, K106—85,
K102—85, K110—85,
K111—85, D125A
86 ............ 169AA—1 .... white ............ F106A, K106—86,
K111—87A, S08—2
87 ............ 312AA—4 .... red ............... X37—A, X239—A

111401
PN=352

Cross-Section
K105 Fuel Preheater Relay
30 ............ 332A—2.5 ... red ............... F114A

85 ............ 310AG—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K109—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K108—85, K107—85,
K104—85, K106—85,
K102—85, K110—85,
K111—85, D125A
86 ............ 022AB—1 .... red ............... F105E, S01—IGN,
X86—B, X289—A,
F113E 240
87 ............ 407A—2.5 ... pale purple .. X289—G 10A
–UN–10OCT97
87A ......... vacant 63
LX1017939
30 ............ 252A—2.5 ... red ............... F102A
85 ............ 310AH—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
K109—85, K112—85,
K113—85, K108—85,
K107—85, K104—85,
K102—85, K110—85,
K111—85, D125A
86 ............ 169AB—1 .... white ............ F106A, K104—86,
K111—87A, S08—2
87 ............ 244A—2.5 ... yellow .......... X234—E
87A ......... vacant
30 ............ 133A—1.5 ... orange ......... S10/1—A

85 ............ 310AJ—1 ..... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
K109—85, K112—85,
K113—85, K108—85,
K104—85, K106—85,
K102—85, K110—85,
K111—85, D125A
86 ............ 111AB—1 .... brown ........... X288—C, X290—F,
S09—H, K102—86
87 ............ 103A—1.5 ... orange ......... F112A
87A ......... 159AE—1.5 . white ............ F108E, F109E,
D124E, S09—M

111401
PN=353

Cross-Section
30 ............ 125AC—1 .... dark green ... X291—E, X134—B,

X407/1—A, K112—30,
X234—D
85 ............ 310BJ—1 ..... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
K109—85, K112—85,
K113—85, K107—85,
K104—85, K106—85,
K102—85, K110—85,
K111—85, D125A
240 86 ............ 151AD—1 .... brown ........... K22—5, K109—86,
10A D122A, D123A
–UN–10OCT97
64 87 ............ 136A—1 ...... light blue ...... X123/1—A
87A ......... vacant
LX1017939
30 ............ 107AA—1 .... pale purple .. X291—D, X134—A,
K113—30, X234—F,
X407/2—A
85 ............ 310BK—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
K108—85, K107—85,
K104—85, K106—85,
K102—85, K110—85,
K111—85, D125A
86 ............ 151AE—1 .... brown ........... K22—5, K108—86,
D122A, D123A
87 ............ 106A—1 ...... light blue ...... X123/2—A
87A ......... vacant
K110 Differential Lock Relay
30 ............ 527AF—1 .... pale purple .. X122—A, X287—A,

K110—86, X292—J
85 ............ 310AD—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
K109—85, K112—85,
K113—85, K108—85,
K107—85, K104—85,
K106—85, K102—85,
K111—85, D125A
86 ............ 527AA—1 .... pale purple .. X122—A, X287—A,
X292—J, K110—30
87 ............ 555AA—1 .... dark green ... X122—B, X250/1—C
87A ......... vacant

111401
PN=354
K101 — K113 Relays (Fuse Box 1) - Continued -

Cross-Section
K111 Relay for Hazard Warning Flasher
30 ............ 105A—1 ...... dark green ... K22—8

85 ............ 310AC—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
K109—85, K112—85,
K113—85, K108—85,
K107—85, K104—85,
K106—85, K102—85,
K110—85, D125A
86 ............ 117AB—1 .... pale purple .. S09—L, K22—1,
D124A
87 ............ 138AA—1 .... gray ............. X292—B, S09—C 240
87A ......... 169AD—1 .... white ............ F106A, K106—86, 10A
–UN–10OCT97
K104—86, S08—2 65
K112 Relay for Right Turn Signal on ROPS
LX1017939
30 ............ 125AD—1 .... dark green ... X291—E, X134—B,
K108—30, X407/1—A,
X234—D
85 ............ 310AK—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
K109—85, K113—85,
K108—85, K107—85,
K104—85, K106—85,
K102—85, K110—85,
K111—85, D125A
86 ............ 126AA—1 .... light blue ...... S08—3, D122E
87 ............ 115AC—1 dark green ... K42—30, F107A,
K113—87
87A ......... 123AA—1 .... orange ......... K42—87, K113—87A
K113 Relay for Left Turn Signal on ROPS
30 ............ 107AB—1 .... pale purple .. X291—D, X134—A,

K109—30, X234—F,
X407/2—A
85 ............ 310AL—1 .... black ............ XGND1, K105—85,
K109—85, K112—85,
K108—85, K107—85,
K104—85, K106—85,
K102—85, K110—85,
K111—85, D125A
86 ............ 108AA—1 .... gray ............. D123E, S08—1
87 ............ 115AD—1 .... dark green ... K42—30, F107A,
K112—87
87A ......... 123AB—1 .... orange ......... K42—87, K112—87A

111401
PN=355
M01 Starter Motor

Cross-Section
30 ............ 002AB—16 .. red ............... F01—A1
50 ............ 309A—2.5 ... white ............ K01—4
–UN–12DEC96
LX013191
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–16/59
S01 8-Pin Plug for Key Switch

240
Cross-Section
ACC ........ 212A—1 ...... red ............... F106E
–UN–13MAY98
AID .......... 385A—1 ...... dark green ... X289—B
BAT1 ....... 092AB—2.5 . red ............... F101A, S01—BAT2
BAT2 ....... 092AC—2.5 . red ............... F101A, S01—BAT1
ELX ......... 192A—1 ...... red ............... K101—86
GND ........ 167A—1 ...... pale purple .. X292—H
LX1020444
IGN ......... 022AC—2.5 . red ............... F105E, K105—86,
X86—B, X289—A,
F113E
ST ........... 311A—1 ...... brown ........... X286—B
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–17/59
S04 2-Pin Plug for Horn Button

Cross-Section
A ............. 179A—1.5 ... white ............ F118A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 903A—1 ...... orange ......... X288—J

LX1017975

111401
PN=356
S08 3-Pin Plug for Flasher Switch

Cross-Section
1 .............. 108AB—1 .... gray ............. D123E, K113—86
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 169AE—1 .... white ............ F106A, K106—86,
K104—86, K111—87A
3 .............. 126AB—1 .... light blue ...... K112—86, D122E
LX1017979
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–19/59
S09 5-Pin Plug for Light Switch

240
Cross-Section
B ............. 142A—4 ...... red ............... F111A
–UN–10OCT97
C ............. 138AB—1 .... gray ............. X292—B, K111—87
H ............. 111AC—2.5 . brown ........... X288—C, X290—F,
K107—86, K102—86
L .............. 117AD—1 .... pale purple .. K22—1, K111—86,
D124A
LX1017980
M ............. 159AD—2.5 . white ............ K107—87A, F108E,
F109E, D124E
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–20/59

Cross-Section
A ............. 133A—1.5 ... orange ......... K107—30
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017945

111401
PN=357

Cross-Section
A ............. 114AC—1.5 . yellow .......... X288—B, X288—K
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017945
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–22/59

240
Cross-Section
A ............. 119AC—1.5 . white ............ X289—E, X290—G
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017945

111401
PN=358
X13 30-Pin Plug for Hitch Control Unit

Cross-Section
A1 ........... 859A—1 ...... white ............ X92—A
A2 ........... 856AC—1 .... light blue ...... X29—A, F117A,
F115E
A3 ........... 050AC—1 .... black ............ XGND2
B1 ........... 858A—1 ...... gray ............. X92—B
B2 ........... 925AA—1 .... dark green ... X290—C, X29—B
B3 ........... 871AA—1 .... brown ........... X14/1—A, X96—C,
X287—K, X14/2—A
C1 ........... vacant
C2 ........... vacant
C3 ........... 924AA—1 .... yellow .......... X290—B, X29—C
D1 ........... vacant
D2 ........... vacant
D3 ........... vacant 240
E1 ........... 875A—1 ...... dark green ... X14/1—C 10A
–UN–25SEP98
E2 ........... 876A—1 ...... light blue ...... X14/1—H 69
E3 ........... vacant
F1 ............ 884A—1 ...... yellow .......... X287—G
F2 ............ 877A—1 ...... pale purple .. X14/1—E
F3 ............ 878A—1 ...... gray ............. X96—B
LX1021456
G1 ........... vacant
G2 ........... 885A—1 ...... dark green ... X287—J
G3 ........... 869A—1 ...... white ............ X14/2—B
H1 ........... vacant
H2 ........... 886A—1 ...... light blue ...... F115A
H3 ........... 834A—1 ...... yellow .......... X14/1—F
J1 ............ 855A—1 ...... dark green ... X92—C
J2 ............ 838A—1 ...... gray ............. X14/1—D
J3 ............ 839A—1 ...... white ............ X14/1—G
K1 ........... 854A—1 ...... yellow .......... X92—D
K2 ........... 883A—1 ...... orange ......... X287—H
K3 ........... 873AA—1 .... orange ......... X14/1—B, X96—A,
X14/2—C

111401
PN=359
X14/1 8-Pin Plug for Feedback Unit

Cross-Section
A ............. 871AD—1 .... brown ........... X13—B3, X96—C,
–UN–10OCT97
X287—K, X14/2—A
B ............. 873AC—1 .... orange ......... X13—K3, X96—A,
X14/2—C
C ............. 875A—1 ...... dark green ... X13—E1
D ............. 838A—1 ...... gray ............. X13—J2
LX1017895
E ............. 877A—1 ...... pale purple .. X13—F2
F .............. 834A—1 ...... yellow .......... X13—H3
G ............. 839A—1 ...... white ............ X13—J3
H ............. 876A—1 ...... light blue ...... X13—E2
240
10A
70
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–25/59
X14/2 3-Pin Plug for Height Sensitivity Potentiometer

Cross-Section
A ............. 871AE—1 .... brown ........... X14/1—A, X13—B3,
–UN–10OCT97
X96—C, X287—K
B ............. 869A—1 ...... white ............ X13—G3
C ............. 873AD—1 .... orange ......... X14/1—B, X13—K3,
X96—A
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–26/59
X29 4-Pin Service Plug

Cross-Section
A ............. 856AD—1 .... light blue ...... X13—A2, F117A,
–UN–10OCT97
F115E
B ............. 925AB—1 .... dark green ... X290—C, X13—B2
C ............. 924AB—1 .... yellow .......... X290—B, X13—C3
D ............. 050AD—1 .... black ............ XGND2
LX1017887

111401
PN=360
X37 2-Pin Plug for Front Loader

Cross-Section
A ............. 312AC—1 .... red ............... X239—A, K104—87
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310AR—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–28/59
X75 6-Pin Plug for Front Wheel Drive Switch

240
Cross-Section
A ............. 535A—1 ...... dark green ... X287—B
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 525AB—1 .... dark green ... X250/2—A, F104A
C ............. 504A—1 ...... yellow .......... X290—E
D ............. vacant
E ............. vacant
F .............. vacant
LX1017893
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–29/59
X86 3-Pin Plug for Fuel Gauge and Fuel Pump

Cross-Section
A ............. 353A—1 ...... orange ......... X292—C
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 022AD—1 .... red ............... F105E, K105—86,
S01—IGN, X289—A,
F113E
C ............. 310BC—1 .... black ............ XGND1
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–30/59
X92 4-Pin Plug for Stepper Motor

Cross-Section
A ............. 859A—1 ...... white ............ X13—A1
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 858A—1 ...... gray ............. X13—B1

C ............. 855A—1 ...... dark green ... X13—J1
D ............. 854A—1 ...... yellow .......... X13—K1
LX1017887

111401
PN=361

Cross-Section
A ............. 873AB—1 .... orange ......... X14/1—B, X13—K3,
–UN–10OCT97
X14/2—C
B ............. 878A—1 ...... gray ............. X13—F3
C ............. 871AB—1 .... brown ........... X14/1—A, X13—B3,
X287—K, X14/2—A
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–32/59

240 Rear Left Fender
10A
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 121AC—1 .... brown ........... X124/2—A, K102—87,
X124/1—A, X112/2—A
B ............. 310AM—1 ... black ............ XGND4
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–33/59

Rear Right Fender

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 121AA—1 .... brown ........... X124/2—A, K102—87,
X112/1—A, X124/1—A
B ............. 310AZ—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–34/59
X122 2-Pin Plug for Differential Lock Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 527AC—1 .... pale purple .. X287—A, K110—86,
–UN–10OCT97
X292—J, K110—30
B ............. 555AC—1 .... dark green ... X250/1—C, K110—87
LX1017883

111401
PN=362

Left Turn Signal and Tail Light

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 136A—1 ...... light blue ...... K108—87
B ............. 118AB—1 .... gray ............. X234—C, F108A
C ............. vacant
D ............. 310AP—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017903
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–36/59

Right Turn Signal and Tail Light 240
10A
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 106A—1 ...... light blue ...... K109—87
B ............. 128AA—1 .... gray ............. X234—A, F109A
C vacant
D ............. 310AT—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017903
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–37/59

Front Left Fender

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 121AB—1 .... brown ........... X124/2—A, K102—87,
X112/1—A, X112/2—A
B ............. 310AO—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–38/59

Front Right Fender

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 121AE—1 .... brown ........... K102—87, X112/1—A,

X124/1—A, X112/2—A
B ............. 310AN—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017883

111401
PN=363
X125 3-Pin Plug for Rear PTO Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 545AB—1 .... dark green ... K23/1—8, X230—A,
–UN–10OCT97
F119A
B ............. 536A—1 ...... light blue ...... K23/2—2
C ............. 154A—1 ...... yellow .......... K23/2—9
LX1017884
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–40/59
X134 2-Pin Plug (Connection Point, Roof Wiring

240 Harness; W15)
10A
74
–UN–10OCT97
Cross-Section
A ............. 107AC—1 .... pale purple .. X291—D, K113—30,
K109—30, X234—F,
X407/2—A
B ............. 125AA—1 .... dark green ... X291—E, K108—30,
LX1017882
X407/1—A, K112—30,
X234—D
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–41/59
X230 2-Pin Plug for Seat Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 545AC—1 .... dark green ... K23/1—8, X125—A,
–UN–10OCT97
F119A
B ............. 254A—1 ...... yellow .......... K23/1—6
LX1017883

111401
PN=364
X234 7-Pin Plug Connection Point,


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 128AC—1 .... gray ............. F109A, X123/2—B
B ............. vacant
C ............. 118AC—1 .... gray ............. F108A, X123/1—B
D ............. 125AE—1 .... dark green ... X291—E, X134—B,
K108—30, X407/1—A,
LX1017899
K112—30
E ............. 244A—2.5 ... yellow .......... K106—87
F .............. 107AE—1 .... pale purple .. X291—D, X134—A,
K113—30, K109—30,
X407/2—A
G ............. 310BF—2.5 . black ............ X287—F, XGND1,
K23/1—5, K22—2,
K42—85 240
10A
75
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–43/59


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 312AB—2.5 . red ............... X37—A, K104—87
B ............. 307A—2.5 ... pale purple .. F110A
C ............. 310AS—4.0 . black ............ XGND4
LX1017911
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–44/59
X250/1 3-Pin Plug for Right Brake Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 514A—1 ...... yellow .......... X250/2—C
B ............. vacant
C ............. 555AB—1 .... dark green ... X122—B, K110—87
LX1017885

111401
PN=365
X250/2 3-Pin Plug for Left Brake Switch

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 525AC—1 .... dark green ... X75—B, F104A
B ............. vacant
C ............. 514A—1 ...... yellow .......... X250/1—A
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–46/59

240 Front Part of Transmission Harness (W32)
10A
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 503A—1 ...... orange ......... K103—S
B ............. 311A—1 ...... brown ........... S01—ST
C ............. 506A—1 ...... light blue ...... K01—1
D ............. 310BA—1 .... black ............ XGND1
E ............. 602A—1 ...... red ............... X291—F
LX1017894
F .............. 606A—1 ...... light blue ...... X291—C

111401
PN=366

Rear Part of Transmission Harness (W33)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 527AB—1 .... pale purple .. X122—A, K110—86,
X292—J, K110—30
B ............. 535A—1 ...... dark green ... X75—A
C ............. 575A—1 ...... dark green ... K23/2—6
D ............. 574A—1 ...... yellow .......... K23/1—7
LX1017898
E ............. 550A—1 ...... black ............ K23/1—4
F .............. 310AX—1 .... black ............ XGND1, X234—G,
K23/1—5, K22—2,
K42—85
G ............. 884A—1 ...... yellow .......... X13—F1
H ............. 883A—1 ...... orange ......... X13—K2
J .............. 885A—1 ...... dark green ... X13-G2
K ............. 871AC—1 .... brown ........... X14/1—A, X13—B3, 240
X96—C, X14/2—A 10A
77
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–48/59


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 325A—1 ...... dark green ... X292—F
B ............. 114AB—1 .... yellow .......... S10/2—A, X288—K
C ............. 111AE—1 .... brown ........... X290—F, S09—H,
K107—86, K102—86
D ............. 310AV—1 .... black ............ XGND1
LX1017898
E ............. 329A—1 ...... white ............ X292—E
F .............. 347A—1 ...... pale purple .. X290—D
G ............. 351A—1 ...... brown ........... X292—G
H ............. 306A—1 ...... light blue ...... X291—B
J .............. 903A—1 ...... orange ......... S04—B
K ............. 114AA—1 .... yellow .......... S10/2—A, X288—B

111401
PN=367


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 022AE—1 .... red ............... F105E, K105—86,
S01—IGN, X86—B,
F113E
B ............. 385A—1 ...... dark green ... S01—AID
C ............. vacant
LX1017899
D ............. vacant
E ............. 119AB—1.5 . white ............ S10/4—A, X290—G
F .............. vacant
G ............. 407A—2.5 ... pale purple .. K105—87
240
10A
78
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–50/59

Cross-Section
A ............. 515A—1 ...... dark green ... K103—L
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 924AC—1 .... yellow .......... X13—C3, X29—C
C ............. 925AC—1 .... dark green ... X13—B2, X29—B
D ............. 347A—1 ...... pale purple .. X288—F
E ............. 504A—1 ...... yellow .......... X75—C
F .............. 111AD—1 .... brown ........... X288—C, S09—H,
LX1017896
K107—86, K102—86
G ............. 119AA—1 .... white ............ S10/4—A, X289—E
H ............. 050AB—1 .... black ............ XGND2

111401
PN=368

Cross-Section
A ............. 552A—1 ...... red ............... K23/2—5
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 306A—1 ...... light blue ...... X288—H
C ............. 606A—1 ...... light blue ...... X286—F
D ............. 107AF—1 .... pale purple .. X134—A, K113—30,
K109—30, X234—F,
X407/2—A
LX1017894
E ............. 125AB—1 .... dark green ... X134—B, K108—30,
X407/1—A, K112—30,
X234—D
F .............. 602A—1 ...... red ............... X286—E
240
10A
79
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–52/59

Cross-Section
A ............. 982A—1 ...... red ............... F113A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 138A—1 ...... gray ............. S09—C, K111—87
C ............. 353A—1 ...... orange ......... X86—A
D ............. 310BD—1 .... black ............ XGND1
E ............. 329A—1 ...... white ............ X288—E
F .............. 325A—1 ...... dark green ... X288—A
LX1017898
G ............. 351A—1 ...... brown ........... X288—G
H ............. 167A—1 ...... pale purple .. S01—GND
J .............. 527AD—1 .... pale purple .. X122—A, X287—A,
K110—86, K110—30
K ............. vacant
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–53/59
X407/1 2-Pin Plug for Left Turn Signal on ROPS

Cross-Section
A ............. 125AF—1 .... dark green ... X291—E, X134—B,
–UN–10OCT97
K108—30, K112—30,
X234—D
B ............. 310BL—1 .... black ............ XGND1
LX1017882

111401
PN=369
X407/2 2-Pin Plug for Right Turn Signal on ROPS

Cross-Section
A ............. 107AD—1 .... pale purple .. X291—D, X134—A,
–UN–10OCT97
K113—30, K109—30,
X234—F
B ............. 310BM—1 ... black ............ XGND1
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–55/59
XGND1 Ground Point

240
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310AA—4 .... black ............ K105—85, K109—85,
K112—85, K113—85,
–UN–12DEC96
K108—85, K107—85,
K104—85, K106—85,
K102—85, K110—85,
K111—85, D125A
LX013685
(-) ............ 310AR—1 .... black ............ X37—B
(-) ............ 310BL—1 .... black ............ X407/1—B
(-) ............ 310BM—1 ... black ............ X407/2—B
(-) ............ 310AN—1 .... black ............ X124/2—B
(-) ............ 310BB—1.5 . black ............ K01—2
(-) ............ 310BC—1 .... black ............ X86—C
(-) ............ 310AY—1 .... black ............ XGND5
(-) ............ 310BH—4 .... black ............ X287—F, X234—G,
K23/1—5, K22—2,
K42—85
(-) ............ 310AV—1 .... black ............ X288—D
(-) ............ 310BA—1 .... black ............ X286—D
(-) ............ 310AU—4 .... black ............ XGND4
(-) ............ 310BD—1 .... black ............ X292—D
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–56/59

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 050AB—1 .... black ............ X290—H
(-) ............ 050AC—1 .... black ............ X13—A3
–UN–12DEC96
(-) ............ 050AD—1 .... black ............ X29—D

LX013660

111401
PN=370
XGND4 Ground Point

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310AS—4 .... black ............ X239—C
(-) ............ 310AU—4 .... black ............ XGND1
–UN–12DEC96
(-) ............ 310AZ—1 .... black ............ X112/2—B
(-) ............ 310AP—1 .... black ............ X123/1—D
(-) ............ 310AO—1 .... black ............ X124/1—B
(-) ............ 310AM—4 ... black ............ X112/1—B
LX013685
(-) ............ 310AT—1 .... black ............ X123/2—D
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–58/59
XGND5 Ground Point

240
Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310AY—1 .... black ............ XGND1
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017945
AG,LX25599,301 –19–01MAY00–59/59

111401
PN=371
240
10A
82
–UN–15APR98
LX1020131
AG,LX25599,282 –19–01MAY00–1/3
X05 7-Pin Plug for 7-Pin Socket

Cross-Section
1 .............. 339HD—2.5 . white ............ X234—G
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. vacant
3 .............. 194HD—1 .... yellow .......... X234—D
4 .............. 312HS—2.5 . red ............... X234—E, X23—7
5 .............. 105HD—1 .... dark green ... X234—F
6 .............. 101HD—1 .... brown ........... X234—C
LX1017968
7 .............. 316HD—2.5 . light blue ...... X234—E, X23—4

111401
PN=372
X234 7-Pin Plug,

7-Pin Socket Harness Connection Point (W4)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. vacant
B ............. vacant
C ............. 101HD—1 .... brown ........... X23—6
D ............. 194HD—1 .... yellow .......... X23—3
E ............. 312HR—2.5 . red ............... X23—4, X23—7
LX1017900
F .............. 105HD—1 .... dark green ... X23—5
G ............. 339HD—2.5 . white ............ X23—1
240
10A
83
AG,LX25599,282 –19–01MAY00–3/3

111401
PN=373
240
10A
84
–UN–15APR98
LX1020132
AG,LX25599,283 –19–01MAY00–1/3
X06 3-Pin Socket

Cross-Section
1 .............. 312HC—2.5 . red ............... X239—A
–UN–12JAN98
2 .............. 307HC—2.5 . pale purple .. X239—B

3 .............. 310HC—4 .... black ............ X239—C
LX1017966

111401
PN=374
X239 3-Pin Plug, 3-Pin Socket Harness


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 312HC—2.5 . red ............... X06—1
B ............. 307HC—2.5 . pale purple .. X06—2
C ............. 310HC—4 .... black ............ X06—3
LX1017910
AG,LX25599,283 –19–01MAY00–3/3
240
10A
85

111401
PN=375
Front Part of Transmission Wiring Harness (W32; AL115344)
240
10A
86
–UN–07DEC00
LX1024575
AG,LX25599,298 –19–01MAY00–1/8
X80 2-Pin Plug for Oil Filter Indicator

Light Sender

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 606D—1 ...... light blue ...... X286—F

B ............. 509D—1 ...... white ............ X81—A
LX1017882

111401
PN=376
X81 1-Pin Plug for Low-Temperature Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 509D—1 ...... white ............ X80—B
–UN–10OCT97
LX1017944
AG,LX25599,298 –19–01MAY00–3/8
X82 Cable Grommet Terminal for

High-Temperature Switch 240
10A
Cross-Section
–UN–12DEC96
A ............. 602D—1 ...... red ............... X286—E
LX013685
AG,LX25599,298 –19–01MAY00–4/8
X83 2-Pin Plug for Working Pressure

Warning Light Sender

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 503D—1 ...... orange ......... X286—A
B ............. 310DL—1 .... black ............ X286—D, XGND26
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,298 –19–01MAY00–5/8
X93 2-Pin Plug for Neutral Start Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 311D—1 ...... brown ........... X286—B
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 506D—1 ...... light blue ...... X286—C

LX1017883

111401
PN=377
X286 6-Pin Plug, Front Transmission Harness


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 503D—1 ...... orange ......... X83—A
B ............. 311D—1 ...... brown ........... X93—A
C ............. 506D—1 ...... light blue ...... X93—B
D ............. 310DK—1 .... black ............ X83—B, XGND26
E ............. 602D—1 ...... red ............... X82—A
LX1017893
F .............. 606D—1 ...... light blue ...... X80—A
240
10A
88
AG,LX25599,298 –19–01MAY00–7/8
XGND26 Ground Point

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310DM—1 ... black ............ X286—D, X83—B
–UN–12DEC96
LX013685
AG,LX25599,298 –19–01MAY00–8/8

111401
PN=378
240
10A
89

111401
PN=379
Rear Part of Transmission Wiring Harness (W33; AL116810)
240
10A
90
–UN–07DEC00
LX1024576
AG,LX25599,299 –19–01MAY00–1/8
X87 2-Pin Plug for Differential Lock Solenoid Valve

Cross-Section
A ............. 527D—1 ...... pale purple .. X287—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310DC—1 .... black ............ X287—F, X91—B,

X95—B
LX1017904

111401
PN=380
X89 3-Pin Plug for Left Draft Sensor

Cross-Section
A ............. 883DB—1 .... orange ......... X287—H, X90—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 885D—1 ...... dark green ... X287—J
C ............. 871DB—1 .... brown ........... X287—K, X90—C
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,299 –19–01MAY00–3/8
X90 3-Pin Plug for Right Draft Sensor

240
Cross-Section
A ............. 883DC—1 .... orange ......... X287—H, X89—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 884D—1 ...... yellow .......... X287—G
C ............. 871DC—1 .... brown ........... X287—K, X89—C
LX1017885
AG,LX25599,299 –19–01MAY00–4/8
X91 2-Pin Plug for FWD Solenoid Valve

Cross-Section
A ............. 535D—1 ...... dark green ... X287—B
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310DD—1 .... black ............ X287—F, X87—B,
X95—B
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,299 –19–01MAY00–5/8
X94 2-Pin Plug for Rear PTO Speed Sender

Cross-Section
A ............. 574D—1 ...... yellow .......... X287—D
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 550D—1 ...... black ............ X287—E

LX1017901

111401
PN=381
X95 2-Pin Plug for Rear PTO Solenoid

Cross-Section
A ............. 575D—1 ...... dark green ... X287—C
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310DA—1 .... black ............ X287—F, X87—B,
X91—B
LX1017904
AG,LX25599,299 –19–01MAY00–7/8
X287 10-Pin Plug, Rear Transmission Harness

240 Connection Point (W4)
10A
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 527D—1 ...... pale purple .. X87—A
B ............. 535D—1 ...... dark green ... X91—A
C ............. 575D—1 ...... dark green ... X95—A
D ............. 574D—1 ...... yellow .......... X94—A
E ............. 550D—1 ...... black ............ X94—B
LX1017897
F .............. 310DB—1 .... black ............ X87—B, X91—B,
X95—B
G ............. 884D—1 ...... yellow .......... X90—B
H ............. 883DA—1 .... orange ......... X89—A, X90—A
J .............. 885D—1 ...... dark green ... X89—B
K ............. 871DA—1 .... brown ........... X89—C, X90—C
AG,LX25599,299 –19–01MAY00–8/8

111401
PN=382
240
10A
93

111401
PN=383
W40 — Wiring Harness — Back-Up Alarm (AL117624)
240
10A
94
–UN–07DEC00
LX1024565
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–1/11
K28 9-Pin Plug for Back-Up Alarm Relay

Cross-Section
1 .............. vacant
–UN–10OCT97
2 .............. 545YD—1 .... dark green ... X186/2—A
3 .............. vacant
4 .............. 956YC—1 .... light blue ...... X178/1—B, X178/2—B
5 .............. 3
vacant
LX1017994
6 .............. 310YC—1 .... black ............ X186/1—A
7 .............. vacant
8 .............. 966Y—1 ...... light blue ...... X185—A
9 .............. vacant

111401
PN=384


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 946YB—1 .... light blue ...... X178/2—A, X186/3—A
B ............. 956YB—1 .... light blue ...... X178/2—B, K28—4
LX1017883
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–3/11

PowrQuad Transmission Harness Switch (W42) 240
10A
Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 946YA—1 .... light blue ...... X178/1—A, X186/3—A
B ............. 956YA—1 .... light blue ...... X178/1—B, K28—4
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–4/11
X185 2-Pin Plug for Back-Up Alarm Horn

Cross-Section
A ............. 966Y—1 ...... light blue ...... K28—8
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 310YA—1 .... black ............ XGND4
LX1017916
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–5/11

Cross-Section
A ............. 310YB—1 .... black ............ XGND4
A ............. 310YC—1 .... black ............ K28—6
–UN–12DEC96
LX013178

111401
PN=385

Cross-Section
A ............. 545YC—1 .... dark green ... X230/1—A, X230/2—A
A ............. 545YD—1 .... dark green ... K28—2
–UN–12DEC96
LX013178
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–7/11

240
Cross-Section
A ............. 946YC—1 .... light blue ...... X178/1—A, X178/2—A
–UN–12DEC96
LX013178
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–8/11
X230/1 2-Pin Plug, Seat Switch Connection Point (W4)

Cross-Section
A ............. 545YA—1 .... dark green ... X230/2—A, X186/2—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 907Y—1 ...... pale purple .. X230/2—B
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–9/11
X230/2 2-Pin Plug for Seat Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 545YB—1 .... dark green ... X230/1—A, X186—B
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 907Y—1 ...... pale purple .. X186/1—A

LX1017883

111401
PN=386
XGND4 Ground Point

Cross-Section
(-) ............ 310YA—1 .... black ............ X185—B
(-) ............ 310YB—1 .... black ............ X186/1—A
–UN–12DEC96
LX013685
AG,LX25599,288 –19–01MAY00–11/11
240
10A
97

111401
PN=387
W41 — Wiring Harness — Back-Up Alarm —Switch for SynchroPlus Transmission

(AL114955)
240
10A
98
–UN–07DEC00
LX1024566
AG,LX25599,289 –19–01MAY00–1/3
B47 Back-Up Alarm Switch

Cross-Section
C1 ........... 906XA—1 .... light blue ...... X178/1—B
–UN–10OCT97
NC2 ......... vacant

NO4 ........ 907XA—1 .... pale purple .. X178/1—A
LX1017963

111401
PN=388


Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 907XA—1 .... pale purple .. B47—NO4
B ............. 906XA—1 .... light blue ...... B47—C1
LX1017882
AG,LX25599,289 –19–01MAY00–3/3
240
10A
99

111401
PN=389
W42 — Wiring Harness —Switch for PowrQuad Transmission Back-Up Alarm (AL115426)
240
10A
,100
–UN–05DEC00
LX1024567
AG,LX25599,290 –19–01MAY00–1/3
X178/2 2-Pin Plug, Connection Point for PowrQuad

Transmission Harness Switch (W40)

Cross-Section
–UN–10OCT97
A ............. 946YY—1 .... light blue ...... X187—A

B ............. 956YY—1 .... light blue ...... X187—B
LX1017883

111401
PN=390
X187 2-Pin Plug for Back-Up Alarm Pressure Switch

Cross-Section
A ............. 946YY—1 .... light blue ...... X178/2—A
–UN–10OCT97
B ............. 956YY—1 .... light blue ...... X178/2—B
LX1017916
AG,LX25599,290 –19–01MAY00–3/3
240
10A
,101

111401
PN=391
240
10A
,102

111401
PN=392
Group 15
Sub-System Diagnostics, ComfortGard and Low Clearance

Performance monitor1 . . . . . . . . . . RE39569 or RE60389

240
Calibration and testing of electronic control devices. 15
1
–UN–10AUG94
RE39569
1
Available through normal parts channels
AG,OUOE003,9166 –19–12JUN99–2/4
Test line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JDG810

–UN–17OCT95
JDG810
AG,OUOE003,9166 –19–12JUN99–3/4
Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05791

–UN–08JUN99
JT05791
AG,OUOE003,9166 –19–12JUN99–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=393
240
15
2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=394
SE1 Starter and Charging Circuits, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General SE1 Starter and Charging Circuits, Operation
Starter Circuit Starter Circuit
The starter circuit consists of the battery, key switch, Current flows from the battery (G01) via fuse (F01) to
starter relay, neutral start switch, starter with solenoid the BAT pin (30) on the key switch (S01). Turning the
and electrical start aid heater element or fuel key switch (S01) to the START position routes current
preheater. via the ST pin to the neutral start switch (B36) and
from there to the starter relay (K01). The relay
The battery is located behind the front grille, the start engages and routes battery power to the starter (M01)
is mounted on the flywheel housing on the left side of pull-in relay pin 50.
the engine and the starter relay is mounted on the
starter. Charging Circuit
240
On tractors fitted with the SyncroPlus transmission, the When the ignition is on, current flows from the key 15
neutral start switch is located on the gearbox housing switch (S01) ELX pin to relay (K101) pin 86. The relay 3
shift cover. On tractors fitted with the PowrQuad switches pins 30 and 87 to power the alternator
transmission, the neutral start switch is located on the indicator light SE2 fuse (F117). The indicator light
speed valve housing (lower part of transmission) of the comes on when grounded via alternator (G02) pin D+.
4-speed high-low clutch.
When the engine is running, current flows from
The electrical starting aid heating element is installed alternator (G02) pin D+ to the indicator light. When
in the air intake manifold. The fuel preheater heating both sides of the indicator light are supplied with power
element is located in the fuel filter. the light does not come on.
Charging Circuit Electronics Power Supply
The charging circuit consists of the battery, key switch, When the ignition is on, current flows from the key
alternator and alternator indicator light. switch (S01) ELX pin to relay (K101). The relay
switches pins 30 and 87 to power the electronics. A
The alternator is at the front right of the engine. During diode installed in the alternator (G02) protects the
engine operation the alternator supplies current for electronics circuits from voltage surges.
tractor electrical circuits and maintains the battery
charge. Electrical Start Aid
Power Supply Circuit Press in the ignition key and turn it completely to the
right. Current flows from the key switch AID pin to pin
The power supply circuit consists of the battery, 1 on relay (K36). The relay switches pins 3 and 4. The
primary fuse (160 A), alternator and two fuse boxes glow plug (R15) receives power from the battery
containing most of the tractor’s fuses. positive post.
The primary fuse is located under the right step in the Fuel Preheater
central plug (X03). The two fuse boxes are in the right
side of the cab under the operator’s seat. The fuse
boxes contain fuses, diodes and relays.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=395
Current flows from the key switch (S01) IGN pin (15) Current flows from the key switch (S01) ELX pin to pin
to pin 86 on relay (K105). If the fuel temperature falls 86 on relay (K102). The relay switches pins 30 and 87
below 5°C (40°F) the thermal switch (B17) installed in to power the following accessories:
the fuel filter grounds relay (K105). The relay switches
pins 30 and 87 to provide battery positive power to the S04 — Horn Switch (SE3)
fuel preheater glow plug (R02) via fuse (F119). X06 — 3-Pin Receptacle (SE14a, SE14b)
X37 — 2-Pin Plug for Front Loader (SE8)
Accessory Relay
NOTE: Pin ELX on the key switch (S01) is not

powered during starting.
240
15
4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=396
LX1025079 –UN–21DEC00
LX1025079
B36—Neutral Start Switch K24—Injection Pump Shut-Off V105—Diode X93—2-Pin Plug (Neutral Start
F01—Fuse Valve X03—64-Pin Plug (Cab Switch Connection
F06—Fuse K36—Electrical Start Aid Relay Connection Point) Point)
F101—Fuse K101—Electronics Power X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine X306—2-Pin Plug (Electrical
F103—Fuse Supply Relay Connection Point) Start Aid Connection
F114—Fuse M01—Starter X03/4—40-Pin Plug Point)
G01—Battery R15—Electrical Start Aid Glow (Transmission Y02—Fuel Pump
G02—Alternator Plug Connection Point)
K01—Starter Relay S01—Key Switch X86—3-Pin Plug (Fuel Injection
Pump Connection Point)
SE1-Functional Schematic
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=397
LX1019175 –UN–05AUG99
022AD
012AD 012AD
F103
192AA
30A
012AB
192AA
F114
012AA SP
30A
SP 012AOO
262A
012AK
012AM
012AG
012AM
012AE
012AF
012AL
012AP
902A
012AC
F06
012AH
012AJ
60A
SE7 SE10 SE21 F1.A SE2 SE14
SE7
SE6
X306 SP 192AB
385CA 86 30 86 30
B A
SE01a KEY SW
F01
125A
SE16
X03
F101
1 3
310CS
K101 K102
30 A
A OFF
B AID B3 K36
F2.E 85 87 072AA 85 87 87A
A OFF X03/2 SP
092AC
310CE SP 2 4
310CK
085A
202AD
XGND9
310AN
506C ACCESSORY
342X
385A
V105
OFF
192
310CK
RUN SP
X03/2 B7
DETENTS
START
ACC,OFF,START A
1 3
RUN
R15
310AN
310AP
310CE
SE1a
202AA
202AB
202AC
XGND9
K01 SP
B
B1
022AD
022AE
A B
X03/2
311AD
506AA
311AA
311AB
2 4 6 (ST) SE14 SE8

309CA SP
SE3
092AA BAT
022
309CC
SE19 SP 4 (ELX) 192AC

SP
SE16h 022AC
002CD
002CB
310AM;
C1 C2 092AB BAT 5 (IGN) 022AB
B1 X03/2 X03/4
311
SP
022AA
002
309AB
309LB
3 (ACC) 212AD SP F
X03/4 XGND1 K24
311D
+ G01 002CA
309AA 506D S01 SE19
SP
212AA
212AB
212AC
212AE
-
SP
022DA
7 (AID)
002X
002CC
310DA
SE19 A B SP
310
X93
309AC
8 (GND) XGND26
SP
310DE
SE12
050
072AM
072AD
072AG
072AB
072AH
072AK
072AN
072AD
072AC
072AE
072AF
072AL
D+
072AJ
30 30 50 SE11 SE10
G M B C
3 G02 M01 SE23 B36 311AC SE10 X86
306CA
SE16 SE16c SE15 SE19 SE21 SE16 SE16f

SE2 SE16a SE15 SE2 SE21 SE5 SE5
SE2a 31 31 002X
SE18a Y02
SE21
SE22
SE23 SE2
SE24 LX1019175
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-6 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=398
B36—Neutral Start Switch K24—Injection Pump Shut-Off V105—Diode X93—2-Pin Plug (Neutral Start
F01—Fuse Valve X03—64-Pin Plug (Cab Switch Connection
F06—Fuse K36—Electrical Start Aid Relay Connection Point) Point)
F101—Fuse K101—Electronics Power X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine X306—2-Pin Plug (Electrical
F103—Fuse Supply Relay Connection Point) Start Aid Connection
F114—Fuse M01—Starter X03/4—40-Pin Plug Point)
G01—Battery R15—Electrical Start Aid Glow (Transmission Y02—Fuel Pump
G02—Alternator Plug Connection Point)
K01—Starter Relay S01—Key Switch X86—3-Pin Plug (Fuel Injection
Pump Connection Point)
SE1-Diagnostic Schematic
AG,OUOE003,9167 –19–01MAY00–5/7
SE1A-Functional Schematic
240
15
F119—Fuse
7
K105—Fuel Preheater Relay
R02—Fuel Preheater Element
X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine Connection Point)
X79—3-Pin Plug (Fuel Preheater Element Connection
Point)
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019565
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=399
SE1A-Diagnostic Schematic
F119—Fuse
R02—Fuel Preheater Element
Point)
240
15
8
–UN–06APR98
LX1019176
AG,OUOE003,9167 –19–01MAY00–7/7
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=400
SE2-Basic Informator, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General • Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light

• Transmission Oil Filter Indicator Light
All tractor instruments and indicator lights are located • Alternator Indicator Light
in the basic informator. • Air Filter Indicator Light
• Operating Pressure Warning Light
The coolant temperature indicator is driven by a • Front Wheel Drive Indicator Light
sender in the engine cylinder block. The fuel gauge • Low Beam Indicator Light
receives signals from a sender in the fuel tank. • High Beam Indicator Light
• PTO Indicator Light
The speedometer and tachometer receive signals from • Differential Lock Indicator Light
magnetic senders on the tractor. • Hour Meter
Instrument panel lighting is controlled by the light Instrument lighting is powered from light switch (S09)
switch (parking lights). pin C via fuse (F111) SE06. The hour meter is
240
powered by alternator (SE1) pin D+. 15
SE2-Basic Informator, Operation 9
The coolant temperature indicator and fuel gauge are
From the IGN pin on key switch S01, current flows via grounded by their individual senders (B08 and B03) on
fuse F117 to the basic informator to supply the the tractor.
following instruments and indicator lights:
The tachometer receives signals from the magnetic
• Tachometer sender (B01) on the tractor.
• Coolant Temperature Indicator
• Fuel Gauge The fuel pump is powered by the IGN pin on key
• Oil Temperature Indicator Light switch S01 SE1.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=401
LX1019567 –UN–26MAR98
LX1019567
B02—Air Filter Indicator Light B31—Operating Pressure H24—Rear PTO Indicator X20/B—3-Pin Plug (Digital
Sender Warning Light Sender Light, 540 rpm Instrument Setting
B03—Fuel Gauge/Fuel Pump B60—Transmission Oil P11—Basic Informator Switch Connection
Sender Temperature Sender S32—Digital Instrument Point)
B04—Engine Oil Pressure F117—Fuse Setting Switch X25—26-Pin Plug (Basic
Indicator Light Sender F118—Fuse X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine Informator Connection
B07—Oil Filter Indicator Light H22—Rear PTO Indicator Connection Point) Point, right)
Sender Light, 540 rpm X03/4—40-Pin Plug X26—26-Pin Plug (Basic
B08—Coolant Temperature H23—Rear PTO Indicator (Transmission Informator Connection
Indicator Sender Light; 1000 rpm Connection Point) Point, left)
B29—Low Temperature Switch
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-10 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=402
LX1019566 –UN–18MAY99
LX1019566
X70/1—1-Pin Plug (Air Filter X80—2-Pin Plug (Oil Filter X86—3-Pin Plug (Fuel Gauge X262—2-Pin Plug (Coolant
Indicator Light Sender Indicator Light Sender or Fuel Pump Sender Temperature Indicator
Connection Point) Connection Point) Connection Point) Connection Point)
X70/2—1-Pin Plug (Air Filter X81—1-Pin Plug (Low X215—10-Pin Plug (Engine X307—2-Pin Plug
Indicator Light Sender Temperature Switch Connection Point) (Transmission Oil
Connection Point) Connection Point) X222—80-Pin Plug (Control Temperature Sender
X78—1-Pin Plug (Engine Oil X83—2-Pin Plug (Operating Unit Wiring Harness Connection Point)
Pressure Indicator Light Pressure Warning Light Connection Point)
Connection Point) Connection Point) X247—26-Pin Plug (Control
Unit Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=403
LX1019177 –UN–23MAR98
606A SE1 SE1
509A
072AG
012AE
SE22
SE16h SE20
X20B
20A 932AP
905A
SE21 SE18 SE22 SE
B
SE15 SE17
NO NC
932AF
F118
F117
SE21
925AI
924AI
10A
C
S32
050AA
SE6 SE5 SE9 SE4
159AA
159AC
912AB
971AB
971AA
SE7
930AD
501AB
501AD
501AC
930AF
C1
912AD
912AE
SE1
135AB
SP3 SP3
135AF
135AA
135AD
135AE
924AG SP
925AG
SP SP SP SP
924AG
925AG
925AH
924AH
329A SP
SP
347A 515A
B6 B7 C6 C7 XGND2 SE9 SE16h SE16b SE16b
X222 SE5 SE16
SP
925AG
924AG
138AB
607AB
107AD
306AB
505AA
135AC
050AE
SP
329A
905A
341A
149A
509A
134A
146A
188A
606A
351A
925EA
925EA
925EE
935AG
934AG
125AB
912AA
501AA
159AB
934AH
935AH
971AC
932AE
930AE
934AF
935AF
606A
509A
156A
153A
151A
353A
347A
515A
154A
602A
602A
515A
050AM
329A
310AB
351A
924EC SE21 SE21
SP1 SP3 310AE
SP1 925EC SP1
SP2 SE22 SE22
310AJ
X215 X25 X26

924EB
925EB
353A
K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 11 12 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 2 5 6 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 25 26
D6 E2 X03/2 XGND2
X03/4 XGND1
A3 P11 P11
347A
154A
153A
156A
606D SE19
050AN
509E
SE20
329C
050C
310AF 353D
X80 X81 X262 X03/4
310DD
310AF
X03/2 A5 A4 310DK 310DA D5 D6 D8 J6
515D
SP
310DE
A 310CJ
347C
A A 13 22 17 16 XGND26 602D
351C
t X247
P
SP
t B29 B08 050D
X86 X307
310DA
B B B X70/1 X70/2 X78

B07
C
XGND9
B04 X83
XGND26
B03 A
A
310DK
P t
A H24 B60 P
P B02 B B31 B
B H22 H23
310DK
LX1019177
X70/1—1-Pin Plug (Air Filter X80—2-Pin Plug (Oil Filter X86—3-Pin Plug (Fuel Gauge X262—2-Pin Plug (Coolant
Indicator Light Sender Indicator Light Sender or Fuel Pump Sender Temperature Indicator
Connection Point) Connection Point) Connection Point) Connection Point)
X70/2—1-Pin Plug (Air Filter X81—1-Pin Plug (Low X215—10-Pin Plug (Engine X307—2-Pin Plug
Indicator Light Sender Temperature Switch Connection Point) (Transmission Oil
Connection Point) Connection Point) X222—80-Pin Plug (Control Temperature Sender
X78—1-Pin Plug (Engine Oil X83—2-Pin Plug (Operating Unit Wiring Harness Connection Point)
Pressure Indicator Light Pressure Warning Light Connection Point)
Connection Point) Connection Point) X247—26-Pin Plug (Control
Unit Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-12 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=404
AG,OUOE003,9173 –19–12JUN99–5/5
240
15
13
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-13 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=405
240
15
14
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-14 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=406
SE3-Horn, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General
The horn is mounted behind the front grille. The horn

button is part of the multifunction unit. The horn circuit
is closed by pushing in the turn signal switch.
POSSIBLE HORN CIRCUIT PROBLEMS

Problem Possible Cause
Horn does not sound Fuse F103 failed
Faulty horn button
Faulty horn
Power leads broken or shorted
Poor ground connection
Horn sounds continuously Faulty horn button

Power leads shorted 240
15
Horn is weak Faulty horn 15
Power leads damaged or corroded
Loose or corroded horn connections
SE3-Horn, Operation
Current flows from activated relay (K102) pins 30 and

87 via fuse (F103) to the horn button (S04). Pushing
the horn button supplies current to the horn (H01).
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-15 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=407
H01—Horn
S04—Horn Button
X21—12-Pin Plug (Multifunction Unit Connection
Point)
X59—1-Pin Plug (Horn Button Connection Point)
X66/1—1-Pin Plug (Horn Connection Point)
240
15
16
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019568
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-16 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=408
H01—Horn
S04—Horn Button
X21—12-Pin Plug (Multifunction Unit Connection
Point)
240
15
17
–UN–06APR98
LX1019178
AG,OUOE003,9178 –19–12JUN99–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-17 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=409
240
15
18
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-18 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=410
SE4-Cigarette Lighter and Operator Seat, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General directly to battery power and protected by fuse F118.

When the cigarette lighter is pressed in it remains in
Cigarette Lighter that position until the heating element is hot enough to
release it.
The cigarette lighter is to the right of the operator on
the shift console. The cigarette lighter is connected
POSSIBLE CIGARETTE LIGHTER CIRCUIT PROBLEMS

Cigarette lighter does not get hot Fuse F118 failed
Corroded housing or cartridge
Defective heating element
Power leads broken
Cigarette lighter is hot but does not release Defective heating element 240
15
Cigarette lighter heats only when held in Defective heating element 19
Operator Seat A knob on the side of the seat allows the seat angle to
be adjusted; another knob behind the back rest adjusts
The seat can have mechanical or pneumatic the lumbar support.
suspension.
A lever in front of the seat cushion allows the seat to
The back rest, height, ride, position and arm rests can be pivoted 20 degrees to the left or right. A lever in
be adjusted on the air suspension seat. front of the seat allows it to be positioned fore and aft.
Each armrest has a button on its side to allow it to be Seat height is adjusted with a lift/lower lever located in
adjusted up or down. the lower portion of the seat.
POSSIBLE SEAT CIRCUIT PROBLEMS

Seat will not raise or lower Fuse F214 failed
Defective raise microswitch
Defective air suspension unit
Defective compressor
SE4-Cigarette Lighter and Operator Seat, Operation NOTE: Power is removed from all electrical
accessories powered via the key switch ACC
Cigarette Lighter pin during the starting process.
Current flows from the battery positive terminal to the Current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin to the
cigarette lighter (E05) via fuse (F118) SE2. air suspension compressor (M09) via the fuse (F214)
SE12. The seat suspension automatically adapts to the
Operator Seat operator’s weight.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-19 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=411
E05—Cigarette Lighter
M09—Compressor
X58—2-Pin Plug (Operator Seat Connection Point)
X128/1—2-Pin Plug (Cigarette Lighter Connection
Point)
X128/2—1-Pin Plug (Cigarette Lighter Connection
Point)
240
15
20
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019569
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-20 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=412
240
15
21
–UN–06APR98
LX1019179
E05—Cigarette Lighter X58—2-Pin Plug (Operator X128/1—2-Pin Plug (Cigarette X128/2—1-Pin Plug (Cigarette
M09—Compressor Seat Connection Point) Lighter Connection Lighter Connection
Point) Point)
AG,OUOE003,9182 –19–12JUN99–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-21 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=413
240
15
22
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-22 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=414
SE5-Front PTO, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General • Ground pin (lead 050)

• ON pin-Switch on (lead 901)
Relay (K25) receives and processes input signals from • OFF pin-Switch off (lead 904)
switch (S21), the seat switch (S40) and sender (B58) • OP pin-Park brake indicator light sender (lead 907)
to control solenoid (Y01). • SI pin-PTO speed monitor (lead 301)
• SG pin-PTO speed monitor (lead 550)
During tractor operation the PTO switch should be
OFF before the PTO can be engaged. Output Signals
When the PTO is engaged during tractor operation, the • SOL pin-Solenoid (lead 607)
PTO will not operate if the indicator light and warning • STAT pin-PTO indicator light (lead 178)
light blink. • AUD.W pin-Alarm (lead 228)
If the operator leaves the seat when the PTO is PTO disengaged:
240
engaged or the operator is not in the seat when the 15
PTO is engaged, the indicator light and warning light Power flows from pin 87 (ELX) of relay (K101) SE1 via 23
will blink and the alarm will sound for 5 seconds. fuse (F215) SE5 to the POWER pin on relay (K25) and
then via pin C1 and NC on switch (S06) to the OFF
Whenever the PTO is engaged, shaft speed is pin of relay (K25).
monitored using a sender and relay. The relay
automatically stops the shaft if the PTO speed has not PTO engaged:
reached 100 rpm after 20 seconds.
Power flows from pin 87 (ELX) of relay (K101) SE1 via
If the operator leaves the seat within the first 15 fuse (F215) SE5 to the POWER pin on relay (K25) and
seconds of the 20-second delay period and the PTO then via pin C1 and ND on switch (S06) to the ON pin
shaft has not reached 100 rpm, the relay stops the of relay (K25). Relay (K25) routes power via the SOL
PTO after 5 seconds. pin on solenoid (Y01) and ground via the STAT pin to
indicator light H19. The PTO shaft speed sender (B58)
SE5-Rear PTO, Operation sends pulses to relay (K25).
The front PTO is controlled by a separate PTO relay PTO engaged, handbrake applied:
(K25).
From fuse (F215) power flow to the OP pin of relay
Relay (K25) receives or sends the following signals: (K25) and via the NO and C1 pins on the handbrake
indicator light sender (B37) to the basic control unit
Input Signals (BCU). The STAT pin on relay (K25) sends current to
indicator light H19 and via the AUD.W to the alarm
• POWER pin-Battery 12 V (lead 545) (H25) SE16, activating it for 5 seconds.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-23 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=415
240
15
24
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019570
B37—Handbrake Switch1 X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine X215—10-Pin Plug (Engine X235—2-Pin Plug (Handbrake
B58—PTO Speed Sender Connection Point) Connection Point) Switch Connection
F215—Fuse X125—3-Pin Plug (Front PTO X230—2-Pin Plug (Seat Switch Point1)
K25—Front PTO Relay Switch Connection Connection Point) X247—2-Pin Plug (Monitor Unit
S06—Front PTO Switch Point) X231—2-Pin Plug Connection Point)
S40—Seat Switch X166—2-Pin Plug (Solenoid (Handbrake/Seat Switch Y01—Front PTO Solenoid
X02—4-Pin Plug (Front PTO Connection Point) Connection Point)
Connection Point) X167—2-Pin Plug (PTO Speed
Sender Connection
Point)
1
Europe only
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-24 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=416
240
15
25
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-25 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=417
240
15
26
–UN–17APR98
LX1019975
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-26 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=418
B37—Handbrake Switch1 X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine X215—10-Pin Plug (Engine X235—2-Pin Plug (Handbrake
B58—PTO Speed Sender Connection Point) Connection Point) Switch Connection
F215—Fuse X125—3-Pin Plug (Front PTO X230—2-Pin Plug (Seat Switch Point1)
K25—Front PTO Relay Switch Connection Connection Point) X247—2-Pin Plug (Monitor Unit
S06—Front PTO Switch Point) X231—2-Pin Plug Connection Point)
S40—Seat Switch X166—2-Pin Plug (Solenoid (Handbrake/Seat Switch Y01—Front PTO Solenoid
X02—4-Pin Plug (Front PTO Connection Point) Connection Point)
Connection Point) X167—2-Pin Plug (PTO Speed
Sender Connection
Point)
240
15
27
1
Europe only
AG,OUOE003,9186 –19–12JUN99–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-27 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=419
240
15
28
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-28 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=420
SE6-Lighting Circuits, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General The flash-to-pass function is activated by briefly pulling

the turn signal switch toward the driver.
The light switch is located in the instrument housing.
The light switch activates the driving lights and work
lights.
The high beam switch is part of the multifunction unit.

The high beam lights are selected by pushing the turn
signal switch forward.
POSSIBLE LIGHT CIRCUIT PROBLEMS

One headlight does not work Failed light
Corroded bulb socket or receptacle
Broken circuit wiring 240
Poor ground connection 15
29
Several headlights do not work Failed fuse
Circuit wiring broken or shorted
Defective relay
Battery in poor condition
SE6-Lighting Circuits, Operation The relay connects pins 30 and 87 to power the
headlights (E01, E02 and/or E07, E08) via pins C1 and
Current flows from the battery positive terminal (G01) NC on switch (S10) and fuses (F106, F107 and/or
pin 30 to pin B of light switch (S09) via fuse (F104). F209, F210).
Parking Lights High Beam Lights
When the parking lights are on, current flows via pins When the high beam lights are on, pins C1 and NO of
B and C and fuses (F109 and F110) to the following switch (S10) are connected and current flows to pin
lights: 56a on the headlights (E01, E02 and/or E07, E08) via
fuse (F108).
• E03-Left Clearance Light
• E04-Right Clearance Light Flash-to-Pass Lights
• E13-Left Tail Light
• E14-Right Tail Light When the flash-to-pass lights are on, current flows
• E21-Left or Right License Plate Light from the battery positive terminal (pin 30) via fuse
(F105), the flash-to-pass switch (S30) and via fuse
Low Beam Lights (F108) to pin 56a on the headlights (E01, E02 and/or
E07, E08).
When the low beam lights are on, pins B and M are
connected and current flow to pin 86 on relay (K107).
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-29 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=421
LX1024819 –UN–21DEC00
LX1024819
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-30 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=422
E01—Headlight, Right S10—High/Low Beam Switch X68—3-Pin Plug (Left X113/2—2-Pin Plug (Right
E02—Headlight, Left S30—Flash-to-Pass Switch Headlight Connection License Plate Light
E03—Clearance Light, Left1 S57—Work Light Switch Point) Connection Point)
E04—Clearance Light, Right1 V102—Diode1 X101—6-Pin Plug (Headlight X171/1—1-Pin Plug (Right
E13—Tail Light, Left X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine Switch Connection Work Light, Fender
E14—Tail Light, Right Connection Point) Point) Light or License Plate
E21—License Plate Light, X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X106—4-Pin Plug (Right Tail, Light)
Right Connection Point) Turn and Stop Light X171/2—1-Pin Plug (Left Work
F104—Fuse X21—12-Pin Plug Connection Point) Light, Fender Light or
F105—Fuse (Multifunction Unit X107—4-Pin Plug (Left Tail, License Plate Light)
F106—Fuse Connection Point) Turn and Stop Light X248—26-Pin Plug (Headlight
F107—Fuse X61—1-Pin Plug (Flash-to-Pass Connection Point) Control Unit
F108—Fuse Switch Connection X108—3-Pin Plug (Right Front Connection Point)
F109—Fuse Point) Turn Signal Connection X269—3-Pin Plug (Parking
F110—Fuse X62—1-Pin Plug (Flash-to-Pass Point) Light Selection
F209—Fuse Switch Connection X109—3-Pin Plug (Left Front Connection Point)
K103—Headlight Relay1 X67—3-Pin Plug (Right Point) Light Selection
K107—Headlight Relay Headlight Connection X113/1—2-Pin Plug (Left Connection Point)
S09—Light Switch Point) License Plate Light 240
Connection Point) 15
31
1
Europe only
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-31 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=423
LX1019976 –UN–17APR98
SE1 SE1
158AA
012AF
012AG
S09 SP 103AC
189A
D E B
0
103AA
103AB
1
2
3 86 30 S57
F10 4
F105
0,1,2,3
30 A
C F A
30A
C 86 30
K107
F108
V102
20A
K103
113AB
152AB
152AD
152AC
85 87 87A
142A
M
135AB
158AA
133AA
C1
S10 85 87 87A
SP
B
135AF SP 113AC
H
SP SE2
135AD
135AA
135AE
310AO SP1 310BL

158AD
135AC
143AA SP 143AB L NC2 NO4

X101
310AM
159AA
159AB
139B
A E F D B C
X269 158AC SP SE7
X61
269F
X269F
B SP 139C
157AC
158AB
113AB
XGND1
139A
104AA
129AA
139AC
164AC
SE16b SE2 S30
144A
189A
143AC
A SE9
SP X21 X62
157AA
157AB
1 2 3 10
152AA
F109
F110
159AC SP
10A
10A
144A
118AB
128AA
164AC
129AA
104AA
118AA SP
SP
128AB 164AB 164AA 104AC 104AB SP
118AC
128AC
SP
SP
F107
F210
SP
F106
F209
SE14
10A
10A
SE14
10A
10A
133JB
133JB
104AD
128JC
139AB
1 2
X07 X07
124AA
X171/2 X171/1
114A
139AA
129AB
129AC
118JD
128JA
SE7
SE7 A9 A10 A11
SP SP
128JD X03/2 310AG
124C
114C
310JR
310JP
143J
148J
139CA 139CB XGND1 17 12 10
XGND12 XGND11 XGND10 XGND13
310CP 310CC X248
310JN
118JB
310JK
128JB
310JH
128JD
310JD
118JA
A B B A
X113/2 X113/1 B A C B A C
XGND9
X106 B D X109 A C X108 A C X107 B D X68 X67
E21 E21
RH LH 56B 56A 56B 56A
E14 E03 E04 E13
E02 E01
XGND12
LX1019976
31 31
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-32 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=424
E01—Headlight, Right S10—High/Low Beam Switch X68—3-Pin Plug (Left X113/2—2-Pin Plug (Right
E02—Headlight, Left S30—Flash-to-Pass Switch Headlight Connection License Plate Light
E03—Clearance Light, Left1 S57—Work Light Switch Point) Connection Point)
E04—Clearance Light, Right1 V102—Diode1 X101—6-Pin Plug (Headlight X171/1—1-Pin Plug (Right
E13—Tail Light, Left X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine Switch Connection Work Light, Fender
E14—Tail Light, Right Connection Point) Point) Light or License Plate
E21—License Plate Light, X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X106—4-Pin Plug (Right Tail, Light)
Right Connection Point) Turn and Stop Light X171/2—1-Pin Plug (Left Work
F104—Fuse X21—12-Pin Plug Connection Point) Light, Fender Light or
F105—Fuse (Multifunction Unit X107—4-Pin Plug (Left Tail, License Plate Light)
F106—Fuse Connection Point) Turn and Stop Light X248—26-Pin Plug (Headlight
F107—Fuse X61—1-Pin Plug (Flash-to-Pass Connection Point) Control Unit
F108—Fuse Switch Connection X108—3-Pin Plug (Right Front Connection Point)
F110—Fuse X62—1-Pin Plug (Flash-to-Pass Point) Light Selection
F209—Fuse Switch Connection X109—3-Pin Plug (Left Front Connection Point)
K103—Headlight Relay1 X67—3-Pin Plug (Right Point) Light Selection
K107—Headlight Relay Headlight Connection X113/1—2-Pin Plug (Left Connection Point)
S09—Light Switch Point) License Plate Light 240
Connection Point) 15
33
1
Europe only
AG,OUOE003,9190 –19–01MAY00–5/5
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-33 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=425
240
15
34
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-34 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=426
SE7-Work Lights, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General Depending on the switch setting the following work

light combinations are lit:
The work light switch and indicator light are to the right
of the operator on the shift console. The switch turns
the work lights on and off.
Work Light Work Light

Switch Combinations
S59 Front Grille Work Lights
S57 Cab-Mounted Work Lights
S60 Front Cab Roof-Mounted Work Lights
S58 Rear Cab Roof-Mounted Work Lights

240
S61 Fender-Mounted Work Lights 15
35
SE7-Work Lights, Operation to power the work light (E11) and indicator light (H64)
via the work light switch (S58).
Cab Roof-Mounted Work Lights
Fender-Mounted Work Lights
Current flows from pin H SE6 of light switch (S09) via
fuse F207 to work light switch (S57) SE6A. When the Current flows from the light switch (S09) SE6 H pin to
switch is on, current flows to the work lights (E20) and pin 86 on relay (K205). The relay switches pins 30 and
to the indicator light (H62). 87 to power the work light (E15) and indicator light
(H65) via the work light switch (S61).
Front Cab Roof-Mounted Work Lights
Front Grille Work Lights
Current flows from the light switch (S09) H pin to pin
86 on relay (K206). The relay switches pins 30 and 87 Current flows from the light switch (S09) SE6 H pin to
to power the work light (E10) and indicator light (H63) pin 86 on relay (K205). The relay switches pins 30 and
via the work light switch (S60). 87 to power the work light (E09) and indicator light
(H66) via the work light switch (S59).
Rear Cab Roof-Mounted Work Lights
Current flows from the light switch (S09) H pin to pin

86 on relay (K206). The relay switches pins 30 and 87
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-35 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=427
LX1024820 –UN–21DEC00
LX1024820
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-36 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=428
E09—Front Grille Work Light S59—Front Grille Work Light X114/1—2-Pin Plug (Rear Cab X139—2-Pin Plug (Front Grille
E10—Roof-Mounted Work Switch Roof-Mounted Work Work Light Connection
Light, Front S60—Front Cab Roof-Mounted Light Connection Point)
E11—Roof-Mounted Work Work Light Switch Point) X165—2-Pin Plug (Cab
Light, Rear S61—Fender-Mounted Work X114/2—2-Pin Plug (Rear Cab Roof-Mounted Work
E15—Fender-Mounted Work Light Switch Roof-Mounted Work Light Connection Point)
Light X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine Light Connection X171/1—1-Pin Plug (Right
E20—Cab-Mounted Work Light Connection Point) Point) Fender-Mounted Work
E206—Fuse X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X115—2-Pin Plug (Right Light and License
E207—Fuse Connection Point) Cab-Mounted Work Plate Light
E208—Fuse X69/1—2-Pin Plug (Front Work Light Connection Point) Connection Point)
H62—Cab-Mounted Work Light Light Connection X117/1—2-Pin Plug (Front X171/2—1-Pin Plug (Left
Indicator Light Point) Right Cab Fender-Mounted Work
H63—Front Roof-Mounted X69/2—2-Pin Plug (Front Work Roof-Mounted Work Light and License
Work Light Indicator Light Connection Light Connection Plate Light
Light Point) Point) Connection Point)
H64—Rear Roof-Mounted X110—2-Pin Plug (Left X117/2—2-Pin Plug (Front X248—26-Pin Plug (Lighting
Work Light Indicator Cab-Mounted Work Right Cab Control Unit
Light Light Connection Point) Roof-Mounted Work Connection Point)
H65—Fender-Mounted Work X113/1—2-Pin Plug (Left Light Connection X260—10-Pin Plug (Work Light 240
Light Indicator Light Fender-Mounted Work Point) Switch Connection 15
H66—Front Grille Work Light Light Connection X118/1—2-Pin Plug (Front Left Point) 37
Indicator Light Point) Cab Roof-Mounted
K205—Work Light Relay X113/2—2-Pin Plug (Right Work Light
K206—Work Light Relay Fender-Mounted Work Connection Point)
S58—Rear Roof-Mounted Work Light Connection X118/2—2-Pin Plug (Front Left
Light Switch Point) Cab Roof-Mounted
Work Light
Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-37 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=429
LX1019183 –UN–23APR98
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-38 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=430
E09—Front Grille Work Light S59—Front Grille Work Light X114/1—2-Pin Plug (Rear Cab X139—2-Pin Plug (Front Grille
E10—Roof-Mounted Work Switch Roof-Mounted Work Work Light Connection
Light, Front S60—Front Cab Roof-Mounted Light Connection Point)
E11—Roof-Mounted Work Work Light Switch Point) X165—2-Pin Plug (Cab
Light, Rear S61—Fender-Mounted Work X114/2—2-Pin Plug (Rear Cab Roof-Mounted Work
E15—Fender-Mounted Work Light Switch Roof-Mounted Work Light Connection Point)
Light X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine Light Connection X171/1—1-Pin Plug (Right
E20—Cab-Mounted Work Light Connection Point) Point) Fender-Mounted Work
E206—Fuse X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X115—2-Pin Plug (Right Light and License
E207—Fuse Connection Point) Cab-Mounted Work Plate Light
E208—Fuse X69/1—2-Pin Plug (Front Work Light Connection Point) Connection Point)
H62—Cab-Mounted Work Light Light Connection X117/1—2-Pin Plug (Front X171/2—1-Pin Plug (Left
Indicator Light Point) Right Cab Fender-Mounted Work
H63—Front Roof-Mounted X69/2—2-Pin Plug (Front Work Roof-Mounted Work Light and License
Work Light Indicator Light Connection Light Connection Plate Light
Light Point) Point) Connection Point)
H64—Rear Roof-Mounted X110—2-Pin Plug (Left X117/2—2-Pin Plug (Front X248—26-Pin Plug (Lighting
Work Light Indicator Cab-Mounted Work Right Cab Control Unit
Light Light Connection Point) Roof-Mounted Work Connection Point)
H65—Fender-Mounted Work X113/1—2-Pin Plug (Left Light Connection X260—10-Pin Plug (Work Light 240
Light Indicator Light Fender-Mounted Work Point) Switch Connection 15
H66—Front Grille Work Light Light Connection X118/1—2-Pin Plug (Front Left Point) 39
Indicator Light Point) Cab Roof-Mounted
K205—Work Light Relay X113/2—2-Pin Plug (Right Work Light
K206—Work Light Relay Fender-Mounted Work Connection Point)
S58—Rear Roof-Mounted Work Light Connection X118/2—2-Pin Plug (Front Left
Light Switch Point) Cab Roof-Mounted
Work Light
Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9195 –19–01MAY00–5/5
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-39 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=431
SE8-Front Loader Plug, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General Current flows from activated relay (K102) pins 30 and

87 via fuse (F220) to the front loader plug (X37/1).
If the tractor has a front loader, this plug supplies
electrical power to the front loader. The plug is located
under the fuse box.
Operation
Front Loader Plug
240
15
40
AG,OUOE003,9200 –19–12JUN99–1/3
F220—Fuse
X37/1—2-Pin Plug (Front Loader Connection Point)
X37/2—6-Pin Plug (Front Loader Connection Point)
X264—3-Pin Plug (Front Loader Wiring Harness
Connection Point)
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019574
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-40 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=432
240
15
41
–UN–06APR98
LX1019184
F220—Fuse X37/1—2-Pin Plug (Front X37/2—6-Pin Plug (Front X264—3-Pin Plug (Front
Loader Connection Loader Connection Loader Wiring Harness
Point) Point) Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9200 –19–12JUN99–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-41 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=433
240
15
42
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-42 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=434
SE9-Radio, Digital Clock, Dome and Console Lights, Functional and Diagnostic
Schematic
General Operation of the radio and digital clock is described in

the applicable operator’s manuals.
Radio
The radio and digital clock are located in the cab roof.
POSSIBLE RADIO CIRCUIT PROBLEM

Radio inoperative (ignition and radio on) Fuse F215 failed
Circuit wiring broken
Radio works, but radio light does not come on Fuse F216 failed
Digital clock inoperative Fuse F118 or F215 failed 240

Circuit wiring broken 15
Defective clock/radio 43
Dome and Console Lights With the switch in position 2, the dome light comes on
automatically when the left or right door is opened.
Cab interior lighting can be turned on in two ways.
The shift console light is controlled by the driving light
With the switch in position 1, the dome light is on switch.
regardless of door position (open or closed).
POSSIBLE CAB INTERIOR LIGHT PROBLEMS

Light does not come on, regardless of Failed fuse F215
switch position
Bulb burned out
Defective switch
Broken circuit wiring
Light comes on only using switch Faulty door switch or attachment

Broken wiring in door switch circuit
Poor door switch ground connection
Switch operation reversed Switch improperly connected
Operation Current flows from pin C SE6 of light switch (S09) via
fuse F216 to the shift console lights (E12/2) and to the
Digital Clock and Radio radio light
Current flows from the key switch (S01) ELX pin to pin Cab Dome Light
86 on relay (K101). The relay switches pins 30 and 87
to power the digital clock and radio via fuse (F215)
SE5.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-43 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=435
Current flows from the battery positive terminal (G01) (B28) is grounded and turns on the dome light.
SE1 pin 30 to the dome light (E12/1) and to the digital Activating switch (S35) turns on the dome light even
clock (A02) via fuse (F118) SE2. When one of the two when the doors are closed.
cab doors is opened, the corresponding door switch
AG,OUOE003,9204 –19–01MAY00–2/5
240
15
44
–UN–21DEC00
LX1024821
A01—Radio B28—Door Switch for Dome F216—Fuse X105—3-Pin Plug (Radio

A02—Digital Clock Light S35—Dome Light Switch Connection Point)
A05—Speaker, Left E12/1—Dome Light X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X121—4-Pin Plug (Dome Light
A06—Speaker, Right E12/2—Switch Console Light Connection Point) Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-44 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=436
240
15
45
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-45 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=437
240
15
46
–UN–06APR98
LX1019185
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-46 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=438
A01—Radio B28—Door Switch for Dome F216—Fuse X105—3-Pin Plug (Radio

A02—Digital Clock Light S35—Dome Light Switch Connection Point)
A05—Speaker, Left E12/1—Dome Light X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X121—4-Pin Plug (Dome Light
A06—Speaker, Right E12/2—Switch Console Light Connection Point) Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9204 –19–01MAY00–5/5
240
15
47
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-47 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=439
SE10-Fan and Air Conditioner, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General Fan switch in second position:
The fan speed control is to the right of the operator on The fan speed control (S14) switches from pins 3 and
the shift console. 6 to 1 and 4. The fan motors (M07 and M10) are
connected to ground via resistor (R03) pin 2.
With the ignition on, the control can be used to select
four fan speeds. Fan switch in third position:
When the fan is on, the air conditioner can be The fan speed control (S14) connects pins 3 and 6 to
activated with a knob in order to control cab 1, 4 and 5. The fan motors (M07 and M10) are
temperature. connected to ground via resistor (R03) pin 4.
Operation Fan switch in fourth position:

240
15 NOTE: Power is removed from all electrical The fan speed control (S14) connects pins 3 and 6 to
48 accessories powered via the key switch ACC 1, 4, 5 and 2. The fan motors are connected to ground
pin (S01) SE1 during the starting process. directly via the fan switch.
Fan Air Conditioner
Control current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC When the fan is on, relay (K207) receives control
pin SE1 to pin 86 on relay (F204). The relay switches current. The relay switches pins 30 and 87. Current
pins 30 and 87. Current flows from the battery positive flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin SE1 via fuse
terminal (G01) pin 30 SE1 to the fan motors (M07 and (F219) and relay (K207) pins 30 and 87 to the
M10) via fuses (F217 and F218). compressor switch (S28). When the compressor switch
is on (S28) current flow to the thermostat switch (B14)
Fan switch in first position: and via the pressure switch (B15) to the compressor’s
magnetic clutch (M02).
The fan speed control (S14) connects pins 3 and 1.
The fan motors (M07 and M10) are connected to
ground via resistor (R03) pin 3.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-48 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=440
240
15
49
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019576
B14—Thermostat Switch S28—Compressor Switch X46—2-Pin Plug (Fan Motor X73/1—1-Pin Plug (Thermostat
B15—Pressure Switch V01—Diode Connection Point) Switch Connection
F217—Fuse X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine X47—2-Pin Plug (Fan Motor Point)
F218—Fuse Connection Point) Connection Point) X73/2—1-Pin Plug (Thermostat
F219—Fuse X28—2-Pin Plug (Pressure X48—6-Pin Plug (Resistor Switch Connection
K204—Fan Relay Switch Connection Connection Point) Point)
K207—Air Conditioner Relay Point) X50—3-Pin Plug (Fan X100—6-Pin Plug (Fan Switch
M02—Compressor Clutch X45/1—1-Pin Plug Connection Point) Connection Point)
M07—Fan Motor (Compressor Switch X72—1-Pin Plug (Pressure X130—1-Pin Plug (Compressor
M10—Fan Motor Connection Point) Switch Connection Clutch Connection
R03—Resistors X45/2—1-Pin Plug Point) Point)
S14—Fan Switch (Compressor Switch
Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-49 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=441
240
15
50
–UN–06APR98
LX1019186
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-50 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=442
B14—Thermostat Switch S28—Compressor Switch X46—2-Pin Plug (Fan Motor X73/1—1-Pin Plug (Thermostat
B15—Pressure Switch V01—Diode Connection Point) Switch Connection
F217—Fuse X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine X47—2-Pin Plug (Fan Motor Point)
F218—Fuse Connection Point) Connection Point) X73/2—1-Pin Plug (Thermostat
F219—Fuse X28—2-Pin Plug (Pressure X48—6-Pin Plug (Resistor Switch Connection
K204—Fan Relay Switch Connection Connection Point) Point)
K207—Air Conditioner Relay Point) X50—3-Pin Plug (Fan X100—6-Pin Plug (Fan Switch
M02—Compressor Clutch X45/1—1-Pin Plug Connection Point) Connection Point)
M07—Fan Motor (Compressor Switch X72—1-Pin Plug (Pressure X130—1-Pin Plug (Compressor
M10—Fan Motor Connection Point) Switch Connection Clutch Connection
R03—Resistors X45/2—1-Pin Plug Point) Point)
S14—Fan Switch (Compressor Switch
Connection Point)
240
15
51
AG,OUOE003,9208 –19–12JUN99–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-51 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=443
240
15
52
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-52 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=444
SE11-Windshield Wiper/Washer, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General second position is the slow speed and the third

position is the fast speed. The windshield washer is
The windshield wiper is controlled by a switch on the activated by pushing the washer switch against the
right side in the multifunction unit. The first position steering column. The reservoir and pump are located
operates the wiper in interval mode (if equipped), the at the rear of the cab, under the rear window.
POSSIBLE WINDSHIELD WIPER PROBLEMS

Wiper does not work with switch in any position Fuse F213 failed
Faulty interval wiper relay K26
Broken or shorted circuit wiring
Faulty wiper switch
Faulty key switch
Failed wiper motor
Wiper does not work in interval mode Fuse F213 failed or missing 240
Broken circuit wiring 15
Faulty interval relay K26 53
Faulty windshield wiper switch
Windshield washer does not work Fluid level is low or container is empty
Fuse F212 failed
Faulty key switch
Faulty wiper switch
Faulty pump
Operation Current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin SE1
via fuse (F213) to windshield switch (S17) and pin 53a
NOTE: Power is removed from all electrical of the wiper (M03). Depending on switch position,
accessories powered via the key switch ACC current flows to pins 53, 53b or 31b of the wiper.
pin (S01) SE1 during the starting process.
If the windshield is opened, switch (S17) breaks the
Wiper with Interval Relay circuit to the windshield wiper switch (S15).
Current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin SE1 Washer
via fuse (F213) to switch (S15) and pin 53a of the
wiper (M03). Depending on switch position, current Current flows from windshield washer switch (S15) pin
flows via the interval relay to pins 53, 53b or 31b of C to the windshield washer switch (S16) and the pump
the wiper. (M05).
Wiper without Interval Relay
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-53 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=445
240
15
54
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019577
F213—Fuse X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X38—4-Pin Plug (Windshield X64—1-Pin Plug (Windshield
K26—Interval Relay Connection Point) Wiper and Motor Washer Switch
M03—Windshield Wiper X20A—1-Pin Plug (Windshield Connection Point) Connection Point)
M05—Windshield Washer Wiper Connection X39—4-Pin Plug (Windshield X104—9-Pin Plug (Interval
Pump Point) Wiper and Multi-function Relay Connection
S15—Windshield Wiper Switch X20B—3-Pin Plug (Windshield Connection Point) Point)
S16—Windshield Washer Washer and X63—1-Pin Plug (Windshield
Switch Multifunction Unit Washer Connection
Connection Point) Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-54 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=446
240
15
55
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-55 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=447
240
15
56
–UN–06APR98
LX1019187
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-56 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=448
K26—Interval Relay Connection Point) Wiper and Motor Washer Switch
M03—Windshield Wiper X20A—1-Pin Plug (Windshield Connection Point) Connection Point)
M05—Windshield Washer Wiper Connection X39—4-Pin Plug (Windshield X104—9-Pin Plug (Interval
Pump Point) Wiper and Multi-function Relay Connection
S15—Windshield Wiper Switch X20B—3-Pin Plug (Windshield Connection Point) Point)
S16—Windshield Washer Washer and X63—1-Pin Plug (Windshield
Switch Multifunction Unit Washer Connection
AG,OUOE003,9212 –19–12JUN99–4/7
SE11B-Functional Schematic
240
15
F23—Fuse
57
M03—Windshield Wiper
M05—Windshield Washer Pump
S15—Windshield Wiper Switch
S16—Windshield Washer Switch
S17—Windshield Switch
X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Connection Point)
X20A—1-Pin Plug (Windshield Wiper Connection
Point)
X20B—3-Pin Plug (Windshield Washer and
Multifunction Unit Connection Point)
X38—4-Pin Plug (Windshield Wiper and Motor
Connection Point)
X39—4-Pin Plug (Windshield wiper and Multi-function
Unit)
X63—1-Pin Plug (Windshield Washer Switch
Connection Point)
X64—1-Pin Plug (Windshield Washer Switch
Connection Point)
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019578
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-57 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=449
240
15
58
–UN–06JUL00
LX1019188
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-58 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=450
M03—Windshield Wiper Connection Point) Wiper and Motor Washer Switch
M05—Windshield Washer X20A—1-Pin Plug (Windshield Connection Point) Connection Point)
Pump Wiper Connection X39—4-Pin Plug (Windshield X64—1-Pin Plug (Windshield
S15—Windshield Wiper Switch Point) wiper and Multi-function Washer Switch
S16—Windshield Washer X20B—3-Pin Plug (Windshield Unit) Connection Point)
Switch Washer and
S17—Windshield Switch Multifunction Unit
Connection Point)
SE11B-Diagnostic Schematic
AG,OUOE003,9212 –19–12JUN99–7/7
240
15
59
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-59 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=451
SE12-Rear Window Wiper and Washer, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General two positions, fast and slow. The windshield washer is

activated by pushing the washer switch. The reservoir
The rear windshield wiper is controlled by a rotary and pump are located at the rear of the cab, under the
switch on the right side of the shift console. There are rear window.
POSSIBLE REAR WIPER CIRCUIT PROBLENS

The wiper does not work with switch in Failed fuse F214
any position
Faulty key switch
Faulty wiper switch
Faulty wiper motor
Windshield washer does not work Fluid level low or container is empty
240 Faulty key switch
15 Failed fuse F214
60 Broken or shorted circuit wiring
Faulty washer switch
Faulty pump
Operation of the wiper (M04). Depending on switch position,

current flows to pins 53, 53b or 31b of the wiper.
NOTE: Power is removed from all electrical
accessories powered via the key switch ACC If the windshield is opened, switch (S20) breaks the
pin (S01) SE1 during the starting process. circuit to the windshield wiper switch (S18).
Wiper Unit Washer
Current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin SE1 Current flows from pin 4 of wiper switch (S18) to pump
via fuse (F214) to windshield switch (S20) and pin 53a (M06).
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-60 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=452
240
15
61
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019580
F214—Fuse S20—Rear Window Switch X42—5-Pin Plug (Rear Window X44—2-Pin Plug (Rear Window
M04—Rear Window Wiper X40—1-Pin Plug (Rear Window Wiper Switch Connection Washer Motor
M06—Rear Window Washer Wiper and Cab Point) Connection Point)
Pump Connection Point) X43—4-Pin Plug (Rear Window
S18—Rear Window Wiper and Motor Connection Point)
Washer Switch
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-61 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=453
240
15
62
–UN–06APR98
LX1019189
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-62 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=454
F214—Fuse S20—Rear Window Switch X42—5-Pin Plug (Rear Window X44—2-Pin Plug (Rear Window
M04—Rear Window Wiper X40—1-Pin Plug (Rear Window Wiper Switch Connection Washer Motor
M06—Rear Window Washer Wiper and Cab Point) Connection Point)
Pump Connection Point) X43—4-Pin Plug (Rear Window
S18—Rear Window Wiper and Motor Connection Point)
Washer Switch
AG,OUOE003,9218 –19–12JUN99–4/4
240
15
63
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-63 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=455
S13-Beacon, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General Operation
The beacon is an additional flasher system for slow or Current flows from activated relay (K102) pins 30 and
wide vehicles. 87 via fuse (F220) to switch (S36). When the switch is
on, current flows to the indicator light (H41) and the
The beacon switch is to the right of the operator on the beacon (E27).
shift console.
AG,OUOE003,9222 –19–12JUN99–1/3
240
15
E27—Beacon
64
H41—Beacon Indicator Light
S36—Beacon Switch
X27—26-Pin Plug (Rear Control Unit Connection
Point)
X99—2-Pin Plug (Beacon Switch Connection Point)
X142/1—1-Pin Plug (Beacon Connection Point)
X142/2—1-Pin Plug (Beacon Connection Point)
X260—10-Pin Plug (Headlight Switch Connection
Point)
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019581
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-64 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=456
240
15
65
–UN–07APR98
LX1019544
E27—Beacon X27—26-Pin Plug (Rear X142/1—1-Pin Plug (Beacon X260—10-Pin Plug (Headlight
H41—Beacon Indicator Light Control Unit Connection Connection Point) Switch Connection
S36—Beacon Switch Point) X142/2—1-Pin Plug (Beacon Point)
X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X99—2-Pin Plug (Beacon Connection Point)
Connection Point) Switch Connection
Point)
AG,OUOE003,9222 –19–12JUN99–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-65 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=457
240
15
66
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-66 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=458
SE14-3- and 7-Pin Receptacles, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General Current flows from the battery positive terminal (G01)

pin 30 SE1 to pin 86 of relay (K104) via fuse (F120).
The 3-pin receptacle is to the right of the operator on The relay switches pins 30 and 87 to power pin 1 of
the shift console. It can be used to power accessories the 3-pin receptacle (X06) and pin A of receptacle strip
inside and outside the cab. The receptacle is (304). At the same time, pin 2 of 3-pin receptacle
connected to battery power via two relays and (X06) and pin C of receptacle strip (X304) via fuse
protected by fuses F119 and F120. (F119) SE1A.
The receptacle strip is attached to the front of the shift 7-Pin Receptacle
console. It contains an additional six receptacles.
Current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin via
The 7-pin receptacle is at the rear of the tractor over the SE9 fuse (F106) to pin 86 of relay (K106). The
the SCVs. It is used to power trailer lighting. relay switches pins 30 and 87.
240
Operation Current flows from the SE1 battery positive terminal 15
(G01) via fuse (F102) to pins 30 and 87 of relay 67
3-Pin Receptacle (K106) to power pin 7 of 7-pin receptacle (X05).
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-67 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=459
240
15
68
–UN–21DEC00
LX1024822
F120—Fuse X06—3-Pin Receptacle X239—3-Pin Plug (3-Pin X304—Receptacle Strip
K104—Relay for 3-Pin X234—7-Pin Plug (7-Pin Receptacle and
Receptacle Receptacle Connection Receptacle Strip
X23—7-Pin Receptacle Point) Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-68 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=460
240
15
69
–UN–21DEC00
LX1024826
F120—Fuse X06—3-Pin Receptacle X239—3-Pin Plug (3-Pin X304—Receptacle Strip

K104—Relay for 3-Pin X234—7-Pin Plug (7-Pin Receptacle and
Receptacle Receptacle Connection Receptacle Strip
X23—7-Pin Receptacle Point) Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9226 –19–01MAY00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-69 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=461
240
15
70
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-70 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=462
SE15-Electronic Hitch Control, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic (Cab)
General (B19 and B20), position sensor (B21) and height

potentiometer (B26). These are coordinated in the
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via electronic control unit and passed on to the stepper
fuse (F116) to the electronic control unit and to the motor (M08). The stepper motor opens the raise and
4-pin plug (X29; service plug). lower valve.
The electronic control unit receives electrical impulses NOTE: See Section 270 for operation and tests
from the position feedback unit (B27), draft sensors
240
15
71
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-71 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=463
LX1019583 –UN–26MAR98
LX1019583
A04—Hitch Control Unit (HCU) M08—Stepper Motor X14/1—8-Pin Plug (Height X89—3-Pin Plug (Left Draft
B19—Draft Sensor, Right S23—External Control Switch, Potentiometer-Position Sensor Connection
B20—Draft Sensor, Left Right Feedback Unit Point)
B21—Position Sensor S24—Rapid Raise/Lower Connection Point) X90—3-Pin Plug (Right Draft
B26—Load Depth Switch X14/2—3-Pin Plug (Position Sensor Connection
Potentiometer S31—External Control Switch, Feedback Unit Point)
B27—Position Feedback Unit Left Connection Point) X92—4-Pin Plug (Stepper
B41—Draft Potentiometer1 S68—External Control Switch X29—4-Pin Plug (Service Plug Motor Connection Point)
F116—Fuse X03/4—40-Pin Plug Connection Point) X96—3-Pin Plug (Position
F115—Calibration Fuse (Transmission X36—4-Pin Plug (Left and Sensor Connection
Connection Point) Right External Control Point)
X13—30-Pin Plug (Electronic Switch)
Control Unit Connection
Point)
1
Europe only
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-72 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=464
240
15
73
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-73 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=465
LX1019191 –UN–15NOV99
S68
B27
S24
B26
DOWN
E CW CW
B E
B
UP
B
873
873
838
A A CW
810
C A DOWN
M08
834
839
873
877
810
PH1-
PH1+
B20 B19 A F D C B E X35
PH2-
810
871
873
873
B21
873
PH2+
050K
050L
SP SP
CW
DOWN
SP
SE1
810
873
875
838
877
834
839
876
SE1
050J
826
821
823
824
072AE
072AF
X96 A E C
X89 C B A
X90 C B A
X92 A B C D
X36
A B D C E
871DB
883DC
873DA
878DA
871DA
883DA
F115
F116
884D
885D
859D
858D
855D
854D
050E
X14/2 X14/1
826
10A
821
823
824
SP 871DD
A B C A B C D E F G H
871DB
856AB
873AA
871AC
871AB
873AC
886AC
SP
869A
875A
839A
838A
877A
834A
876A
883DB
SP
856AA
871DC
886AD
886AE SP
050AK
856AC SP
050AC 050AC
X03/4
873AD
XGND2
886AA
886AC
050AB
J8 H4 H5 H7 H6 H8 J4 J5 J2 J3
SE18 SP 871AA
050AC
SE19
871AD
878A
885A
883A
884A
859A
858A
855A
854A
821A
823A
826A
873AB 824A
869A
SE20
SE16h 925AM
050AB D
924A
H2 A2 B3 E1 F2 J3 G2 F1 B1 K1 D3 C1 B2 SP 925AI B
X13 G3 K3 J2 H3 E2 F3 K2 A1 J1 A3 C2 D2 C3
SP 924AI C X29
856AC A
925
924
A04
SE2
SE16h
SE18
SE19
SE20
SE22 LX1019191
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-74 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=466
A04—Hitch Control Unit (HCU) M08—Stepper Motor X14/1—8-Pin Plug (Height X89—3-Pin Plug (Left Draft
B19—Draft Sensor, Right S23—External Control Switch, Potentiometer-Position Sensor Connection
B20—Draft Sensor, Left Right Feedback Unit Point)
B21—Position Sensor S24—Rapid Raise/Lower Connection Point) X90—3-Pin Plug (Right Draft
B26—Load Depth Switch X14/2—3-Pin Plug (Position Sensor Connection
Potentiometer S31—External Control Switch, Feedback Unit Point)
B27—Position Feedback Unit Left Connection Point) X92—4-Pin Plug (Stepper
B41—Draft Potentiometer1 S68—External Control Switch X29—4-Pin Plug (Service Plug Motor Connection Point)
F116—Fuse X03/4—40-Pin Plug Connection Point) X96—3-Pin Plug (Position
F115—Calibration Fuse (Transmission X36—4-Pin Plug (Left and Sensor Connection
Connection Point) Right External Control Point)
X13—30-Pin Plug (Electronic Switch)
Control Unit Connection
Point)
240
15
75
1
Europe only
AG,OUOE003,9230 –19–12JUN99–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-75 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=467
SE16A-Basic Control Unit - Braking System, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General When the brakes are applied, pins C1 and NC are

connected and power flows to light the brake lights
The two brake light switches are connected to the (H32 and H33). At the same time the power supply to
master cylinder. When the brakes are applied they the electronic control unit is interrupted. The control
power the brake lights and automatically activate the unit interrupts the flow of power to solenoid (Y03) to
front wheel drive system via the central control unit. engage the front wheel drive system.
Operation NOTE: If one or both brake light switches are actuated

the differential lock automatically disengages.
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via
fuse (F112) to the two brake light switches (B18).
240
15
76
AG,OUOE003,9234 –19–12JUN99–1/4
B18/1—Left Brake Light Switch

B18/2—Right Brake Light Switch
F112—Fuse
H32—Left Brake Light
H33—Right Brake Light
X03/4—40-Pin Plug (Transmission Connection Point)
X106—4-Pin Plug (Left Brake Light Connection Point)
X107—4-Pin Plug (Right Brake Light Connection
Point)
X133—45-Pin Plug (Central Control Unit Connection
Point)
X250/1—3-Pin Plug (Right Brake Light Switch)
X250/2—3-Pin Plug (Left Brake Light Switch)
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019584
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-76 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=468
240
15
77
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-77 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=469
240
15
78
–UN–07APR98
LX1019561
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-78 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=470
B18/1—Left Brake Light Switch X03/4—40-Pin Plug X107—4-Pin Plug (Right Brake X250/1—3-Pin Plug (Right
B18/2—Right Brake Light (Transmission Light Connection Point) Brake Light Switch)
Switch Connection Point) X133—45-Pin Plug (Central X250/2—3-Pin Plug (Left Brake
F112—Fuse X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Control Unit Light Switch)
H32—Left Brake Light Connection Point) Connection Point)
H33—Right Brake Light X106—4-Pin Plug (Left Brake
Light Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9234 –19–12JUN99–4/4
240
15
79
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-79 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=471
240
15
80
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-80 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=472
SE16B-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Hazard Flasher and Turn Signal Unit)
General Information • H46-turn signal light on cab roof, rear left

• H47-turn signal light on cab roof, rear right
Hazard flashers
Hazard flashers on (light switch):
The hazard flasher switch is in the instrument housing.
Using this switch, the left and right turn signal lights Current flows from the SE6 light switch (S09) to pin 11
can be simultaneously activated independently of the of the electronic control unit via pins A and C of
main switch. The basic control unit supplies the turn hazard flasher switch (S62). The control unit provides
signal lights with the intermittent current. flash pulses to the following lights:
Turn signals • Turn indicator lights, left and right

• H44-turn signal light on cab roof, front left
The two turn signal switches are part of the • H45-turn signal light on cab roof, front right
multifunction unit. Place the turn signal lever in the L • H46-turn signal light on cab roof, rear left
240
or R position to activate the turn signals. • H47-turn signal light on cab roof, rear right 15
81
Operation Turn signals
Hazard flashers Current flows from relay SE1 (K101) via fuse (F113) to
pin NO4 of the turn signal switches (S08). Depending
Hazard flashers on (hazard flasher switch): on the switch position (left or right), the electronic
control unit (BCU) supplies flash impulses to the
Current flows from the SE1 battery positive terminal following lights:
(G01) to pin 11 of the electronic control unit via fuse
(F212) and pins A and B of hazard flasher switch • Turn indicator lights, left and right
(S62). The control unit provides flash pulses to the • H36-fender-mounted turn signal light, left
following lights: • H38-fender-mounted turn signal light, right
• H44-turn signal light on cab roof, front left
• Turn indicator lights, left and right • H45-turn signal light on cab roof, front right
• H44-turn signal light on cab roof, front left • H46-turn signal light on cab roof, rear left
• H45-turn signal light on cab roof, front right • H47-turn signal light on cab roof, rear right
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-81 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=473
LX1024827 –UN–21DEC00
LX1024827
A03—Basic Control Unit BCU K45—Trailer Turn Signal Light X106—4-Pin Plug (Connection X164—2-Pin Plug (Connection
(W4) Relay; (W53) Point, Rear Right Turn Point, Rear Right Turn
F12—Fuse1 K108—Turn Signal Light Signal Light; W11) Signal Light; W11)
F102—Fuse (W4) Relay; (W4) X107—4-Pin Plug (Connection X234—7-Pin Plug (7-Pin
H36—Fender-Mounted Turn K109—Turn Signal Light Point, Rear Left Turn Socket Connection
Signal Light, Rear Left Relay; (W4) Signal Light; W11) Point; W53)
(W11) S08—Turn Signal Switch; (W5, X126—6-Pin Plug (Hazard X234/1—7-Pin Plug (Turn
H38—Fender-Mounted Turn W6) Flasher Switch Signal Light
Signal Light, Rear Right S62—Hazard Flasher Switch Connection Point; W4) Connection Point
(W11) (W4) X133—45-Pin Plug (Basic Wiring Harness; W4,
H44—Left Front Turn Signal X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Control Unit W53)
Light (W11) Connection Point; W4, Connection Point; W4) X408—2-Pin Plug (Adapter
H45—Right Front Turn Signal W11) X160—2-Pin Plug (Connection Harness Connection
Light (W11) X07/1—2-Pin Plug (Cab Roof Point, Front Left Turn Point)
H46—Turn Signal Light on Cab Wiring Harness Signal Light; W11) X421—1-Pin Plug (Cab
Roof, Rear Left (W11) Connection Point; W4) X161—2-Pin Plug (Connection Connection Point; W4,
H47—Turn Signal Light on Cab X21—12-Pin Plug Point, Front Right Turn W53)
Roof, Rear Right (W11) (Multi-Function Unit Signal Light; W11)
K44—Trailer Turn Signal Light Connection Point; W4, X163—2-Pin Plug (Connection
Relay; (W53) W5) Point, Rear Left Turn
Signal Light; W11)
1
Conversion Kit MPL10313
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-82 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=474
240
15
83
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-83 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=475
LX1024825 –UN–21DEC00
SE1
SE16c
973AH
012
SE1
SP
002ZZ
973AB
F102
155A
127A
20A
F12
20A
9 4 6
X21
112AB
122ZZ
127A
155A
155
127
149
SE6 107X 122XA X421 122XB

SP SP 125X
86 30 86 30
149
149
143AA
112AA
112AC
K45 K44
102A
102A
L R
NO4 NC2 NC2 NO4
S08 85 87
310XD 310XE 85 87
X126 C A B C1 C1 XGND38
117X
115X
X234/1 F D F D X234
A 23 11 33 10 107AD
X133 125AC
S66
105HD
194HD
B
107AA
A03 125AD
107E
125J
4 3 SE14
X133 18 X07
1 14 39 16 7 7
125AA
107AC
149A
125AC
146A
188A
107A
125A
107AB
SP SP 107AA
125AD
125AC
107AD
125AB
SE2 125B SP SP 107B

151A
134A
125C 107C
125DC
SE2 SE2 310AG 107L
SE2
XGND11 310DA 310AB 310AJ 310AD 310AY
125AD
D A A B A B A B A B A D
X107 X163 X160 X161 X164 X106
XGND13 XGND10 XGND10 XGND13 XGND12
LH LH LH RH RH RH
LX1024825 H36 H46 H44 H45 H47 H38
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-84 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=476
Relay; (W53) W5) Point, Rear Left Turn 240
Signal Light; W11) 15
85
SE16B-Diagnostic schematic (Tractors up to Serial

No. 256586 with conversion kit MPL 10313)
1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-85 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=477
LX1024823 –UN–21DEC00
SE1
012AR
155AC
155AD
F212
20A
SE1
SE16c
937AH
122AA
072AH
SP
SP
107X 122XA X421 122XB
127AA
937AB
SP
155AA
F102
125X
20A
86 30 86 30
9 4 6
X21 K45 K44
112AB
127AB
155AB
127AD
127AC
85 87 85 87
310XD 310XE
149
115
127
XGND38
117X
SP 115X
SE6
SP
X234/1 F D F D X234
149
149
107AB 115
125AC 117
143AA
112AA
112AC
NO4 NC2 NC2 NO4 L R

102A
102A
155AC
S08 155AD
X126 C A B
C1 C1 107AE
127AC
127AD
125AE
A 23 11 33 10
X133 86 30 86 30
S62 SE14
107AA K108 K109
B
10/20A 10/20A
A03 125AD 85 87 87_A 85 87 87_A
126A
119A
4 3
X133 X07 A B
1 14 39 16 17 7 18
X408
125AA
X07/1
107AC
107AB
107JC
125JC
146A
188A 119J B A
149A
SP SP 126JA
107AE
SP SP 107JD
126JA
125AB
107AD
125AC
125AD
125JD
125AE
SE2
151A
134A
125JA 107JA
119J
125JB
310JD 107JB
310JR 310JK 310JP 310JT SP 310JN
SE2 SE2 SE2
107AA D B B B B D
X107 A A
X163 A
X160 A
X161 A
X164 A
X106
125AC
125AD
XGND11 XGND12
125AE
LH LH LH RH RH RH
H36 H46 H44 310JK H45 H47 H38
SP
310JZ
LX1024823 XGND10
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-86 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=478
Relay; (W53) W5) Point, Rear Left Turn 240
Signal Light; W11) 15
87
SE16B-Diagnostic schematic (Tractors from Serial

No. 256587)
1
AG,LX23006,258 –19–01MAY00–7/7
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-87 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=479
SE16C-Basic Control Unit - Differential Lock, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via

fuse (F113) to switch (S22). Pressing the switch (S22)
The differential lock is located under the dash unit on causes current to flow to the electronic control unit to
the cab floor and is pedal operated. power the indicator light (H17) and solenoid (Y05). The
differential lock is engaged.
When the differential lock is engaged, the solenoid and
indicator light receive power from the electronic control Differential lock engaged; brakes applied:
unit.
If one of the two brake light switches (B18) SE16A is
If one or both brake switches are actuated the actuated, the electronic control unit interrupts the flow
differential lock automatically disengages. of current to solenoid (Y05) and the differential lock is
disengaged.
Operation
240
15 Differential lock engaged:
88
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-88 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=480
240
15
89
–UN–18NOV98
LX1021628
F113—Fuse X25—26-Pin Plug (Right Basic X87—2-Pin Plug (Differential X133—45-Pin Plug (Central
H17—Differential Lock Informator Connection Lock Solenoid Control Unit
Indicator Point) Connection Point) Connection Point)
S22—Differential Lock Switch X26—26-Pin Plug (Left Basic X122—2-Pin Plug (Differential X247—26-Pin Plug (Control
X03/4—40-Pin Plug Informator Connection Lock Switch Unit Connection Point)
(Transmission Point) Connection Point)
Connection Point)
SE16C-Functional Schematic
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-89 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=481
240
15
90
–UN–29JUN99
LX1019193
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-90 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=482
F113—Fuse X25—26-Pin Plug (Right Basic X87—2-Pin Plug (Differential X133—45-Pin Plug (Central
H17—Differential Lock Informator Connection Lock Solenoid Control Unit
Indicator Point) Connection Point) Connection Point)
S22—Differential Lock Switch X26—26-Pin Plug (Left Basic X122—2-Pin Plug (Differential X247—26-Pin Plug (Control
X03/4—40-Pin Plug Informator Connection Lock Switch Unit Connection Point)
(Transmission Point) Connection Point)
Connection Point)
SE16C-Diagnostic Schematic
AG,OUOE003,9242 –19–12JUN99–4/4
240
15
91
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-91 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=483
SE16D-Basic Control Unit - Radar, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
Genaral unit based on a value entered during calibration

representing the radar frequency (cycles per second)
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via per km/h (mph).
fuse (F113) to pins 3 and 4 of radar sensor (B39).
NOTE: A performance monitor is required to calibrate
The radar sensor is on the right of the main frame. the radar sensor.
Ground speed is calculated by the electronic control
AG,OUOE003,9246 –19–12JUN99–1/3
240
15
92
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019587
B39—Radar Sensor F113—Fuse X03/4—40-Pin Plug X133—45-Pin Plug (Central

(Transmission Control Unit
Connection Point) Connection Point)
SE16D-Functional Schematic
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-92 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=484
240
15
93
–UN–06APR98
LX1019194
B39—Radar Sensor F113—Fuse X03/4—40-Pin Plug X133—45-Pin Plug (Central
(Transmission Control Unit
SE16D-Diagnostic Schematic
AG,OUOE003,9246 –19–12JUN99–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-93 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=485
240
15
94
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-94 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=486
SE16E-Basic Control Unit - Rear PTO without HMS, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General Ignition on, engine on and rear PTO engaged:
The rear PTO switch is on the shift console. If the Switch (S21) is switched. The electronic control unit
engine is stopped with the PTO engaged, the integral powers the indicator light (H56) and solenoid (Y04).
safety switch will keep the PTO from reengaging when
the engine is restarted. The PTO must be disengaged Depending on which PTO is engaged, indicator lights
and then reengaged. (H22, H23 and H24) receive power from basic
informator (P11).
Operation
NOTE: The PTO will not run if the engine is started
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via with the PTO engaged. Switch (S21) must first
fuse (F113) to switch (S21). be turned off and then on.
240
15
95
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-95 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=487
240
15
96
–UN–15JAN01
LX1025188
B06—PTO Shaft Speed Sender X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X133—45-Pin Plug (Central X243F—3-Pin Plug with Wiring
H56—Rear PTO Indicator Light Connection Point) Control Unit Bridge (PTO
S21—Rear PTO Switch X94—2-Pin Plug (PTO Shaft Connection Point) Preselector Switch
X03/4—40-Pin Plug Speed Sender X242—3-Pin Plug (Headland Connection Point)1
(Transmission Connection Point) Management System X247—26-Pin Plug (Monitor
Connection Point) X95—2-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Switch Connection Unit Connection Point)
Solenoid Connection Point) Y04—Rear PTO Solenoid
Point) X243—3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO
X125—3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Preselector Connection
Switch Connection Point)
Point)
SE16E-Functional Schematic
1
North America only
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-96 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=488
240
15
97
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-97 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=489
240
15
98
–UN–23APR98
LX1019980
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-98 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=490
B06—PTO Shaft Speed Sender X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X133—45-Pin Plug (Central X243F—3-Pin Plug with Wiring
H56—Rear PTO Indicator Light Connection Point) Control Unit Bridge (PTO
S21—Rear PTO Switch X94—2-Pin Plug (PTO Shaft Connection Point) Preselector Switch
X03/4—40-Pin Plug Speed Sender X242—3-Pin Plug (Headland Connection Point)1
(Transmission Connection Point) Management System X247—26-Pin Plug (Monitor
Connection Point) X95—2-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Switch Connection Unit Connection Point)
Solenoid Connection Point) Y04—Rear PTO Solenoid
Point) X243—3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO
X125—3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Preselector Connection
Switch Connection Point)
Point)
SE16E-Diagnostic Schematic
240
15
99
1
North America only
AG,OUOE003,9249 –19–12JUN99–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-99 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=491
240
15
,100
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-100 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=492
SE16F-Basic Control Unit - Seat Indicator,

Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
SE16F-Functional Schematic
H25—Warning Horn
K106—Warning Horn (in fuse box 1)
Point)
240
15
,101
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019589
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-101 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=493
–UN–07APR98
LX1019547
240
15
,102
H25—Warning Horn K106—Warning Horn (in fuse X133—45-Pin Plug (Central
box 1) Control Unit
Connection Point)
SE16F-Diagnostic Schematic
AG,OUOE003,9253 –19–12JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-102 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=494
SE16G-Basic Control Unit - Front Wheel Drive without HMS, Functional and Diagnostic
Schematic
General From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via

fuse (F113) to switch (S63). From the switch, current
The front wheel drive switch is to the right of the flows via the electronic control unit to solenoid (Y03) to
operator on the shift console. disengage the front wheel drive.
When the front wheel drive is disengaged the switch Front wheel drive engaged:
interrupts the flow of current via the electronic control
unit to the solenoid and routes power to the indicator From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via
light. fuse (F113) to switch (S63). The switch breaks the
flow of current to the electronic control unit and
During braking the front wheel drive system is solenoid (Y03) to disengage the front wheel drive.
automatically engaged regardless of the position of the
front wheel drive switch. The indicator light (H09) comes on after receiving 240
current from the electronic control unit. 15
Operation ,103
Front wheel drive disengaged:
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-103 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=495
SE16G-Functional Schematic
H09—Front Wheel Drive Indicator Light

S05—Front Wheel Drive Switch
X03/4—40-Pin Plug (Transmission Connection Point)
X75—6-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Connection Point)
X91—2-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Solenoid
Connection Point)
Point)
X245—3-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Switch
Connection Point)
X247—26-Pin Plug (Control Unit Connection Point)
Y03—Front Wheel Drive Solenoid
240
15
,104
–UN–15JAN01
LX1025189
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-104 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=496
240
15
,105
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-105 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=497
240
15
,106
–UN–07APR98
LX1019548
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-106 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=498
H09—Front Wheel Drive X75—6-Pin Plug (Front Wheel X133—45-Pin Plug (Central X247—26-Pin Plug (Control
Indicator Light Drive Connection Point) Control Unit Unit Connection Point)
S05—Front Wheel Drive X91—2-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Connection Point) Y03—Front Wheel Drive
Switch Drive Solenoid X245—3-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Solenoid
X03/4—40-Pin Plug Connection Point) Drive Switch
(Transmission Connection Point)
Connection Point)
SE16G-Diagnostic Schematic
AG,OUOE003,9257 –19–12JUN99–4/4
240
15
,107
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-107 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=499
SE16H-Basic Control Unit - Power Supply and Tachometer Sender, Functional and
Diagnostic Schematic
General The Hall sender (B09), the magnetic sender (B35) and
the tachometer sender provide pulses to the basic
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via informator via the electronic control unit.
fuse (F113 and F111) to power the Hall sender (B09)
and the electronic control unit.
240
15
,108
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-108 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=500
LX1024169 –UN–24FEB00
LX1024169
B01—Tachometer Sender F111—Fuse X76—2-Pin Plug (Tachometer X133—45-Pin Plug (Central

B09—Speedometer Hall X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine Sender Connection Control Unit
Sender Connection Point) Point) Connection Point)
B35—Speedometer Magnetic X03/4—40-Pin Plug X88—4-Pin Plug (Tachometer
Sender (Transmission Hall Sender Connection
SE16H-Functional Schematic
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-109 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=501
240
15
,110
–UN–29FEB00
LX1024190
B01—Tachometer Sender F111—Fuse X76—2-Pin Plug (Tachometer X133—45-Pin Plug (Central

B09—Speedometer Hall X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine Sender Connection Control Unit
Sender Connection Point) Point) Connection Point)
B35—Speedometer Magnetic X03/4—40-Pin Plug X88—4-Pin Plug (Tachometer
Sender (Transmission Hall Sender Connection
SE16H-Diagnostic Schematic
AG,OUOE003,9261 –19–12JUN99–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-110 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=502
SE16I-Basic Control Unit - Headland Management System, Functional and Diagnostic

Schematic
General Operation
The Headland Management System (HMS) switch From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via
(S43) is to the right of the operator on the shift fuse (F113) to the following switches:
console.
• S05-Front Wheel Drive Switch
The differential lock, front wheel drive auto position • S21-Rear PTO Switch
and rear PTO can be individually or simultaneously • S43-HMS Switch
engaged or disengaged automatically with the • S44-PTO Remote Control Switch
rockshaft using the HMS by operating switch SE15 • S45-PTO Preselector Switch
(S24).
HMS switch on:
Engage the differential lock, front wheel drive and/or 240
rear PTO as needed (the indicator lights are on Current flows from switch (S43) to the electronic 15
continuously). Activate the system by pressing the control unit. The HMS is activated. ,111
HMS switch (S43) (there is a beep and the continuous
indicator light begins to flash quickly). Front wheel drive switch in auto position:
When the implement is raised prior to turning by using Pressing the switch (S05) causes current to flow to the
SE15 switch (S24) the differential lock is disengaged electronic control unit to disengage the front wheel
immediately, the rear PTO is disengaged after the drive when the implement reaches the transport
implement is raised 10% and front wheel drive is position and reengages the unit when the implement is
disengaged when the implement reaches the transport lowered again.
position (the indicator light changes from quick flashing
to slow flashing). PTO preselector switch on:
When subsequently lowering the implement, the From fuse (F104), current flows via switch (S21) to the
differential lock and front wheel drive immediately PTO preselector switch (S45) and from there to the
reengage (indicator light changes from slow flashing to central control unit. The PTO remote control switch
quick flashing). For safety reasons the rear PTO must (S44) is activated.
be engaged manually.
The indicator light and solenoids receive power from
To cancel HMS operation, press the HMS switch (S43) the central control unit.
again (the unit beeps and the light changes from quick
flashing to continuous illumination).
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-111 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=503
240
15
,112
–UN–18NOV98
LX1021617
H09—Front Wheel Drive X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X133—45-Pin Plug (Central X245—3-Pin Plug (Front Wheel
Indicator Light Connection Point) Control Unit Drive Switch
H55—Rear PTO Preselector X91—2-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Connection Point) Connection Point)
Indicator Light Drive Solenoid X242—2-Pin Plug (HMS Switch X247—26-Pin Plug (Control
S05—Front Wheel Drive Connection Point) Connection Point) Unit Connection Point)
Switch X95—2-Pin Plug (Rear PTO X243—3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Y03—Front Wheel Drive
S21—Rear PTO Switch Solenoid Connection Preselector Switch Solenoid
S43—HMS Switch Point) Connection Point) Y04—Rear PTO Solenoid
X03/4—40-Pin Plug X125—3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO X243F—3-Pin Plug with Bridge
(Transmission Switch Connection (Rear PTO Preselector
Connection Point) Point) Switch Connection
Point)
SE16I-Functional Schematic
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-112 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=504
240
15
,113
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-113 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=505
LX1019981 –UN–17APR98
528AB
973AA
973AC
B
973AD
973AD
557A
511A
S43
X243F C A
X245 A C B
B C A
X243 A B
X242
SE16c
973AC
542A
973AH
528AA
ON
586A
OFF
X07
535A
AB
S05 SP
SP 525A 528AB 11
C
547A
973AA 15
528AC
973AF
30 29 9
X133 A B C X133
31 26 6 8 34
X125
H09 H55
A X133
2
X133 3 25 15
S21
575
555AA
C B
D2 517A
X247
3 4 16
567A
310AF
575
D
X03/4 310 XGND3
310DA
SP
310DL
A B
555D
XGND26 X95 XGND1

X91
B A Y04
Y03
LX1019981
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-114 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=506
H09—Front Wheel Drive X07—20-Pin Plug (Cab Roof X133—45-Pin Plug (Central X245—3-Pin Plug (Front Wheel
Indicator Light Connection Point) Control Unit Drive Switch
H55—Rear PTO Preselector X91—2-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Connection Point) Connection Point)
Indicator Light Drive Solenoid X242—2-Pin Plug (HMS Switch X247—26-Pin Plug (Control
S05—Front Wheel Drive Connection Point) Connection Point) Unit Connection Point)
Switch X95—2-Pin Plug (Rear PTO X243—3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO Y03—Front Wheel Drive
S21—Rear PTO Switch Solenoid Connection Preselector Switch Solenoid
S43—HMS Switch Point) Connection Point) Y04—Rear PTO Solenoid
X03/4—40-Pin Plug X125—3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO X243F—3-Pin Plug with Bridge
(Transmission Switch Connection (Rear PTO Preselector
Connection Point) Point) Switch Connection
Point)
SE16I-Diagnostic Schematic
240
15
,115
AG,OUOE003,9264 –19–12JUN99–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-115 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=507
SE17-Signal Socket, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General The signal socket allows special control pulses to be

sent from the electronic control unit to the implement.
Current flows from the battery positive terminal to
SE14 fuse (F120) and pins 30 and 87 of relay (K104)
to the signal socket (X132).
AG,OUOE003,9268 –19–12JUN99–1/3
240
15
X132—7-Pin Signal Socket
,116
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019593
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-116 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=508
–UN–07APR98
X132—7-Pin Signal Socket
LX1019551
AG,OUOE003,9268 –19–12JUN99–3/3
240
15
,117
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-117 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=509
SE18-Performance Monitor, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General Operation
The performance monitor is located at the top of the From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via
right cab post and is connected directly to the tractor’s SE2 fuse (F117) to pin 10 on the performance monitor.
electronics circuits.
Display lighting
The performance monitor provides the following
information: Current flows from pin C SE6 of light switch (S09) via
SE9 fuse F216 to performance monitor pin 7. Display
• Actual distance traveled lighting intensity is adjustable.
• Actual ground speed
• Area worked
• Wheel slip in % with audible and visible alarms.
• Miscellaneous speeds
240
15
,118
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-118 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=510
240
15
,119
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019594
P12—Performance Monitor X135—10-Pin Plug
(Performance Monitor
Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-119 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=511
240
–UN–09APR98
15
,120
LX1019552
P12—Performance Monitor X135—10-Pin Plug
(Performance Monitor
Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9271 –19–12JUN99–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-120 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=512
SE19-Electrical Reverser Control, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General • K212-Not-Neutral Switch

• K213-Latch Relay
Current flows from the SE1 key switch (S01) IGN pin • S46-Electrical Reverser Control Switch
via fuse (F201) to the F-N-R lever’s not-neutral switch.
The reverser control unit (RCU) receives electrical
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K101), current flows via pulses from the F-N-R lever (S46), relays (K210, K211,
fuse (F202) to the following component: K212 and K213), the parking lock switch (B51) and the
enable switch (B52). These are coordinated in the
• A07-Reverser Control Unit (RCU) electronic control unit and passed on to the solenoids.
• B50-Reverse Lockout Switch
• B51-Rear PTO Switch NOTE: See Section 255 for operation and tests
• B52-Enable Pressure Switch
240
15
,121
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-121 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=513
LX1019595 –UN–26MAR98
LX1019595
A07—Reverser Control Unit K213—Latch Relay X195—2-Pin Plug (Enable X201—8-Pin Plug (Electrical
(RCU) S46—Electrical Reverser Solenoid Connection Reverser Control
B50—Reverse Lockout Switch Control Switch Point) Switch Connection
B51—Park Switch V202—Diode X196—2-Pin Plug (Forward Point)
B52—Enable Pressure Switch X193—6-Pin Plug Solenoid Connection X212—4-Pin Plug (Park Switch
F201—Fuse (Transmission Point) Connection Point)
F202—Fuse Connection Point) X197—2-Pin Plug (Reverse Y07—Enable Solenoid
K210—Reverse Relay X194—2-Pin Plug (Enable Solenoid Connection Y08—Forward Relay
K211—Forward Relay Pressure Switch Point) Y09—Reverse Relay
K212—Not-Neutral Relay Connection Point) X198—18-Pin Plug (RCU
Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-122 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=514
LX1019596 –UN–18MAY99
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-123 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=515
LX1019553 –UN–08MAR00
SE1 SE1 SE1
F202 072
10A
Y07 Y08 Y09
309AA
022AA
672AB
B
672AH
NOT
672AA SP 672AE NEUTRAL
A
B52 691AC
672E
A FORWARD
V202
P
C
A B A B A B
B X195 X196 X197
F201
86 30 86 30 REVERSE
310J
10A
698C
672AD
672AC
694AC
E
X194
(X201)
696E
K212 DENTENT
692A
B A 697E SE23 COIL
F
85 87 87A 85 87 87A
622AA
693AA
694AA
622AB
SP 310L
694AD
K213
699C
698C
696E
697E
310K 310AW
G
672I
310I
687AC SP SP SP 687AB E
S46
686AC SP 686AA D
X193
86 30 86 30 310AW 688A F
698AD
698AC
E A D B C F
310AA G
K210 672AC C
672AH
85 87 87A 85 87 87A 622AC A

699A
697A SP 691AA B
K211
686AB
687AA
672AA
691AB
694AB
693AA
696A
688A
698AA SP 698AB
X201
310AV
X222
L3 310AU
SP 050N
310AA
SP
310AE
310AW
050K
310BA
050M
L5 M6 M4 L4 L6 M7 M1 M3
N04 NC2
X222
N04 NC2
672B
XGND5
050I
SP SE2 B51
672EC
B50
310AJ
310AE C1
672M SP
C1
672D
672EA
699A SP
XGND1
925EE SP
924EE C A B D
SP
X212
SE20
886EB SP M5 684A
886EB
311EA
924EB
925EB
672EB
B6 B7 M2 D3 A1 L7 685A 672AD
050EH
699E
698E
686E
687E
688E
691E
694E
693E
684E
685E
X222
X222 050AG
886AA
925AH
924AH
311AA
050AF
C3 E1 B1 C2 E3 D1 D3 F1
A2 B2 B3 F2 C1 F3 E2 D2
SE2
X198
SE15
SE20
A07
SE1
LX1019553 XGND2 050AG
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-124 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=516
A07—Reverser Control Unit K213—Latch Relay X195—2-Pin Plug (Enable X201—8-Pin Plug (Electrical
(RCU) S46—Electrical Reverser Solenoid Connection Reverser Control
B50—Reverse Lockout Switch Control Switch Point) Switch Connection
B51—Park Switch V202—Diode X196—2-Pin Plug (Forward Point)
B52—Enable Pressure Switch X193—6-Pin Plug Solenoid Connection X212—4-Pin Plug (Park Switch
F201—Fuse (Transmission Point) Connection Point)
F202—Fuse Connection Point) X197—2-Pin Plug (Reverse Y07—Enable Solenoid
K210—Reverse Relay X194—2-Pin Plug (Enable Solenoid Connection Y08—Forward Relay
K211—Forward Relay Pressure Switch Point) Y09—Reverse Relay
K212—Not-Neutral Relay Connection Point) X198—18-Pin Plug (RCU
Connection Point)
240
15
,125
AG,OUOE003,9275 –19–12JUN99–5/5
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-125 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=517
SE20-TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General required, the control unit receives the corresponding

commands.
The electronic control unit (SFA) (A08) is installed in
the operator’s cab. Various set points are established During calibration of the suspended front wheel drive
and stored during calibration. axle and in case of faults the indicator lamp (H59) is
commanded to blink by the electronic control unit. In
If the position of the front wheel drive axle changes case of faults the SE16F warning horn sender (H25) is
relative to the front axle carrier the position sensor also powered.
(B53) determines the new position and passes it to the
electronic control unit. NOTE: See Section 280 for operation and tests
The electronic control unit compares the actual value

is compared to the set point. If compensation is
240
15
,126
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-126 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=518
LX1019597 –UN–15JUN99
LX1019597
A08—Suspended Front Axle X205—8-Pin Plug (Front Wheel X209—2-Pin Plug (Position X247—26-Pin Plug (Control
Control Unit (SFA) Drive Axle Wiring Sensor Connection Unit Connection Point)
B53—Position Sensor Harness Connection Point) Y10—Solenoid
H59—TLS Front Axle Indicator Point) X211—18-Pin Plug (Electronic Y11—Solenoid
Light X206—2-Pin Plug (Solenoid Control Unit
X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine Connection Point) Connection Point)
Connection Point) X207—2-Pin Plug (Solenoid X222—80-Pin Plug (Control
Connection Point) Unit Wiring Harness
Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-127 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=519
240
15
,128
–UN–09APR98
LX1019554
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-128 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=520
A08—Suspended Front Axle X205—8-Pin Plug (Front Wheel X209—2-Pin Plug (Position X247—26-Pin Plug (Control
Control Unit (SFA) Drive Axle Wiring Sensor Connection Unit Connection Point)
B53—Position Sensor Harness Connection Point) Y10—Solenoid
H59—TLS Front Axle Indicator Point) X211—18-Pin Plug (Electronic Y11—Solenoid
Light X206—2-Pin Plug (Solenoid Control Unit
X03/2—24-Pin Plug (Engine Connection Point) Connection Point)
Connection Point) X207—2-Pin Plug (Solenoid X222—80-Pin Plug (Control
Connection Point) Unit Wiring Harness
Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9279 –19–12JUN99–4/4
240
15
,129
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-129 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=521
SE21A-AutoQuad Transmission Shift, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General is compared to the transmission speed. When shifting

to another range the ratio between engine and
The electronic control unit (A09) is installed in the transmission speeds changes. The electronic control
operator’s cab. unit seeks and selects the proper range without
requiring any operator input.
On the shift lever there are two switches (S48 and
S49) used for up- and downshifts; the clutch is not NOTE: See Section 255 for operation and tests
needed for these shifts.
The clutch must be used when changing ranges.

When the clutch pedal is depressed the engine speed
240
15
,130
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-130 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=522
LX1024586 –UN–21DEC00
A09
c c c c
LX1024586
A09—PEC Unit S51—Clutch Switch X226—7-Pin Plug (BUS X249/2—3-Pin Plug (Shift
A17—BUS Terminator S81—Switch for Up- and Terminator Connection Switch Connection
B54—Transmission Speed Downshift Point) Point)
Sender S85—AutoQuad 2 X244—2-Pin Plug (AutoQuad X267—2-Pin Plug
F205—Fuse Transmission Switch Transmission Switch (Transmission Speed
F211—Fuse X03/4—40-Pin Plug Connection Point) Sender Connection
H68—AutoQuad Transmission (Transmission X247—26-Pin Plug (Control Point)
Indicator Light Connection Point) Unit Connection Point) X268—2-Pin Plug (Clutch
H75—AutoQuad 2 X221—45-Pin Plug (PEC Unit X249—3-Pin Plug (Shift Switch Switch Connection
TransmissionIndicator Connection Point) Connection Point) Point)
Light X222—80-Pin Plug (Control X249/1—3-Pin Plug (Shift
S48—Upshift Switch Unit Wiring Harness Switch Connection
S49—Downshift Switch Connection Point) Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-131 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=523
LX1024310 –UN–29AUG00
572AF
H75
C
POWER
ECO
S81
S85 T
572AF
B A
25 24
310AL
X249/1 X249/2
B A C C B A
572
593
585
572XC
568A
583XC
581XC
572AF
581XA SP 581XB A C B
583XA SP 583XB
A X249 572XA SP 572XB
593A
B A C
568A 572AE
F3
932EA
930EA
568E
934EG
935EG
562ED
X03
SE22
B1
A B B A
568E
X222
562EA
050EB
940EB
934EC
944AD
945AD
940AD
942AD
593E
31 22
LX1024310
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-132 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=524
A09—PEC Unit S51—Clutch Switch X226—7-Pin Plug (BUS X249/2—3-Pin Plug (Shift
A17—BUS Terminator S81—Switch for Up- and Terminator Connection Switch Connection
B54—Transmission Speed Downshift Point) Point)
Sender S85—AutoQuad 2 X244—2-Pin Plug (AutoQuad X267—2-Pin Plug
F205—Fuse Transmission Switch Transmission Switch (Transmission Speed
F211—Fuse X03/4—40-Pin Plug Connection Point) Sender Connection
H68—AutoQuad Transmission (Transmission X247—26-Pin Plug (Control Point)
Indicator Light Connection Point) Unit Connection Point) X268—2-Pin Plug (Clutch
H75—AutoQuad 2 X221—45-Pin Plug (PEC Unit X249—3-Pin Plug (Shift Switch Switch Connection
TransmissionIndicator Connection Point) Connection Point) Point)
Light X222—80-Pin Plug (Control X249/1—3-Pin Plug (Shift
S48—Upshift Switch Unit Wiring Harness Switch Connection
S49—Downshift Switch Connection Point) Point)
240
15
,133
AG,OUOE003,9283 –19–01MAY00–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-133 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=525
240
15
,134
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-134 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=526
SE21B-Electronic Controlled Independent Control Valves (EICV), Functional and

Diagnostic Schematic
LX1019599 –UN–29JUN00
LX1019599
A09—PEC Unit X221—45-Pin Plug (EICV Unit X220—8-Pin Plug X263—15-Pin Plug
K203—Stepper Motor Driver Connection Point) (Multifunction Lever (Multifunction Lever
Relay X222—80-Pin Plug (Control Wiring Harness Connection Point)
S64—Multifunction Lever Unit Wiring Harness Connection Point)
S65—Transport Lock Switch Connection Point) X225—3-Pin Plug (Transport
Lock Switch
Connection Point)
NOTE: See Section 270 for operation and tests. SE21B-Functional Schematic
AG,OUOE003,9287 –19–01MAY00–1/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-135 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=527
LX1019556 –UN–29JUN00
SE21a
SE1
B
562AC
012AP
S64
S65
CA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
X263 86 30
533F
K203
573FC
572FC
050FA
85 87 87A
615F
591F
592F
349AC
310AS
579F X225 C A B
541F
565F
566F
564F
577F
578F SE8
A B C D E F G H
SP
X220 576F
SP
605F
604F
573FA 573FB
533EB
SP
310BA
572FA SP 572FB
050FA
E F C A B D
349AA
349AB
X219 XGND5
050EA
572E
541EB
533EA
SP
SE21c
541EA
565E
566E
564E
577E
579E
578E
605E
604E
576E
573E
SE21a
H3 A1 SE21d
3 24 26 4 27 9 32 10 33
X222
14 37 15
572AA
050AF
X221
A09 SE21a
SE1 LX1019556
A09—PEC Unit X221—45-Pin Plug (EICV Unit X220—8-Pin Plug X263—15-Pin Plug
K203—Stepper Motor Driver Connection Point) (Multifunction Lever (Multifunction Lever
Relay X222—80-Pin Plug (Control Wiring Harness Connection Point)
S64—Multifunction Lever Unit Wiring Harness Connection Point)
S65—Transport Lock Switch Connection Point) X225—3-Pin Plug (Transport
Lock Switch
Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9287 –19–01MAY00–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-136 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=528
SE21C-EICV Stepper Motor Driver, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic

LX1019600 –UN–26MAR98
LX1019600
A10—Stepper Motor Driver X251—6-Pin Plug (Stepper X254—18-Pin Plug (Stepper X258—7-Pin Plug (BUS
A11—Stepper Motor Driver Motor Connection Motor Driver Terminator Connection
A12—Stepper Motor Driver Point) Connection Point) Point)
A18—BUS Terminator X252—6-Pin Plug (Stepper X255—18-Pin Plug (Stepper X316—6-Pin Plug (Stepper
F203—Fuse Motor Connection Motor Driver Motor Connection
M12—Stepper Motor Point) Connection Point) Point)
M13—Stepper Motor X253—18-Pin Plug (Stepper
M14—Stepper Motor Motor Driver
Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9291 –19–01MAY00–1/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-137 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=529
240
15
,138
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019601
Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-138 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=530
240
15
,139
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-139 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=531
LX1019557A –UN–15NOV99
SE21a SE21b
349AB
F203
30A
944AD
942AD
945AD
940AD
XGND5
310BJ
255A
A B C D
A18 A10 X232 A11 A12
E G
940MA
944MA
945MA
942MA
255MH
310MS
B G F C D2 E D E B C3 A2 D1 A B1 E1 F1 A3 C1 D2 E2 D3 E3 B C3 A2 D1 A B1 E1 F1 A3 C1 D2 E D E B C3 A2 D1 A1 B1 E1 F1 A C1
X25 X253 X254 X255
255MA 255MD
310MO
945MH
942MH
940MD
942MD
944MD
945MD
310MN
310MR
944MH
940MH
310MP
861M
863M
864M
865M
SP 255M
255MB
255MF
255M
255ME
SP SP 310ML
SP 310M
SP 310MM
310MJ
SP 310MG
310MF
310MH
944MJ
945MJ
942MJ
940MJ
940MF
942MF
944MF
945MF
SE21d 940MB 940MB
942MB 942MB
944MB 944MB
945MB 945MB
861M
863M
864M
865M
862M
866M
867M
868M
851M
852M
853M
857M
D C B E X318 D C B E X251 D C B E X252
M12 M13 M14
PH1- PH1- PH1-
PH1+ PH1+ PH1+
PH2- PH2- PH2-
PH2+ PH2+ PH2+
LX1019557a
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-140 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=532
Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9291 –19–01MAY00–4/4
240
15
,141
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-141 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=533
240
15
,142
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-142 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=534
SE21D-Stepper Motor Driver for Autoquad Transmission, Functional and Diagnostic

Schematic
240
15
,143
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019602
A13—Stepper Motor Driver X232—7-Pin Plug (Stepper X256—18-Pin Plug (Stepper X257—6-Pin Plug (Stepper
F204—Fuse Motor Driver Wiring Motor Driver Motor Connection
M15—Stepper Motor Harness Connection Connection Point) Point)
Point)
SE21D-Functional Schematic
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-143 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=535
240
15
,144
–UN–31MAR99
LX1022438
A13—Stepper Motor Driver X232—7-Pin Plug (Stepper X256—18-Pin Plug (Stepper X257—6-Pin Plug (Stepper
F204—Fuse Motor Driver Wiring Motor Driver Motor Connection
M15—Stepper Motor Harness Connection Connection Point) Point)
Point)
SE21D-Diagnostic Schematic
AG,OUOE003,9294 –19–12JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-144 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=536
SE22-Bus Terminator and Terminating Resistor, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
240
15
,145
–UN–24MAR98
LX1019603
A14—BUS Terminator (with X227—7-Pin Plug (BUS X270—7-Pin Plug (BUS X303—4-Pin Plug (CAN
power supply) Terminator Connection Terminator Connection Service Plug
A15—BUS Terminator Point) Point) Connection Point)
R04—Terminating Resistor
(BUS)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-145 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=537
–UN–09APR98
240
15
,146
LX1019559
A14—BUS Terminator (with X227—7-Pin Plug (BUS X270—7-Pin Plug (BUS X303—4-Pin Plug (CAN
power supply) Terminator Connection Terminator Connection Service Plug
A15—BUS Terminator Point) Point) Connection Point)
R04—Terminating Resistor
(BUS)
AG,OUOE003,9297 –19–12JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-146 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=538
SE23-Electronic Engine Control, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General Shifting with the Foot Throttle
The electronic control unit (A16) is installed in the Upshifting and downshifting occur automatically
operator’s cab. depending on foot throttle position.
Switch (S50) SE21a engages and disengages the NOTE: See Section 230 for operation and tests.
cruise control and foot throttle shifting.
Cruise Control
The desired engine speed is selected using

potentiometer (A19). Engine speed is then held at a
constant level, regardless of torque effect.
240
15
,147
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-147 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=539
LX1024167 –UN–10MAR00
LX1024167
A16—Engine Control Unit V203—Diode X222—80-Pin Plug (Control X261—2-Pin Plug (Coolant
(ECU) X214—2-Pin Plug (Fuel Pump Unit Wiring Harness Temperature Sender
A19—Cruise Control Connection Point) Connection Point) Connection Point)
Potentiometer X215—10-Pin Plug (Engine X236—4-Pin Plug (Cruise Y13—Fuel Pump
B56—Coolant Temperature Connection Point) Control Potentiometer
Sender X218—45-Pin Plug (ECU Connection Point)
B57—Foot Throttle Connection Point) X238—3-Pin Plug (Foot
Potentiometer Throttle Potentiometer
Connection Point)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-148 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=540
240
15
,149
–UN–24FEB00
LX1024168
A16—Engine Control Unit V203—Diode X222—80-Pin Plug (Control X261—2-Pin Plug (Coolant
(ECU) X214—2-Pin Plug (Fuel Pump Unit Wiring Harness Temperature Sender
A19—Cruise Control Connection Point) Connection Point) Connection Point)
Potentiometer X215—10-Pin Plug (Engine X236—4-Pin Plug (Cruise Y13—Fuel Pump
B56—Coolant Temperature Connection Point) Control Potentiometer
Sender X218—45-Pin Plug (ECU Connection Point)
B57—Foot Throttle Connection Point) X238—3-Pin Plug (Foot
Potentiometer Throttle Potentiometer
Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9300 –19–12JUN99–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-149 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=541
240
15
,150
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-150 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=542
SE25-Back-Up Alarm, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General When tractors with PowrQuad transmission are put

into reverse and the clutch pedal is NOT depressed,
The back-up alarm switch is located on the switch the horn receives electrical current from switch
console to the right of the operator. installed on the transmission.
When tractors with SyncroPlus transmission are put

into reverse, the horn receives electrical current from
the switch located on the gear shift lever.
240
15
,151
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-151 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=543
240
15
,152
–UN–30APR98
LX1020063
B47—Backup alarm switch1 X178/2—2-pin plug X186/2—1-pin plug X230—2-pin plug (connecting
B49—Backup alarm switch2 (connecting point - (connecting point - point - operator’s seat
B48—Backup alarm indicator switch, back-up main switch, back-up switch)
light alarm)2 alarm) X280—9-pin plug (connecting
H67—Backup alarm horn X185—2-pin plug (connecting X186/3—1-pin plug point - Back up alarm
K28—Backup alarm relay point - back-up alarm (connecting point - relay)
S42—Main switch for back up horn) main switch, back-up
alarm X186/1—1-pin plug alarm)
X178/1—2-pin plug (connecting point - X187—2-pin plug (connecting
(connecting point - main switch, back-up point - switch, back-up
switch, back-up alarm) alarm)2
alarm)1
1
2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-152 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=544
240
15
,153
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-153 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=545
240
15
,154
–UN–21DEC00
LX1025185
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-154 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=546
B47—Backup alarm switch1 X178/2—2-pin plug X186/2—1-pin plug X230—2-pin plug (connecting
B49—Backup alarm switch2 (connecting point - (connecting point - point - operator’s seat
B48—Backup alarm indicator switch, back-up main switch, back-up switch)
light alarm)2 alarm) X280—9-pin plug (connecting
H67—Backup alarm horn X185—2-pin plug (connecting X186/3—1-pin plug point - Back up alarm
K28—Backup alarm relay point - back-up alarm (connecting point - relay)
S42—Main switch for back up horn) main switch, back-up
alarm X186/1—1-pin plug alarm)
X178/1—2-pin plug (connecting point - X187—2-pin plug (connecting
(connecting point - main switch, back-up point - switch, back-up
switch, back-up alarm) alarm)2
alarm)1
240
15
,155
1
2
AG,OUOE003,9304 –19–12JUN99–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-155 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=547
240
15
,156
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-15-156 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=548
Group 15A
Sub-System Diagnostics, 2-Post ROPS

Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05791
240
Testing electrical circuits and components. 15A
1
–UN–08JUN99
JT05791
AG,OUOE003,9315 –19–12JUN99–2/2

111401
PN=549
240
15A
2

111401
PN=550
SE1-Starting Motor and Charging Circuit, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General Information Current flows from the battery (G01) via fuse (F01) to
the BAT pin (30) on the key switch (S01). Turning the
Starting Motor Circuit key switch (S01) to the START position routes current
via the ST pin to the neutral start switch (B36) and
The starting motor circuit consists of battery, main from there to the starter relay (K01). The relay
switch, starting motor relay, neutral start switch, engages and routes battery power to the starter (M01)
starting motor with solenoid switch and the heating pull-in relay pin 50.
elements of the electrical starting aid or fuel preheater.
Charging Circuit
The battery is located behind the front grille, the
starting motor on the right or left engine side on the With the ignition on, current flows from the key switch
flywheel housing. Starting motor relay is attached (S01) IGN pin (15) via fuse F113 and pin J1A of the
behind the cowl. basic informator to the alternator indicator light. The
indicator light comes on when alternator (G02) pin D+
240
The neutral start switch is located on the gear is grounded via basic informator (J2B). 15A
transmission shift cover. 3
When the engine is running, current flows from
The heating element of the electrical starting aid is alternator (G02) pin D+ to the indicator light via basic
installed in the air intake manifold. The fuel preheater informator pin J2B. When both sides of the indicator
element is located in the fuel filter. light are supplied with power the light does not come
on.
Charging Circuit
Electrical Start Aid
The charging circuit consists of the battery, the main
switch, the alternator and the alternator indicator light. Press in the ignition key and turn it completely to the
right. Current flows from the key switch AID pin to pin
The alternator is located on the front right engine side. 1 on relay (K36). The relay switches pins 3 and 4. The
When in operation it will supply all the activated glow plug (R15) receives power from the battery
current consuming components on the tractor and will positive post.
at the same time keep the battery fully charged.
Fuel Preheater
Supply Circuit
Current flows from the key switch (S01) IGN pin (15)
The supply circuit consists of battery, main fuse SE1 to pin 86 on relay (K105). The relay switches pins
(150 amps.), alternator and load center (fuse box), 30 and 87 to provide battery positive power to the fuel
which contains most of the fuses, diodes and relays. preheater heating element (R02) via fuse (F119).
The load center is located behind the operator’s seat
on the left side of the rear wall. The main fuse is If the fuel temperature falls below 5°C (40°F) the
located in a separate fuse box behind the cowl. thermal switch installed in heating element R02
switches current to the heating coil.
SE1 Starter and Charging Circuits, Operation
Starter Circuit
Continued on next page AG,OUOE003,9316 –19–01MAR00–1/5

111401
PN=551
LX1020052 –UN–23APR98
B36—Neutral Start Switch K24—Fuel Injection Pump S01—Key Switch X289—7-Pin Plug (Engine
F01—Fuse Shutoff Valve V105—Diode Wiring Harness
F06—Fuse K36—Electrical Starting Aid X93—2-Pin Plug (Neutral Start Connection Point)
F101—Fuse Relay Switch Connection X306—2-Pin Plug (Electrical
F116—Fuse K101—Electronics Power Point) Starting Aid Connection
G01—Battery Supply Relay X286—6-Pin Plug Point)
G02—Alternator M01—Starter (Transmission Front
K01—Starter Relay R15—Electrical Starting Aid Harness Connection
Glow Plug Point)
111401
PN=552
LX1025150 –UN–21DEC00
022AE
012A 012AJ
012AM SP 012AJ
SP 012AN
30 A
F116
012AB
012AC
012AD
012AE
352X
SE14b SE14a B
012AK
012AH
012AG
012AF
902A
SE9
012AL
SE16a SE7 SE1a SE6 SE6
022AE
1 3
SE14a KEY SW 86 30
K02 K36 SE3
X03
60A
F01
F06
15DA
K101
4 A OFF
2
B AID A
012AA
A 85 87
002X A OFF
X306 B A X289
085A
506A ACCESSORY
310CL
385CA
OFF
30 A
DETENS
F101
002AA 072H SP
022C
ACC,OFF,RUN RUN
192A
V105
START
1 3 B C X286 X289 B RUN
022AE
022AD
212A
072AC
072AA
072AD
K01 K24
310AB
A B
SE5
092AA
2 4 XGND9 6 (ST) 311A SE15 SE16c
342X
311A
311D
506D
092AB BAT 4 (ELX) 192 SP
310BB
SP
XGND1
092AC BAT 5 (IGN) 022A
310AA
SP
385A
002
3 (ACC) 212A XGND4
002AB
309A
+ G01 002
-
S01
R15
022AF
022AA
022AB
022AD
7 (AID)
A B SE2
SE2 SE2
002X
310
X93
8 (GND) 167A
SE1a
D+ 385A
30 30 50
G M
050
3 G02 M01 B36 311A
SE2
31 31
306C
SE15
SE2 LX1025150
B36—Neutral Start Switch K24—Fuel Injection Pump S01—Key Switch X289—7-Pin Plug (Engine
F01—Fuse Shutoff Valve V105—Diode Wiring Harness
F06—Fuse K36—Electrical Starting Aid X93—2-Pin Plug (Neutral Start Connection Point)
F101—Fuse Relay Switch Connection X306—2-Pin Plug (Electrical
F116—Fuse K101—Electronics Power Point) Starting Aid Connection
G01—Battery Supply Relay X286—6-Pin Plug Point)
G02—Alternator M01—Starter (Transmission Front
K01—Starter Relay R15—Electrical Starting Aid Harness Connection
Glow Plug Point)

111401
PN=553
F114—Fuse
R02—Fuel Preheater Heating Element
X289—7-Pin Plug (Engine Wiring Harness Connection
Point)
Point)
240
15A
6
–UN–23APR98
LX1020053

111401
PN=554
240
15A
7
–UN–19FEB98
LX1018338
F114—Fuse R02—Fuel Preheater Heating X289—7-Pin Plug (Engine X79—3-Pin Plug (Fuel
K105—Fuel Preheater Relay Element Wiring Harness Preheater Element
AG,OUOE003,9316 –19–01MAR00–5/5

111401
PN=555
SE2-Basic Informator, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General • Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light

• Transmission Oil Filter Indicator Light
All tractor instruments and indicator lights are located • Alternator Indicator Light
in the basic informator. • Air Filter Indicator Light
• Operating Pressure Warning Light
The coolant temperature indicator is driven by a • Front Wheel Drive Indicator Light
sender in the engine cylinder block. The fuel gauge • Low Beam Indicator Light
receives signals from a sender in the fuel tank. • High Beam Indicator Light
• PTO Indicator Light
The speedometer and tachometer receive signals from • Differential Lock Indicator Light
magnetic senders on the tractor. • Hour Meter
Instrument panel lighting is controlled by the light Instrument lighting is powered from light switch (S09)
switch (parking lights). pin C via fuse (F111) SE06. The hour meter is
240
15A powered by alternator (SE1) pin D+.
8 SE2-Basic Informator, Operation
The coolant temperature indicator and fuel gauge are
From the IGN pin on key switch S01, current flows via grounded by their individual senders (B08 and B03) on
fuse F113 to pin JIA on the basic informator to supply the tractor.
the following instruments and indicator lights:
The tachometer receives signals from the magnetic
• Tachometer sender (B01) on the tractor.
• Coolant Temperature Indicator
• Fuel Gauge The fuel pump is powered by the IGN pin on key
• Oil Temperature Warning Light switch S01 SE1.

111401
PN=556
LX1020041 –UN–23APR98
B01—Tachometer Sender F113—Fuse X78—1-Pin Plug (Engine Oil X288—10-Pin Plug (Engine
B02—Air Filter Indicator H25—Audible Alarm Pressure Indicator Light Wiring Harness
Sender K103—Timer Connection Point) Connection Point)
B03—Fuel Gauge/Pump P13—Basic Informator X80—2-Pin Plug (Oil Filter X290—8-Pin Plug (Basic
Sender X70/1—1-Pin Plug (Air Filter Indicator Light Sender Informator Connection
B04—Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Connection Connection Point) Point)
Indicator Sender Point) X81—1-Pin Plug (Low X291—6-Pin Plug (Basic
B07—Oil Filter Indicator X70/2—1-Pin Plug (Air Filter Temperature Switch Informator Connection
Sender Indicator Connection Connection Point) Point)
B08—Coolant Temperature Point) X83—2-Pin Plug (Operating X292—10-Pin Plug (Basic
Gauge Sender X76—2-Pin Plug (Tachometer Press. Warning Light Informator Connection
B29—Low Temperature Switch Sender Connection Connection Point) Point)
B30—High Temperature Point) X86—3-Pin Plug (Fuel Gauge
Switch X77—1-Pin Plug (Coolant or Fuel Pump Sender
B31—Operating Pressure Ind. Temperature Gauge Connection Point)
Sender Sender Connection X286—6-Pin Plug
F105—Fuse Point) (Transmission Wiring
Harness Connection
Point)

111401
PN=557
LX1025151 –UN–21DEC00
SE15
SE5 SE16a SE16b
SE16c
SE5
SE6 SE16a
LX1025151
111401
PN=558
B01—Tachometer Sender F113—Fuse X78—1-Pin Plug (Engine Oil X288—10-Pin Plug (Engine
B02—Air Filter Indicator H25—Audible Alarm Pressure Indicator Light Wiring Harness
Sender K103—Timer Connection Point) Connection Point)
B03—Fuel Gauge/Pump P13—Basic Informator X80—2-Pin Plug (Oil Filter X290—8-Pin Plug (Basic
Sender X70/1—1-Pin Plug (Air Filter Indicator Light Sender Informator Connection
B04—Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Connection Connection Point) Point)
Indicator Sender Point) X81—1-Pin Plug (Low X291—6-Pin Plug (Basic
B07—Oil Filter Indicator X70/2—1-Pin Plug (Air Filter Temperature Switch Informator Connection
Sender Indicator Connection Connection Point) Point)
B08—Coolant Temperature Point) X83—2-Pin Plug (Operating X292—10-Pin Plug (Basic
Gauge Sender X76—2-Pin Plug (Tachometer Press. Warning Light Informator Connection
B29—Low Temperature Switch Sender Connection Connection Point) Point)
B30—High Temperature Point) X86—3-Pin Plug (Fuel Gauge
Switch X77—1-Pin Plug (Coolant or Fuel Pump Sender
B31—Operating Pressure Ind. Temperature Gauge Connection Point)
Sender Sender Connection X286—6-Pin Plug
F105—Fuse Point) (Transmission Wiring
Harness Connection
Point)
240
15A
SE2-Diagnostic Schematic 11
AG,OUOE003,9322 –19–12JUN99–4/4

111401
PN=559
240
15A
12

111401
PN=560
SE3-Horn, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General
The horn is mounted behind the front grille. The horn

button is on the right of the dash unit.
POSSIBLE HORN CIRCUIT PROBLEMS
Horn does not sound Fuse F118 failed

Faulty horn button
Faulty horn
Horn sounds continuously Faulty horn button 240

Power leads shorted 15A
13
Horn is weak Faulty horn
Power leads damaged or corroded
Loose or corroded horn connections
SE3-Horn, Operation
Current flows from the battery (G01) + pin via fuse

(F01) SE1 to fuse (F118) and the horn button. Pushing
the horn button supplies current to the horn (H01).

111401
PN=561
F118—Fuse
H01—Horn
S04—Horn Button
X67—3-Pin Plug (Right Headlight Connection Point)
X68—3-Pin Plug (Left Headlight Connection Point)
X288—10-Pin Plug (Engine Wiring Harness
Connection Point)
240
15A
14
–UN–23APR98
LX1020054

111401
PN=562
240
15A
15
–UN–19FEB98
LX1018346
F118—Fuse X66/2—1-Pin Plug (Horn X68—3-Pin Plug (Left X288—10-Pin Plug (Engine
H01—Horn Connection Point) Headlight Connection Wiring Harness
S04—Horn Button X67—3-Pin Plug (Right Point) Connection Point)
X66/1—1-Pin Plug (Horn Headlight Connection
AG,OUOE003,9326 –19–01MAR00–3/3

111401
PN=563
240
15A
16

111401
PN=564
SE5-Rear PTO, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General • Ground pin (lead 050)

• ON pin-Switch on (lead 536)
Relay (K23) receives and processes input signals from • OFF pin-Switch off (lead 154)
switch (S21), the seat switch (S40) and sender (B42) • OP pin-Seat switch (lead 254)
to control solenoid (Y04). • SI pin-PTO speed monitor (lead 574)
• SG pin-PTO speed monitor (lead 550)
During tractor operation the PTO switch should be
OFF before the PTO can be engaged. Output Signals
When the PTO is engaged during tractor operation, the • SOL pin-Solenoid (lead 575)
PTO will not operate if the indicator light and warning • STAT pin-PTO indicator light (lead 552)
light blink. • AUD.W pin-Alarm (lead 913)
If the operator leaves the seat when the PTO is PTO disengaged:
240
engaged or the operator is not in the seat when the 15A
PTO is engaged, the indicator light and warning light Power flows from pin 87 (ELX) of relay (K101) SE1 via 17
will blink and the alarm will sound for 5 seconds. fuse (F119) SE4 to the POWER pin on relay (K23) and
then via pins A and C on switch (S21) to the OFF pin
Whenever the PTO is engaged, shaft speed is of relay (K23).
monitored using a sender and relay. The relay
automatically stops the shaft if the PTO speed has not PTO engaged:
reached 100 rpm after 20 seconds.
Power flows from pin 87 (ELX) of relay (K101) SE1 via
If the operator leaves the seat within the first fuse (F119) SE4 to the POWER pin on relay (K23) and
15 seconds of the 20-second delay period and the then via pins A and B on switch (S21) to the ON pin of
PTO shaft has not reached 100 rpm, the relay stops relay (K23). Relay (K25) routes power via the SOL pin
the PTO after 5 seconds. to solenoid (Y04) and via the STAT pin to indicator
light SE3. The PTO shaft speed sender (B42) sends
SE5-Rear PTO, Operation pulses to relay (K23).
The rear PTO is controlled by a separate rear PTO The operator leaves the seat with the PTO engaged:
relay (K23).
Current flows to the OP pin on relay (K23) via the seat
Relay (K23) receives or sends the following signals: switch (S40). The relay STAT pin sends current to
indicator light SE3 and ground via pin AUD.W to alarm
Input Signals (H25) SE3, activating it for 5 seconds.
• POWER pin-Battery 12 V (lead 545)

111401
PN=565
240
15A
18
–UN–23APR98
LX1020055
B42—PTO Speed Sender S40—Seat Switch X95—2-Pin Plug (Solenoid Y04—Rear PTO Solenoid
F119—Fuse X58—2-Pin Plug (Operator Connection Point)
K23—Rear PTO Relay Seat Switch) X125—3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO
S21—Rear PTO Switch X94—2-Pin Plug (PTO Speed Switch Connection
Sender Connection Point)
Point)

111401
PN=566
240
15A
19

111401
PN=567
240
15A
20
–UN–21DEC00
LX1025152

111401
PN=568
B42—PTO Speed Sender S40—Seat Switch X95—2-Pin Plug (Solenoid Y04—Rear PTO Solenoid
F119—Fuse X58—2-Pin Plug (Operator Connection Point)
K23—Rear PTO Relay Seat Switch) X125—3-Pin Plug (Rear PTO
S21—Rear PTO Switch X94—2-Pin Plug (PTO Speed Switch Connection
Sender Connection Point)
Point)
AG,OUOE003,9330 –19–01MAR00–4/4
240
15A
21

111401
PN=569
240
15A
22

111401
PN=570
SE6-Lights, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General The low/high beam switch is located on the cowl.
The light switch is located in the instrument housing.

Headlights and worklights can be switched on and off
by means of the light switch.
POSSIBLE MALFUNCTIONS IN LIGHTING SYSTEM CIRCUIT
Malfunction Possible cause
Individual light not working Light defective

Bulb base or lamp socket corroded
Line in circuit interrupted
Several lights not working Fuse blown 240

Line in circuit interrupted or shorted 15A
Relay defective 23
Battery in poor condition
SE6-Lights - Operation and A of switch (S10) to terminal 56b of headlights

(E01) and (E02). At the same time, current flows to tail
Current flows from terminal 30 at positive pole of lights (E13) and (E14) via fuses (F108) and (F109).
battery (G01) via fuse (F111) to terminal B of light
switch (S09). High Beam
Low Beam When high beam is selected, terminals B and C of

high-beam switch (S10) form a connection, and current
When low beam is selected, terminals B and H of light flows to terminal 56a of headlights (E01) and (E02)
switch (S09) form a connection, current flows via and to the high-beam indicator light SE3.
terminals 30 and 87a of relay (K107) via terminals B

111401
PN=571
240
15A
24
–UN–23APR98
LX1020056
E01—Right Headlight S09—Light Switch X66/2—1-Pin Plug (Horn X123/1—3-Pin Plug (Left Tail
E02—Left Headlight S10—High/Low Beam Switch Connection Point) Light Connection
E25/1—Left Tail Light V104—Diode X67—3-Pin Plug (Right Point)
E25/2—Right Tail Light X288—10-Pin Plug (Engine Headlight Connection X123/2—3-Pin Plug (Right Tail
F108—Fuse Wiring Harness Point) Light Connection
F109—Fuse Connection Point) X68—3-Pin Plug (Left Point)
F111—Fuse X289—7-Pin Plug (Engine Headlight Connection
F112—Fuse Wiring Harness Point)
K107—High/Low Beam Light Connection Point)
Relay

111401
PN=572
240
15A
25

111401
PN=573
240
15A
26
–UN–21DEC00
LX1025153

111401
PN=574
E01—Right Headlight S09—Light Switch X66/2—1-Pin Plug (Horn X123/1—3-Pin Plug (Left Tail
E02—Left Headlight S10—High/Low Beam Switch Connection Point) Light Connection
E25/1—Left Tail Light V104—Diode X67—3-Pin Plug (Right Point)
E25/2—Right Tail Light X288—10-Pin Plug (Engine Headlight Connection X123/2—3-Pin Plug (Right Tail
F108—Fuse Wiring Harness Point) Light Connection
F109—Fuse Connection Point) X68—3-Pin Plug (Left Point)
F111—Fuse X289—7-Pin Plug (Engine Headlight Connection
F112—Fuse Wiring Harness Point)
K107—High/Low Beam Light Connection Point)
Relay
AG,OUOE003,9334 –19–01MAR00–4/4
240
15A
27

111401
PN=575
240
15A
28

111401
PN=576
SE7-Work Lights, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General SE7-Work Lights - Operation
The light switch is located in the instrument housing. Light switch (S09) SE6 in position 3:
Headlights and work lights can be switched on and off
by means of the light switch. Current flows from terminal H of light switch to work
lights (E09) and terminal 86 of relay (K102). This relay
All the work lights come on when the light switch is set activates terminals 30 and 87 and supplies current to
to position 4. work lights (E15) and (E24).
240
15A
29

111401
PN=577
240
15A
30
–UN–23APR98
LX1020057
E09—Front Grille-Mounted X69/1—2-Pin Plug (Front Work X112/2—2-Pin Plug (Rear X124/2—2-Pin Plug (Front
Work Light Light Connection Fender-Mounted Work Fender-Mounted Work
E15—ROPS-Mounted Rear Point) Light Connection Light Connection
Work Light X69/2—2-Pin Plug (Front Work Point) Point)
E24—Front Fender-Mounted Light Connection X124/1—2-Pin Plug (Front X288—10-Pin Plug (Engine
Work Light Point) Fender-Mounted Work Wiring Harness
F103—Fuse X139—2-Pin Plug (Work Light Light Connection Connection Point)
K102—Work Light Relay Wiring Harness Point)
X01—10-Pin Plug (Work Light Connection Point)
Connection Point) X112/1—2-Pin Plug (Rear
Fender-Mounted Work
Light Connection
Point)

111401
PN=578
240
15A
31

111401
PN=579
240
15A
32
–UN–21DEC00
LX1025154

111401
PN=580
E09—Front Grille-Mounted X69/1—2-Pin Plug (Front Work X112/2—2-Pin Plug (Rear X124/2—2-Pin Plug (Front
Work Light Light Connection Fender-Mounted Work Fender-Mounted Work
E15—ROPS-Mounted Rear Point) Light Connection Light Connection
Work Light X69/2—2-Pin Plug (Front Work Point) Point)
E24—Front Fender-Mounted Light Connection X124/1—2-Pin Plug (Front X288—10-Pin Plug (Engine
Work Light Point) Fender-Mounted Work Wiring Harness
F103—Fuse X139—2-Pin Plug (Work Light Light Connection Connection Point)
K102—Work Light Relay Wiring Harness Point)
X01—10-Pin Plug (Work Light Connection Point)
Connection Point) X112/1—2-Pin Plug (Rear
Fender-Mounted Work
Light Connection
Point)
240
15A
33
AG,OUOE003,9338 –19–01MAR00–4/4

111401
PN=581
240
15A
34

111401
PN=582
SE8-Front Loader Plug, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General SE8-Front Loader Plug, Operation
If the tractor has a front loader, this plug supplies From pin 87 SE14 of 3-pin plug, current flows via fuse
electrical power to the front loader. The plug is located (F120) to the front loader receptacle (X37).
under the fuse box.
AG,OUOE003,9342 –19–12JUN99–1/3
240
15A
X37—2-Pin Plug (Front Loader Connection Point)
35
–UN–23APR98
LX1020058

111401
PN=583
X37—2-Pin Plug (Front Loader Connection Point)
–UN–19FEB98
LX1018348
240
15A
36
AG,OUOE003,9342 –19–12JUN99–3/3

111401
PN=584
SE14-3-Pin- and 7-Pin Receptacle, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General Current flows from the battery positive terminal (G01)

pin 30 SE1 to pin 86 of relay (K104) via fuse (F120).
3-Pin Receptacle The relay switches pins 30 and 87 to power pin 1 of
3-pin receptacle (X06). At the same time pin 2 of 3-pin
The 3-pin receptacle is to the right of the operator on receptacle (X06) is powered via fuse (F110).
the shift console. It can be used to power accessories
inside and outside the platform. The receptacle is 7-Pin Receptacle
connected directly once and once via a relay to battery
power and protected by fuses F110 and F120. Current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin via
the SE9 fuse (F106) to pin 86 of relay (K106). The
7-Pin Receptacle relay switches pins 30 and 87.
The 7-pin receptacle is at the rear of the tractor over Current flows from the SE1 battery positive terminal
the implements. It is used to power tractor lighting. (G01) via fuse (F102) to pins 30 and 30 of relay
240
(K106) to power pin 87 of 7-pin receptacle (X23). 15A
SE14-3-Pin- and 7-Pin Receptacle, Operation 37
3-Pin Receptacle

111401
PN=585
240
15A
38
–UN–23APR98
LX1020059
F110—Fuse K104—Relay for 3-Pin X17—3-Pin Receptacle X239—3-Pin Plug (3-Pin

F120—Fuse Receptacle Receptacle Wiring
Harness Connection
Point)

111401
PN=586
240
15A
39
–UN–21DEC00
LX1025155
F110—Fuse K104—Relay for 3-Pin X17—3-Pin Receptacle X239—3-Pin Plug (3-Pin

F120—Fuse Receptacle Receptacle Wiring
Harness Connection
Point)

111401
PN=587
AG,OUOE003,9346 –19–01MAR00–4/7
240
15A
40
–UN–23APR98
LX1020060
F102—Fuse K106—Relay for 7-Pin X234—7-Pin Plug (7-Pin X23—7-Pin Receptacle

Receptacle Receptacle Wiring
Harness Connection
Point)

111401
PN=588
240
15A
41
–UN–21DEC00
LX1025156
F102—Fuse K106—Relay for 7-Pin X234—7-Pin Plug (7-Pin X23—7-Pin Receptacle

Receptacle Receptacle Wiring
Harness Connection
Point)

111401
PN=589
AG,OUOE003,9346 –19–01MAR00–7/7
240
15A
42

111401
PN=590
SE15-Electronic Hitch Control, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic (2-Post ROPS)
General (B19 and B20; if equipped), position sensor (B21) and

height potentiometer (B26). These are coordinated in
From pin 87 (ELX) of relay SE1 (K101), current flows the electronic control unit and passed on to the
via fuse (F117) to the electronic control unit and to the stepper motor (M08). The stepper motor opens the
4-pin plug (X29; service plug). raise and lower valve.
The electronic control unit receives electrical impulses

from the position feedback unit (B27), draft sensors
240
15A
43

111401
PN=591
LX1020045 –UN–23APR98
B19—Draft Sensor, Right1 X13—30-Pin Plug (HCU X29—4-Pin Plug (Service Plug X96—3-Pin Plug (Position
B20—Draft Sensor, Left1 Connection Point) Connection Point) Sensor Connection
B21—Position Sensor X14/A—8-Pin Plug (Height X89—3-Pin Plug (Left Draft Point)
B26—Load Depth Potentiometer, Rapid Sensor Connection X287—10-Pin Plug
Potentiometer Raise/Lower Switch Point) (Transmission Wiring
B27—Position Feedback Unit and Position Feedback X90—3-Pin Plug (Right Draft Harness Connection
F115—Fuse Unit Connection Point) Sensor Connection Point)
F117—Fuse X14/B—3-Pin Plug (Position Point)
M08—Stepper Motor Feedback Unit X92—4-Pin Plug (Stepper
S24—Raise/Lower Switch Connection Point) Motor Connection Point)
1
If equipped
111401
PN=592
240
15A
45

111401
PN=593
LX1025157 –UN–21DEC00
B27
S24
B26
DOWN
E CW CW
B E
B
UP
B
873G
873H
838B
A A CW
810
C A DOWN
834B
839B
877B
M08
873
871
PH1-
PH1+
B20 B19
871G
873G
871H
873H
PH2-
B21
873
PH2+
SP SP
CW
DOWN
SE1
838B
877B
834B
839B
876B
871F
873F
875
072AC
856AA
X96 A B C
X89 C B A
X90 C B A
X92 A B C D
873AB
883DC
883DB
F115
F117
878A
885D
871D
884D
859A
858A
855A
854A
X14/B X14/A 871AB
10A
SP 871DB
A B C A B C D E F G H
871DC
856AB
SP
873AD
871AD
873AC
871AE
869A
875A
838A
877A
834A
839A
876A
871DA
886A
SP
871AB
856AC
883A
884D
SP
SP
SP
856AD
050
871AA
X287
873AA
K J H G
871AC
050AC
SE1
878A
885A
883A
884A
859A
858A
855A
854A
873AB
869A
925AA
050AD D
924AA
X13 H2 A2 B3 E1 F2 J3 G2 F1 B1 K1 B2 SP 925AB B
G3 K3 J2 H3 E2 F3 K2 A1 J1 A3 C3
SP 924AB C X29
856AD A
925AC
924AC
A04
SE2
LX1025157
111401
PN=594
B19—Draft Sensor, Right1 X13—30-Pin Plug (HCU X29—4-Pin Plug (Service Plug X96—3-Pin Plug (Position
B20—Draft Sensor, Left1 Connection Point) Connection Point) Sensor Connection
B21—Position Sensor X14/A—8-Pin Plug (Height X89—3-Pin Plug (Left Draft Point)
B26—Load Depth Potentiometer, Rapid Sensor Connection X287—10-Pin Plug
Potentiometer Raise/Lower Switch Point) (Transmission Wiring
B27—Position Feedback Unit and Position Feedback X90—3-Pin Plug (Right Draft Harness Connection
F115—Fuse Unit Connection Point) Sensor Connection Point)
F117—Fuse X14/B—3-Pin Plug (Position Point)
M08—Stepper Motor Feedback Unit X92—4-Pin Plug (Stepper
S24—Raise/Lower Switch Connection Point) Motor Connection Point)
240
15A
47
1
If equipped
AG,OUOE003,9352 –19–01MAY00–4/4

111401
PN=595
240
15A
48

111401
PN=596
SE16A-Hazard Flashers and Turn Signals, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic (up to
Serial No. 249394)
General power (flash pulses) to the fender- and

canopy-mounted lights.
Hazard Flashers
Turn Signal Unit
The hazard flashers are activated using the light
switch. The flasher relay establishes the blink rate. Current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin via
fuse (F106) to pin 2 of switch (S08).
Turn Signal Unit
Right turn signal on:
The turn signal switch is located on the dash unit.
Place the turn signal lever in the L or R position to Turn signal switch (S08) pin R powers the right
activate the turn signals. fender-mounted (H52/2) and canopy-mounted lights
(H53/2). 240
Operation 15A
Current (flash pulses) flows from flasher (K22) pin 4 to 49
Hazard Flashers pin 86 on relays (K112 and K113). The relay powers
pins 30 and 87 and supplies flash pulses to light the
Hazard flashers off: right fender-mounted (H52/2) and canopy-mounted
lights (H53/2).
Current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin via
fuse (F106) and pins 30 and 87a of relay (K111) to pin Left turn signal on:
8 of flasher (K22).
Turn signal switch (S08) pin L powers the left
Hazard flashers on: fender-mounted (H52/1) and canopy-mounted lights
(H53/1).
Light switch (S09) in position 1:
Current (flash pulses) flows from flasher (K22) pin 4 to
Current flows from the battery positive terminal (G01) pin 86 on relay (K113). The relay powers pins 30 and
pin 30 to pin 30 of relays (K112 and K113) via fuses 87 and supplies flash pulses to light the left
(F01) SE1 and (F107). From SE6 light switch (S09) pin fender-mounted (H52/1) and canopy-mounted lights
L, current flows to pin 1 on the flasher. Pin 5 supplies (H53/1).

111401
PN=597
LX1020046 –UN–23APR98
LX1020046
F106—Fuse H53/2—Canopy-Mounted Turn V102—Diode X134—2-Pin Plug (Roof Wiring
F107—Fuse Signals, Rear V103—Diode Harness Connection
H52/1—Fender-Mounted Turn K22—Flasher Unit X123/1—3-Pin Plug (Left Point)
Signal, Left K111—Hazard Flasher Relay Fender-Mounted Turn
H52/2—Fender-Mounted Turn K112—Left Turn Signal Relay Signal Connection
Signal, Right K113—Right Turn Signal Relay Point)
H53/1—Canopy-Mounted Turn S08—Switch for Left and Right X123/2—3-Pin Plug (Right
Signals, Front Turn Signals Fender-Mounted Turn
Signal Connection
Point)
111401
PN=598
240
15A
51

111401
PN=599
LX1025087 –UN–21DEC00
SE1 SE1
012AC
212A
F106
F107
20 A
10A
S08
115AA
107AE
169AC
125AE
SP
169AE
115AB
SP
102AB
115AC
102AA
105
SE2 SE2
86 30 86 30 86 30
125AF
107AF
K111 K112 K113
85 87 87A 85 87 87A 85 87 87A
102AC
105 A
310AK
169AD
310AB
SP 107AB
117AB
138AB
169AB
169AA
125AB
K22 SP 310AA
SE14b 8
XGND4
SE2 SE14a 125AE SP
SP 117AC 4
1 107AE SP
125AC
3 151AA 125AA
117AA
117AD
V102
310AQ
151AB
V103
125AG
107AG
125AD
310AP
310AT
SE6 SP 5
151AC
310AA
SP
SE14b
107AC
XGND4
107AA
125AC
B A 107AD
X134
125 SP 125
SP 310 107 SP SP 310 A C A C
X123/1 X123/2
LH RH
H53/1 H53/2 H52/1 H52/2
LX1025087
111401
PN=600
F106—Fuse H53/2—Canopy-Mounted Turn V102—Diode X134—2-Pin Plug (Roof Wiring

F107—Fuse Signals, Rear V103—Diode Harness Connection
H52/1—Fender-Mounted Turn K22—Flasher Unit X123/1—3-Pin Plug (Left Point)
Signal, Left K111—Hazard Flasher Relay Fender-Mounted Turn
H52/2—Fender-Mounted Turn K112—Left Turn Signal Relay Signal Connection
Signal, Right K113—Right Turn Signal Relay Point)
H53/1—Canopy-Mounted Turn S08—Switch for Left and Right X123/2—3-Pin Plug (Right
Signals, Front Turn Signals Fender-Mounted Turn
Signal Connection
Point)
AG,OUOE003,9355 –19–01MAY00–4/4
240
15A
53

111401
PN=601
240
15A
54

111401
PN=602
SE16A-Hazard Flashers and Turn Signals, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic (from
Serial No. 249395)
General Current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin via
fuse (F106) to pin 2 of switch (S08).
Hazard Flashers
Right turn signal on:
The hazard flashers are activated using the light
switch. The flasher relay establishes the blink rate. When the right turn signal light is switched on, current
flows from terminal L of switch (S08) to terminal 86 of
Turn Signal Unit relays (K108, K112 and K113). The relays switch on
and provide the turn signal lights H52/2 and H53/2 or
The turn signal switch is located on the dash unit. H74/2 with continuous current.
Place the turn signal lever in the L or R position to
activate the turn signals. At the same time, current (intermittent) flows via relays
(K113 and K109) to turn signal lights (H52/2 and 240
Operation H53/2 or H74/2), causing the lights to blink. 15A
55
Hazard Flashers Left turn signal on:
Hazard flashers on: When the left turn signal light is switched on, current
flows via terminal R of switch (S08) to terminal 86 of
Light switch (S09) in position 1: relays (K108, K109 and K113). The relays switch on
and provide the turn signal lights H52/2 and H53/2 or
Current flows via the relay (K111) to the flasher (K22), H74/2 with continuous current.
which supplies flash pulses to the turn signal lights
H52/1 and H53/1 or 74/1 via the relay (K112 and At the same time, current (intermittent) flows via relays
K113). (K112 and K108) to turn signal lights (H52/1 and
H53/1 or H74/1), causing the lights to blink.
Turn Signal Unit

111401
PN=603
LX1025186 –UN–21DEC00
F106—Fuse H74/2—2-Post-Mounted Turn V102—Diode X407/1—2-Pin Plug (Left
F107—Fuse Signal, Right V103—Diode 2-Post-Mounted Turn
H52/1—Fender-Mounted Turn K22—Flasher Unit X123/1—3-Pin Plug (Left Signal Connection
Signal, Left K42—Flasher Relay Fender-Mounted Turn Point)
H52/2—Fender-Mounted Turn K108—Left Turn Signal Relay Signal Connection X407/2—2-Pin Plug (Right
Signal, Right K109—Right Turn Signal Relay Point) 2-Post-Mounted Turn
H53/1—Canopy-Mounted Turn K111—Hazard Flasher Relay X123/2—3-Pin Plug (Right Signal Connection
Signals, Front K112—Left Turn Signal Relay Fender-Mounted Turn Point)
H53/2—Canopy-Mounted Turn K113—Right Turn Signal Relay Signal Connection
Signals, Rear S08—Switch for Left and Right Point)
H74/1—2-Post-Mounted Turn Turn Signals X134—2-Pin Plug (Roof Wiring
Signal, Left Harness Connection
Point)
111401
PN=604
LX1025148 –UN–21DEC00
LX1025148

Point)
SE16A-Functional Schematic-Cont

111401
PN=605
LX1025086 –UN–21DEC00
SE1 SE1
012AC
212A
F106
F107
20A
10A
115AA
169AC
169AD
SP
169AE
169AD 151AB
151AC SP 151AA
169AB
169AA
2
49
105A
S08 L R
K22 3 1
169AD
151AD
151AE
SP
108AB
8
V102 V103
115AB
SE14a
126AC
117AB 117AC 1 4 102A 108AC
SP SP SE14b
126AA 126AB
86 30 2 86 30 SP 151AE
151AD
115AC
K111 K42 125AD 125AC 108AA

310AQ
86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30
85 87 87_A 5 85 87 87_A
K112 K108 K109
138AA
K113
310AW
107AB
115AD
117AD
107AA
123AC
310AC
SP 85 87 87_A 85 87 87_A 85 87 87_A 85 87 87_A

SP
115AC
138AB
115AD
138A
310BK
125AB
125AE
310BJ
106A
SP 123AA
310AC
310AW 123AB
107AF 107AE
310AK 310AK
310AC
SE2 SE14b SP
136A
310BJ
SP
310AL
SE2 SE14b
310BH 310BK
136A 107AC
125AF 125AA
106A
310BL 310BM
SE6 XGND1
B A
301BM
X134
310BL
107AD
310AT
310AT
SE2
SE6 310AP 125 SP 125
107 SP
A C A C SP 310 SP 310 A C A C
X123/1 X407/1 X407/2 X123/2
XGND4
310AP
LH LH RH RH
H52/1 H74/1 H53/1 H53/2 310AP
H74/2 H52/2
LX1025086
111401
PN=606

Point)
240
15A
59
AG,LX23006,259 –19–01MAY00–5/5

111401
PN=607
240
15A
60

111401
PN=608
SE16B-Front Wheel Drive, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General From pin 87 (ELX) of SE01 relay (K101), current flows

via SE5 fuse (F104) and pins A and B of switch (S05)
The front wheel drive switch is to the right of the to solenoid (Y03).
operator on the shift console.
Front wheel drive engaged:
When the front wheel drive is disengaged the switch
interrupts the flow of current to the solenoid and routes From pin 87 (ELX) of SE01 relay (K101), current flows
power to the indicator light. via SE5 fuse (F104) and pins B and C of switch (S05)
to the indicator light. Solenoid (Y03) is unpowered.
SE16B-Front Wheel Drive, Operation
Front wheel drive disengaged:
240
15A
61
AG,OUOE003,9359 –19–01MAY00–1/3
S05—Front Wheel Drive Switch

X75—6-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Connection Point)
X91—2-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Drive Solenoid
Connection Point)
X287—40-Pin Plug (Transmission Connection Point)
Y03—Front Wheel Drive Solenoid
–UN–23APR98
LX1020061

111401
PN=609
240
15A
62
–UN–21DEC00
LX1025158
S05—Front Wheel Drive X91—2-Pin Plug (Front Wheel X287—40-Pin Plug Y03—Front Wheel Drive
Switch Drive Solenoid (Transmission Solenoid
X75—6-Pin Plug (Front Wheel Connection Point) Connection Point)
Drive Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9359 –19–01MAY00–3/3

111401
PN=610
SE16C-Differential Lock, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General From pin 87 (ELX) of relay SE1 (K101), current flows

via fuse (F104) and the two brake switches (B18) to
The differential lock is located under the dash unit on switch (S22) and to pin 87 of relay (K110). Pushing
the platform and is pedal operated. switch (S22) powers pin 86 on the relay. The relay
switches pins 30 and 87 to power solenoid (Y05) and
When the differential lock is engaged, the solenoid and indicator light SE3. The differential lock is engaged.
indicator light receive power via the two brake
switches. Differential lock engaged; brakes applied:
If one or both brake switches are actuated the If one or both brake switches (B18) are activated,
differential lock automatically disengages. current flow to pin 87 of relay (K110) is interrupted.
The relay drops out to depower solenoid (Y05) and the
SE16C-Differential Lock, Operation indicator light and the differential lock is disengaged.
240
Differential lock engaged: 15A
63

111401
PN=611
240
15A
64
–UN–23APR98
LX1020062
B18/1—Left Brake Switch X87—2-Pin Plug (Differential X287—10-Pin Plug Y05—Differential Lock
B18/2—Right Brake Switch Lock Solenoid (Transmission Wiring Solenoid
F104—Fuse Connection Point) Harness Connection
K110—Differential Lock Relay X122—2-Pin Plug (Differential Point)
S22—Differential Lock Switch Lock Switch
Connection Point)

111401
PN=612
240
15A
65

111401
PN=613
240
15A
66
–UN–21DEC00
LX1025159

111401
PN=614
B18/1—Left Brake Switch X87—2-Pin Plug (Differential X287—10-Pin Plug Y05—Differential Lock
B18/2—Right Brake Switch Lock Solenoid (Transmission Wiring Solenoid
F104—Fuse Connection Point) Harness Connection
K110—Differential Lock Relay X122—2-Pin Plug (Differential Point)
S22—Differential Lock Switch Lock Switch
Connection Point)
AG,OUOE003,9363 –19–01MAY00–4/4
240
15A
67

111401
PN=615
240
15A
68

111401
PN=616
SE25-Back-Up Alarm, Functional and Diagnostic Schematic
General When switch (S42) is tripped, indicator light (H48)

receives current and lights up. If reverse is selected,
The back-up alarm switch is located on the switch current also flows via switch (B47) or (B49) to the horn
console to the right of the operator. (H67). A warning signal is emitted.
When tractors with SyncroPlus transmission are put NOTE: On tractors with PowrQuad transmission, the
into reverse, the horn receives electrical current from signal is emitted only if the clutch pedal is
the switch located on the gear shift lever. NOT depressed.
When tractors with PowrQuad transmission are put

into reverse and the clutch pedal is NOT depressed,
the horn receives electrical current from switch
installed on the transmission.
240
SE25-Back-Up Alarm - Theory of Operation 15A
69
Current flows from terminal 87 (ELX) SE1 of relay
(K101) via fuse (F119) SE8 to terminal B of switch
(S42).
SyncroPlus is a trademark of Deere & Company.

PowrQuad is a trademark of Deere & Company. Continued on next page AG,OUOE003,9367 –19–01MAY00–1/4

111401
PN=617
240
15A
70
–UN–30APR98
LX1020063
B47—Backup Alarm Switch1 X58/2—2-Pin Plug (Operator’s X185—2-Pin Plug (Backup X186/3—1-Pin Plug (Backup
B49—Backup Alarm Switch2 Seat Switch Alarm Horn Connection Alarm Main Switch
H48—Backup Alarm Indicator Connection Point) Point) Connection Point)
Light X178/1—2-Pin Plug (Backup X186/1—1-Pin Plug (Backup X187—2-Pin Plug (Backup
H67—Backup Alarm Horn Alarm Switch Alarm Main Switch Alarm Main Switch
K28—Backup Alarm Relay Connection Point)1 Connection Point) Connection Point)2
S42—Main Switch for Backup X178/2—2-Pin Plug (Backup X186/2—1-Pin Plug (Backup X280—9-Pin Plug (Backup
Alarm Alarm Switch Alarm Main Switch Alarm Relay
X58—2-Pin Plug (Operator’s Connection Point)2 Connection Point) Connection Point)
Seat Switch Connection
Point)
1
2

111401
PN=618
240
15A
71

111401
PN=619
240
15A
72
–UN–21DEC00
LX1025185

111401
PN=620
B47—Backup Alarm Switch1 X58/2—2-Pin Plug (Operator’s X185—2-Pin Plug (Backup X186/3—1-Pin Plug (Backup
B49—Backup Alarm Switch2 Seat Switch Alarm Horn Connection Alarm Main Switch
H48—Backup Alarm Indicator Connection Point) Point) Connection Point)
Light X178/1—2-Pin Plug (Backup X186/1—1-Pin Plug (Backup X187—2-Pin Plug (Backup
H67—Backup Alarm Horn Alarm Switch Alarm Main Switch Alarm Main Switch
K28—Backup Alarm Relay Connection Point)1 Connection Point) Connection Point)2
S42—Main Switch for Backup X178/2—2-Pin Plug (Backup X186/2—1-Pin Plug (Backup X280—9-Pin Plug (Backup
Alarm Alarm Switch Alarm Main Switch Alarm Relay
X58—2-Pin Plug (Operator’s Connection Point)2 Connection Point) Connection Point)
Seat Switch Connection
Point)
1
SyncroPlus transmission 240
15A
2
PowrQuad transmission 73
AG,OUOE003,9367 –19–01MAY00–4/4

111401
PN=621
240
15A
74

111401
PN=622
Group 16A
Data-BUS-Systems –– Theory of Operation
Data BUS Systems
Depending on tractor equipment, up to eight electronic

control units and four stepper motor drivers are available.
These are:
• ECU — Engine Control Unit. See “Testing, Calibrating

and Adjusting the Engine Control Unit (ECU)”, Section
230, Group 15.
• BIF — Basic Informator. See “General Information

Concerning the Basic Informator (BIF)”, Section 240,
Group 20.
• BCU — Basic Control Unit. See “General Information on

Basic Control Unit (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20.
240
16A
• HCU — Hitch Control Unit. See “Testing, Calibrating and 1
Adjusting the Hitch Control Unit (HCU)”, Section 270,
Group 15.
• PRF — Performance Monitor. See “General Information

about the Performance Monitor (PRF)”, Section 240,
Group 20.
• RCU — Reverser Control Unit. See “Diagnostic

Program”, Section 255, Group 10A.
• SFA — Control unit for "Suspended Front Axle". See

“Testing, Calibrating and Adjustments”, Section 280,
Group 10.
• PEC — Control unit for AutoQuad II transmission, see

“Aufbau der Diagnose”, Section 255, Group 10B.
• PEC — Control unit for electrically actuated independent

control valves (E-ICV), see “Checking and Adjusting the
Electrically Actuated Independent Control Valves”, Section
270, Group 15.
• SMD — Stepper Motor Driver, see “Checking the

Stepper Motor and Stepper Motor Driver”, Section 270,
Group 15.
Each of these electronic control units performs one or

more of the following functions:
Continued on next page LX24887,0000866 –19–20SEP00–1/2

111401
PN=623
— MONITORING the status of electrical components

(switches, sensors, potentiometers etc.)
— CONTROL of electrical circuits
— DISPLAY of circuit/system data.
The electronic control units are linked to each other, using

different data BUS systems (CCD-BUS1 and CAN-BUS2).
The main difference between the individual data BUS
systems is the data transfer speed and efficiency.
The data BUS systems form a communication network for
data-sharing.
The connecting lines within a data BUS system are called
communication lines. These are twisted together for
shielding purposes.
240
16A In the CAN-BUS system, live and ground wires provide
2 additional protection. These are also twisted together.
1
CCD (CHRYSLER COLLISION DETECTION) is a method of handling
multiple bits of information being broadcast on the same communication
line.
2
CAN (CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) is a method of handling
multiple bits of information being broadcast on the same communication
line.
LX24887,0000866 –19–20SEP00–2/2

111401
PN=624
CCD BUS System
Basically, the electronic control units consist of two communication lines to the electronic control unit.
elements. However, the control unit only processes the data that
— the electronic control unit, and it actually requires.
— the interface controller.
The electronic control units share their monitoring,
The electronic control unit is fully occupied with operational and display data with each other by
performing its tasks. continually “broadcasting” it on the CCD line.
The interface controller manages the vast amount of In CCD BUS systems, addresses are allocated
data that is broadcast via the CCD communication according to the importance of the data.
lines. It transmits all the data on the CCD
240
16A
3
Continued on next page AG,LX25599,253 –19–01MAR00–1/4

111401
PN=625
–UN–12APR99
240
16A
LX1022707
4
In order to transmit data on the CCD BUS system, a allocated a code number to accord with the data; this
data frame (1) is required. number is recognized by the receivers (electronic
control units) that actually require data characterized
The data frame consists of four fields that follow on by this number.
one from the other. The priority field determines the priority with which the
data is transmitted. Each electronic control unit can
2 — Start signal transmit its data, provided the CCD communication
Indicates the start of the data frame and synchronizes lines are free. If several want to transmit at the same
all the electronic control units. time, the data sent first are the ones with the highest
priority. The other electronic control units then go
3 — Priority field automatically to the "receive" mode and do not send
Consists of the priority bit and the code number. their data until the CCD communication lines are free.
The priority bit indicates the priority accorded to the
data. All the electronic control units send and receive data
During transmission of this field, the sender checks while the key switch is on, so the CCD communication
that it has the right to transmit, or if priority should be lines are continually carrying “broadcast” data.
given to another electronic control unit. Some is “broadcast” more frequently than others,
The code number is allocated to the data frames in depending on what data it is.
accordance with a fixed list; it indicates the data type. The CCD communication lines are twisted together in
pairs to reduce electro-magnetic interference.
4 — Data field The lines involved in the CCD BUS system are:
Contains the actual data. 924 CCD-
925 CCD+
5 — End of frame The CCD communication lines are supplied with
Indicates the end of the frame. current via the basic informator (BIF).
The sender (electronic control unit) initiates a data

transfer by sending a data frame. The data frame is

111401
PN=626
Terminating resistors are located at the beginning and resistors are required to reduce faults in the
end of the CCD communication lines. The terminating communication lines.
AG,LX25599,253 –19–01MAR00–3/4
One of the terminating resistors is located in the basic

informator (BIF).
The other terminating resistor (R04) is located approx.
250 mm (10 in.) away from the performance monitor plug
(X135).
–UN–16APR99
240
LX1022664
16A
5
AG,LX25599,253 –19–01MAR00–4/4

111401
PN=627
CAN Bus System
Basically, the electronic control units consist of two communication lines. The data it passes on to the
elements: electronic control unit is only the data that the control
— the electronic control unit and unit actually requires.
— the interface controller.
The electronic control units share their monitoring,
The electronic control unit is fully occupied with operational and display data with each other by
performing its tasks. continually "broadcasting" it on the CAN line.
The interface controller manages the vast amount of In CAN BUS systems, addresses are allocated
data that is broadcast and recalled via the CAN according to the importance of the data.
240
16A
6

111401
PN=628
–UN–12APR99
240
16A
LX1022665
7
In order to transmit data on the CAN BUS system, a transmission, this field contains a CRC code name;
data frame (1) is required. The data frame consists of this code name must be known by every electronic
seven fields that follow on one from the other. control unit.
2 — Start signal 7 — Ack field

Indicates the start of the data frame and synchronizes Contains the acceptance signals from data that have
all the electronic control units. been received without error by the various electronic
control units.
3 —Arbitration field
Consists of identifier and control bit. 8 —End of frame
The identifier indicates the priority accorded to the Indicates the end of the frame.
data.
During transmission of this field, the sender checks The sender (electronic control unit) initiates a data
that it has the right to transmit, or if priority should be transfer by sending a data frame. However, the
given to another electronic control unit. receiver (electronic control unit) can also request data
The control bit indicates whether the data is a question from the sender. To do this, the receiver issues a
or an answer. request. Question (request) and answer both have the
same identifier. The only difference lies in the control
4 — Control field bit.
Contains information on the size of the data in the data An acceptance check is carried out within the
field. electronic control units. This means that only data with
an identifier stored in a list is actually accepted by the
5 — Data field control units.
Contains the actual data. The code numbers that are otherwise required for data
transmission are thus eliminated.
6 — Cyclic redundancy check (CRC) field
To recognize any errors that may occur in

111401
PN=629
twisted together to reduce electro-magnetic

The identifier determines the priority with which the interference.
data is transmitted. Each electronic control unit can The lines involved in the 29-bit CAN BUS system are:
transmit its data, provided the CAN communication 940 screen GND
lines are free. If several want to transmit at the same 932 screen+
time, the data sent first are the ones with the highest 934 CAN-
priority. The other electronic control units then go 935 CAN+
automatically to the "receive" mode and do not send The lines involved in the 11-bit CAN BUS system are:
their data until the CAN communication lines are free. 940 screen GND
If a malfunction is registered, the electronic control unit 942 screen+
interrupts the current transmission. The electronic 944 CAN-
control units are capable of telling the difference 945 CAN+
between malfunctions that only occur occasionally and Terminating resistors are located at the beginning and
malfunctions that persist. This is achieved by making a end of the CAN communication lines. The terminating
statistical assessment of the error situation. resistors are required to reduce faults in the
All the electronic control units send and receive data communication lines. There are two types of
240
16A while the key switch is on, so the CAN communication terminating resistor, namely 6-terminal and 4-terminal
8 lines are continually carrying "broadcast" data. Some is types. The two types have the same layout and serve
“broadcast” more frequently than others, depending on the same function. The 6-terminal type also provides
what data it is. the CAN BUS system with voltage.
The CAN communication lines are further protected by
a live wire and and a ground wire. These lines are

111401
PN=630
In the 29-bit CAN BUS system, the 6-terminal terminating

resistor (A14) (A) is located behind the operator’s seat, on
the right-hand side underneath the metal panel.
NOTE: The 29-bit CAN BUS terminating resistor (A) is

located on wiring bundle (C). CAN BUS service
plug (D) branches off this wiring bundle.
The 4-terminal terminating resistor (A15) (B) is located in

the instrument panel to the left-hand side of the steering
column.
For removal of the terminating resistors, see “Replacing
the Terminating Resistors”, Section 90, Group 05.
–UN–16APR99
A—29-bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor (6-terminal)
B—29-bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor (4-terminal) 240
C—Wiring harness 16A
D—CAN BUS service plug X303
LX1022666
9
–UN–25MAR99
LX1022667

111401
PN=631
In the 11-bit CAN BUS system, the 6-terminal terminating

resistor (A17) (A) is located behind the operator’s seat, on
the right-hand side underneath the metal panel.
NOTE: The 11-bit CAN BUS terminating resistor (A) is

located on wiring bundle (C). This is the wiring
bundle that does not branch into two parts.
The 4-terminal terminating resistor (A18) (B) is located on

the right-hand side of the main frame underneath the
panel for the stepper motor drivers.
For removal of the terminating resistors, see “Replacing
the Terminating Resistors”, Section 90, Group 05.
–UN–16APR99
A—11-bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor (6-terminal)
240 B—11-bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor (4-terminal)
16A C—Wiring harness
D—CAN BUS service plug X303
LX1022668
10
–UN–14APR99
LX1022669
AG,LX25599,254 –19–01MAR00–5/5

111401
PN=632
240
16A
11

111401
PN=633
CCD BUS Diagnostic Schematic
LX1022619 –UN–14APR99
SE6 SE1 SE1 SE1 SE1 SE1 SE1
158
072
072
012
072
072
012
F216
F202
F118
F216
F115
F117
F111
15A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
20A
886 856 672
971 886
P12 A03 A04 A07 A08
672
138
886
971
971
571
886
856
672
912
(PRF) (BCU) (HCU) (RCU) (SFA)
10 6 7 5 9 4 5 27 22 45 35 A2 H2 A3 C3 B2 D1 C3 B2 B1 A2 E2 E1 D1 C1 B2
X135 X133 X13 X198 X211
886 886 886
050
924
925
050
924
925
050
924
925
050
924
925
925
924
050
971
050 050
932
930
050
924
924
856
925
924
050
935
050
912
925
924
971
A B C D 934
X29
R04
X25 X26
7 5 3 14 10 13 18 15 16
P11
(BIF)
LX1022619
AG,LX25599,255 –19–01MAR00–1/1
111401
PN=634
CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic

LX1022620 –UN–23JUN99
SE1 SE1 SE21 (K203) SE21 (K203)
022
072
349
349
10A
10A
30A
10A
A18
F205
F201
F203
F204
562
B G F C
X258
A17 A09 A16 A10 A11 A12 A13
562
562
562
562
622
255
255
255
260
(PEC) (ECU) (E-ICV) (E-ICV) (E-ICV) (PPST)
940
944
945
942
E C F G B D 1 43 28 44 21 42 19 41 18 23 1 24 30 29 E3 D3 E2 D2 D1 C1 E3 D3 E2 D2 D1 C1 E3 D3 E2 D2 D1 C1 E3 D3 E2 D2 D1 C1
X226 X221 X218 X253 X254 X255 X256
944
944
944
944
050
932
930
935
934
945
944
942
940
050
935
934
945
942
945
942
945
942
945
942
940
310
940
310
940
310
940
310
562
050
940
942
944
945
945
944
942
940
050 050
932 310
930
935
310
934
932
930
935
934
932
930
935
934
562
935
934
562
050
050
4 2 3 1
X227 E F C B G D F C B G X270 X303
D B C A
A14 A15
LX1022620
AG,LX25599,256 –19–01MAR00–1/1

111401
PN=635
DATA BUS Systems
240
16A
14
–UN–15OCT01
LX1025163

111401
PN=636
Data BUS Plug Layout
240
16A
15

111401
PN=637
Part Designation Connector Terminal Wire No. Operation

No.
A03 BCU — Basic Control Unit X133 22 924AK CCD-
X133 45 925AK CCD+
A04 HCU — control unit for hitch X13 B2 925AM CCD+

X13 C3 924AM CCD-
A07 RCU — control unit for electrical reverser X198 B1 925EB CCD+
X198 B2 924EB CCD-
A08 SFA — control unit for FWD axle with Triple X211 B2 925ED CCD+
Link Suspension X211 C1 924ED CCD-
A09 PEC — control unit for AutoQuad II X221 18 940EB CAN screen GND (11-bit)
transmission (PPST) and X221 19 944EB CAN- (11-bit)
electrically controlled independent control valves X221 20 930EC CAN screen GND (29-bit)
(E-ICV) X221 21 934EC CAN- (29-bit)
X221 41 942EB CAN screen+ (11-bit)
240 X221 42 945EB CAN+ (11-bit)
16A X221 43 932EC CAN screen+ (29-bit)
16 X221 44 935EB CAN+ (29-bit)
A10 SMD — stepper motor driver for E-ICV1 X253 D2 940MD CAN screen GND (11-bit)
X253 D3 944MD CAN- (11-bit)
X253 E2 942MD CAN screen+ (11-bit)
X253 E3 945MD CAN+ (11-bit)
A11 SMD — stepper motor driver for E-ICV2 X254 D2 940MF CAN screen GND (11-bit)
X254 D3 944MF CAN- (11-bit)
X254 E2 942MF CAN screen+ (11-bit)
X254 E3 945MF CAN+ (11-bit)
A12 SMD — stepper motor driver for E-ICV3 X255 D2 940Mb CAN screen GND (11-bit)
X255 D3 944MB CAN- (11-bit)
X255 E2 942MB CAN screen+ (11-bit)
X255 E3 945MB CAN+ (11-bit)
A13 SMD — stepper motor driver for AutoQuad II X256 D2 940MJ CAN screen GND (11-bit)
transmission (PPST) X256 D3 944MJ CAN- (11-bit)
X256 E2 942MJ CAN screen+ (11-bit)
X256 E3 945MJ CAN+ (11-bit)
A14 29-bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor (6-pin) X227 B 935EG CAN+ (29-bit)
X227 C 930EB CAN screen GND (29-bit)
X227 D 562ED Voltage supply F205
X227 e 050ED Voltage supply GND
X227 F 932EB CAN screen+ (29-bit)
X227 G 934EG CAN- (29-bit)
A15 29-bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor (4-pin) X270 B 935AH CAN+ (29-bit)
X270 C 930AF CAN screen GND (29-bit)
X270 F 932AF CAN screen+ (29-bit)
X270 G 934AH CAN- (29-bit)
A16 ECU — control unit for engine X218 29 934ED CAN- (29-bit)
X218 30 935ED CAN+ (29-bit)

111401
PN=638
Part Designation Connector Terminal Wire No. Operation

No.
A17 11-bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor (6-pin) X226 B 945EC CAN+ (11-bit)
X226 C 940EC CAN screen GND (11-bit)
X226 D 562EC Voltage supply F205
X226 E 050EC Voltage supply GND
X226 F 942EC CAN screen+ (11-bit)
X226 G 944EC CAN- (11-bit)
A18 11-bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor (4-pin) X258 B 945MH CAN+ (11-bit)
X258 C 940MH CAN screen GND (11-bit)
X258 F 942MH CAN screen+ (11-bit)
X258 G 944MH CAN- (11-bit)
P11 BIF — Basic Informator X25 5 925AG CCD+

X25 7 924AG CCD-
X26 13 932AE CAN screen+ (29-bit)
X26 15 935AG CAN- (29-bit)
X26 16 934AG CAN+ (29-bit) 240
X26 18 930AE CAN screen GND (29-bit) 16A
17
P12 PRF — performance monitor X135 4 925AP CCD+
X135 9 924AP CCD-
R04 CCD-BUS terminating resistor R04 A 924AO CCD-

R04 B 925AO CCD+
X222 78-pin plug, control unit harness connection X222 B6 925AH CCD+
point (W4 — W34) X222 B7 924AH CCD-
X222 C1 944AD CAN- (11-bit)
X222 C2 945AD CAN+ (11-bit)
X222 C6 924AG CCD-
X222 C7 925AG CCD+
X222 D1 942AD CAN screen+ (11-bit)
X222 D2 940AD CAN screen GND (11-bit)
X222 K1 934AF CAN+ (29-bit)
X222 K2 935AF CAN- (29-bit)
X222 L1 932AD CAN screen+ (29-bit)
X222 L2 930AD CAN screen GND (29-bit)
X232 7-pin plug, connection point for stepper motor X232 A 944AD CAN- (11-bit)
driver harness (W4 — W35) X232 B 945AD CAN+ (11-bit)
X232 C 942AD CAN screen+ (11-bit)
X232 D 940AD CAN screen GND (11-bit)
X425F 2-pin plug, connection point at connecting X425F A 925AA CCD-

plug for CCD BUS (W4 — W4) X425F B 924AA CCD+
X425M 2-pin plug, connection point at connecting X425M A 925AC CCD-

plug for CCD BUS (W4 — W4) X425M B 924AC CCD+
AG,LX25599,319 –19–01MAY00–4/4

111401
PN=639
240
16A
18

111401
PN=640
Group 16B
Data-BUS-Systems –– Diagnostics
Explanation of Data Bus System Tests
The applicable test should be performed mainly if a

performing tests on electronic components.
In all cases, follow the test sequence carefully and use
the applicable test data.
individual electrical system components.
AG,LX25599,250 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Safety Measures
240
IMPORTANT: Do not use test lamp on any control 16B
CAUTION: Always shut off the engine before 1
unit. Only use a multimeter
(JT05791A).
CAUTION: Always engage the parking lock IMPORTANT: To protect electronic circuits,
when performing tests with the engine disconnect the battery and alternator
running. before performing any welding on
the tractor.
the engine running, there is a risk of injury
from rotating parts.
AG,LX25599,251 –19–01MAR00–1/1

111401
PN=641
Essential Tools

U.S. SERVICEGARD Catalog or from the
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company AG,LX25599,260 –19–01MAR00–1/2
Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05791A
240
16B Checking electrical circuits and components
2
–UN–09JUN99
JT05791A
AG,LX25599,260 –19–01MAR00–2/2

111401
PN=642
Malfunctions in the Data BUS System
AG,LX25599,320 –19–01MAY00–1/1
Malfunctions
– – –1/1
Possible symptoms of IMPORTANT: Static electricity can cause the data BUS system to be inoperative. OK: If any of these
malfunctions DO NOT use compressed air to blow dirt or dust from any electronic control unit symptoms occur, the first
240
UNLESS all units have been grounded to the tractor frame. Also ground the thing to do is call up the
16B
control units before cleaning them with a brush. service codes at ALL of
3
the electronic control
One or more of the following symptoms can be observed when there is a problem with units. See “Calling up and
the data BUS systems. Deleting Service Codes”,
This list of symptoms is NOT arranged to show which symptom should be repaired
first. NOT OK: If service codes
cannot be called up, GO
Review the following list of symptoms, and then proceed with the checks. TO: Inspect the data BUS
systems, see below:
1. Hour meter display is all dashes.
• “Control Unit Not
2. Digital display (ground speed, PTO speed) not operative. Displayed”, Section 212,
Group 40.
3. The digital display does not go into "Diagnostic" mode.
• “CCD - Test for tractors
4. The "Recall Control Units" function cannot be performed. with 2-post ROPS”,
Section 240, Group 16B.
5. In the "Recall Control Units" function, one or more of the electronic control units fails
to appear on the display. • “CCD - Test for cab
tractors without RCU
6. The digital display fails to show all the functions. and/or SFA”, Section 240,
Group 16B.
7. Certain sub-assemblies on the tractor fail to operate.
• “CCD - Test for cab
8. A fault has occurred, but there are no error codes stored in the memory. tractors equipped with
RCU and/or SFA”,
This list of possible symptoms is not complete. There may be other symptoms, Section 240, Group 16B.
depending on the circuit malfunction.
• “11-BIT CAN BUS
Test”, Section 240, Group
16B.
• “29-BIT CAN BUS

Test”, Section 240, Group
16B.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=643
CCD - Test for 2-Post ROPS tractors
CCD BUS system: The CCD-BUS data • CCD Communication Lines:

(communication) system consists of two wires and one – Lead 924 (CCD-)
Terminating Resistor (located in the instrument unit). – Lead 925 (CCD+)
The communication wires are twisted together for
shielding purposes:
240
16B
4

111401
PN=644
240
16B
5
–UN–08DEC00
LX1024103B
W4—Platform Harness 925—CCD+ X29—4-Pin Service Plug X290—8-Pin Plug for
HCU—Hitch Control Unit X13—30-Pin Plug for Hitch (located at Load Center) Instrument Unit (Power
924—CCD- Control Unit (HCU) Supply for CCD-BUS)
Overview - CCD Voltage Circuit Check
CCD Circuit Check at connector X29

Voltage Check
Circuit Pin Voltage Fuse
circuit 856 to circuit 050 Pin A to Pin D 12 Volt Fuse 115
circuit 924 to circuit 050 Pin C to Pin D 2.0-3.0 Volt Fuse 113
Normal voltage: 2.5 V (Instrument Unit)
circuit 925 to circuit 050 Pin B to Pin D 2.0-3.0 Volt Fuse 113
Normal voltage: 2.5 V (Instrument Unit)
Resistance Check
Circuit Pin Resistance
945 to 925 Pin C to Pin B 120 OHM
AG,LX12234,371 –19–01MAY00–2/2

111401
PN=645
Test Procedure
– – –1/1
1 Check CCD BUS – IMPORTANT: Connect multimeter with IGNITION––OFF. OK: GO TO 2.

Supply Voltage circuit
at Service Connector NOTE: Use only a multimeter with high internal resistance for this measurement NOT OK: CCD-BUS is
X29 (JT05791A). supplied by instrument
unit, check fuse F113.
IMPORTANT: Carry out voltage measurement with IGNITION–– ON
IF OK: GO TO 2.
Check supply voltage at 4-Pin Service Connector X29.
Measure with multimeter:
240 CCD BUS - Supply Voltage at X29—Specification

16B between Pin C (lead 924)
6 and Pin D (lead 050):—
Voltage ........................................... 2.0 - 3.0 Volt (Normal
range of operation: 2.5
volt)
between Pin B (lead 925)
and Pin D (lead 050):—
LX1022670 –UN–01APR99 range of operation: 2.5
volt)
IMPORTANT: The voltage reading between lead 924

to 050 and 925 to 050 should be an constant
reading: Normal Voltage 2.5 V ±0.15V (CCD circuit is
workable between 2.0 - 3.0 V).
NOTE: A fluctuating reading between 1.0 V and 3.5 V

indicates a problem with the instrument unit (power
supply for CCD-circuit) or an CCD-harness problem,
check the CCD-resistance and the harness.
For connector location see Platform wiring harness W4

(Section 240, Group 10A); for Circuit Diagram see HCU
Wiring Diagrams - SE15 (Section 240, Group 15A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=646
2 Check CCD-BUS IMPORTANT: Ignition has to be “OFF” for this measurement. OK: Resistance OK––but
resistance at Service supply voltage was not
Connector X29 Measure resistance at 4-Pin Service Connector X29 with within specification, check
multimeter: harness GO TO 4.
CCD BUS - Resistance at X29—Specification NOT OK: Check

between Pin C (lead 924) resistance in instrument
and Pin B (lead 925):— unit, GO TO 3.
Resistance ............................................. 120 OHM (±1 %)
For connector location see Platform wiring harness W4

(Section 240, Group 10A); for Circuit Diagram see HCU
Wiring Diagrams - SE15 (Section 240, Group 15A).
LX1022670 –UN–01APR99
240
16B
7
– – –1/1
3 Check CCD BUS Disconnect instrument unit connector X290 at wiring harness W4. OK: Check harness, GO
resistance at TO 4.
instrument unit IMPORTANT: Ignition has to be “OFF” for this measurement.
NOT OK: Replace
Measure resistance between Pin B (lead 924) and Pin C (lead 925) at instrument unit instrument unit and
with multimeter: repeat this test.
2-Post ROPS –– CCD-Resistance in Instrument Unit—Specification

Integrated CCD BUS resistor:—
Resistance .............................................................................................. 120 OHM (±1 %)
For connector location see Platform wiring harness W4 (Section 240, Group 10A); for
Circuit Diagram see Instrument Unit Wiring Diagrams - SE2 (Section 240, Group 15A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=647
4 Check CCD-BUS lead Check lead 924 and 925: OK: No problem at
924 and 925 and harness––but no supply
Electronic Ground • for continuity. voltage (2.5 V) at CCD
lead 050 • for a short to the ground. BUS, replace instrument
• for a short to another conductor. unit (Power Supply for
CCD BUS) and repeat
Check lead 050: this test.
• for continuity. OK: Check all relevant

connectors of the CCD
Wiring Connections: BUS circuit for bad,
loose, widened or
Circuit 924; 925 and 050 corroded contacts.
Circuit from to to
NOT OK: Repair as
924 X290-Pin B X13-Pin C3 X29-Pin C needed and repeat this
(Instrument Unit) (HCU) (Service test.
Connector)
925 X290-Pin C X13-Pin B2 X29-Pin B
240
(Instrument Unit) (HCU) (Service
16B
Connector)
8
Circuit from to
Ground Lead 050 X13-Pin A3 XGND2
(HCU) (Electronic Ground Connection, located
close to HCU connector X13)
For connector location see Platform wiring harness W4 (Section 240, Group 10A); for
Circuit Diagram see Instrument Unit Wiring Diagrams - SE2 and HCU Wiring Diagrams
- SE15 (Section 240, Group 15A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=648
CCD - Test for cab tractors without RCU and/or SFA
CCD BUS system (Cab tractors): b. 2nd Terminating Resistor is integrated in BIF.
The CCD-BUS data (communication) system consists
of two wires and two Terminating Resistors. The CCD-Circuit Joint
communication wires are twisted together for shielding End plug X222M (with integrated wiring bridge) or
purposes: X425F and X425M are needed for all tractors without
Electronic Control Unit Wiring Harness W34 (without
• CCD Communication Lines: RCU and/or SFA). This joint is used to close the
– Lead 924 (CCD-) CCD-circuit between BIF and all installed Electronic
– Lead 925 (CCD+) Controllers at cab wiring harness W4.
• Terminating Resistors:
a. R4 (located close to performance monitor
connector X135)
240
16B
9

111401
PN=649
240
16B
10
–UN–14JUN00
LX1024105
(A)—CCD-Circuit with BCU—Basic Control Unit X135—10-Pin Plug for X425F—2-Pin Plug - (CCD-joint
End-plug X222M BIF—Basic Informator Performance Monitor for tractors without
(integrated Wiring (Instrument Unit; Power (PRF) Electronic Control Unit
Bridge) –– up to cab Supply for CCD-BUS) X222F—78-Pin Plug for wiring harness W34)
wiring harness AL150759 HCU—Hitch Control Unit connection to X425M—2-Pin Plug -
(B)—CCD-Circuit with joint PRF—Performance Monitor Electronic Control Unit (CCD-joint for tractors
connectors X425F and 924—CCD- Wiring harness W34 without Electronic
X425M –– with cab wiring 925—CCD+ (for tractors equipped Control Unit wiring
harness AL151379 X13—30-Pin Plug for Hitch with RCU, SFA, PEC harness W34)
W4—Cab Wiring Harness Control Unit (HCU) or SFA)
R4—CCD BUS Terminating X25—26-Pin Plug for BIF X222M—78-Pin Plug with
Resistor (located close to X29—4-Pin Service Plug CCD-Wiring Bridge for
PRF-connector X135) X133—45-Pin Plug for Basic tractors without
Control Unit (BCU) Electronic Control
Unit wiring harness
W34

111401
PN=650

Voltage Check
Normal voltage: 2.5 V (Instrument Unit SE2)
Resistance Check
References for CCD BUS Circuitry Diagnostic • HCU Wiring Diagrams - SE15, Section 240,
240
Group 15. 16B
❒ For component location and pin arrangement see • BCU Wiring Diagrams - SE16H, Section 240, 11
Cab wiring harness W4, 240-10. Group 15.
❒ For electrical troubleshooting see Functional and • PRF Wiring Diagrams - SE18, Section 240,
Diagnostic Schematic at Wiring Diagrams: Group 15.
• CCD BUS Diagnostic Schematic, Section 240, • Terminating Resistor Wiring Diagrams - SE22,
Group 16A. Section 240, Group 15.
• Instrument Unit Wiring Diagrams - SE2, Section
240, Group 15.
AG,LX12234,372 –19–01MAY00–3/3
Test Procedure
– – –1/1

111401
PN=651

Supply Voltage circuit
at Service Connector NOTE: Use only a multimeter with high internal resistance for this measurement NOT OK: CCD-BUS is
X29 (JT05791A). power supplied by
instrument, check fuse
IMPORTANT: Carry out voltage measurement with IGNITION–– ON F117.
Check supply voltage at 4-Pin Service Connector X29. IF OK: GO TO 2.

CCD BUS - Supply Voltage at X29—Specification

between Pin C (lead 924)
volt)
240 LX1022670 –UN–01APR99 range of operation: 2.5
16B volt)
12

indicates a problem with the BIF (Instrument unit; power
supply for CCD-circuit) or a CCD-harness problem.
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for

Circuit Diagram see SE15 or CCD BUS Diagnostic
Schematic.
– – –1/1
2 Check CCD-BUS IMPORTANT: Ignition has to be “OFF” for this measurement. OK: CCD BUS resistance
resistance at Service is OK, check harness GO
Connector X29 Measure resistance at 4-Pin Service Connector X29 with TO 5.
multimeter:
NOT OK: Resistance not
CCD BUS - Circuit Resistance at X29—Specification within specification, GO
between Pin C (lead 924) TO 3.
and Pin B (lead 925):—
Resistance ............................................... 60 OHM (±1 %)
NOTE: The CCD BUS contains two 120 OHM (±1 %)

resistors. The 1st resistor is integrated in the instrument
unit and the 2nd (R4) close to Performance Monitor
connector X135. The resistors are connected in parallel,
LX1022670 –UN–01APR99 this results in a 60 OHM measurement if the CCD BUS
is in perfect working order.

Schematic.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=652
3 Check CCD BUS - 3.1 Terminating Resistor R4 test: OK: Terminating Resistor
Terminating Resistor R4 is correct, GO TO 4.
R4 Disconnect X25 (instrument unit; yellow cover) and
measure with multimeter at service connector X29: NOT OK: Resistance is
not within specification,
CCD BUS - Circuit Resistance at X29 (with GO TO 3.2
disconnected instrument unit)—Specification
Resistance ............................................. 120 OHM (±1 %)

Circuit Diagram see SE2 and SE15 or CCD BUS
Diagnostic Schematic.
LX1022670 –UN–01APR99
3.2 Remove Terminating Resistor R4 from cab wiring harness W4 (located close to OK: Suspect Terminating
PRF connector X135) and check the resistance with the multimeter: Resistor was in
specification, re-install 240
Specification resistor in circuit and 16B
Terminating Resistor R4:—Resistance .................................................. 120 OHM (±1 %) check harness, GO TO 5 13
Terminating Resistor R4 location: NOT OK: Install new

Terminating Resistor
Tractor with Performance Monitor (PRF): (Part Number: AL153274)
and repeat this test.
LX1022664 –UN–16APR99
Tractor without Performance Monitor (PRF):
LX1023983 –UN–18NOV99
– – –1/1

111401
PN=653
4 Check CCD BUS - Disconnect X25 (instrument unit; yellow cover) and measure with multimeter between OK: CCD BUS resistance
Resistance in Pin 7 (lead 924) and Pin 5 (lead 925) at instrument unit: is OK, check harness GO
instrument unit TO 5.
CCD BUS - Resistance in Instrument Unit—Specification
Integrated CCD BUS resistor:— NOT OK: Replace
Resistance .............................................................................................. 120 OHM (±1 %) instrument unit and
repeat this test.
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for Circuit Diagram see SE2 or
CCD BUS Diagnostic Schematic.
– – –1/1
5 CCD BUS - General Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad Ground OK: Check CCD BUS
Harness and Connections. Check all relevant connectors of the CCD BUS circuit for bad, loose, leads, GO TO 6.
240
connector test widened or corroded contacts.
16B
NOT OK: Repair as
14
• XGND2 (Electronic Ground Connection). needed and repeat this
• X13 (HCU; SE15). test.
• X25 (Yellow connector at instrument unit; SE2).
• X29 (Service Connector; SE15).
• X133 (BCU; SE16H).
• X135 (PRF; SE18).
• X222F and X222M, CCD BUS-Circuit Joint up to cab wiring harness AL150759.
• X425F and X425M, CCD BUS-Circuit Joint with cab wiring harness AL151379.
• R4 (Terminating Resistor in cab harness W4, located close to PRF-connector X135,
SE22).
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for Circuit Diagram see SE2
(Instrument); SE15 (HCU); SE16H (BCU); SE18 (PRF); SE22 (R4) or CCD BUS
– – –1/1

111401
PN=654
924 and 925 and harness––but no supply
Electronic Ground • for continuity and High Resistance. voltage (2.5 V) at CCD
lead 050 • for a short to the ground. BUS, replace instrument
• for a short to another conductor. unit and repeat this test.
Check lead 050: OK: Check all relevant

connectors of the CCD
• for continuity. BUS circuit for bad,
loose, widened or
Wiring Connections: corroded contacts.
Circuit 924; 925 and 050 NOT OK: Repair as

needed and repeat this
Circuit 924
test.
from to to to to to
X25-Pin7 X222F -Pin X425F -Pin Wiring Bridges:
(Instrument C6 B • from 222F-Pin C6 via internal bridge in
Unit) X222M to X222F-Pin B7
240
• from connector X425F-Pin B to
16B
X425M-Pin B
15
X222-F Pin X29-Pin C X133-Pin X13-Pin C3 X135-Pin 9 R4-A
B7 (Service 22 (HCU) (PRF) (Terminating
or X425M Connector) (BCU) Resistor)
Pin B
Circuit 925
from to to to to to
X25-Pin 5 X222F -Pin X425F-Pin Wiring Bridges:
(Instrument C7 A • from 222F-Pin C7 via internal bridge in
Unit) X222M to X222F-Pin B6
• from connector X425F-Pin A to X425M
Pin A
X222-F Pin X29-Pin B X133-Pin X13-Pin B2 X135-Pin 4 R4-B
or X425M Connector) (BCU) Resistor)
Pin A
Circuit 050
from to to to to to
XGND2 X29-Pin D X133-Pin X13-Pin A3 X135-Pin 5 X25-Pin 3
(Electronic (Service 27 (HCU) (PRF) (Instrument
Ground Connector) (BCU) Unit)
Connection
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for Circuit Diagram see SE2
(Instrument); SE15 (HCU); SE16H (BCU); SE18 (PRF); SE22 (R4) or CCD BUS
– – –1/1

111401
PN=655
CCD - Test for cab tractors equipped with RCU and/or SFA
CCD BUS system (Cab tractors): The CCD-BUS b. 2nd Terminating Resistor is integrated in BIF.
data (communication) system consists of two wires
and two Terminating Resistors. The communication CCD-Circuit Joint: Plugs X425F and X425M are
wires are twisted together for shielding purposes: needed for all tractors without Electronic Control Unit
Wiring Harness W34 (without RCU and/or SFA). This
• CCD Communication Lines: joint is used to close the CCD-circuit between BIF and
– Lead 924 (CCD-) all installed Electronic Controllers at cab wiring
– Lead 925 (CCD+) harness W4.
• Terminating Resistors:
a. R4 (located close to performance monitor
connector X135)
240
16B
16

111401
PN=656
240
16B
17
–UN–14JUN00
LX1024106
(A)—CCD-Circuit with joint 924—CCD- X13—30-Pin Plug for Hitch X211—18-Pin Plug for SFA
connectors X425F and 925—CCD+ Control Unit (HCU) X222—78-Pin Plug ,
X425M (with cab wiring BCU—Basic Control Unit X25—26-Pin Plug for BIF Connection between
harness AL151379) BIF—Basic Informator X29—4-Pin Service Plug W4 and W34
W4—Cab Wiring Harness (Instrument Unit; Power X133—45-Pin Plug for Basic X425F—2-Pin Plug
W34—Electronic Control Unit Supply for CCD-BUS) Control Unit (BCU) (CCD-Circuit joint for
Wiring Harness HCU—Hitch Control Unit X135—10-Pin Plug for tractors without W34)
R4—CCD BUS Terminating PRF—Performance Monitor Performance Monitor X425M—2-Pin Plug
Resistor (located close to RCU—Reverser Control Unit (PRF) (CCD-Circuit joint for
PRF connector X135) SFA—Suspended Front Axle X198—18-Pin Plug for RCU tractors without W34)

111401
PN=657

Voltage Check
Resistance Check
References for CCD BUS Circuitry Diagnostic • HCU Wiring Diagrams - SE15, Section 240,
240
16B Group 15.
18 ❒ For component location and pin arrangement see • BCU Wiring Diagrams - SE16H, Section 240,
Wiring Harness: Group 15.
• Cab wiring harness W4, Section 240, Group 10. • PRF Wiring Diagrams - SE18, Section 240,
• Electronic Control Unit wiring harness W34, Group 15.
Section 240, Group 10. • RCU Wiring Diagrams - SE19, Section 240,
Group 15.
❒ For electrical troubleshooting see Functional and • SFA Wiring Diagrams - SE20, Section 240,
Diagnostic Schematic at Wiring Diagrams: Group 15.
• CCD BUS Diagnostic Schematic, Section 240, • Terminating Resistor Wiring Diagrams - SE22,
Group 16A. Section 240, Group 15.
• Instrument Unit Wiring Diagrams - SE2, Section
240, Group 15.
AG,LX12234,373 –19–01MAY00–3/3
Test Procedure
– – –1/1

111401
PN=658

Supply Voltage at
Service Connector NOTE: Use only a multimeter with high internal resistance for this measurement NOT OK: CCD-BUS is
X29 (JT05791A). power supplied by
instrument, check fuse
IMPORTANT: Carry out voltage measurement with IGNITION–– ON F117.
Measure supply voltage at 4-Pin Service Connector X29. IF OK: GO TO 2.

CCD BUS - Supply Voltage at X29—Specification

volt)
LX1022670 –UN–01APR99 range of operation: 2.5 240
volt) 16B
19

indicates a problem with the BIF (Instrument unit; power
supply for CCD-circuit) or a CCD-harness problem.

Schematic.
– – –1/1
2 Check CCD-BUS IMPORTANT: Ignition has to be “OFF” for this measurement. OK: CCD - BUS supply
resistance at Service voltage was within
Connector X29 Measure resistance at 4-Pin Service Connector X29 with specification, check
multimeter: harness GO TO 5.
CCD BUS - Circuit Resistance at X29—Specification OK: CCD - BUS supply

between Pin C (lead 924) voltage was without
and Pin B (lead 925):— specification: Define
Resistance ............................................... 60 OHM (±1 %) defective wiring
harnessGO TO 6.
NOTE: The CCD BUS contains two 120 OHM (±1 %)
resistors. The 1st resistor is integrated in the instrument NOT OK: Resistance not
unit and the 2nd (R4) close to the connector of the within specification, GO
performance monitor (X135). The resistors are TO 3.
LX1022670 –UN–01APR99 connected in parallel, this results in a 60 OHM
measurement if the CCD BUS is in perfect working
order.

Schematic.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=659
3 Check CCD BUS - 3.1 Terminating Resistor R4 test: OK: Terminating Resistor
Terminating Resistor R4 is correct, GO TO 4.
R4 Disconnect X25 (instrument unit; yellow cover) and
measure at service connector X29: NOT OK: Resistance is
not within specification,
CCD BUS - Circuit Resistance at X29 (with GO TO 3.2
disconnected instrument unit)—Specification
Measure with multimeter
Resistance ............................................. 120 OHM (±1 %)

LX1022670 –UN–01APR99 Schematic.
3.2 Remove Terminating Resistor R4 from cab wiring harness W4 (located close to OK: Suspect Terminating
PRF connector X135) and check the resistance with the multimeter: Resistor was in
240 specification, re-install
16B Specification resistor in circuit and
20 Terminating Resistor R4:—Resistance .................................................. 120 OHM (±1 %) check harness, GO TO 7
Terminating Resistor R4 location: NOT OK: Install new

Terminating Resistor
Tractor with Performance Monitor (PRF): (Part Number: AL153274)
LX1022664 –UN–16APR99
Tractor without Performance Monitor (PRF):
LX1023983 –UN–18NOV99
– – –1/1

111401
PN=660
4 Check CCD BUS - Disconnect X25 (instrument unit; yellow cover) and measure with multimeter between OK: Check harness, GO
Resistance in Pin 7 (lead 924) and Pin 5 (lead 925) at instrument unit: TO 7
instrument unit
CCD BUS - Resistance in Instrument Unit—Specification NOT OK: Replace
Integrated CCD BUS resistor:— instrument unit and
Resistance .............................................................................................. 120 OHM (±1 %) repeat this test.
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for Circuit Diagram see SE2 or
CCD BUS Diagnostic Schematic.
– – –1/1
5 CCD BUS - General Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad Ground NOT OK: Repair as
Harness and Connections. Check all relevant connectors at wiring harness W4 of the CCD BUS needed and repeat this
240
connector test circuit for bad, loose, widened or corroded contacts. test.
16B
21
• XGND2 (Electronic Ground Connection) at wiring harness W4.
• X13 (HCU; SE15) at wiring harness W4.
• X25 (Yellow connector at instrument unit; SE2) at wiring harness W4.
• X29 (Service Connector; SE15) at wiring harness W4.
• X133 (BCU; SE16H) at wiring harness W4.
• X135 (PRF; SE18) at wiring harness W4.
• R4 (Terminating Resistor in cab harness W4, located close to PRF-connector X135;
SE22) at wiring harness W4.
• X222F (Connection between cab harness W4 and Electronic Control Unit Harness
W34) at wiring harness W4.
• X198 (RCU; SE19) at wiring harness W34.
• X211 (SFA; SE20) at wiring harness W34.
• X222 (Connection between Electronic Control Unit Harness W34 and cab harness
W4) at wiring harness W34.
• X425F and X425M, CCD BUS-Circuit Joint –– with cab wiring harness AL151379
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4 and W34; for Circuit Diagram see
SE2 (Instrument); SE15 (HCU); SE16H (BCU); SE18 (PRF); RCU (SE19); SFA (SE20)
and SE22 (R4) or CCD BUS Diagnostic Schematic.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=661
6 CCD - Circuit –– Check CCD - BUS supply voltage at wiring harness W4: OK: CCD BUS - Power
Voltage Checks with supply circuit in W4 is
disconnected wiring 6.1 –– Tractors up to cab wiring harness AL150759: OK: Check circuit in W34,
harness W34 Check CCD - Circuit Power Supply at connector X222F GO TO 7
(W4). Measure with multimeter:
NOT OK: Replace BIF
CCD BUS - Supply Voltage—Specification and repeat this test.
between Pin C6 (lead
924) and Pin A1 (lead IF OK: BIF replacement
050)—Voltage ................................ 2.0 - 3.0 Volt (Normal did not solve the problem,
range of operation: 2.5 check CCD circuit in cab
volt) harness W4 (GO TO 7).
between Pin C7 (lead
925) and Pin A1 (lead
050)—Voltage ................................ 2.0 - 3.0 Volt (Normal
volt)
240 LX1024129 –UN–09JUN00

16B
22 6.2 –– Tractors with cab wiring harness AL151379:
Check CCD - Circuit Power Supply at connector X425F.
CCD BUS - Supply Voltage—Specification

and a ground
connection:—Voltage ..................... 2.0 - 3.0 Volt (Normal
volt)
between Pin A (lead 925)
and a ground
connection:—Voltage ..................... 2.0 - 3.0 Volt (Normal
LX1024132 –UN–09JUN00 volt)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=662
924 and 925 harness––but no supply
• for continuity and High Resistance. voltage (2.5 V) at CCD
• for a short to the ground. BUS, replace instrument
• for a short to another conductor. unit and repeat this test.
Wiring Connections: OK: Check Electronic

Ground Connection
Circuit 924 XGND2 (W4).
from to to to to to
OK: Check all relevant
Circuit 924 in W4 connectors of the CCD
X25-Pin7 X222F -Pin X425F -Pin B BUS circuit for bad,
(Instrument C6 (for tractors with cab wiring harness AL151379) loose, widened or
Unit) (Connection corroded contacts.
to W34)
NOT OK: Repair as
Circuit 924 in W34 needed and repeat this
X222-Pin X198 -Pin X211 -Pin X222-Pin test.
C6 B2 C1 B7 240
(Connection (RCU) (SFA) (Connection 16B
to W4) to W4) 23
Circuit 924 in W4
X222-F Pin X29-Pin C X133-Pin X13-Pin C3 X135-Pin 9 R4-A
(Control Connector) (BCU) Resistor)
Unit
Connection)
X222-F Pin X425M -Pin B
B7 (for tractors with cab wiring harness AL151379)
(continued)
Circuit 925
from to to to to to
Circuit 925 in W4
X25-Pin 5 X222F -Pin X425F -Pin A
(Instrument C7 (for tractors with cab wiring harness AL151379)
Unit)
Circuit 925 in W34
X222-Pin X198 -Pin X211 -Pin X222-Pin
C7 B1 B2 B6
(Connection (RCU) (SFA) (Connection
to W4) to W4)
Circuit 925 in W4
X222-Pin X29-Pin B X133-Pin X13-Pin B2 X135-Pin 4 R4-B
(Connection Connector) (BCU) Resistor)
to W34)
X222-Pin X425M -Pin A
B6 (for tractors with cab wiring harness AL151379)
(continued)
SE2 (Instrument); SE15 (HCU); SE16H (BCU); SE18 (PRF); RCU (SE19); SFA (SE20)
and SE22 (R4) or CCD BUS Diagnostic Schematic.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=663
11-BIT CAN BUS Test
240
16B
24
–UN–24JAN00
LX1024108
W4—Cab Wiring Harness A18—Passive 11-BIT CAN BUS SMD/EICV3—Stepper Motor X232—7-Pin Plug (Connection
W34—Electronic Control Unit Terminator Driver for EICV between W35 and W4)
Wiring Harness PEC—Control Unit for No. 3 function X253—18-Pin Plug for SMD
W35—Stepper Motor Driver PowrQuad SMD/PPST—Stepper Motor (EICV1)
Wiring Harness Plus/AutoQuad and Driver for X254—18-Pin Plug for SMD
940—CAN BUS Bias Line Electronic Independent PowrQuad (EICV2)
(Return/Ground) Control Valves (Power Plus/AutoQuad X255—18-Pin Plug for SMD
942—CAN BUS Bias Line Supply for CAN BUS function (EICV3)
(Power/12 Volt) Communication Lines) X221—45-Pin Plug for PEC X256—18-Pin Plug for SMD
944—CAN- (11-BIT SMD/EICV1—Stepper Motor X222F/X222—78-Pin Plug (PPST)
Communication Line) Driver for EICV (Connection X258—7-Pin Plug for passive
945—CAN+ (11-BIT No. 1 function between W4 and CAN BUS Terminator
Communication Line) SMD/EICV2—Stepper Motor W34)
A17—Active 11-BIT CAN BUS Driver for EICV X226—7-Pin Plug for active
Terminator (Power No. 2 function CAN BUS Terminator
supply for CAN BUS
Bias lines 940 and 942)
11-BIT CAN BUS wires: The 11-BIT data • CAN Communication Lines:
(communication) system consists of four wires. These – Lead 944 (CAN-)
four wires are twisted together for shielding purposes: – Lead 945 (CAN+)

111401
PN=664
• CAN BIAS Lines for additional shielding purpose: IMPORTANT: Connect multimeter with IGNITION––
– Lead 940- (CAN Bias Return/Ground) OFF.
– Lead 942+ (CAN Bias Power/12 Volt)
Overview - 11 BIT CAN BUS Check
IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the stepper motor

drivers with IGNITION–– ON.
11-BIT CAN-BUS check at Stepper Motor Driver connector

CAN-Voltage Check
Measure voltage between Pins Voltage
D3 D1 2.0 - 3.0 Volt
(lead 944) (lead 310) (Normal range of operation: appr. 2.5 V)
E3 D1 2.0 - 3.0 Volt
Measure continuity between Pins Normal Condition 240
D3 E3 No continuity 16B
(lead 944) (lead 945 25
D3 all occupied pins at SMD connector No continuity

(lead 944)
E3 all occupied pins at SMD connector No continuity
(lead 945)
CAN-SHIELD WIRE check
D2 E2 approximately 12 V
(lead 940) (lead 942)
References for 11 BIT CAN BUS Circuitry – “SE21A –– PowrQuad Plus Control”, Section 240,
Diagnostic Group 15.
– “SE21B –– EICV Control”, Section 240, Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see – “SE21C –– EICV Stepper Motor Drivers and
Wiring Harness: Stepper Motors”, Section 240, Group 15.
– Cab wiring harness W4, Section 240, Group 10. – “SE21D –– AutoQuad and PowrQuad Plus
– Electronic Control Unit wiring harness W34, Stepper Motor Driver and Stepper Motor”, Section
Section 240, Group 10. 240, Group 15.
– Stepper Motor Driver wiring harness W35, Section – Terminating Resistor Wiring Diagrams - SE22,
240, Group 10. Section 240, Group 15.
• For electrical troubleshooting see Functional and
Diagnostic Schematic at Wiring Diagrams:
– CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic, Section 240,
Group 16A.
AG,LX12234,229 –19–01MAY00–2/2

111401
PN=665
Test Procedure (11-BIT CAN BUS)
– – –1/1
1 11-BIT CAN BUS Check 11-BIT CAN BUS at stepper motor driver for 3rd EICV function X255 (Marked OK: GO TO 1.2
Communication Lines with blue PVC-tape).
(944/945) and BIAS NOT OK: 12 Volt
Lines (940/942) –– IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the stepper motor drivers with IGNITION–– ON. measured, check relevant
Voltage Check lead for a short to another
IMPORTANT: Connect multimeter with IGNITION––OFF. conductor, GO TO 7.
IMPORTANT: Carry out voltage measurement with IGNITION–– ON NOT OK: No voltage or
voltage out of
Disconnect EICV No. 3 - Stepper Motor Driver specification, GO TO 2.
240 connector X255 at wiring harness W35 (For tractors
16B without 3rd EICV function, the stepper motor driver
26 connector is protected by a plastic cap).
1.1 Communication Lines - Voltage check (944/945):
Use a multimeter and check the voltage at connector

X255:
Communication Lines - Voltage Check (944/945)—

Specification
Measure between Pin D3
(lead 944) and Pin D1
(lead 310):—Voltage ...................... 2.0 - 3.0 Volt (Normal
Range of Operation 2.5
Volt)
Measure between Pin E3
(lead 945) and Pin D1
(lead 310):—Voltage ...................... 2.0 - 3.0 Volt (Normal
LX1022671 –UN–01APR99 Range of Operation 2.5
Volt)
NOTE: A CAN-BUS (944/945) voltage measurement in

specification but out of the normal range of operation
(more than +/- 0.15 V) can indicate a defective or
disconnected 6-pin Terminator. Check/Change
Terminator A17 and repeat measurement.
For connector location see referenceStepper Motor

Driver wiring harness W35 (240-10); for Circuit Diagram
see reference“SE21C –– EICV Stepper Motor Drivers
and Stepper Motors” (240-15) or CAN BUS Diagnostic
Schematic (240-16A).
1.2 BIAS Lines - Voltage check (940/942): OK: GO TO 2.
Use a multimeter and check the voltage at connector X255: NOT OK: GO TO 6.
BIAS Lines - Voltage Check (940/942)—Specification

Measured between Pin D2 (lead -940)
and Pin E2 (lead +942):—Voltage ......................................................................... 12 Volt
For connector location see referenceStepper Motor Driver wiring harness W35
(240-10); for Circuit Diagram see reference“SE21C –– EICV Stepper Motor Drivers and
Stepper Motors” (240-15) or CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic (240-16A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=666
2 Installation of CAN A—A17 - Active 11-BIT CAN BUS terminator (Power OK: GO TO 3.
BUS Special Tool supply for BIAS Lines)
DFLX12
Ignition OFF.
• Disconnect Terminator A17 (located behind the
operator’s seat, on the right hand side underneath the
metal cover for the PEC and ECU) and connect Special
Service Tool DFLX12 (W34; SE21A).
• Disconnect Terminator A18 (located on the right hand

side of the main frame underneath the panel for the
stepper motor drivers) and connect Special Service Tool
DFLX12 (W35; SE21C).
LX1024120 –UN–15MAY00
240
16B
27
LX1022669 –UN–14APR99
B—A18 - Passive 11-BIT CAN BUS terminator
For Circuit Diagram see reference CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic (240-16A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=667
3 Continuity/Resistance IMPORTANT: Carry out resistance measurement with IGNITION–– OFF OK: Check all relevant
Check (Complete connectors of the circuit
Circuit: W35; W4 and Use a multimeter and check resistance at for bad, loose, widened or
W34) SMD-connector X255 (EICV No. 3): corroded contacts (see
wiring connections, GO
Complete CAN BUS Circuit Check at W35 with TO 7).
installed Service Tools DFLX12 instead of
terminators A17 and A18—Specification IF OK: Replace PEC
Measured between Pin (CAN BUS Power Supply)
D3 (lead 944) and Pin E3 and repeat this test.
(lead 945)—OHM
(Resistance) ..................................................... 60 [OHgr ] NOT OK: Isolate fault
area, GO TO 4
NOTE: Each Service Tool contains one 120 OHM (±1 %)
resistor. With Wiring Harness W35 connected to W34
and W4, the two resistors are connected in parallel. This
results in a 60 OHM measurement if the 11-BIT CAN
BUS is in perfect working order.
240 For connector location see referenceStepper Motor

16B Driver wiring harness W35 (240-10); for Circuit Diagram
28 LX1022671 –UN–01APR99 see reference“SE21C –– EICV Stepper Motor Drivers
and Stepper Motors” (240-15) or CAN BUS Diagnostic
– – –1/1
4 11-BIT CAN BUS –– IMPORTANT: Carry out resistance measurement with IGNITION–– OFF OK: CAN BUS problem
Continuity/Resistance consists in W35, repair or
Check (Circuit: W4 Disconnect X232 (CAN BUS Connection from W4 to replace wiring harness
and W34) W35). (see wiring connections,
Use a multimeter and check resistance at connector GO TO 7)
X232 (W4). Measure between Pin A (lead 944) and Pin
B (lead 945): NOT OK: GO TO 5.
W4 and W34 - CAN BUS Circuit Check at W4 with

installed Service Tool DFLX12 (W35 disconnected)—
Specification
CAN BUS Circuit (W4
and W34):—OHM
(Resistance) ................................................... 120 [OHgr ]
For connector location see reference Cab wiring harness

W4 or Cab wiring harness W4 for tractors with PST
(240-10); for Circuit Diagram see reference “SE21C ––
EICV Stepper Motor Drivers and Stepper Motors”
LX1024128 –UN–09JUN00 (240-15) or CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic (240-16A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=668
5 11-BIT CAN BUS –– IMPORTANT: Carry out resistance measurement with IGNITION–– OFF OK: CAN BUS problem
Continuity/Resistance consists in W4, repair or
Check (Circuit: W34) Disconnect X222 (CAN BUS Connection between W4 replace wiring harness
and W34). (see wiring connections,
Use a multimeter and check the circuit at connector GO TO 7)
X222 (W34). Measure between Pin C1 (lead 944) and
Pin C2 (lead 945): NOT OK: CAN BUS
problem consist in W34,
W34 - CAN BUS Circuit Check at W34 with installed repair replace wiring
Service Tool DFLX12 (W4 and W35 disconnected)— harness (see wiring
Specification connections, GO TO 7)
W34 - CAN BUS
Circuit:—OHM
(Resistance) ....................................................... 120 OHM
For connector location see reference Electronic Control

Unit wiring harness W34 (240-10).
LX1024129 –UN–09JUN00 240

16B
29
– – –1/1
6 11-BIT CAN BUS –– Disconnect X226 at active terminator A17 (located OK: Change Terminating
BIAS Lines Power behind the operator’s seat, on the right hand side Resistor A17.
Supply Check underneath the metal cover for the PEC and ECU).
Ignition ON. NOT OK: GO TO 8.
Measure between Pin-E (ground lead 050) and Pin-D

(supply lead 562) at connector X226:
Power Supply for BIAS Lines at active terminator

A17—Specification
Power Supply:—Voltage ...................................... 12 Volts
For connector location see referenceStepper Motor

Driver wiring harness W35 (240-10); for Circuit Diagram
see reference “SE21A –– PowrQuad Plus Control”
(240-15) or CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic (240-16A).
LX1024126 –UN–09JUN00
– – –1/1

111401
PN=669
7 11 BIT CAN BUS - Check lead 944 and 945: OK: Check all relevant
Communication Lines connectors of the circuit
Circuit (944/945) ❒ for continuity for bad, loose, widened or
❒ for a short to the ground. corroded contacts.
Circuit 944 and 945 IF OK: Still no function

(no supply voltage (2.5V)
Lead 944 in W4
available) and the check
from to to to to to of the connectors and the
X222F-Pin X232-Pin A circuit does not reveal
C1 (Connection any problems, replace
(Connection to W35) PEC (PEC provides
to W34) (SE21C) supply voltage (2.5 V) for
the 11-BIT CAN BUS).
Lead 945 in W4
from to to to to to NOT OK: Repair as
X222F-Pin X232-Pin B
test.
C2 (Connection
240 (Connection to W35)
16B to W34) (SE21C)
30 Lead 944 in W34
from to to to to to
X222-Pin X226-Pin G X221-Pin
C1 (A17) 19
(Connection (SE21A) (PEC)
to W34) (SE21A)
Lead 945 in W34
from to to to to to
X222-Pin X226-Pin B X221-Pin
C2 (A17) 42
(Connection (SE21A) (PEC)
to W34) (SE21A)
Lead 944 in W35
from to to to to to
X232-Pin A X255-Pin X253-Pin X254-Pin X256-Pin X258
(Connection D3 D3 D3 D3 -Pin G
to W4) (SMD / (SMD / (SMD / (SMD / (A18)
(SE21C) EICV3) EICV1) EICV2) PPST) (SE21C)
(SE21C) (SE21C) (SE21C) (SE21D)
Lead 945 in W35
from to to to to to
X232-Pin B X255-Pin X253-Pin X254-Pin X256-Pin X258
(Connection E3 E3 E3 E3 -Pin B
to W4) (SMD / (SMD / (SMD / (SMD / (A18)
(SE21C) EICV3) EICV1) EICV2) PPST) (SE21C)
(SE21C) (SE21C) (SE21C) (SE21D)
For connector location and pin arrangement see relevant wiring harness, for Circuit
Diagram see CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic (240-16A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=670
8 11 BIT CAN BUS - Check supply lead 562: OK: Check all relevant
Bias Lines Circuit connectors of the circuit
(940/942) ❒ for continuity for bad, loose, widened or
Check ground lead 050: NOT OK: Repair as

❒ for continuity. test.
Wiring Connections:
Circuit 562
Circuit from to to to to
Supply X226-Pin D X222-Pin X221-Pin X227-Pin D X303-Pin A
Lead 562 in (A17) J3 23 (A14) (Service
W34 (SE21A) (Connection (PEC) (SE22) Connector
to (SE21A) 29-BIT)
W4)(SE21A) (SE22)
240
Supply X222F-Pin F205-Pin A K203-Pin
16B
Lead 562 in J3 (Power 86
31
W4 (SE21A) supply for (Power
PEC and Supply
A17) Relay for
(SE21A) SMD’s)
(SE21B)
Circuit 050
Ground X226-E X221-1 X219-D X198-C3 X222-A1
Lead 050 in (A17) (PEC) (Multi (RCU) (Connection
W34 (SE21A) (SE21A) Function (SE19) to W4)
Lever) (SE21A)
(SE21B)
Ground X226-E X211-D1 X218-24 X227-E X303-D
Lead 050 in (A17) (SFA) (ECU) (A14 / 29 (Service
W34 (SE21A) (SE20) (SE23) BIT) Connector /
(Cont.) (SE22) 29 BIT
(SE22)
Ground X222F-Pin XGND2
Lead 050 in A1 (Electronic
W4 (Connection Ground)
to W4) (SE1)
(SE21A)
For connector location and pin arrangement see relevant wiring harness, for Circuit
Diagram see CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic (240-16A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=671
29-BIT CAN BUS Test
240
16B
32
–UN–24JAN00
LX1024107
W4—Cab Wiring Harness A14—Active 29-BIT CAN BUS X26—26-Pin Plug for BIF (blue X227—7-Pin Plug for active
W34—Electronic Control Unit Terminator (Power cover) CAN BUS Terminator
Wiring Harness supply for Bias Lines X218—45-Pin Plug for ECU X270—7-Pin Plug for passive
930—CAN BUS Bias Line 930 and 932) X221—45-Pin Plug for PEC Terminator
(Return/Ground) A15—Passive 29-BIT CAN BUS X222F / X222—78-Pin Plug X303—Service Connector for
932—CAN BUS Bias Line Terminator (Connection 29-BIT CAN BUS
(Power/12 Volt) BIF—Basic Informator between W4
934—CAN- (29-BIT (Instrument Unit) and W34)
Communication Line) ECU—Engine Control Unit
935—CAN+ (29-BIT PEC—Control Unit for
Communication Line) PowrQuad
Plus/AutoQuad and
electronic independent
control valves
29-BIT CAN BUS wires • CAN - Communication Lines:

– Lead 934 (CAN-)
The 29-BIT data (communication) system consists of – Lead 935 (CAN+)
four wires. These four wires are twisted together for • CAN - BIAS Lines for additional shielding purpose:
shielding purposes: – Lead 930- (CAN Bias Return/Ground)
Continued on next page AG,LX12234,249 –19–18SEP00–1/2

111401
PN=672
– Lead 932+ (CAN Bias Power/12 Volt)

Overview - 29 BIT CAN BUS Check
IMPORTANT: Connect multimeter with IGNITION––

OFF.
29-BIT CAN-BUS check at Service Connector X303

CAN-Voltage Check
G C 2.0 - 3.0 Volt
B C 2.0 - 3.0 Volt
Measure continuity between Pins Normal Condition
G B No continuity
(lead 934) (lead 935) 240
G all occupied pins at X303 No continuity 16B
(lead 934) 33
B all occupied pins at X303 No continuity

(lead 935)
CAN-SHIELD WIRE check
C F approximately 12 V
(lead -930) (lead +932)
References for 29 BIT CAN BUS Circuitry – “SE21A –– PowrQuad Plus Control”, Section 240,
Diagnostic Group 15.
– “SE21B –– EICV Control”, Section 240, Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see – “SE21C –– EICV Stepper Motor Drivers and
Wiring Harness: Stepper Motors”, Section 240, Group 15.
– Cab wiring harness W4, Section 240, Group 10. – “SE21D –– AutoQuad and PowrQuad Plus
– Cab wiring harness W4 for tractors with PST, Stepper Motor Driver and Stepper Motor”, Section
– Electronic Control Unit wiring harness W34, – Terminating Resistor Wiring Diagrams - SE22,
Section 240, Group 10. Section 240, Group 15.
– CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic, Section 240,
Group 16A.
AG,LX12234,249 –19–18SEP00–2/2
Test Procedure (29-BIT CAN BUS)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=673
1 Communication IMPORTANT: Connect multimeter with IGNITION––OFF. OK: GO TO 2.

Lines –– Voltage
Check (934/935) IMPORTANT: Carry out voltage measurement with IGNITION–– ON NOT OK: 12 Volt
measured, check relevant
A—A14 - Active terminator lead for a short to another
B—X303 - 29-BIT CAN BUS Service Connector conductor, GO TO 7.
Service Connector X303 is located close to active NOT OK: No voltage or

terminator A14 (located behind the operator’s seat, on voltage out of
the right hand side underneath the metal cover for the specification, GO TO 3.
PEC and ECU)
LX1024127 –UN–15MAY00
240
16B Use a multimeter and check voltage at connector X303
34 (W34):
CAN BUS Voltage at Service Connector X303—

Specification
Measured between Pin C
(lead 934) and Pin D
(lead 050)—Voltage ....................... 2.0 - 3.0 Volt (Normal
Range of Operation: 2.5
Volt)
Measured between Pin B
(lead 935) and Pin D
LX1022670 –UN–01APR99 (lead 050)—Voltage ....................... 2.0 - 3.0 Volt (Normal
Range of Operation: 2.5
Volt)
NOTE: A CAN-BUS (934/935) voltage measurement in

specification but out of the normal range of operation
(more than +/- 0.15 V) can indicate a defective or
disconnected 6-pin Terminator. Check/Change
Terminator A14 and repeat measurement.
For connector location see reference Electronic Control

Unit wiring harness W34 (240-10); for Circuit Diagram
see reference Terminating Resistor Wiring Diagrams -
SE22 (240-15) or CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic
(240-16A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=674
2 BIAS Lines –– OK: GO TO 3.

Voltage Check
(930/932) NOT OK: GO TO 6.
LX1022667 –UN–25MAR99
B—A15 –– Passive 4-pin terminator
Disconnect connector X270 at wiring harness W4

(A15 –– Passive 4-pin terminator, located in the 240
instrument panel to the LH-side of the steering column). 16B
Check voltage with multimeter between Pin C (lead -930) 35
and Pin F (lead +932):
CAN BUS BIAS Lines Voltage at connector X270

(passive terminator A15)—Specification
Power Supply:—Voltage ............... approximately 12 Volt
For Circuit Diagram see reference CAN BUS Diagnostic

LX1024126 –UN–09JUN00
– – –1/1
3 Installation of CAN Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 4.

BUS Special Tool A—Active 29-BIT CAN BUS terminator (Power supply
DFLX12 for BIAS Lines)
B—29-BIT CAN BUS Service Connector
• Disconnect Terminating Resistor A14 (located behind

the operator’s seat, on the right hand side underneath
the metal cover for the PEC and ECU) and connect
Special Service Tool DFLX12 (see reference:
“DFLX12 — 11-BIT- and 29-BIT- CAN BUS Special
Tool”, 299-05.
• Disconnect Terminating Resistor A15 (located in the
instrument panel to the LH-side of the steering column)
and connect Special Service Tool DFLX12.
LX1024127 –UN–15MAY00
For Circuit Diagram see reference Terminating Resistor
Wiring Diagrams - SE22 (240-15).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=675
4 Continuity/Resistance Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Check (Complete IMPORTANT: Carry out resistance measurement with connectors of the circuit
Circuit: W4 and W34) IGNITION–– OFF for bad, loose, widened or
corroded contacts (see
Use a multimeter and check resistance at connector wiring connections, GO
X303. Measure between Pin C (lead 934) and Pin B TO 7).
(lead 935):
IF OK: Replace BIF
Complete CAN BUS Check at Service Connector (29-BIT CAN BUS Power
X303 with installed Service Tools DFLX12 instead of Supply) and repeat this
terminators A14 and A15—Specification test.
Circuit W4 and W34:—
LX1022670 –UN–01APR99 OHM (Resistance) ........................................... 60 [OHgr ] NOT OK: Isolate fault
area, GO TO 5.
NOTE: Each Service Tool DFLX12 contains one 120
OHM (±1 %) resistor. With Wiring Harness W34
connected to W4, the two resistors are connected in
parallel. This results in a 60 OHM measurement if the
29-BIT CAN BUS is in perfect working order.
240
16B For Circuit Diagram see reference Terminating Resistor
36 Wiring Diagrams - SE22 (240-15) or CAN BUS
Diagnostic Schematic (240-16A).
– – –1/1
5 Continuity/Resistance Ignition OFF. OK: CAN BUS problem

Check (Circuit: W34) Disconnect X222 (Connection from W4 to 34). consists in W4, repair
wiring harness as needed
IMPORTANT: Carry out resistance measurement with (see wiring connections,
IGNITION–– OFF GO TO 7)
Check resistance with multimeter at Service Connector NOT OK: CAN BUS
X303. Measure between Pin C (lead 934) and Pin B problem consists in W34,
(lead 935): repair wiring harness as
needed (see wiring
W34 CAN BUS Circuit Check at Service Connector connections, GO TO 7)
X303 with installed Service Tool DFLX12 (W4
LX1022670 –UN–01APR99 disconnected)—Specification
Circuit W34:—OHM
(Resistance) ................................................... 120 [OHgr ]

Wiring Diagrams - SE22 (240-15) or CAN BUS
– – –1/1

111401
PN=676
6 Check CAN BUS Bias OK: Change Terminating

Lines Power Supply Disconnect X227 (A14; located close to Service Resistor A17.
Connector X303).
NOT OK: GO TO 8.
Ignition ON.
Measure between Pin-E (ground lead 050) and Pin-D

(supply lead 562) at connector X227:
Power Supply for Bias Lines of 29 BIT-CAN BUS—

Specification
Power Supply:—Voltage ...................................... 12 Volts

Wiring Diagrams - SE22 (240-15) or CAN BUS
LX1024126 –UN–09JUN00
240
16B
37
– – –1/1
7 Communication Lines Check lead 934 and 935: OK: Check all connectors
Circuit (934/935) of the circuit for bad,
❒ for continuity loose, widened or
Circuit 934 and 935 IF OK: No CAN BUS

voltage (2.5 V) available
Lead 934 in W4
and the check of the
from to to to to to connectors and the circuit
X222F-K1 X270-G X26-16 does not reveal any
(Connection (A15) (BIF) problems, replace the BIF
to W34) (SE22) (SE02) (BIF provides the supply
(SE21A) voltage (2.5 V) for the
29-BIT CAN BUS).
Lead 935 in W4
from to to to to to NOT OK: Repair harness
as needed and carry out
X222F-K2 X270-B X26-15
(Connection (A15) (BIF) an operational test.
to W34) (SE22) (SE02)
(SE21A)
Lead 934 in W34
from to to to to to
X222-K1 X221-21 X218-29 X303-C X227-G
(Connection (PEC) (ECU) (Service (A14)
to W34) (SE21A) (SE23) Connector) (SE22)
(SE21A) (SE22)
Lead 935 in W34
from to to to to to
X222-K2 X221-44 X218-30 X303-B X227-B
(Connection (PEC) (ECU) (Service (A14)
to W34) (SE21A) (SE23) Connector) (SE22)
(SE21A) (SE22)
For connector location and pin arrangement see relevant wiring harness. For Circuit
Diagram see reference CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic (240-16A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=677
8 Bias Lines Circuit Check supply lead 562: OK: Check all connectors
(930/932) of the complete circuit for
❒ for continuity. bad, loose, widened or

Wiring Connections:
Circuit 562
Supply X227-Pin D X303-Pin A X221-Pin X226-Pin D X222-Pin
Lead 562 in (A14) (Service 23 (A17) J3
W34 (SE22) Connector (PEC) (SE21a) (Connection
29-BIT) (SE21a) to W4)
(SE22) (SE21a)
240
Supply X222F-Pin F205-Pin A K203-Pin
16B
Lead 562 in J3 (Power 86
38
W4 (SE21A) supply for (Power
PEC and Supply
A17) Relay for
(SE21A) SMD’s)
(SE21B)
Circuit 050
Ground X227-E X221-1 X219-D X198-C3 X222-A1
Lead 050 in (A14 / 29 (PEC) (Multi (RCU) (Connection
W34 BIT) (SE21A) Function (SE19) to W4)
(SE22) Lever) (SE21A)
(SE21B)
Ground X227-E X211-D1 X218-24 X226-E X303-D
Lead 050 in (A14 / 29 (SFA) (ECU) (A17 / 11 (Service
W34 BIT) (SE20) (SE23) BIT) Connector /
(Cont.) (SE22) (SE21A) 29 BIT)
(SE22)
Ground X222F-Pin XGND2
Lead 050 in A1 (Electronic
W4 (Connection Ground)
to W4) (SE1)
(SE21A)
For connector location and pin arrangement see relevant wiring harness. For Circuit
Diagram see reference CAN BUS Diagnostic Schematic (240-16A).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=678
Electronic Control Units Supply Circuit 072
References for Electronic Control Unit Supply – “Electronic Control Unit wiring harness W34”, See
Circuitry Diagnostic Section 240, Group 10).
– “Stepper Motor Driver wiring harness W35”, See
• For component location and pin arrangement see: Section 240, Group 10).
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, See Section 240, Group
10).
– “Transmission wiring harness W13”, See Section
240, Group 10).
AG,LX12234,405 –19–01MAY00–1/1
Test Procedure
240
Circuit 072 supplies several Fuses of electronically controlled components: 16B
• F111 –– BCU Supply Circuit 571 (“SE16H”). 39
• F112 –– Brake Switch Supply Circuit 273 (“SE16A”).
• F113 –– BCU Component Supply Circuit 973; see reference Supply Circuit 973 Test
• F115 –– CAL Circuit 886 for HCU (“SE 15”); BCU (“SE16H”); PRF (“SE18”); RCU (“SE19”); SFA (“SE20”).
• F116 –– HCU and Service Connector (X29) Supply Circuit 856 (“SE 15”).
• F117 –– BIF (“SE2”) and PRF (“SE18”) Supply Circuit 971.
• F202 –– RCU (“SE19”); SFA (“SE20”) Supply Circuit 672.
• F205 –– PEC/EICV and SMD (“SE21A” and “SE21B”) Supply Circuit 562.
• F211 –– PQ+/AQ Control Switches (“SE21A”) and EICV Transport Lock Switch (“SE21B”) Supply Circuit 572.
• F215 –– Front PTO; Handbrake Switch (“SE5”) and Radio “SE9”) Supply Circuit 545.
A general Circuit 072 problem would have a lasting effect on all functions mentioned above.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=679
1 Preliminary Checks of 1.1 OK: Check all relevant

Electronic Control connectors for bad, loose,
Circuit 072 • Check Fuse F114 (30A). widened or corroded
• Check ELX Relay K101; see reference “Testing the “ELX” Electronics Power Supply contacts.
Relay (K101)”, 240-25.
• Check Diode V105. IF OK: GO TO 1.2
NOT OK: Repair as

needed and carry out an
operational test.
1.2 OK: ELX Relay and

Power Supply for ELX
Remove ELX-Relay. Relay shows no
problems, check circuit
Check Power Supply at ELX Connection - Pin 86 during IGNITION ON. 072, GO TO 3.
ELX - Relay Engagement Voltage—Specification NOT OK: Check Main

240 Measure between Pin 86 and a ground Switch S01; see
16B connection:—Voltage ............................................................................................. 12 Volt reference “Main Switch
40 S01”, 240-25.
IF OK: Main switch is

OK; GO TO 2
– – –1/1
2 Check Power Supply Check Supply Lead 012 and 902: OK: Check all relevant
lead 012 and 902 components/connectors
• for a short to the ground for bad, loose, widened or
• for continuity and high resistance corroded contacts.
Wiring connection NOT OK: Repair as

Main Supply Circuit 012/902 for ELX - Relay operational test.
from to from to
F01 (160 A - Main F114 - Pin E F114 - Pin A K101 - Pin 30
Fuse) (ELX - Relay)
Lead Number 012 Lead Number 902
– – –1/1

111401
PN=680
3 Circuit 072 Check lead 072 and SUB Supply Circuit leads: OK: Check all relevant
connectors for bad, loose,
• for a short to the ground and high resistance widened or corroded
contacts.
Electronic Supply Circuit 072
From ELX Relay K101 - Pin 87 (SE1) to the corresponding Fuses NOT OK: Repair as
Fuse/Circuit To
operational test.
F111 - Pin A X133 - Pin 5 (BCU; W4/SE16H)
(Circuit 571)
F112 - Pin A X250/1 - Pin A (RH Brake Switch; W4/SE16A)
(Circuit 273) X250/2 - Pin A (LH Brake Switch; W4/SE16A)
F113 - Pin A X122 - Pin B (DIFF-Lock; W4/SE16C)
(Circuit 973) X125 - Pin A (Rear PTO Switch; W4/SE16G or SE16I with
(see Supply Circuit HMS)
973 Test, Section X242 - Pin B (HMS Switch; W4/SE16I)
245, Group BCU) X245 - Pin C (MFWD Switch; W4/SE16G or SE16I with
HMS)
X21 - Pin 6 (Turn Signal Switch; W4/SE16B) 240
X07 - Pin 9 (Connection to W11/SE16I) 16B
X30 - Pin 3 and Pin 4 (Radar; W13/SE16D) 41
X88 - Pin C (Hall Sensor; W13/SE16H)
F115 - Pin A X13 - Pin H2 (HCU; W4/SE15)
(CAL Circuit 886) X133 - Pin 35 (BCU; W4/SE16H)
X135 - Pin 6 (PRF; W4/SE18)
X222 - Pin D3 (Connection between W4 and W34)
X198 - Pin A2 (RCU; W34/SE19)
X211 - Pin E2 (SFA; W34/SE20)
F116 - Pin A X13 - Pin A2 (HCU; W4/SE15)
(Circuit 856) X29 - Pin A (Service Connector; W4/SE15)
F117 - Pin A X26 - Pin 14 (BIF; W4/SE2)
(Circuit 971) X135 - Pin 10 (PRF; W4/SE18)
F202 - Pin E X222 - Pin L6 (Connection between W4 and W34)
(Circuit 672) X198 - Pin D1 (RCU; W34/SE19)
X211 - Pin E1 (SFA; W34/SE20)
F205 - Pin E K203 - Pin 86 (Power Supply for Stepper Motor Driver;
(Circuit 562) W4/SE21C)
X222 - Pin J3 (Connection between W4 and W34)
X226 - Pin D (A17; Active 11-BIT CAN BUS Terminator;
W34/SE21A)
X227 - Pin D (A14; Active 29-BIT CAN BUS Terminator;
W34/SE22)
X221 - Pin 23 (PEC; W34/SE21A)
X303 - Pin A (CAN BUS Service Connector; W34/SE22)
F211 - Pin E X244 - Pin C (AUTO Switch S50; W4/SE21A)
(Circuit 572) X249 - Pin C (Connection to PQ UP/DOWN Switches;
W4/SE21A)
X268 - Pin A (Clutch Switch for PQ+/AQ transmission;
W13/SE21A)
X219 - Pin B (Multi Function Lever, for Transport Lock
switch; W34/SE21B)
F215 - Pin E X127 - Pin A (Front PTO Switch; W4/SE5)
(Circuit 545) K25/1 - Pin 8 (Front PTO Relay; W4/SE5)
X230 - Pin A (Seat Switch/Handbrake Circuit; W4/SE5)
X105 - Pin C (Radio Connection Point; W11/SE9)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=681
240
16B
42

111401
PN=682
Group 20
Adjustments
Explanation of BCU, Basic Informator (BIF) and Performance Monitor (PRF) Testing
The applicable test should be performed if a

In all cases, follow the test sequence carefully and use
AG,LX25599,217 –19–01FEB00–1/1
Safety Measures
240
IMPORTANT: Do not use test lamp on any control 20
CAUTION: Always shut off the engine before 1
unit. Use multimeter (JT05791A)
only.
running. before performing any welding on
the tractor.
AG,LX25599,218 –19–01FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=683
Adjustments
Essential Tools

SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company. AG,LX25599,333 –19–01MAY00–1/4
Performance monitor1 . . . . . . . . RE39469 or RE60389

240
20 Calibration and testing of electronic control devices.
2
–UN–10AUG94
RE39569
1
Available as spare part
AG,LX25599,333 –19–01MAY00–2/4
Test line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .JDG810

the RE39469/RE60389 performance monitor).
–UN–17OCT95
JDG810
AG,LX25599,333 –19–01MAY00–3/4
Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05791A

–UN–09JUN99
JT05791A
AG,LX25599,333 –19–01MAY00–4/4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=684
Adjustments
General Information on the Basic Control Unit (BCU)
Description unit allow a warning tone to be emitted when:

— The turn signals blink (this function can be set on or
The Electronic control unit (BCU)1 controls the tractor’s off)
electrical and electronic functions. The BCU controls, — Leaving the operator’s seat while the rear PTO is
coordinates and manages functions, recalls the switched on
required data, logically links data items, compares — HMS is activated and deactivated
desired and actual values and manages inputs and — Reaching or exceeding a service interval
outputs.
• Speed-dependent engagement and disengagement
The SFA is connected to the power supply and to the of front wheel drive (in AUTO position)
BUS lines (communications lines). The BUS lines link — Above 23 km/h (14 mph) front wheel drive is
the different electronic control units. disengaged. Front wheel drive is engaged only when
braking.
If any faults occur during tractor operation, the — Below 21 km/h (13 mph) front wheel drive is
240
applicable Service Codes will be stored (see “Service reengaged. 20
Code List (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20). 3
• Engagement of front wheel drive (in front wheel drive
Functions off position)
Front wheel drive is always engaged during braking
1. Communication
• Speed-dependent engagement and disengagement
The BCU receives and processes data and then of differential lock
makes this information available to other electronic — Above 12 km/h (7.5 mph) differential lock is
control units: disengaged.
Manual engagement is possible only at speeds below
• Basic Informator 12 km/h (7.5 mph).
The digital screen displays data and values processed
and calculated by the control unit. • Control of the rear PTO.
• Electronic control units • Headland Management System (HMS)

Data is exchanged between the individual control units. The switch activates automatic engagement and
disengagement of the differential lock and front wheel
• Performance monitor2 drive.
The performance monitor’s digital screen displays data The rear PTO is also automatically disengaged but
and values processed and calculated by the control must be reengaged manually.
unit.
• Ground speed measurement
2. Control Speed is calculated on the basis of wheel revolutions
per minute and tire size and then passed on to the
• Audible alarm basic informator.
Fault diagnostics (diagnostic addresses) in the control
1
Basic Control Unit
2
If equipped
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=685
Adjustments
There is also an integrated calibration program. During

When the tractor is equipped with an on-board calibration, information on tractor-specific data and
performance monitor, ground speed is measured using associated implements is entered into the electronic
radar, wheel revolutions per minute and tire size control unit.
information. The results are displayed on the If the tractor is modified or additional accessories are
performance monitor and basic informator. installed, the appropriate addresses should be
calibrated in the control unit.
• Engine speed
Engine speed is taken from the tachometer sender, The diagnostics program is activated by inserting fuse
processed by the control unit and sent to the basic F115 in fuse box 1.
informator.
The desired information is called up by accessing a
• Signal socket diagnostics address or calibration address.
Socket for controlling implements using ground speed
and PTO speed information. Tests and adjustments are performed directly on the
tractor using the digital display or the RE39569 or
240
20 Testing, Calibrating and Adjusting RE60389 performance monitors in conjunction with
4 test lead JDG810.
The BCU contains a diagnostic program.
NOTE: The digital display and performance monitor
The diagnostics program can be used for show the same information, only the locations
troubleshooting. Error message, status, voltage, of the values shown differ.
speeds, part number, software version, tractor model
and tractor serial number information can be queried.
AG,LX25599,322 –19–01MAY00–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=686
Adjustments
BCU Addresses
All data are displayed or recalled using addresses. Display addresses

BCU addresses are numbered from "01" to "99" and 32
36
are divided into five categories. 40 to 45
62 to 65
1. Service Code Address
During tractor operation, faults due to defective or 4. Calibratable Addresses
improperly operating components or systems are These addresses are used to configure the BCU for
stored here as digital codes. the appropriate tractor model and installed
accessories.
Service code address
01 Calibratable addresses
20 to 22
2. Diagnostic Addresses 24 to 26
These addresses are used for troubleshooting and 28
35
checking associated components and systems. 240
37 to 39 20
Diagnostic addresses indicate the status of switches. 56 to 61 5
A tone is heard when a status changes. 66 to 67
92 to 95
Diagnostic addresses
02 to 09 2. Unused Addresses
11 Are not displayed.
19
Unused addresses
In diagnostic mode, the BCU briefly activates a tone if 10
a switch is activated or deactivated (changes state). 12 to 18
The performance monitor or basic informator displays 23
a "1" if the switch is closed and a "0" if the switch is 27
open. 29 to 31
33 to 34
46 to 55
3. Display Addresses 68 to 79
These addresses are used for troubleshooting and
checking associated components and systems. BCU addresses 80 to 99 are used as identification
Display addresses only show information. addresses and are treated differently. See “Electronic
These addresses display system voltage, number of Control Units - Identification Addresses”, Section 245,
starts, operating hours, wheel speed and ground Group 05.
speed.
Display addresses are write-protected.
AG,LX25599,220 –19–09FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=687
Adjustments
Diagnostic Structure (BCU)
Step
— Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”,

— Call up and delete service codes. See “Calling up and

Deleting Service Codes”, Section 245, Group 05.
— Service codes. See “Service Code List (BCU)”, Section

240, Group 20.
— Diagnostic addresses. See “Diagnostic Address List

(BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20.
240
20 — Display addresses. See “Display Address List (BCU)”,
6 Section 240, Group 20.
— Calibratable addresses. See “Calibratable Address List

(BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20.
— Identification addresses. See “Electronic Control Units -

Identification Addresses”, Section 245, Group 05.
AG,LX25599,221 –19–01FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=688
Adjustments
Service Code List (BCU)
If a voltage or a switch position is not in the valid

range, the BIF will generate and store a service code.
When the fault is identified, check the components

using the diagnostic address list. See “Diagnostic
Address List (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20.
If more than three service codes are displayed, there

may be a defective common ground.
In this case, check the corresponding ground
connection.
NOTE: The term wiring harness covers all leads in a

circuit from the fuse, via the switch to the load.
240
These leads can run over several wiring 20
harnesses and connectors. 7
Addr. = Abbreviation for address
Ld. = Abbreviation for lead
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=689
Adjustments
Service Explanation/cause of fault Solution

code no.
000 No service codes stored. Not necessary.
045 System voltage too low. Low battery charge.
Below 11.2 volts at 512 rpm. Excessive current drain.
Alternator drive belt slipping or broken.
Check wiring harness — Addr. 32 (Ld. 571 and 050).
Below 12.5 volts with engine speed over 1500 rpm. Excessive current drain.
Alternator drive belt slipping or broken.
047 System voltage too high. Jump start.
Over 15.5 volts with engine speed over 512 rpm. Batteries improperly connected.
Check alternator — Addr. 32 (Ld. 571 and 050).
072 Fault in rear PTO circuit or PTO switch. Check PTO switch — Addr. 09 (Ld. 525).
Calibration error — Addr. 28.
Check rear PTO preselector switch — Addr. 11 (Ld. 535).
240 Check wiring harness.
20
8 073 Rear PTO solenoid has failed. Check rear PTO solenoid.
Check wiring harness — Ld. 575.
BCU has failed.
075 Fault in rear PTO circuit. Check speed sensor — Addr. 04 (Ld. 523).
Rear PTO has not achieved rated speed within 20 seconds. Calibration error - Addr. 21.
Check the wiring harness.
Mechanical or hydraulic problem.
076 Fault in rear PTO circuit. Check PTO switch — Addr. 09 (Ld. 586).
Rear PTO still running 20 seconds after switching off. Check the wiring harness.
Mechanical or hydraulic problem.
080 Fault in differential lock circuit. Check differential lock switch — Addr. 07 (Ld. 522).
Differential lock engagement pulse remains active for more Check brake switch — Addr. 06 (Ld. 244 and 245).
than 15 seconds after disengagement by brake switch. Check speedometer sensor — Addr. 05 (Ld. 502 and 512).
Calibration error - Addr. 56 and 57, 58 and 59.
Check display addresses 62 and 63.
Check wiring harness.
Operator activates differential lock on starting.
081 Differential lock solenoid has failed. Check the differential lock solenoid.
BCU has failed.
085 FWD switch fault. Check FWD switch — Addr. 08 (Ld. 511 and 557).
BCU recognizes AUTO and BRAKE ASSIST as on Check brake switch — Addr. 06 (Ld. 244 and 245).
simultaneously. Calibration error — Addr. 22.
Check speedometer sensor — Addr. 05 (Ld. 502 and 512).
Calibration error — Addr. 56 and 57, 58 and 59.
Display addresses 62 and 63.
086 FWD solenoid has failed. Check the FWD solenoid.
BCU has failed.
106 BCU error (internal). Calibrate the BCU.
Replace BCU (hardware error).
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=690
Adjustments

code no.
130 Turn signal switch fault. Check the switch — Addr. 19 (Ld. 127 and 155).
BCU recognizes left and right turn signals as on Calibration error — Addr. 25.
simultaneously. Check wiring harness.
131 Fault in turn signal circuit. Check bulbs in turn signal lights.
Check wiring harness — Ld. 107 and 125.
132 Defective turn signal fuse F102 (20-amp). Fuse blown or defective.
134 HMS circuit fault. Check the switch — Addr. 08 (Ld. 542).
AG,LX25599,323 –19–01MAY00–3/3
240
20
9
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=691
Adjustments
Diagnostic Address List (BCU)
NOTE: The digit shown with an "X" in the list will have
a corresponding value on the display.
NOTE: Individual leads can run over several wiring

harnesses and connectors.
240
20
10
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=692
Adjustments
Addr. Display Value Nos. / Meaning Circuit Description - Lead Number Service
No. Position Code
01 XXX 0 0 0 or service codes. Any stored service codes. all
02 XXX b C U or 0 0 4 to 0 1 9 If a switch, sender or sensor changes state, a tone is
emitted and the associated address is displayed.
03 XXX b C U or 0 0 6 to 0 1 9 If a switch changes state, a tone is emitted and the
associated address is displayed.
04 ––X 0 = Signal not recognized. Rear PTO speed sender — Ld. 574 and 531.
1 = Signal recognized.
04 –X– 0 = Signal not recognized. Tachometer sender — Ld. 325 and 531.
04 X–– 0 = Not used.
05 ––X 0 = Signal not recognized. Radar sensor — Ld. 512 and 531.
05 –X– 0 = Signal not recognized. Speedometer sender — Ld. 502.
240
05 X–– 0 = Not used. 20
06 ––X 0 = Not used. 11
06 –X– 0 = Brake pedal depressed. Right brake switch — Ld. 245. 080
1 = Brake pedal not depressed. 085
06 X–– 0 = Brake pedal depressed. Left brake switch — Ld. 244. 080
1 = Brake pedal not depressed. 085
07 ––X 0 = Switch not activated. Differential lock switch — Ld. 522. 080
1 = Switch activated.
07 –X– 0 = Switch not activated. Neutral start switch — Ld. 311.
08 ––X 0 = FWD position. FWD switch — Ld. 557. 085
1 = Brake assist position.
08 –X– 0 = Brake assist or FWD FWD switch — Ld. 511. 085
position.
1 = Automatic position.
08 X–– 0 = Switch not activated. HMS switch — Ld. 542. 134
09 ––X 0 = Switch on. Rear PTO switch — Ld. 586. 072
1 = Switch off.
09 –X– 0 = Switch off. Rear PTO switch — Ld. 525. 076
1 = Switch on.
11 ––X 0 = Operator not seated. Seat switch — Ld. 906.
1 = Operator seated.
11 –X– 0 = Not used.
19 ––X 0 = Switch on. Hazard flasher switch — Ld. 102. 132
1 = Switch off.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=693
Adjustments
No. Position Code
19 –X– 0 = Switch not activated. Right turn signal switch — Ld. 127. 131
19 X–– 0 = Switch not activated. Left turn signal switch — Ld. 155. 131
BCU addresses 80 to 99 are used as identification Control Units - Identification Addresses”, Section 245,
addresses and are treated separately. See “Electronic Group 05.
AG,LX25599,324 –19–01MAY00–3/3
240
20
12
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-12 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=694
Adjustments
Diagnostic Addresses (BCU)
BCU diagnostics addresses 02 and 03 (test BCU diagnostic addresses 04 to 09, 11 and 19:
addresses) are used for system diagnostics. Can be used to check the function of switches,
These addresses enable the following: senders and sensors.
• Operational checkout of components and circuits. The associated diagnostics addresses can display
input signals from three different switches, senders or
• Isolating operational problems and defects in wiring sensors.
harnesses.
Each input signal is displayed at a specific location on
These addresses display first 0 2 : b C U or 0 3 : b C the digital screen. A "1" indicates a closed switch or a
U. As soon as there is a change of state (switch recognized pulse from a sender or sensor.
activation, switch state change, sender signal or
sensor signal), a tone is emitted and the address A "0" indicates an open, missing or defective switch
corresponding to the change is displayed. and/or the absence of pulses from a sender or sensor.
240
20
BCU address 02 shows switch state, sender signal A switch state change is identified by a tone and a 13
and sensor signal; BCU address 03 shows only the change in the corresponding screen position.
switch state.
AG,LX25599,325 –19–01MAY00–1/1
BCU Address 02
– – –1/1
Test address Enter program mode as described for driving the tractor in the diagnostic addresses. OK: GO TO: Activate the
(general) See “Entering Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. following switches.
Call up BCU address 02.
Indicator: 0 2 : b C U
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-13 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=695
Adjustments
Activate the following Activate the following switches and note whether a tone is heard and the data are OK: GO TO: For finishing
switches displayed when the switches are activated: the program sequence,
see “Finishing the
— Activate/deactivate rear PTO switch (BCU address 04) Program Mode”, Section
— Drive the tractor (BCU address 05) 245, Group 05.
— Brake pedal right/left (BCU address 06)
— Differential lock switch (BCU address 07) GO TO: Call up the
— FNR lever forward/reverse (BCU address 07) desired diagnostic
— Front Wheel Drive switch (BCU address 08) addresses. See
— HMS switch (BCU address 08) “Diagnostic Address List
— Activate rear PTO switch (BCU address 09) (BCU)”, Section 240,
— Stand up from / sit down on operator’s seat (BCU address 11) Group 20.
— Deactivate rear PTO switch (BCU address 09)
— Hazard flasher switch (BCU address 19) NOT OK: GO TO: Check
— Right/left turn signal switch (BCU address 19). wiring harnesses and
connections. See “Check
wiring harnesses and
connections”, Section
240, Group 20.
240
20 GO TO: For the
14 diagnostic address
required for operational
checkout, see “Diagnostic
Address List (BCU)”,
– – –1/1
Check wiring harnesses None of the other circuits that can be checked using the test address (BCU address OK: GO TO: For finishing
and connectors 02) have devices than can be activated (BCU addresses 04 and 05). These are the program sequence,
monitoring circuits used by the BCU to activate warning and/or status indications. see “Finishing the
Program Mode”, Section
If there are occasional faults in a specific circuit, the associated wiring harnesses and 245, Group 05.
connectors can be checked with the test address (BCU address 02).
GO TO: Call up the
If a tone can be heard when a wiring harness is pulled or moved (BCU address 02 desired diagnostic
recalled), this indicates a problem. Connectors can also be checked using the tone. addresses. See
“Diagnostic Address List
If a tone indicates problems with wiring harnesses or connectors, use the JT05791A (BCU)”, Section 240,
multimeter to test the associated wiring harnesses or connectors and carry out any Group 20.
necessary repairs.
NOT OK: GO TO: For the
diagnostic address
– – –1/1
BCU Address 03
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-14 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=696
Adjustments
Test address Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section OK: GO TO: For finishing
(switches) 245, Group 05. the program sequence,
Call up BCU address 03. Program Mode”, Section
245, Group 05.
Indicator: 0 3 : b C U
GO TO: Call up the
NOTE: The test address (BCU address 03) is identical to test address 02 (BCU desired diagnostic
address 02). The only difference is that rpm (BCU address 04) and ground speed addresses. See
(BCU address 05) data are ignored and no diagnostics are possible with these “Diagnostic Address List
addresses. (BCU)”, Section 240,
Group 20.
The following senders or sensors are not monitored using BCU test address 03:
BCU address 04:

Rear PTO speed
Engine speed
BCU address 05:

Ground speed 240
Wheel speed 20
15
– – –1/1
BCU Address 04
– – –1/1
Right side of display: Rear PTO must be switched off OK: GO TO: Before
Rear PTO speed sender switching on the rear
Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section PTO, see “Switching On
245, Group 05. the Rear PTO”, Section
240, Group 20.
Indicator: 0 4 : 0 1 0
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-15 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=697
Adjustments
Switching on the rear Switch on the rear PTO. OK: GO TO: For finishing
PTO the program sequence,
Indicator: 0 4 : 0 1 1 see “Finishing the
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
(BCU)”, Section 240,
Group 20.
NOT OK: GO TO: Check

resistance at sender. See
“Checking resistance at
sender”, Section 240,
Group 20.
240
20
16
– – –1/1
Checking resistance at Stop engine. OK: GO TO: Check

sender wiring harness and
Turn off the key switch. connections. See “Check
wiring harness and
Unplug the sender and measure resistance at the sender terminals using multimeter connections”, Section
JT05791A. 240, Group 20.
Resistance should be approx. 660 ohms. NOT OK: Replace

sender.
GO TO: Repeat check on

rear PTO speed sender.
See “BCU address 04”,
– – –1/1
Check wiring harness Turn main switch to the OFF position. OK: Repair the harness
and connectors or connector.
Check circuit 574 for continuity or shorted circuit. See “SE16E-Basic Control Unit BCU
(Rear PTO without HMS)”, Section 240, Group 15. GO TO: Repeat check on
rear PTO speed sender.
Check circuit 531 for continuity or shorted circuit. See “SE16E-Basic Control Unit BCU See “BCU address 04”,
(Rear PTO without HMS)”, Section 240, Group 15. Section 240, Group 20.
Check connectors for damage or corrosion.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-16 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=698
Adjustments
Center display: Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section OK: GO TO: For finishing
Tachometer sender 245, Group 05. the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
Rear PTO must be switched off. desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

resistance at sender. See
“Checking resistance at
sender”, Section 240,
Group 20.
240
20
17
– – –1/1
Checking resistance at Stop engine. OK: GO TO: Check

Turn main switch to the OFF position. connections. See “Check
wiring harness and
Unplug the sender and measure resistance at the sender terminals using multimeter connections”, Section
JT05791A. 240, Group 20.

sender.

tachometer sender. See
“BCU address 04”,
– – –1/1
Check circuit 325 for continuity or shorted circuit. See “SE16H-Basic Control Unit
(BCU) (Speed Sending Units)”, Section 240, Group 15. GO TO: Repeat check on
Check circuit 531 for continuity or shorted circuit. See “SE16E-Basic Control Unit “BCU address 04”,
(BCU) (Speed Sending Units)”, Section 240, Group 15. Section 240, Group 20.
– – –1/1
BCU Address 05
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-17 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=699
Adjustments
Right side of display: OK: GO TO: Before test

Ground speed sensor CAUTION: To avoid possible eye damage do not look directly into sensor driving the tractor, see
(tractors with radar face. “Test-driving the tractor”,
sensor only) Section 240, Group 20.
Enter program mode as described for driving the tractor in the diagnostic addresses.
See “Entering Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05.
Call up BCU address 05
– – –1/1
Test-driving the tractor Drive the tractor and observe the display. OK: GO TO: For finishing
the program sequence,
240
20
18
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.
NOT OK: GO TO: Before

doing a visual check, see
“Visual check”, Section
240, Group 20.
– – –1/1
Visual check Stop engine. OK: GO TO: Check

wiring harness and
Turn main switch to the OFF position. connections. See “Check
wiring harness and
Check the sensor and wiring harness for visible damage. connections”, Section
240, Group 20.
NOT OK: Repair the

sensor or wiring harness.

ground speed sensor.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-18 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=700
Adjustments
Check (10-amp) fuse F113 circuit. See “SE16C-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Differential
Lock)”, Section 240, Group 15. GO TO: Repeat check on
ground speed sensor.
Check circuit 512 for continuity or shorted circuit. See “SE16D-Basic Control Unit See “BCU address 05”,
(BCU) (Radar)”, Section 240, Group 15. Section 240, Group 20.
Check circuit 531 for continuity or shorted circuit. See “SE16D-Basic Control Unit
(BCU) (Radar)”, Section 240, Group 15.
Check circuit 973 for continuity or shorted circuit. See “SE16D-Basic Control Unit
(BCU) (Radar)”, Section 240, Group 15.
Turn on the key switch.
Use multimeter JT05791A to measure voltage to ground at contacts 3 and 4 (lead 973)
of the sensor connector. 240
20
The multimeter should indicate battery voltage. 19
– – –1/1
Center display: Enter program mode as described for driving the tractor in the diagnostic addresses. OK: GO TO: Test-driving
Speedometer sending See “Entering Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. the tractor
unit
– – –1/1
Test-driving the tractor Drive the tractor and observe the display. OK: GO TO: For finishing
on tractors without radar. Program Mode”, Section
245, Group 05.
on tractors with radar. GO TO: Call up the
desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

resistance at sender
(tractors without creeper).
“See Checking
Resistance at Sender
(Tractors Without
Creeper)”, Section 240,
Group 20.
OR
GO TO: Check the Hall

sending unit (tractors with
creeper). See “Checking
the Hall Sending Unit
(Tractors With Creeper)”,
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-19 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=701
Adjustments
Check resistance at Stop engine. OK: GO TO: Check

(tractors without creeper) Turn main switch to the OFF position. connections. See “Check
wiring harness and
Pull out the plug on the sender and measure resistance at the sender terminals using connections”, Section
multimeter JT05791A. 240, Group 20.

sender.

speedometer. See “BCU
address 05”, Section 240,
Group 20.
– – –1/1
Check the Hall sending Turn main switch to the OFF position. OK: GO TO: Check
unit wiring harness and
240
(tractors with creeper) Remove the plug from the Hall effect sender. connections. See “Check
20
wiring harness and
20
Remove the Hall sending unit. connections”, Section
240, Group 20.
Re-install the plug.
NOT OK: Replace the
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. Hall sending unit.
Call up BCU address 05. GO TO: Repeat check on

Indicator: 0 5 : 0 0 0 address 05”, Section 240,
Group 20.
Move a screwdriver blade rapidly back and forth in front of the Hall sending unit.
Observe the display and listen for the tone.
The center display should alternate between "0" and "1" and a tone should be heard at
the same time.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-20 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=702
Adjustments
Check circuit 502 for continuity or shorted circuit (BCU plug contact 44). See
“SE16H-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Speed Sending Units)”, Section 240, Group 15. GO TO: Repeat check on
Check circuit 531 for continuity or shorted circuit (BCU plug contact 4). See address 05”, Section 240,
“SE16H-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Speed Sending Units)”, Section 240, Group 15. Group 20.
Check circuit 973 for continuity or shorted circuit (tractors with creeper only). See
“SE16H-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Speed Sending Units)”, Section 240, Group 15.
Check (10-amp) fuse F113 circuit. See “SE16C-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Differential
Lock)”, Section 240, Group 15.
Turn on the key switch.
Tractor models 6110-6610

Use multimeter JT05791A to measure the voltage at contact C of the speedometer 240
sender. 20
21
Tractor models 6810-6910
Use multimeter JT05791A to measure the voltage at contact A of the speedometer
sender.
The multimeter should indicate battery voltage.
– – –1/1
BCU address 06
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-21 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=703
Adjustments
Center display: Right brake pedal not depressed. OK: GO TO: Apply the
Right brake switch right brake pedal. See
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. “Right brake pedal
applied”, Section 240,
Call up BCU address 06. Group 20.
Indicator: 0 6 : 1 1 0 NOT OK: If "0" appears

on display:
GO TO: Check right

brake switch. See
“SE16A-Basic Control
Unit (BCU) (Braking
System)”, Section 240,
Group 15.
GO TO: Check circuit 245

for continuity or shorted
circuit. See “SE16A-Basic
240 Control Unit (BCU)
20 (Braking System)”,
GO TO: Check (20-amp)

fuse F112. See
Unit (BCU) (Braking
Group 15.

the right brake switch.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-22 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=704
Adjustments
Right brake pedal Depress the right brake pedal. OK: GO TO: For finishing
applied the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.
NOT OK: If "1" appears

on display:
GO TO: Check right

brake switch. See
Unit (BCU) (Braking 240
System)”, Section 240, 20
Group 15. 23

Control Unit (BCU)
(Braking System)”,

fuse F112. See
Unit (BCU) (Braking
Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-23 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=705
Adjustments
Left side of display: Left brake pedal not depressed. OK: GO TO: Apply the
Left brake switch right brake pedal. See
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. “Right brake pedal
applied”, Section 240,

on display:
GO TO: Check left brake

switch. See “SE16A-Basic
Control Unit (BCU)

Control Unit (BCU)
24
fuse F112. See
Unit (BCU) (Braking
Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-24 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=706
Adjustments
Left brake pedal applied Depress the left brake pedal. OK: GO TO: For finishing
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check left brake

Control Unit (BCU)
(Braking System)”, 240
Section 240, Group 15. 20
25
Control Unit (BCU)

fuse F112. See
Unit (BCU) (Braking
Group 15.

– – –1/1
BCU Address 07
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-25 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=707
Adjustments
Right side of display: Differential lock switch disengaged. OK: GO TO: Before
Differential lock switch engaging the differential
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. lock switch, see
“Engaging the Differential
Call up BCU address 07. Lock Switch”, Section
240, Group 20.
on display:
GO TO: Check the

differential lock switch.
See “SE16C-Basic
Control Unit (BCU)
(Differential Lock)”,

240 circuit. See “SE16C-Basic
26 (Differential Lock)”,

fuse F113 circuit. See
“SE16C-Basic Control
Unit (BCU) (Differential
Lock)”, Section 240,
Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-26 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=708
Adjustments
Engaging the differential Engage the differential lock switch. OK: GO TO: For finishing
lock switch the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the

See “SE16C-Basic
Control Unit (BCU) 240
(Differential Lock)”, 20

circuit. See “SE16C-Basic
Control Unit (BCU)
(Differential Lock)”,

Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-27 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=709
Adjustments
Center display: Reverser lever or gear shift lever in neutral. OK: GO TO: Engage the
Neutral start switch reverser lever or gear
Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section shift lever. See “Engaging
245, Group 05. the reverser lever or gear
shift lever”, Section 240,

on display:
GO TO: Check the

neutral start switch. See
“SE1-Starter Motor and
Charging Circuit”, Section
240, Group 15.

circuit. See “SE1-Starter
240 Motor and Charging
20 Circuit”, Section 240,
28 Group 15, and also see
“SE16H-Basic Control
Unit (BCU) (Speed
Sending Units)”, Section
240, Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-28 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=710
Adjustments
Engaging the reverser Engage the reverser lever or shift lever. OK: GO TO: For finishing
lever or gear shift lever the program sequence,
Indicator: 0 7 : 0 0 0 see “Entering Program
Mode”, Section 245,
Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the

“SE1-Starter Motor and
Charging Circuit”, Section 240
240, Group 15. 20
29
circuit. See “SE1-Starter
Motor and Charging
Circuit”, Section 240,
Group 15, and also see
“SE16H-Basic Control
Unit (BCU) (Speed
Sending Units)”, Section
240, Group 15.

– – –1/1
BCU Address 08
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-29 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=711
Adjustments
Right side of display: Set the FWD switch to the brake assist position (FWD off). OK: GO TO: FWD switch
Front-wheel drive switch set for FWD engagement.
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. See “FWD switch set for
FWD engagement”,
Call up BCU address 08. Section 240, Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the FWD

switch. See
“SE16G-Basic Control
Unit (BCU) (FWD without
HMS)”, Section 240,
Group 15.
GO TO: Check brake

Control Unit (BCU)
30
circuit. See “SE16G-Basic
Control Unit (BCU) (FWD
without HMS)”, Section
240, Group 15.

Group 15.

FWD switch. See “BCU
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-30 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=712
Adjustments
FWD switch set for FWD Set the FWD switch to "FWD engaged". OK: GO TO: For finishing
engagement the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.
GO TO: FWD switch set

to "automatic". See
“Center display: FWD
switch set to "automatic"”,
NOT OK: If "1" appears 240

on display: 20
31
switch. See
“SE16G-Basic Control
Unit (BCU) (FWD without
HMS)”, Section 240,
Group 15.
GO TO: Check brake

Control Unit (BCU)

circuit. See “SE16G-Basic
Control Unit (BCU) (FWD
240, Group 15.

Group 15.

Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-31 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=713
Adjustments
Center display: Set the FWD switch to "automatic". OK: GO TO: For finishing
FWD switch set to the program sequence,
"automatic" (tractors Indicator: 0 8 : 0 1 0 see “Finishing the
with HMS only) Program Mode”, Section
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:

switch. See “SE16I-Basic
Control Unit (BCU)
240 (HMS)”, Section 240,
20 Group 15.
32
GO TO: Check brake
Control Unit (BCU)

circuit. See “SE16I-Basic
Control Unit (BCU)
(HMS)”, Section 240,
Group 15.

Group 15.

Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-32 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=714
Adjustments
Left side of display: HMS switch off. OK: GO TO: Activate

Switch for Headland HMS switch. See
Management System Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. “Activate the HMS
(HMS) switch”, Section 240,

on display:
GO TO: Check the HMS

Control Unit (BCU)
Group 15.

Control Unit (BCU)
(HMS)”, Section 240, 240
Group 15. 20
33
Group 15.

HMS switch. See “BCU
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-33 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=715
Adjustments
Activating the HMS Activate the HMS switch. OK: GO TO: For finishing
switch the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the HMS

Control Unit (BCU)
240 (HMS)”, Section 240,
20 Group 15.
34
Control Unit (BCU)
Group 15.

Group 15.

HMS switch. See “BCU
Group 20.
– – –1/1
BCU Address 09
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-34 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=716
Adjustments
Right side of display and Set rear PTO switch to "off" position. OK: GO TO: Rear PTO
center of display: switch set to "on". See
Rear PTO switch Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. “Rear PTO switch set to
"on"”, Section 240, Group
Call up BCU address 09. 20.
Indicator: 0 9 : 0 0 1 NOT OK: If "0 0" appears

on display:
GO TO: Check the rear

PTO switch. See
“SE16E-Basic Control
Unit (BCU) (Rear PTO
240, Group 15.

circuit. See “SE16E-Basic
Control Unit BCU (Rear 240
PTO without HMS)”, 20

Group 15.

rear PTO switch. See
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-35 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=717
Adjustments
Rear PTO switch set to Set rear PTO switch to "on" position. OK: GO TO: For finishing
"on" the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.
NOT OK: If "0 0" appears

on display:
GO TO: Check the rear

PTO switch. See
“SE16E-Basic Control
240 Unit (BCU) (Rear PTO
20 without HMS)”, Section
36 240, Group 15.

Control Unit BCU (Rear
PTO without HMS)”,

Group 15.

rear PTO switch. See
– – –1/1
BCU Address 11
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-36 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=718
Adjustments
Right side of display: Operator seated in operator’s seat. OK: GO TO: Operator not
Seat switch seated in operator’s seat.
Set rear PTO switch to "on" position. See “Operator not seated
in operator’s seat”,
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. Section 240, Group 20.
Call up BCU address 11. NOT OK: If "0" appears

on display:
GO TO: Check the seat
switch. See “SE16E-Basic
Control Unit (BCU) (Rear

37
seat switch. See “BCU
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-37 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=719
Adjustments
Operator not seated in Stand up from operator’s seat. OK: GO TO: For finishing
operator’s seat the program sequence,
Set rear PTO switch to "off" position. 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:

240 PTO without HMS)”,
38

seat switch. See “BCU
Group 20.
– – –1/1
BCU Address 19
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-38 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=720
Adjustments
Right side of display: Set the hazard flasher switch to "off". OK: GO TO: Set the
Hazard flasher switch hazard flasher switch to
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. "on". See “Hazard flasher
switch set to "on"”,

on display:
GO TO: Check the

hazard flasher switch.
See “SE16B-Basic
Control Unit BCU (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Signals)”, Section 240,
Group 15.

circuit. See “SE16B-Basic 240
(Hazard Flasher and Turn 39
Group 15.

fuse F102. See
“SE16B-Basic Control
Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-39 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=721
Adjustments
Hazard flasher switch set Set the hazard flasher switch to "on". OK: GO TO: For finishing
to "on" the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the

See “SE16B-Basic
240 Control Unit BCU (Hazard
20 Flasher and Turn
40 Signals)”, Section 240,
Group 15.

circuit. See “SE16B-Basic
Control Unit (BCU)
(Hazard Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

fuse F102. See
Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-40 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=722
Adjustments
Center display: Move the turn signal lever to "off". OK: GO TO: Move the
Right turn signal switch turn signal lever to "right
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. turn" position. See “Turn
signal lever set to "right
Call up BCU address 19. turn"”, Section 240,
Group 20.
on display:
GO TO: Check the

right-turn switch. See
Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

for continuity or shorted 240
Group 15.

Group 15.

right-turn signal switch.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-41 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=723
Adjustments
Turn signal lever set to Call up BCU address 11. OK: GO TO: Left-turn
"right turn" switch. See “Left-turn
Indicator: 1 1 : 0 0 0 switch”, Section 240,
Group 20.
Move the turn signal lever to "right turn".
GO TO: For finishing the
Indicator: 1 9 : 0 1 0 program sequence, see
“Finishing the Program
Move the turn signal lever to "off". Mode”, Section 245,
Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

240 on display:
20
42 GO TO: Check the
Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

Control Unit (BCU)
Group 15.

Group 15.

turn signal switch. See
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-42 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=724
Adjustments
Left side of display: Move the turn signal lever to "off". OK: GO TO: Move the
Left-turn switch turn signal lever to "left
signal lever set to "left
Call up BCU address 19. turn"”, Section 240,
Group 20.
on display:
GO TO: Check the

Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

Group 15.

Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-43 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=725
Adjustments
Turn signal lever set to Call up BCU address 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
"left turn" the program sequence,
Move the turn signal lever to "left turn". 245, Group 05.
Indicator: 1 9 : 1 0 0 GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
Move the turn signal lever to "off". addresses. See
Indicator: 1 9 : 0 0 0 (BCU)”, Section 240,
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the

240 Unit (BCU) (Hazard
20 Flasher and Turn
44 Signals)”, Section 240,
Group 15.

Control Unit (BCU)
Group 15.

Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-44 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=726
Adjustments
Display Address List (BCU)
Display addresses only show information. They can

consist of three, six or nine digits. Since only three For example: BCU addresses 40 to 42 show the
digits can be stored at each address, the information is number of starts. For 1234 starts, the BCU addresses
distributed over one, two or three addresses. are 40:000, 41:001 and 42:234.
Addr. No. Displayed Information Displayed Digits Service

Code
32 System voltage 3 digits 045
046
047
36 Time since last service in hours 3 digits
40 Number of starts first 3 digits
41 Number of starts middle 3 digits
42 Number of starts last 3 digits 240
43 Engine hours first 3 digits 20
45
44 Engine hours middle 3 digits
45 Engine hours last 3 digits
62 Current wheel speed in km/h km/h (full number)
63 Current wheel speed in km/h km/h (fraction)
64 Current ground speed in km/h km/h (full number)
65 Current ground speed in km/h km/h (fraction)
addresses and are treated differently. See “Electronic Group 05.
AG,LX25599,226 –19–01FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-45 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=727
Adjustments
Display Addresses (BCU)
AG,LX25599,227 –19–01FEB00–1/1
BCU address 32
– – –1/1
System voltage Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
240
Call up BCU address 32. see “Finishing the
20
46
With the engine OFF, the voltage should be between 12.4 and 12.7 volts. 245, Group 05.
With the engine running (1500 rpm), the voltage should be between 13.2 and 14.8 GO TO: Check the
volts. alternator. See “Checking
the Alternator”, Section
If the voltage (based on engine speed) is outside of this range for more than two 240, Group 25.
seconds, a service code (45, 46, 47) will be stored.
Check alternator drive
belt.
GO TO: Check the

battery. See “Checking
the Battery”, Section 240,
Group 25.
GO TO: Call up the

desired address. See
“Display Address List
Group 20.
– – –1/1
BCU address 36
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-46 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=728
Adjustments
Time elapsed since last Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
service the program sequence,
This address shows the number of operating hours elapsed since the last service was 245, Group 05.
performed.
The value can be between 1 and 1024. GO TO: Call up the
Group 20.
– – –1/1
BCU addresses 40 to 42
240
20
47
– – –1/1
Number of starts Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Call up BCU address 42 or see “Finishing the
BCU address 41 or Program Mode”, Section
BCU address 40. 245, Group 05.
Displays the total number of start attempts since the tractor was manufactured. A start GO TO: Call up the
is counted when the key switch is turned to IGN (on) and the engine speed reaches at desired address. See
least 1024 rpm. “Display Address List
NOTE: The "number of starts" display consists of nine digits. Since only three digits Group 20.
can be displayed at each address, the information is distributed over three addresses.
1234 starts
BCU address 40:000
BCU address 41:001
BCU address 42:234
– – –1/1
BCU addresses 43 to 45
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-47 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=729
Adjustments
Engine hours Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Call up BCU address 45 or see “Finishing the
BCU address 44 or Program Mode”, Section
Displays the total number of engine operating hours since the tractor was GO TO: Call up the
manufactured. Operating hours are counted when the key switch is turned to IGN (on) desired address. See
and the engine speed is at least 512 rpm. “Display Address List
NOTE: The engine operating hours display consists of nine digits. Since only three Group 20.
digits can be displayed at each address, the information is distributed over three
addresses.
For example: 9876.5 operating hours
BCU address 43:000
BCU address 44:098
BCU address 45:76.5
240
20
48
– – –1/1
BCU addresses 62 and 63
– – –1/1
Current wheel speed Enter program mode as described for driving the tractor in the diagnostic addresses. OK: GO TO: For finishing
See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. the program sequence,
Call up BCU address 63 or Program Mode”, Section
Drive the tractor and observe the display. GO TO: Call up the
The current wheel speed value in km/h is displayed. “Display Address List
The km/h (full number) is displayed in BCU address 62. Group 20.
The km/h (fractional number) is displayed in BCU address 63. NOT OK: GO TO: Check
the speedometer. See
NOTE: Current wheel speed is displayed as a six-digit number. Since only three digits “BCU address 05”,
can be displayed at each address, the information is distributed over two addresses. Section 240, Group 20.
BCU address 62 displays whole km/h, and BCU address 63 displays the fractional
km/h.
For example: Wheel speed = 12.4 km/h
BCU address 62:012
BCU address 63:400
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-48 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=730
Adjustments
Current ground speed OK: GO TO: For finishing

(tractors with radar CAUTION: To avoid possible eye damage do not look directly into sensor the program sequence,
sensor only) face. see “Finishing the
Enter program mode as described for driving the tractor in the diagnostic addresses. 245, Group 05.
See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
Call up BCU address 65 or desired address. See
BCU address 64. “Display Address List
Drive the tractor and observe the display. Group 20.
The current ground speed value in km/h is displayed. NOT OK: GO TO: Check
the ground speed sensor.
The km/h (full number) is displayed in BCU address 64. See “BCU address 05”,
The km/h (fractional number) is displayed in BCU address 65.
NOTE: Current ground speed is displayed as a six-digit number. Since only three digits
can be displayed at each address, the information is distributed over two addresses. 240
BCU address 64 displays whole km/h, and BCU address 65 displays the fractional 20
km/h. 49
For example: Ground speed = 3.2 km/h
BCU address 62:003
BCU address 63:200
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-49 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=731
Adjustments
Calibration (BCU)
AG,LX25599,228 –19–01FEB00–1/1
Perform calibration
– – –1/1
Calibration with digital Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
display the program sequence,
240
Select the address to be calibrated from the list of calibration addresses (BCU). See see “Finishing the
20
“Calibration Address List (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. Program Mode”, Section
50
245, Group 05.
Move the turn signal lever forward (right turn signal position) until the desired address
appears. GO TO: Call up the
desired calibration
Activate the flash-to-pass for more than 2 seconds. address. See “Calibration
The rightmost digit begins to blink on the display. Section 240, Group 20.
appears (incrementing order).
Activate the flash-to-pass for less than 2 seconds.
The center digit begins to blink on the display.
Perform the same procedure with the next digits.
Activating the flash-to-pass function for more than 2 seconds reverses the changes.
Once all digits are correctly set, turn the hazard light switch on and off. The changed
values are stored.
NOTE: Calibration can be stopped at any time.

However, if any data have been changed but not stored prior to ending calibration,
these changes are lost.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-50 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=732
Adjustments
Calibration with the Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
performance monitor the program sequence,
Select the address to be calibrated from the list of calibration addresses (BCU). See see “Finishing the
“Calibration Address List (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. Program Mode”, Section
245, Group 05.
Press the "2" button until the desired address appears.
GO TO: Call up the
Press the "Store" button. desired calibration
address. See “Calibration
The leftmost digit begins to blink on the display. Address List (BCU)”,
The value of the blinking digit can be changed with a number key.
Now the next digit begins to flash automatically.
Pressing the "Clear" button reverses the changes.
Once all digits are set to the correct value, store the number using the "Set" button. 240
20
NOTE: Calibration can be stopped at any time. 51
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-51 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=733
Adjustments
Calibration Address List (BCU)
Calibration addresses are used to configure the BCU

for the appropriate tractor model and installed
accessories.
IMPORTANT: Entering a number other than the

one specified can result in improper
operation of the applicable circuit or
system and can damage the control
unit.
Calibration addresses can consist of three or six digits.

Since only three digits can be stored at each address,
the information is distributed over one or two
addresses. When calibrating these addresses, the
240
20 display automatically jumps to the next higher or lower
52 address.
E.g.: BCU addresses 56 and 57 indicate the rolling

radius. If the rolling radius is 820, the BCU addresses
shown will be 56:008 and 57:20.0.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-52 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=734
Adjustments
Addr. No. Data Displayed Displayed Figures / Input for Model or Equipment
20 Tachometer sender. 0 3 0 = all models.
Pulses per engine revolution.
21 Rear PTO speed sender. 0 4 0 = all models.
Pulses per PTO shaft revolution.
22 Front wheel drive control function. 0 0 0 = without FWD.
0 0 1 = with FWD.
24 Units of measurement used in displays. 0 0 0 = non-metric units (mph; ft etc.)a.
0 0 1 = metric units (km/h; m etc.)a.
25 Turn signal setting. 0 0 0 = turn signal w/o audible indication.
0 0 2 = turn signal with audible indicationb.
26 Automatic error clearing. 0 0 0 = automatic clearing off.
0 0 1 = automatic clearing onb.
28 Rear PTO configuration. 0 0 0 = without rear PTO.
0 0 1 = with rear PTO.
35 Service interval setting. 2 5 0 = all models.
240
37 Configuration of control displays. 0 0 0 = basic informator (standard version). 20
0 0 1 = Dual Gauge Plus II. 53
0 0 2 = performance monitor.
38 Bulb test. 0 0 0 = all indicator lightsb.
0 0 1 = warning lights, and PTO/turn signal indicators only.
0 0 2 = no bulb test.
39 Rear PTO shutoff value. 0 2 5 = with HMS only.
56 Rolling radius (first 3 digits). 0 0 X = see table "Calibrating the Rolling Radius".
(X stands for a displayed digit).
57 Rolling radius (last 3 digits). X X.0 = see table "Calibrating the Rolling Radius".
58 Transm. pulses per axle revolution (first 3 digits). 0 0 1 = all models.
59 Transm. pulses per axle revolution (last 3 digits). 2 6 9 = all models.
60 Calibration factor for ground speed (first 3 digits). 0 0 5 = all models.
61 Calibration factor for ground speed (last 3 digits). 7 4 2 = all models.
66 Mode for HMS (first 3 digits). 0 0 0 = without HMS.
1 0 0 = with HMS.
67 Mode for HMS (last 3 digits). 0 0 0 = all models.
92 Designation of tractor model (first 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 0 0 6c.
E.g. 6410
93 Designation of tractor model (last 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 4 1 0c.
E.g. 6410
a
Varies depending on country
b
Factory setting
c
X stands for a displayed digit
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-53 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=735
Adjustments
94 Tractor serial number (first 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 1 2 3c.
E.g. 123456
95 Tractor serial number (last 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 4 5 6c.
E.g. 123456
c
240
20
54
AG,LX25599,326 –19–01MAY00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-54 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=736
Adjustments
Calibration Addresses (BCU)
AG,LX25599,230 –19–01FEB00–1/1
Address BCU 20
– – –1/1
Tachometer sender Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Pulses per engine the program sequence,
240
revolution Call up BCU address 20. see “Finishing the
20
55
Input: 0 3 0 245, Group 05.
For all tractor models.
GO TO: Call up the
Store the value. desired calibration
– – –1/1
Address BCU 21
– – –1/1
Rear PTO speed sender Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Pulses per PTO shaft the program sequence,
revolution Call up BCU address 21. see “Finishing the
Input: 0 4 0 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
– – –1/1
Address BCU 22
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-55 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=737
Adjustments
Front wheel drive control Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
function the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
For all tractor models without FWD.
GO TO: Call up the
Input: 0 0 1 desired calibration
For all tractor models with FWD. address. See “Calibration
NOTE: If the tractor has FWD and "0 0 0" is keyed in at this address, FWD remains Section 240, Group 20.
engaged all the time. The FWD indicator light does not come on, and no self-diagnosis
takes place.
Store the value.
240
20
56
– – –1/1
Address BCU 24
– – –1/1
Units of measurement Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
used in displays the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
For non-metric units (speed in mph, length in ft, etc.)
GO TO: Call up the
For metric units (speed in km/h, length in m, etc.) address. See “Calibration
Store the value. Section 240, Group 20.
– – –1/1
Address BCU 25
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-56 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=738
Adjustments
Turn signal setting Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
Turn signal without audible indication.
GO TO: Call up the
Turn signal with audible indication. address. See “Calibration
– – –1/1
Address BCU 26
240
20
57
– – –1/1
Automatic error clearing Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
Automatic clearing off.
GO TO: Call up the
Automatic clearing on. address. See “Calibration
NOTE: When the automatic clearing function is activated, all service codes in the Section 240, Group 20.
memory will be cleared as soon as the engine is started for the eighth time.
If the function is off, service codes will remain stored.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
Address BCU 28
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-57 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=739
Adjustments
Rear PTO configuration Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
For tractors without rear PTO.
GO TO: Call up the
For tractors with rear PTO. address. See “Calibration
NOTE: This calibration is required to activate the rear PTO and the warning functions Section 240, Group 20.
that indicate faults in the rear PTO circuit.
If the tractor has a rear PTO and "0 0 0" is entered here, neither the warning systems
nor self-diagnostics will work.
Store the value.
240
20
58
– – –1/1
Address BCU 35
– – –1/1
Service interval setting Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Input: 2 5 0 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
NOTE: After the time period (operating hours) elapses, a tone is heard in tractors not desired calibration
equipped with a performance monitor. address. See “Calibration
– – –1/1
Address BCU 37
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-58 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=740
Adjustments
Configuration of control Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
displays the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
For all tractor models with basic informator (standard version).
GO TO: Call up the
For all tractor models with Dual Gauge Plus II. address. See “Calibration
Input: 0 0 2 Section 240, Group 20.
For all tractor models with performance monitor.
Store the value.

– – –1/1
Address BCU 38
240
20
59
– – –1/1
Bulb test Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Call up address 38. see “Finishing the
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
All the indicator lights are powered for 1 second.
GO TO: Call up the
Only the warning lights and PTO/turn signal indicator lights are powered for 1 second address. See “Calibration
No bulb test
NOTE: In every case, the warning lights will be powered when engine speed falls
below 512 rpm.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
Address BCU 39
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-59 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=741
Adjustments
Rear PTO shutoff value Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
(tractors with HMS only) the program sequence,
Input: 0 2 5 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
NOTE: This value defines the point at which the rear PTO is automatically disengaged desired calibration
by the HMS system. address. See “Calibration
The rear PTO disengages 25 points above the rockshaft position after activation of the Address List (BCU)”,
three-point hitch operating switch. The value can be between 0 and 255. Section 240, Group 20.
Store the value.
– – –1/1

240
20
60
– – –1/1
Rolling radius Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For the
(6-digit) chart for calibrating the
Call up BCU address 56. rolling radius, see “Chart
for Calibrating the Rolling
Input: 0 0 X Radius”, Section 240,
See chart. Group 20.
Input: X X.0
See chart.
(X stands for a digit that has to be keyed in).
NOTE: These addresses indicate the rolling radius of the rear wheels in mm.
The value is used to calculate wheel speed, distance traveled and area worked.
The ground speed sensor is used for this calculation if installed.
NOTE: The rolling radius consists of six digits and has to be stored in two different
addresses (56 and 57). Three digits of the six-digit value are entered in each of these
addresses; the first three in BCU address 56 and the last three in BCU address 57.
Enter the first three digits of the value in BCU address 56.
Example: "0 0 8" for 18.4R38 tires.
Once the three digits are entered in BCU address 56, the display automatically
changes to BCU address 57.
Enter the last three digits of the value in BCU address 57.
Example: "2 0.0" for 18.4R38 tires.
Store the value.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-60 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=742
Adjustments
Rolling radius calibration Tire size Input at addr. Input at addr. OK: GO TO: For finishing
chart 56 57 the program sequence,
16.9R24 006 2 0.0 see “Finishing the
18.4R26 006 7 0.0 Program Mode”, Section
16.9R30 006 9 5.0 245, Group 05.
18.4R30 007 2 0.0
23.1R30 008 0 5.0 GO TO: Call up the
16.9R34 007 4 5.0 desired calibration
18.4R34 007 7 0.0 address. See “Calibration
420/85R34 007 4 5.0 Address List (BCU)”,
460/85R34 007 7 0.0 Section 240, Group 20.
480/70R34 007 4 5.0
520/70R34 007 7 0.0
13.6R38 007 4 0.0
14.9R38 007 6 5.0
15.5R38 007 4 5.0
16.9R38 007 9 5.0
18.4R38 008 2 0.0
20.8R38 008 5 5.0
420/85R38 007 9 5.0 240
460/85R38 008 2 0.0 20
480/70R38 007 9 5.0 61
520/85R38 008 5 5.0
520/70R38 008 2 0.0
540/65R38 007 9 5.0
580/70R38 008 5 5.0
600/65R38 008 2 0.0
650/65R38 008 5 5.0
12.4R42 007 7 7.0
13.6R46 008 7 4.0
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-61 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=743
Adjustments
Transmission pulses per Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
axle revolution (6-digit) the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 1 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
Call up BCU address 59. desired calibration
Input: 2 6 9 Address List (BCU)”,
For all tractor models. Section 240, Group 20.
NOTE: This value is used to calculate wheel speed, distance traveled and area
worked.
NOTE: The transmission pulse/axle revolution value consists of six digits and must be
stored at two different addresses (58 and 59). Three digits of the six-digit value are
entered at each of these addresses; the first three in BCU address 58 and the last
three in BCU address 59.
240
20 For all tractor models enter "0 0 1" as the first three digits in BCU address 58.
62
Enter the last three digits in BCU address 59. The digits are:
"2 6 9" for all tractors.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-62 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=744
Adjustments
Calibration factor for Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
ground speed (6-digit) the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 5 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
Input: 7 4 2 Address List (BCU)”,
For all tractor models. Section 240, Group 20.
NOTE: This value is used to calibrate the ground speed sensor (radar sensor).
NOTE: The ground speed calibration value consists of six digits and has to be entered
in two different addresses (60 and 61). Three digits of the six-digit value are entered at
each of these addresses; the first three in BCU address 60 and the last three in BCU
address 61.
For all tractor models enter "0 0 5" as the first three digits in BCU address 60. 240
20
Once the three digits are entered in BCU address 60, the display automatically 63
For all tractor models, enter "7 4 2" as the last three digits in BCU address 61.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-63 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=745
Adjustments
Mode for HMS (6-digit) Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
without HMS.
GO TO: Call up the
with HMS. address. See “Calibration
Input: 0 0 0
NOTE: The HMS mode value consists of six digits and must be entered in two different
addresses (66 and 67). Three digits of the six-digit value are entered at each of these
addresses; the first three in BCU address 66 and the last three in BCU address 67.
240 On all tractors without HMS, enter "0 0 0" as the first three digits at BCU address 66.
20 For all tractors with HMS, enter "1 0 0" as the first three digits at BCU address 66.
64
For all tractor models, enter "0 0 0" as the last three digits in BCU address 67.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-64 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=746
Adjustments
Designation of tractor Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
model (6-digit) the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 X 245, Group 05.
X stands for a digit that has to be keyed in.
GO TO: Call up the
Input: X X X Address List (BCU)”,
X stands for a digit that has to be keyed in. Section 240, Group 20.
NOTE: The tractor model designation consists of six digits and has to be entered in
two different addresses (92 and 93). Three digits of the six-digit value are entered at
address 93.
Example: Tractor model 6410.
Enter “ 0 0 6” as the first three digits in BCU address 92. 240

20
Once the three digits are entered in BCU address 92, the display automatically 65
Enter the last three digits in BCU address 93. The digits are: “4 1 0”.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-65 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=747
Adjustments
Tractor serial number Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
(6-digit) the program sequence,
Input: X X X 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
Input: X X X Address List (BCU)”,
NOTE: The tractor serial number value consists of six digits and has to be entered in
address 95.
Example: Tractor serial number 123456.
240 Enter “ 1 2 3” as the first three digits in BCU address 94.

20
66 Once the three digits are entered in BCU address 94, the display automatically
Enter the last three digits in BCU address 95. The digits are: “4 5 6 ”.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-66 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=748
Adjustments
General Information Concerning the Basic Informator (BIF)
Description The diagnostics program can be used for

troubleshooting. Error message, status, voltage,
The basic informator (BIF)1 controls the display, speeds, part number, software version, tractor model
indicators and instruments. The basic informator and tractor serial number information can be queried.
controls, coordinates and manages functions, recalls
required data, logically links data, compares actual and There is also an integrated calibration program. During
desired values and controls inputs and outputs. calibration, the basic informator is configured for
tractor-specific data and associated implements. If the
The basic informator is connected to the power supply, tractor is modified or additional accessories are
sender wiring and to the BUS (communications) lines. installed, the appropriate addresses should be
The BUS lines link the different electronic control units. calibrated in the control unit.
If any faults occur during tractor operation, the
applicable Service Codes will be stored (see “Service The diagnostics program is activated by inserting fuse
Code List (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20). F115 in fuse box 1. The desired information is called
240
up by accessing a diagnostics address or calibration 20
Functions address. 67
The basic informator collects and processes data and Tests and adjustments are performed directly on the
converts this information into values for use by the tractor using the digital display or the RE39569 or
digital screen, gauges and indicator lights. RE60389 performance monitors in conjunction with
test lead JDG810.
Data is transferred between the individual control units
and the basic informator. The digital display and performance monitor show the
same information, the only difference is the position of
The digital screen displays data and values processed the values shown.
and calculated by the control unit.
Testing, Calibrating and Adjusting
The basic informator (BIF) incorporates a diagnostics

program.
1
Basic Informator
AG,LX25599,327 –19–01MAY00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-67 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=749
Adjustments
Basic Informator (BIF) Addresses
All data are displayed or recalled using addresses. BIF fuel level, alternator voltage, coolant temperature,
addresses are numbered from "01" to "99" and are number of starts, engine operating hours, wheel speed
divided into five categories. and ground speed.
Display addresses are write-protected.
1. Service Code Address
During tractor operation, faults due to defective or Display addresses
improperly operating components or systems are 15 to 18
31 to 34
stored here as digital codes. 40 to 45
62 to 65
Service code address
01 4. Calibratable Addresses
These addresses are used to configure the BIF for the
2. Diagnostic Addresses
appropriate tractor model and installed accessories.
These addresses are used for troubleshooting and
240 checking associated components and systems. Calibratable addresses
20 Diagnostic addresses indicate the status of switches. 20 to 30
68
A tone is heard when a status changes. 35 to 39
56 to 61
Diagnostic addresses 66 to 71
02 to 14 92 to 95
19
5. Unused Addresses
In diagnostic mode the BIF briefly activates a tone if a Are not displayed.
switch is activated or deactivated (changes state). The
performance monitor or basic informator displays a "1" Unused addresses
if the switch is closed and a "0" if the switch is open. 46 to 55
72 to 79
3. Display Addresses BIF addresses 80 to 99 are used as identification

These addresses are used for troubleshooting and addresses and are treated differently. See “Electronic
checking associated components and systems. Control Units - Identification Addresses”, Section 245,
Display addresses only show information. Group 05.
These addresses display transmission oil temperature,
AG,LX25599,232 –19–01FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-68 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=750
Adjustments
Diagnostic Structure (BIF)
Step

— Call up and delete service codes. See “Enter Program

Mode”, Section 245, Group 05.
— Service codes. See “Service Code List (BIF)”, Section

240, Group 20.
— Diagnostic addresses. See “Diagnostic Address List

(BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20.
240
— Display addresses. See “Display Address List (BIF)”, 20

(BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20.

AG,LX25599,233 –19–17FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-69 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=751
Adjustments
Service Code List (BIF)
If a voltage or a switch position is not in the valid

range, the BIF will generate and store a service code.
When the fault is identified, check the components

using the diagnostic address list. See “Diagnostic
Address List (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20.
If more than three service codes are displayed, there

may be a defective common ground.
In this case, check the corresponding ground
connection.
NOTE: The term wiring harness covers all leads in a

circuit from the fuse, via the switch to the load.
240
20 These leads can run over several wiring
70 harnesses and connectors.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-70 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=752
Adjustments

code no.
000 No service codes stored. Not necessary.
001 Sending unit for fuel gauge. Check the fuel gauge sending unit.
Shorted or broken circuit in signal lead. Check wiring harness — addresses 16 and 31 (Ld. 353).
002 Sending unit for fuel gauge. Not enough fuel.
003 Sending unit for fuel gauge. Not enough fuel.
Shorted to ground or broken circuit in signal lead. Check the fuel gauge sending unit.
Check wiring harness — addresses 16 and 31 (Ld. 353).
010 Coolant temperature too high. Engine too hot — addresses 18, 30 and 34.
CAUTION light is flashing. Check coolant level.
Check cooling system.
011 Coolant temperature too high. Engine too hot — addresses 18, 30 and 34.
STOP light is flashing. Check coolant level.
Check cooling system.
012 Coolant temperature sending unit. Check the coolant temperature sending unit.
Shorted or broken circuit in signal lead. Check wiring harness — addresses 18, 30 and 34 (Ld. 329). 240
INFO light is flashing. 20
71
013 Coolant temperature sending unit. Check the coolant temperature sending unit.
Shorted to ground or broken circuit in signal lead. Check wiring harness — addresses 18, 30 and 34 (Ld. 329).
INFO light is flashing.
015 Transmission oil temperature too high. Transmission oil too hot — addresses 15, 33, 68 and 69.
CAUTION light is flashing. Check oil level.
Check transmission oil filters.
016 Transmission oil temperature too high. Transmission oil too hot — addresses 15, 33, 68 and 69.
STOP light is flashing. Check oil level.
Check transmission oil filters.
017 Transmission oil temperature sending unit. Check the transmission oil temperature sending unit.
Shorted or broken circuit in signal lead. Check wiring harness — addresses 15, 33, 68 and 69 (Ld.
INFO light is flashing. 602).
018 Transmission oil temperature sending unit. Check the transmission oil temperature sending unit.
Shorted to ground or broken circuit in signal lead. Check wiring harness — addresses 15, 33, 68 and 69 (Ld.
INFO light is flashing. 602).
021 Engine oil pressure too low. Check engine oil pressure sender.
Check engine oil filter.
Check wiring harness — address 13 (Ld. 347).
023 No signal for tachometer sender Check the tachometer sender.
or Check wiring harness — address 04 (Ld. 341).
Engine oil pressure sending unit. Check engine oil pressure sender.
Shorted or broken circuit in signal lead. Check wiring harness — address 13 (Ld. 347).
026 Transmission oil pressure too low. Check the transmission oil pressure sending unit.
Check the transmission oil filters.
030 Air cleaner blocked. Check or replace the air cleaner.
CAUTION light is flashing. Check the air cleaner sending unit.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-71 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=753
Adjustments

code no.
035 Transmission oil filter blocked. Check or replace the transmission oil filters and hydraulic oil
Hydraulic oil filter blocked. filter.
CAUTION light is flashing. Check the transmission oil filter sending unit.
Less than 11.2 volts with engine speed over 512 rpm. Defective battery.
CAUTION light is flashing. Excessive current drain.
Check wiring harness — address 32 (Ld. 971 and 050).
Below 12.5 volts with engine speed over 1500 rpm. Defective battery.
CAUTION light is flashing. Excessive current drain.
047 System voltage too high. Jump start.
Over 15.5 volts with engine speed over 512 rpm. Defective battery.
CAUTION light is flashing. Batteries improperly connected.
240 Check the alternator.
20 Check wiring harness — address 32 (Ld. 971 and 050).
72 049 Alternator D+ voltage too low. Check the alternator.
Less than 11.2 volts with engine speed over 512 rpm. Excessive current drain.
CAUTION light is flashing. Alternator drive belt slipping or broken.
Check battery.
050 Alternator D+ voltage too low. Check the alternator.
Below 12.5 volts with engine speed over 1500 rpm. Excessive current drain.
CAUTION light is flashing. Alternator drive belt slipping or broken.
Check battery.
051 Alternator D+ voltage too high. Check the alternator.
Over 15.5 volts with engine speed over 512 rpm. Alternator drive belt slipping or broken.
or Check battery.
More than 1 volt difference between battery voltage and D+ Check wiring harness — address 32 (Ld. 971 and 050).
voltage.
CAUTION light is flashing.
106 BIF error (internal). Replace the basic informator.
135 No timing signal from BCU. Faulty BCU.
136 Broken CCD BUS lines. Check wiring harness — Ld. 924 and 925.
140 Rear PTO speed too high. Reduce engine speed.
142 Front PTO warning. Operator not seated in operator’s seat.
CAUTION light is flashing. Check seat switch.
AG,LX25599,328 –19–01MAY00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-72 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=754
Adjustments
Diagnostic Address List (BIF)
NOTE: The digit shown with an "X" in the list will have
a corresponding value on the display.
NOTE: Individual leads can run over several wiring

240
20
73
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-73 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=755
Adjustments
No. Position Code
01 XXX 0 0 0 or service codes. Any stored service codes. all
02 XXX b I F or 0 0 4 to 0 1 9. If a switch or sending unit changes state, a tone is emitted
and the associated address is displayed.
03 XXX b I F or 0 0 6 to 0 1 9. If a switch changes state, a tone is emitted and the
associated address is displayed.
04 ––X 0 = Not used.
04 –X– 0 = Signal not recognized. Tachometer sender — Ld. 341. 023
05 ––X 0 = Switch not activated. Digital instrument set switch — Ld. 905.
05 –X– 0 = Headlights off. Light switch in headlight position — Ld. 138.
1 = Headlights on.
240 05 X–– 0 = Signal not recognized. Timing signal from BCU — Ld. 149. 135
20 1 = Signal recognized.
74 06 ––X 0 = Not used.
08 ––X 0 = Operator not seated. Seat switch — Ld. 906. 142
1 = Operator seated.
08 –X– 0 = Worklights off. Light switch in worklight position — Ld. 135.
1 = Worklights on.
08 X–– 0 = High beam off. High/low beam and/or flash-to-pass switch — Ld. 159.
1 = High beam on.
09 ––X 0 = Indicator light off. 1000 rpm rear PTO speed — Ld. 156.
1 = Indicator light on.
09 X–– 0 = Indicator light off. 540 rpm rear PTO speed — Ld. 153.
1 = Indicator light on.
10 –X– 0 = Switch off. Front PTO switch — Ld. 607.
1 = Switch on.
12 ––X 0 = Sending unit off. Air cleaner restriction sending unit — Ld. 351. 030
1 = Sending unit on.
12 –X– 0 = Sending unit off. Oil filter restriction sending unit — Ld. 606. 035
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-74 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=756
Adjustments
No. Position Code
12 X–– 0 = Sending unit off. Operating pressure sending unit — Ld. 515. 026
13 ––X 0 = Sending unit off. Engine oil pressure sending unit — Ld. 347. 021
19 ––X 0 = Switch off. Hazard flasher switch — Ld. 151.
1 = Switch on.
19 –X– 0 = Switch not activated. Right turn signal switch — Ld. 107.
19 X–– 0 = Switch not activated. Left turn signal switch — Ld. 125. 240
1 = Switch activated. 20
75
BIF addresses 80 to 99 are used as identification Control Units - Identification Addresses”, Section 245,
AG,LX25599,329 –19–01MAY00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-75 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=757
Adjustments
Diagnostic Addresses (BIF)
BIF diagnostics addresses 02 and 03 (test addresses) BIF diagnostic addresses 04 to 14, and 19:
are used for system diagnostics. Can be used to check the function of switches,
These addresses enable the following: senders and sensors.
• Operational checkout of components and circuits. The associated diagnostics addresses can display
input signals from three different switches, senders or
• Isolation of operational problems and defects in sensors.
wiring harnesses.
Each input signal is displayed at a specific location on
These addresses display first 0 2 : b I F or 0 3 : b I F. the digital screen. A "1" indicates a closed switch or a
As soon as there is a change of state (switch recognized pulse from a sender or sensor.
activation, switch state change, sender signal or
sensor signal), a tone is emitted and the address A "0" indicates an open, missing or defective switch
corresponding to the change is displayed. and/or the absence of pulses from a sender or sensor.
240
20
76 BIF address 02 shows switch state, sender signal and A switch state change is identified by a tone and a
sensor signal; BIF address 03 shows only the switch change of value in the corresponding screen position.
state.
AG,LX25599,330 –19–01MAY00–1/1
BIF Address 02
– – –1/1
Test address Enter program mode as described for driving the tractor in the diagnostic addresses. OK: GO TO: Activate the
(general) See “Entering Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. following switches. See
“Activate the following
Calling up BIF address 02. switches”, Section 240,
Group 20.
Indicator: 0 2 : b I F
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-76 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=758
Adjustments
Activate the following Activate the following switches and note whether a tone is heard and the data are OK: GO TO: For finishing
switches displayed when the switches are activated: the program sequence,
— Digital instrument set switch (BIF address 05) Program Mode”, Section
— Turn on light switch (BIF address 05) 245, Group 05.
— Turn high beam on/off (BIF address 08)
— Turn worklights on/off (BIF address 08) GO TO: Call up the
— Turn off light switch (BIF address 05) desired diagnostic
— Engage/disengage rear PTO (BIF address 09) addresses. See
— Engage front PTO (BIF address 10) “Diagnostic Address List
— Stand up from / sit down on operator’s seat (BIF address 08) (BIF)”, Section 240,
— Disengage front PTO (BIF address 10) Group 20.
— Hazard flasher switch (BIF address 19)
— Right/left turn signal switch (BIF address 19). NOT OK: GO TO: Check
240, Group 20.
240
GO TO: For the 20
diagnostic address 77
Address List (BIF)”,
– – –1/1
Check wiring harnesses None of the other circuits that can be checked using the test address (BIF address 02) OK: GO TO: For finishing
and connectors have devices that can be activated (BIF addresses 04, 11, 12 and 13). These are the program sequence,
monitoring circuits used by the BIF to activate warning and/or status indications. see “Finishing the
If there are occasional faults in a specific circuit, the associated wiring harnesses and 245, Group 05.
connectors can be checked with the test address (BIF address 02).
GO TO: Call up the
If a tone can be heard when a wiring harness is pulled or moved (BIF address 02 desired diagnostic
called up), this indicates a problem. Connectors can also be checked using the tone. addresses. See
If a tone indicates problems with wiring harnesses or connectors, use the JT05791A (BIF)”, Section 240,
multimeter to test the associated wiring harnesses or connectors and carry out any Group 20.
necessary repairs.
NOT OK: GO TO: For the
diagnostic address
– – –1/1
BIF Address 03
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-77 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=759
Adjustments
Test address Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section OK: GO TO: For finishing
(switches) 245, Group 05. the program sequence,
Call up BIF address 03. Program Mode”, Section
245, Group 05.
Indicator: 0 3 : b I F
GO TO: Call up the
NOTE: The test address (BIF address 03) is identical to test address (BIF address 02). desired diagnostic
The only difference is that engine rpm (BIF address 04) is ignored and no diagnostics addresses. See
are possible in this address. “Diagnostic Address List
(BIF)”, Section 240,
The following senders are not monitored using BIF test address 03: Group 20.
BIF address 04:

Engine speed.
240
20
78
– – –1/1
BIF Address 04
– – –1/1
Tachometer sender 245, Group 05. the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
Rear PTO must be switched off. desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

wiring harness and
wiring harness and
240, Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-78 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=760
Adjustments
Check circuit 341 for continuity or shorted circuit. See “SE2-Basic Informator”, Section
240, Group 15. GO TO: Repeat check on
Check connectors for damage or corrosion. “BIF address 04”, Section
240, Group 20.
NOT OK: GO TO:

Tachometer sender. See
– – –1/1
BIF Address 05
240
20
79
– – –1/1
Right side of display: Digital instrument set switch not activated. OK: GO TO: Activate the
Switch for setting the digital instrument set
digital instrument Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section switch. See ”Activate the
245, Group 05. digital instrument set
switch”, Section 240,
Call up BIF address 05. Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the digital

instrument set switch.
See “SE2-Basic
Informator”, Section 240,
Group 15.

circuit. See “SE2-Basic
Group 15.

digital instrument set
switch. See “BIF address
05”, Section 240, Group
20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-79 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=761
Adjustments
Activate the digital Activate the digital instrument set switch. OK: GO TO: For finishing
instrument set switch the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the digital

instrument set switch.
See “SE2-Basic
240 Informator”, Section 240,
20 Group 15.
80
Group 15.

digital instrument set
switch. See “BIF address
05”, Section 240, Group
20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-80 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=762
Adjustments
Center display: Set the light switch to "off". OK: GO TO: For light
Headlights switch at headlights
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. position, see “Light switch
at headlights position”,
Call up BIF address 05. Section 240, Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check light

switch. See “SE6-Lights”,

Group 15.
GO TO: Repeat check for 240

light switch at "headlights" 20
position, see “BIF 81
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-81 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=763
Adjustments
Light switch at Set the light switch to "headlights" position. OK: GO TO: For finishing
"headlights" position the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check fuse F104

(30-amp). See
“SE6-Lights”, Section
240 240, Group 15.
20
82 GO TO: Check light

Group 15.
GO TO: Repeat check for

light switch at "headlights"
position, see “BIF
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-82 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=764
Adjustments
Left side of display: Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Timing signal from BCU the program sequence,
Call up BIF address 05. see “Finishing the
Indicator: 0 5 : 1 0 0 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:

Informator”, Section 240, 240
Group 15. 20
83
Unit (BCU) Differential
Lock”, Section 240,
Group 15.
GO TO: Defective BCU.

See “Service Code List
Group 20.

timing signal from BCU.
See “BIF address 05”,
– – –1/1
BIF Address 08
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-83 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=765
Adjustments
Right side of display: Operator seated in operator’s seat. OK: GO TO: Operator not
Seat Switch seated in operator’s seat.
Set rear PTO switch to "on" position. See “Operator not seated
in operator’s seat”,
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. Section 240, Group 20.
Call up BIF address 08. NOT OK: If "0" appears

on display:

240 PTO without HMS)”,
84
seat switch. See “BIF
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-84 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=766
Adjustments
Operator not seated in Stand up from operator’s seat. OK: GO TO: For finishing
operator’s seat the program sequence,
Set rear PTO switch to "off" position. 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:

85

seat switch. See “BIF
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-85 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=767
Adjustments
Center display: Set the light switch to "off". OK: GO TO: For light
Worklights switch at "worklight"
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. position, see “Light switch
at "worklight" position”,

on display:
GO TO: Check light


Group 15.
240 GO TO: Repeat check on

20 light switch at "worklight"
86 position. See “BIF
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-86 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=768
Adjustments
Light switch at Set the light switch to the "worklight" position. OK: GO TO: For finishing
"worklight" position the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:

(30-amp). See
240, Group 15. 240
20
GO TO: Check light 87

Group 15.

light switch at "worklight"
position. See “BIF
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-87 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=769
Adjustments
Left side of display: Set the light switch to "headlights" position. OK: GO TO: Before
High beam switching on high beam,
Set the high/low beam switch to "low beam". see “Switching on high
beam”, Section 240,
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. Group 20.
Call up BIF address 08. NOT OK: If "1" appears

on display:
(30-amp). See
240, Group 15.
GO TO: Check light

GO TO: Check the

240 high/low beam switch.
20 See “SE6-Lights”, Section
88 240, Group 15.
GO TO: Check
flash-to-pass switch. See
240, Group 15.

Group 15.

high beam switch. See
“BIF address 08”, Section
240, Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-88 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=770
Adjustments
Turn on high beam lights Set the high/low beam switch to "high beam" or "flash-to-pass". OK: GO TO: For finishing
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:

(30-amp). See
“SE6-Lights”, Section 240
240, Group 15. 20
89
GO TO: Check light
GO TO: Check relay

K107. See “SE6-Lights”,
GO TO: Check the

high/low beam switch.
See “SE6-Lights”, Section
240, Group 15.
GO TO: Check
flash-to-pass switch. See
240, Group 15.

Group 15.

high beam switch. See
240, Group 20.
– – –1/1
BIF Address 09
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-89 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=771
Adjustments
Right side of display: Install the rear PTO stub for 1000 rpm (21-tooth) on the output shaft. OK: GO TO: 540 rpm
1000 rpm rear PTO rear PTO speed. See
speed Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section “Left side of display:
245, Group 05. 540 rpm rear PTO
speed”, Section 240,
Call up BIF address 09. Group 20.
Indicator: 0 9 : 0 0 0 GO TO: For finishing the

program sequence, see
Switch on the rear PTO. “Finishing the Program
Indicator: 0 9 : 0 0 1 Group 05.
Switch off the rear PTO. GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.
240
20 NOT OK: If "0" appears
90 on display:

Group 15.

1000 rpm rear PTO. See
240, Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-90 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=772
Adjustments
Left side of display: Install the rear PTO stub for 540 rpm (6-tooth) on the output shaft. OK: GO TO: For finishing
540 rpm rear PTO speed the program sequence,
Enter program mode while engine is running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section see “Entering Program
245, Group 05. Mode”, Section 245,
Group 05.
Call up BIF address 09.
GO TO: Call up the
Indicator: 0 9 : 0 0 0 desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Switch on the rear PTO. “Diagnostic Address List
Indicator: 0 9 : 1 0 0 Group 20.
Switch off the rear PTO. NOT OK: If "0" appears

on display:

Group 15. 20
91
540 rpm rear PTO. See
240, Group 20.
– – –1/1
BIF Address 10
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-91 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=773
Adjustments
Center display: Front PTO disengaged. OK: GO TO: Before

Front PTO engaging the front PTO,
Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section see “Engage the front
245, Group 05. PTO”, Section 240, Group
20.
Indicator: 1 0 : 0 0 0 on display:
GO TO: Check front PTO

switch. See “SE5-Front
PTO”, Section 240, Group
15.

Group 15.
240
20 GO TO: Repeat check on
92 front PTO. See “BIF
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-92 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=774
Adjustments
Engage the front PTO Engage the front PTO. OK: GO TO: For finishing
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:

fuse F215. See
“SE5-Front PTO”, Section
240, Group 15. 240
20
GO TO: Check front PTO 93
switch. See “SE5-Front
PTO”, Section 240, Group
15.

Group 15.

front PTO. See “BIF
Group 20.
– – –1/1
BIF Address 12
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-93 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=775
Adjustments
Right side of display: Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section OK: GO TO: For finishing
Sending unit, air cleaner 245, Group 05. the program sequence,
restriction indicator see “Finishing the
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
Air cleaner element

clogged or dirty.
240 GO TO: Check the

20 sending unit of the air
94 cleaner restriction
indicator. See “SE2-Basic
Group 15.

Group 15.

the sending unit of the air
cleaner restriction
indicator. See “BIF
Group 20.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-94 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=776
Adjustments
Sending unit, oil filter 245, Group 05. the program sequence,
warning light see “Finishing the
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Transmission oil

temperature above 28°C
(82°F). See “BIF address
33”, Section 240, Group 240
20. 20
95
Oil filter element clogged
or dirty.
GO TO: Check the

sending unit of the oil
filter warning light. See
“SE2-Basic Informator”,

Group 15.

the sending unit of the oil
filter restriction indicator.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-95 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=777
Adjustments
Left side of display: Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section OK: GO TO: For finishing
Sending unit, 245, Group 05. the program sequence,
engagement oil warning see “Finishing the
light Call up BIF address 12. Program Mode”, Section
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the

sending unit of the
engagement oil warning
240 light. See “SE2-Basic
20 Informator”, Section 240,
96 Group 15.

Group 15.

the sending unit of the
engagement oil indicator.
– – –1/1
BIF Address 13
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-96 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=778
Adjustments
Right side of display: Enter program mode while engine running. See “Entering Program Mode”, Section OK: GO TO: For finishing
Sending unit, engine oil 245, Group 05. the program sequence,
pressure warning light see “Finishing the
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the

sending unit of the engine
oil pressure warning light.
See “SE2-Basic 240
Group 15. 97

Group 15.

the sending unit of the
engine oil pressure
indicator. See “BIF
Group 20.
– – –1/1
BIF Address 19
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-97 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=779
Adjustments
Right side of display: Set the hazard flasher switch to "off". OK: GO TO: Set the
Hazard flasher switch hazard flasher switch to
Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. "on". See “Hazard flasher
switch set to "on"”,

on display:
GO TO: Check the

See “SE16B-Basic
Control Unit BCU (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

240 circuit. See “SE16B-Basic
98 (Hazard Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

fuse F102. See
Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-98 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=780
Adjustments
Hazard flasher switch set Set the hazard flasher switch to "on". OK: GO TO: For finishing
to "on" the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the

See “SE16B-Basic
Control Unit BCU (Hazard 240
Flasher and Turn 20
Signals)”, Section 240, 99
Group 15.

Control Unit (BCU)
Group 15.

fuse F102. See
Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-99 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=781
Adjustments
Center display: Move the turn signal lever to "off". OK: GO TO: Move the
Right turn signal switch turn signal lever to "right
signal lever set to "right
Call up BIF address 19. turn"”, Section 240,
Group 20.
on display:
GO TO: Check the

Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

240 for continuity or shorted
,100 Control Unit (BCU)
Group 15.

Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-100 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=782
Adjustments
Turn signal lever set to Call up BIF address 18. OK: GO TO: Left turn
"right turn" signal switch. See “Left
Indicator: 1 8 : X X.X side of display: Left turn
X stands for a displayed digit. signal switch”, Section
240, Group 20.
Move the turn signal lever to "right turn".
GO TO: For finishing the
Indicator: 1 9 : 0 1 0 program sequence, see
“Finishing the Program
Move the turn signal lever to "off". Mode”, Section 245,
Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
desired diagnostic
addresses. See
Group 20.
NOT OK: If "0" appears 240

on display: 20
,101
GO TO: Check the
Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

Control Unit (BCU)
Group 15.

Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-101 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=783
Adjustments
Left side of display: Move the turn signal lever to "off". OK: GO TO: Move the
Left turn signal switch turn signal lever to "left
signal lever set to "left
Call up BIF address 19. turn"”, Section 240,
Group 20.
on display:
GO TO: Check the

Unit (BCU) (Hazard
Flasher and Turn
Group 15.

240 for continuity or shorted
,102 Control Unit (BCU)
Group 15.

Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-102 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=784
Adjustments
Turn signal lever set to Call up BIF address 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
"left turn" the program sequence,
Move the turn signal lever to "left turn". 245, Group 05.
Indicator: 1 9 : 1 0 0 GO TO: Call up the

desired diagnostic
Move the turn signal lever to "off". addresses. See
Indicator: 1 9 : 0 0 0 (BIF)”, Section 240,
Group 20.

on display:
GO TO: Check the

Unit (BCU) (Hazard 240
Flasher and Turn 20
Signals)”, Section 240, ,103
Group 15.

Control Unit (BCU)
Group 15.

Group 15.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-103 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=785
Adjustments
Display Address List (BIF)
Display addresses only show information. They can

consist of three, six or nine digits. Since only three For example: BIF addresses 40 to 42 show the
digits can be stored at each address, the information is number of starts. For 1234 starts, the BIF addresses
distributed over one, two or three addresses. are 40:000, 41:001 and 42:234.
Addr. No. Displayed Information Displayed Digits Service

Code
15 Transmission oil temperature in volts 3 digits 015
016
017
018
16 Fuel tank level in volts 3 digits 001
002
003
240 17 Alternator D+ voltage in volts 3 digits 049
20 050
,104 051
18 Coolant temperature in volts 3 digits 010
011
012
013
31 Fuel tank level in percent 3 digits 001
002
003
32 Alternator D+ voltage in volts 3 digits 049
050
051
33 Transmission oil temperature in °C 3 digits 015
016
017
018
34 Coolant temperature in °C 3 digits 010
011
012
013
40 Number of starts first 3 digits
41 Number of starts middle 3 digits
42 Number of starts last 3 digits
43 Engine hours first 3 digits
44 Engine hours middle 3 digits
45 Engine hours last 3 digits
62 Current wheel speed in km/h km/h (full number)
63 Current wheel speed in km/h km/h (fraction)
64 Current ground speed in km/h km/h (full number)
65 Current ground speed in km/h km/h (fraction)
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-104 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=786
Adjustments
AG,LX25599,237 –19–02FEB00–2/2
240
20
,105
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-105 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=787
Adjustments
Display Addresses (BIF)
AG,LX25599,238 –19–01FEB00–1/1
BIF address 15
– – –1/1
Transmission oil Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
temperature in volts the program sequence,
240
20
,106
The displayed value must be between 00.0 and 04.0 volts. 245, Group 05.
NOTE: If the display shows 16.0 volts, the sender or wiring harness is faulty. GO TO: Call up the
Group 20.

the transmission oil
temperature sending unit.
See “SE2-Basic
Group 15.

Group 15.
– – –1/1
BIF address 16
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-106 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=788
Adjustments
Fuel tank level in volts Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Group 20.

the fuel gauge sending
unit. See “SE2-Basic
Group 15.

circuit. See “SE2-Basic 20
Informator”, Section 240, ,107
Group 15.
– – –1/1
BIF address 17
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-107 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=789
Adjustments
Alternator D+ voltage in Enter program mode with the engine running. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, OK: GO TO: For finishing
volts Group 05. the program sequence,
245, Group 05.
The displayed value must be between 11.2 and 15.5 volts.
GO TO: Call up the
With the engine running (1500 rpm), the voltage should be between 13.2 and 14.8 desired address. See
volts. “Display Address List
If the voltage (based on engine speed) is outside of this range for more than two Group 20.
seconds, a service code will be stored.
NOT OK: GO TO: BCU
address 32. See “Display
GO TO: Check the

alternator. See “Checking
240 the Alternator”, Section
20 240, Group 25.
,108
belt.
GO TO: Check the

Group 25.

Group 15.
– – –1/1
BIF address 18
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-108 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=790
Adjustments
Coolant temperature in Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
volts the program sequence,
Group 20.

the coolant temperature
gauge sending unit. See

circuit. See “SE2-Basic 20
Informator”, Section 240, ,109
Group 15.
– – –1/1
BIF address 31
– – –1/1
Fuel tank level in Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
percentage the program sequence,
This address shows the fuel tank level as a percentage. 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

Group 20.

the fuel gauge sending
unit. See “SE2-Basic
Group 15.

Group 15.
– – –1/1
BIF address 32
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-109 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=791
Adjustments
Alternator D+ voltage in Enter program mode with the engine running. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, OK: GO TO: For finishing
volts Group 05. the program sequence,
Call up address 32. Program Mode”, Section
245, Group 05.
The displayed value must be between 11.2 and 15.5 volts.
GO TO: Call up the
With the engine running (1500 rpm), the voltage should be between 13.2 and 14.8 desired address. See
volts. “Display Address List
If the voltage (based on engine speed) is outside of this range for more than two Group 20.
seconds, a service code will be stored.
NOT OK: GO TO: BCU
address 32. See “Display
GO TO: Check the

alternator. See “Checking
240 the Alternator”, Section
20 240, Group 25.
,110
belt.
GO TO: Check the

Group 25.
Check circuit 306 for

continuity or shorted
Group 15.
– – –1/1
BIF address 33
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-110 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=792
Adjustments
Transmission oil Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
temperature in °C the program sequence,
This address shows transmission oil temperature in °C (Celsius). 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the

Group 20.

the transmission oil
temperature sending unit.
See “SE2-Basic
Group 15.
GO TO: Check circuit 602 240

circuit. See “SE2-Basic ,111
Group 15.
– – –1/1
BIF address 34
– – –1/1
Coolant temperature in Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
°C the program sequence,
This address shows coolant temperature in °C (Celsius). 245, Group 05.
The measurement range begins at +40°C (104°F). GO TO: Call up the

Group 20.

the coolant temperature
gauge sending unit. See

Group 15.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-111 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=793
Adjustments
BIF addresses 40 to 42
– – –1/1
Number of starts Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Call up BIF address 42 or see “Finishing the
BIF address 41 or Program Mode”, Section
BIF address 40. 245, Group 05.
Displays the total number of start attempts since the tractor was manufactured. A start GO TO: Call up the
is counted when the key switch is turned to IGN (on) and the engine speed reaches at desired address. See
least 1024 rpm. “Display Address List
240 NOTE: The "number of starts" display consists of nine digits. Since only three digits Group 20.
20 can be displayed at each address, the information is distributed over three addresses.
,112 For example: 1234 starts
BIF address 40:000
BIF address 41:001
BIF address 42:234
– – –1/1
BIF addresses 43 to 45
– – –1/1
Engine hours Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Call up BIF address 45 or see “Finishing the
BIF address 44 or Program Mode”, Section
Displays the total number of engine operating hours since the tractor was GO TO: Call up the
manufactured. Operating hours are counted when the key switch is turned to IGN (on) desired address. See
and the engine speed is at least 512 rpm. “Display Address List
NOTE: The engine operating hours display consists of nine digits. Since only three Group 20.
digits can be displayed at each address, the information is distributed over three
addresses.
For example: 9876.5 operating hours
BIF address 43:000
BIF address 44:098
BIF address 45:76.5
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-112 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=794
Adjustments
BIF addresses 62 and 63
– – –1/1
Current wheel speed Enter program mode as described for driving the tractor in the diagnostic addresses. OK: GO TO: For finishing
See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. the program sequence,
Call up BIF address 63 or Program Mode”, Section
Drive the tractor and observe the display. GO TO: Call up the
The current wheel speed value in km/h is displayed. “Display Address List
The km/h (full number) is displayed in BIF address 62. Group 20. 240
20
The km/h (fractional number) is displayed in BIF address 63. NOT OK: GO TO: Check ,113
the speedometer. See
NOTE: Current wheel speed is displayed as a six-digit number. Since only three digits “BCU address 05”,
can be displayed at each address, the information is distributed over two addresses. Section 240, Group 20.
BIF address 62 displays whole km/h, and BIF address 63 displays the fractional km/h.
For example: Wheel speed = 12.4 km/h
BIF address 62:012
BIF address 63:400
– – –1/1
BIF addresses 64 and 65
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-113 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=795
Adjustments
Current ground speed OK: GO TO: For finishing

(tractors with radar CAUTION: To avoid possible eye damage do not look directly into sensor the program sequence,
sensor only) face. see “Finishing the
Enter program mode as described for driving the tractor in the diagnostic addresses. 245, Group 05.
See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
Call up BIF address 65 or desired address. See
BIF address 64. “Display Address List
Drive the tractor and observe the display. Group 20.
The current ground speed value in km/h is displayed. NOT OK: GO TO: Check
the ground speed sensor.
The km/h (full number) is displayed in BIF address 64. See “BCU address 05”,
The km/h (fractional number) is displayed in BIF address 65.
NOTE: Current ground speed is displayed as a six-digit number. Since only three digits
240 can be displayed at each address, the information is distributed over two addresses.
20 BIF address 64 displays whole km/h, and BIF address 65 displays the fractional km/h.
,114 For example: Ground speed = 3.2 km/h
BIF address 62:003
BIF address 63:200
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-114 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=796
Adjustments
Calibration (BIF)
AG,LX25599,239 –19–01FEB00–1/1
Perform calibration
– – –1/1
Calibration with digital Enter program mode. See “Enter Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05. OK: GO TO: For finishing
display the program sequence,
240
Select the address to be calibrated from the list of calibration addresses. See see “Finishing the
20
“Calibration Address List (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. Program Mode”, Section
,115
245, Group 05.
appears. GO TO: Call up the
desired calibration
Activate the flash-to-pass for more than 2 seconds. address. See “Calibration
The rightmost digit begins to blink on the display. Section 240, Group 20.
appears (incrementing order).
Activate the flash-to-pass for less than 2 seconds.
The center digit begins to blink on the display.
Activating the flash-to-pass function for more than 2 seconds reverses the changes.
Once all digits are correctly set, turn the hazard light switch on and off. The changed
values are stored.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-115 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=797
Adjustments
“Calibration Address List (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. Program Mode”, Section
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
The leftmost digit begins to blink on the display. Address List (BIF)”,
240 Once all digits are set to the correct value, store the number using the "Set" button.
20
,116 NOTE: Calibration can be stopped at any time.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-116 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=798
Adjustments
Calibration Address List (BIF)
Calibration addresses are used to configure the BIF for

the appropriate tractor model and installed
accessories.
IMPORTANT: Entering a number other than the

operation of the applicable circuit or
system and can damage the control
unit.
Calibration addresses can consist of three or six digits.

Since only three digits can be stored at each address,
the information is distributed over one or two
addresses. When calibrating these addresses, the
240
display automatically jumps to the next higher or lower 20
address. ,117
E.g.: BIF addresses 56 and 57 indicate the rolling

radius. If the rolling radius is 820, the BIF addresses
shown will be 56:008 and 57:20.0.
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-117 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=799
Adjustments
20 Tachometer sender. 0 3 0 = all models.
Pulses per engine revolution.
21 Established parameter. 0 4 0 = all models.
22 Gear indication on digital screen. 0 0 0 = no gear indication for SyncroPlus or PowrQuad
transmissions.
0 0 1 = with gear indication for AutoQuad II transmissions.
23 Worklight alarm thresholda. 0 2 3 = value in km/h at which alarm commences.
24 Units of measurement used in displays. 0 0 0 = non-metric units (mph; ft etc.)b.
0 0 1 = metric units (km/h; m etc.)b.
26 Automatic error clearing. 0 0 0 = automatic clearing off.
0 0 1 = automatic clearing onc.
27 Bulb test. 0 0 0 = all indicator lightsc.
0 0 1 = PTO speed indications (540, 540E and 1000) are
excluded from the bulb test.
240
20 28 Clock operation. 0 0 0 = no function.
,118 0 0 1 = 12-hour display.
0 0 2 = 24-hour display.
30 Sending unit for coolant temperature gauge. 0 0 1 = all models.
35 Instrument lighting brightness. 0 6 9 = all models (value in percent)c.
37 Speedometer sending unit. 0 0 0 = all models without creeper.
0 0 1 = all models with creeper.
0 0 2 = all models with radar sensor.
38 Language selectiona. 0 0 0 = English, symbols and service codesb.
0 0 1 = German, symbols and service codesb.
0 0 2 = French, symbols and service codesb.
0 0 3 = Spanish, symbols and service codesb.
0 0 4 = no text, only symbols and service codesb.
39 Rear PTO speed display. 0 0 0 = no analog display.
0 0 1 = primarily analog PTO speed indication.
0 0 2 = primarily analog engine speed indicationc.
56 Rolling radius (first 3 digits). 0 0 X = see table "Calibrating the Rolling Radius".
57 Rolling radius (last 3 digits). X X.0 = see table "Calibrating the Rolling Radius".
58 Transm. pulses per axle revolution (first 3 digits). 0 0 1 = all models.
59 Transm. pulses per axle revolution (last 3 digits). 2 6 9 = all models.
60 Calibration factor for front PTO (first 3 digits). 0 0 0 = without front PTO.
0 0 2 = all models with front PTO.
a
Only with Dual Gauge Plus II
b
Varies depending on country
c
Factory setting
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-118 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=800
Adjustments
61 Calibration factor for front PTO (last 3 digits). 0 0 0 = without front PTO.
1 8 5 = all models with front PTO.
66 CAN BUS capability (first 3 digits). 0 0 0 = CAN BUS not activated (PEC or ECU not available).
0 0 1 = CAN BUS activated (PEC or ECU available).
67 CAN BUS capability (last 3 digits). 0 0 1 = CAN BUS not activated (PEC or ECU not available).
0 6 5 = CAN BUS activated (PEC or ECU available).
68 Transmission oil temperature sending unit (first 3 digits). 0 0 0 = all models.
69 Transmission oil temperature sending unit (last 3 digits). 0 0 1 = all models.
70 Service code display (first 3 digits). 1 1 0 = all models with standard basic informator (Dual
Gauge II).
1 1 1 = all models with basic informator (Dual Gauge Plus
II).
71 Service code display (last 3 digits). 1 0 1 = all models with standard basic informator (Dual
Gauge II).
1 1 1 = all models with basic informator (Dual Gauge Plus
II). 240
d 20
92 Designation of tractor model (first 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 0 0 6 .
,119
E.g. 6410
93 Designation of tractor model (last 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 4 1 0d.
E.g. 6410
94 Tractor serial number (first 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 1 2 3d.
E.g. 123456
95 Tractor serial number (last 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 4 5 6d.
E.g. 123456
d
AG,LX25599,331 –19–01MAY00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-119 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=801
Adjustments
Calibration Addresses (BIF)
AG,LX25599,332 –19–01MAY00–1/1
BIF Address 20
– – –1/1
Tachometer sender Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Pulses per engine the program sequence,
240
revolution Enter program mode. See “Calibration”, Section 240, Group 20. see “Finishing the
20
,120
Call up BIF address 20. 245, Group 05.
Input: 0 3 0 GO TO: Call up the

for all tractor models. desired calibration
Store the value. Address List (BIF)”,
– – –1/1
BIF Address 21
– – –1/1
Established parameter Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Input: 0 4 0 245, Group 05.
for all tractor models.
GO TO: Call up the
– – –1/1
BIF Address 22
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-120 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=802
Adjustments
Gear indication on digital Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
screen the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
for all tractors with SyncroPlus or PowrQuad transmissions.
GO TO: Call up the
for tractors with AutoQuad II transmissions. address. See “Calibration
NOTE: The display is operational only if the tractor is equipped with a PEC. Section 240, Group 20.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
BIF Address 23
240
20
,121
– – –1/1
Worklight alarm Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
(only with Dual Gauge the program sequence,
Plus II) Call up BIF address 23. see “Finishing the
Input: 0 2 3 245, Group 05.
NOTE: Enter the value for the speed in km/h at which the alarm should be activated. GO TO: Call up the
desired calibration
Store the value. address. See “Calibration
– – –1/1
BIF Address 24
– – –1/1
Units of measurement Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
used in displays the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
for non-metric units (speed in mph, length in ft, etc.)
GO TO: Call up the
for metric units (speed in km/h, length in m, etc.) address. See “Calibration
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-121 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=803
Adjustments
BIF Address 25
– – –1/1
Input: 0 0 1 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
20
,122
– – –1/1
BIF Address 26
– – –1/1
Automatic error clearing Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Call up BIF address 26. see “Entering Program
Input: 0 0 0 = Group 05.
Automatic clearing off.
GO TO: Call up the
Input: 0 0 1 = desired calibration
Automatic clearing on. address. See “Calibration
NOTE: When the automatic clearing function is activated, all service codes in the Section 240, Group 20.
memory will be cleared as soon as the engine is started for the eighth time. If the
function is off, service codes will remain stored.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
BIF Address 27
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-122 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=804
Adjustments
Bulb test Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
All the indicator lights are powered for 1 second.
GO TO: Call up the
PTO speed indications (540, 540E and 1000) are excluded from the bulb test. All other address. See “Calibration
indicator lights are powered for 1 second. Address List (BIF)”,
Store the value.
– – –1/1
BIF Address 28
240
20
,123
– – –1/1
Clock operation Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
The clock is inoperative and will not be displayed.
GO TO: Call up the
The clock is activated and time is displayed using the 12-hour system. address. See “Calibration
The clock is activated and time is displayed using the 24-hour system.
Store the value.

– – –1/1
BIF Address 29
– – –1/1
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-123 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=805
Adjustments
BIF Address 30
– – –1/1
Sending unit for coolant Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
temperature gauge the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 1 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
20
,124
– – –1/1
BIF Address 35
– – –1/1
Instrument lighting Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
brightness the program sequence,
Input: 0 7 0 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
NOTE: The value is a percentage. Values between 0 (dim) and 100 (bright) can be desired calibration
entered. When stored, the value is automatically decremented by one. If a address. See “Calibration
performance monitor is installed, its lighting intensity is automatically matched to this Address List (BIF)”,
value. Section 240, Group 20.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
BIF Address 36
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-124 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=806
Adjustments
Input: 0 3 0 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
– – –1/1
BIF Address 37
240
20
,125
– – –1/1
Speedometer sending Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
unit the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
all tractor models without creeper (magnetic sender).
GO TO: Call up the
all tractor models with creeper (Hall-effect sender). address. See “Calibration
all tractor models with radar sensor.
Store the value.

– – –1/1
BIF Address 38
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-125 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=807
Adjustments
Language selection Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
(only with Dual Gauge the program sequence,
Plus II) Call up BIF address 38. see “Finishing the
Input: 0 0 0 = 245, Group 05.
English, symbols and service codes
GO TO: Call up the
Input: 0 0 1 = desired calibration
German, symbols and service codes address. See “Calibration
Input: 0 0 2 = Section 240, Group 20.
French, symbols and service codes
Input: 0 0 3 =
Spanish, symbols and service codes
Input: 0 0 4
No text, only symbols and service codes
240 Store the value.

20
,126
– – –1/1
BIF Address 39
– – –1/1
Rear PTO speed Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
indication the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
No analog indication.
GO TO: Call up the
Primarily analog PTO speed indication. address. See “Calibration
Primarily analog engine speed indication.
NOTE: Display format on analog tachometer.

– – –1/1
BIF Addresses 56 and 57
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-126 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=808
Adjustments
Rolling radius Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For the
(6-digit) chart for calibrating the
Call up BIF address 56. rolling radius, see “Chart
for Calibrating the Rolling
Input: 0 0 X Radius”, Section 240,
See table "Calibrating the Rolling Radius". Group 20.
Input: X X.0
See table "Calibrating the Rolling Radius".
(X stands for a digit that has to be keyed in).
NOTE: These addresses indicate the rolling radius of the rear wheels in mm.
The value is used to calculate wheel speed, distance traveled and area worked.
The ground speed sensor is used for this calculation if installed.
NOTE: The rolling radius consists of six digits and has to be stored in two different
addresses (56 and 57). Three digits of the six-digit value are entered in each of these 240
addresses; the first three in BIF address 56 and the last three in BIF address 57. 20
,127
Enter the first three digits of the value in BIF address 56.
Example: "0 0 8" for 18.4R38 tires.
Once the three digits are entered in BIF address 56, the display automatically changes
to BIF address 57.
Enter the last three digits of the value in BIF address 57.
Example: "2 0.0" for 18.4R38 tires.
Store the value.

– – –1/1
Rolling radius calibration Tire size Input at addr. Input at addr. OK: GO TO: For finishing
chart 56 57 the program sequence,
16.9R24 006 2 0.0 see “Finishing the
18.4R26 006 7 0.0 Program Mode”, Section
16.9R30 006 9 5.0 245, Group 05.
18.4R30 007 2 0.0
23.1R30 008 0 5.0 GO TO: Call up the
16.9R34 007 4 5.0 desired calibration
18.4R34 007 7 0.0 address. See “Calibration
420/85R34 007 4 5.0 Address List (BIF)”,
460/85R34 007 7 0.0 Section 240, Group 20.
480/70R34 007 4 5.0
520/70R34 007 7 0.0
13.6R38 007 4 0.0
14.9R38 007 6 5.0
15.5R38 007 4 5.0
16.9R38 007 9 5.0
18.4R38 008 2 0.0
20.8R38 008 5 5.0
420/85R38 007 9 5.0
460/85R38 008 2 0.0
480/70R38 007 9 5.0
520/85R38 008 5 5.0
520/70R38 008 2 0.0
540/65R38 007 9 5.0
580/70R38 008 5 5.0
600/65R38 008 2 0.0
650/65R38 008 5 5.0
12.4R42 007 7 7.0
13.6R46 008 7 4.0
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-127 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=809
Adjustments
– – –1/1
Transmission pulses per Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
axle revolution (6-digit) the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 1 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
Call up BIF address 59. desired calibration
Input: 2 6 9 Address List (BIF)”,
240 for all tractor models. Section 240, Group 20.
20
,128 NOTE: This value is used to calculate wheel speed, distance traveled and area
worked.
NOTE: The transmission pulse/axle revolution value consists of six digits and must be
stored at two different addresses (58 and 59). Three digits of the six-digit value are
entered at each of these addresses; the first three in BIF address 58 and the last three
in BIF address 59.
For all tractor models enter "0 0 1" as the first three digits in BIF address 58.
to BIF address 59.
Enter the last three digits in BIF address 59. The digits are:
"2 6 9" For all tractor models.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-128 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=810
Adjustments
Calibration factor for Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
front PTO (6-digit) the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
for all tractor models without front PTO.
GO TO: Call up the
for all tractor models with front PTO. address. See “Calibration
Input: 0 0 0
for all tractor models without front PTO.
Input: 1 8 5
for all tractor models with front PTO.
NOTE: The front PTO calibration value consists of six digits and has to be entered in
two different addresses (60 and 61). Three digits of the six-digit value are entered at 240
each of these addresses; the first three in BIF address 60 and the last three in BIF 20
address 61. ,129
For all tractor models without front PTO, enter "0 0 0" as the first three digits in BIF
address 60 or
"0 0 2" for all tractor models with front PTO.
to BIF address 61.
"0 0 0" for all tractor models without front PTO or
"1 8 5" for all tractor models with front PTO.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-129 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=811
Adjustments
CAN-BUS capability Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
CAN-BUS not enabled (PEC or ECU not installed).
GO TO: Call up the
CAN-BUS enabled (PEC or ECU installed). address. See “Calibration
Input: 0 0 1
CAN-BUS enabled (PEC or ECU installed).
Input: 0 6 5
CAN-BUS not enabled (PEC or ECU not installed).
NOTE: These addresses define the type of information sent over the CAN-BUS.
240
20 NOTE: The front PTO calibration value consists of six digits and has to be entered in
,130 two different addresses (66 and 67). Three digits of the six-digit value are entered at
each of these addresses; the first three in BIF address 66 and the last three in BIF
address 67.
For all tractors not equipped with PEC or ECU, enter "0 0 0" as the first three digits in
BIF address 66;
enter "0 0 1" for all tractors equipped with PEC or ECU.
to BIF address 67.
"0 0 1" for all tractors not equipped with PEC or ECU, and
"0 6 5" for all tractors with PEC or ECU.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-130 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=812
Adjustments
Transmission oil Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
temperature sending unit the program sequence,
(6-digit) Call up BIF address 68. see “Finishing the
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
Input: 0 0 1 Address List (BIF)”,
for all tractor models. Section 240, Group 20.
NOTE: The transmission oil temperature sender value consists of six digits and must
be entered in two separate addresses (68 and 69). Three digits of the six-digit value
are entered at each of these addresses; the first three in BIF address 68 and the last
three in BIF address 69.
For all tractor models enter "0 0 0" as the first three digits in BIF address 66.
Once the three digits are entered in BIF address 68, the display automatically changes 240
to BIF address 69. 20
,131
"0 0 1" for all tractors.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-131 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=813
Adjustments
Service code display Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
Input: 1 1 0 245, Group 05.
for all tractor models with basic informator (standard version).
GO TO: Call up the
for all tractor models with Dual Gauge Plus II. address. See “Calibration
Input: 1 0 1
for all tractor models with basic informator (standard version).
Input: 1 1 1
for all tractor models with Dual Gauge Plus II.
NOTE: The service code display value consists of six digits and must be entered in
240 two separate addresses (70 and 71). Three digits of the six-digit number are entered in
20 each address; the first three in address 70 and the last three in address 71.
,132
For all tractors equipped with basic informator (standard version), enter "1 1 0" as the
first three digits in BIF address 70, or
"1 1 1" for all tractors with Dual Gauge Plus II.
to BIF address 71.
"1 0 1" for all tractors equipped with basic informator (standard version), and
"1 1 1" for all tractors with Dual Gauge Plus II.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-132 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=814
Adjustments
Designation of tractor Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
GO TO: Call up the
Input: X X X Address List (BIF)”,
address 93.
E.g.: Tractor model 6410.
Enter "0 0 6" as the first three digits in BIF address 92. 240
20
Once the three digits are entered in BIF address 92, the display automatically changes ,133
to BIF address 93.
Enter the last three digits in BIF address 93. The digits are: “4 1 0”.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-133 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=815
Adjustments
Tractor serial number Enter program mode. See “Calibration (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
GO TO: Call up the
Input: X X X Address List (BIF)”,
address 95.
E.g.: Tractor serial number 123456.
240 Enter "1 2 3" as the first three digits in BIF address 94.
20
,134 Once the three digits are entered in BIF address 94, the display automatically changes
to BIF address 95.
Enter the last three digits in BIF address 95. The digits are: “4 5 6 ”.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-134 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=816
Adjustments
General Information about the Performance Monitor (PRF)
Description and Functions The performance monitor can also be used for
diagnostics and calibration of the various electronic
The performance monitor (PRF) displays information control units.
related to various speeds, area, distance, time and
alarm data. Testing, calibrating and adjusting
The bargraph displays wheel slip and keypad backlight The performance monitor (PRF) incorporates a
intensity. diagnostics program. During calibration, the
performance monitor is configured for tractor-specific
Area, wheel slip, slip alarm, width, implement indicator, data and associated implements. If the tractor is
distance, brightness of display and service can be modified or additional accessories are installed, the
adjusted or preset. appropriate addresses should be calibrated in the
control unit.
A radar sensor is required for an accurate calculation
240
of wheel slip, area covered, distance or speed. Without The diagnostics program is activated by inserting fuse 20
a radar sensor, values are estimates based on wheel F115 in fuse box 1. ,135
speed.
The desired information is called up by accessing a
The performance monitor is connected to the power diagnostics address or calibration address. Tests and
supply and to the BUS lines (communications lines). adjustments are performed directly on the tractor using
the performance monitor.
The BUS lines link the different electronic control units.
AG,LX25599,242 –19–01FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-135 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=817
Adjustments
Performance Monitor (PRF) Addresses
All data are displayed or recalled using addresses. 2. Unused Addresses

PRF addresses are numbered from "01" to "99" and Are not displayed.
are divided into two categories.
Unused addresses
1 to 19
1. Calibratable Addresses
24 to 59
These addresses are used to configure the PRF for 62 to 79
the appropriate tractor model and installed
accessories. PRF addresses 80 to 99 are used as identification
addresses and are treated differently. See “Electronic
Calibratable addresses Control Units - Identification Addresses”, Section 245,
20 to 23
60 to 61 Group 05.
92 to 95
240
20
,136
AG,LX25599,243 –19–01FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-136 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=818
Adjustments
Diagnostic Structure (PRF)
Step


(PRF)”, Section 240, Group 20.

240
20
,137
AG,LX25599,244 –19–01FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-137 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=819
Adjustments
Calibration (PRF)
AG,LX25599,245 –19–01FEB00–1/1
Perform calibration
– – –1/1
240
20
“Calibration Address List”, Section 240, Group 20. Program Mode”, Section
,138
245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
The leftmost digit begins to blink on the display. Address List”, Section
240, Group 20.
Once all digits are set to the correct value, store the number using the "Set" button.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-138 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=820
Adjustments
Calibration Address List (PRF)
Calibration addresses are used to configure the They can consist of three or six digits. Since only three
performance monitor for the appropriate tractor model digits can be stored at each address, the information is
and installed accessories. distributed over one or two addresses. When
calibrating these addresses the display automatically
IMPORTANT: Entering a number other than the jumps to the next higher or lower address.
operation of the applicable circuit or Example: Addresses 92 and 93 indicate the tractor
system and can damage the model. For a model 6810 tractor, the PRF addresses
performance monitor. read 92:006 and 93:810.
20 Established parameter. 0 0 0 = all models
21 Brightness of keyboard lighting. 0 7 0 = all modelsa.
22 Brightness of lighting. 1 0 0 = all modelsa. 240
23 Adjusting the implement status arrow 0 0 3 = rockshaft position sensora. 20
0 0 7 = implement switch or implement key on performance ,139
monitor
0 3 2 = auto-search mode
60 Ground speed sensor (radar) (first 3 digits). 0 0 0 = all modelsa.
61 Ground speed sensor (radar) (last 3 digits). 0 0 0 = all modelsa.
92 Designation of tractor model (first 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 0 0 6b.
e.g. 6410
93 Designation of tractor model (last 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 4 1 0b.
e.g. 6410
94 Tractor serial number (first 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 1 2 3b.
e.g. 123456
95 Tractor serial number (last 3 digits). X X X = e.g. 4 5 6b.
e.g. 123456
a
Factory setting
b
PRF addresses 80 to 99 are used as identification Control Units - Identification Addresses”, Section 245,
AG,LX25599,246 –19–01FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-139 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=821
Adjustments
Calibration Addresses (PRF)
AG,LX25599,247 –19–01FEB00–1/1
PRF address 20
– – –1/1
Established parameter Enter program mode. See “Calibration (PRF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
240
Call up PRF address 20. see “Finishing the
20
,140
Input: 0 0 0 245, Group 05.
GO TO: Call up the
Address List (PRF)”,
– – –1/1
PRF address 21
– – –1/1
Brightness of keyboard Select low-beam headlights. OK: GO TO: For finishing

lighting the program sequence,
Enter program mode. See “Calibration (PRF)”, Section 240, Group 20. see “Finishing the
Call up PRF address 21. 245, Group 05.

For all tractor models. desired calibration
NOTE: Values between 0 and 255 may be keyed in. Address List (PRF)”,
Store the value.
– – –1/1
PRF address 22
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-140 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=822
Adjustments
Brightness of lighting Select low-beam headlights. OK: GO TO: For finishing

Enter program mode. See “Calibration (PRF)”, Section 240, Group 20. see “Finishing the
Call up PRF address 22. 245, Group 05.

For all tractor models. desired calibration
NOTE: Values between 0 and 255 may be keyed in. Address List (PRF)”,
Store the value.
– – –1/1
PRF address 23
240
20
,141
– – –1/1
Adjusting the implement Enter program mode. See “Calibration (PRF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
status arrow the program sequence,
Input: 0 0 3 245, Group 05.
Rockshaft position sensor (raise limit setting).
GO TO: Call up the
Implement switch or implement key on performance monitor. address. See “Calibration
Address List (PRF)”,
Auto-search mode. First downward movement automatically selects which device is to
be controlled by the implement status arrow. (Rockshaft position sensor or implement
switch/key).
NOTE: A "0" or a digit other than the one already indicated will switch the implement
status arrow off altogether.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
PRF addresses 60 and 61
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-141 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=823
Adjustments
Ground speed sensor OK: GO TO: For finishing

(radar) (6-digit) CAUTION: To avoid possible eye damage do not look directly into sensor the program sequence,
face. see “Finishing the
Enter program mode. See “Calibration (PRF)”, Section 240, Group 20. 245, Group 05.
Call up PRF address 60. GO TO: Call up the

desired calibration
Input: 0 0 0 address. See “Calibration
For all tractor models. Address List (PRF)”,
Call up PRF address 61.
Input: 0 0 0
NOTE: The ground speed sensor (radar) value consists of six digits and has to be
entered in two different addresses (60 and 61). Three digits of the six-digit value are
entered at each of these addresses; the first three in PRF address 60 and the last
240 three in PRF address 61.
20
,142 For all tractor models enter "0 0 0" as the first three digits in PRF address 60.
Once the three digits are entered in PRF address 60, the display automatically
changes to PRF address 61.
Enter the last three digits in PRF address 61. The digits are: "0 0 0" for all tractors.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-142 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=824
Adjustments
Designation of tractor Enter program mode. See “Calibration (PRF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
GO TO: Call up the
Call up PRF address 93. desired calibration
Input: X X X Address List (PRF)”,
each of these addresses; the first three in PRF address 92 and the last three in PRF
address 93.
Example: Tractor model 6410.
Enter "0 0 6" as the first three digits in PRF address 92. 240
20
Once the three digits are entered in PRF address 92, the display automatically ,143
Enter the last three digits in PRF address 93. The digits are: “4 1 0”.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-143 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=825
Adjustments
Tractor serial number Enter program mode. See “Calibration (PRF)”, Section 240, Group 20. OK: GO TO: For finishing
GO TO: Call up the
Call up PRF address 95. desired calibration
Input: X X X Address List (PRF)”,
each of these addresses; the first three in PRF address 94 and the last three in PRF
address 95.
Example: Tractor serial number 123456.
240 Enter "1 2 3" as the first three digits in PRF address 94.
20
,144 Once the three digits are entered in PRF address 94, the display automatically
Enter the last three digits in PRF address 95. The digits are: “4 5 6 ”.
Store the value.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-144 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=826
Adjustments
Calibrating the Ground Speed Sensor (Radar)
CAUTION: To avoid possible eye damage do

not look directly into sensor face.
Mark a 122 meter (400 ft) straight-line course (start and

finish lines).
— Rear PTO must be switched off
— Press distance key (D) and speed key (E) and hold
them both down until "- - -" appears in display field (A)
and the "ft" and "m" symbols (G) start to flash. The
"implement" arrow (F) should be pointing up.
— Drive the tractor at a speed of approximately 3.2 km/h 240

(2 mph). As the tractor crosses the start-line, press the 20
,145
implement key (C), to point the indicator arrow to the
down position.
–UN–18DEC98
— Press the implement key (C) as you cross the
finish-line to change the arrow to the up position.
LX1021866
Display will alternate between "122 m and 400 ft" when
calibration is successful.
NOTE: "E r r" will flash on display if calibration was not

performed correctly. Previous calibration value will A—Display field
B—Radar symbol
stay in memory. C—Implement key
D—Distance key
Press the ground speed key to return the display to E—Speed key
"ground speed". F—Implement status arrow
G—Symbols
NOTE: The functioning of the ground speed sensor
(radar) may also be checked using the Basic
Control Unit (BCU). See “BCU address 05”,
NOTE: Ground speed may also be checked using the

Basic Control Unit (BCU). See “BCU addresses
64 and 65”, Section 240, Group 20.
NOTE: When the ground speed sensor is calibrated, the

values at BCU calibration addresses 60 and 61 on
the BCU automatically change. See “BCU
addresses 60 and 61”, Section 240, Group 20.
AG,LX25599,248 –19–23FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-145 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=827
Adjustments
Setting Wheel Slip Back to Zero
CAUTION: To avoid possible eye damage do

not look directly into sensor face.
NOTE: Before setting wheel slip back to zero, you should

calibrate the ground speed sensor. See
“Calibrating the Ground Speed Sensor (Radar)”,
The ground speed sensor (radar sensor) must be fully

operational, otherwise the correct ground speed will not
be registered. If true ground speed is not available, "---"
will be displayed.
240 — Drive the tractor at a speed of approximately 8 km/h (5

20 mph).
,146
— Press the % slip switch (A).
— Press the zero key (B) and hold it down until "C A L"
is displayed in field (C). After approx. 2 seconds, the
–UN–18DEC98
display changes to "0".
NOTE: "E r r" will flash on display if wheel slip is not
LX1021867
returned to zero successfully. Previous value will
stay in memory.
NOTE: When wheel slip has been returned to zero, the

values at BCU calibration addresses 56 and 57 on A—% slip switch
B—Zero key
the BCU automatically change. See “BCU
C—Display field
addresses 56 and 57”, Section 240, Group 20.
AG,LX25599,249 –19–23FEB00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-20-146 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=828
Group 25
Component Testing

SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company. AG,OUOE003,9429 –19–01MAR00–1/3
Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05791A
240
Testing electrical circuits and components. 25
1
–UN–08JUN99
JT05791
AG,OUOE003,9429 –19–01MAR00–2/3
Battery load tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05832
Battery, checking on
–UN–10AUG94
JT05832
AG,OUOE003,9429 –19–01MAR00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=829
Component Testing
Specifications
Load Center Relays Resistance (Terminals 85-86) 75—90 Ohms
Injection Pump Shut-Off Valve Resistance 9 Ohms

Current Draw 3 Amps
Starting Aid Glow Plug Current Draw 70 Amps
Starter Relay Resistance 3.5—4.5 Ohms
Fuel Preheater Glow Plug Current Draw 12.5 Amps
Fuel Pump Current Draw 1.0 Amp

240
25
2 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Resistance—Fuel Tank Empty 6.5—13.5 Ohms
Resistance—Fuel Tank Full 178—192 Ohms
Engine Oil Pressure Sending Unit Switching Pressure 40—70 kPa (0.4—0.7 bar; 5.5—10.5
psi)
Oil Filter Warning Light Sending Unit Closes at (increasing pressure) 650—750 kPa (6.5—7.5 bar; 95—
110 psi)
Opens at (decreasing pressure) 450—750 kPa (4.5—7.5 bar; 65—
110 psi)
Transmission Oil Pressure Sending Opens at (increasing pressure) 800—930 kPa (8.0—9.3 bar; 115—
Unit 135 psi)
Closes at (decreasing pressure) 800—860 kPa (8.0—8.6 bar; 115—
125 psi)
Low Temperature Switch Closes at 28°C (82°F)
High Temperature Switch Opens at 105°C (221°F)
Coolant Temperature Sending Unit Resistance 600 Ohms
Horn Current draw 3.1 A
Cigarette lighter Resistance 0.6 Ohm

Current draw 7A
Seat compressor motor Current draw 8A
Rear PTO magnetic switch Resistance 12 Ohms

Current draw 1A
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=830
Component Testing
Front wheel drive solenoid Resistance 12 Ohms

Current draw 1A
Differential lock magnetic switch Resistance 12 Ohms

Current draw 1A
Compressor magnetic switch Resistance 3.5—4.0 Ohms
Fan motors1 Current draw—4th step 9A
Windshield wiper motor Resistance—Slow 1.3 Ohms

Resistance—Fast 1.0 Ohm
Current draw—Slow 3.5 A
Current draw—Fast 5.0 A
240
25
Windshield washer pump Current draw 2.6 A 3
1
Each motor; both together require 18 A
AG,OUOE003,9430 –19–01MAR00–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=831
Component Testing
240
25
4
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=832
Component Testing
SE1-Starting Motor and Charging Circuit
AG,OUOE003,9432 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Starter Checks
NOTE: Voltage tests/checks should always be made with respect to the tractor frame ground, that is, the meter
common lead (black) should be connected to the tractor frame. Make sure the meter lead makes good contact with
the tractor frame and paint, dirt or oil, etc. does not interfere with the connection.
When making voltage checks at a component, there should be source voltage on the source side of the
component. With the component activated, there should be zero volts on the ground side. If there is voltage on the
ground side, with the component activated, the ground circuit is either open or has excessive resistance. 240
25
5
– – –1/1
1 Starter Operational With the engine OFF, put the speed lever in any forward or reverse speed. OK: GO TO 3.
Check
Turn main switch to START position. NOT OK: GO TO 2.
Starting motor should not operate until the speed lever is moved to neutral.
NOTE: Neutral start switch should be open with speed lever at any speed and closed
with lever in neutral.
– – –1/1
2 Isolating Cause for Locate neutral start switch. OK: Starter operates:
Starting in Gear Isolate and repair short in
Locate switch with Metri-Pack 2-way connector, below PowrQuad Transmission harness. Then GO TO 1.
Housing, or on shift cover with SyncroPlus Transmission.
NOT OK: Starter does
Disconnect neutral start switch lead. With transmission in gear, turn main switch to not operate with lead
START position. Starter should not operate. connected and speed
lever at neutral: Replace
NOTE: With the speed lever in neutral, switch should have 0.5 ohm resistance main switch. Then GO
MAXIMUM across terminals “A & B”. TO 1.

SyncroPlus is a trademark of Deere & Company. – – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=833
Component Testing
3 Starter Operational NOTE: Battery level of charge must be 12.4 volts (1.225 specific gravity) OK: Engine starts.
Check—Continued Starting circuit OK.
Voltage should be the same at the battery post terminal AND the starter motor battery
terminal before cranking the engine. NOT OK: Good cranking
speed but engine starts
Put transmission in neutral or park. hard or does not start.
GO TO 8.
Turn main switch to start position.
NOT OK: Starter does
Engine should start within 4 to 10 seconds. not operate. GO TO 5.
NOT OK: Cranking speed

is slow. GO TO 4.
– – –1/1
4 Isolating Cause for • Battery level of charge is below 12.4 volts (1.225 specific gravity). NOT OK: Repair system
Slow Cranking Speed • Crankcase oil is incorrect viscosity for temperatures below 0°C (32°F) and then GO TO 1.
240
• Greater than a 0.4 volt drop in battery positive cable while cranking engine
25
• Greater than a 0.7 volt drop in battery negative cable while cranking engine
6
• Greater than a 0.2 volt drop across starter solenoid switch terminals while cranking
engine
• Poor starter housing ground
• Starter motor defective
– – –1/1
5 Starter Solenoid NOTE: Battery level of charge must be 12.4 volts (1.225 specific gravity) OK: GO TO 6.
Check
Put transmission in park NOT OK: GO TO 7.
Connect voltmeter to starter solenoid coil “S” terminal (terminal 50).
Turn main switch to start position.
Typical cranking speed voltage is:
8.5—10.7 volts at or above 4°C (40°F)
7.5 volts minimum at -1—4°C (30—40°F)
– – –1/1
6 Causes for Improper • Poor starter solenoid ground NOT OK: Repair system
Starter Operation • Starter solenoid defective and then GO TO 1.
• Poor starter motor ground
• Starter motor defective
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=834
Component Testing
7 Causes for Improper • Poor battery ground NOT OK: Repair system
Starter Operation • Low voltage at starter battery terminal while cranking and then GO TO 1.
• Poor starter motor ground
• Greater than 0.5 ohm resistance in circuit from main switch to starter circuit relay
switch terminal
• Greater than 0.1 ohm resistance in ground circuit from starter circuit relay coil
• Greater than 0.5 ohm resistance across the starter circuit relay switch terminals
when closed
• Greater than 4.5 ohms resistance across starter circuit relay coil
• Greater than 0.5 ohm resistance across neutral start switch when closed
• Low voltage at main switch BAT terminal (F101) (should be battery voltage)
• Greater than 0.5 ohm resistance across main switch BAT and No. 6 terminals in
start position (connector must be removed from main switch)
• Greater than 0.5 ohm resistance in circuit from main switch to neutral start switch.
– – –1/1
8 Causes for No Start NOTE: If ambient temperature is below 0°C (32°F), GO TO 9 also. NOT OK: Repair system
or Hard Starting and then GO TO 1.
240
Engine • No fuel in tank
25
• Low voltage at fuel shut-off solenoid from main switch terminal. Battery voltage is
7
typical. Voltage will be lower while cranking.
• Fuel shut-off solenoid is defective. Typical resistance is 3.6 ohms from solenoid
terminal to ground.
• No fuel flow from fuel filter to injection pump
• Air in fuel lines before the injection pump
• Air in fuel lines between injection pump and injectors
• Internal malfunction of injection pump or engine.
– – –1/1
9 Cold Ambient • Use correct viscosity crankcase oil for ambient temperature. See Operator’s Manual. NOT OK: Repair system
Temperature Related • Use of special diesel fuel is recommended for ambient temperatures below 5°C and then GO TO 1.
Starting Problems (40°F). See Operators Manual for starting procedures.
– – –1/1
Alternator Checks
NOTE: Voltage tests/checks should always be made with respect to the tractor frame ground, that is, the meter
common lead (black) should be connected to the tractor frame. Make sure the meter lead makes good contact with
the tractor frame and paint, dirt or oil, etc. does not interfere with the connection.
ground side, with the component activated, the ground circuit is either open or has excessive resistance.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=835
Component Testing
1 Check Alternator OK: Warning devices

Output Voltage: OFF and volts in spec,
GO TO 3.
NOT OK: Warning

devices ON or OFF and
volts above spec, GO TO
2.
NOT OK: Warning

devices ON or OFF and
volts below spec, GO TO
3.
LX008263 –UN–16AUG94
240 With engine above 1500 rpm the alternator indicator light should be OFF.
25
8 Connect red lead of digital multimeter to alternator output terminal B+ (A) and ground
black lead. Alternator output voltage with the listed surface temperature should be:
on 55A and 85A alternator:
• 14.2-14.6 volts at -20°C ( -4°F)

• 13.7-14.1 volts at 25°C ( 77°F)
• 13.4-13.9 volts at 50°C (122°F)
on 120A alternator:
• 14.2-14.6 volts at -20°C ( -4°F)

• 13.9-14.3 volts at 25°C ( 77°F)
• 13.8-14.1 volts at 50°C (122°F)
– – –1/1
2 Alternator Operator reports frequent addition of water to battery or battery boil dry. OK: GO TO 1.
Overcharging
1. Replace voltage regulator.
2. Recheck alternator output voltage with new regulator (GO TO 5)
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=836
Component Testing
3 Battery- Alternator OK: In Spec, GO TO 4.

Circuit Check
NOT OK: Out of Spec,
repair circuit from battery,
then GO TO 4.
LX008264 –UN–16AUG94
Engine must be OFF. Using a digital multimeter check voltage at battery, alternator
output terminal B+ (A), and terminal D+ (B). 240
25
NOTE: For checking lead D+ the main switch must be in position “RUN”. 9
Voltage at alternator terminals should be 0.2 volts maximum below battery voltage.
NOTE: If battery voltage is below 12.3 volts, charge battery.
– – –1/1
4 Exciter Circuit Check: OK: In Spec, GO TO 5.

repair circuit No. 022
(Cab Tractors: SE01 /
2-Post ROPS: SE01)
from main switch, then
GO TO 5.
LX008265 –UN–16AUG94
Reconnect lead D+ to alternator.
With main switch ON connect digital multimeter to D+ (B), black lead to ground.
Voltage should be zero with main switch OFF. Voltage should be 1-2 volts with main
switch ON and 13.5 volts minimum with running engine.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=837
Component Testing
5 Alternator Output Connect digital multimeter to alternator output terminal OK: In Spec, GO TO 7.
Voltage Check: B+ (A).
Run engine above 1500 rpm. GO TO 6.
Output voltage should increase 1-2 volts above battery

voltage.
LX008266 –UN–16AUG94
NOTE: Voltage increase will be greater if battery level of
charge is below 12.3 volts.
– – –1/1
6 Causes for Low • Loose alternator belt or pulley. Inspect parts for wear and torque. NOT OK: Repair
Alternator Output • Loose hardware or connections. alternator then GO TO 3.
240
Are: • Worn brushes or faulty rotor field circuit.
25
• Rectifier diodes shorted or open.
10
• Stator winding shorted.
• Voltage regulator defective.
– – –1/1
7 Electrical System OK: In Spec, GO TO 9.

Leakage Check
GO TO 8.
LX008268 –UN–16AUG94
IMPORTANT: All switches and engine must be OFF and cab door closed.
Disconnect battery ground cable (only) from battery-to-engine ground. All other ground
leads must remain connected. Connect red lead of digital multimeter to
battery-to-engine ground and black lead to battery cable (Optional test light AT24693
or AT24692 Holder and 57M7174 24 V Bulb can be used. Add test leads with alligator
clip.).
Select 10 amp meter jacks first. Select lower meter range if current draw is within a
lower range.
Current draw (system leakage) should be less than 100 milliamps or test light should
be OFF.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=838
Component Testing
8 System Leakage NOT OK: Repair circuit

Check (Continued) then GO TO 9.
240
LX008269 –UN–16AUG94 25
11
A—Alternator
B—Starter
Connect multimeter as in Step 8. Follow numbers in sequence, disconnecting

components one at a time until leakage is less than 100 milliamps or light goes OUT.
Reconnect each lead after check.
Leak check sequence (meter in series with battery (-) cable).
1. Alternator, terminal D+ 13. Fuse F110 23. Relay K101

2. Alternator, terminal B+ 14. Fuse F111 24. Relay K102
3. Starter solenoid 15. Fuse F112 25. Relay K103
4. Starter relay 16. Fuse F113 26. Relay K104
5. Fuse F101 17. Fuse F114 27. Relay K105
11. Fuse F108 33. Relay K113
12. Fuse F109
When the leak is interrupted, follow lead that was last disconnected to component it
supplies and disconnect lead at that component. If the leak still exists, the problem is a
grounded or shorted circuit. If the leak does not exist, the problem is at the component.
– – –1/1
9 Alternator Check If alternator checks out to be normal at this step and a problem has been corrected, OK: Check complete.
Results the alternator is NORMAL.
If alternator checks out to be normal at this step without isolating a problem, but
operator reports alternator warning activated, problem may be intermittent or warning
levels incorrect. Repeat Alternator Output Capacity Check .
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=839
Component Testing
Battery Checks
NOTE: Voltage tests/checks should always be made with respect to the tractor battery-to-engine ground, that is, the
meter common lead (black) should be connected to the battery-to-engine ground. Make sure the meter lead makes
good contact with the battery-to-engine ground and paint, dirt or oil, etc. does not interfere with the connection.
ground side, with the component activated, the ground circuit is either open or has excessive resistance.
– – –1/1
1 Battery (G01) NOT OK: Correct all

Inspection CAUTION: Review safety precautions before abnormal conditions, then
240 testing or charging the battery. GO TO 2.
25
12 Check battery for:
• cracked case
• corroded terminals
• loose terminals or
LX008260 –UN–16AUG94
• battery posts
• dirty battery
• damp battery
– – –1/1
2 Check Electrolyte OK: Electrolyte level

Level of All Cells above plates: GO TO 3.
NOT OK: Electrolyte level

below plates: GO TO 5.
LX008261 –UN–16AUG94
NOTE: Open all cell plugs.
If level is below top of plates, add battery water to approximately 6 mm (1/4 in.) above
plates.
NOTE: Add battery water to correct level just before releasing battery. Do NOT over-fill
battery.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-12 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=840
Component Testing
3 Check Specific OK: ALL cells 1.225 or

Gravity of Each Cell above and less than 50
points variation between
cells, GO TO 8.
NOT OK: ANY cell below

1.225 and less than 50
cells, GO TO 4.
NOT OK: More than 50

LX008262 –UN–16AUG94 cells: Replace battery and
then GO TO 1.
NOTE: If any cell is at or above 1.175 points, see result column. If all cells are below
1.175 points, GO TO 5.
240
25
13
– – –1/1
4 Check Battery Surface charge must be removed before checking voltage of the battery. OK: If battery=12.4 V or
Voltage more, GO TO 8.
To remove surface charge, ground battery negative terminal and turn light switch to
position “4” (headlights and work lights) for one minute. Then turn light switch OFF, NOT OK: If battery=less
wait one minute and check battery voltage. than 12.4 V, GO TO 5.
– – –1/1
5 Charge Battery NOTE: When replacing battery or after cleaning battery terminals, use AR94760 an OK: If battery did not
electrical sealant, or equivalent, around base of terminals. require water at step 2
and is accepting charge
1. Connect a charger of 30 to 300 amp rating. of 10 amps GO TO 7.
IMPORTANT: Charger clamps must have a solid connection. OK: If battery required
water at step 2 or all
2. Start charger at a slow or low charging rate. Increase charging rate one selection at cells were below 1.175
a time. Observe ammeter after 1 minute of each selection for a 10-amp charging points but battery is
rate. If necessary, select boost. accepting a charge of 10
amps, GO TO 8.
IMPORTANT: The maximum charging time at the boost selection is 10 minutes
for a conventional battery (20 minutes for maintenance-free battery). Allow NOT OK: If battery is not
5 minutes additional charging time for each 12°C (10°F) below 21°C (70°F). If the accepting the required
charging rate is obtained before the specified time, see RESULTS. 10 amp charging rate in
the specified time,
REPLACE the battery,
then GO TO 1.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-13 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=841
Component Testing
6 Select Charging Rate OK: Variation less than

50 points: GO TO 7.
NOT OK: Variation is 50

points or more:
REPLACE battery, then
GO TO 1.
LX008262 –UN–16AUG94
Charge at 15 to 30 amps.
NOTE: Decrease charging rate if battery gases or bubbles excessively or the

temperature of battery case is uncomfortable to hold.
240
Check specific gravity after 30 minutes.
25
14
– – –1/1
7 Charge Battery— Charge battery as specified to obtain a specific gravity reading of 1.230 to 1.265 OK: After charging, GO
Continued points. TO 8.
NOTE: Decrease charging rate if battery gases or bubbles excessively or the

temperature of the battery case is uncomfortable to hold.
1. If battery was discharged at a slow rate or the charging rate is unknown, adjust
charging rate to 10-15 amps. Charging of conventional batteries may require 6 to
12 hours (maintenance free batteries may require 12 to 24 hours).
2. If battery was discharged at a fast rate, adjust charging rate to 20-30 amps.
Charging of conventional batteries may require 2 to 4 hours (maintenance free
batteries may require 4 to 8 hours).
– – –1/1
8 Check Battery Check battery condition using load tester. OK: 9.6 volts or above
Condition Battery is serviceable.
IMPORTANT: Tester clamps must have a solid connection.
NOT OK: Below 9.6 volts
Adjust load (amp draw) to 1/2 the CCA Rating of the battery (see following chart). and battery was
previously charged or all
Observe voltage for 15-20 seconds and release load. cells were 1.225 or
above: Replace Battery,
TEMPERATURE CORRECTION CHART GO TO 1.
Battery Load Test Voltage Temperature Correction Chart NOT OK: Below 9.6 volts
and battery has not been
F° C° 12-V Battery Battery CCA Volts charged, GO TO 6.
Rating
70 and above 21 and above 9.6 V 925 (AT116401) 12
40 4 9.3 V 700 (TY6095) 12
30 -1 9.1 V 950 (TY6128) 12
20 -7 8.9 V
10 -12 8.7 V
0 -18 8.5 V
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-14 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=842
Component Testing
SE1 - Component Test Specifications
Check starting circuit components using the following component specifications.
– – –1/1
1 Main Switch (S01) The following truth table defines main switch operation. OK: Switch is good.
NOTE: The main switch must be electrically removed from the starting circuit when NOT OK: Replace switch.
performing continuity tests.
Switch Terminal
Switch
Position ACC BAT IGN ST AID GND ELX
ACC X X 240
OFF X 25
RUN X X X Xa X 15
START X X X Xa Xb
a
Push main switch in to activate
b
Momentarily not connected to ground
– – –1/1
2 Neutral Start Switch The ohmmeter should indicate zero ohms, across terminals “A” and “B”, with the speed OK: Neutral start switch
(B36) selector lever in neutral and an open circuit with the lever in any speed. is good.
NOT OK: Replace neutral

start switch.
– – –1/1
3 Testing the “ELX” The typical coil impedance between pins 85 and 86 is 75-100 ohms. OK: The relay is in good
Electronics Power condition.
Supply Relay (K101) Pins 30 to 87A should form a closed circuit, there should be no battery voltage
and “ACC” Accessory between pins 85 and 86 and they should form an open circuit when battery voltage is NOT OK: Replace the
Relay (K102) applied. relay.
Pins 30 to 87 should be open, there should be no battery voltage between pins 85 and
86 and they should form an closed circuit when battery voltage is applied.
Pins 87 to 87A should always be open.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-15 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=843
Component Testing
4 Fuel Shut-Off NOTE: The shut-off solenoid must be electrically removed from the starting circuit OK: Fuel shut-off
Solenoid (K24) when performing resistance tests. solenoid is good.
Resistance of the shut-off solenoid should be approximately 9 ohms. NOT OK: Replace
solenoid if battery voltage
The current draw should be approximately 1.3 amps at battery voltage. is available at the
solenoid while checking
current draw. If battery
voltage is not available,
check the harness
between the battery and
solenoid.
– – –1/1
5 Heating Element for With battery voltage present, current draw at the heating element should be approx. OK: Heating element
Electrical Starting Aid 60 A. functioning properly.
240
(R15)
25
NOT OK: Replace
16
heating element if battery
voltage was present at
the heater coil during the
current draw test. If there
was no voltage, check
relay K36 adjacent to the
element. Also check the
harness between the
battery, element and
relay.
– – –1/1
6 Starter Relay (K01) NOTE: The starter relay must be electrically removed from the starting circuit when OK: Relay is good.
performing resistance tests.
NOT OK: Replace starter
Resistance of the starter relay coil should be approximately 3.5 to 4.5 ohms. relay.
– – –1/1
7 Electrical Starting Aid Typical coil resistance, across terminals 85 and 86, is 75 to 90 ohms. OK: Relay is good.
Relay (K02)
Terminals 30 to 87A should be a closed circuit, without battery voltage applied across NOT OK: Replace the
terminals 85 and 86, and open with battery voltage applied. relay.
Terminals 30 to 87 should be open, without battery voltage applied across terminals 85

and 86, and a closed circuit with battery voltage applied.
Terminals 87 to 87A should be open all the time.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-16 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=844
Component Testing
8 Fuel Pump Relay Typical coil resistance, across terminals 85 and 86, is 75 to 90 ohms. OK: Relay is good.
(K108)

– – –1/1
9 Bulb Test Relay Typical coil resistance, across terminals 85 and 86, is 75 to 90 ohms. OK: Relay is good.
(K109)
240
25
17
– – –1/1
10 Fuel Preheater Relay Typical coil resistance, across terminals 85 and 86, is 75 to 90 ohms. OK: Relay is good.
(K105)

– – –1/1
11 Fuel Preheater Glow Fuel preheater glow plug should draw approximately 12.5 amps at battery voltage. OK: Fuel preheater glow
Plug (R02) plug is good.
NOT OK: Replace glow

plug if battery voltage is
available at the coil while
checking current draw. If
battery voltage is not
available, check relay
K105 adjacent to the
heater coil and the
harness between battery,
heater coil and relay.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-17 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=845
Component Testing
12 Fuel Pump (Y02) The fuel pump should draw approximately 1.0 amp at battery voltage. OK: Fuel pump is good.
NOT OK: Replace fuel

pump if battery voltage is
available at the pump
while checking current
draw. If battery voltage is
not available, check the
pump relais and/or the
harness between the
battery and fuel pump.
– – –1/1
240
25
18
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-18 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=846
Component Testing
SE2-Instrument Unit and Lighting
Voltage Checks
NOTE: Voltage tests/checks should always be made with

respect to the tractor battery-to-engine ground,
that is, the meter common lead (black) should be
connected to the battery-to-engine ground. Make
sure the meter lead makes good contact with the
battery-to-engine ground and paint, dirt or oil, etc.
does not interfere with the connection.
When making voltage checks at a component, there

should be source voltage on the source side of the
component. With the component activated, there should
be zero volts on the ground side. If there is voltage on the
240
ground side, with the component activated, the ground 25
circuit is either open or has excessive resistance. 19
AG,OUOE003,9436 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
Make the following resistance and/or current draw tests.
– – –1/1
1 Air Cleaner Close air inlet. OK: Warning switch is

Restriction Warning good.
Switch (B02) Air cleaner restriction indicator light must flash.
NOT OK: Check harness
if necessary. Replace
warning switch.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-19 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=847
Component Testing
2 Fuel Gauge Sending 1. Fuel pump test: OK: Sending unit is good.
Unit (B03) Disconnect fuel pump connector at pump.
Resistance of fuel gauge sending unit (left and right terminals) should be 178— NOT OK: Replace fuel
192 ohms with full tank and 6.5—13.5 ohms with empty tank. pump.
2. Correct sender/pump adjustment:
Position the sender/pump unit, to enable the float arm to sit into a well leading away
from the pump locating socket in the base of the tank. This needs to be done with
an multimeter for exact positioning. The (empty-position) OHM-value, when the
pump is pressed down against its spring needs to be 15 [OHgr ] to 18 [OHgr ].
The pump socket can be seen from the underside of the tank, showing the position
and direction of the sender/pump guide for the sender arm.
NOTE: If the fuel gauge sending unit is connected on the harness, ignition ON, and
you move the lever from the sending unit from empty to full, it needs same minutes
until the gauge will shown the new fuel tank level!
Inside the BIF we have a delay relay ( 5 to 10 minutes ).
240
25
20
– – –1/1
3 Engine Oil Pressure NOTE: The engine oil pressure sender should be removed from the circuit prior to OK: The oil pressure
Sender (B04) performing resistance or continuity checks. sender is in good
condition. Check harness
With the engine off, the oil pressure sender is normally open (and when the sender is if necessary.
removed). It closes or opens when pressure reaches 40—70 kPa (0.4—0.7 bar) (5.5—
10.5 psi). NOT OK: Replace the
sender.
– – –1/1
4 Oil Filter Warning NOTE: The oil filter warning light sender should be removed from the circuit prior to OK: The oil filter warning
Light Sender (B07) performing resistance or continuity checks. light sender is in good
condition. If necessary,
The oil filter warning light sender is normally open and should close when pressures of check the wiring harness.
650—750 kPa (6.5—7.5 bar) (95—110 psi) are reached and exceeded.
NOT OK: Replace the
The sender should open when pressures of 450—750 kPa (4.5—7.5 bar) (65— sender.
110 psi) are reached with decreasing pressure.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-20 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=848
Component Testing
5 Engine Coolant NOTE: The values are only correct when the sender is removed from the circuit. OK: The sender is in
Sender (B08) and good condition. If
Transmission Engine Coolant Temperature sensor with BIF necessary, check the
temperature sender wiring harness.
Temperature in °C Resistance in Temperature in °C Resistance in
(B60) [OHgr ] [OHgr ]
NOT OK: Replace the
-40 99301 45 1194 sender.
-35 72883 50 979
-30 52586 55 808
-25 38485 60 670
-20 28512 65 559
-15 21386 70 468
-10 16134 75 394
-5 12230 80 333
0 9401 85 283
5 7273, 90 241 240
10 5661 95 207 25
21
15 4441 100 178
20 3512 105 153
25 2796 110 133
30 2239 115 115
35 1806 120 100
40 1465 125 88
– – –1/1
6 Low Temperature NOTE: The low temperature switch should be removed from the circuit prior to OK: The switch is in
Switch (B29) performing resistance or continuity checks. good condition.
The low temperature switch is normally open and should close on reaching an oil NOT OK: Replace the
temperature of 28°C (82°F). switch.
– – –1/1
7 Transmission Oil NOTE: The transmission oil pressure sender should be removed from the circuit prior OK: The sender is in
Pressure (B31) to performing resistance or continuity checks. good condition. If
necessary, check the
The transmission oil temperature sender is normally closed and should open when wiring harness.
pressures of 800—930 kPa (8.0—9.3 bar) (115—135 psi) are reached and exceeded.
NOT OK: Replace the
The sender should close when pressures of 800—860 kPa (8.0—8.6 bar) (115— sender.
125 psi) are reached with decreasing pressure.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-21 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=849
Component Testing
240
25
22
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-22 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=850
Component Testing
SE3-Horn
Voltage Checks


240
AG,OUOE003,9438 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Horn Switch (S04) With horn switch removed from circuit, there should be less than 0.5 ohm across its OK: Horn switch is good
terminals, at the harness connector (A and B), with the switch pressed, and open when
it is released. NOT OK: Replace horn
switch
– – –1/1
2 Horn (H01) With horn removed from circuit, there should be less than 1 ohm between the horn OK: Horn is good
terminal (A) and its mounting stud.
NOT OK: Replace horn
Current draw should be approximately 3.1 amps.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-23 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=851
Component Testing
240
25
24
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-24 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=852
Component Testing
SE4-Cigarette Lighter and Operator Seat
Voltage Checks


240
AG,OUOE003,9440 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Cigarette Lighter Current draw of the cigarette lighter element should be approximately 7 amps. OK: Lighter is OK if
(E05) current draw and
Resistance of cigarette lighter element should be approximately 0.6 ohm. resistance checks are
good.
NOT OK: Replace lighter

if harness is good.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-25 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=853
Component Testing
2 Compressor (M09) NOTE: The compressor must be electrically removed from its circuit when performing OK: Compressor is good.
resistance tests.
NOT OK: Replace
There should be near zero to approximately one ohm resistance between terminals “A” compressor if battery
and “B” of the 2-way connector at the compressor. voltage is available at the
compressor motor
The compressor motor should draw approximately 8 amps. connector for the current
draw test.
– – –1/1
240
25
26
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-26 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=854
Component Testing
SE5-Front PTO
Voltage Checks


240
AG,OUOE003,9443 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Front PTO Switch NOTE: The front PTO switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing OK: The front PTO switch
(S06) resistance or continuity checks. is in good condition. If
The front PTO switch should be open when not activated and closed when activated. wiring harness.
NOT OK: Replace the

switch.
– – –1/1
2 Front PTO Solenoid The solenoid current draw should be approx. 1 A. OK: The solenoid is in
(Y01) good condition.
NOTE: The solenoid should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance
or continuity checks. NOT OK: Replace the
solenoid.
The solenoid coil resistance should be approx. 12 ohms.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-27 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=855
Component Testing
3 Handbrake Warning NOTE: The handbrake warning switch should be removed from the circuit prior to OK: The handbrake
Switch (B37) performing resistance or continuity checks. warning switch is in good
condition. If necessary,
The handbrake warning switch should be open when not activated and closed when check the wiring harness.
activated.
NOT OK: Replace the
switch.
– – –1/1
4 PTO shaft speed NOTE: The sensor must be removed from the tractor for the following test. OK: Check harness.
sender
240
Connect a multimeter to sensor connector. NOT OK: Replace
25
sender.
28
Move a screwdriver back and forth in front of the sensor and look for the voltage
reading to change as the screwdriver is moved in front of the sensor.
– – –1/1
5 Seat switch (S40) NOTE: The seat switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing OK: Check harness.
resistance or continuity checks.
NOT OK: Replace switch.
The seat switch should should be open when not activated and closed when activated.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-28 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=856
Component Testing
SE6-Lighting Circuits
Voltage Checks


240
AG,OUOE003,9445 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Light Switch (S09) Switch Switch Terminal OK: Switch is good.

Position B(+12V) H L M C
0 X X
1 X X X
2 X X X
3 X X X
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-29 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=857
Component Testing
2 High and Low Beam NOTE: The high and low beam switch must be electrically removed from its circuit OK: High and low beam
Switch (S10) before performing resistance or continuity checks. switch is good. Check
harness if necessary.
Perform continuity check on high and low beam switch using the following chart.
Switch Position Connector Terminals With
Continuity
OFF C1 to NC (C1 to NO open)

ON C1 to NO (C1 to NC open)
– – –1/1
3 Head Light Relays The typical coil impedance between pins 85 and 86 is 75-90 ohms. OK: The relay is in good
(K103 and K107) condition.
240
If battery voltage is not present on pins 85 and 86, there should be a closed circuit
25
between pins 30 and 87A. The circuit should be open when battery voltage is present. NOT OK: Replace the
30
relay.
If battery voltage is not present on pins 85 and 86, the circuit between pins 30 and 87
should be open. The circuit should be closed when battery voltage is present.
The connection between pins 87 and 87A should always be interrupted.
– – –1/1
4 Headlight Switch NOTE: The headlight switch must be electrically removed from its circuit before OK: Headlight switch is
(S11) performing resistance or continuity checks. good. Check harness if
necessary.
Perform continuity check on headlight switch using the following chart.
Continuity
OFF E to F and B to A
ON E to D and B to C
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-30 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=858
Component Testing
SE7-Work Light
Voltage Checks


240
AG,OUOE003,9447 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Work Light Switch NOTE: The work light switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing OK: The switch is in good
(S58, S59, S60 and resistance or continuity checks. condition. If necessary,
S61) check the wiring harness.
The switch should be open when not activated and closed when activated.
NOT OK: Replace the
switch.
– – –1/1
2 Light Relay (K205 and Typical coil resistance, across terminals 85 and 86, is 75 to 90 ohms. OK: Relay is good.
K206)

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-31 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=859
Component Testing
240
25
32
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-32 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=860
Component Testing
SE9-Radio, Dome and Shift Console Lights
Voltage Checks


240
AG,OUOE003,9449 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Dome Light Switch Remove switch from the circuit before testing. OK: Dome light switch is
(S35) good.
Switch Continuity Open
Position Between Between NOT OK: Replace dome
light switch.
ON 1—2 2—3
OFF None All
DOOR SWITCH 2—3 1—2
– – –1/1
2 Door Switch (B28) With the door switch disconnected from the circuit, and the door open there should be OK: Door switch is good.
less than 0.5 ohms across its contacts. There should be no continuity with the door
closed. NOT OK: Replace door
switch.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-33 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=861
Component Testing
240
25
34
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-34 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=862
Component Testing
SE10-Fan and Air Conditioner
Voltage Checks


240
AG,OUOE003,9451 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Fan and Air The typical coil impedance between pins 85 and 86 is 75-90 ohms. OK: The relay is in good
Conditioner Relay condition.
(K204 and K207) If battery voltage is not present on pins 85 and 86, there should be a closed circuit
relay.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-35 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=863
Component Testing
2 Compressor Clutch NOTE: The compressor must be electrically removed from its circuit when performing OK: Readings within
(M02) resistance tests. spec, compressor clutch
coil is good.
Resistance of the compressor clutch coil should be approximately 3.5—4.0 ohms.
NOT OK: Readings not
Current draw of the compressor clutch coil should be approximately 2.5 amps. within spec, replace
compressor clutch coil if
battery voltage is
available at the coil
terminal and the harness
is good.
– – –1/1
3 Blower Switch (S14) Blower Switch Blower Switch Terminal OK: Blower switch is
Position good.
240
25
B 1 2 3 4 NOT OK: Replace blower
36
switch.
OFF X
Low X X
Medium X X X
High X X X X
Purge X X X X X
– – –1/1
4 Resistor (R03) NOTE: The resistor must be electrically removed from the blower and air conditioning OK: Resistance readings
circuit when performing continuity checks. are in spec and terminals
“1” to “4” are not open,
Using a digital multimeter, check for typical resistance between various terminals of the resistor is good.
resistor as follows:
NOT OK: Resistance
“1—4”=175a Ohms “2—3”=440 Ohms readings are not in spec
“1—2”=400 Ohms “2—4”=225 Ohms or terminals “1” to “4” are
“1—3”=840 Ohms “4—3”=665 Ohms open, replace the resistor.
a
A thermal fuse is located between terminals “1” and “4”. If the meter reads an open
circuit, replace the resistor.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-36 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=864
Component Testing
5 Fan Motors (M7 and Check the approximate current draw of the fan motors in switch position 4: OK: Current draw per
M10) specifications, fan motors
Position 4 ..................................................... 9A are in good condition.
IMPORTANT: If the current draw is measured at the fuse location (by removing NOT OK: Current draw
the fuse), make sure there is an adequate in-line fuse in the multimeter positive out of specification;
lead in order to protect system components. replace fan motor if wiring
harness and relay are in
The specification applies to an individual motor. Check M7 at the terminals of fuse good condition.
F218 with the fuse removed (use an in-line fuse in the multimeter lead). To test M10,
remove fuse F217 and clamp the fan motor ground (use an in-line fuse in the
multimeter lead).
– – –1/1
6 Compressor Switch NOTE: The compressor switch must be electrically removed from its circuit before OK: Compressor switch
(S28) performing resistance or continuity checks. is good. Check harness if
240
necessary.
25
The compressor switch should be open when it is released and closed when it is
37
activated. NOT OK: Replace switch.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-37 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=865
Component Testing
SE11 and SE12-Windshield Wiper and

Washer
Voltage Checks


240 component. With the component activated, there should
25 be zero volts on the ground side. If there is voltage on the
38 ground side, with the component activated, the ground
circuit is either open or has excessive resistance.
AG,OUOE003,9453 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Front Wiper Switch Wiper Wiper Switch Terminal OK: Switch is good.
(S15) Switch
Position NOT OK: Replace switch.
B P I L 2 3 4
OFF X •a •a Xb
Intermittent X X Xb
Low X X Xb
High X X Xb
Wash X Xb
a
The “P” terminal is powered by battery voltage through a switch in the wiper arm
drive assembly during the wiper PARK sequence. The “L” terminal receives battery
voltage from the “P” terminal.
b
The wiper switch must be pushed toward center of steering column.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-38 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=866
Component Testing
2 Windshield Washer NOTE: The windshield washer switch must be electrically removed from its circuit OK: Washer switch is
Switch (S16) before performing resistance or continuity checks. good. Check harness if
necessary.
The windshield washer switch should be open when it is released and closed when it
is activated. NOT OK: Replace
washer switch.
– – –1/1
3 Windshield Switch NOTE: The windshield switch must be electrically removed from its circuit before OK: Windshield switch is
(S17 and S20) performing resistance or continuity checks. good. Check harness if
necessary.
Perform continuity check on windshield switch using the following chart.
Continuity
OFF C1 to NO4 (C1 to NC2 open)

ON C1 to NC2 (C1 to NO4 open)
240
25
39
– – –1/1
4 Rear Wiper Switch Switch Switch Terminal OK: Switch is good.

(S18) Position B(+12V) H L M C
0 X X X
1 X X X
2 X X X
3 X X X
– – –1/1
5 Wiper Motor (M03 and Resistance of motor low speed winding (terminals 53 to 53a) should be approximately OK: Motor is OK if
M04) 1.3 ohms and resistance of high speed winding (terminals 53b to 53a) should be operational check is
approximately 1.0 ohm. good.
Current draw of the low speed winding should be 3.5 amps and the high speed NOT OK: Replace motor
winding should be approximately 5.0 amps. if harness is good.
– – –1/1
6 Washer Pump Motors Current draw of the single speed winding should be approximately 2.6 amps. OK: Motor is OK if
(M05 and M06) operational check is
good.
NOT OK: Replace motor

if harness is good.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-39 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=867
Component Testing
S13-Beacon
Voltage Checks


240
40 circuit is either open or has excessive resistance.
AG,OUOE003,9455 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Beacon Light Switch NOTE: The beacon light switch must be electrically removed from its circuit before OK: Beacon light switch
(S36) performing resistance or continuity checks. is good. Check harness if
necessary.
The beacon light switch should be open when it is released and closed when it is
activated. NOT OK: Replace switch.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-40 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=868
Component Testing
SE15-Electronic Hitch Control (HCU)
Voltage Checks


240
AG,LX12234,198 –19–22JUL99–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Quick Raise Lower 1. Switch in NEUTRAL position: OK: Check Harness

Switch (S24)
❒ No continuity between Pin D (lead 838) and Pin F (lead 834) or Pin G (lead 839) NOT OK: Replace Switch
2. Switch in RAISED position:
❒ Continuity between Pin D (lead 838) and Pin F (lead 834)
3. Switch in LOWER position:
❒ Continuity between Pin D (lead 838) and Pin G (lead 839)
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-41 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=869
Component Testing
2 External Raise and • Switch in NEUTRAL position: OK: Check harness.

Lower switch (S68) ❒ Continuity between Pin F (lead 823) and Pin E (lead 0050L).
❒ Continuity between Pin A (lead 821) and Pin B (lead 0050K). NOT OK: Replace switch.
• Switch in LOWER position:

❒ Continuity between Pin C (lead 824) and Pin B (lead 0050K).
❒ Continuity between Pin F (lead 823) and Pin E (lead 0050L).
• Switch in RAISE position:

❒ Continuity between Pin D (lead 826) and Pin E (lead 0050L).
❒ Continuity between Pin A (lead 821) and Pin B (lead 0050K).
– – –1/1
3 Check stepper motor To test the stepper motor for shorted or open circuit, check continuity between stepper OK: Check harness.
(M08) motor terminals A and B and terminals C and D. Specification: 1.0 - 2.0 ohm.
240
NOT OK: Replace
25
stepper motor.
42
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-42 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=870
Component Testing
SE16A-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Braking

System)
Voltage Checks


component. With the component activated, there should 240
be zero volts on the ground side. If there is voltage on the 25
AG,OUOE003,9457 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Stop Light Switch NOTE: The stop light switch must be electrically removed from its circuit before OK: Stop light switch is
(B18/I and B18/II) performing resistance or continuity checks. good. Check harness if
necessary.
Perform continuity check on stop light switch using the following chart.
Continuity

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-43 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=871
Component Testing

Flasher and Turn Signal Unit)
Voltage Checks


AG,OUOE003,9459 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Turn Signal Light NOTE: The switch must be electrically removed from its circuit before performing OK: Switch is good.
Switch (S08) resistance or continuity checks. Check harness if
necessary.
Perform continuity check on switch using the following chart.
Continuity

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-44 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=872
Component Testing
2 Turn Signal Relays Typical coil resistance, across terminals 85 and 86, is 75 to 90 ohms. OK: Relay is good.
(K44, K45, K108 and
K109) Terminals 30 to 87A should be a closed circuit, without battery voltage applied across NOT OK: Replace the

– – –1/1
240
25
45
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-45 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=873
Component Testing
SE16C-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Differential

Lock)
Voltage Checks


AG,OUOE003,9461 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Differential Lock The solenoid current draw should be approx. 1 A. OK: The magnetic switch
Solenoid (Y05) is in good condition.
magnetic switch.
– – –1/1
2 Differential Lock NOTE: The differential lock switch should be removed from the circuit prior to OK: The switch is in good
Switch (S22) performing resistance or continuity checks. condition. If necessary,
check the wiring harness.
The switch should be open when not activated and closed when activated.
NOT OK: Replace the
switch.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-46 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=874
Component Testing
SE16E-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Rear PTO)
Voltage Checks


240
AG,OUOE003,9463 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Rear PTO Switch NOTE: The PTO switch must be electrically removed from its circuit before performing OK: PTO switch is good.
(S21) resistance or continuity checks. Check harness if
necessary.
Perform continuity check on PTO switch using the following chart.
NOT OK: Replace PTO
Switch Position Connector Terminals With switch.
Continuity
OFF A to C (A to B open)
ON A to B (A to C open)
– – –1/1
2 Rear PTO Solenoid The current draw of the solenoid should be approximately 1 amp. OK: Solenoid is good.
(Y04)
NOTE: The solenoid being tested must be electrically removed from its circuit before NOT OK: Replace
performing resistance or continuity checks. solenoid.
Resistance of the solenoid coil should be approximately 12 ohms.

– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-47 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=875
Component Testing
3 PTO shaft speed NOTE: The sensor must be removed from the tractor for the following test. OK: Check harness.
sender
Connect a multimeter to sensor connector. NOT OK: Replace
sender.
– – –1/1
240
25
48
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-48 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=876
Component Testing
SE16G-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front

Wheel Drive)
Voltage Checks


AG,OUOE003,9465 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Front Wheel Drive The current draw of the solenoid should be approximately 1 amp. OK: Solenoid is good.
Solenoid (Y03)
NOTE: The solenoid being tested must be electrically removed from its circuit before NOT OK: Replace
performing resistance or continuity checks. solenoid.

– – –1/1
2 Front Wheel Drive NOTE: The front wheel drive switch must be electrically removed from its circuit before OK: Switch is good.
Switch (S05) performing resistance or continuity checks. Check harness if
necessary.
Perform continuity check on front wheel drive switch using the following chart.
NOT OK: Replace
Switch Position Connector Terminals With Switch.
Continuity
OFF A to B and E to F
ON B to C and D to E
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-49 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=877
Component Testing
SE16H-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Power

supply)
Voltage Checks


AG,LX12234,196 –19–15JUL99–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Engine tachometer NOTE: The sensor must be removed from the tractor for the following test. OK: Check harness
sender B01
Connect a multimeter to sensor connector. NOT OK: Replace sender
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-50 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=878
Component Testing
SE16I-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Headland

Management System)
Voltage Checks


AG,OUOE003,9467 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Sequencing Switch NOTE: The sequencing switch must be electrically removed from its circuit before OK: Sequencing switch is
(S43) performing resistance or continuity checks. good. Check harness if
necessary.
The sequencing switch should be open in OFF position and closed in ON position.
– – –1/1
2 Rear PTO Switch NOTE: In order to check resistance and continuity the PTO switch should be removed OK: The PTO switch is in
(S21) from the circuit. good condition. If
Use the following table to carry out PTO switch continuity checks. wiring harness.
Switch Continuity Through NOT OK: Replace

Setting Pins Switch.
OFF A and C (open betw. A and B)

ON A and B (open betw. A and C)
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-51 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=879
Component Testing
3 Front Wheel Drive NOTE: The front wheel drive switch should be removed from the circuit prior to OK: Remote select switch
Switch (S05) performing resistance or continuity checks. is good. If necessary,
Use the following table to carry out front wheel drive switch continuity checks.
NOT OK: Replace
Switch Current Flow Between Switch.
Setting Pins
OFF A and B; E and F

ON B and C; D and E
– – –1/1
4 Front Wheel Drive The current draw of the solenoid should be approximately 1 amp. OK: Solenoid is good.
and Rear PTO
240
Solenoids (Y03 and NOTE: The solenoid being tested must be electrically removed from its circuit before NOT OK: Replace
25
Y04) performing resistance or continuity checks. solenoid.
52
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-52 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=880
Component Testing
SE19-Electrical Reverser Control
Voltage Checks


240
AG,OUOE003,9469 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Electrical Reverser NOTE: The switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance or OK: The switch is in good
Control Switch B51 continuity checks. condition. If necessary,
Use the following table to carry out switch continuity checks.
NOT OK: Replace the
Switch Current Flow Through switch.
Setting Pins
OFF C1 and NC (open betw. C1 and NO)

ON C1 and NO (open betw. C1 and NC)
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-53 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=881
Component Testing
2 Electrical Reverser The typical coil impedance between pins 85 and 86 is 75-90 ohms. OK: The relay is in good
Control Relay (K210 condition.
to K213) If battery voltage is not present on pins 85 and 86, there should be a closed circuit
relay.
– – –1/1
3 Reverser Control The solenoid current draw should be approx. 1 A. OK: The magnetic switch
Solenoids (Y07 to is in good condition.
240
Y09) NOTE: The solenoid should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance
25
54
magnetic switch.
The solenoid coil resistance should be approx. 10-12 ohms.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-54 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=882
Component Testing
SE20-TLS Front Wheel Drive Axle
Voltage Checks


240
AG,OUOE003,9471 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Front Wheel Drive The solenoid current draw should be approx. 1 A. OK: The magnetic switch
Axle (TLS) Solenoids is in good condition.
(Y10 and Y11) NOTE: The solenoid should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance
magnetic switch.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-55 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=883
Component Testing
SE23-Engine Control Unit
Voltage Checks


240
56 circuit is either open or has excessive resistance.
AG,LX25546,245 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Component Tests
– – –1/1
1 Temperature Sensor NOTE: The values are only correct when the sender is removed from the circuit. OK: The sensor is in
(B56) good condition. If
Temperature Sensor B56 necessary, check the
Temperature in °C Resistance in Ω wiring harness.
25 2732 NOT OK: Replace the

40 1420 sensor.
50 945
60 644
70 432
80 310
90 225
100 158
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-56 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=884
Component Testing
2 Foot throttle sensor NOTE: Signal voltage can only be checked with adapter wiring harness DFLX10. OK: Foot throttle sensor
B57 is in good condition. If
Ignition ON. necessary, check the
wiring harness.
Disconnect X238 (W4; SE23).
NOT OK: Replace the
• Install adapter wiring harness DFLX10. Measure voltage between Pin A (lead 381) sensor.
and Pin B (lead 359) at adapter wiring harness (with multimeter).
Accelerate continuously (and slowly) the throttle (foot or hand) from low idle to high
idle.
❒ The voltage range should be between 0.5 V (low idle) and 4.5 V (high idle).
IMPORTANT: There should be no sudden change in voltage through the full

range of throttle movement.
NOTE: The voltage difference between low and high idle should be at least 1.5 V.
240
25
57
– – –1/1
3 Check potentiometer NOTE: Signal voltage can only be checked with adapter wiring harness DFLX11. OK: Potentiometer for
for Cruise Control Cruise Control A19 is in
A19 Ignition ON. good condition. If
Disconnect X236 (W4; SE23). wiring harness.
• Install adapter wiring harness DFLX11. Measure voltage between Pin A (lead 371) NOT OK: Replace the
and Pin C (lead 345) at adapter wiring harness (with multimeter). potentiometer.
• Turn continuously (and slowly) the potentiometer from low idle to high idle.
❒ The voltage range should be between 0.25 V (low idle) and 4.75 V (high idle).
IMPORTANT: There should be no sudden change in voltage through the full

range of potentiometer movement.
NOTE: The voltage difference between low and high idle should be at least 1.5 V.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-57 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=885
Component Testing
240
25
58
TM4572 (01APR01) 240-25-58 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=886
Section 245
Electronic Control Units
Contents
Page Page
Group 05—Operation and General Diagnostic Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-24

Information BCU and Tractor System-Voltage-Circuit
General Explanation of Testing Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-27
Procedures for Electronic Control Units . . . .245-05-1 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-27
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245-05-1
Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245-05-2 Group BIF—BIF References
Diagnostics with Digital Display . . . . . . . . . . . .245-05-4 Engine Speed Signal Circuit Test (B01) . . . . 245-BIF-1
Diagnosis with the performance monitor . . . . .245-05-6 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-1
Abbreviations Used in Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .245-05-8 Air Filter Switch (B02) Circuit Test. . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-3
Diagnostic Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245-05-9 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-3
Entering program mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245-05-10 Fuel Level Sender (B03) Circuit Test . . . . . . 245-BIF-5
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245-05-10 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-5
Calling Up and Deleting Service Codes. . . . .245-05-14 Engine Oil Pressure Sender Circuit (B04) 245
Address 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245-05-14 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-7
Electronic Control Units - Identification Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-7
Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245-05-17 Oil Filter Restriction Switch (B07) Circuit
Addresses 80 to 99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245-05-17 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-9
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-9
Group BCU—BCU References Coolant Temperature Sender (B08) Circuit
Supply Circuit 973 (BCU Functions) . . . . . . 245-BCU-1 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-12
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-1 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-12
MFWD Switch (S05) Circuit Test. . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-3 Transmission Oil Pressure Switch (B31)
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-3 Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-15
MFWD Solenoid Valve (Y03) Circuit Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-15
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-5 Transmission Oil Temperature Sender (B60)
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-5 Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-17
Rear PTO Switch (S21) Circuit Test . . . . . . 245-BCU-8 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-17
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-8 BIF Supply Voltage and Tractor System
Rear PTO Solenoid Valve (Y04) Circuit Voltage Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-20
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-11 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-20
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-11 Alternator Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-21
Rear PTO Speed Sender (B06) Circuit Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-22
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-13 Flasher Cycle Input Signal Circuit Test . . . . 245-BIF-23
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-13 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-23
Differential Lock Switch (S22) Circuit Seat Switch (S40) Circuit Test (Tractors with
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-14 Front PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-24
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-14 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BIF-24
Differential Lock Solenoid Valve (Y05)
Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-16 Group ECU—ECU References
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-17 Foot Throttle Potentiometer (B57) Supply
HMS Switch (S43) Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-19 Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-1
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-19 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-1
Turn Signal Switch (S08) Circuit Test . . . . 245-BCU-22 Foot Throttle Potentiometer (B57) Output
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-22 Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-3
Hazard Flasher Switch (S62) Circuit
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-BCU-24 Continued on next page
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1
Contents
Page Page
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-3 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-33

Cruise Control Potentiometer (A19) Supply Stepper Motor (M08) Circuit Test . . . . . . . 245-HCU-36
Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-4 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-36
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-4 HCU Power Supply Circuit Test . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-39
Cruise Control Potentiometer (A19) Output Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-39
Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-7
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-7 Group PEC—PEC References
Coolant Temperature Sensor (B56) Circuit PEC Beep Mode Test (PEC 02 and PEC
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-8 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-1
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-9 Upshift Circuit (S48) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-2
Engine Speed Sensor (B01) Circuit Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-2
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-12 Downshift Circuit (S49) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-5
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-12 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-5
Fuel Injection Pump Solenoid (Y13) Circuit Power/ECO Mode Switch (S85) Circuit
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-13
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-8
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-13
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-9
Starting Circuit Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-15
Stepper Motor Driver (SMD0) Power
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-ECU-15
Supply and Identification Circuit Test . . . 245-PEC-12
245 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-12
Group HCU—HCU References
Stepper Motor (M15) and Stepper Motor
HCU Beep Mode Test (HCU 02) . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-1
Driver (SMD0) Circuit Test. . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-14
Quick Raise/Lower Rocker Switch (S24)
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-15
Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-2
E-ICV –– Multi-Function Lever (S64) Axis 1
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-2
Circuit Test (Forward and Rearward Lever
L.H. Draft Sensor (B20) Signal Circuit
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-5 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-18
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-5 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-18
R.H. Draft Sensor (B19) Signal Circuit E-ICV –– Multi-Function Lever (S64) Axis
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-8 2 Circuit Test (Left and Right Lever
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-8 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-24
Load/Depth Control Potentiometer (B26) Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-24
Signal Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-11 E-ICV –– Multi-Function Lever (S64) Axis 3
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-11 Circuit Test (Rocker Switch - Upper and Lower
Hitch Height Control Potentiometer (B27) Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-30
Signal Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-15 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-30
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-15 E-ICV –– Multi-Function Lever
Position Sensor Potentiometer (B21) Signal Potentiometer Supply Circuit Test . . . . . 245-PEC-35
Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-18 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-35
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-18 E-ICV –– Transport Lock Switch (S65)
Raise-Limit Control Potentiometer (B27) Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-37
Signal Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-21 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-37
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-21 E-ICV –– Interlock Switch Circuit Test. . . . 245-PEC-41
Rate-of-Drop Control Potentiometer (B27) Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-41
Signal Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-24 E-ICV –– Stepper Motor Driver (SMD1, 2
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-24 and 3) Power Supply and Identification Circuit
Remote Control Switch (S68) Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-45
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-27 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-46
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-27 E-ICV No.1 –– Stepper Motor (M12) and
Potentiometer (B21, B26 and B27) Supply Stepper Motor Driver (SMD1) Circuit
Voltage Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-30 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-49
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-30 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-49
Draft Sensor (B19 and B20) Supply Voltage
Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-HCU-33 Continued on next page
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Contents
Page Page
E-ICV No.2 –– Stepper Motor (M13) and Group SFA—SFA References

Stepper Motor Driver (SMD2) Circuit SFA Beep Mode Test (SFA 02). . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-1
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-52 Solenoid Valve 1 (Y10) Circuit Test. . . . . . . 245-SFA-1
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-52 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-1
E-ICV No.3 –– Stepper Motor (M14) and Solenoid Valve 2 (Y11) Circuit Test. . . . . . . 245-SFA-5
Stepper Motor Driver (SMD3) Circuit Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-5
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-55 Position Sensor (B53) Supply Voltage
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-PEC-55 Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-8
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-8
Position Sensor (B53) Output Circuit
Group RCU—RCU References
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-9
Recall Codes Procedure for RCU . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-1 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-10
RCU Beep Mode Test (RCU 02) . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-2 Magnet Sending Unit (B35) Circuit Test . . 245-SFA-13
Test Procedure for Diagnostic Address Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-13
RCU 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-3 Hall Sending Unit (B09) Circuit Test . . . . . 245-SFA-15
Test Procedure for Not-Neutral Switch Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-15
(S46) Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-3 Test Procedure for SFA Hydraulic
Test Procedure for Not-Neutral Relay System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-19
(K212) Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-5 SFA Hydraulic Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . 245-SFA-19
Test Procedure for Latch Relay (K213) 245
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-7
Test Procedure for Diagnostic Address
RCU 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-10
Test Procedure for Not-Neutral Switch
(S46) Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-10
Test Procedure for Forward Switch (S46)
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-12
Test Procedure for Reverse Switch (S46)
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-14
RCU 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-17
Test Procedure for Park Switch (B51)
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-17
RCU 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-20
Test Procedure for Park Switch (B51)
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-21
Test Procedure for Neutral Start Switch (B36)
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-23
Test Procedure for Enable Pressure Switch
(B52) Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-23
RCU 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-26
Test Procedure for System Voltage. . . . . . 245-RCU-26
Test Procedure for Enable Solenoid (Y07)
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-27
Test Procedure for Detent Solenoid (S46)
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245-RCU-30
Check Forward Solenoid (Y08) Circuit. . . . 245-RCU-31
Forward Solenoid (Y08) Circuit Check. . . . 245-RCU-32
Check Reverse Solenoid (Y09) Circuit . . . 245-RCU-35
Reverse Solenoid (Y09) Circuit Check . . . 245-RCU-35
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=3
Contents
245
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=4
Group 05
Operation and General Diagnostic Information
General Explanation of Testing Procedures for Electronic Control Units
The applicable test should be performed mainly if a

In any case, follow the test sequence carefully and use
AG,LX25599,309 –19–01MAY00–1/1
Safety Information
IMPORTANT: Do not use test lamps on any control

unit. Only use a multimeter
(JT05791A).
245
05
running. before performing any welding on 1
the tractor.
AG,LX25599,310 –19–01MAY00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=889
Essential Tools

SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company AG,LX25599,316 –19–01MAY00–1/3
Performance monitor . . . . . . . . . RE39569 or RE60389
Calibration and testing of electronic control devices.
–UN–10AUG94
245
05
2
RE39569
AG,LX25599,316 –19–01MAY00–2/3
Test line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .JDG810

–UN–17OCT95
JDG810
AG,LX25599,316 –19–01MAY00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=890
245
05
3
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=891
Diagnostics with Digital Display
Operation
After entering the program mode, moving the turn signal

lever (A) up (1 = right turn signal) increments the
–UN–02DEC98
electronic control units, addresses or information (values)
at an address location.
LX1021863
To decrement the electronic control units, addresses or
information (values) at an address location, move the turn
signal lever down (2=left turn signal).
Each action will show the next electronic control unit, the A—Turn Signal Lever
B—Hazard warning light switch
next higher or lower address or the next information 1—Right turn signal
(value). 2—Left turn signal
To confirm or move to the next information (value) at an

address, briefly pull the turn signal lever toward the
steering wheel (flash-to-pass position) for less than 2
seconds.
245
05 To input data or cancel a process activate the
4
flash-to-pass function by pulling the turn signal lever
toward the steering wheel for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard light switch (B) is used to clear or store a

Service Code.
AG,LX25599,306 –19–01MAY00–1/3
Dual Gauge II
Addresses are shown on the upper line (C).
Information is shown on the lower line (D).

–UN–02DEC98
C—Address
D—Information
LX1021864
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=892
Dual Gauge Plus II
The Dual Gauge Plus II1 shows "DIAGNOSIS" first. The

display changes when an electronic control unit is
selected.
–UN–17NOV98
The electronic control units are shown on the upper line
(E).
LX1021812
Addresses (MODE) are shown on the middle line (C).
If the address is calibratable, the word "Calibration" (F)

appears after the address.
Information (DATA) is shown on the lower line (D).
C—Address
D—Information
–UN–17NOV98
E—Electronic control unit
F—Calibratable address
245
LX1021813
05
5
1
If equipped
AG,LX25599,306 –19–01MAY00–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=893
Diagnosis with the performance monitor
Connecting the performance monitor
NOTE: When used for testing, a performance monitor
–UN–12MAR98
functions in the same way as a permanently
connected performance monitor1.
IMPORTANT: The key switch must be off.
LX1020164
Remove the fuse box cover.
Use the test line (B) to connect the performance monitor

(A) to the service plug (C).
1
If equipped
245
05
6
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=894
Operation
After entering the program mode, pressing the "2" button

(A) increments the electronic control units or the
addresses.
The "0" button (C) is used to decrement the electronic

control units or the addresses.
Press the "Set" key (B) to confirm, enter or store data.
Information (values) are keyed in at the numbered buttons

(numbers at bottom right corner of button).
The (D) button is used to clear an error code or cancel a

process.
Display
The display is divided by a colon.
The two digits on the left side of the display are the 245
address (E). 05
7
The three digits on the right side of the display are the
data (F).
–UN–02DEC98
A—"2" button (up)
B—"Set/Save" button
C—"0" button (down)
D—"Cancel" button
LX1021862
E—Address
F—Information
AG,LX25599,307 –19–01MAY00–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=895
Abbreviations Used in Display
Display Meaning
dIA ......................... (Diagnosis) ......................................................... Diagnostics
ECU ....................... (Engine Control Unit) ......................................... Control unit for engine
biF ......................... (Basic Informator) .............................................. Instrument Panel
bCU ....................... (Basic Control Unit) ........................................... Basic Control Unit
HCU ...................... (Hitch Control Unit) ............................................ Control unit for hitch
PrF ........................ (Performance Monitor) ....................................... Performance monitor
rcu ......................... (Reverser Control Unit) ...................................... Control unit for electrical reverser
SFA ....................... (Suspended Front Axle) ..................................... Control unit for FWD axle with Triple Link Suspension
PEC ....................... (PPST / E-ICV Control Unit) .............................. Control unit for PowrQuad Plus, AutoQuad or AutoQuad II
transmissions
and/or
electrically controlled independent control valves
CAL ....................... (Calibration) ........................................................ Calibration

EOC ...................... (End of Calibration) ............................................ End of Calibration
End ........................ (End) .................................................................. End of a sequence of numbers
Err ......................... (Error) ................................................................. Faults
245
05
8
AG,LX25599,308 –19–01MAY00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=896
Diagnostic Structure
— Entering Program Mode
— Calling up and Deleting Service Codes
— Electronic Control Units - Identification Addresses
AG,LX25599,311 –19–01MAY00–1/1
245
05
9
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=897
Entering program mode
AG,LX25599,312 –19–01MAY00–1/1
Procedure
– – –1/1
Entering program mode The key switch must be off. OK: GO TO: “Selecting
the electronic control
Remove the fuse box cover. unit”.
Remove the service plug from the holder between the NOT OK: GO TO:
load centers (fuse boxes). “Possible causes for it not
being possible to enter
Connect the performance monitor and test lead to the program mode”
245 LX002575 –UN–06AUG94
service plug.
05
10 Install a spare fuse in fuse box location F115 (A).
Turn the key switch to IGN (on).
NOTE: Depending on the test to be performed, start the

engine and run it at 1200 rpm.
These tests will be specially identified.
NOTE: When testing a tractor with electrical reverser

control which is to be placed in a diagnostics address,
the engine should be started first and then the fuse
inserted in location F115.
These tests will be specially identified.
The performance monitor automatically performs a self

test and a bulb check (this takes about 2 seconds).
Indicator: --:dIA
NOTE: Since there is no display distinction between the

performance monitor and digital display, the performance
monitor display is used for illustration purposes (shown
with colon).
LX010455 –UN–19APR95
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=898
Possible causes for it Check fuses F115 and F116. See “SE15-HCU”, Section 240, Group 15. OK: GO TO: “Selecting
not being possible to the electronic control
enter program mode or Check fuse F114, relay K101 and diode V105. See “SE1-Starter Motor and Charging unit”.
for the electronic control Circuit”, Section 240, Group 15.
unit not being displayed
Check the following circuits and leads: 856, 886, 050, 924 and 925. See “SE15-HCU”,
– – –1/1
Selecting the electronic Digital display: OK: GO TO: “Verifying

control unit the control unit”.
Move the turn signal lever up (right turn signal position) until the desired electronic
control unit appears in the display. NOT OK: GO TO:
“Control Unit Not
Performance monitor: Displayed”
Keep pressing key "2" until the relevant desired control unit appears in the display.
245
E.g.: Display 05
11
LX010457 –UN–19APR95
– – –1/1
Verifying the control unit Digital display: OK: GO TO: “Calling up

and deleting service
Activate the flash-to-pass function. codes”.
“0 0” is displayed in front of the control unit. GO TO: “Electronic

Control Units -
Performance monitor: Identification Addresses”.
Press the "Set" button. GO TO: “Diagnostic

addresses of the relevant
“0 0” is displayed in front of the control unit. electronic control units”.
E.g.: Display GO TO: “Calibration of

the relevant electronic
control units”.
GO TO: “Exiting the

program mode”.
LX010458 –UN–19APR95
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=899
Diagnostic addresses of For basic control unit (BCU), see “Diagnostic Address List (BCU)”, or “Display Address OK: Perform diagnostics,
the relevant electronic List (BCU)”, Section 240, Group 20. check components and
control units repair as necessary.
For basic informator (BIF), see “Diagnostic Address List (BIF)”, or “Display Address
List (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20.
For hitch control unit (HCU), see “Diagnostic Address List (HCU) - Rockshaft”, Section
270, Group 15.
For AutoQuad II transmission control unit (PEC), see “Diagnostic Address List (PEC) -
Transmission”, Section 255, Group 10B.
For the control unit of the electrically actuated independent control valves (PEC), see
“Diagnostic Address List (PEC) - Independent Control Valves”, Section 270, Group 15.
For the control unit of the electrical reverser (RCU), see “Diagnostic Address List
(RCU)”, Section 255, Group 10A.
For the control unit of the FWD axle with TLS (SFA), see “Diagnostic Address List
(SFA)”, Section 280, Group 10.
– – –1/1
245
Calibration of the For basic control unit (BCU), see “Calibration Address List (BCU)”, Section 240, Group OK: Perform calibration.
05
relevant electronic 20. GO TO: “Exiting the
12
control units program mode”
For basic informator (BIF), see “Calibration Address List (BIF)”, Section 240, Group 20.
For engine control unit (ECU), see “Testing, Calibrating and Adjusting the Engine
Control Unit (ECU)”, Section 230, Group 15.
For hitch control unit (HCU), see “Calibration (HCU) - Rockshaft”, Section 270, Group
15.
For AutoQuad II transmission control unit (PEC), see “Calibration Address List (PEC) -
Transmission”, Section 255, Group 10B.
For the control unit of the electrically actuated independent control valves (PEC), see
“Calibration (PEC) - Independent Control Valves”, Section 270, Group 15.
For the control unit of the electrical reverser (RCU), see “Calibration Address List
(RCU)”, Section 255, Group 10A.
For the control unit of the FWD axle with TLS (SFA), see “Calibration Address List
(SFA)”, Section 280, Group 10.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-12 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=900
Exiting the program NOTE: Diagnostics or calibration can be stopped at any OK: The electronic
mode time. control units are now in
However, if any data have been changed but not stored their normal operating
prior to ending calibration, these changes are lost. modes.
Turn main switch to the OFF position.
Remove the fuse from location F115 (A).

LX002575 –UN–06AUG94
Disconnect the performance monitor and test lead from
the service plug.
Store the service plug in the holder between the load

centers (fuse boxes).
Re-install the fuse box cover.
– – –1/1
245
05
13
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-13 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=901
Calling Up and Deleting Service Codes
Procedure for dealing with service codes ❒ Call up service codes

❒ Note and clear the service code(s)
Every electronic control unit monitors certain electrical ❒ Activate the circuit affected (functional check)
circuits within the network of circuits for which it is ❒ Call up the service codes again and process them
responsible. The unit then stores the relevant service
code if there is a malfunction (error) or if the operator If it is not possible to (re)produce a relevant service
makes a mistake. However, not all of the service code by means of a functional check and the problem
codes indicate a current problem, since most of the is still present in the circuit, deal with the service codes
circuits are monitored only at the actual moment of you noted earlier.
activation or when they are actually activated (switched
on). To make sure that the service code you are
troubleshooting is “active”, you should proceed as
follows:
AG,LX25599,313 –19–01DEC00–1/1
245
05 Address 01
14
– – –1/1
Call up service codes Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. OK: GO TO: “No service
codes stored”.
Digital display:
NOT OK: GO TO:
Move the turn signal lever up once (right turn signal position). “Service codes stored”
“0 1” is displayed in front of the control unit.
Performance monitor:
Press the "2" button once.
“0 1” is displayed in front of the control unit.
E.g.: Display
LX010459 –UN–18APR95
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-14 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=902
No service codes stored E.g.: The display alternates between: OK: GO TO: “Exiting the
program mode”.
LX1018940 –UN–04FEB98
– – –1/1
Service codes are stored E.g.: The display alternates between: OK: GO TO: “Deleting
service codes”.
NOTE: _ _ _ stands for service code e.g. 045.
Stored service codes roll up automatically in numerical

order. Note the service codes.
NOTE: If several service codes are displayed, this may

indicate a ground problem. 245
05
For a description and troubleshooting procedure for 15
service codes, see the relevant Group in Section 211.
LX1018941 –UN–04FEB98
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-15 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=903
Clear the service codes OK: GO TO: “Exiting the

program mode”.
LX010460 –UN–18APR95
Digital display:
When “0 1 : E n d” appears on the display, switch the

hazard light switch on and off.
After clearing the service codes, the display alternates

between “0 1 : (selected control unit) — 0 1 : 0 0 0”.
Performance monitor:
When “0 1 : E n d” appears on the display, press the

LX1018940 –UN–04FEB98 "cancel" button.
After clearing the service codes, the display alternates

between “0 1 : (selected control unit) — 0 1 : 0 0 0”.
E.g.: The display alternates between:

245
05
16
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-16 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=904
Electronic Control Units - Identification

Addresses
AG,LX25599,314 –19–01MAY00–1/1
Addresses 80 to 99
– – –1/1
Recalling identification Enter program mode. See “Entering Program Mode”, section 245, group 05. OK: GO TO: Identification
addresses address list.
Digital display:
Take the desired address from the list of identification addresses. See “Identification
Address List”.
appears. 245
05
Performance monitor: 17
Take the desired address from the list of identification addresses. See “Identification
Address List”.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-17 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=905
Identification address list Unit Hardware and Software Information OK: GO TO: “Diagnostic
addresses of the relevant
Part number, serial number and software version number of the control unit are all electronic control units”.
stored in addresses 80 to 99.
GO TO:“Calibration of the
Each number has six digits. As it is only possible to display three digits at a time, the relevant electronic control
number is divided and displayed at two different addresses. units”.
For example: Addresses 80 and 81 give the part number of the electronic control unit. GO TO:“Exiting the
Address 80 gives the first three digits of the part number and address 81 the last three program mode”.
digits.
Address no. Displayed Information

80 Control unit part number (first three digits)
81 Control unit part number (last three digits)
82 Control unit serial number (first three digits)
83 Control unit serial number (last three digits)
84 Software part number (first three digits)
85 Software part number (last three digits)
86 Software version number (first three digits)
87 Software version number (last three digits)
88 EOL parameter part numbera (first three digits)
245
05 89 EOL parameter part numbera (last three digits)
18 90 EOL parameter version numbera (first three digits)
91 EOL parameter version numbera (last three digits)
92 Designation of tractor modelb (first three digits)
93 Designation of tractor modelb (last three digits)
94 Tractor serial numberb (first three digits)
95 Tractor serial numberb (last three digits)
96 Designation of tractor modelc (first three digits)
97 Designation of tractor modelc (last three digits)
98 Tractor serial numberc (first three digits)
99 Tractor serial numberc (last three digits)
a
See manufacturer’s notes.
b
Calibratable address
c
Determined at factory
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-05-18 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=906
Group BCU
BCU References
Supply Circuit 973 (BCU Functions)
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16B –– Hazard

Flashers/Turn Signal”, Section 240, Group 15.
• For fuse location see reference “Fuses” in Section – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16C –– Differential
240; Group 10 Lock”, Section 240, Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16D –– Radar”, Section
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. 240, Group 15.
– “Transmission Wiring Harness W13”, Section 240, – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16E –– Rear PTO
Group 10. without HMS”, Section 240, Group 15.
– “Roof Wiring Harness W11”, Section 240, Group – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16G –– MFWD without
10. HMS”, Section 240, Group 15.
• For electrical troubleshooting see functional and – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16H –– Power Supply
diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams: and Tachometer”
– Starter and Charging Wiring Diagrams “SE1”, – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16I –– HMS”, Section
AG,LX12234,534NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure BCU
1
NOTE: Circuit 973 supplies several (BCU-controlled) components/functions. A general circuit 973 problem would
have a lasting effect of all following functions:
• Differential Lock Switch Circuit (SE16C).

• Rear PTO Switch Circuit (SE16E without HMS or SE16I with HMS).
• HMS Switch Circuit (SE16I).
• MFWD Switch Circuit (SE16G without HMS or SE16I with HMS).
• Turn Signal Switch Circuit (SE16B).
• Radar Sensor Circuit (SE16D).
• Hall Speed Sensor Circuit (SE16H).
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-BCU-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=907
BCU References
1 Preliminary Check Check Supply Circuit (lead 012; 902 and 072): OK: Check all relevant
connections for bad,
• for continuity and high resistance. loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
Wiring harness:
IF OK: GO TO 2.
Main Supply Circuit 012; 902 and 072 for Fuse F113 (Circuit 973)
NOT OK: Repair as
from to from to from to
F01 (160 A F114 - Pin F114 - Pin K101 - Pin K101 - Pin F113 - Pin operational test.
- Main E A 30 87 E
Fuse) (ELX - (ELX -
Relay) Relay)
Lead Number 012 Lead Number 902 Lead Number 072
(SE1) (SE1) (SE16C)
– – –1/1
245
2 Circuit 973 Check Supply Lead 973: OK: Check all relevant
BCU
connectors for bad, loose,
2
• for a short to ground and high resistance. widened or corroded
contacts.
Circuit 973
Supply Circuit 973 in W4 IF OK: Check electronic
controller supply circuit
from to to to to 072.
F113 - Pin A X122 - Pin B X125 - Pin A X242 - Pin B X245 - Pin C
(Diff - Lock (Rear PTO (HMS Switch) (MFWD NOT OK: Repair as
Switch Switch) SE16I Switch) needed and carry out an
SE16C SE16E or (SE16G or operational test.
SE16I with SE16I with
HMS) HMS)
F113 - Pin A X21 - Pin 6 X07 - Pin 9 X03 - Pin J7
(Turn Signal (connection to (connection to
Switch - W11 - SE16I) W13 - SE16D)
(SE16B)
Supply Circuit 973 in W11:
Not used.
Supply Circuit 973 in W13
from to to to to
X03/4 Pin J7 X30 Pin 3 and X88 Pin C
(connection to Pin 4 (Radar (Hall sensor -
W4) Sensor SE16H)
connector -
SE16D)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=908
BCU References
MFWD Switch (S05) Circuit Test
Related to Service Code BCU 085. • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams:
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16G –– MFWD without
HMS”, Section 240, Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16I –– MFWD with
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. HMS”, Section 240, Group 15.
AG,LX12234,537NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the MFWD switch (S05) circuitry, harness to BCU connection and switch harness
assembly condition.
– – –1/1
245
1 MFWD Switch (S05) Access Address BCU 08. OK: • Test completed.
BCU
Circuit Test
3
BCU 08 –– MFWD Switch Circuit—Specification • Circuit problem still
MFWD Switch in ON-position:—Status ....................................................................... X00 exists, GO TO 2.
MFWD Switch in Auto position (only for
tractors with HMS):—Status ........................................................................................ X1X NOT OK: Display shows
MFWD Switch in OFF/Brake Assist always “000”; check fuse
position:—Status ......................................................................................................... XX1 F113 and repeat this test.
NOT OK: Check MFWD

switch, GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
2 General Harness and Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Check all relevant
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the MFWD
(MFWD Switch (S05) wires (for more detailed Beep Mode test information, see reference “BCU Address 02” switch circuit for bad,
Circuit) and “BCU Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20). loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
MFWD Switch Circuit (S05):
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ X245 (MFWD switch) and X133 (BCU) at W4. needed and carry out an
❒ XGND2 (Electronic ground connection) at W4. operational test.
NOTE: If the warning horn “beeps” while tugging on the wires, a harness or connector
defect is indicated.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=909
BCU References
3 MFWD Switch (S05) NOTE: The switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance or OK: GO TO 4.
Test continuity checks.
NOT OK: Replace switch
MFWD Switch Test—Specification and repeat this test.
MFWD switch in ON-position—Switch
status .................................................................................................................. All OPEN
MFWD switch in OFF/Brake
Assist-position—Switch status .............................. Closed between pin C (lead 973) and
pin A (lead 557)
MFWD switch in AUTO-position (only for
tractors with HMS)—Switch status .................... Closed between pin C (lead 973) and B
(lead 511)
– – –1/1
4 MFWD Switch (S05) NOTE: Each disconnected connector (with key switch ON) will create a Service Code OK: GO TO 4.2
Harness Test of the dependent component.
NOT OK: Check fuse
4.1 F113.
Disconnect MFWD switch X245. IF OK: Fuse F113 is OK.

Check lead 973, GO TO
Ignition ON. Measure with multimeter between pin C (lead 973) and an adequate 5.
245 ground connection:
BCU
4 MFWD Switch (S05)—Specification
Power Supply:—Voltage ........................................................................................ 12 Volt
4.2 OK: GO TO 4.3
Disconnect MFWD switch connector X245 (MFWD indicator light must come ON) and NOT OK: Check signal
check display at Address BCU 08 again: leads for a short to
another conductor, GO
BCU 08 –– MFWD Switch Circuit (Harness Test)—Specification TO 6.
MFWD switch connector X245
disconnected:—Status ................................................................................................. 000
4.3 Check signal circuit for Brake/Assist position at MFWD switch connector X245: OK: Tractor with HMS:
GO TO 4.4
BCU 08 –– MFWD Switch Circuit (Harness Test)—Specification
Bypass pin C (lead 973) and pin A (lead OK: Tractor without HMS:
557):—Status ............................................................................................................... XX1 Test completed.
NOT OK: Check lead

557, GO TO 6
4.4 Tractors with HMS: OK: Test completed.
Check signal circuit for Auto Position at MFWD switch connector X245: NOT OK: Check lead
511, GO TO 6.
BCU 08 - MFWD Switch Circuit (Harness Test)—Specification
Bypass pin C (lead 973) and pin B (lead
511)—Status ................................................................................................................ X1X – – –1/1

111401
PN=910
BCU References
5 Supply Lead 973 Check supply lead 973: OK: Check circuit 973,
(MFWD Switch (S05) see "Supply Circuit 973
Circuit) ❒ for continuity. (BCU Functions)", Section
245, Group BCU.
Wiring connection:
NOT OK: Repair as
MFWD Switch (S05) Power Supply Circuit needed and repeat this
test.
From To Wiring Harness
Section
Fuse F113-Pin A X245-Pin C W4
(MFWD switch) (SE16G or SE16I)
Fuse F113-Pin E K101-Pin 87 W4
(ELX-Relay) (SE01)
– – –1/1
6 Signal Lead 557 and Check signal lead 557 (OFF/Brake Assist signal): OK: Check all relevant
511 (MFWD Switch connectors of the MFWD
(S05) Circuit) ❒ for a short to lead 511 (AUTO-position signal, only for tractors with HMS). switch circuit for bad,
❒ for continuity. loose, widened or
❒ for a short to ground. corroded contacts.
❒ for a short to another conductor.
NOT OK: Repair as
Check signal lead 511: (AUTO-position signal, for tractors with HMS): needed and repeat this
test. 245
❒ for a short to lead 557 (OFF/Brake Assist signal). BCU
❒ for continuity. 5
❒ for a short to ground.
MFWD Switch Signal Circuit 557 and 511

Circuit Wiring Harness W4
Section SE16G or SE16I From To
557 X245-Pin A X133-Pin 30
(OFF / Brake Assist) (MFWD switch) (BCU)
511 X245-Pin B X133-Pin 29
(AUTO-position) (MFWD switch) (BCU)
– – –1/1
MFWD Solenoid Valve (Y03) Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16G –– MFWD without
HMS”, Section 240, Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16I –– MFWD with
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. HMS”, Section 240, Group 15.
– “Transmission wiring harness W13”, Section 240,
Group 10.
LX12234,0000367NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
– – –1/1

111401
PN=911
BCU References
1 General Harness and Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Circuit problem still
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BCU 02 and gently tug at the affected exists: GO TO 2.
(MFWD Solenoid wires (for more detailed Beep Mode test information, see reference “BCU Address 02”
Valve Y03) and “BCU Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20.). NOT OK: Repair as
MFWD Solenoid Valve Y03 Circuit: operational test.
❒ XGND26 (MFWD solenoid/Transmission wiring harness ground connection) at W13.

❒ X91 (MFWD solenoid) and X03/4 (Connection to W4) at W13.
❒ X03 (Connection to W13) and X133 (BCU) at W4.
– – –1/1
2 MFWD Solenoid Coil NOTE: The solenoid being tested must be electrically removed from its circuit before OK: Check solenoid
Y03 performing resistance or continuity checks. power supply, GO TO 3.
Ignition OFF. NOT OK: Replace

solenoid and carry out an
Disconnect MFWD solenoid valve connector X91 (W13). Measure between Pin A and operational test..
Pin B at solenoid valve:
245 MFWD solenoid valve check—Specification

BCU Coil:—Resistance ................................................................ 10 - 12 Ohm at 20°C (68° F)
6
For connector location and pin arrangement see W13; for Circuit Diagram see SE16G
or SE16I.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=912
BCU References
3 MFWD Solenoid Valve NOTE: Supply voltage can only be checked with adapter wiring harness DFLX14 (see OK: GO TO 3.2
Power Supply reference: “DFLX14 –– Adapter Wiring Harness”, Section 299, Group 05).
NOT OK: GO TO 4.
BCU will immediately interrupt the power supply in the following cases:
• harness interrupted (disconnected or defective lead).

• defective solenoid valve.
Disconnect MFWD solenoid valve connector X91 (W13) and install adapter wiring
harness DFLX14.
3.1 – Supply Voltage Check
Ignition ON. Measure voltage with multimeter between Pin A and Pin B at test plug of
adapter wiring harness DFLX14:
MFWD solenoid valve - Supply Voltage—Specification

MFWD Engaged:—Voltage .......................................................................................... 0 V
MFWD Disengaged:—Voltage ................................................................................... 12 V
For connector location and pin arrangement see W13; for Circuit Diagram see SE16G
or SE16I.
3.2 –– Amperage Check OK: Test completed.

245
IMPORTANT: Connect the multimeter between the additional connection of NOT OK: Check ground
BCU
adapter wiring harness DFLX14 before the MFWD switch will be connection of solenoid
7
activated/deactivated otherwise the BCU will detect an open circuit and valve.
immediately interrupt the power supply to the solenoid:
Disconnect additional plug for amperage-measurement at adapter wiring harness

DFLX14 and measure with multimeter between connections:
MFWD solenoid valve - Amperage—Specification

MFWD Disengaged:—Amperage .................... 1 - 1.2 A at 20°C (68° F) and nominal 12
V
– – –1/1
4 Supply Lead 555 and Check supply lead 555: NOT OK: Repair as
Ground Lead 310 needed and carry out an
(MFWD Solenoid ❒ for continuity. operational test.
Valve Y03) ❒ for a short to the ground.
Check ground lead 310: connectors of the MFWD
solenoid valve circuit for
corroded contacts:
Wiring connections:
MFWD Solenoid Valve Circuit 555 and 310

Circuit Wiring Harness W13 Wiring Harness W4
(SE16G or From To From To
SE16I)
555 X91-Pin A X03/4-Pin D1 X03-Pin D1 X133-Pin 2
(Supply Lead) (MFWD (Connection to (Connection to (BCU)
solenoid valve) W4) W13)
310 X91-Pin B XGND26
(Ground Lead) (MFWD (Ground
solenoid valve) Connection)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=913
BCU References
Rear PTO Switch (S21) Circuit Test
Related to Service Code BCU 72. – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16E –– PTO Speed
Sensor and Rear PTO without HMS ”, Section
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: 240, Group 15.
– BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16I –– Rear PTO with
• For component location and pin arrangement see: HMS”, Section 240, Group 15.
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. – “SE1 –– Starter and Charging Circuits”, Section
• For electrical troubleshooting see functional and 240, Group 15.
AG,LX12234,539NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test rear PTO switch circuitry, harness to BCU connection and switch harness assembly
condition.
– – –1/1
245
1 Rear PTO switch Access Address BCU 09. OK: GO TO 3.
BCU
(S21) OFF-Circuit Test
8
BCU 09 –– Rear PTO Circuit—Specification NOT OK: Display shows
PTO switch in OFF-position:—Status .................................... X01 (Signal from lead 586) always: “000”, check fuse
F113 and repeat this test.
NOT OK: GO TO 2
– – –1/1
2 Rear PTO-Calibration 2.1 OK: GO TO 2.2

Address Check and
Wiring Bridge X243F Check PTO-Calibration Address BCU 28: NOT OK: Recalibrate
Test Address BCU 28.
BCU 28 –– PTO-Calibration Address—Specification
Tractors with rear PTO—Status .................................................................................. 001
Tractors without rear PTO—Status ............................................................................. 000
2.2: OK: Check rear PTO

switch, GO TO 5.
NOTE: PTO-OFF signal is provided via wiring bridge in connector X243F.
NOT OK: Repair as
Check wiring bridge in connector X243F. needed and repeat this
test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=914
BCU References
3 Rear PTO Switch Access Address BCU 09. OK: • Test completed.
(S21) ON-Circuit Test
BCU 09 –– Rear PTO Circuit (ON-Circuit)—Specification • Circuit problem still
PTO switch in ON-position:—Status ...................................... X10 (Signal from lead 525) exists, GO TO 4.
NOT OK: Check rear

PTO switch, GO TO 5.
– – –1/1
Connector Test (Rear connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of PTO switch
PTO Switch (S21) wires (for more detailed Beep Mode test information, see reference “BCU Address 02” circuit for bad, loose,
Circuit) and “BCU Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20). widened or corroded
contacts.
Rear PTO Switch (S21) Circuit:
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ X125 (PTO switch); X133 (BCU); X243 and X243F (connector bridge) at W4. needed and repeat this
❒ XGND2 (Electronic ground connection) at W4. test. 245
BCU
NOTE: If the warning horn “beeps” while tugging on the wires, a harness or connector 9
– – –1/1
5 Rear PTO Switch NOTE: The switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance or OK: Check PTO switch
(S21) Test continuity checks. wiring circuit, GO TO 6.
PTO Switch Test (S21)—Specification NOT OK: Replace PTO

PTO Switch in OFF-position:—Switch switch and repeat this
status ........................................................................ Continuity between pin A and pin C test.
PTO Switch in ON-position:—Switch
status ........................................................................ Continuity between pin A and pin B
– – –1/1
6 Rear PTO Switch Disconnect X125. OK: Check all relevant

(S21) Harness Test connectors of the PTO
Access Address BCU 09: switch circuit for bad,
loose, widened or
BCU 09 –– Rear PTO Circuit (Harness Test)—Specification corroded contacts.
Bypass pin A (lead 973) and pin C (lead
528):—PTO: OFF-position status ................................................................................ XX1 NOT OK: Display shows
always 000, GO TO 7.
Bypass pin A (lead 973) and pin B (lead
525):—PTO: ON-position status ................................................................................. X1X NOT OK: GO TO 8
NOTE: Each disconnected connector (with key switch ON) will create a Service Code
of the dependent component.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=915
BCU References
7 Rear PTO Switch NOTE: Each disconnected connector (with key switch ON) will create a Service Code OK: GO TO 8.
(S21) Power Supply of the dependent component.
NOT OK: Check fuse
7.1 Power supply check (lead 973): F113.
Disconnect PTO switch connector X125. IF OK: GO TO 7.2
Ignition ON. Measure with multimeter between pin A (lead 973) and an adequate
ground connection:
PTO Switch S21—Specification

Power supply:—Voltage ............................................................................................. 12 V
7.2 OK: Check circuit 973,

see "Supply Circuit 973
Check supply lead 973: (BCU Functions)", Section
245, Group BCU.
❒ for continuity.
NOT OK: Repair as
Wiring connection: needed and repeat this
test.
Circuit 973 (Rear PTO Switch Supply Circuit)
Section
245 Fuse F113-Pin A X125-Pin A W4
BCU (PTO switch) (SE16E or SE16I)
10
(ELX-Relay) (SE1)
– – –1/1
8 Signal Lead 528/(586) Check lead 528/(586): OK: Check all relevant
and 525 (Rear PTO connectors of the PTO
Switch (S21) Circuit) ❒ for a short to lead 525. switch signal circuit for
Check lead 525: NOT OK: Repair as

Wiring connections:
Circuit 528 and 525 (Rear PTO Switch Signal Circuit)

Circuit From To To
Circuit 525 in W4 X125-Pin B X133-Pin 26
(ON-Signal) (Rear PTO switch) (BCU)
Circuit 528 in W4 X125-Pin C X243-Pin B X07-Pin 15
(OFF-Signal) (Rear PTO switch) (via wiring bridge (Connection to
in X243F to X243 W11)
Pin C)
Lead number 528 (X243-Pin B) changes to 586 (X243-Pin C)
Circuit 586 in W4 X243-Pin C X133-Pin 31
(OFF-Signal) (BCU)
Circuit 528 in W11 not used.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=916
BCU References
Rear PTO Solenoid Valve (Y04) Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16E –– PTO Speed
• For component location and pin arrangement see: 240, Group 15.
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16I –– Rear PTO for
– “Transmission Wiring Harness W13”, Section 240, tractors with HMS”, Section 240, Group 15.
Group 10.
LX12234,0000365NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
– – –1/1
245
1 General Harness and Most of the harness problems in the field are related to connector problems and/or bad OK: Circuit problem still
BCU
Connector Test (Rear ground connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BCU 02 and gently tug at the exists: GO TO 2.
11
PTO Solenoid Y04) affected wires (for more detailed Beep Mode test information, see reference “BCU
Address 02” and “BCU Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20.). NOT OK: Repair as
Rear PTO Solenoid Y04 Circuit: operational test.
❒ XGND26 (PTO solenoid/transmission wiring harness ground connection) at W13.

❒ X95 (PTO solenoid valve) and X03/4 (Connection to W4) at W13.
SE16E or SE16I.
– – –1/1
2 Check rear PTO NOTE: The solenoid being tested must be electrically removed from its circuit before OK: GO TO 3.
solenoid Y04 performing resistance or continuity checks.
NOT OK: Replace
Ignition OFF. solenoid and carry out an
operational test.
Disconnect PTO solenoid valve connector X95 (W13) and measure at solenoid valve
between Pin A and Pin B:
PTO solenoid valve check—Specification

Coil:—Resistance ................................................................ 10 - 12 Ohm at 20°C (68° F)
For connector location and pin arrangement see W13; for Circuit Diagram see SE16E
or SE16I.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=917
BCU References
3 Check PTO solenoid NOTE: Supply voltage can only be checked with adapter wiring harness DFLX14 (see OK: GO TO 3.2
valve (Y04) power reference: “DFLX14 –– Adapter Wiring Harness”, Section 299, Group 05).
supply NOT OK: GO TO 4.

Disconnect PTO solenoid valve connector X95 and install adapter wiring harness
DFLX14.
Ignition ON. Measure voltage with multimeter at test plug of adapter wiring harness
DFLX14 between Pin A and B:
PTO solenoid valve - Supply Voltage—Specification

PTO Disengaged:—Voltage ......................................................................................... 0 V
PTO Engaged:—Voltage ............................................................................................ 12 V
For connector location and pin arrangement see W13; for Circuit Diagram see SE16E
or SE16I.

245
BCU
adapter wiring harness DFLX14 before the PTO switch will be activated connection of solenoid
12
otherwise the BCU will detect an open circuit and immediately interrupt the valve.
power supply to the solenoid:

PTO solenoid valve - Amperage—Specification

PTO Engaged:—Amperage ............................ 1 - 1.2 A at 20°C (68° F) and nominal 12
V
– – –1/1
(Rear PTO Solenoid ❒ for a short to the ground. operational test.
Y04) ❒ for continuity.
Check ground lead 310: connectors of the PTO
solenoid valve circuit for
corroded contacts:
Wiring connections:
PTO solenoid valve circuit 575 and 310

SE16E or From To From To
SE16I
(Supply Lead) (PTO solenoid (Connection to (Connection to (BCU)
valve) W4) W13)
310 X95-Pin B XGND26
(Ground Lead) (PTO solenoid (Ground
valve) Connection)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=918
BCU References
Rear PTO Speed Sender (B06) Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16E –– PTO Speed
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10.
– “Transmission Wiring Harness W13”, Section 240,
Group 10.
AG,LX12234,535NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test rear PTO speed sender (B06) circuitry, harness to BCU connection and sender
harness assembly condition.
– – –1/1
245
1 Rear PTO Speed • Start Engine. OK: • Test completed.
BCU
Sender B06 Circuit
13
Test • Access Address BCU 04: • Circuit problem still
exists, GO TO 2.
BCU 04 - Rear PTO Speed Sender Signal (Running Engine)—Specification
Rear PTO disengaged:—Status .................................................................................. X0X NOT OK: • PTO is
Rear PTO engaged:—Status ...................................................................................... X1X turning and reading in
Address BCU 04 is not
within specification, GO
TO 3.
• PTO is not turning, see:

Rear PTO
Troubleshooting, see
– – –1/1
Connector Test (Rear connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the PTO
PTO Speed Sender wires (for more detailed Beep Mode test information, see reference “BCU Address 02” speed sensor-circuit for
B06) and “BCU Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20). bad, loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
Rear PTO speed sensor (B06) circuit:
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ X94 (PTO speed sender) and X03/4 (connection to W4) at W13. needed and repeat this
❒ X03 (connection to W13) and X133 (BCU) at W4. test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=919
BCU References
3 Rear PTO Speed NOTE: The sensor must be removed from the tractor for the following test. OK: Check harness, GO
Sender B06 Test TO 4.
Connect a multimeter to sensor connector.
NOT OK: Replace sensor
Move a screwdriver back and forth in front of the sensor and look for the voltage and repeat this test.
– – –1/1
4 Lead 574 and 531 Check supply lead 574: OK: Check all relevant
(Rear PTO Speed connectors of the rear
Sender B06) ❒ for a short to ground. PTO speed sender circuit
❒ for continuity. for bad, loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
Check ground lead 531:
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ for continuity. needed and repeat this
test.
Wiring connections:
Circuit 574 and 531 (Rear PTO Speed Sender B06)

SE16E Wiring Harness W13 Wiring Harness W4
Circuit From To From To
(Supply lead) (PTO speed (Connection to (Connection to (BCU)
245
sender) W4) W13)
BCU
14 531 X94-Pin B X03/4-Pin D4 X03-Pin D4 X133-Pin 4
(Ground lead) (PTO speed (Connection to (Connection to (BCU)
sender) W4) W13)
– – –1/1
Differential Lock Switch (S22) Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16C –– Differential
Lock”, Section 240, Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – “SE1 –– Starter and Charging Wiring Diagrams ”,
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. Section 240, Group 15.
AG,LX12234,536NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test differential lock switch (S22) circuitry, harness to BCU connection and switch
– – –1/1

111401
PN=920
BCU References
1 Differential Lock Access address BCU 07. OK: • Test completed.

Switch (S22) Circuit
Test BCU 07 –– Differential Lock Switch (S22) Circuit—Specification • Circuit problem still
Differential lock switch not activated exists, GO TO 2.
(OFF-Position):—Status .............................................................................................. XX0
Differential lock switch activated NOT OK: Display shows
(ON-Position):—Status ................................................................................................ XX1 always: “000”, check fuse
NOTE: The center digit of the display 0“X”0 shows the position of the neutral start
switch (0=Not Neutral / 1=Neutral). NOT OK: Check switch,
GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the
(Differential-Lock wires (for more detailed Beep Mode test information, see reference “BCU Address 02” differential lock switch
Switch (S22) Circuit) and “BCU Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20). circuit for bad, loose,
widened or corroded
Differential Lock Switch Circuit: contacts.
❒ X122 (diff-lock switch) and X133 (BCU) at W4. NOT OK: Repair as
❒ XGND2 (Electronic ground connection) at W4. needed and carry out an 245
operational test. BCU
NOTE: If the warning horn “beeps” while tugging on the wires, a harness or connector 15
– – –1/1
3 Differential Lock NOTE: The switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance or OK: Check harness, GO
Switch S22 Test continuity checks. TO 4.
Differential Lock Switch Test—Specification NOT OK: Replace switch

Differential Lock switch not activated— and repeat this test.
Switch status .......................................................................................................... OPEN
Differential Lock switch activated—
Switch status ....................................................................................................... CLOSED
– – –1/1
4 Differential Lock Disconnect differential lock switch connector X122. OK: Check all relevant
Switch (S22) Harness connectors of the
Test Access Address BCU 07: differential lock switch
circuit for bad, loose,
BCU 07 - Differential Lock Switch Harness Test—Specification widened or corroded
Differential lock switch connector X122 contacts.
disconnected:—Status ................................................................................................. XX0
Pin A (lead 973) and pin B (lead 522) NOT OK: GO TO 5.
bypassed:—Status ...................................................................................................... XX1
– – –1/1

111401
PN=921
BCU References
5 Power Supply and 5.1 Power supply check: OK: GO TO 5.2

Signal Lead 522
(Differential-Lock Disconnect X122. Measure with multimeter at connector X122 between pin A (lead NOT OK: Check fuse
Switch (S22) Circuit) 973) and an adequate ground connection: F113.
Differential Lock Switch S22—Specification IF OK: Fuse F113 is OK.

Power Supply:—Voltage ........................................................................................ 12 Volt Check lead 973, GO TO
6.
5.2 OK: Check all relevant

connectors of the
Check signal lead 522: differential lock switch
signal circuit for bad,
Wiring connection: NOT OK: Repair as

Differential Lock Switch Signal Circuit 522 test.
From To Wiring Harness / Section
X122-Pin A X133-Pin 28 W4 / SE16C
(Diff-lock switch) (BCU)
245
BCU
16
– – –1/1
6 Supply Lead 973 Check supply lead 973: OK: Check circuit 973,
(Differential-Lock see "Supply Circuit 973
Switch (S22) Circuit) ❒ for continuity. (BCU Functions)", Section
245, Group BCU.
Wiring connections:
NOT OK: Repair as
Differential Lock Switch Power Supply Circuit needed and repeat this
test.
From To Wiring Harness /
Section
Fuse F113-Pin A X122-Pin B W4
(Diff-lock switch) (SE16C)
(ELX-Relay) (SE1)
– – –1/1
Differential Lock Solenoid Valve (Y05) Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16C –– Differential
Lock”, Section 240, Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – “SE1 –– Starter and Charging Wiring Diagrams ”,
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. Section 240, Group 15.
Group 10.
LX12234,0000366NA –19–01JAN01–1/1

111401
PN=922
BCU References
Test Procedure
– – –1/1
1 General Harness and Most of the harness problems in the field are related to connector problems and/or bad OK: Circuit problem still
Connector Test ground connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BCU 02 and gently tug at the exists: GO TO 2.
(Differential Lock affected wires (for more detailed Beep Mode test information, see reference “BCU
Solenoid Valve Y05) Address 02” and “BCU Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20.). NOT OK: Repair as
Differential Lock Solenoid Valve Y05 Circuit: operational test.
❒ XGND26 (Differential lock solenoid/Transmission wiring harness ground connection)

at W13.
❒ X87 (Differential lock solenoid) and X03/4 (Connection to W4) at W13.
– – –1/1
245
2 Differential Lock NOTE: The solenoid being tested must be electrically removed from its circuit before OK: Check solenoid
BCU
Solenoid Coil Y05 performing resistance or continuity checks. power supply, GO TO 3.
17
Ignition OFF. NOT OK: Replace
solenoid coil.
Disconnect Differential Lock solenoid valve connector X87 (W13). Measure between
Pin A and Pin B at solenoid:
Differential Lock solenoid valve check—Specification

Coil:—Resistance ................................................................ 10 - 12 Ohm at 20°C (68° F)
For connector location and pin arrangement see W13; for Circuit Diagram see SE16C.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=923
BCU References
3 Differential Lock NOTE: Supply voltage can only be checked with adapter wiring harness DFLX14 (see OK: GO TO 3.2
Solenoid Valve Power reference: “DFLX14 –– Adapter Wiring Harness”, Section 299, Group 05).
Supply NOT OK: GO TO 4.

Disconnect differential Lock solenoid valve connector X87 and install adapter wiring
harness DFLX14.
Ignition ON. Measure voltage with multimeter at test plug of adapter wiring harness
DFLX14 between Pins A and B:
Differential Lock Solenoid Valve - Supply Voltage—Specification

Differential Lock Disengaged:—Voltage ...................................................................... 0 V
Differential Lock Engaged:—Voltage ......................................................................... 12 V
For connector location and pin arrangement see W13; for Circuit Diagram see SE16C.
245
adapter wiring harness DFLX14 before the Differential Lock switch will be connection of solenoid
BCU
activated otherwise the BCU will detect an open circuit and immediately interrupt valve.
18
the power supply to the solenoid:

Differential Lock Solenoid Valve - Amperage—Specification

Differential Lock Engaged:—Amperage .......... 1 - 1.2 A at 20°C (68° F) and nominal 12
V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=924
BCU References
(Differential Lock ❒ for continuity. operational test.
Solenoid Valve Y05) ❒ for a short to the ground.
Check ground lead 310: connectors of the
Differential Lock solenoid
❒ for continuity. valve circuit for bad,
loose, widened or
Wiring connections: corroded contacts:
Differential Lock Solenoid Valve Circuit 527 and 310 IF OK: Delete Service
Circuit Wiring Harness W13 Wiring Harness W4 Code and carry out an
operational test. If the
(SE16C) From To From To code does reappear and
527 X87-Pin A X03/4-Pin C7 X03-Pin C7 X133-Pin 24 the check of the solenoid
(Supply Lead) (Differential (Connection to (Connection to (BCU) valve circuit does not
Lock solenoid W4) W13) reveal any problem,
valve) replace the BCU and
carry out an operational
310 X87-Pin B XGND26 test.
(Ground Lead) (Differential (Ground
Lock solenoid Connection)
valve)
245
BCU
19
– – –1/1
HMS Switch (S43) Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16I –– Headland
Management System (HMS)”, Section 240, Group
• For component location and pin arrangement see: 15.
AG,LX12234,538NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test HMS switch (S43) circuitry, harness to BCU connection and switch harness
assembly condition.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=925
BCU References
1 HMS Switch (S43) Access Address BCU 08. OK: • Test completed.
Circuit Test
BCU 08 –– HMS Switch Circuit—Specification • Circuit problem still
HMS switch NOT activated:—Status .......................................................................... 0XX exists, GO TO 2.
HMS switch activated:—Status ................................................................................... 1XX
NOT OK: Display shows
always “000”; check fuse
NOT OK: Check HMS

switch, GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
Connector Test (HMS connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the HMS
Switch (S43) Circuit) wires (for more detailed Beep Mode test information, see reference “BCU Address 02” switch circuit for bad,
and “BCU Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20). loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
HMS Switch Circuit:
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ X242 (HMS switch) and X133 (BCU) at W4. needed and carry out an
245 operational test.
BCU NOTE: If the warning horn “beeps” while tugging on the wires, a harness or connector
20 defect is indicated.
– – –1/1
3 HMS Switch (S43) NOTE: The switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance or OK: Check harness, GO
Test continuity checks. TO 4.
HMS Switch Test—Specification NOT OK: Replace HMS

HMS switch NOT activated.—Switch switch and repeat this
Status ...................................................................................................................... OPEN test.
HMS switch activated.—Switch Status ............................................................... CLOSED
– – –1/1

111401
PN=926
BCU References
4 HMS Switch (S43) NOTE: Each disconnected connector (with key switch ON) will create a Service Code OK: GO TO 4.2
Harness Test of the dependent component.
NOT OK: Check lead 542
4.1 for a short to another
conductor, GO TO 6.
Disconnect HMS switch connector X242 and check display at Address BCU 08:
BCU 08 –– HMS Switch Circuit (Harness Test)—Specification

HMS switch connector X242
disconnected:—Status ................................................................................................. 0XX

connectors of the HMS
Bypass pin A (lead 542) and pin B (lead 973) at HMS switch connector X242 and switch circuit for bad,
check display at Address BCU 08: loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
BCU 08 –– HMS Switch Circuit (Harness Test)—Specification
Pin A (lead 542) and pin B (lead 973) NOT OK: GO TO 4.3
bypassed:—Status ...................................................................................................... 1XX
4.3 Power supply check: OK: Check signal lead

542, GO TO 6.
Ignition ON. Measure with multimeter between pin B (lead 973) at HMS switch
connector X242 and an adequate ground connection NOT OK: Check fuse
F113. 245
HMS Switch (S43)—Specification BCU
Power Supply:—Voltage ........................................................................................ 12 Volt IF OK: Fuse F113 is OK. 21
5.
– – –1/1
5 Supply Lead 973 Check lead 973: OK: Check circuit 973,
(HMS Switch (S43) see "Supply Circuit 973
Circuit) ❒ for a short to lead 542 (X242-Pin A). (BCU Functions)", Section
❒ for continuity. 245, Group BCU.
NOT OK: Repair as
test.
HMS Switch (S43) Power Supply Circuit 973
Section
Fuse F113-Pin A X242-Pin B W4
(HMS switch) (SE16I)
(ELX-Relay) (SE01)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=927
BCU References
6 Signal Lead 542 (HMS Check lead 542: OK: Check all relevant
Switch (S43) Circuit) connectors of the HMS
❒ for continuity. switch circuit for bad,
❒ for a short to ground. loose, widened or
❒ for a short to lead 973 or for a short to another conductor. corroded contacts.
Wiring Connections: NOT OK: Repair as

HMS Switch (S43) Signal Circuit 542 test.
X242-Pin A X133-Pin 8 W4 (SE16I)
(HMS switch) (BCU)
– – –1/1
Turn Signal Switch (S08) Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16B –– Hazard
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – “SE1 –– Starter and Charging Circuits”, Section
245
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. 240, Group 15.
BCU
22
AG,LX12234,540NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test turn signal switch (S08) circuitry, harness to BCU connection and switch harness
assembly condition.
– – –1/1
1 Turn Signal Switch Ignition ON. OK: • Test completed.

(S08) Circuit Test
Access address BCU 19: • Circuit problem still
exists: Check all relevant
BCU 19 –– Turn Signal Switch circuit—Specification connectors of the turn
Turn signal switch not activated (OFF) signal switch circuit for
position:—Status ......................................................................................................... 00X bad, loose, widened or
Turn signal switch activated corroded contacts.
(R.H.-position):—Status ............................................................................................... X1X
Turn signal switch activated NOT OK: Display shows
(L.H.-position):—Status ............................................................................................... 1XX always: “000”, check fuse
NOT OK: GO TO 2
– – –1/1

111401
PN=928
BCU References
2 Turn Signal Switch NOTE: The switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance or OK: Check harness GO
(S08) Test continuity checks. TO 3.
Turn Signal Switch (S08) Test—Specification NOT OK: Replace turn

Turn signal switch activated signal switch and repeat
(L.H.-position).—Switch status ......................... Continuity between pin 6 (lead 973) and this test.
pin 9 (lead 155)
Turn signal switch activated
(R.H.-position).—Switch status ........................ Continuity between pin 6 (lead 973) and
pin 4 (lead 127)
– – –1/1
3 Turn Signal Switch 3.1 Power supply check: OK: GO TO 3.2

(S08) Harness Test
Disconnect turn signal switch connector X21. NOT OK: Check fuse
F113.
Ignition ON. Measure with multimeter between pin 6 (lead 973) and an adequate
ground connection: IF OK: Fuse F113 is OK.
Turn Signal Switch (S08)—Specification 4.
Power Supply:—Voltage ........................................................................................ 12 Volt 245
BCU
23
connectors of the turn
Disconnect turn signal switch connector X21. signal switch circuit for
bad, loose, widened or
Access address BCU 19 and check the address display: corroded contacts.
BCU 19 –– Turn Signal Switch circuit (Harness Test)—Specification IF OK: Service Code
Turn signal switch connector X21 does reappear and the
disconnected—Status .................................................................................................. 00X check off the turn signal
Bypass pin 6 (lead 973) and pin 4 (lead circuit does not reveal
127)—Status ................................................................................................................ X1X any problems, replace the
Bypass pin 6 (lead 973) and pin 9 (lead BCU.
155)—Status ................................................................................................................ 1XX
and 155, GO TO 5.
– – –1/1
4 Turn Signal Switch Check supply lead 973: OK: Check circuit 973,
(S08) Power Supply see "Supply Circuit 973
Lead 973 ❒ for continuity. (BCU Functions)", Section
245, Group BCU.
Wiring Connections:
NOT OK: Repair as
Turn Signal Switch Power Supply Circuit 973 needed and repeat this
From To Wiring Harness test.
Section
Fuse F113-Pin A X21-Pin 6 W4
(Turn signal switch) (SE16B)
(lead 072) (ELX-Relay) (SE01)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=929
BCU References
5 Turn Signal Switch Check signal lead 127: OK: Check all relevant
(S08) Signal Lead 127 connectors of the turn
and 155 ❒ for a short to lead 155 (X21-Pin 9). signal switch circuit for
Check signal lead 155: NOT OK: Repair as

❒ for a short to lead 127 (X21-Pin 4). test.
❒ for continuity.
Turn Signal switch circuit 127 and 155

(SE16B) From To
127 X21-Pin 4 X133-Pin 33
(RH Turn Signal) (Turn signal switch) (BCU)
155 X21-Pin 9 X133-Pin 10
(LH Turn Signal) (Turn signal switch) (BCU)
– – –1/1
245
BCU
Hazard Flasher Switch (S62) Circuit Test
24
Related to Service Code BCU 132. – BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16B –– Hazard
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – “SE6 –– Lighting Circuits”, Section 240, Group 15.
– “SE1 –– Starter and Charging Circuits”, Section
• For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
AG,LX12234,541NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test hazard flasher switch (S62) circuitry, harness to BCU connection and switch
– – –1/1

111401
PN=930
BCU References
1 Hazard Flasher Access address BCU 19 OK: • No Service Code

Switch (S62) Circuit was stored but still circuit
Test BCU 19 –– Hazard Flasher Switch Circuit—Specification problems: Check circuit
Hazard flasher switch not activated 143 between hazard
(OFF-position):—Status ............................................................................................... XX0 flasher light switch S62
Hazard flasher activated (ON-position):— (SE16B) and Light Switch
Status .......................................................................................................................... XX1 S09 (SE6A).
• Service Code BCU 132

was stored: Check all
relevant connectors of the
turn signal switch circuit
for bad, loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
NOT OK: Check fuse

F102
IF OK: • Fuse F102 is

OK and no Service Code
was stored: Check
Hazard Flasher switch,
GO TO 2.
• Fuse F102 is OK and

Service Code BCU 132 245
was stored: Check supply BCU
lead 112, GO TO 4. 25
– – –1/1
2 Hazard Flasher NOTE: The switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance or OK: Check harness, GO
Switch (S62) Test continuity checks. TO 3.
Hazard Flasher (S62) Switch Test—Specification NOT OK: Replace hazard

Hazard Flasher switch NOT activated.— flasher switch and repeat
Switch Status ..................................................... CLOSED between pin A (lead 102) and this test.
pin C (lead 143)
Hazard Flasher switch activated.—
Switch Status ..................................................... CLOSED between pin A (lead 102) and
pin B (lead 112)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=931
BCU References
3 Hazard Flasher 3.1 Power supply check: OK: GO TO 3.2

Switch (S62) Harness
Test Disconnect hazard flasher switch connector X126 at wiring harness W4. NOT OK: Check fuse
F102.
Ignition ON. Measure with multimeter at connector X126 between pin B (lead 112) and
an adequate ground connection: IF OK: Fuse F102 is OK.
Check supply lead 112,
Hazard Flasher Switch (S62)—Specification GO TO 4.
Power Supply:—Voltage ........................................................................................ 12 Volt

connectors of the hazard
Disconnect hazard flasher switch connector X126 at wiring harness W4. flasher switch circuit for
Access address BCU 19 and check the address display: corroded contacts.
BCU 19 –– Hazard Flasher Circuit (Harness Test)—Specification NOT OK: Check lead
Hazard flasher switch connector 102, GO TO 5.
disconnected:—Status ................................................................................................. XX0
Bypass pin B (lead 112) and pin A (lead
102):—Status ............................................................................................................... XX1
– – –1/1
245
4 Power Supply Lead Check supply lead 112: OK: Check all relevant
BCU
112 (Hazard Flasher connectors of the power
26
Switch (S62) Circuit) ❒ for continuity. supply circuit for bad,
❒ for a short to ground. loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
Wiring Connections:
NOT OK: Repair as
Hazard Flasher Switch Power Supply Circuit 112 via Fuse F102 needed and repeat this
From To To Wiring Harness test.
Section
Fuse F102-Pin A X126-Pin B X133-Pin 23 W4
(Hazard flasher (BCU) (SE16b)
switch)
(lead 072) (ELX-Relay) (SE01)
Hazard Flasher Switch Power Supply Circuit 143 via Light Switch S09
From To To Wiring Harness
Section
S09-Pin L X126-Pin C X269M-Pin A W4
(Light switch) (Hazard flasher (SE6) (SE16b)
(SE6) switch) (SE6)
– – –1/1
5 Signal Lead 102 Check signal lead 102: OK: Check all relevant
(Hazard Flasher connectors of the Hazard
Switch (S62) Circuit) ❒ for continuity. Flasher signal switch
❒ for a short to ground. circuit for bad, loose,
widened or corroded
Wiring Connections: contacts.
Hazard Flasher Signal Circuit 102 NOT OK: Repair as

From To Wiring Harness needed and repeat this
test.
X126-Pin A X133-Pin 11 W4 (SE16B)
(Hazard flasher switch) (BCU)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=932
BCU References
BCU and Tractor System-Voltage-Circuit Test
Related to Service Code BCU 045; BCU 046 and BCU • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
047. diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams:
– BCU Wiring Diagrams “SE16H –– Power Supply
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: and Tachometer”, Section 240, Group 15.
– “SE1 –– Starter and Charging Circuits”, Section
AG,LX12234,542NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test BCU supply voltage and tractor system voltage circuitry, and harness to BCU
connection.
– – –1/1
245
1 Check BCU Supply Access Address BCU 032: OK: • Test completed.
BCU
Voltage / Tractor
27
System Voltage BCU 32 –– BCU Supply Voltage and Tractor System Voltage Circuit— • Circuit problem still
Specification exists, GO TO 3.
Ignition ON; Engine OFF:—Voltage ......................................... between 11.2 and 12.7 V
Engine running in low idle (over 512 NOT OK: Voltage reading
rpm):—Voltage ......................................................................... between 11.2 and 15.4 V is not within specification,
Engine running with 1500 rpm:—Voltage ................................ between 12.5 and 15.4 V GO TO 2.
– – –1/1
2 Check charging • Check alternator, see reference “Alternator Checks”, Section 240, Group 25. OK: Check all relevant
system connectors of the BCU
• Check battery: see reference “Battery Checks”, Section 240, Group 25. Power Supply Circuit for
corroded contacts, GO
TO 3.
NOT OK: Repair as

test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=933
BCU References
3 General harness test Most of the electrical problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Delete service code
connections. Check all relevant connectors of the BCU supply voltage circuit for bad, and carry out an
loose, widened or corroded contacts. operational check.
BCU Supply Voltage Circuit 571/(072) and 050 IF OK: If the Service
Circuit from to to Code does reappear and
the check of the Supply
BCU supply lead F111-Pin A X133-Pin 5 Circuit (alternator; battery,
571 (BCU) harness) does not reveal
(SE16H) any problem, replace the
Controller main F111-Pin E K101-Pin 87 Controller supply BCU and repeat this test.
supply lead 072 BCU (ELX-Relay) fuses
(ELX) (SE16H) (SE1) NOT OK: Repair as
Circuit from to test.
GroundLead 050 X133-Pin 27 XGND2
(BCU) (Electronic ground connection, located
(SE16H) close to HCU connector X13)
– – –1/1
245
BCU
28

111401
PN=934
Group BIF
BIF References
Engine Speed Signal Circuit Test (B01)
Related to Service Code BIF 23; SFA 071 and SFA • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
076. diagnostic schematic
– “SE2 - Basic Informator (BIF)”, Section 240,
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: Group 15.
– “SE16H - BCU Power Supply and Tachometer
• For component location and pin arrangement see: Sender B01”, Section 240, Group 15.
– “Engine Wiring Harness W3”, Section 240, Group – “SE23 - Electronic Engine Control (ECU)”, Section
10. 240, Group 15.
AG,LX12234,613NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure BIF
1
NOTE: This procedure will test the engine speed transmit circuitry between BCU and BIF, and the Engine Speed
Sender (Tachometer Sender B01) circuitry, harness to BCU connection and sender harness assembly condition.
– – –1/1
1 Engine Speed Signal Start engine. OK: Check all relevant

in BIF (Buffered connectors of circuit 341
Signal from BCU) Access Address BIF 04: for bad, loose, widened or
corroded contacts; GO
BIF 04 –– Buffered Engine Speed Signal from BCU—Specification TO 5.
Signal recognized with engine
RUNNING:—Status ..................................................................................................... X1X NOT OK: Check engine
speed sender circuit, GO
TO 2.
– – –1/1
2 Engine Speed Sender Engine RUNNING. OK: Check connection

(B01) Circuit (Signal between BCU and BIF
from Sender to BCU) Access Address BCU 04 (lead 341), GO TO 5.
BCU 04 –– Engine Speed Signal Circuit—Specification NOT OK: Check engine

Engine RUNNING:—Status ......................................................................................... X1X speed sender B01, GO
TO 3.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-BIF-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=935
BIF References
3 Engine Speed Sender NOTE: The sender must be removed from the tractor for the following test. OK: Check lead 325 and
(B01) Test 531, GO TO 4.
Connect a multimeter to sensor connector.
NOT OK: Replace engine
Move a screwdriver back and forth in front of the sender and look for the voltage speed sender and repeat
reading to change as the screwdriver is moved in front of the sensor. this test.
• For connector location and pin arrangement see engine wiring harness W3; for
Circuit Diagram see SE16H.
– – –1/1
4 Lead 325 and 531 Check lead 325: OK: Check all connectors
(Engine Speed Signal for bad, loose, widened or
Circuit) ❒ for a short to ground. corroded contacts.
❒ for continuity.
❒ for a short to another conductor. NOT OK: Repair as
Check lead 531: test.
245 ❒ for continuity.

BIF
2 Wiring Connections:
Engine Speed Sender (B01) Circuit 325 and 531

Circuit From To To
Supply Circuit X76-Pin A X03/2-Pin A1
325 in W3 (engine speed (connection to W4)
(SE16H) sender B01)
Supply Circuit X03 - Pin A1 X133 - Pin 40 X222F - Pin F2
325 in W4 (connection to W3) (BCU) (connection to
(SE16H) W34 for ECU; see
SE23)
X133 - Pin 4 X03/2 Pin A2 X03/4 Pin D4
Ground Circuit (BCU) (connection to W3) (connection to
531 in W4 W13 for ground
(SE16H) speed sender B09
or B35)
Ground Circuit X03/2 Pin A2 X76 - Pin B
531 in W3 for (connection to W4) (engine speed
engine speed sender B01)
sender
(SE16H)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=936
BIF References
5 Lead 341 (Buffered NOTE: Lead 341 transmits a buffered rpm signal from the BCU to the BIF. OK: Check all connectors
Signal from BCU to of lead 341 for bad,
BIF) Check lead 341: loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
❒ for continuity. NOT OK: Repair as
❒ for a short to another conductor. needed and repeat this
test.
Wiring Connections:
Buffered Engine Speed Sender Signal Circuit 341

Circuit From To
Lead 341 in W4 X133-Pin 19 X25 - Pin 11 (BIF; yellow
(BCU) connector)
SE16H SE2
– – –1/1
245
Air Filter Switch (B02) Circuit Test BIF
3
Related to Service Code BIF 030. – “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10.
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: diagnostic schematic
– “SE2 - Basic Informator (BIF)”, Section 240,
• For component location and pin arrangement see: Group 15.
– “Engine Wiring Harness W3”, Section 240, Group
10.
AG,LX12234,615NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the air filter switch (B02) circuitry , harness to BIF connection and switch harness
assembly condition.
– – –1/1
1 Air Filter Switch (B02) Start Engine. OK: • Test completed.

Circuit
Access Address BIF 12 • Circuit problem still
exists, GO TO 2.
BIF 12 –– Air Filter Switch (B02)—Specification
Engine RUNNING:—Status ..................................... XX0 (Switch OPEN = Filter CLEAN) NOT OK: Display shows
“XX1”, check air filter
switch, GO TO 3
– – –1/1

111401
PN=937
BIF References
2 General Harness Test Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Check all relevant
(Air Filter Switch B02 connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BIF 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the air filter
Circuit) wires (for more detailed Beep Mode Test information, see reference “BIF Address 02” switch circuit for bad,
and “BIF Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20). loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
Air Filter Switch B02 Circuit:
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ X70/1 (1-pin plug; air filter switch ground connection), X70/2 (1-pin plug; air filter needed and repeat this
switch supply lead) and X03/2 (connection to W4) at wiring harness W3. test.
❒ XGND9 (air filter switch ground connection) at wiring harness W3.
❒ X03 (connection to W3) and X25 (BIF; yellow connector) at wiring harness W4.
– – –1/1
3 Air Filter Switch 3.1 OK: Display shows

Circuit (Harness Test) “XX0”, GO TO 3.2
Disconnect X70/1 (1-pin plug; air filter switch ground connection) and X70/2 (1-pin
plug; air filter switch supply lead) at W3: NOT OK: Display shows
“XX1”, check lead 351
Access Address BIF 12: (X70/2) for a short to
ground, GO TO 5.
BIF 12 –– Air Filter Switch B02 (Harness Test)—Specification
245 Plug X70/1 and X70/2 disconnected:—
BIF Status .......................................................................................................................... XX0
4
3.2 OK: Display shows

“XX1”,GO TO 4.
Bypass plug X70/2 (lead 351) to an adequate ground connection.
Access Address BIF 12: “XX0”, check lead 351
and 310 for continuity,
BIF 12 –– Air Filter Switch B02 (Harness Test)—Specification GO TO 5.
Lead 351 bypassed to an adequate
ground connection:—Status ........................................................................................ XX1
– – –1/1
4 Air Filter Switch B02 Perform air filter switch test and check display in Address BIF 12 (see reference OK: Check all connectors
Test “Testing the Low Pressure Switch in Air Intake System”, Section 230, Group 15. of the air filter switch
• For connector location and pin arrangement see engine wiring harness W3. widened or corroded
contacts: GO TO 2.
NOT OK: Replace air

filter switch and repeat
this test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=938
BIF References
5 Lead 351 and 310 (Air Check lead 351: OK: Check all connectors
Filter Switch B02 of the air filter switch
Circuit) ❒ for a short to ground. circuit for bad, loose,
❒ for continuity. widened or corroded
contacts.
Check lead 310:
NOT OK: Repair as
test.
Wiring Connections:
Air Filter Pressure Switch (B02) Circuit 351 and 310

(SE2) from to from to
Supply lead X70/2 X03/2 - Pin A5 X03 - Pin A5 X25 - Pin 24
351 (1-Pin plug; air (connection to (connection to (BIF; yellow
filter switch) W4) W3) connector)
Ground lead X70/1 XGND 9
310 (1-Pin plug; air (engine
filter switch) ground
connection)
– – –1/1
245
Fuel Level Sender (B03) Circuit Test BIF
5
Related to Service Code BIF 001, BIF 002 or BIF 003. – “Transmission Wiring Harness W13”, Section 240,
Group 10.
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
diagnostic schematic
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – “SE2 - Basic Informator (BIF)”, Section 240,
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. Group 15.
AG,LX12234,609NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the fuel level (gauge) sender (B03) circuitry , harness to BIF connection and sender
– – –1/1
1 Fuel Tank Level in Access Address BIF 16. OK: • Test completed.
Volts
BIF 16 –– Fuel Tank Level in Volts—Specification • Circuit problem still
Fuel tank level:—Voltage ............................................................. between 0.5 and 4.0 V exists, GO TO 2.
NOTE: A 16 V reading at address BIF 16 indicates a defective sender or lead. NOT OK: Reading not
TO 3.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=939
BIF References
(Fuel Level Sender connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BIF 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the fuel
B03) wires (for more detailed Beep Mode Test information, see reference “BIF Address 02” level (gauge) sender
and “BIF Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20). circuit for bad, loose,
widened or corroded
Fuel Level (Gauge) Sender Circuit: contacts.
❒ X86 (fuel sender) and X03/4 (connection to W4) at wiring harness W13. NOT OK: Repair as
❒ XGND26 (transmission wiring harness ground connection) at wiring harness W13. needed and carry out an
❒ X03 (connection to W13) and X26 (BIF; blue connector) at wiring harness W4. operational test.
❒ XGND2 (BIF ground connection) at wiring harness W4.
– – –1/1
3 Fuel Level Sender 3.1 - Harness test OK: Reading at display

(B03) and Harness within specification, GO
Test Disconnect fuel gauge sender unit (X86) at W13 and check display at Address BIF 16: TO 3.2
BIF 16 –– Fuel Tank Level in Volts (Harness Test)—Specification NOT OK: Reading not
X86 disconnected:—Voltage ........................................................ between 3.9 and 4.0 V within specification, check
harness: GO TO 4.
.
245
BIF
6 3.2 Supply voltage test OK: Check sender/pump,
GO TO 3.3
Measure voltage with multimeter at connector X86 between pin A (lead 353) and C
(lead 310): NOT OK: Reading not
within specifications (BIF
Fuel Gauge Sender (B03)—Specification shows correct
Power Supply:—Voltage ............................................................................................ 12 V information, replace BIF).
NOTE: BIF voltage display (max. 4.0 V) is reduced by internal controller-resistance.
3.3 Fuel pump test and adjustment OK: GO TO 4.
1. Fuel pump test: NOT OK: Repair/replace

Disconnect fuel pump connector at pump. fuel gauge sender
Resistance of fuel gauge sending unit (left and right terminals) should be 178—192
Ohms with full tank and 6.5—13.5 Ohms with empty tank.
2. Sender/Pump adjustment:
Position the sender/pump unit, to enable the float arm to sit into a well leading away
from the pump locating socket in the base of the tank. This needs to be done with
an multimeter for exact positioning. The (empty-position) Ohm-value, when the
pump is pressed down against its spring needs to be 15 to 18 Ohm.
The pump socket can be seen from the underside of the tank, showing the position
and direction of the sender/pump guide for the sender arm.
NOTE: When the fuel gauge sending unit is connected to the harness with ignition ON,
and the sending unit lever is moved from empty to full position, it takes some minutes
until the gauge will show the new fuel tank level! Inside the BIF a delay relay is
installed (5 to 10 minutes).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=940
BIF References
4 Supply Lead 353 and Check supply lead 353: OK: Check all connectors
Ground Lead 310 for bad, loose, widened or
(Fuel Level Sender • for a short to ground. corroded contacts.
B03) • for continuity and for high resistance.
• for a short to another conductor. NOT OK: Repair as
Check ground lead 310: test.
• for continuity.
Wiring Connections:
Fuel Level (Gauge) Sender Circuit 353 and 310

Supply lead X86 - Pin A X03/4 - Pin D5 X03 - Pin D5 X26 - Pin 17
353 (fuel sender) (connection to (connection to (BIF; blue
W4) W13) connector)
Ground lead X86 - Pin C XGND 26
310 (fuel sender) (transmission
ground
connection)
245
BIF
7
– – –1/1
Engine Oil Pressure Sender Circuit (B04) Test
Related to Service Code BIF 21 and BIF 23. – “Engine Wiring Harness W3”, Section 240, Group
10.
AG,LX12234,612NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the engine oil pressure sender (B04) circuitry , harness to BIF connection and
sender harness assembly condition.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=941
BIF References
1 Engine Oil Pressure 1.1 Access Address BIF 13: OK: Test completed.
Sender (B04) Circuit
BIF 13 –– Engine Oil Pressure Sender Circuit—Specification NOT OK: GO TO 1.2
Engine NOT RUNNING:—Status ............................ XX1 (no pressure, sender is closed)
Engine RUNNING:—Status ............................................. XX0 (pressure, sender is open)
1.2 OK: GO TO 1.3
Disconnect X78 (engine oil pressure sender B04; 1-pin plug) at W3. NOT OK: Display shows
“XX1”, check lead 347 for
Access Address BIF 13: a short to ground, GO TO
4.
BIF 13 –– Engine Oil Pressure Sender (Harness Test)—Specification
X78 (1-pin plug) disconnected:—Status ..................................................................... XX0
1.3 OK: Display shows “001”,

check engine oil pressure
Connect lead 347 (X78; 1-pin plug) to an adequate ground connection. sender, GO TO 2.
Access Address BIF 13: NOT OK: Display shows

“000”, check continuity of
BIF 13 –– Engine Oil Pressure Sender (Harness Test)—Specification lead 347, GO TO 4.
X78 connected to an adequate ground
connection:—Status .................................................................................................... XX1
245
BIF
8
– – –1/1
2 Engine Oil Pressure Check engine oil pressure sender B04, see reference “Engine Oil Pressure Sender OK: Engine oil pressure
Sender (B04) Test B04”, Section 240, Group 25. sender circuit does not
show any problems: GO
TO 3.

oil pressure sender and
repeat test.
– – –1/1
3 Low Oil Pressure • Check engine oil pressure, see reference “Check Engine Oil Pressure”, Base Engine OK: Delete service Code
(Troubleshooting) CTM. and carry out an
operational test.
• For low oil pressure diagnosis see reference: “L2 - Engine Oil Pressure Low”, Base
Engine CTM. NOT OK: Repair as
needed.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=942
BIF References
4 Supply Lead 347 Check lead 347: OK: Check all connectors
(Engine Oil Pressure for bad, loose, widened or
Sender B04) ❒ for a short to ground. corroded contacts.
❒ for continuity and high resistance.
NOT OK: Repair as
Wiring Connections: needed and repeat this
test.
Engine Oil Pressure Sender Circuit 347
Supply lead X78 (1-pin X03/2 - Pin A4 X03 - Pin A4 X26 - Pin 23
347 plug) (connection to (connection to (BIF; blue
(engine oil W4) W3) connector)
pressure
sender)
Engine oil pressure sender is grounded by the sender housing!
– – –1/1
245
Oil Filter Restriction Switch (B07) Circuit Test BIF
9
Related to Service Code BIF 035. – “Transmission Wiring Harness W13”, Section 240,
Group 10.
AG,LX12234,616NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the transmission oil filter restriction switch (B07) circuitry , harness to BIF
connection and switch harness assembly condition.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=943
BIF References
1 Oil Filter Restriction 1.1 OK: Display shows

Switch (B07) Circuit “X0X”, GO TO 1.2.
Check oil filter restriction switch circuit with Engine OFF.
Access Address BIF 12. “X1X”, GO TO 2.
BIF 12 –– Transmission Oil Filter Restriction Switch (B07) Circuit—Specification

Engine OFF:—Status (switch OPEN) ......................................................................... X0X
1.2 OK: • Test completed.
Operate engine at wide open throttle for 10 - 15 seconds with oil temperature above • Circuit problem still
28°C (82° F). exists, GO TO 4.
Access Address BIF 12: NOT OK: Display shows

“X1X”, GO TO 1.3
BIF 12 –– Oil Filter Restriction Switch (B07) Circuit—Specification
Engine RUNNING (filter clean/filter
bypass valve closed: no pressure at
switch):—Status ........................................................................................................... X0X
1.3 OK: Oil filter restriction

switch circuit does not
NOTE: Filter Restriction Warning Signal is dependent on pressure, engine speed show any problems.
245 (above 700 rpm) and oil temperature (above 28°C; 82° F). Problem in transmission
BIF circuit, refer to Service
10 Check hydraulic/transmission oil temperature sender calibration in Address BIF 68 and Code Diagnosis for
BIF 69 (see reference: “Calibration Address BIF 68/BIF 69”, Section 240, Group 20). Service Code BIF 035 ––
Oil Filter Restrictet,
Section 211, Group BIF.
NOT OK: Recalibrate

Address BIF 68 and BIF
69 and repeat this test.
– – –1/1
2 Oil Filter Restriction 2.1 OK: Display shows

Switch (B07) Harness “X0X”, GO TO 2.2
Test Disconnect oil filter restriction switch connector X80 at wiring harness W13.
Access Address BIF 12: “X1X”, check lead 606 for
a short to ground, GO TO
BIF 12 –– Oil Filter Restriction Switch (B07) (Harness Test)—Specification 5.
X80 disconnected:—Status ......................................................................................... X0X
2.2 OK: Display shows

“X1X”, check transmission
Bypass lead 606 (pin A) and lead 310 (pin B) at connector X80: oil filter restriction switch,
GO TO 3.
BIF 12 –– Oil Filter Restriction Switch (B07) (Harness Test)—Specification
Lead 606 and lead 310 bypassed:— NOT OK: Display shows
Status .......................................................................................................................... X1X “X0X”, check lead 606
GO TO 5.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=944
BIF References
3 Oil Filter Restriction Check oil filter restriction switch, see reference: “Oil Filter Warning Light Sender B07”, OK: Check all connectors
Switch (B07) Test Section 240, Group 25. of the oil filter warning
widened or corroded
contacts: GO TO 4.
NOT OK: Replace

transmission oil filter
restriction switch and
repeat this test.
– – –1/1
4 General Harness Test Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Check all connectors
(Oil Filter Restriction connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BIF 02 and gently tug at the affected of the oil filter restriction
Switch (B07) Circuit) wires (for more detailed Beep Mode Test information, see reference “BIF Address 02” switch circuit: for bad,
and “BIF Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20). loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
Oil Filter Restriction Switch Circuit:
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ X80 (oil filter restriction switch) and X03/4 (connection to W4) at wiring harness needed and carry out an
W13. operational test. 245
❒ X03 (connection to W13) and X25 (BIF; yellow connector) at wiring harness W4. BIF
❒ XGND26 (oil filter restriction switch ground connection) at wiring harness W13. 11
– – –1/1
5 Lead 606 and 310 (Oil Check lead 606: OK: Check all connectors
Filter Restriction of the oil filter restriction
Switch (B07) Circuit) ❒ for a short to ground. switch circuit: for bad,
corroded contacts.
Check lead 310:
NOT OK: Repair as
test.
Wiring Connections:
Transmission Oil Filter Restriction Switch (B07) Circuit 606 and 310
606 (transmission (connection to (connection to (BIF; yellow
oil filter W4) W13) connector)
restriction
switch)
Ground lead X80 - Pin B XGND 26
310 (transmission (transmission
oil filter ground
restriction connection)
switch)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=945
BIF References
Coolant Temperature Sender (B08) Circuit Test
Related to Service Code BIF 012 and/or BIF 013. – “Engine Wiring Harness W3”, Section 240, Group
10.
AG,LX12234,610NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the coolant temperature sender (B08) circuitry , harness to BIF connection and
– – –1/1
245
1 Coolant Temperature 1.1 OK: Reading in
BIF
in Volts specification, GO TO 1.2
12
Access Address BIF 18.
NOT OK: GO TO 3.
BIF 18 –– Coolant Temperature Sender B08—Specification
Temperature in volts:—Voltage .................................................... between 0.5 and 4.0 V
NOTE: A 16 V reading at address BIF 18 indicates a defective sender or that lead 329
has a short to a conductor or to ground.
Access Address BIF 034 and compare coolant temperature in Address BIF 034 with • Circuit problem still
actual temperature of coolant circuit: exists (realistic
temperature reading is
BIF 34 - Coolant Temperature in °C—Specification displayed in address BIF
Coolant temperature:—Temperature (°C) .............. between 040 and 104 (Measurement 034), GO TO 2.
reading starts at +40°C)
NOT OK: Unrealistic
temperature (displayed in
address BIF 034), GO TO
3.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=946
BIF References
2 General Harness Test Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Check all connectors
(Coolant Temperature connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BIF 02 and gently tug at the affected for bad, loose, widened or
Sender B08) wires (for more detailed Beep Mode Test information, see reference “BIF Address 02” corroded contacts.
and “BIF Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20).
NOT OK: Repair as
Coolant Temperature Sender Circuit: needed and carry out an
operational test.
❒ X262 (coolant temperature sender); X215 (connection to W4 for ground) and X03/2
(connection to W4 for supply) at wiring harness W3.
❒ X03 (connection to W3 for supply); X215 (connection to W3 for ground) and X25
(BIF; yellow connector) at wiring harness W4.
❒ XGND2 (coolant temperature sender ground connection) at W4.
– – –1/1
245
3 Supply Voltage 3.1 OK: Reading at display
BIF
(Coolant Temperature within specification , GO
13
Sender B08) Disconnect X262 (coolant temperature sender) at W3 and check display: TO 3.2
Access Address BIF 18. NOT OK: Check lead 329

for a short to ground or to
BIF 18 –– Coolant Temperature in Volts—Specification another conductor, GO
X262 disconnected:—Voltage ...................................................... between 3.9 and 4.0 V TO 5.
3.2 OK: Check coolant

temperature sender, GO
Measure supply voltage with multimeter at connector X262 (coolant temperature TO 4
sender) between pin A and B (at W3):
Coolant Temperature Sender B08—Specification and 050 for opens, GO
Power Supply:—Voltage ........................................................... between 3.9 V and 4.0 V TO 5.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=947
BIF References
4 Coolant Temperature NOTE: The values are only correct when the sender is removed from the circuit. OK: Check all relevant
Sender (B08) Test connectors of the coolant
Engine Coolant Temperature Sender B08 (with BIF) temperature sender circuit
Temperature in °C Resistance in Temperature in °C Resistance in
OHM OHM corroded contacts.
-40 99301 45 1194 NOT OK: Replace

-35 72883 50 979 coolant temperature
sender and carry out an
-30 52586 55 808 operational test.
-25 38485 60 670
-20 28512 65 559
-15 21386 70 468
-10 16134 75 394
-5 12230 80 333
0 9401 85 283
5 7273, 90 241
10 5661 95 207
15 4441 100 178
20 3512 105 153
25 2796 110 133
245 30 2239 115 115
BIF
35 1806 120 100
14
40 1465 125 88
– – –1/1
5 Supply Lead 329 and Check supply lead 329: OK: Check all connectors
(Coolant Temperature ❒ for a short to ground. corroded contacts.
Sender B08) ❒ for continuity and high resistance.
❒ for continuity.
Wiring Connections:
Coolant Temperature Sender Circuit 329 and 050

Supply lead X262 - Pin A X03/2 - Pin A3 X03 - Pin A3 X25 - Pin 4
329 (coolant (connection to (connection to (BIF; yellow
temperature W4) W3) connector)
sender)
Ground lead X262 - Pin B X215 - Pin K X215 - Pin K XGND 2
050 (coolant (connection to (connection to (electronic
temperature W4) W3) ground
sender) connection)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=948
BIF References
Transmission Oil Pressure Switch (B31) Circuit Test
Related to Service Code BIF 026. – “Transmission Wiring Harness W13”, Section 240,
Group 10.
AG,LX12234,614NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the transmission oil pressure switch (B31) circuitry , harness to BIF connection and
switch harness assembly condition.
– – –1/1
245
1 Transmission Oil 1.1 OK: Display shows
BIF
Pressure Switch (B31) “1XX”, GO TO 1.2
15
Circuit Access Address BIF 12:
BIF 12 –– Transmission Oil Pressure Switch (B31)—Specification “0XX” check transmission
Engine OFF:—Status ......................................... 1XX (No pressure: Switch is CLOSED) oil pressure switch
harness, GO TO 3.
Start engine and check display in Address BIF 12: • Circuit problem still
exists, GO TO 2.
BIF 12 –– Transmission Oil Pressure Switch (B31)—Specification
Engine ON:—Status .................................................. 0XX (pressure in system: Switch is NOT OK: Display shows
OPEN) “1XX”, GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
(Transmission Oil connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BIF 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the
Pressure Switch B31) wires (for more detailed Beep Mode Test information, see reference “BIF Address 02” transmission oil pressure
and “BIF Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20). switch circuit for bad,
loose, widened or
Transmission Oil Pressure Switch (B31) Circuit: corroded contacts.
❒ X83 (transmission oil pressure sender B31) and X03/4 (connection to W4) at wiring NOT OK: Repair as
harness W13. needed and repeat this
❒ X03 (connection to W13) and X26 (BIF; blue connector) at wiring harness W4. test.
❒ XGND26 (transmission ground connection) at wiring harness W13.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=949
BIF References
3 Transmission Oil 3.1 OK: Display shows

Pressure Switch (B31) “0XX”, GO TO 3.2
Harness Test Disconnect X83 (transmission oil pressure switch B31) at W13.
Access Address BIF 12: “1XX”, check lead 515 for
a short to ground: GO TO
BIF 12 –– Transmission Oil Pressure Switch B31 (Harness Test)—Specification 5.
X83 disconnected:—Status ......................................................................................... 0XX
3.2 OK: Check transmission

oil pressure switch, GO
Bypass lead 515 (pin A) and lead 310 (pin B) at X83 (transmission oil pressure TO 4.
sender).
Access Address BIF 12: “000”, GO TO 3.3.
BIF 12 –– Transmission Oil Pressure Switch B31 (Harness Test)—Specification

pin A and pin B at X83 bypassed:—
Status .......................................................................................................................... 1XX
3.3 Supply Voltage Check: OK: Check all connectors

of the transmission oil
Measure supply voltage between lead 515 (pin A) and lead 310 (pin B) at connector pressure switch circuit for
X83 (transmission oil pressure sender): bad, loose, widened or
245 corroded contacts: GO
BIF Transmission Oil Pressure Switch B31—Specification TO 2.
16 Power Supply:—Voltage ............................................................................................ 12 V
GO TO 5.
– – –1/1
4 Transmission Oil Check transmission oil pressure switch, see reference “Transmission oil Pressure OK: Check transmission
Pressure Switch (B31) B31”, Section 240, Group 25. oil system. See diagnostic
Test for Service Code: BIF
• For connector location and pin arrangement see transmission wiring harness W13; 026 –– Transmission Oil
for circuit diagram see SE2. Pressure Low, Section
211, Group BIF.
NOT OK: Replace

pressure switch B31 and
repeat this test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=950
BIF References
5 Lead 515 and 310 Check supply lead 515: OK: Check all connectors
(Transmission Oil of the transmission oil
Pressure Switch (B31) ❒ for a short to ground. pressure switch circuit for
Circuit) ❒ for continuity. bad, loose, widened or
❒ for a short to another conductor. corroded contacts.

Wiring Connections:
Transmission Oil Pressure Switch Circuit 515 and 310

515 (transmission (connection to (connection to (BIF; blue
oil pressure W4) W13) connector)
switch)
Ground lead X83 - Pin B XGND 26
310 (transmission (transmission
oil pressure ground
switch) connection)
245
BIF
17
– – –1/1
Transmission Oil Temperature Sender (B60) Circuit Test
Related to Service Code BIF 017 and/or BIF 018. – “Transmission Wiring Harness W13”, Section 240,
Group 10.
AG,LX12234,611NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the transmission oil temperature sender circuitry , harness to BIF connection and
– – –1/1

111401
PN=951
BIF References
1 Transmission Oil 1.1 OK: Reading in

Temperature in Volts specification, GO TO 1.2
Access Address BIF 15:
NOT OK: GO TO 3.
BIF 15 –– Transmission Oil Temperature Sender B60—Specification
Transmission Oil Temperature in volts:—
Voltage ......................................................................................... between 0.5 and 4.0 V
NOTE: A 16 V reading at address BIF 15 indicates a defective sender or a short to a

supply voltage lead or a short to ground of lead 602.
Access Address BIF 33 and compare transmission oil temperature reading in Address • Circuit problem still
BIF 033 with actual temperature of transmission oil circuit: exists and realistic
temperature displayed in
BIF 33 –– Transmission Oil Temperature in °C—Specification address BIF 033, GO TO
Transmission oil temperature:— 2.
Temperature in °C (measurement
reading starts at +40°C) ................................................................. between 040 and 104 NOT OK: Unrealistic
temperature (displayed in
address BIF 033), GO TO
3.
245
BIF
18
– – –1/1
(Transmission Oil connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address BIF 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the
Temperature Sender wires (for more detailed Beep Mode Test information, see reference “BIF Address 02” transmission oil
B60) and “BIF Address 03”, Section 240, Group 20). temperature sender circuit
Transmission Oil Temperature Sender Circuit: corroded contacts.
❒ X307 (transmission oil temperature sender) and X03/4 (connection to W4) at Wiring NOT OK: Repair as
harness W13. needed and carry out an
❒ X03 (connection to W13) and X26 (BIF; blue connector) at Wiring harness W4. operational test.
❒ transmission/hydraulic oil temperature sender is grounded by electronic ground
connection XGND2.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=952
BIF References
3 Supply Voltage and 3.1 OK: Reading at display

Transmission Oil within specification , GO
Temperature Sender Check transmission oil temperature sender supply voltage. Disconnect X307 TO 3.2
(B60) Test (transmission oil temperature sender) at W13.
Access Address BIF 15: for a short to ground or to
another conductor, GO
BIF 15 - Transmission Oil Temperature in Volts—Specification TO 4.
X307 disconnected:—Voltage ................................................................................... 4.0 V
3.2 Measure supply voltage with multimeter at connector X307 (transmission oil OK: Check sender, GO
temperature sender) between pin A (lead 602) and B (lead 050): TO 3.3
Transmission Oil Temperature Sender B60—Specification NOT OK: Check lead 602
Power Supply:—Voltage ..................................................................................... 4.0 Volts and 050 for opens, GO
TO 4.

connectors of the
Check transmission temperature sender B60. transmission oil
temperature sender circuit
NOTE: The values are only correct when the sender is removed from the circuit. for bad, loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
Transmission Temperature Sender B60 (with BIF)
NOT OK: Replace 245
Temperature in °C Resistance in Ohm Temperature in °C Resistance in Ohm BIF
transmission oil
-40 99301 45 1194 temperature sender B60 19
-35 72883 50 979 and repeat this test.
-30 52586 55 808

-25 38485 60 670
-20 28512 65 559
-15 21386 70 468
-10 16134 75 394
-5 12230 80 333
0 9401 85 283
5 7273, 90 241
10 5661 95 207
15 4441 100 178
20 3512 105 153
25 2796 110 133
30 2239 115 115
35 1806 120 100
40 1465 125 88
– – –1/1

111401
PN=953
BIF References
4 Supply Lead 602 and Check lead 602: OK: Check all connectors
(Transmission Oil ❒ for a short to ground. corroded contacts.
Temperature Sender ❒ for continuity and high resistance.
B60) ❒ for a short to another conductor. NOT OK: Repair as
Check lead 050: test.
❒ for continuity.
Wiring Connections:
Transmission Oil Temperature Sender Circuit 602 and 050

602 (transmission (connection to (connection to (BIF; blue
oil temperature W4) W13) connector)
sender)
Ground lead X307 - Pin B X03/4 - Pin J6 X03 - Pin J6 XGND 2
050 (transmission (connection to (connection to (electronic
oil temperature W4) W13) ground
sender) connection)
245
BIF
20
– – –1/1
BIF Supply Voltage and Tractor System Voltage Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – “SE1 - Starter and Charging Circuits”, Section
240, Group 15.
• For electrical troubleshooting see functional and – “SE18 - Performance Monitor (PRF)”, Section
diagnostic schematic 240, Group 15.
AG,LX12234,617NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test BIF supply voltage circuit and tractor system voltage circuitry, and harness to BIF
connection.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=954
BIF References
1 Tractor System Access Address BCU 032: OK: • Test completed.

Voltage (Circuit 072)
BCU 32 –– Tractor Battery Voltage—Specification • Circuit problem still
Ignition ON; Engine OFF:—Voltage ......................................... between 11.2 and 12.7 V exists, GO TO 3.
Engine running in low idle (over 512
rpm):—Voltage ......................................................................... between 11.2 and 15.4 V NOT OK: Voltage reading
Engine running with 1500 rpm:—Voltage ................................ between 12.5 and 15.4 V is not within specification,
GO TO 2.
– – –1/1
2 Tractor Charging • Check alternator, see reference “Alternator Checks”, Section 240, Group 25. OK: Check Circuit 072
System (ELX circuit).
• Check battery: see reference “Battery Checks”, Section 240, Group 25.
NOT OK: Repair as
test.
– – –1/1
245
3 BIF Supply Voltage Most of the electrical problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Check all relevant
BIF
Circuit connections. Check all relevant connectors of the BIF supply voltage circuit for bad, connectors of the BIF
21
loose, widened or corroded contacts. supply voltage circuit for
BIF Supply Circuit 971/(072) and 050 corroded contacts.
Circuit from to to
NOT OK: Repair as
Main Supply Lead K101-Pin 87 F117-Pin E SP072 needed and repeat this
072 (ELX-relay) (SE2) (Splice connection test.
(SE01) for electronic
components)
BIF/PRF Supply F117-Pin A X26-Pin 14 X135-Pin 10
Lead 971 (SE2) (BIF, blue (PRF)
connector) (SE18)
(SE2)
Circuit from to
Ground Lead 050 X25-Pin 3 XGND2
(BIF, yellow (electronic ground connection, located
connector) close to HCU connector X13 at cab
(SE2) harness W4)
– – –1/1
Alternator Circuit Test
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – “SE1 - Starter and Charging Circuits”, Section
– “Engine Wiring Harness W3”, Section 240, Group 240, Group 15.
10. – “SE2 - Basic Informator (BIF)”, Section 240,
AG,LX12234,618NA –19–01JAN01–1/1

111401
PN=955
BIF References
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test alternator D+ voltage circuit and harness to BIF connection.
– – –1/1
1 Alternator D+ Voltage Access Address BIF 032: OK: • Test completed.
BIF 32 –– Alternator D+ Voltage Circuit—Specification • Circuit problem still

Engine running in low idle (over 512 exists, GO TO 3.
rpm):—Voltage ......................................................................... between 11.2 and 15.4 V
Engine running with 1500 rpm:—Voltage ................................ between 12.5 and 15.4 V NOT OK: Voltage reading
is not within specification,
GO TO 2.
– – –1/1
245
2 Tractor Charging Check alternator, see reference “Alternator Checks”, Section 240, Group 25. OK: Check all relevant
BIF
System connectors of the
22
alternator circuit for bad,
loose, widened or
corroded contacts, GO
TO 3.
NOT OK: Repair as

test.
– – –1/1
3 General Harness Test Most of the electrical problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Check battery: see
(Alternator and D+ connections. Check all relevant connectors of the alternator circuit for bad, loose, reference “Battery
Signal Circuit) widened or corroded contacts. Checks” Section 240,
Group 25.
Alternator Charge Circuit 002
Circuit from to to to NOT OK: Repair as
Lead 002 G01 - Pin 30 Starter motor - test.
(alternator) Pin 30
(SE1)
Lead 002 Starter motor - G01 K01 - Pin 3 F01 - Pin E
Pin 30 (battery plus) (starter relay) (160A main
(SE1) fuse)
D+ Signal Circuit from Alternator to BIF
D+ signal lead G01 - D+ X03/2 - Pin A7 X03 - Pin A7 X25 - Pin 25
306 (alternator) (connection to (connection to (BIF, yellow
W4) W3) connector)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=956
BIF References
Flasher Cycle Input Signal Circuit Test
Related to Service Code BIF 135. References for Circuitry Diagnostic:
NOTE: Service Code BIF 135 does not necessarily • For component location and pin arrangement see:
have any real meaning. It is often stored by – “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10.
accident when the turn signal switch was • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
moved too fast in the diagnostic mode. Service diagnostic schematic
Code BIF 135 checks the flasher cycle signal – “SE1 - Starter and Charging Circuits”, Section
(provided by the BCU), which is used to 240, Group 15.
synchronize all flashing indicators. Without the – “SE2 - Basic Informator (BIF)”, Section 240,
flasher cycle signal, the instrument unit (BIF), Group 15.
flashes the indicators according its own – “SE16B –– BCU Hazard Flashers/Turn Signal,
flashing rate. Section 240, Group 15.
AG,LX12234,619NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure BIF
23
NOTE: This procedure will test the flasher cycle input signal circuitry (harness between BCU and BIF connection).
– – –1/1
1 Flasher Cycle Input Access Address BCU 05. OK: • Test completed.
Signal from BCU
BCU 05 –– Flasher Cycle Signal Circuit—Specification • Circuit problem still
Signal recognized:—Status ......................................................................................... 1XX exists, check all relevant
connectors of the signal
widened or corroded
contacts: GO TO 2.
NOT OK: Check harness,

GO TO 2.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=957
BIF References
2 Lead 149 (Flasher Check lead 149: OK: Check all relevant
Cycle Input Circuit) connectors of the signal
• for a short to ground. circuit for bad, loose,
• for continuity. widened or corroded
• for a short to another conductor. contacts.

Flasher Cycle Circuit 149 test.
(SE2 and SE16B) from to
Lead 149 X133 - Pin 18 X25 - Pin 12
(BCU) (BIF, yellow connector)
(SE16B) (SE2)
– – –1/1
245
BIF
Seat Switch (S40) Circuit Test (Tractors with Front PTO)
24
Related to Service Code BIF 142. – “SE2 - Basic Informator (BIF)”, Section 240,
Group 15.
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – “SE5 - Front PTO and Seat Switch”, Section 240,
Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – SE16F –– “Seat Indicator”, Section 240, Group
– “Cab Wiring Harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. 15.
LX12234,NA003E9 –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the seat switch signal circuitry for tractors equipped with front PTO (harness
between seat switch S40 and PTO relay K25).
– – –1/1
1 Check Seat Switch Access Address BCU 11. OK: Check seat switch
Circuit signal at Front PTO Relay
BCU 11 –– Seat Switch (S40) Circuit—Specification K25/1, GO TO 2.
Operator OFF seat—Status ........................................................................................ XX0
Operator ON seat—Status .......................................................................................... XX1 NOT OK: Check seat
switch harness, GO TO 3.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=958
BIF References
2 Seat Switch Signal at OK: Test completed.

Front PTO Relay
K25/1 NOT OK: Check lead 907
for continuity between
seat switch and PTO
Relay, GO TO 4.
LX1024138 –UN–07AUG00
Check voltage with multimeter at plug K25/1:
Seat Switch Signal at Plug K25/1—Specification

Operator ON Seat:—Voltage ................................................. 12 Volt at Pin 6 (lead 907)
Operator OFF Seat:—Voltage .................................................. 0 Volt at Pin 6 (lead 907)
– – –1/1
245
3 Seat Switch Harness Disconnect seat switch connector X230. OK: Replace seat switch
BIF
Test and repeat this test.
25
Access Address BCU 11. Bypass Pin A (lead 545) and Pin B (lead 907) at seat switch
connector X230: NOT OK: Check lead 545
BCU 11 - Seat Switch (S40) Circuit—Specification GO TO 4.
Circuit Closed:—Status ............................................................................................... XX1
– – –1/1
4 Lead 545 and Check lead 545 and 907/(906): OK: Check all relevant
907/(906) connectors for bad, loose,
❒ for continuity. wided or corroded
contacts.
Wiring connections
NOT OK: Repair as
Seat Switch Circuit 545 and 907/(906) needed and repeat this
Circuit Wiring Harness W4 test.
(SE5) from to to
Supply lead 545 F215 - Pin A X230 - Pin A
(Power Supply for (Seat Switch)
Front PTO)
Signal lead 907 X230 - Pin B K25/1 - Pin 6 X235 - Pin A
(Seat Switch) (Front PTO Relay) (
Wiring Bridge)
Signal lead 907 Signal lead number 907 changes to number 906 after wiring
bridge connector X235
Signal lead 906 X235 - Pin B X133 - Pin 36
(Wiring Bridge) ( (BCU)
Wiring Bridge)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=959
BIF References
245
BIF
26

111401
PN=960
Group ECU
ECU References
Foot Throttle Potentiometer (B57) Supply Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – “Electronic Control Unit wiring harness W34”,
• For component location and pin arrangement see: • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
– “Engine wiring harness W3”, Section 240, Group diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams:
10. – SE23, Section 240, Group 15.
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10.
AG,LX25546,374NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the supply voltage circuit (supply lead 343/364/374 and ground lead
381/361/371) for foot throttle potentiometer B57.
– – –1/1
245
1 Check Supply Voltage Ignition OFF. OK: Test completed.
ECU
1
Disconnect X238 (W4; SE23). NOT OK: Supply voltage
is out of specification, GO
Ignition ON. TO 2.
Measure (with multimeter) supply voltage between pin A and pin C at connector X238:
Supply Voltage Foot Throttle Potentiometer—Specification

Measure between pin A and pin C at
connector X238—Voltage .............................................................. between 4.8 and 5.2V
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for circuit diagram see SE23.
– – –1/1
2 General Harness and Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: GO TO 3.
Connector Test connections. Check all relevant connectors for bad and loose contacts.
NOT OK: Repair as
Following connectors are suspect (for supply lead 343/364/374 and ground lead needed and repeat test.
381/361/371):
❒ X238, X236, X215 and X222 (W4; SE23)

❒ X222 and X218 (W34; SE23)
❒ X215 and X261 (W3; SE23)
For connector location and pin arrangement see W3, W4 and W34; for circuit diagram
see SE23.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-ECU-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=961
ECU References
3 Check Supply Voltage Ignition OFF. OK: Delete Service Code.

Circuit If Service Code
Supply voltage below 4.7 V: (Service Code ECU 012 was stored) reappears and no other
Service Codes are stored,
Check supply lead (343/364/374): replace ECU controller
and calibrate (see
• for a short to ground reference “ Calibration
• for continuity and high resistance Mode”, Section 230,
Group 15) new ECU
Check ground lead (381/361/371): controller.
• for continuity and high resistance NOT OK: Rapair as

needed and repeat test.
Supply voltage over 5.3 V: (Service Code ECU 011 was stored)
Check supply lead (343/364/374):
• for a short to another conductor
Wiring harness:
Supply and Ground Circuit

Circuit from to to
Supply Lead 364 X218 Pin 37 (ECU X222 Pin E7 X222 Pin F1
in W34 Controller (connection to W4) (connection to W4)
245
connector)
ECU
2 Supply Lead 343 X222 Pin F1 X238 Pin C (Foot
in W4 (connection to Throttle
W34) Potentiometer
connector)
Lead number 364 changes to 343 in W4 (to Foot Throttle Potentiometer B57)
Supply Lead 374 X222 Pin E7 X236 Pin D
in W4 (connection to (Cruise Control
W34) A19 connector)
Lead number 364 changes to 374 in W4 (to Cruise Control Potentiometer A19)
Ground Lead 361 X218 Pin 36 (ECU X222 Pin F4 X222 Pin E5
connector)
Ground Lead 381 X222 Pin E5 X238 Pin A (Foot
W34) Potentiometer
connector)
Ground Lead 371 X222 Pin E5 X236 Pin A (Cruise X215 Pin G
in W4 (connection to Control A19 (connection to W3)
W34) connector)
Ground Lead 371 X215 Pin G X261 Pin B
in W3 (connection to W4) (Coolant
Temperature
Sender B56
connector)
see SE23.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=962
ECU References
Foot Throttle Potentiometer (B57) Output Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: • For electrical troubleshooting see Functional and
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – SE23, Section 240, Group 15.
– “Electronic Control Unit wiring harness W34”,
AG,LX25546,373NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the foot throttle potentiometer (B57) output circuit (signal lead 359).
– – –1/1
245
1 Check Foot Throttle Ignition OFF. OK: No Service Code
ECU
Potentiometer (B57) was stored: Test
3
Output Circuit Disconnect X238 (W4; SE23). completed.
NOTE: Disconnecting causes additional Service Code ECU 012. OK: Service Code ECU
011 or ECU 012 was
NOTE: Signal voltage can only be checked with adapter wiring harness DFLX10. stored, GO TO 2.
Install adapter wiring harness DFLX10, Section 299, Group 05. Measure voltage NOT OK: Voltage below
between pin B (lead 359) and pin C (lead 381) at adapter wiring harness (with 0.5 V, check output lead
multimeter). 359 for a short to ground
and for high resistance.
Ignition ON. GO TO 3.
Output Voltage Foot Throttle Potentiometer—Specification NOT OK: Voltage over

Measured between pin A and pin B at 4.5 V, check output lead
X238—Accelerate continuously (and 359 for a short to another
slowly) from low idle to high idle with conductor. GO TO 3.
throttle (foot or hand) .......................................... between 0.5 (low idle) and 4.5 V (high
idle) NOT OK: Voltage in
range, but voltage
IMPORTANT: There should be no sudden change in voltage through the full difference (between low
range of potentiometer movement. and high idle) is not at
least 1.5 V or is constant
NOTE: The voltage difference between low and high idle should be at least 1.5 V. through the potentiometer
movement. Or there was
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for circuit diagram see SE23. a sudden change in the
voltage through the
potentiometer movement.
Replace defective foot
throttle potentiometer B57
and repeat test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=963
ECU References
2 General Harness and Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Check output lead
Connector Test connections. Check all relevant connectors for bad and loose contacts. 359 for continuity. GO TO
3.
Following connectors are suspect (Output Lead 359):
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ X238 and X222 (W4; SE23) needed. Test completed.
❒ X222 and X218 (W34; SE23)
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4 and W34; for circuit diagram see
SE23.
– – –1/1
3 Check Foot Throttle Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Output Lead (359) connectors for bad/loose
Disconnect X238 (W4; SE23). contacts.
Check output lead 359: IF OK: If connectors are

OK, delete Service Code.
• for a short to ground (Service Code ECU 012 was stored) If Service Code
• for continuity and high resistance (Service Code ECU 012 was stored) reappears and no other
245 • for a short to another conductor (Service Code ECU 011 was stored) Service Codes are stored,
ECU replace ECU Controller
4 Wiring Harness: and calibrate (see
reference “Calibration
Foot Throttle Output Circuit Mode”, Section 230,
Group 15) new ECU
Circuit from to
Controller.
Lead 359 in W4 X238 Pin B (Foot Throttle X222 Pin E4 (connection
Potentiometer connector) to W34) NOT OK: Repair as
Lead 359 in W34 X222 Pin E4 (connection X218 Pin 40 (ECU needed. Test completed.
to W4) Controller connector)
SE23.
– – –1/1
Cruise Control Potentiometer (A19) Supply Circuit Test
AG,LX25546,378NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the supply voltage circuit (supply lead 374/364/343 and ground lead
371/361/381) for cruise control potentiometer (A19).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=964
ECU References
1 Check Supply Voltage Ignition OFF. OK: Test completed.
Disconnect X236 (W4; SE23). NOT OK: Supply voltage

is out of specification, GO
Ignition ON. TO 2.
Measure (with multimeter) supply voltage between pin A and pin D at connector X236:
Supply Voltage Cruise Control Potentiometer—Specification

Measure between pin A and pin D at
connector X236—Voltage .............................................................. between 4.8 and 5.2V
– – –1/1
2 General Harness and Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: GO TO 3.
Connector Test connections. Check all relevant connectors for bad and loose contacts.
NOT OK: Repair as
Following connectors are suspect (supply lead 374/364/343 and ground lead needed and repeat test.
371/361/381):
❒ X236, X215, X238 and X222 (W4; SE23)

❒ X222 and X218 (W34; SE23)
❒ X215 and X261 (W3; SE23) 245
ECU
For connector location and pin arrangement see W3, W4 and W34; for circuit diagram 5
see SE23.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=965
ECU References
3 Check Supply Voltage Ignition OFF. OK: Delete Service Code.

Circuit If Service Code
Supply voltage below 4.7 V: (Service Code ECU 014 was stored) reappears and no other
Check supply lead (374/364/343): replace ECU controller
and calibrate (see
• for a short to ground reference “Calibration
• for continuity and high resistance Mode”, Section 230,
Group 15) new ECU
Check ground lead (371/361/381): controller.
• for continuity and high resistance NOT OK: Repair as

Supply voltage over 5.3V: (Service Code ECU 013 was stored)
Check supply lead (374/364/343):
Wiring harness:
Supply and Ground Circuit

Circuit from to to
Supply Lead 364 X218 Pin 37 (ECU X222 Pin E7 X222 Pin F1
245
connector)
ECU
6 Supply Lead 374 X222 Pin E7 X236 Pin D
in W4 (connection to (Cruise Control
W34) A19 connector)
Supply Lead 343 X222 Pin F1 X238 Pin C (Foot
W34) Potentiometer
connector)
Ground Lead 361 X218 Pin 36 (ECU X222 Pin F4 X222 Pin E5
connector)
Ground Lead 371 X222 Pin E5 X236 Pin A (Cruise X215 Pin G
in W4 (connection to Control A19 (connection to W3)
W34) connector)
Ground Lead 371 X215 Pin G X261 Pin B
in W3 (connection to W4) (Coolant
Temperature
Sender B56
connector)
Ground Lead 381 X222 Pin E5 X238 Pin A (Foot
W34) Potentiometer
connector)
see SE23.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=966
ECU References
Cruise Control Potentiometer (A19) Output Circuit Test
AG,LX25546,379NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the cruise control potentiometer (A19) output circuit (signal lead 345).
– – –1/1
245
1 Check Cruise Control Ignition OFF. OK: No Service Code
ECU
Potentiometer (A19) was stored: Test
7
Output Lead (345) Disconnect X236 (W4; SE23). completed.
NOTE: Disconnection causes additional Service Code ECU 014. OK: Service Code ECU
013 or ECU 014 was
NOTE: Signal voltage can only be checked with adapter wiring harness DFLX11. stored, GO TO 2.
Install adapter wiring harness DFLX11, Section 299, Group 05. Measure voltage NOT OK: Voltage below
between pin A (lead 371) and pin C (lead 345) at adapter wiring harness (with 0.5 V, check output lead
multimeter). 345 for a short to ground
and for high resistance.
Ignition ON. GO TO 3.
Output Voltage Cruise Control Potentiometer—Specification NOT OK: Voltage over

Measure between pin A and pin C at 4.5 V, check output lead
X236—Turn the potentiometer 345 for a short to another
continuously (and slowly) from low idle conductor. GO TO 3.
to high idle ................................................................................ between 0.25 and 4.75 V
NOT OK: Voltage in
IMPORTANT: There should be no sudden change in voltage through the full range, but voltage
range of potentiometer movement. difference (between low
and high idle) is not at
NOTE: The voltage difference between low and high idle should be at least 1.5V. least 1.5 V or is constant
through the potentiometer
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for circuit diagram see SE23. movement, or there was
a sudden change in the
voltage through the
potentiometer movement.
Replace defective cruise
control potentiometer A19
and repeat test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=967
ECU References
2 General Harness and Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Check output lead
Connector Test connections. Check all relevant connectors for bad and loose contacts. 345 for continuity, GO TO
3.
Following connectors are suspect (Output Lead 345):
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ X236 and X222 (W4; SE23) needed. Test completed.
❒ X222 and X218 (W34; SE23)
SE23.
– – –1/1
3 Check Cruise Control Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Potentiometer Output connectors for bad/loose
Lead (345) Disconnect X236 (W4; SE23) contacts.
Check output lead 345: IF OK: If connectors are

• for a short to ground (Service Code ECU 014 was stored) If Service Code
• for continuity and high resistance (Service Code ECU 014 was stored) reappears and no other
245 • for a short to another conductor (Service Code ECU 013 was stored) Service Codes are stored,
ECU replace ECU controller
8 Wiring Harness: and calibrate (see
Cruise Control Output Circuit Mode”, Section 230,
Group 15) new ECU
Circuit from to
controller.
Lead 345 in W4 X236 Pin C (Cruise X222 Pin B2 (connection
Control Potentiometer to W34) NOT OK: Repair as
connector) needed. Test completed.
Lead 345 in W34 X222 Pin B2 (connection X218 Pin 39 (ECU
SE23.
– – –1/1
Coolant Temperature Sensor (B56) Circuit Test
AG,LX25546,400NA –19–01JAN01–1/1

111401
PN=968
ECU References
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the coolant temperature sensor (B56), supply/output circuit
(supply/output lead 319) and ground circuit (ground lead 371/361/381).
– – –1/1
1 Check Supply Voltage Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 2.

at Connector X215
Disconnect X215 (W4; SE23). NOT OK: Voltage out of
specification, GO TO 5.
NOTE: Disconnection causes additional Service Code ECU 019.
Ignition ON.
Measure (with multimeter) voltage between pin F and pin G at connector X215:
Supply Voltage Coolant Temperature Sensor (B56) at X215—Specification

Measure voltage between pin F and pin
G at X215—Voltage ....................................................................... between 4.8 and 5.2V
245
ECU
9
– – –1/1
2 Check Supply Voltage Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 3.

at Connector X261
Reconnect X215 (W3/W4; SE23) and disconnect X261 (W3; SE23). NOT OK: Voltage out of
NOTE: Disconnection causes additional Service Code ECU 019.
Ignition ON.
Measure (with multimeter) voltage between pin A and pin B at connector X261:
Supply Voltage Coolant Temperature Sensor (B56) at X261—Specification

Measure voltage between pin A and pin
B at X261—Voltage ........................................................................ between 4.8 and 5.2V
SE23.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=969
ECU References
3 Check Coolant Reconnect X261 (W3; SE23). OK: Check all relevant
Temperature Sensor connectors for bad and
(B56) Resistance Engine ON. loose contacts.
NOTE: Before checking coolant temperature sensor resistance the tractor should be IF OK: If all connectors
run for 3 minutes (to heat up the coolant). are OK, delete Service
Codes. If Service Code
IMPORTANT: Engine is running with approx. 1000 rpm. This indicates that reappears and no other
tractor has a problem with the Coolant Temperature Sensor (B56) Circuit. Service Codes are stored,
replace ECU controller
Ignition OFF. and calibrate (see
Disconnect X261 (W3; SE23). Mode”, Section 230,
Group 15) new ECU
NOTE: Disconnection causes additional Service Code ECU 019. controller.
Ignition ON. NOT OK: Replace

coolant temperature
Measure (with multimeter) resistance between pin A and pin B at X261: sensor B56 and repeat
test.
Resistance Coolant Temperature Sensor—Specification
Measure resistance between pin A and
pin B at X261—40 °C....................................................................................... 1420 Ohm
50 °C .................................................................................................................. 945 Ohm
60 °C .................................................................................................................. 644 Ohm
245 70 °C .................................................................................................................. 432 Ohm
ECU 80 °C .................................................................................................................. 310 Ohm
10 90 °C .................................................................................................................. 225 Ohm
100 °C ................................................................................................................ 158 Ohm
– – –1/1
4 Check Wiring Ignition OFF. OK: Check connectors

Harness (W3) X215 and X261 for bad
Disconnect X215 (W3; SE23) and loose contacts.
Check supply/output lead 319: NOT OK: Repair as

• for a short to ground (Service Code ECU 019 was stored)
• for continuity and high resistance (Service Code ECU 019 was stored)
• for a short to another conductor (Service Code ECU 018 was stored)
• for continuity and high resistance
Wiring harness:
Supply Lead 319 and Ground Lead 371 Test

Circuit from to
Supply Lead 319 in W3 X215 Pin F (connection to X261 Pin A (Coolant
W4) Temperature Sensor
connector)
Ground Lead 371 in W3 X215 Pin G (connection to X261 Pin B (Coolant
W4) Temperature Sensor
connector)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=970
ECU References
5 Check Coolant Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Temperature Circuit connectors for bad and
Disconnect X215 (W4; SE23). loose contacts.
Supply voltage below 4.7 V: (Service Code ECU 019 was stored) IF OK: If connectors are
OK, delete Service
Check Supply/Output Lead 319: Codes. If Service Code
reappears and no other
• for a short to ground Service Codes are stored,
• for continuity and high resistance replace ECU controller
and calibrate (see
Check Ground Lead 371/361/381: reference “Calibration
• for continuity and high resistance Group 15) new ECU
controller.
Supply Voltage over 5.3 V: (Service Code ECU 018 was stored)
NOT OK: Repair as
Check Supply/Output Lead 319: needed and repeat test.
Wiring harness:
Supply Lead 319 and Ground Lead 371/361/381 Test

Circuit from to to
245
Supply Lead 319 X218 Pin 44 (ECU X222 Pin E3
ECU
in W34 Controller (connection to W4)
11
connector)
Supply Lead 319 X222 Pin E3 X215 Pin F
in W4 (connection to (connection to W3)
W34)
Ground Lead 361 X218 Pin 36 (ECU X222 Pin E5 X222 Pin F4
connector)
Ground Lead 371 X222 Pin E5 X215 Pin G X236 Pin A (Cruise
in W4 (connection to (connection to W3) Control connector)
W34)
Lead number 361 changes to lead number 371
Ground Lead 381 X222 Pin F4 X238 Pin A (Foot
in W4 (connection to W4) Throttle
potentiometer
connector)
Lead number 361 changes to 381 in W4
SE23.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=971
ECU References
Engine Speed Sensor (B01) Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – “Transmission wiring harness W13”, Section 240,
Group 10.
10. – SE16H, Section 240, Group 15.
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. – SE23, Section 240, Group 15.
AG,LX25546,438NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the engine speed circuit (engine speed sender B01, signal lead 325 and ground
lead 531) .
– – –1/1
245
1 Check Engine Speed Engine RUNNING. OK: Diagnostic
ECU
Sender Circuit (Signal completed.
12
from Sender to BCU) Access address BCU 04.
NOT OK: Check engine
Engine Speed Signal (BCU 04)—Specification speed sender B01, GO
Signal recognized—Engine speed (rpm) .................................................................... X1X TO 2.
– – –1/1
2 Check Engine Speed Disconnect engine speed sender B01 (W3, SE16H). OK: Check lead 325 and
Sender 531, GO TO 3.
NOTE: The sensor must be removed from the tractor for the following test.
Connect a multimeter to sensor connector. speed sender and repeat
this test.
For connector location and pin arrangement see W3; for circuit diagram see SE16H.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=972
ECU References
3 Check lead 325 and Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant
531 connectors of the engine
Check output lead 325: speed sensor circuit (lead
325) for bad and loose
• for a short to ground. contacts.
• for continuity.
• for a short to another conductor. IF OK: Contacts are OK,
delete Service Code and
Check ground lead 531: carry out an operational
test. If the Service Code
• for continuity. reappears and the check
of engine speed sender
Wiring connections: circuit does not reveal
any problem, replace
Engine Speed Sender Circuit BCU.
Circuit from to to
NOT OK: Repair as
Signal Lead 325 in X76 Pin A (Engine X03/2 Pin A1 needed and carry out an
W3 Speed sender) (connection to W4) operational test.
Signal Lead 325 in X03 Pin A1 X133 Pin 40 (BCU X222 Pin F2
W4 (connection to W3) Controller) (connection to
W34)
Signal Lead 325 in X222 Pin F2 X218 Pin 45 (ECU
W34 (connection to W4) Controller)
Ground Lead 531 X133 Pin 4 (BCU X03 Pin A2 X03 Pin D4 245
in W4 Controller) (connection to W3) (connection to ECU
W13) 13
Ground Lead 531 X03/2 Pin A2 X76 Pin B (Engine
in W3 (connection to W4) Speed Sender)
Ground Lead 531 X03/4 Pin D4 X88 Pin B and Pin X94 Pin B (PTO
in W13 (connection to W4) D (Magnetic Speed Sender)
Sensor/Hall
Sensor)
For connector location and pin arrangement see W3, W4, W13 and W34; for circuit
diagram see SE16H and SE23.
– – –1/1
Fuel Injection Pump Solenoid (Y13) Circuit Test
AG,LX25546,428NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the fuel injection pump solenoid Y13, supply circuit (lead 355) and
ground circuit (lead 354) for fuel injection pump solenoid Y13.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=973
ECU References
1 Check Injection Pump Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 2.

Solenoid
Disconnect the injection pump solenoid connector X214 (W3; SE23). NOT OK: Repair/replace
fuel injection pump
Measure (with multimeter) resistance across the two terminals of the solenoid. solenoid.
Fuel Pump Solenoid (Y13) Resistance—Specification

Measure (with multimeter) resistance
across the two terminals of the
solenoid—Resistance .............................................................. between 3.1 and 5.8 Ohm
– – –1/1
2 Check Wiring Ignition OFF. OK: Check connectors

Harness (Lead 354 X214, X215, X222 and
and Lead 355) Measure with multimeter. X218 of the fuel injection
pump solenoid circuit for
Check lead 354: bad and loose contacts.
• for a short to ground (ECU 083) IF OK: Delete Service

• for continuity (ECU 083 or ECU 084) Code and carry out an
245 • for a short to another conductor (ECU 085) operational test. If the
ECU Service Code reappears
14 Check lead 355: and no other ECU
• for a short to ground (ECU 083) replace the ECU
• for continuity (ECU 083 or ECU 084) controller and calibrate
• for a short to another conductor (ECU 085) (see reference
“Calibration Mode”,
Wiring harness: Section 230, Group 15)
new ECU controller.
Lead 354 Check
Circuit from to NOT OK: Repair as
Lead 354 in W3 X214 Pin A (Fuel Pump X215 Pin C (connection to operational test.
Y13 connector) W4)
Lead 354 in W4 X215 Pin C (connection to X222 Pin J1 (connection
W4) to W34)
Lead 354 in W34 X222 Pin J1 (connection X218 Pin 27 (ECU
Lead 355 Check
Circuit from to
Lead 355 in W3 X214 Pin B (Fuel Pump X215 Pin B (connection to
Y13 connector) W4)
Lead 355 in W4 X215 Pin B (connection to X222 Pin J2 (connection
W4) to W34)
Lead 355 in W34 X222 Pin J2 (connection X218 Pin 28 (ECU
see SE23.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=974
ECU References
Starting Circuit Test
– “Engine wiring harness W3”, Section 240, Group – SE19, Section 240, Group 15.
10. – SE16H, Section 240, Group 15.
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. – SE23, Section 240, Group 15.
Group 10.
AG,LX25546,388NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure ECU
15
NOTE: This procedure covers testing of the starting circuit (supply lead 311/506 and ground lead 310), signal input
to starter relay (lead 002) and signal output from starter relay (lead 309).
– – –1/1
1 Check Starter Relay 1.1 OK: Starter relay K01 is

(K01) Circuit good. GO TO 1.2
NOTE: The starter relay must be electrically removed from the starting circuit when
performing resistance tests. NOT OK: Replace
defective starter relay.
Measure (with multimeter) the resistance of the starter relay coil (W3; SE1):
Starter Relay (K01) Resistance—Specification

Measure between pin 1 and pin 2 at
starter relay K01—Resistance ........................ approximately between 3.5 and 4.5 Ohm
1.2 OK: GO TO 2.
Ignition OFF. NOT OK: Voltage not in

Reconnect starter relay K01 (W3; SE1) to the starting circuit.
Measure voltage (with multimeter) at starter relay (K01) between pin 1 and pin 2 during
starting process:
Starting Signal from Neutral Start Switch B36 (lead 506)—Specification

Measure between pin 1 and pin 2 at
starter relay K01—Voltage can only be
measured during starting process ....................................... approx. between 8 and 12 V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=975
ECU References
2 Check Starter Motor 2.1 OK: GO TO 5.

Circuit
Ignition ON. NOT OK: GO TO 2.2.
Measure the voltage (with multimeter) between pin 3 at starter relay K01 (W3; SE1)
and an appropriate ground connection:
Battery/Alternator Voltage at Starter Relay K01—Specification

Measure voltage between pin 3 at starter
relay K01 and an appropriate ground
connection—Voltage ...................................................................... between 11 and 13 V
2.2 OK: Perform “Starter

Checks”, see Section
Ignition OFF. 240, Group 25.

needed. Test completed.
Wiring harness:
Alternator Circuit Check (lead 002)

245
ECU Circuit from to to to
16 Lead 002 in Alternator G02 Starter Motor Starter Relay Fuse F01 Pin
W3 Pin 30 M01 Pin 30 K01 Pin 3 A (Main Fuse)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=976
ECU References
3 Check Neutral Start 3.1 OK: GO TO 3.2.

Switch Output Circuit
Disconnect neutral start switch B36 at connector X93 (W13; SE1). NOT OK: Repair/Replace
defective neutral start
“Check Neutral Start Switch B36”, see Section 240, Group 25. switch B36. Test
completed.
3.2 OK: Check neutral start

switch input circuit, GO
Ignition OFF. TO 4.
Check supply lead 506: at starter relay pin 1 NOT OK: Repair/Replace
defective harness or
• for a short to another conductor (ECU 046) connector. Test
• for a short to ground completed.
• for continuity
Check ground lead 310: at starter relay pin 2
• for continuity
Wiring harness:
Supply Circuit (lead 506) Check

245
Circuit from to ECU
Supply Lead 506 at W3 K01 Pin 1 (Starter Relay) X03/2 Pin B7 (connection 17
to W4)
Supply Lead 506 in W4 X03 Pin B7 (connection to X03 Pin C2 (connection to
W3) W13)
Supply Lead 506 in W13 X03/4 Pin C2 (connection X93 Pin B (Neutral Start
to W4) Switch connector)
Ground Circuit (lead 506) Check
Circuit from to
Ground Lead 310 in W3 K01 Pin 2 (Starter Relay) XGND9
see SE1.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=977
ECU References
4 Check Neutral Start 4.1 OK: GO TO 4.2.

Switch Input Circuit
Check supply lead 311: at X93 pin A NOT OK: Repair as
• for a short to another conductor (ECU 046)
• for a short to ground
• for continuity
Wiring harness:
Neutral Start Switch Input Circuit Check

Circuit from to to to
Supply Lead X93 Pin A X03/4 Pin C1
311 in W13 (Neutral Start (connection to
Switch W4)
connector)
Supply Lead X03 Pin C1 S01 Pin 6 X222 Pin M2 X133 Pin 12
311 in W4 (connection to (Main Switch (connection to (BCU
W13) Pin 6; START W34) Controller
Pin) connector)
Supply Lead X222 Pin M2 X198 Pin E1
311 in W34 (connection to (RCU
W4) Controller
connector)
245
ECU
18 For connector location and pin arrangement see W4, W13 and W34; for circuit diagram
see SE1, SE16H and SE19.

connectors of the starting
“Check Main Switch S01”, see Section 240, Group 25. circuit for bad and loose
contacts.
IF OK: If all connectors
are OK and no other ECU
replace ECU controller
and calibrate (see
Group 15) new ECU
controller.
NOT OK: Repair as

– – –1/1

111401
PN=978
ECU References
5 Check Starter Relay 5.1 OK: GO TO 5.2.

Circuit
Check diode V203. NOT OK: Repair as
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for circuit diagram see SE23. operational test.
5.2 OK: Harness problem

consists between diode
Disconnect diode V203 in Load Center 2. V203 and ECU controller,
GO TO 6.
Measure voltage (with multimeter) between diode input V203 pin D223E and an
appropriate ground connection after starting process: NOT OK: Harness
problem consists between
Start Signal (lead 309)—Specification diode V203 and starting
Measure at diode between V203 pin circuit, GO TO 7.
D223E and an appropriate ground
connection—Measure voltage after
starting process (engine RUNNING) .............................................................. below 3.5 V
– – –1/1
245
6 Check Circuit (Lead Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 8.
ECU
308)
19
Check diode output lead 308: NOT OK: Repair as
• for continuity
Wiring harness:
Starting Circuit (lead 308)

Circuit from to
Output Lead 308 in W4 Diode V203 Pin D223A (in X222 Pin H1 (connection
Load Center 2) to W34)
Output Lead 308 in W34 X222 Pin H1 (connection X218 Pin 35 (ECU
to W4) Controller connection)
SE23.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=979
ECU References
7 Check Circuit (Lead 7.1 OK: GO TO 7.2.

309)
Check following components: NOT OK: Repair as
• Diode V202 test.
• Latch Relay K213
7.2 OK: GO TO 8.
Ignition OFF. NOT OK: Repair as

Check diode input lead 309/692:

• for continuity
Wiring harness:
Starting Circuit (lead 309/692)

Circuit from to to
Input Lead 309 in Starter Relay K01 Starter Motor M01 X03/2 Pin B12
245 W3 Pin 4 Pin 50 (connection to W4)
ECU
20 Input Lead 309 in X03 Pin B12 ECU Diode V203 RCU Diode V202
W4 (connection to W3) Pin D223E (Load Pin D222A (Load
Center 2) Center 2)
Input Lead 692 in RCU diode V202 K213 Pin 85 (RCU
W4 Pin D222E (Load Latch Relay in
Center 2) Load Center 2)
SE1, SE19 and SE23.
– – –1/1
8 General Harness and Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Delete Service Code.
Connector Test connections (gently tug at the affected wires). If Service Code still
persists and no other
Following connectors are suspect: ECU Service Codes are
stored, replace ECU
❒ X03 and X222 (W4; SE1 and SE23) Controller and calibrate
❒ X03/2 (W3; SE1) (see reference “
❒ X218 and X222 (W34; SE23) Calibration Mode”,
Section 230, Group 15)
For connector location and pin arrangement see W3, W4 and W34; for circuit diagram new ECU Controller.
see SE1 and SE23.
NOT OK: Repair as
– – –1/1

111401
PN=980
Group HCU
HCU References
HCU Beep Mode Test (HCU 02)
The HCU (“beep”) mode (Access Address HCU 02) the circuit device, using the “on-board” diagnostic
can help the technician with diagnosis in two ways. It feature.
can be used to:
The following diagnostic addresses support the
• “verify” operation of devices that are part of the diagnostic (“beep”) mode:
control unit circuit.
• help find device information, harness and connector • HCU 03 –– Quick Raise/Lower Rocker Switch.
problems.
• HCU 04 –– L.H. Draft Sensor signal circuit.
Whenever a “change of state” is detected, the warning
horn will “beep” to inform the technician of the change. • HCU 05 –– R.H. Draft Sensor signal circuit.
The circuit device address number is also displayed.
• HCU 06 –– Load/Depth Control Potentiometer signal
NOTE: A “change of state” would be a switch going circuit.
from open to closed or closed to open. Also,
by moving a potentiometer type control slowly • HCU 07 –– Hitch Height Control Potentiometer signal
through it’s operation range, a break or “bad circuit.
spot” in the potentiometer can be detected in
the same way. • HCU 08 –– Position Sensor Potentiometer signal
circuit. 245
The audible signal can be used to verify that a switch HCU
1
is changing state when it is activated (or is not • HCU 09 –– Raise-Limit Control Potentiometer signal
changing state when it should be, if there is no circuit.
“beep”).
• HCU 10 –– Rate-of-Drop Control Potentiometer
It can also be used to check for connector and signal circuit.
harness defects by moving/tugging on harness or
connectors while in the “beep” mode. If a “beep” is • HCU 11 and HCU 12 –– Remote Control Switch.
heard, the display will show the address number of the
circuit that caused the “beep”. • HCU 13 –– Potentiometer Supply Voltage - Circuit.
The circuit address number can then be accessed • HCU 14 –– Draft Sensor Supply Voltage - Circuit.
(using the turn signal switch) to check the operation of
AG,LX12234,355NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-HCU-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=981
HCU References
Quick Raise/Lower Rocker Switch (S24) Circuit Test
Related to Service Code HCU 049. ❒ Cab Tractors:

• Cab Wiring Harness W4, Section 240, Group 10.
NOTE: Service Code 049 will be stored whenever the • SE15 - HCU Wiring Diagrams, Section 240,
hitch control lever is moved in the opposite Group 15.
direction of an active command by the
raise/lower rocker switch. This may be caused ❒ 2-Post ROPS Tractors:
by a failed (stuck) Raise/Lower rocker switch • Platform Wiring Harness W4 up to serial number
or by operator error! 249394, Section 240, Group 10A.
• Platform Wiring Harness W4 from serial number
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: 249395, Section 240, Group 10A.
• SE15 - HCU Wiring Diagrams, Section 240,
NOTE: For component location and pin arrangement Group 15A.
see the corresponding wiring harness.
For electrical troubleshooting see functional

and diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams.
245
HCU
2
AG,LX12234,621NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test Hitch Raise/Lower Rocker Switch (S24) circuitry, harness to HCU connection and
switch harness assembly condition.
– – –1/1
1 Neutral Position Access Address HCU 03: OK: GO TO 2.

(Raise/Lower Rocker
Switch S24) HCU 03 –– Quick Raise/Lower Rocker Switch Signal Circuit—Specification NOT OK: Voltage is not
Switch (S24) in center (OFF) position:— within specification, GO
Voltage ......................................................................................... between 1.6 and 3.6 V TO 4.
– – –1/1
2 Raise Position HCU 03 –– Quick Raise/Lower Rocker Switch Signal Circuit—Specification OK: GO TO 3.
(Raise/Lower Rocker Switch (S24) in RAISE position:—
Switch S24) Voltage ......................................................................................... between 3.6 and 4.5 V NOT OK: Voltage is not
TO 4.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=982
HCU References
3 Lower Position - HCU 03 –– Quick Raise/Lower Rocker Switch Signal Circuit—Specification OK: • Test completed.
(Raise/Lower Rocker Switch (S24) in LOWER position:—
Switch S24) Voltage ......................................................................................... between 0.7 and 1.6 V • Circuit problem still
exists: Delete Service
Code HCU 049 and
calibrate HCU, during the
calibration of the HCU the
function of all dependent
components will be
checked (see reference
“HCU Calibration
Procedure”, Section 270,
Group 15.
NOT OK: Voltage is not

within specification. GO
TO 4.
– – –1/1
245
4 Supply Voltage from NOTE: Each disconnected connector (with key switch ON) will create a Service Code OK: Check lead 834, GO
HCU
HCU to Raise/Lower of the dependent component. TO 4.2
3
Rocker Switch (S24)
4.1 Supply voltage for lead 838 NOT OK: A reading
outside of this range
Disconnect rockshaft control connector X14/1 (8-pin; rockshaft control for Cab indicates a problem with
Tractors) or X14/A (8-pin; rockshaft control for 2-Post ROPS). supply lead 838, GO TO
5.
Access Address HCU 03:
HCU 03 –– Quick Raise/Lower Rocker Switch Circuit (Harness Test)—

Specification
Connector X14/1 or X14/A
disconnected:—Voltage ................................................................ between 1.6 and 3.6 V
4.2 Supply voltage for lead 834 OK: GO TO 6.
Ignition ON. NOT OK: Check supply

lead 834, GO TO 7.
Measure with multimeter between rockshaft control Connector X14/1 or X14/A between
pin F (lead 834) and an adequate ground connection:
Quick Raise/Lower Switch S24—Specification

Supply voltage from HCU for lead 834:—
Voltage ...................................................................................................................... 5.0 V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=983
HCU References
5 Supply Lead 838 - Check supply lead 838: OK: Check rockshaft
(Raise/Lower Rocker control connector X14/1
Switch S24) ❒ for continuity. or X14/A and HCU
❒ for a short to the ground. connector X13 for bad,
❒ for a short to another conductor. loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
Wiring Connections:
NOT OK: Repair as
Supply Lead 838 needed and repeat this
from to Wiring Harness / test.
Section
X14/1 or X14/A Pin D X13 Pin J2 W4 / SE15
(8-pin, rockshaft control) (HCU)
– – –1/1
6 Raise/Lower Rocker NOTE: The switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance or OK: Check signal lead
Switch (S24) Test continuity checks. 839, GO TO 8.
Raise/Lower Rocker Switch (S24)—Specification NOT OK: Replace the

Switch in RAISE position—Switch Status ........ Continuity between pin D (lead 838) and raise/lower rocker switch
pin F (lead 834). and repeat this test.
Switch in LOWER position—Switch
Status ............................................................... Continuity between pin D (lead 838) and
245 pin G (lead 839)
HCU
4
– – –1/1
7 Supply Lead 834 - Check supply lead 834: OK: Check rockshaft
(Raise/Lower Rocker control Connector X14/1
corroded contacts.
Wiring Connections:
NOT OK: Repair as
Supply Lead 834 needed and repeat this
from to Wiring Harness / test.
Section
X14/1 or X14/A Pin F X13 Pin H3 W4 / SE15
(8-pin; rockshaft control) (HCU)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=984
HCU References
8 Signal Lead 839 - Check lead 839: OK: Check rockshaft

(Raise/Lower Rocker control connector X14/1
corroded contacts.
Wiring Connections:
IF OK: Service code HCU
Signal Lead 839 049 can also occur if a
from to Wiring Harness / problem with the stepper
motor and the
Connector Connector Section
raising/lowering valve
X14/1 or X14/A Pin G X13 Pin J3 W4 / SE15 exists: Check the stepper
(rockshaft control) (HCU) motor, and check the
depth to which the raising
and lowering valves are
screwed in.
NOT OK: Repair as

test.
– – –1/1
245
L.H. Draft Sensor (B20) Signal Circuit Test HCU
5
Related to Service Code HCU 051 and/or HCU 253; • SE15 - HCU Wiring Diagrams, Section 240,
HCU 254; HCU 255. Group 15.
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: ❒ 2-Post ROPS Tractors:

• Platform Wiring Harness W4 up to serial number
NOTE: For component location and pin arrangement 249394, Section 240, Group 10A.
see the corresponding wiring harness. • Platform Wiring Harness W4 from serial number
249395, Section 240, Group 10A.
For electrical troubleshooting see functional • Transmission Wiring Harness W33, Section 240,
and diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams. Group 10A.
❒ For component location and pin arrangement see: Group 15A.
• Transmission Wiring Harness W13, Section 240,
Group 10.
AG,LX12234,622NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test l.h. draft sensor (B20) circuitry and the harness to HCU connection.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=985
HCU References
1 L.H. Draft Sensor IMPORTANT: Check signal voltage of l.h. draft sensor not under load. There OK: • Test completed.
(B20) Signal Voltage should not be any draft links on the draft sensor bearing pin.
• Circuit problem still
Access Address HCU 04 and check display: exists, GO TO 4.
HCU 04 –– L.H. Draft Sensor Signal Voltage—Specification NOT OK: GO TO 2.

L.H. Draft Sensor:—Voltage ......................................................... between 3.8 and 4.2 V
– – –1/1
2 L.H. Draft Sensor • Check draft sensor, see reference “Checking and Adjusting Draft Sensors”, Section OK: Adjust draft sensor
(B20) Check and 270, Group 15. and calibrate HCU (see
Adjustment reference “HCU
Calibration Procedure”,
NOT OK: Replace draft

sensor and calibrate HCU
245 (see reference “HCU
HCU Calibration Procedure”,
NOT OK: No voltage

display at Address HCU
08, GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
3 Draft Sensor Supply 3.1 Access Address HCU 14 and check display: OK: GO TO 3.2
Voltage (L.H. Draft
Sensor (B20) Circuit) HCU 14 –– L.H. and R.H. Draft Sensor—Specification NOT OK: Check supply
Power Supply:—Voltage .............................................................. between 7.8 and 8.2 V circuit, see reference
“Draft Sensor (B19 and
IMPORTANT: If the voltage reading in address HCU 14 is in specification check B20) Supply Voltage
also the power supply directly at the l.h.-draft sensor connector X89, GO TO 3.2 Circuit Test”, Section 245,
Group HCU.
NOTE: Each disconnected connector (with key switch ON) will create a Service Code OK: Check signal lead
of the dependent component. 885, GO TO 5.
3.2 Check supply voltage for l.h. draft sensor B20 at connector X89. Use a multimeter NOT OK: Voltage reading
and measure between pin A (lead 883) and pin C (lead 871): on the multimeter is not
within specification: check
L.H. Draft Sensor—Specification lead 883 and 871 for
Supply Voltage:—Voltage ............................................................ between 7.8 and 8.2 V shorts, GO TO 6.
• For connector location and pin arrangement see W13 (for Cab Tractors) or W33 (for
2-Post ROPS).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=986
HCU References
Connector Test (L.H. connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address HCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the l.h.
Draft Sensor (B20) wires (for reference see: HCU Beep Mode Test, Section 245, Group HCU). draft sensor circuit for
Circuit) bad, loose, widened or
L.H. Draft Sensor Circuit: corroded contacts.
❒ Cab Tractors: NOT OK: Repair as

• X89 (l.h. draft sensor) and X03/4 (connection to W4) at W13. needed and repeat this
• X03 (connection to W13) and X13 (HCU) at W4. test.
• XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at W4.
❒ 2-Post ROPS Tractors:

• X89 (l.h. draft sensor) and X287 (connection to W4) at W33.
• X287 (connection to W33) and X13 (HCU) at W4.
– – –1/1
245
5 Signal Lead 885 (L.H. Check signal lead 885: OK: Check all connectors
HCU
Draft Sensor (B20) for bad, loose, widened or
7
Circuit) ❒ for continuity. corroded contacts.
❒ for a short to the ground.
Wiring Connections: test.
L.H. Draft Sensor Signal Circuit 885 for Cab Tractors

Lead 885 X89-Pin B X03/4-Pin H7 X03-Pin H7 X13-Pin G2
(l.h. draft (connection to (connection to
sensor) W4) W13)
L.H. Draft Sensor Signal Circuit 885 for 2-Post ROPS Tractors
Lead 885 X89-Pin B X287-Pin J X287-Pin J X13-Pin G2
(l.h. draft (connection to (connection to
sensor) W4) W33)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=987
HCU References
6 Supply Lead 883 and Check supply lead 883 and ground lead 871: OK: Check all connectors
(L.H. Draft Sensor ❒ for continuity. corroded contacts.
(B20) Circuit)
L.H. Draft Sensor Supply Circuit 883 and 871 for Cab Tractors NOT OK: Repair as
Circuit Wiring Harness W13 Wiring Harness W4 needed and repeat this
test.
Supply lead X89-Pin A X03/4-Pin H6 X03-Pin H6 X13-Pin K2
883 (l.h. draft (connection to (connection to (HCU)
sensor) W4) W13)
Ground lead X89-Pin C X03/4-Pin J8 X03-Pin J8 X13-Pin B3
sensor) W4) W13)
L.H. Draft Sensor Supply Circuit 883 and 871 for 2-Post ROPS Tractors
Supply lead X89-Pin A X287-Pin H X287-Pin H X13-Pin K2
sensor) W4) W33)
Ground lead X89-Pin C X287-Pin K X287-Pin K X13-Pin B3
sensor) W4) W33)
245
HCU
8
– – –1/1
R.H. Draft Sensor (B19) Signal Circuit Test
Related to Service Code HCU 052 and/or HCU 250; • SE15 - HCU Wiring Diagrams, Section 240,
HCU 251; HCU 252. Group 15.
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: ❒ 2-Post ROPS Tractors:

NOTE: For component location and pin arrangement 249394, Section 240, Group 10A.
see the corresponding wiring harness. • Platform Wiring Harness W4 from serial number
For electrical troubleshooting see functional • Transmission Wiring Harness W33, Section 240,
and diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams. Group 10A.
❒ Cab Tractors: Group 15A.
Group 10.
AG,LX12234,623NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test r.h. draft sensor circuitry and the harness to HCU connection.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=988
HCU References
1 R.H. Draft Sensor IMPORTANT: Check signal voltage of r.h. draft sensor not under load. There OK: • Test completed.
(B19) Signal Voltage should not be any draft links on the draft sensor bearing pin:
Access Address HCU 05 and check display: exists, GO TO 4.
HCU 05 –– R.H. Draft Sensor Signal Voltage—Specification NOT OK: GO TO 2.

R.H. Draft Sensor:—Voltage ........................................................ between 3.8 and 4.2 V
– – –1/1
2 R.H. Draft Sensor • Check and adjust Draft Sensors, Section 270, Group 15. OK: Adjust draft
(B19) Check and sensor/linkage and
Adjustment calibrate HCU (see
reference “HCU
NOT OK: Replace draft

sensor and calibrate HCU 245
(see reference “HCU HCU
Calibration Procedure”, 9
NOT OK: No voltage

display at Address HCU
05, GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
3 R.H. Draft Sensor 3.1 Access Address HCU 14 and check display: OK: GO TO 3.2
(B19) Supply Voltage
HCU 14 –– R.H. and L.H. Draft Sensor—Specification NOT OK: Check supply
Power supply:—Voltage ............................................................... between 7.8 and 8.2 V circuit, see reference
“Draft Sensor (B19 and
IMPORTANT: If the voltage reading in address “14” is in specification check also B20) Supply Voltage
the power supply directly at connector X90 (r.h. draft sensor), GO TO 3.2. Circuit Test”, Section 245,
Group HCU.
3.2 Check supply voltage for r.h. draft sensor B19. Use a multimeter and measure OK: Check signal lead,
between pin A (lead 883) and pin C (Lead 871) at draft sensor connector X90: GO TO 5.
R.H. Draft Sensor B19—Specification NOT OK: Check lead 883

Power Supply:—Voltage .............................................................. between 7.8 and 8.2 V and 871 for shorts, GO
TO 6.
• For connector location and pin arrangement see W13 (for cab) or W33 (for 2-Post
ROPS); for circuit diagram see SE15.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=989
HCU References
Connector Test (R.H. connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address HCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the draft
Draft Sensor (B19) wires (for reference see: HCU Beep Mode Test, Section 245, Group HCU). sensor
Circuit) signal-voltage-circuit for
R.H. Draft Sensor Circuit: bad, loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
❒ Cab Tractors:
• X90 (r.h. draft sensor) and X03/4 (connection to W4) at W13. NOT OK: Repair as
• X03 (connection to W13) and X13 (HCU) at W4. needed and repeat this
• XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at W4. test.

• X90 (r.h. draft sensor) and X287 (connection to W4) at W33.
• X287 (connection to W33) and X13 (HCU) at W4.
– – –1/1
245
5 Signal Lead 884 (R.H. Check lead 884: OK: Check all connectors
HCU
Draft Sensor (B19) for bad, loose, widened or
10
Circuit) ❒ for continuity. corroded contacts.
(R.H.) Draft Sensor Signal Circuit (lead 884) for Cab Tractors
Lead 884 X90-Pin B X03/4-Pin H8 X03-Pin H8 X13-Pin F1
(r.h. draft (connection to (connection to (HCU)
sensor) W4) W13)
(R.H.) Draft Sensor Signal Circuit (lead 884) for 2-Post ROPS Tractors
Lead 884 X90-Pin B X287-Pin G X287-Pin G X13-Pin F1
(r.h. draft (connection to (connection to (HCU)
sensor) W4) W33)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=990
HCU References
(R.H. Draft Sensor ❒ for continuity. corroded contacts.
(B19) Circuit)
R.H. Draft Sensor Supply Circuit 883 and 871 for Cab Tractors NOT OK: Repair as
Circuit Wiring Harness W13 Wiring Harness W4 needed and repeat this
test.
Supply lead X90 (r.h. draft X03/4-Pin H6 X03-Pin H6 X13-Pin K2
883 sensor) (connection to (connection to (HCU)
W4) W4)
Ground lead X90 (r.h. draft X03/4-Pin J8 X03-Pin J8 X13-Pin B3
871 sensor) (connection to (connection to (HCU)
W4) W4)
R.H. Draft Sensor Supply Circuit 883 and 871 for 2-Post ROPS Tractors
Supply lead X90-Pin A (r.h. X287-Pin H X287-Pin H X13-Pin K2
883 draft sensor) (connection to (connection to (HCU)
W4) W33)
Ground lead X90-Pin C (r.h. X287-Pin K X287-Pin K X13-Pin B3
871 draft sensor) (connection to (connection to (HCU)
W4) W33)
245
HCU
11
– – –1/1
Load/Depth Control Potentiometer (B26) Signal Circuit Test
Related to Service Code HCU 053. • Cab Wiring Harness W4, Section 240, Group 10.
NOTE: For component location and pin arrangement ❒ 2-Post ROPS Tractors:
see the corresponding wiring harness. • Platform Wiring Harness W4 up to serial number
For electrical troubleshooting see functional • Platform Wiring Harness W4 from serial number
and diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams. 249395, Section 240, Group 10A.
AG,LX12234,624NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test load/depth potentiometer circuitry, harness to HCU connection and potentiometer
– – –1/1

111401
PN=991
HCU References
1 Minimum Load Access Address HCU 06. OK: GO TO 2.

Sensitivity
(Load/Depth Slowly turn the load/depth control potentiometer fully counterclockwise and check NOT OK: If there was a
Potentiometer B26) display: “beep”, and/or the voltage
reading changed
HCU 06 –– Load/Depth Control Potentiometer Signal Circuit—Specification suddenly, replace the
Potentiometer turned fully load/depth control
counterclockwise:—Voltage ......................................................... between 0.5 and 1.5 V potentiometer and repeat
this test.
NOT OK: Voltage reading

GO TO 3.

is constantly 5 V, GO TO
5.1
– – –1/1
245
2 Maximum Load SLOWLY turn the load/depth control potentiometer fully clockwise and check display: OK: • Test completed.
HCU
Sensitivity
12
(Load/Depth HCU 06 –– Load/Depth Control Potentiometer Signal Circuit—Specification • Circuit problem still
Potentiometer B26) Potentiometer turned fully clockwise:— exists, GO TO 4
Voltage ...................................................................................... between 3.5 and 4.5 Volt
NOT OK: If there was a
NOTE: Load/Depth fully clockwise voltage must be at least 2 V more than the fully “beep”, and/or the voltage
counterclockwise voltage. There should be no beep or sudden change in voltage reading changed
through the full range of control movement. suddenly, replace the
load/depth control
potentiometer and repeat
this test.

GO TO 3.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=992
HCU References
3 Supply Voltage 3.1 Access Address HCU 13 and check display: OK: GO TO 3.2
(Load/Depth
Potentiometer B26) HCU 13 –– Potentiometer (B26 and B27) and Position Sensor (B21)— NOT OK: Check supply
Specification circuit, see reference
Power Supply:—Voltage .............................................................. between 4.8 and 5.2 V “Potentiometer (B21, B26
and B27) Supply Voltage
IMPORTANT: If the voltage reading in address HCU 13 is in specification check Circuit Test”, Section 245,
also the power supply directly at the load/depth connector X14/2 (for Cab Group HCU.
Tractors) or X14/B (for 2-Post ROPS), GO TO 3.2
3.2 Check supply voltage at 3-pin Load/Depth connector X14/2 (for Cab Tractors) or at OK: Check signal lead
X14/B (for 2-Post ROPS). 869, GO TO 5.2.
Measure between pin C (lead 873) and pin A (Lead 871): NOT OK: Voltage reading
on the multimeter is not
Load/Depth Potentiometer B26—Specification within specification: check
Power Supply:—Voltage .............................................................. between 4.8 and 5.2 V lead 873 and 871, GO
TO 6.
– – –1/1
245
HCU
Connector Test - connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address HCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the
13
(Load/Depth wires (for reference see: HCU Beep Mode Test, Section 245, Group HCU). load/depth circuit for bad,
Potentiometer B26) loose, widened or
❒ Load/Depth Circuit: corroded contacts.
• 3-pin load/depth connector X14/2 (for Cab Tractors) or X14/B (for 2-Post ROPS)
and X13 (HCU) at wiring harness W4. NOT OK: Repair as
• XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at wiring harness W4. needed.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=993
HCU References
5 Signal Lead 869 NOTE: Each disconnected connector (with key switch ON) will create a Service Code OK: Voltage reading is
(Load/Depth of the dependent component. still 5 V, check signal lead
Potentiometer B26) 869 for a short to another
5.1 If the voltage reading is constantly 5 V, disconnect load/depth connector X14/2 or conductor, GO TO 5.2
X14/B and check voltage at Address HCU 06 again:
NOT OK: Replace the
❒ If the voltage reading goes to zero V, the potentiometer is defective. potentiometer and repeat
❒ If the voltage reading is still 5 V, the harness is defective. this test.
5.2.Check signal lead 869: OK: Check all connectors

❒ for continuity. corroded contacts.
Load/Depth Control Potentiometer Signal Lead 869

from to Wiring Harness /
Section
X14/2 or X14/B Pin B X13 Pin G3 W4 / SE15
(3-pin; load/depth) (HCU)
245
HCU
14
– – –1/1
(Load/Depth ❒ for continuity. corroded contacts.
Potentiometer B26)
Load/Depth Control Potentiometer Supply Circuit 873 and 871 tests.
(SE15) from to
Supply lead 873 X13-Pin K3 X14/2 or X14/B -Pin C
(HCU)
Ground lead 871 X13-Pin B3 X14/2 or X14/B -Pin A
(HCU)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=994
HCU References
Hitch Height Control Potentiometer (B27) Signal Circuit Test
Related to Service Code: HCU 054. • Cab Wiring Harness W4, Section 240, Group 10.
AG,LX12234,625NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure HCU
15
NOTE: This procedure will test hitch height control potentiometer circuitry, harness to HCU connection and
potentiometer harness assembly condition.
– – –1/1
1 Transport Lock Access Address HCU 07. OK: GO TO 2.

Position (Hitch Height
Control Potentiometer Move hitch control to transport lock position and check the display: NOT OK: If there was a
B27) “beep”, and/or the voltage
HCU 07 –– Hitch (Height) Control Signal Circuit—Specification reading changed
Hitch control in transport lock position:— suddenly, replace the
Voltage ......................................................................................... between 0.5 and 1.5 V hitch height control
this test.

GO TO 3.

5.1
– – –1/1

111401
PN=995
HCU References
2 Maximum Lower SLOWLY push the hitch control fully forward (lower hitch) and check the display: OK: • Test completed.
Position (Hitch Height
Control Potentiometer HCU 07 –– Hitch (Height) Control Signal Circuit—Specification • Circuit problem still
B27) Hitch control moved fully forward (lower exists, GO TO 4.
position):—Voltage ....................................................................... between 3.5 and 4.5 V
NOTE: Hitch lower voltage must be at least 2 V more than transport lock voltage. “beep”, and/or the voltage
There should be no beep or sudden change in voltage through the full range of control reading changed
movement. suddenly, replace the
hitch height control
this test.

GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
245
3 Supply Voltage (Hitch 3.1 Access Address HCU 13 and check display: OK: GO TO 3.2
HCU
Height Control
16
also the power supply at rockshaft control connector X14/1 or X14/A. Group HCU.
3.2 Supply voltage at 8-pin-rockshaft control connector X14/1 (Cab Tractors) or X14/A OK: Check signal lead
(2-Post ROPS). 877, GO TO 5.2.
Measure with multimeter between pin B (lead 873) and pin A (Lead 871): NOT OK: Voltage reading
on the multimeter is not
Hitch Height Control Potentiometer B27—Specification within specification: check
Power Supply:—Voltage .............................................................. between 4.8 and 5.2 V lead 873 and 871, GO
TO 6.
– – –1/1
Connector Test (Hitch connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address HCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the hitch
Height Control wires (for reference see: HCU Beep Mode Test, Section 245, Group HCU). height control circuit for
Potentiometer B27) bad, loose, widened or
❒ Hitch Height Control Circuit: corroded contacts.
• 8-pin-rockshaft control connector X14/1 (Cab Tractors) or X14/A (2-Post ROPS)
and X13 (HCU) at wiring harness W4. NOT OK: Repair as
• XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at wiring harness W4. needed and repeat this
test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=996
HCU References
(Hitch Height Control of the dependent component. still 5 V, check signal lead
5.1 If the voltage reading is constantly 5 V, disconnect connector X14/1 or X14/A and conductor, GO TO 5.2
check the voltage at Address HCU 07 again:
NOT OK: Replace the
5.2 Check signal lead 877: OK: Check all connectors

Hitch Height Control Potentiometer Signal Lead 877

from to Wiring Harness
(Section)
X14/1 or X14/A Pin E X13 Pin F2 W4
(8-pin; rockshaft control) (HCU) (SE15)
245
HCU
17
– – –1/1
(Hitch Height Control ❒ for continuity. corroded contacts.
Potentiometer B27)
Hitch Height Control Potentiometer Supply Circuit 873 and 871 test.
(SE15) from to
Supply lead 873 X13-Pin K3 X14/1 or X14/A -Pin B
(HCU)
Ground lead 810 X13-Pin B3 X14/1 or X14/A -Pin A
(HCU)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=997
HCU References
Position Sensor Potentiometer (B21) Signal Circuit Test
Related to Service Code HCU 055. • Transmission Wiring Harness W13, Section 240,
Group 10.
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: • SE15 - HCU Wiring Diagrams, Section 240,
Group 15.
NOTE: For component location and pin arrangement
see the corresponding wiring harness. ❒ 2-Post ROPS Tractors:
For electrical troubleshooting see functional 249394, Section 240, Group 10A.
and diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams. • Platform Wiring Harness W4 from serial number
❒ Cab Tractors: • SE15 - HCU Wiring Diagrams, Section 240,
• Cab Wiring Harness W4, Section 240, Group 10. Group 15A.
AG,LX12234,626NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
HCU Test Procedure
18
NOTE: This procedure will test position sensor potentiometer circuitry, harness to HCU connection and
potentiometer harness assembly condition.
– – –1/1
1 Position Sensor (B21) • Check position pensor, see reference “Checking the Position Sensor”, Section 270, OK: • Test completed.
Check Group 15.
exists, GO TO 3.

check potentiometer
Supply voltage GO TO 2.

4.1.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=998
HCU References
(Position Sensor
(B21) Circuit) HCU 13 –– Potentiometer (B26 and B27) and Position Sensor (B21)— NOT OK: Check supply
. Circuit Test”, Section 245,
Group HCU.
IMPORTANT: If the voltage reading in address HCU 13 is in specification check
also the power supply at position sensor connector X96.
2.2 Use a multimeter and measure between pin A (lead 873) and pin C (lead 871) at OK: Check signal lead
position sensor connector X96: 878, GO TO 4.2.
Position Sensor (B21)—Specification NOT OK: Voltage reading

Power Supply:—Voltage .............................................................. between 4.8 and 5.2 V on multimeter is not
within specification, check
NOTE: Each disconnected connector (with key switch ON) will create a Service Code lead 873 and 871 for an
of the dependent component. open circuit, GO TO 5.
– – –1/1
245
HCU
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address HCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the position
19
(Position Sensor wires (for reference see: HCU Beep Mode Test, Section 245, Group HCU). sensor signal-circuit for
(B21) Circuit) bad, loose, widened or
Position Sensor Circuit: corroded contacts.

• X96 (position sensor); X03/4 (connection to W4) at W13. needed and repeat this
• X03 (connection to W13) and X13 (HCU) at W4 test.
❒ 2-Post ROPS:
• X96 (position sensor) and X13 (HCU) at W4.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=999
HCU References
(Position Sensor of the dependent component. still 5 V, check signal lead
(B21) Circuit) 878 for a short to another
4.1 If the voltage reading is constantly 5 V, disconnect position sensor connector X96 conductor, GO TO 4.2
and check the voltage in address HCU 08 again:
NOT OK: Replace the

Position Sensor Signal Circuit 878 for Cab Tractors

Lead 878 X96 Pin B X03/4 Pin H5 X03 Pin H5 X13 Pin F3
(position (connection to (connection to (HCU)
sensor) W4) W13)
245 Position Sensor Signal Circuit 878 for 2-Post ROPS Tractors
HCU
20
(SE15) from to
Lead 878 X96 Pin B X13 Pin F3
(position sensor) (HCU)
– – –1/1
5 Supply Lead 873 and Check supply lead 873 and ground lead 871: OK: If the check of the
Ground Lead 871 potentiometer, supply
(Position Sensor ❒ for continuity. voltage and the signal
(B21) Circuit) lead does not reveal any
Wiring Connections: problem (re-calibration did
not solve the problem,
Circuit 873 and 871 for Cab Tractors see reference “HCU
Wiring Harness W13 Wiring Harness W4
Section 270, Group 15).
Circuit from to from to
Supply lead X96-Pin A X03/4-Pin H4 X03-Pin H4 X13-Pin K3 NOT OK: Repair as
873 (position (connection to (connection to (HCU) needed and repeat this
sensor) W4) W13) test.
Ground lead X96-Pin C X03/4-Pin J8 X03-Pin J8 X13-Pin B3
871 (position (connection to (connection to (HCU)
sensor) W4) W13)
Circuit 873 and 871 for 2-Post ROPS
Wiring Harness W4
Circuit from to
Supply lead 873 X96-Pin A X13-Pin K3
Ground lead 871 X96-Pin C X13-Pin B3
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1000
HCU References
Raise-Limit Control Potentiometer (B27) Signal Circuit Test
Related Service Code HCU 056. • Cab Wiring Harness W4, Section 240, Group 10.
AG,LX12234,627NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure HCU
21
NOTE: This procedure will test raise limit potentiometer circuitry, harness to HCU connection and potentiometer
– – –1/1
1 Limited Raise (Raise Access Address HCU 09. OK: GO TO 2.

Limit Potentiometer
B27) SLOWLY turn the raise limit potentiometer fully counterclockwise and check display: NOT OK: If there was a
“beep”, and/or the voltage
HCU 09 –– Raise Limit Potentiometer Signal Circuit—Specification reading changed
Potentiometer turned fully suddenly, replace the
counterclockwise:—Voltage ......................................................... between 0.5 and 1.5 V raise limit potentiometer

GO TO 3.

5.1
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1001
HCU References
2 Maximum Raise SLOWLY turn the raise limit potentiometer fully clockwise and check display at address OK: • Test completed.
(Raise Limit HCU 09:
Potentiometer B27) • Circuit problem still
HCU 09 –– Raise Limit Potentiometer Signal Circuit—Specification exists, GO TO 4.
Potentiometer turned fully clockwise:—
Voltage ......................................................................................... between 3.5 and 4.5 V NOT OK: If there was a
NOTE: Raise limit fully clockwise voltage must be at least 2 V more than the fully reading changed
counterclockwise voltage. There should be no beep or sudden change in voltage suddenly, replace the
through the full range of control movement. raise limit potentiometer

GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
245
3 Supply Voltage (Raise 3.1 Access Address HCU 13 and check display: OK: GO TO 3.2
HCU
Limit Potentiometer
22
B27) HCU 13 –– Potentiometer (B26 and B27) and Position Sensor (B21)— NOT OK: Check supply
also the power supply directly at the rockshaft control connector X14/1 (for Cab Group HCU.
Tractors) or X14/A (for 2-Post ROPS)
3.2 Supply voltage check at 8-pin-rockshaft control connector X14/1 (for Cab Tractors) OK: Check signal lead
or X14/A (for 2-Post ROPS): 876, GO TO 5.2.
Measure with multimeter between pin B (lead 873) and pin A (lead 871): NOT OK: Voltage reading
on multimeter is not
Raise Limit Potentiometer B27—Specification within specification, check
Power Supply:—Voltage .............................................................. between 4.8 and 5.2 V lead 873 and 871 for an
open circuit, GO TO 6.
– – –1/1
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address HCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the raise
(Raise Limit wires (for reference see: HCU Beep Mode Test, Section 245, Group HCU). limit potentiometer circuit
Potentiometer B27) for bad, loose, widened or
Raise Limit Potentiometer Circuit: corroded contacts.
❒ 8-pin-rockshaft control connector X14/1 (Cab Tractors) or X14/A (2-Post ROPS) and NOT OK: Repair as
X13 (HCU) at W4. needed and repeat this
❒ XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at W4. test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1002
HCU References
(Raise Limit of the dependent component. still 5 V, check signal lead
5.1 If the voltage reading is constantly 5 V, disconnect rockshaft control connector conductor, GO TO 5.2
X14/A or X14/1 and check the voltage in address HCU 09 again:
NOT OK: Replace the
5.2 OK: Check all connectors

Check signal lead 876: corroded contacts..
❒ for continuity. NOT OK: Repair as

❒ for a short to the ground. needed and repeat this
❒ for a short to another conductor. test.
Wiring Connections:
Raise/Limit Potentiometer Signal Lead 876

Section
X14/1 or X14/A Pin H X13 Pin E2 W4
(8-pin; rockshaft control) (HCU) SE15
245
HCU
23
– – –1/1
(Raise Limit ❒ for continuity. corroded contacts.
Potentiometer B27)
Raise Limit Potentiometer Supply Circuit 873 and 871 test.
(SE15) from to
(HCU)
(HCU)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1003
HCU References
Rate-of-Drop Control Potentiometer (B27) Signal Circuit Test
Related Service Code HCU 057. • Cab Wiring Harness W4, Section 240, Group 10.
AG,LX12234,628NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
HCU Test Procedure
24
NOTE: This procedure will test rate-of-drop Potentiometer circuitry, harness to HCU connection and potentiometer
– – –1/1
1 Slow Rate Access Address HCU 10. OK: GO TO 2.

(Rate-of-Drop
Potentiometer B27) SLOWLY turn the rate-of-drop potentiometer fully counterclockwise and check display: NOT OK: If there was a
HCU 10 –– Rate-of-Drop Potentiometer Signal Circuit—Specification reading changed
Potentiometer turned fully suddenly, replace the
counterclockwise:—Voltage ......................................................... between 0.5 and 1.5 V rate-of-drop potentiometer

GO TO 3.

5.1
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1004
HCU References
2 Fast Rate SLOWLY turn the rate-of-drop potentiometer fully clockwise and check display: OK: • Test completed.
(Rate-of-Drop
Potentiometer B27) HCU 10 –– Rate-of-Drop Potentiometer Signal Circuit—Specification • Circuit problem still
Potentiometer turned fully clockwise:— exists, GO TO 4.
NOTE: Fully clockwise voltage must be at least 2 V more than the fully “beep”, and/or the voltage
counterclockwise voltage. There should be no beep or sudden change in voltage reading changed
through the full range of control movement. suddenly, replace the
rate-of-drop potentiometer

GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
245
HCU
(Rate-of-Drop
25
also the power supply directly at the rockshaft control connector X14/1 (for Cab Group HCU.
Tractors) or X14/A (for 2-Post ROPS).
3.2 Supply voltage check at 8-pin rockshaft control connector X14/1 (for Cab Tractors) OK: Check signal lead,
or X14/A (for 2-Post ROPS). GO TO 5.2.
Measure with multimeter between pin B (lead 873) and pin A (Lead 871): NOT OK: Check lead 873
and 871 for an open
Rate-of-Drop Potentiometer B27—Specification circuit GO TO 6.
Power supply:—Voltage ............................................................... between 4.8 and 5.2 V
– – –1/1
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address HCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the
(Rate-of-Drop wires (for reference see: HCU Beep Mode Test, Section 245, Group HCU). rate-of-drop circuit for
Potentiometer B27) bad, loose, widened or
Rate-of-Drop Circuit: corroded contacts.
❒ 8-pin-rockshaft control connector X14/1 (Cab Tractors) or X14/A (2-Post ROPS) and NOT OK: Repair as
X13 (HCU) at W4. needed and repeat this
❒ XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at W4. test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1005
HCU References
(Rate-of-Drop of the dependent component. still 5 V, check signal lead
Potentiometer B27) for a short to another
5.1 If the voltage reading is constantly 5 V, disconnect rockshaft control connector conductor, GO TO 5.2
X14/A or X14/1 and check the voltage in address HCU 10 again:
NOT OK: Replace the

Rate of Drop Potentiometer Signal Lead 875

Section
X14/1 or X14/A Pin C X13 Pin E1 W4
(rockshaft control) (HCU) SE15
245
HCU
26
– – –1/1
(Rate-of-Drop ❒ for continuity. corroded contacts.
Potentiometer B27)
Rate-of-Drop Potentiometer Supply Circuit 873 and 871 test.
(SE15) from to
(HCU)
(HCU)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1006
HCU References
Remote Control Switch (S68) Circuit Test
Related Service Code HCU 058. ❒ Cab Tractors:

References for Circuitry Diagnostic: • Roof Wiring Harness W11, Section 240, Group
10.
NOTE: For component location and pin arrangement • SE15 - HCU Wiring Diagrams, Section 240,
see the corresponding wiring harness. Group 15.
For electrical troubleshooting see functional

and diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams.
AG,LX12234,629NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure HCU
27
NOTE: This procedure will test remote control switch circuitry (S68), harness to HCU connection and switch
– – –1/1
1 RAISING Circuit Access Address HCU 11. OK: Check remote

(Remote Control control switch
Switch S68) HCU 11 –– Remote Control Switch RAISING-Circuit—Specification LOWERING position, GO
Switch in neutral position:—Status ............................................................................. 001 TO 2.
Switch in raising position:—Status .............................................................................. 010
NOT OK: Check remote
control switch, GO TO 4.
– – –1/1
2 LOWERING Circuit Access Address HCU 12. OK: • Test completed.

(Remote Control
Switch S68) HCU 12 –– Remote Control Switch LOWERING-Circuit—Specification • Circuit problem still
Switch in neutral position:—Status ............................................................................. 001 exists, GO TO 3.
Switch in lowering position:—Status ........................................................................... 010
NOT OK: Check remote
control switch, GO TO 4.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1007
HCU References
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address HCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the remote
(Remote Control wires (for reference see: HCU Beep Mode Test, Section 245, Group HCU). control switch circuit for
Switch S68) bad, loose, widened or
Remote Control Switch Circuit: corroded contacts.
❒ X35 (l.h. remote switch S68) and X36 (connection to W4) at wiring harness W11. NOT OK: Repair as
❒ X36 (connection to W11) and X13 (HCU) at wiring harness W4. needed, and repeat this
❒ XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at wiring harness W4. test.
– – –1/1
4 Remote Control NOTE: The switch should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance or OK: GO TO 5.
Switch Test (Remote continuity checks.
Control Switch S68) NOT OK: Replace switch
Remote Control switch S68—Specification and repeat this test.
Neutral Position:—Switch status ..................... Closed between pin F (lead 823) and pin
E (lead 050)
Closed between pin A (lead 821) and pin
B (lead 050)
245 Raised Position:—Switch status ........................... Closed between pin D (lead 826) and
HCU pin E (lead 050)
28 Closed between pin A (lead 821) and pin
B (lead 050)
Lowered Position:—Switch status ......................... Closed between pin C (lead 824) and
pin B (lead 050)
Closed between pin F (lead 823) and pin
E (lead 050)
• For connector location and pin arrangement see W11 (Cab Tractors); for circuit
diagram see SE15.
– – –1/1
5 RAISING Circuit Access Address HCU 11. OK: Check lowering

Harness Test (Remote harness circuit, GO TO 6.
Control Switch S68) Check remote control switch RAISING-circuit at connector X35 (l.h. remote control
switch S68): NOT OK: GO TO 7.
HCU 11 –– Remote Control Switch (Harness Test)—Specification

RAISING-circuit:—Bypass pin E (lead
050) and pin F (lead 823) ................................................................. 001 (neutral Signal)
Bypass pin E (lead 050) and pin D (lead
826) ..................................................................................................... 010 (raising signal)
• For connector location and pin arrangement see W11; for circuit diagram see SE15.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1008
HCU References
6 LOWERING Circuit Access Address HCU 12 OK: Check all relevant

Harness Test (Remote connectors of the remote
Control Switch S68) Check remote control switch LOWERING-circuit at connector X35 (l.h. remote control control switch circuit for
switch S68): bad, loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
HCU 12 –– Remote Control Switch (Harness Test)—Specification
LOWERING-Circuit:—Bypass pin B (lead NOT OK: GO TO 8.
050) and pin A (lead 821) .................................................................. 001 (neutral signal)
Bypass pin E (lead 050) and pin C (lead
824) .................................................................................................. 010 (lowering signal)
• For connector location and pin arrangement see W11; for circuit diagram see SE15
– – –1/1
7 Lead 823; 826 and Check lead 823; 826: OK: Check all relevant
050 (Remote Control connectors of the HCU
Switch S68/RAISING ❒ for a short to the ground. remote control switch
Crcuit) ❒ for continuity. circuit for bad, loose,
❒ for a short to another conductor. widened or corroded
contacts.
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ for continuity. needed and repeat this 245
test. HCU
Remote Control Switch RAISING Circuit 823; 826 and 050 29
(SE15) From To From To
Lead 823 X13-Pin C2 X36-Pin B X36-Pin B X35-Pin F
(Neutral) (HCU) (connection to (connection to (l.h. remote
W11) W4) control)
Lead 826 X13-Pin C1 X36-Pin D X36-Pin D X35-Pin D
(Raising) (HCU) (connection to (connection to (l.h. remote
W11) W4) control)
Lead 050 XGND2 X36-Pin E X36-Pin E X35-Pin B and
(Ground) (electronic (connection to (connection to Pin E
ground) W11) W4) (l.h. remote
control)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1009
HCU References
8 Lead 821; 824 and Check lead 821 and 824: OK: Check all relevant
050 (Remote Control connectors of the HCU
Switch ❒ for a short to the ground. remote control switch
S68/LOWERING ❒ for continuity. circuit for bad, loose,
Circuit) ❒ for a short to another conductor. widened or corroded
contacts.
NOT OK: Repair as
test.
Remote Control Switch LOWERING Circuit 821; 824 and 050
(SE15) From To From To
821 X13-Pin D3 X36-Pin A X36-Pin A X35-Pin A
(Neutral) (HCU) (connection to (connection to (l.h. remote
W11) W4) control)
824 X13-Pin D2 X36-Pin C X36-Pin C X35-Pin C
(Lowering) (HCU) (connection to (connection to (l.h. remote
W11) W4) control)
050 XGND2 X36-Pin E X36-Pin E X35-Pin B and
(Ground) (electronic (connection to (connection to Pin E
ground) W11) W4) (l.h. remote
control)
245
HCU
30
– – –1/1
Potentiometer (B21, B26 and B27) Supply Voltage Circuit Test
Related to Service Code HCU 045. • Transmission Wiring Harness W13, Section 240,
Group 10.
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: • SE15 - HCU Wiring Diagrams, Section 240,
Group 15.
NOTE: For component location and pin arrangement
see the corresponding wiring harness. ❒ 2-Post ROPS Tractors:
and diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams. • Platform Wiring Harness W4 from serial number
AG,LX12234,630NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the 5V potentiometer supply circuitry (hitch control potentiometer B26 and B27 and
position sensor B21) and the harness to HCU connection.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1010
HCU References
1 Potentiometer B26 Ignition ON; Engine OFF. OK: • Test completed.

and B27 and position
sensor B21 Supply Access Address HCU 13 and check display: • Circuit problem still
Voltage exists, GO TO 2.
HCU 13 - Rockshaft Potentiometer (B26 and B27) and Position Sensor (B21)—
Specification NOT OK: No reading at
Power Supply:—Voltage .............................................................. between 4.8 and 5.2 V the display, GO TO 3.
NOT OK: Voltage not in

specification: Check lead
873 and 871, GO TO 4.
– – –1/1
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address HCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the
(Potentiometer B26 wires (for reference see: HCU Beep Mode Test, Section 245, Group HCU). potentiometer supply
and B27 and position circuit for bad, loose,
sensor B21 Supply Potentiometer Supply Circuit: widened or corroded
Voltage Circuit) contacts.
❒ Cab Tractors:
• X14/1 (8-pin; rockshaft control); X14/2 (3-pin; load/depth); X13 (HCU) and X03 NOT OK: Repair as
(connection to transmission harness W13) at cab harness W4. needed and repeat this 245
• X96 (position sensor) and X03/4 (connection to cab harness W4) at transmission test. HCU
harness W13. 31
• XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at harness W4.
❒ 2-Post ROPS tractors:

• X14/A (8-pin; rockshaft control); X14/B (3-pin; load/depth); X96 (position sensor)
and X13 (HCU) at platform harness W4.
– – –1/1
3 Potentiometer B26 NOTE: Each disconnected connector (with key switch ON) will create a Service Code OK: Display does not
and B27 and position of the dependent component. reappear, GO TO 4.
sensor B21 Supply
Voltage Circuit Test Disconnect each suspect connector one after the other and check the display at NOT OK: Repair as
address HCU 13. needed and repeat this
test.
If the voltage (4.8 - 5.5 V) reappears on the Address display, replace/repair the
corresponding wiring harness or component
Cab Tractors:
❒ X14/1 (8-pin; rockshaft control) and X14/2 (3-pin; load/depth) at cab harness W4.
❒ X96 (position sensor) at transmission harness W13.
2-Post ROPS tractors:
❒ X14/A (8-pin; rockshaft control) and X14/B (3-pin; load/depth) and X96 (position
sensor) at platform harness W4.
• For connector location and pin arrangement see W4 and W13 (only for Cab
Tractors); for circuit diagram see SE15.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1011
HCU References
4 Supply Lead 873 and Check ground lead 871: OK: Check all suspect
Ground Lead 871 - connectors for bad, loose,
(Potentiometer (B21, ❒ for continuity and high resistance. widened or corroded
B26 and B27) Supply contacts.
Voltage Circuit) Check supply lead 873:
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ for continuity and high resistance. needed and repeat this
❒ for a short to the ground. test.
Circuit 873 and 871 for Cab Tractors (with Splice Connections)
Supply Lead X13-Pin K3 X14/1-Pin B X14/2-Pin C X03-Pin H4
873 in W4 (HCU) (8-pin; (3-pin; (connection to
rockshaft load/depth) W13)
control)
Supply Lead X03/4-Pin H4 X96-Pin A
873 in W13 (connection to (position
W4) sensor)
Ground Lead X13-Pin B3 X14/1- Pin A X14/2-Pin A X03-Pin J8
871 in W4 (HCU) (8-pin; (3-pin; (connection to
rockshaft load/depth) W13)
control)
245 Ground Lead X03/4-Pin J8 X89-Pin C X90-Pin C X96-Pin C

HCU 871 in W13 (connection to (l.h. draft (RH Draft (position
32 W4) sensor) Sensor) sensor)
Circuit 873 and 871 for 2-Post ROPS (with Splice Connections)
Supply X13-Pin K3 X14/A-Pin X14/B-Pin X96-Pin A
Lead 873 in (HCU) B C (position
W4 (8-pin; (3-pin; sensor)
rockshaft load/depth)
control)
Ground X13-Pin B3 X14/1- Pin X14/2-Pin A X96-Pin C X287 - Pin
Lead 871 in (HCU) A (3-pin; (position K
W4 (8-pin; load/depth) sensor) (connection
rockshaft to W33)
control)
Ground X287 - Pin X89-Pin C X90-Pin C
Lead 871 in K (l.h. draft (RH Draft
W13 (connection sensor) Sensor)
to W4)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1012
HCU References
Draft Sensor (B19 and B20) Supply Voltage Circuit Test
Related to Service Code HCU 046. • SE15 - HCU Wiring Diagrams, Section 240,
Group 15.
References for Circuitry Diagnostic:
NOTE: For component location and pin arrangement • Platform Wiring Harness W4 up to serial number
see the corresponding wiring harness. 249394, Section 240, Group 10A.
and diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams. • Transmission Wiring Harness W33, Section 240,
Group 10A.
Group 10.
AG,LX12234,631NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure HCU
33
NOTE: This procedure will test the 8V draft sensor (B19 and B20) supply circuitry and the harness to HCU
connection.
– – –1/1
1 L.H. and R.H. Draft Access Address HCU 14 and check display: OK: • Test completed.
Sensor (B19 and B20)
Supply Voltage HCU 14 - L.H. and R.H. Draft Sensor—Specification • Circuit problem still
Power supply:—Voltage ............................................................... between 7.8 and 8.2 V exists, GO TO 2.
NOT OK: No reading at

the Address display, GO
TO 3.
NOT OK: Voltage not in

specification: Check lead
883 and 871, GO TO 4.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1013
HCU References
Connector Test (Draft connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address HCU 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the draft
Sensor (B19 and B20) wires (for reference see: HCU Beep Mode Test, Section 245, Group HCU). sensor supply circuit for
Supply Voltage bad, loose, widened or
Circuit) Draft Sensor Supply Circuit: corroded contacts.

• X89 (l.h. draft sensor); X90 (r.h. draft sensor); X03/4 (connection to W4) at needed and repeat this
transmission harness W13. test.
• X03 (connection to W13) and X13 (HCU) at cab harness W4.
• XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at cab harness W4.
❒ 2-Post ROPS:
• X89 (l.h. draft sensor); X90 (r.h. draft sensor) and X287 (connection to W4) at
transmission harness W33.
• X287 (connection to W33) and X13 (HCU) at platform harness W4.
• XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at platform harness W4.
– – –1/1
245
3 Draft Sensor (B19 and NOTE: Each disconnected connector (with key switch ON) will create a Service Code OK: Voltage does not
HCU
B20) Supply Voltage of the dependent component. reappear, GO TO 4.
34
Circuit Check
Disconnect each suspect connector at W13 one after the other and check the display NOT OK: Voltage does
in Address HCU 14: reappear: Repair as
If the specific voltage (7.8 - 8.2 V) reappears on the Address, repair/replace the test.
corresponding wiring harness or component.
Cab Tractors:
❒ X89 (draft sensor l.h.) at transmission harness W13.

❒ X90 (draft sensor r.h.) at transmission harness W13.
❒ X03/4 (connection to W4) at transmission harness W13.
2-Post ROPS:
❒ X89 (draft sensor l.h.) at transmission harness W33.

❒ X90 (draft sensor r.h.) at transmission harness W33.
❒ X287 (connection to W4) at transmission harness W33.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1014
HCU References
4 Check Supply Lead Check supply lead 883: OK: Check all connectors
883 and Ground Lead for bad, loose, widened or
871 - (Draft Sensor ❒ for continuity and high resistance. corroded contacts.
(B19 and B20) Supply ❒ for a short to the ground.
Voltage Circuit) ❒ for a short to another conductor. NOT OK: Repair as
Draft Sensor Supply Circuit 883

Cab Tractors
Circuit from to to
Supply lead 883 in X13-Pin K2 X03-Pin H6
W4 (HCU) (connection to
W13)
Supply lead 883 in X03/4-Pin H6 X89-Pin A X90-Pin A
W13 (connection to W4) (l.h. draft sensor) (r.h. draft sensor)
2-Post ROPS
Circuit from to to
Supply lead 883 in X13-Pin K2 X287-Pin H
W4 (HCU) (connection to W4)
Supply lead 883 in X287-Pin H X89-Pin A X90-Pin A 245
W13 (connection to W4) (l.h. draft sensor) (r.h. draft sensor) HCU
Draft Sensor Ground Circuit 871 35
Cab tractors
Ground X13-Pin B3 X14/1- Pin X14/2-Pin A X03-Pin J8
Lead 871 in (HCU) A (3-pin; (connection
W4 (8-pin; load/depth) to W13)
rockshaft
control)
Ground X03/4-Pin X89-Pin C X90-Pin C X96-Pin C
Lead 871 in J8 (L.H. Draft) (RH Draft (position
W13 (connection Sensor) sensor)
to W4
2-Post ROPS
Ground X13-Pin B3 X14/1- Pin X14/2-Pin A X96-Pin C X287 - Pin
Lead 871 in (HCU) A (3-pin; (position K
W4 (8-pin; load/depth) sensor) (connection
rockshaft to W33)
control)
Ground X287 - Pin X89-Pin C X90-Pin C
Lead 871 in K (l.h. draft (RH Draft
W33 (connection sensor) Sensor)
to W4)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1015
HCU References
Stepper Motor (M08) Circuit Test
Related to Service Code HCU 041 and/or 042; 043; • Transmission Wiring Harness W13, Section 240,
044. Group 10.
AG,LX12234,632NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
HCU Test Procedure
36
NOTE: This procedure will test HCU stepper motor (M08) circuitry, harness to HCU connection and stepper motor
– – –1/1
1 Stepper Motor (M08) NOTE: Address 16 contains blank (deadband) steps. If a calculated digit appears at OK: • Test completed.
Circuit address 16, the HCU has routed a signal to the stepper motor. This does not mean
the stepper motor has reacted to the instruction! • Circuit problem still
exists, GO TO 3.
Stepper motor position calculated in steps (“XX” is the number of steps) - Lead
854/855 and 858/859. OK: No Service Code
was stored: Test
Start engine. completed.
Access Address HCU 16 and operate rockshaft with hitch control or Quick/Raise Lower NOT OK: GO TO 2.
switch S24:
HCU 16 –– Stepper Motor (M08) Circuit (Calculated Stepper Motor Steps)—

Specification
Hitch not ACTIVATED:—Status .................................................................................. 000
Hitch RAISED:—Status ............................................................................................... 1XX
Hitch LOWERED:—Status .......................................................................................... 2XX
NOTE: Hitch operated with Quick/Raise Lower switch will display the maximum Raise
and Lower values in Address HCU 16.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1016
HCU References
2 Stepper Motor (M08) NOTE: The stepper motor should be removed from the circuit prior to performing OK: GO TO 3.
Test resistance or continuity checks.
NOT OK: Replace
To test the stepper motor for shorted or open circuit, check continuity between stepper stepper motor and
motor terminals: calibrate HCU (see “HCU
Stepper Motor Circuit—Specification Section 270, Group 15).
between pin A (lead 859 / PH1+) and
pin B (lead 858 / PH1-).—Resistance ........................................................... 1.0 -2.0 ohm
between pin C (lead 855 / PH2+) and
pin D (lead 854 / PH2-).—Resistance .......................................................... 1.0 -2.0 ohm
• For connector location and pin arrangement see W4 for 2-Post ROPS or W13 for
Cab Tractors, for circuit diagram see SE15.
– – –1/1
3 General Harness Test Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: GO TO 4.
(Stepper Motor (M08) connections. Check all relevant connectors of the stepper motor circuit for bad, loose,
Circuit) widened or corroded contacts. NOT OK: Repair as
Stepper Motor Circuit: test.
❒ Cab Tractors:
• X92 (stepper motor) and X03/4 (connection to W4) at transmission harness W13.
• X03 (connection to W13) and X13 (HCU) at cab harness W4. 245
• XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at cab harness W4. HCU
37
❒ 2-Post ROPS tractors:
• X92 (stepper motor) and X13 (HCU) at platform harness W4.
• XGND2 (HCU ground connection) at platform harness W4.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1017
HCU References
4 Leads 854 (PH2-), 855 4.1 OK: Check all connectors

(PH2+), 858 (PH1-) for bad, loose, widened or
and 859 (PH1+) Disconnect stepper motor connector X92 (W13). corroded contacts.
Check lead 854 (PH2-) (X92-Pin D): NOT OK: Repair as

❒ for a short to lead 855 (X92-Pin C) test.
❒ for a short to lead 858 (X92-Pin B)
❒ for a short to lead 859 (X92-Pin A)
Check lead 855 (PH2+) (X92-Pin C):
❒ for a short to lead 858 (X92-Pin B)

Check lead 858 (PH1-) (X92-Pin B):
Check lead 859 (PH1+) (X92-Pin A) and lead 855 (PH2+) (X92-Pin C):
Check leads 854 (PH2-), 855 (PH2+), 858 (PH1-) and 859 (PH1+):
245 ❒ for continuity and high resistance.

HCU
38 Stepper Motor Circuit 854/855 and 858/859 for Cab Tractors
Lead 859 X92-Pin A X03/4-Pin J4 X03-Pin J4 X13-Pin A1
(PH1+) (stepper (connection to (connection to (HCU)
motor) W4) W13)
Lead 858 X92-Pin B X03/4-Pin J5 X03-Pin J5 X13-Pin B1
(PH1-) (stepper (connection to (connection to (HCU)
motor) W4) W13)
Lead 855 X92-Pin C X03/4-Pin J2 X03-Pin J2 X13-Pin J1
(PH2+) (stepper (connection to (connection to (HCU)
motor) W4) W13)
Lead 854 X92-Pin D X03/4-Pin J3 X03-Pin J3 X13-Pin K1
(PH2-) (stepper (connection to (connection to (HCU)
motor) W4) W13)
Stepper Motor Circuit 854/855 and 858/859 for 2-Post ROPS tractors
(SE15) from to
Lead 859 X92-Pin A X13-Pin A1
(PH1+) (stepper motor) (HCU)
Lead 858 X92-Pin B X13-Pin B1
(PH1-) (stepper motor) (HCU)
Lead 855 X92-Pin C X13-Pin J1
(PH2+) (stepper motor) (HCU)
Lead 854 X92-Pin D X13-Pin K1
(PH2-) (stepper motor) (HCU)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1018
HCU References
HCU Power Supply Circuit Test
Related Service Code HCU 022. • SE15 - HCU Wiring Diagrams, Section 240,
Group 15.
NOTE: For component location and pin arrangement • Platform Wiring Harness W4 up to serial number
see the corresponding wiring harness. 249394, Section 240, Group 10A.
and diagnostic schematic at wiring diagrams. • Instrument Unit Wiring Diagrams (SE2), Section
240, Group 15A.
AG,LX12234,633NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure HCU
39
NOTE: This procedure will test HCU and tractor power supply circuitry.
– – –1/1
1 HCU — System Access Address HCU 18 and check display: OK: • Test completed.
Voltage
HCU 18 –– HCU Power Supply—Specification • Circuit problem still
Ignition ON:—Voltage ............................................................... between 11.2 and 12.7 V exists, GO TO 3.
Engine RUNNING:—Voltage .................................................... between 13.2 and 15.5 V
NOT OK: GO TO 2.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1019
HCU References
2 General Voltage 2.1 –– Preliminary Check OK: GO TO 2.2

Check
Perform a visual inspection of the battery, the alternator and the drive belt. NOT OK: Repair as
❒ Check for visual signs of damage. test.
❒ Ensure that the belt tensioner and the belt are correctly installed, check for signs of
slipping.
❒ Check the electrical connections for bad, loose, widened or corroded contacts.
❒ Check ground connections between battery/engine and cab.
LX1024134 –UN–09JUN00
245
HCU • Check mounting surfaces for corrosion / paint and loose mounting bolts.
40
2.2 –– Component Check OK: Check HCU power
supply circuit; GO TO 3.
• Check alternator, see reference “Alternator Checks”, Section 240, Group 25.
NOT OK: Repair as
• Check battery: see reference “Battery Checks”, Section 240, Group 25. needed and repeat this
test.
• Check alternator belt.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1020
HCU References
3 HCU Power Supply 3.1 OK: Check all connectors

and Ground Circuit for bad, loose, widened or
Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground corroded contacts.
connections. Check all relevant connectors of the HCU and Diagnose-Mode circuit for
bad, loose, widened or corroded contacts. NOT OK: Repair as
3.2 test.
Check Power Supply circuit leads:
Circuit 856 and 050 for Cab Tractors

Circuit from to to
Supply Lead 856 F 116-Pin A X13-Pin A2 X29-Pin A
(HCU) (service connector)
GroundLead 050 X13-Pin A3 XGND2
(HCU) (electronic ground connection, located
close to HCU connector X13)
Circuit 856 and 050 for 2-Post ROPS
Supply Lead F 117-Pin A F 115-Pin E X13-Pin A2 X29-Pin A
856 (CAL-fuse) (HCU) (service
connector) 245
HCU
GroundLead X13-Pin A3 XGND2
41
050 (HCU) (electronic ground connection, located close to
HCU connector X13)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1021
HCU References
245
HCU
42

111401
PN=1022
Group PEC
PEC References
PEC Beep Mode Test (PEC 02 and PEC 03)
Address 02 “BEEP” Mode The system diagnostic (“BEEP”) mode (Address PEC
03) is identical to Address PEC 02 (BEEP) mode
The system diagnostic (“BEEP”) mode (Address PEC except that the speed inputs are ignored and no
02) can help the technician with diagnosis in two ways. diagnostic is available for the range box speed (rpm) in
It can be used to: Address PEC 013. This gives the technician the option
of “turning off” the speed inputs by using Address PEC
• “verify” operation of devices that are part of the 03 or turning them on by using address PEC 02.
control unit circuits.
• help find device information, harness and connector The following diagnostic addresses support the
problems. diagnostic (“beep”) mode:
Whenever a “change of state” is detected, the warning • PEC 04 — Upshift Signal / Downshift Signal / Power
horn will “beep” to inform the technician of the change. Mode.
• PEC 05 — Signal Voltage at Position Sensor.
NOTE: A “change of state” would be a switch going
from open to closed or closed to open. Also, • PEC 06 –– Transport Lock Switch (E-ICV).
by moving a potentiometer type control slowly
through it’s operation range, a break or “bad • PEC 07 –– Interlock Switch (E-ICV).
spot” in the potentiometer can be detected in 245
the same way. • PEC 10 –– Paddle Switches for Axis 1, 2 and 3 PEC
1
(E-ICV).
The audible signal can be used to verify that a switch
is changing state when it is activated (or is not • PEC 13 –– Range Box Speed in rpm.
changing state when it should be, if there is no
“beep”). • PEC 21 –– Potentiometer Signal Voltage of Axis 1
(E-ICV).
It can also be used to check for connector and
harness defects by moving/tugging on harness or • PEC 22 –– Potentiometer Signal Voltage of Axis 2
connectors while in the “beep” mode. If a “beep” is (E-ICV).
circuit that caused the “beep”. • PEC 23 –– Potentiometer Signal Voltage of Axis 3
(E-ICV).
The circuit address number can then be accessed
(using the turn signal switch) to check the operation of • PEC 30 –– Potentiometer Supply Voltage (E-ICV).
the circuit device, using the “on-board” diagnostic
feature. • PEC 32 –– PEC Power Supply.
Address 03 “BEEP” Mode
AG,LX12234,453NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-PEC-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1023
PEC References
Upshift Circuit (S48) Test
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. – SE21A, Section 240, Group 15.
AG,LX25546,406NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the upshift switch S48, rocker switch S81, supply circuit (lead 572) and
output circuit (lead 581).
– – –1/1
245
1 Upshift Switch (S48) Access Address PEC 04. OK: No Service Code
PEC
and Rocker Switch was stored: Test
2
(S81) Circuit Check Upshift Switch Signal—Specification completed.
PEC 04 - First digit (hundreds
position)—Upshift switch S48 or rocker OK: Service Code PEC
upshift switch S81 not pressed ................................................................................... 0XX 070 was stored, GO
PEC 04 - First digit (hundreds TO 2.
position)—Upshift switch S48 or rocker
upshift switch S81 depressed ..................................................................................... 1XX NOT OK: GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at address PEC 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the upshift
wires (see reference PEC Beep Mode Test (PEC 02 and PEC 03), Section 245, Group switch circuit for bad,
PEC). loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
• X249 (contains X249/1 and 249/2) and X222 (W4; SE21A)
• X222 and X221 (W34; SE21A) IF OK: Delete Service
Code and carry out an
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4 and W34; for circuit diagram see operational test.
SE21A.
NOT OK: Repair as
operational test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1024
PEC References
3 Check Upshift Switch Disconnect X249/1 (W4; SE21A). OK: Check harness, GO
and Rocker Switch TO 4.
Ignition OFF.
NOT OK: Replace range
Upshift Switch (S48) Test—Specification lever (contains upshift
Measure continuity between pin C and switch S48) or rocker
pin B at X249—Upshift switch S48 not switch S81 and repeat
pressed ............................................................................................ OPEN - no continuity this test.
Measure continuity between pin C and
pin B at X249—Upshift switch S48
depressed ........................................................................................ CLOSED - Continuity
Reconnect X249/1 and disconnect X249/2 (W4; SE21A).
Ignition OFF.
Rocker Switch (S81) Test—Specification

pin B at X249—Rocker upshift switch
S81 not pressed ............................................................................. OPEN - No continuity
pin B at X249—Rocker upshift switch
S81 depressed ................................................................................ CLOSED - Continuity
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for circuit diagram see SE21A.
245
PEC
3
– – –1/1
4 Check Upshift Output 4.1 OK: GO TO 5.

Signal
Disconnect X249/1 and X249/2 (W4; SE21A). NOT OK: Display shows
1XX, GO TO 4.2.
Access Address PEC 04.
PEC 04 - Upshift Output Signal Circuit Check—Specification

position)—X249/1 and X249/2
disconnected - no output signal .................................................................................. 0XX
4.2 OK: Short to a supply

lead in adapter wiring
Disconnect additional X249 (W4; SE21A). harness (X249, X249/1
and X249/2). Repair as
Access Address PEC 04. needed and repeat this
test.
PEC 04 - Upshift Output Signal Circuit Check—Specification
PEC 04 - First digit (hundreds NOT OK: Display shows
position)—X249 disconnected - no 1XX, check output lead
output signal ................................................................................................................ 0XX 581 for a short to another
conducter. GO TO 7.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1025
PEC References
5 Check Upshift Output 5.1 OK: Check all relevant

Signal (Lead 581) connectors of upshift
Access Address PEC 04. switch circuit for bad and
loose contacts.
Bypass pin C (lead 572) and pin B (lead 581) at X249.
PEC 04 - Upshift Switch Signal—Specification 0XX, GO TO 5.2.
position)—X249 pin C and pin B
bypassed ..................................................................................................................... 1XX
5.2 OK: Check upshift signal

lead 581. GO TO 7.
Power supply check:
NOT OK: Check fuse
Ignition ON. F211.
Power Supply for Upshift Switch and Rocker Switch—Specification IF OK: Fuse F211 is OK.
Measure voltage between pin C at X249 Check supply lead 572,
and an appropriate ground connection— GO TO 6.
Voltage ......................................................................................................... approx. 12 V
245
PEC
4
– – –1/1
6 Check Supply Lead Ignition OFF. OK: Perform Supply

572 Circuit 973 (BCU
Check Supply Lead 572: Functions) check, see
Section 245, Group BCU.
NOT OK: Repair as
Wiring harness: needed and repeat this
test.
Upshift Switch and Rocker Switch Supply Lead Check
Circuit from to
Supply Lead 572 in W4 Fuse F211 Pin A X249 Pin C (Upshift and
Rocker Switch adapter
wiring harness)
Supply Lead 072 in W4 Fuse F211 Pin E K101 Pin 87 (ELX Relay)
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for circuit diagram see SE1 and
SE21A.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1026
PEC References
7 Check Upshift Output Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Signal (Lead 581) connectors of the upshift
Check Upshift Output Lead 581: switch circuit for bad and
loose contacts.
• for a short to supply lead 572
• for a short to another conductor IF OK: Delete Service
• for a short to ground Code PEC 070. If Service
• for continuity and high resistance Code reappears and no
other PEC Service Codes
Wiring harness: are stored, replace PEC
Controller and calibrate
Upshift Output Lead Check new Controller.
Circuit from to
NOT OK: Repair as
Output Lead 581 in W4 X249 Pin B (adapter X222 Pin J4 (connection needed and repeat test.
wiring harness to W34)
connection)
Output Lead 581 in W34 X222 Pin J4 (connection X221 Pin 13 (PEC
SE21A.
– – –1/1
245
Downshift Circuit (S49) Test PEC
5
AG,LX25546,407NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the downshift switch S49, rocker switch S81, supply circuit (lead 572)
and output circuit (output lead 583).
– – –1/1
1 Downshift Switch and Access Address PEC 04. OK: No Service Code
Rocker Switch Circuit was stored: Diagnostic
Check Downshift Switch Signal—Specification completed.
PEC 04 - Second digit (tens position)—
Downshift switch S49 or rocker switch OK: Service Code PEC
S81 not pressed .......................................................................................................... X0X 070 was stored, GO
PEC 04 - Second digit (tens position)— TO 2.
Downshift switch S49 or rocker switch
S81 depressed ............................................................................................................ X1X NOT OK: GO TO 3.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1027
PEC References
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at address PEC 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the
wires (see reference PEC Beep Mode Test (PEC 02 and PEC 03), Section 245, Group downshift switch circuit
PEC). for bad, loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
• X249 (contains X249/1 and 249/2) and X222 (W4; SE21A)
• X222 and X221 (W34; SE21A) IF OK: Delete Service
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4 and W34; for circuit diagram see operational test.
SE21A.
NOT OK: Repair as
operational test.
– – –1/1
3 Check Downshift Disconnect X249/1 (W4; SE21A). OK: Check harness, GO

Switch and Rocker TO 4.
Switch Ignition OFF.
NOT OK: Replace Range
Downshift Switch S49 Check—Specification Lever (contains Downshift
Measure continuity between pin C and Switch S49) or Rocker
pin A at X249—Downshift switch S49 Switch S81 and repeat
not pressed ...................................................................................... OPEN - no continuity this test.
245 Measure continuity between pin C and
PEC pin A at X249—Downshift switch S49
6 depressed ........................................................................................ CLOSED - Continuity
Reconnect X249/1 and disconnect X249/2 (W4; SE21A).
Ignition OFF.
Rocker Switch S81 Check—Specification

pin A at X249—Rocker downshift switch
S81 not pressed ............................................................................. OPEN - No continuity
pin A at X249—Rocker downshift switch
S81 depressed ................................................................................ CLOSED - Continuity
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1028
PEC References
4 Check Downshift 4.1 OK: GO TO 5.

Output Signal
Disconnect X249/1 and X249/2 (W4; SE21A). NOT OK: Display shows
X1X, GO TO 4.2.
PEC 04 - Downshift Output Signal Circuit Check—Specification

X249/1 and X249/2 disconnected - no
output signal ................................................................................................................ X0X
4.2 OK: Short to a supply

lead in adapter wiring
Disconnect additional X249 (W4; SE21A). harness (X249, X249/1
and X249/2). Repair as
Access Address PEC 04. needed and repeat this
test.
PEC 04 - Downshift Output Signal Circuit Check—Specification
PEC 04 - Second digit (tens position)— NOT OK: Display shows
X249 disconnected - no output signal ........................................................................ X0X X1X, check output lead
583 for a short to another
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for circuit diagram see SE21A. conducter. GO TO 7.
245
PEC
7
– – –1/1
5 Check Downshift 5.1 OK: Check all relevant

Output Signal (Lead connectors of downshift
583) Access Address PEC 04. switch circuit for bad and
loose contacts.
Bypass pin C (lead 572) and pin A (lead 583) at X249.
PEC 04 - Downshift Switch Signal—Specification X0X, GO TO 5.2.
X249 pin C and pin A bypassed ................................................................................. X1X
5.2 OK: Check downshift

signal lead 583. GO TO
Power supply check: 7.
Ignition ON. NOT OK: Check fuse

F211.
Power Supply for Downshift Switch and Rocker Switch—Specification
Measure voltage between pin C at X249 IF OK: Fuse F211 is OK.
and an appropriate ground connection— Check supply lead 572,
Voltage ......................................................................................................... approx. 12 V GO TO 6.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1029
PEC References
6 Check Supply Lead Ignition OFF. OK: Perform Supply

572 Circuit 973 (BCU
Check Supply Lead 572: Functions) check, see
NOT OK: Repair as
test.
Downshift Switch and Rocker Switch Supply Lead Check
Circuit from to
Supply Lead 572 in W4 Fuse F211 Pin A X249 Pin C (Downshift
and Rocker Switch
adapter wiring harness)
SE21A.
– – –1/1
245
7 Check Downshift Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant
PEC
Output Signal (Lead connectors of the
8
583) Check Downshift Output Lead 583: downshift switch circuit
for bad and loose
• for a short to supply lead 572 contacts.
• for a short to ground IF OK: Delete Service
• for continuity and high resistance Code PEC 070. If Service
Code reappears and no
Wiring harness: other PEC Service Codes
are stored, replace PEC
Downshift Output Lead Check Controller and calibrate
Circuit from to new Controller.
Output Lead 583 In W4 X249 Pin A (adapter X222 Pin J5 (connection NOT OK: Repair as
wiring harness to W34) needed and repeat test.
connection)
Output Lead 583 in W34 X222 Pin J5 (connection X221 Pin 36 (PEC
SE21A.
– – –1/1
Power/ECO Mode Switch (S85) Circuit Test
AG,LX25546,408NA –19–01JAN01–1/1

111401
PN=1030
PEC References
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the Power/ECO-Mode switch S85, supply circuit (lead 572) and output
circuit (lead 585 and 593).
– – –1/1
1 Check Power Mode Access Address PEC 04. OK: GO TO 2.

Switch Circuit (S85)
PEC 04 - Power Mode Circuit Test—Specification NOT OK: GO TO 4.
Switch S85 is in neutral position—
Power-Mode switch S85 not pressed ......................................................................... XX0
Switch S85 is in Power Mode position—
Power-Mode switch S85 depressed ........................................................................... XX1
– – –1/1
245
2 Check ECO Mode Access Address PEC 05. OK: No Service Codes
PEC
Switch Circuit (S85) are stored: Test
9
PEC 05 - ECO Mode Circuit Test—Specification completed.
Switch S85 is in neutral position—
ECO-Mode switch S85 not pressed ............................................................................ X0X OK: Service Code PEC
Switch S85 is in ECO Mode position— 071 was stored, GO
ECO-Mode switch S85 depressed .............................................................................. X1X TO 3.
NOT OK: GO TO 4.
– – –1/1
Connector Test connections. Access Beep-Mode at address PEC 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors of the
wires (see reference PEC Beep Mode Test (PEC 02 and PEC 03), Section 245, Group Power/ECO-Mode switch
PEC). circuit for bad, loose,
widened or corroded
• X244 and X222 (W4; SE21A) contacts.
• X222 and X221 (W34; SE21A)
IF OK: Delete Service
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4 and W34; for circuit diagram see Code and carry out an
SE21A. operational test.
NOT OK: Repair as

operational test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1031
PEC References
4 Check Power/ECO Ignition OFF. OK: Check harness, GO

Mode Switch TO 5.
Disconnect X244 (W4; SE21A).
NOT OK: Replace
Power Mode Switch Test—Specification defective Power/ECO
Measure continuity between pin B and Mode switch and repeat
pin C at X244—Press Power-Mode this test.
switch ................................................................................... Switch CLOSED - Continuity
Measure continuity between pin B and
pin C at X244—Power-Mode switch not
pressed ................................................................................ Switch OPEN - No continuity
ECO Mode Switch Test—Specification

pin A at X244—Press ECO-Mode switch ........................... Switch CLOSED - Continuity
pin A at X244—ECO-Mode switch not
pressed ................................................................................ Switch OPEN - No continuity
– – –1/1
245
5 Check Power/ECO 5.1 OK: GO TO 5.2.
PEC
Mode Switch Harness
10
Disconnect X244. NOT OK: Display shows
XX1, check lead 585 for a
Access Address PEC 04. short to another
conductor. GO TO 8.
PEC 04 - Power Mode Switch Circuit Test—Specification
Switch S85 is in neutral position—No
Power-Mode output signal - signal
interrupted ................................................................................................................... XX0
5.2 OK: GO TO 6.
Disconnect X244. NOT OK: Display shows

X1X, check lead 593 for a
Access Address PEC 05. short to another
conductor. GO TO 8.
PEC 05 - ECO Mode Switch Circuit Test—Specification
Switch S85 is in neutral position—No
ECO-Mode output signal - signal
interrupted ................................................................................................................... X0X
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1032
PEC References
6 Check Power/ECO 6.1 OK: Check all relevant

Mode Switch Supply connectors of the
and Output Circuit Ignition ON. Power/ECO Mode Switch
circuit for bad and loose
Bypass pin B and pin C at connector X244 (W4; SE21A): contacts.
PEC 04 - Power Mode Output Circuit Test—Specification NOT OK: GO TO 6.2

Bypass pin B and pin C at X244—
Power-Mode switch S85 output circuit ........................................................................ XX1
Bypass pin B and pin A at connector X244 (W4; SE21A):
PEC 05 - ECO Mode Output Circuit Test—Specification

Bypass pin B and pin A at X244—
ECO-Mode switch S85 output circuit .......................................................................... X1X
6.2 OK: Check signal leads

585 and 593, GO TO 8.
Power supply check:
NOT OK: Check Fuse
Disconnect X244 (W4; SE21A). F211.
Ignition ON. IF OK: Fuse F211 is OK.

245
Check supply lead 572,
PEC
Power Supply for Power/ECO Mode Switch—Specification GO TO 7.
11
Measure between pin B at X244 and an
appropriate ground connection—Voltage ..................................................... approx. 12 V
– – –1/1
7 Check Power/ECO Ignition OFF. OK: Perform Supply

Mode Switch Supply Circuit 973 (BCU
Circuit Check Supply Lead 572: Functions) check, see
NOT OK: Repair as
test.
Power/ECO Mode Switch Supply Circuit
Circuit from to
Supply Lead 572 in W4 Fuse F211 Pin A X244 Pin B (Power/ECO
Mode Switch)
SE21A.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1033
PEC References
8 Check Power/ECO Power Mode Output: OK: Check all relevant

Mode Output Circuit connectors of the
Ignition OFF. Power/ECO-Mode switch
circuit for bad and loose
Check output lead 585: contacts.
• for continuity IF OK: Delete Service

• for a short to ground Code PEC 071 and carry
• for a short to lead 572 or for a short to another conductor out an operational test. If
Service Code reappears
ECO Mode Output: and no other PEC
Ignition OFF. replace PEC Controller
and calibrate new
Check output lead 593: Controller.
• for continuity NOT OK: Repair as

• for a short to ground needed and repeat this
• for a short to lead 572 or for a short to another conductor test.
Wiring connections:
Power Mode Output Lead 585 Test

Circuit from to
Output Lead 585 in W4 X244 Pin C (Power/ECO X222 Pin J6 (connection
245
Mode Switch) to W34)
PEC
12 Output Lead 585 in W34 X222 Pin J6 (connection X221 Pin 11 (PEC
ECO Mode Output Lead 593 Test
Circuit from to
Output Lead 593 in W4 X244 Pin A (Power/ECO X222 Pin B1 (connection
Mode Switch) to W34)
Output Lead 593 in W34 X222 Pin B1 (connection X221 Pin 31 (PEC
SE21A.
– – –1/1
Stepper Motor Driver (SMD0) Power Supply and Identification Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – SE21A, Section 240, Group 15.

– SE21B –– E-ICV Control, Section 240, Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – SE21D –– AutoQuad II Stepper Motor Driver and
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. Stepper Motor, Section 240, Group 15.
– “Stepper Motor Driver wiring harness W35”,
AG,LX25546,423NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the supply circuit (lead 349/260) and ground circuit (lead 310) for the
stepper motor driver A13.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1034
PEC References
1 SMD0 Supply Voltage • Check fuse F205 (Relay K203 coil circuit; SE21A). OK: GO TO 2.
- Preliminary Checks • Check fuse F204 (SMD0 - supply circuit; SE21D).
• Relay K203 (SE21B). NOT OK: Repair as
For circuit diagram see SE21A, SE21B and SE21D. operational test.
– – –1/1
2 Check Supply Voltage IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the stepper motor drivers with IGNITION–– ON. OK: Test completed.
for SMD0 (A13)
IMPORTANT: Connect multimeter with IGNITION––OFF. NOT OK: GO TO 3.
IMPORTANT: Carry out measurement with IGNITION–– ON
Disconnect SMD0 connector X256 and check for bad,

loose, widened or corroded contacts.
Measure with multimeter voltage:
SMD0 –– Supply Voltage—Specification

Between pin C1 (lead
255) and pin D1 (lead
310):—Voltage ........................................................... 12 V
For connector location and pin arrangement see W35;

for circuit diagram see SE21D.
245
PEC
13
LX1022671 –UN–01APR99
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1035
PEC References
3 Check Supply Circuit Ignition OFF. OK: Check all connectors

of the power supply and
Check Supply Lead 349/260: identification circuit for
• for a short to ground corroded contacts.
• for continuity
NOT OK: Repair as
Check Ground Lead 310: needed and carry out an
operational test.
• for continuity
Wiring harness:
Supply Circuit 349/260 Check

Circuit from to to
Supply Lead 349 SMD Relay K203 Fuse F204 Pin E Fuse F203 Pin E
in W4 Pin 87
Supply Lead 260 Fuse F204 Pin A X232 Pin F
in W4 (connection to
W35)
Supply Lead 260 X232 Pin F X256 Pin C1 (SMD
in W35 (connection to W4) A13 connector)
Ground Circuit 310
245 Ground Circuit 310 in W4
PEC
from to to to to
14
XGND5 X232 - Pin G
(Ground (Connection to
Connection) W35)
Ground Circuit 310 in W35
from to to to to
X232 - Pin G X253 (A10 - X254 (A11 - X255 (A12 - X256 (A13 -
(Connection to SMD1): SMD2): SMD3): SMD0)
W4) • Pin D1 • Pin D1 • Pin D1 • Pin D1
• Pin A2 • Pin A2 • Pin A2 • Pin A2
• Pin B3 • Pin A3 • Pin C3 • Pin A3
• Pin C3 • Pin C3 • Pin B3
• Pin C3
(SE21D)
SE21B and SE21D.
– – –1/1
Stepper Motor (M15) and Stepper Motor Driver (SMD0) Circuit Test
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – SE21D –– AutoQuad II Stepper Motor Driver and
– “Stepper Motor Driver wiring harness W35”, Stepper Motor, Section 240, Group 15.
AG,LX25546,424NA –19–01JAN01–1/1

111401
PN=1036
PEC References
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the stepper motor (M15), stepper motor switch circuit (lead 899 and
874) and the wiring harness for stepper motor (lead 895 up to lead 898).
– – –1/1
1 Check Stepper Motor Disconnect X256 (W35; SE21D) at SMD0 (A13). OK: Service Code PEC
Resistance at SMD0 129 or PEC 133 is stored,
Connector Stepper Motor (M15) Resistance Check at X256— GO TO 2.
Specification
Measure resistance OK: Service Code PEC
between pin A1 and pin 132 is stored, GO TO 6.
B1 at X256—Resistance ........ between 0.3 and 0.4 Ohm
Measure resistance NOT OK: GO TO 3.
between pin E1 and pin
F1 at X256—Resistance ......... between 0.3 and 0.4 Ohm
NOTE: Wait during measurement until a stable Ohm

value will appear at the multimeter.
Value will fluctuate at the beginning of the measurement.

for circuit diagram see SE21D. 245
PEC
LX1022671 –UN–01APR99
15
– – –1/1
2 Check Stepper Motor Check the wires and pins for loose connections at X256. OK: GO TO 5.
Driver (SMD A13) The following pins (leads) are relevant:
Connector X256 NOT OK: Repair as
• CAN-BUS Connection at X256: needed and carry out an
– Pin-E2 (lead 942) operational test.
– Pin-E3 (lead 945)
– Pin-D2 (lead 940)
• SMD0 - Identification Address Pins at X256:
– Pin-A3 (lead 310)
– Pin-A2 (lead 310)
– Pin-B3 (lead 310)
– Pin-C3 (lead 310)
• SMD0 - Power Supply Leads at X256:
– Pin-C1 (lead 255)
LX1022671 –UN–01APR99
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1037
PEC References
3 Check Resistance at Reconnect X256 and disconnect X257 (W35; SE21D) at OK: Check harness, GO
Stepper Motor stepper motor (M15). TO 4.
Connector
Stepper Motor (M15) Resistance Check at X257— NOT OK: Replace
Specification stepper motor M15 and
Measure resistance adjust new stepper motor,
between pin C and pin D see reference “Adjusting
at X257—Resistance .............. between 0.3 and 0.4 Ohm the stepper motor”
Measure resistance (Repair Manual, Section
between pin B and pin E 55, Group 10).
at X257—Resistance .............. between 0.3 and 0.4 Ohm
NOTE: Wait during measurement until a stable Ohm

value will appear at the multimeter.
Value will fluctuate at the beginning of the measurement.
LX1024124 –UN–18MAY00 For connector location and pin arrangement see W35;
– – –1/1
245
4 Check Leads 895, Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant
PEC
896, 897 and 898 • Check lead 898: (X257-pin E) connectors of the stepper
16
❒ for a short to lead 897 (X257-Pin B) motor circuit for bad,
❒ for a short to lead 896 (X257-Pin D) loose, widened or
❒ for a short to lead 895 (X257-Pin C) corroded contacts.
• Check lead 897: (X257-Pin B) NOT OK: Repair as

❒ for a short to lead 896 (X257-Pin D) needed and repeat test.
❒ for a short to lead 895 (X257-Pin C)
• Check lead 896: (X257-Pin D)

❒ for a short to lead 895 (X257-Pin C)
• Check lead 898, 897, 896 and 895 for continuity.

• Check lead 896 and 898 for a short to ground.
Wiring connection:
LX1024125 –UN–18MAY00
Circuit 898; 897; 896 and 895 in W35 (SE21D)
Circuit from to
Circuit 895 X257 - Pin C X256-Pin A1
(PH1-) (Stepper motor) (Stepper Motor
Driver SMD0)
Circuit 896 X257 - Pin D X256-Pin B1
(PH1+) (Stepper motor) (Stepper Motor
Driver SMD0)
Circuit 897 X257 - Pin B X256-Pin E1
(PH2-) (Stepper motor) (Stepper Motor
Driver SMD0)
Circuit 898 X257 - Pin E X256-Pin F1
(PH2+) (Stepper motor) (Stepper Motor
Driver SMD0)

– – –1/1

111401
PN=1038
PEC References
5 Stepper Motor Driver Delete service code PEC 129/PEC 133. OK: Service Code PEC
(SMD) Check 129/PEC133 does not
Tractor is equipped with E-ICV, GO TO 5.1. reappear, change SMD
A13.
Tractor is not equipped with E-ICV, GO TO 5.2.
NOT OK: Service Code
5.1 PEC 129/PEC 133
Tractor is equipped with E-ICV: PEC Service Codes are
stored, replace PEC
Replace suspect stepper motor driver (A13) with a workable SMD (SM1, SMD2 or Controller.
SMD3) and carry out an operational test of the SMD for PowrQuad Plus, AutoQuad or
AutoQuad II transmission function.
5.2 OK: Service Code PEC

129/PEC 133 does not
Tractor is not equipped with E-ICV: reappear. Test
completed.
Replace stepper motor driver (A13) and carry out an operational test.
PEC 129/PEC 133
reappears, stepper motor
driver (A13) was OK. No
other PEC Service Codes
are stored, replace PEC
245
Controller.
PEC
17
– – –1/1
6 Check Stepper Motor Ignition ON. OK: Check all relevant

Switch Circuit connectors of the stepper
Shift into the second gear. motor switch circuit for
bad and loose contacts.
Ignition OFF.
IF OK: Delete PEC
Disconnect X256 (W35; SE21D) at stepper motor driver (A13). Service Codes and carry
out an operational test. If
Check continuity between pin F2 and pin F3 at X256: the check of the stepper
motor circuit does not
Stepper Motor Switch Check—Specification reveal any problems,
Check continuity between pin F2 and pin replace stepper motor
F3 at X256—Switch CLOSED - driver A13 and carry out
continuity ............................................................................................................ continuity an operational test.
NOTE: Stepper motor switch is closed (has continuity) in the second, third and fourth NOT OK: GO TO 7.
gear.
For connector location and pin arrangement see W35; for circuit diagram see SE21D.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1039
PEC References
7 Check Stepper Motor Ignition OFF. OK: Stepper motor switch

Switch Wiring defect. Replace stepper
Harness Disconnect X256 (W35; SE21D) at stepper motor driver (A13). motor M15 and adjust
new stepper motor, see
Check lead 899: (X256-Pin F2) reference “Adjusting the
stepper motor” (Repair
• for continuity Manual, Section 55,
• for a short to ground Group 10).
Check lead 874: (X256-Pin F3) NOT OK: Repair as

• for continuity
Wiring harness:
Stepper Motor Switch Wiring Harness

Circuit from to
Stepper Motor input lead X256 Pin F2 (Stepper X257 Pin A (Stepper
899 in W35 Motor Driver A13) Motor M15)
Stepper Motor output lead X256 Pin F3 (Stepper X257 Pin F (Stepper
874 in W35 Motor Driver A13) Motor M15)
For connector location and pin arrangement see W35; for circuit diagram see SE21D.
245
PEC
18
– – –1/1
E-ICV –– Multi-Function Lever (S64) Axis 1 Circuit Test (Forward and Rearward Lever
Position)
Related Service Code PEC 051. • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – “SE21B –– E-ICV Control”, Section 240, Group
15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see:
– Electronic Control Unit Wiring Harness W34,
AG,LX12234,452NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test axis 1 of Multi-Function Lever Unit (S64) circuitry (potentiometer and paddle switch)
and harness to PEC connection.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1040
PEC References
1 Axis 1 Circuit 1.1 –– Paddle Switch 1 Circuit: OK: Check potentiometer

(Multi-Function Lever signal voltage, GO TO
S64) Access Address PEC 10: 1.2
PEC 10 –– Axis 1 Paddle Switch Circuit—Specification NOT OK: Check paddle

Multi-Function Lever in NEUTRAL:— switch harness, GO TO 3.
Switch Status ............................................................................................ XX0 (CLOSED)
Multi-Function Lever in forward or
rearward position (not moved over
noticeable resistance):—Switch Status ......................................................... XX1 (OPEN)
rearward position (moved over
noticeable resistance, but not moved into
FLOAT-position):—Switch Status ............................................................. XX0 (CLOSED)
Multi-Function Lever Forward in FLOAT
position (detent):—Switch Status .................................................................. XX1 (OPEN)
1.2 –– Potentiometer 1 Signal Voltage: OK: • Test completed.
Access Address PEC 21: • Circuit problem still

exists, GO TO 2.
PEC 21 –– Axis 1 Potentiometer Signal Voltage—Specification
Multi-Function Lever in NEUTRAL NOT OK: Check
position:—Voltage ........................................................................ between 2.8 and 3.2 V potentiometer harness,
Multi-Function Lever in FORWARD GO TO 4.
245
position (detent):—Voltage ........................................................... between 0.8 and 2.1 V
PEC
Multi-Function Lever in REARWARD
19
position:—Voltage ........................................................................ between 3.9 and 4.2 V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1041
PEC References
(Multi-Function Lever connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address PEC 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors for bad, loose,
S64) wires (see reference "PEC Beep Mode Test (PEC 02 and PEC 03)", Section 245, widened or corroded
Group PEC). contacts.
NOT OK: Repair as

operational test.
LX1024118 –UN–09FEB01
245
A—X225 –– 3-pin plug (Transport Lock)
PEC
B—X220 –– 8-pin plug (Multi-Function Lever Axis 1, 2 and 3)
20
C—X219 –– 6-pin plug (Interlock Switch)
D—X264 –– 3-pin plug (Connection to Loader for 4th and 5th E-ICV function)
Multi-Function Lever - Forward/Rearward Circuit (Axis1):
• X220 (Multi-Function Lever, 8 pin plug) and X221 (PEC) at wiring harness W34.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1042
PEC References
3 Axis 1 Paddle Switch 3.1 OK: GO TO 3.2

HarnessTest
(Multi-Function Lever Disconnect X220 (Multi-Function Lever 8-pin plug) at W34. NOT OK: Check lead 566
S64) for a short to ground, GO
Access Address PEC 10 TO 7.
PEC 10 –– Axis 1 Paddle Switch Circuit (HarnessTest)—Specification

X220 disconnected:—Status ....................................................................................... XX1
3.2 OK: Check paddle switch,

GO TO 5.
Bypass pin D (lead 566) and pin B (lead 541) at
connector X220 (Multi-Function Lever 8-pin plug) NOT OK: Check lead
566, GO TO 7.
PEC 10 –– Axis 1 Paddle Switch Circuit
(HarnessTest)—Specification
pin D (lead 566) and pin
B (lead 541) bypassed:—
Status .......................................................................... XX0
245
PEC
21
LX1024123 –UN–18MAY00
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1043
PEC References
4 Axis 1 Potentiometer 4.1 General Potentiometer Supply Circuit OK: GO TO 4.2a

HarnessTest
(Multi-Function Lever Access Address PEC 30: NOT OK: Supply Voltage
S64) at address PEC 30 is not
PEC 30 - Supply Circuit for Axis 1, 2 and 3—Specification within specification,
Potentiometer Power Supply:—Voltage ....................................................................... 5 V perform “Multi-Function
Lever Potentiometer
NOTE: If the voltage reading in Address PEC 30 is in specification check also the Supply Circuit Test”,
power supply at the Multi-Function Lever Unit (S64) (PEC cannot identify an open Section 245, Group PEC.
circuit).
NOT OK: Supply Voltage
Measure with multimeter at connector X220 between pin at multimeter is not within
A (supply lead 533) and pin B (ground lead 541): specification, check lead
533 and 541 for an open
Potentiometer Supply Voltage—Specification circuit, GO TO 8.
Power Supply:—Voltage .............................................. 5 V
245
PEC
22
LX1024123 –UN–18MAY00
4.2a Potentiometer Signal Circuit OK: GO TO 4.2b
Disconnect X220. NOT OK: Check lead 565

for a short to ground, GO
Access Address PEC 21. TO 6.
PEC 21 –– Potentiometer 1 Signal Circuit (Axis 1)—Specification

X220 disconnected:—Voltage ...................................................................................... 5 V
4.2b OK: Harness (W34) from

PEC to Multi-Function
Bypass pin C (lead 565) and pin B (lead 541) at Lever Unit (S64) is OK,
connector X220 and check display in Address PEC 21: check relevant connectors
of Multi-Function Lever
PEC 21 –– Potentiometer 1 Signal Circuit (Axis 1)— Unit (S64) for bad, loose,
Specification widened or corroded
pin C (lead 565) and pin contacts.
Voltage ......................................................................... 0 V IF OK: Check of
connectors do not reveal
any problems,
repair/replace
Multi-Function Lever.

for continuity, GO TO 6.
LX1024123 –UN–18MAY00
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1044
PEC References
5 Axis 1 Paddle Switch Use a multimeter and check paddle switch between pin D (lead 566) and pin B (lead OK: Check all relevant
Test (Multi-Function 541) at Multi-Function Lever connector X220. connectors for bad, loose,
Lever S64) widened or corroded
Axis 1 Paddle Switch—Specification contacts.
Multi-Function Lever in NEUTRAL:—
Switch Status ....................................................................................................... CLOSED NOT OK: Repair as
Multi-Function Lever in forward or needed and repeat this
rearward position (not moved over test
noticeable resistance):—Switch Status ................................................................... OPEN
rearward position (moved over
noticeable resistance, but not moved into
FLOAT-position):—Switch Status ........................................................................ CLOSED
Multi-Function Lever Forward in FLOAT
position (detent):—Switch Status ............................................................................ OPEN
– – –1/1
245
6 Axis 1 Check signal lead 565: OK: Check ground lead
PEC
Potentiometer –– 541, GO TO 9.
23
Signal lead 565 ❒ for continuity
(Multi-Function Lever ❒ for a short to ground. NOT OK: Repair as
S64) needed and repeat this
Wiring connection: test.
Potentiometer 1 Signal Circuit 565 (Axis 1)

(SE21B) from to
Lead 565 X220 - pin C X221 - pin 26
(Connection to (PEC)
Multifunction Unit S64)
– – –1/1
7 Axis 1 Paddle Check signal lead 566: OK: Check ground lead
Switch –– Signal lead 541, GO TO 9.
566 (Multi-Function ❒ for continuity.
Lever S64) ❒ for a short to ground. NOT OK: Repair as
NOTE: Lead 566 is connected to the ground via the paddle switch with the test.
Multi-Function Lever in NEUTRAL or moved over noticeable resistance (not in Float).
Wiring connection:
Paddle Switch 1 Signal Circuit 566 (Axis 1)

(SE21B) from to
Lead 566 X220 - pin D X221 - pin 14
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1045
PEC References
8 Supply Lead 533 Check supply lead 533: OK: Check ground lead,
(Multi-Function Lever GO TO 9.
S64 Circuit) ❒ for continuity.
NOT OK: Repair as
test.
Multi-Function Lever 5V Supply Circuit 533
(SE21B) from to
Lead 533 X220 - pin A X221 - pin 3
– – –1/1
9 Ground Lead 541 Check ground lead 541 OK: Check all relevant
(Multi-Function Lever connectors for bad, loose,
S64 Circuit) ❒ for continuity. widened or corroded
contacts.
Wiring connection:
NOT OK: Repair as
Multi-Function Lever Ground Circuit 541 needed and repeat this
245
PEC (SE21B) from to
24 Lead 541 X220 - pin B X221 - pin 24
NOTE: Ground lead 541 is also connected to Transmission Speed Sender B54
(Connector X267 in Wiring Harness W13, for reference see Wiring Diagrams
“SE21A –– PowrQuad Plus Control”, Section 240, Group 15).
– – –1/1
E-ICV –– Multi-Function Lever (S64) Axis 2 Circuit Test (Left and Right Lever Position)
15.
AG,LX12234,454NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test axis 2 (Left and Right Lever Position) of Multi-Function Lever Unit (S64) circuitry
(Potentiometer and paddle switch) and harness to PEC connection.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1046
PEC References
1 Axis 2 Circuit 1.1 –– Paddle Switch 2 Circuit: OK: Check potentiometer

S64) Access Address PEC 10 1.2
PEC 10 –– Axis 2 Paddle Switch Circuit—Specification NOT OK: Check paddle

Multi-Function Lever in NEUTRAL:— switch harness, GO TO 3.
Switch Status ............................................................................................ X0X (CLOSED)
Multi-Function Lever in LEFT or RIGHT
position (not moved over noticeable
resistance):—Switch Status .......................................................................... X1X (OPEN)
position (moved over noticeable
resistance):—Switch Status ..................................................................... X0X (CLOSED)
1.2 –– Potentiometer 2 Signal Voltage: OK: • Test completed.
Access Address PEC 22. • Circuit problem still

exists, GO TO 2.
PEC 22 –– Axis 2 Potentiometer Signal Circuit—Specification
Multi-Function Lever in NEUTRAL NOT OK: Check
position:—Voltage ........................................................................ between 2.8 and 3.2 V potentiometer harness,
Multi-Function Lever in RIGHT GO TO 4.
position:—Voltage ........................................................................ between 1.8 and 2.1 V
Multi-Function Lever in LEFT position:—
245
PEC
25
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1047
PEC References
NOT OK: Repair as

operational test.
LX1024118 –UN–09FEB01
245
PEC
26
Multi-Function Lever – Left/Right Circuit (Axis 2):
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1048
PEC References

HarnessTest
(Multi-Function Lever Disconnect X220 (Multi-Function Lever 8-pin plug). NOT OK: Check lead 577
Access Address PEC 10 TO 7.

X220 disconnected:—Status ....................................................................................... X1X

GO TO 5.
Bypass pin F (lead 577) and pin B (lead 541) at
connector X220: NOT OK: Check lead
577, GO TO 7.
pin F (lead 577) and pin
Status .......................................................................... X0X
245
PEC
27
LX1024123 –UN–18MAY00
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1049
PEC References
4 Axis 2 Potentiometer 4.1 General Potentiometer Supply Circuit OK: GO TO 4.2a

HarnessTest
(Multi-Function Lever Access Address PEC 30: NOT OK: Supply voltage
Lever Potentiometer
power supply at the Multi-Function Lever Unit (S64) (PEC cannot identify an open Section 245, Group PEC
circuit).
NOT OK: Supply voltage
245
PEC
28
LX1024123 –UN–18MAY00

Access Address PEC 22: TO 6.
PEC 22 –– Axis 2 Potentiometer Signal Circuit (HarnessTest)—Specification


Bypass pin E (lead 564) and pin B (lead 541) at Lever Unit (S64) is OK,
connector X220 (Multi-Function Lever 8-pin plug) and check relevant connectors
check display in Address PEC 22: of Multi-Function Lever
Unit (S64) for bad, loose,
PEC 22 –– Axis 2 Potentiometer Signal Circuit— widened or corroded
Specification contacts.
pin E (lead 564) and pin
B (lead 541) bypassed:— IF OK: Check of
Voltage ......................................................................... 0 V connectors do not reveal
any problems,
repair/replace

LX1024123 –UN–18MAY00
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1050
PEC References
5 Axis 2 Paddle Switch Use a multimeter and check paddle switch between pin F (lead 577) and pin B (lead OK: Check all relevant
Multi-Function Lever in NEUTRAL:—
Switch Status ....................................................................................................... CLOSED NOT OK: Repair as
Multi-Function Lever in LEFT or RIGHT needed and repeat this
position (not moved over noticeable test
resistance):—Switch Status .................................................................................... OPEN
position (moved over noticeable
resistance):—Switch Status ................................................................................ CLOSED
– – –1/1

Axis 2 Potentiometer Signal Circuit 564

Circuit Wiring Harness W34 245
PEC
(SE21B) from to 29
Lead 564 X220 - pin E X221 - pin 4
– – –1/1
NOTE: Lead 577 is connected to the ground via the paddle switch with the test.
Multi-Function Lever in NEUTRAL or moved over noticeable resistance at RIGHT or
LEFT position.
Wiring connection:
Axis 2 Paddle Switch Signal Circuit 577

(SE21B) from to
Lead 577 X220 - pin F X221 - pin 37
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1051
PEC References
NOT OK: Repair as
test.
Multi-Function Lever 5 V Supply Circuit 533
(SE21B) from to
Lead 533 X220 - pin A X221 - pin 3
– – –1/1
9 Ground Lead 541 Check ground lead 541: OK: Check all relevant
contacts.
Wiring connection:
NOT OK: Repair as
245
PEC (SE21B) from to
30 Lead 541 X220 - pin B X221 - pin 24
– – –1/1
E-ICV –– Multi-Function Lever (S64) Axis 3 Circuit Test (Rocker Switch - Upper and Lower
Position)
15.
AG,LX12234,456NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test axis 3 (rocker switch activated UP or DOWN) of Multi-Function Lever circuitry
(potentiometer and paddle switch) and harness to PEC connection.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1052
PEC References
1 Axis 3 Circuit 1.1 –– Paddle Switch 3 Circuit OK: Check potentiometer

S64) Access Address PEC 10: 1.2
PEC 10 –– Axis 3 Paddle Switch Circuit—Specification NOT OK: Check Paddle

Rocker Switch at Multi-Function Lever in Switch harness, GO TO
NEUTRAL (not activated):—Status .......................................................... 0XX (CLOSED) 3.
Rocker Switch activated UP or
DOWN:—Status ............................................................................................ 1XX (OPEN)
1.2 –– Potentiometer 3 Signal Voltage OK: • Test completed.
Access Address PEC 23: • Circuit problem still

exists, GO TO 2.
PEC 23 –– Axis 3 Potentiometer Signal Circuit—Specification
Rocker switch at Multi-Function Lever in NOT OK: Check
NEUTRAL (not activated):—Voltage ......................................... between 2.8 and 3.2 Volt potentiometer harness,
Rocker switch activated DOWN:— GO TO 4.
Voltage ...................................................................................... between 1.8 and 2.1 Volt
Rocker switch activated UP:—Voltage ..................................... between 3.9 and 4.2 Volt
– – –1/1
245
PEC
31
NOT OK: Repair as

operational test.
LX1024118 –UN–09FEB01

Multi-Function Lever – Rocker Switch circuit (Axis 3):
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1053
PEC References

HarnessTest
(Multi-Function Lever Disconnect X220 (Multi-Function Lever 8-pin plug). NOT OK: Check lead 578
Access Address PEC 10: TO 7.

X220 disconnected:—Status ....................................................................................... 1XX

GO TO 5.
Bypass pin H (lead 578) and pin B (lead 541) at
connector X220: NOT OK: Check lead
578, GO TO 7.
pin H (lead 578) and pin
Status .......................................................................... 0XX
245
PEC
32
LX1024123 –UN–18MAY00
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1054
PEC References
4 Axis 3 Potentiometer 4.1 Potentiometer Supply Circuit OK: GO TO 4.2a

HarnessTest
(Multi-Function Lever Access Address PEC 30: NOT OK: Supply voltage
Lever Potentiometer
power supply at the Multi-Function Lever Unit (S64) (PEC cannot identify an open Section 245, Group PEC.
circuit).
245
PEC
33
LX1024123 –UN–18MAY00

Ignition ON. TO 6.
PEC 23 –– Axis 3 Potentiometer Signal Circuit (HarnessTest)—Specification


Bypass pin G (lead 579) and pin B (lead 541) at Lever Unit (S64) is OK,
connector X220 and check display in Address PEC 23: check relevant connectors
of Multi-Function Lever
PEC 23 –– Axis 3 Potentiometer Signal Circuit Unit (S64) for bad, loose,
(HarnessTest)—Specification widened or corroded
pin G (lead 579) and pin contacts.
Voltage ......................................................................... 0 V IF OK: Check of
connectors do not reveal
any problems,
repair/replace

LX1024123 –UN–18MAY00
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1055
PEC References
5 Axis 3 Paddle Switch Use a multimeter and check paddle switch between pin H (lead 578) and pin B (lead OK: Check all relevant
Rocker switch at Multi-Function Lever in
NEUTRAL (not activated):—Switch NOT OK: Repair as
Status .................................................................................................................. CLOSED needed and repeat this
Rocker switch activated UP or DOWN:— test
Switch Status ........................................................................................................... OPEN
– – –1/1

Axis 3 Potentiometer Signal Circuit 579

245 Circuit Wiring Harness W34
PEC
34 (SE21B) from to
Lead 579 X220 - pin G X221 - pin 27
– – –1/1
NOTE: Lead 578 is connected to the ground via the paddle switch with the rocker test.
switch in Neutral position.
Wiring connection:
Axis 3 Paddle Switch Circuit 578

(SE21B) from to
Lead 578 X220 - pin H X221 - pin 15
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1056
PEC References
NOT OK: Repair as
test.
Multi-Function Lever 5 V Supply Circuit 533
(SE21B) from to
Lead 533 X220 - pin A X221 - pin 3
– – –1/1
9 Ground Lead 541 Check ground lead 541: OK: Check all relevant
contacts.
Wiring connection:
NOT OK: Repair as
245
(SE21B) from to PEC
Lead 541 X220 - pin B X221 - pin 24 35
– – –1/1
E-ICV –– Multi-Function Lever Potentiometer Supply Circuit Test
Related to Service Code PEC 059. • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
15.
AG,LX12234,459NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the 5 V power supply circuitry for the Multi-Function Lever potentiometer (Axis 1, 2
and 3).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1057
PEC References
1 Potentiometer Supply Access Address PEC 30: OK: • Test completed.

Voltage Circuit for
Axis 1, 2 and 3 PEC 30 - Supply Circuit for Axis 1, 2 and 3—Specification • Circuit problem still
Potentiometer Power Supply:—Voltage ....................................................................... 5 V exists, GO TO 2.
NOT OK: GO TO 3.
– – –1/1
(Potentiometer connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address PEC 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors for bad, loose,
Supply Voltage wires (see reference "PEC Beep Mode Test (PEC 02 and PEC 03)", Section 245, widened or corroded
Circuit for Axis 1, 2 Group PEC). contacts.
and 3)
NOT OK: Repair as
operational test.
245
PEC
36
LX1024118 –UN–09FEB01
A—X225 –– 3-pin plug (Transport lock)

D—X264 –– 3-pin plug (Connection to loader for 4th and 5th E-ICV function)
Multi-Function Lever Potentiometer Supply Circuit:
• X220 (Multi-Function Lever, 8 pin plug) and X221 (PEC).
– – –1/1
3 Harness Test for Disconnect connector X220 and check the display at address PEC 30. OK: Supply voltage are
Potentiometer Supply within specification after
Voltage Circuit PEC 30 - Supply Circuit for Axis 1, 2 and 3 (Harness Test)—Specification disconnection of
Potentiometer Supply Voltage—Voltage ...................................................................... 5 V Multifunction Unit S64,
repair Unit as needed and
repeat this test.

still out of specification,
check supply lead GO TO
4.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1058
PEC References
4 Supply Lead 533 Check supply lead 533: OK: Check all connectors
(Potentiometer of the supply circuit for
Supply Voltage ❒ for continuity. bad, loose, widened or
Circuit for Axis 1, 2 ❒ for a short to ground. corroded contacts.
and 3) ❒ for a short to another conductor.
NOT OK: Repair as
Potentiometer (Axis 1, 2 and 3) Supply Voltage Circuit 533 needed and repeat this
test.
(SE21B) from to
Lead 533 X221 - pin 3 X220 - pin A
(PEC) (Connection to
Lead 533 is spliced to the three potentiometers in the Multifunction Unit Harness
– – –1/1
E-ICV –– Transport Lock Switch (S65) Circuit Test
Related to Service Code PEC 060. • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – “SE21A –– PowrQuad Plus Control”, Section 240,
Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – “SE21B –– E-ICV Control”, Section 240, Group
245
– Electronic Control Unit Wiring Harness W34, 15.
PEC
AG,LX12234,461NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test transport lock switch circuitry and harness to PEC connection.
– – –1/1
1 Transport Lock Access Address PEC 06: OK: • Test completed.

PEC 06 –– Transport Lock Switch Circuit (S65)—Specification • Circuit problem still
Switch in LOCKED position:—Status .......................................................................... X10 exists, GO TO 2.
Switch in OPEN position:—Status .............................................................................. X01
always X00, check fuse
NOT OK: GO TO 3.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1059
PEC References
(Transport Lock connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address PEC 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors for bad, loose,
Switch S65) wires (see reference "PEC Beep Mode Test (PEC 02 and PEC 03)", Section 245, widened or corroded
NOT OK: Delete Service

operational test.
LX1024118 –UN–09FEB01
245
A—X225 –– 3-pin plug (Transport Lock Switch)
PEC
38
C—X219 –– 6-pin plug (Interlock and Transport Lock Switch)
Transport Lock Switch Circuit:
• X225 (Transport Lock Switch) and X219 (Connection to W34) at Multi-Function

Lever Unit (S64).
• X219 (Connection to Multi-Function Lever Unit (S64) and X221 (PEC) at W34.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1060
PEC References
3 Transport Lock 3.1 OK: GO TO 3.2

Switch (S65) Harness
Test Disconnect X219 (Connection between Multi-Function Lever and W34) and check NOT OK: Problem in
display at Address PEC 06: harness W34, GO TO 6.
PEC 06 –– Transport Lock Switch Circuit S65 (Harness Test)—Specification

X219 disconnected:—Status ....................................................................................... X00
3.2 OK: Check transport lock

switch, GO TO 4.
Bypass the following leads at connector X219 (W34) and
check the display in Address PEC 06 NOT OK: Display shows
always X00, check lead
PEC 06 –– Transport Lock Switch Circuit S65 572 (GO TO 5).
(Harness Test)—Specification
Bypass pin B (lead 572) NOT OK: Check lead 573
and pin C (lead 576):— and 576, GO TO 6.
Status .......................................................................... X10
Bypass pin B (lead 572)
and pin A (lead 573):—
Status .......................................................................... X01
245
PEC
LX1024122 –UN–18MAY00
39
– – –1/1
4 Transport Lock Check Transport Lock Switch at connector X219 (Multi-Function Lever Unit S64): OK: Check all relevant
Switch (S65) Test connectors of the
Transport Lock Switch (S65) Test—Specification transport lock switch
Switch in LOCKED position:—Switch circuit for bad, loose,
Status .............................................................. Closed between pin B (lead 572) and pin widened or corroded
C (lead 576) contacts: GO TO 2.
Switch in OPEN position:—Switch Status ...... Closed between pin B (lead 572) and pin
A (lead 573) NOT OK: Repair switch
and/or Multi-Function
Lever Unit (S64) harness
as needed and repeat
this test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1061
PEC References
5 Supply Lead 572 Check supply lead 572 (12 V circuit): OK: Check ELX relay
(Transport Lock (Circuit 072).
Switch S65) ❒ for continuity.
❒ for a short to ground. NOT OK: Repair as
Multi-Function Lever and Transport Lock Switch Supply Circuit 572

SE21B (SE21A)
from to from to
Lead 572 X219 - pin B X222 - pin H3 X222 - pin H3 F211 - pin A
(Connection to (Connection to (Connection to
Multifunction W4) W34)
Unit S64)
Additional Splice Connections (SP) of Circuit 572 (SE21A)
Wiring from to to to
Harness
W4 X222 - pin H3 X244 - pin C X249 - pin C X03 - pin C3
(Cab Wiring (Connection to (AutoQuad (AutoQuad (Connection to
Harness) W34) mode switch) shift switches) W13)
W13 X03 - pin C3 X268 - pin A
(Transmission (Connection to (Clutch switch for Tractors with Auto Quad
245
Wiring W4) transmission)
PEC
Harness)
40
– – –1/1
6 Signal Lead 573 and Check lead 573: OK: Check all relevant
576 (Transport Lock connectors of the
Switch S65) ❒ for continuity. transport lock switch
❒ for a short to ground. circuit for bad, loose,
❒ for a short to another conductor (572 and 576). widened or corroded
contacts: GO TO 2.
Check lead 576:
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ for a short to ground. test.
❒ for a short to another conductor (572 and 573).
Wiring connection:
Transport Lock Switch Signal Circuit 573 and 576

(SE21B) from to
Lead 573 X219 - pin A X221 - pin 33
Lead 576 X219 - pin C X221 - pin 10
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1062
PEC References
E-ICV –– Interlock Switch Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – “SE21A –– PowrQuad Plus Control”, Section 240,
Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – “SE21B –– E-ICV Control”, Section 240, Group
– Electronic Control Unit Wiring Harness W34, 15.
AG,LX12234,463NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test interlock switch circuitry (integrated in Multifunction Unit S64) and harness to PEC
connection.
– – –1/1
245
1 Interlock Switch Access Address PEC 07: OK: • Test completed.
PEC
Circuit
41
PEC 07 –– Interlock switch circuit—Specification • Circuit problem still
Switch NOT activated:—Status ................................................................................... X10 exists, GO TO 2.
Switch ACTIVATED:—Status ...................................................................................... X01
always X00, check fuse
F211 and repeat this
test..
NOT OK: GO TO 3
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1063
PEC References
connections. Access Beep-Mode at Address PEC 02 and gently tug at the affected connectors for bad, loose,
wires (see reference "PEC Beep Mode Test (PEC 02 and PEC 03)", Section 245, widened or corroded
NOT OK: Delete Service

operational test.
LX1024118 –UN–09FEB01
245
A—X225 –– 3-pin plug (Transport lock switch)
PEC
42
C—X219 –– 6-pin plug (Interlock and Transport Lock Switch)
D—X264 –– 3-pin plug (Connection to loader for 4th and 5th E-ICV function)
Interlock Switch Circuit:
• X219 (Connection to W34) at Multi-Function Lever Unit (S64).

• X219 (Connection to Multi-Function Lever Unit S64) and X221 (PEC) at W34.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1064
PEC References
3 Interlock Switch 3.1 OK: GO TO 3.2

Harness Test
Disconnect X219 (Connection between Multi-Function Lever and W34) and check NOT OK: Problem in
display at Address PEC 07: harness W34, GO TO 6.
PEC 07 –– Interlock switch circuit—Specification

Connector X219 disconnected:—Status ..................................................................... X00
3.2 OK: Check Interlock

Switch, GO TO 4.
Bypass the following leads at connector X219 (W34)
and check the display in Address PEC 07 NOT OK: Display shows
always X00, check lead
PEC 07 –– Interlock switch circuit—Specification 572 (GO TO 5).
and pin E (lead 605) at NOT OK: Check lead 604
X219:—Status ............................................................. X10 and 605, GO TO 6.
and pin F (lead 604) at
X219:—Status ............................................................. X01
245
PEC
LX1024122 –UN–18MAY00
43
– – –1/1
4 Interlock Switch Test Check Interlock Switch at connector X219 (Multi-Function Lever Unit S64): OK: Check all relevant
connectors of the
Interlock Switch—Specification Interlock Switch Circuit for
Switch NOT activated:—Switch Status ........... Closed between pin B (lead 572) and pin bad, loose, widened or
E (lead 605) corroded contacts (see
Switch ACTIVATED:—Switch Status .............. Closed between pin B (lead 572) and pin General Harness Test,
F (lead 604) GO TO 2).
. NOT OK: Repair

Switch/Multi-Function
Lever Unit (S64) harness
as needed and repeat
this test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1065
PEC References
5 Supply Lead 572 Check supply lead 572 (12 V circuit): OK: Check ELX relay
(Interlock Switch) (Circuit 072).
❒ for continuity
❒ for a short to ground. NOT OK: Repair as
Multi-Function Lever and Transport Lock Switch Supply Circuit 572

SE21B (SE21A)
from to from to
Lead 572 X219 - pin B X222 - pin H3 X222 - pin H3 F211 - pin A
(Connection to (Connection to (Connection to
Multifunction W4) W34)
Unit S64)
Additional Splice Connections (SP) of Circuit 572 (SE21A)
Wiring from to to to
Harness
W4 X222 - pin H3 X244 - pin C X249 - pin C X03 - pin C3
(Cab Wiring (Connection to (AutoQuad (AutoQuad (Connection to
Harness) W34) switch) shift switches) W13)
W13 X03 - pin C3 X268 - pin A
(Transmission (Connection to (Clutch Switch for tractors with Auto Quad
245
Wiring W4) transmission)
PEC
Harness)
44
– – –1/1
6 Signal Lead 604 and Check lead 604: OK: Check all relevant
605 (Interlock Switch) connectors of the
❒ for continuity interlock switch circuit for
❒ for a short to ground. bad, loose, widened or
❒ for a short to another conductor (572 and 605). corroded contacts: GO
TO 2.
Check lead 605:
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ for continuity needed and repeat this
❒ for a short to ground. test.
❒ for a short to another conductor (572 and 604).
Wiring connection:
Interlock Switch Signal Circuit 604 and 605

(SE21B) from to
Lead 604 X219 - pin F X221 - pin 32
Lead 605 X219 - pin E X221 - pin 9
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1066
PEC References
E-ICV –– Stepper Motor Driver (SMD1, 2 and 3) Power Supply and Identification Circuit
Test
Related Service Codes: • E-ICV circuit No. 3 (SMD 2): PEC 152 (Power
Supply out of Spec) and PEC 203 (Initialization
• E-ICV circuit No. 1 (SMD 1): PEC 136 (Power unsuccessful).
unsuccessful).
• E-ICV circuit No. 2 (SMD 2): PEC 144 (Power

unsuccessful).
Continued on next page AG,LX12234,620NA –19–01JAN01–1/2
245
PEC
45

111401
PN=1067
PEC References
Stepper Motor Driver Power Supply and Identification

Circuit
All the different E-ICV stepper motor drivers have the

same arrangement for power supply and ground. pin C1 is
for a 12 V power supply (lead 255) and pin D1 is for
ground (lead 310). In addition, power supply and ground
are used to provide individual arrangements on the four
–UN–10OCT97
identification pins (A2, A3, B3 and C3). The different
arrangements on these pins at the respective plugs on the
wiring harness enable the various stepper motor driver
commands (information) to be identified when
LX1017925
communicating with the PEC; this also means that the
same type of stepper motor driver can be used
throughout.
C1—Lead 255 (12 V)
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: D1—Lead 310 (Ground)
A2—Identification pin (Address pin)
A3—Identification pin (Address pin)
• For component location and pin arrangement see: B3—Identification pin (Address pin)
– Cab wiring harness W4, Section 240, Group 10. C3—Identification pin (Address pin)
– Stepper Motor Driver wiring harness W35, Section
245 240, Group 10.
PEC • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
46
– “SE21A –– PowrQuad Plus Control”, Section 240,
Group 15.
– “SE21B –– E-ICV Control”, Section 240, Group 15.
– “SE21C –– E-ICV Stepper Motor Drivers and Stepper
Motors”, Section 240, Group 15.
– “SE21D –– AutoQuad and PowrQuad Plus Stepper
Motor Driver and Stepper Motor”, Section 240, Group
15.
AG,LX12234,620NA –19–01JAN01–2/2
Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure will test the power supply circuitry of all E-ICV - Stepper Motor Drivers (SMD1; SMD2 and
SMD3) and harness to SMD connection.
– – –1/1
1 SMD Supply Voltage • Check fuse F205 (Relay K203 coil circuit; SE21A). OK: GO TO 2.
Circuit (Preliminary • Check fuse F203 (SMD - supply circuit; SE21C).
Checks) • Relay K203 (SE21B). NOT OK: Repair as
operational test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1068
PEC References
2 Power Supply at SMD IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the stepper motor drivers with IGNITION–– ON. OK: • Test completed.
IMPORTANT: Connect multimeter with IGNITION––OFF. • Circuit problem still

exists: Check all relevant
IMPORTANT: Carry out measurement with IGNITION–– ON connectors of the SMD
power supply circuit for
Disconnect respective SMD: bad, loose, widened or
• X253 (SMD1; marked with red PVC tape). corroded contacts: GO
• X254 (SMD2; marked with yellow PVC tape). TO 3.
• X255 (SMD3; marked with blue PVC tape).
NOT OK: Check supply
Measure with multimeter voltage between pin C1 (lead and ground lead, GO TO
255) and pin D1 (lead 310) at respective connector: 3.
SMD –– Supply Voltage—Specification

Power Supply:—Voltage ............................................ 12 V
For connector location see wiring harness W35; for

Circuit Diagram see SE21C.
LX1022671 –UN–01APR99 245

PEC
47
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1069
PEC References
3 SMD Supply and Check supply lead 349/255: OK: Check all connectors
Identification Circuit of the power supply and
❒ for continuity. identification circuit for
❒ for a short to ground. bad, loose, widened or
corroded contacts.
NOT OK: Repair as
❒ for continuity. needed and carry out an
operational test.
Wiring connection:
Supply Circuit 349/255

Circuit/Wiring from to to
Harness
Circuit 349 in W4 K203 - pin 87 F203 - pin A F204 - pin A
(Supply Circuit for (SMD power (Fuse for EICV - (Fuse for PPST -
Fuse F203 and supply relay) SMD1; SMD2 and SMD)
F204) (SE21B) SMD3) (SE21D)
(SE21C)
Circuit 255 in W4 F203 - pin E X232 - pin E
(SE21C) (SMD power (Connection to
supply fuse) W35)
Circuit 255 in W35 X253 (A10 - X254 (A11 - X255 (A12 -
(SE21C) SMD1): SMD2): SMD3):
245 • pin C1 • pin C1 • pin C1
PEC • pin A3 • pin B3 • pin A3
48 • pin B3
Ground Circuit 310
Ground Circuit 310 in W4 (SE21C)
from to to to to
XGND5 X232 - pin G
(Ground (Connection to
Connection) W35)
Ground Circuit 310 in W35 (SE21C and SE21D)
from to to to to
X232 - pin G X253 (A10 - X254 (A11 - X255 (A12 - X256 (A13 -
(Connection to SMD1): SMD2): SMD3): SMD0)
W4) • pin D1 • pin D1 • pin D1 • pin D1
• pin A2 • pin A2 • pin A2 • pin A2
• pin B3 • pin A3 • pin C3 • pin A3
• pin C3 • pin C3 • pin B3
• pin C3
Section SE21C SE21D
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1070
PEC References
E-ICV No.1 –– Stepper Motor (M12) and Stepper Motor Driver (SMD1) Circuit Test
Related to Service Codes: – Stepper Motor Driver wiring harness W35, Section
240, Group 10.
• PEC 137 (Short in/to stepper motor). • For electrical troubleshooting see functional and
• PEC 141 (Open lead to stepper motor). – “SE21C –– E-ICV Stepper Motor Drivers and
Stepper Motors”, Section 240, Group 15.
• PEC 221 (Stepper Motor Driver not responding).
AG,LX12234,468NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure PEC
49
NOTE: This procedure will test E-ICV No. 1 stepper motor (M12) and stepper motor driver (A10) circuitry, harness
between stepper motor stepper motor driver and stepper motor assembly condition.
– – –1/1
1 Stepper Motor M12 Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 2.

Test Disconnect X318 at stepper motor M12.
NOT OK: Replace
To test the stepper motor for shorted or open circuit, stepper motor M12 and
check continuity (resistance) between stepper motor calibrate E-ICV.
terminals:
M12 - Stepper Motor Circuit—Specification

Between pin D (lead 861
/ PH1-) and pin C (lead
863 / PH1+).—Resistance ........................... 0.3 -0.4 Ohm
Between pin B (lead 864 /
PH2-) and pin E (lead
865 / PH2+) .—
Resistance ................................................... 0.3 -0.4 Ohm
NOTE: Wait during measurement until a stable

LX1024124 –UN–18MAY00 Ohm-value will appear at the multimeter. Value will
fluctuate at the beginning of the measurement.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1071
PEC References
2 Stepper Motor (M12) Ignition OFF. OK: Service Code PEC

Harness Test Reconnect X318 at stepper motor M12. Disconnect X253 221 was stored, GO TO
at stepper motor driver A10 (SMD1) and check harness 3.
resistance:
OK: Service Code PEC
Stepper Motor Harness Test (M12)—Specification 137 or PEC 141 was
Between pin-A1 (lead 861 stored, check connector
/ PH1-) and pin-B1 (lead X318 at W35 and at
863 / PH1+):—Resistance ........................... 0.3 -0.4 Ohm stepper motor M12 for
Between pin-E1 (lead 864 bad, loose, widened or
/ PH2-) and pin-F1 (lead corroded contacts.
865 PH2+):—Resistance ............................. 0.3 -0.4 Ohm
NOT OK: Check stepper
NOTE: Wait during measurement until a stable motor harness, GO TO 4.
Ohm-value will appear at the multimeter. Value will
LX1022671 –UN–01APR99
– – –1/1
245
3 Stepper Motor Driver Check the wires and pins for loose connections at X253. OK: GO TO 5.
PEC
(SMD A10) Check The following pins (leads) are relevant:
50
NOT OK: Repair as
• CAN-BUS connection at X253: needed and carry out an
– pin-E2 (lead 942) operational test.
– pin-E3 (lead 945)
– pin-D2 (lead 940)
• SMD1 - Identification Address pins at X253:
– pin-A3 (lead 255)
– pin-B3 (lead 310)
– pin-C3 (lead 310)
• SMD1 - Power supply leads at X253:
LX1022671 –UN–01APR99
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1072
PEC References
4 Stepper Motor Circuit Check stepper motor leads at stepper motor no. 1 OK: Check all relevant
(M12) connector X318: connectors of the E-ICV
• Check lead 861 (X318-pin D): No.1 stepper motor circuit
❒ for a short to lead 863 (X318-pin C) for bad, loose, widened or
❒ for a short to lead 864 (X318-pin B) corroded contacts.
❒ for a short to lead 865 (X318-pin E)
NOT OK: Repair as
• Check lead 863 (X318-pin C): needed and carry out an
❒ for a short to lead 864 (X318-pin B) operational test.
• Check lead 864 (X318-pin B):

• Check lead 861, 863, 864 and 865 for continuity.

LX1024125 –UN–18MAY00 Wiring connection
Stepper Motor Circuit 861; 863; 864 and 865 (M12)

(SE21C) from to
Circuit 861 X318 - pin D X253-Pin A1
(PH1-) (Stepper motor) (Stepper motor
driver No. 1) 245
Circuit 863 X318 - pin C X253-Pin B1 PEC
(PH1+) (Stepper motor) (Stepper motor 51
driver No. 1)
Circuit 864 X318 - pin B X253-Pin E1
(PH2-) (Stepper motor) (Stepper motor
driver No. 1)
Circuit 865 X318 - pin E X253-Pin F1
(PH2+) (Stepper motor) (Stepper motor
driver No. 1)
– – –1/1
5 General Stepper Delete Service Code PEC 221. OK: Service Code PEC
Motor Driver (SMD 221 does not reappear,
A10) Check Replace suspect stepper motor driver (SMD1) by a workable SMD (SMD PPST, SMD2 replace SMD1.
or SMD3) and carry out an operational test of the 1st E-ICV function (Boom).
NOT OK: Check all
relevant connectors of the
E-ICV No.1 stepper motor
widened or corroded
contacts.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1073
PEC References
240, Group 10.
AG,LX12234,472NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
PEC Test Procedure
52
– – –1/1
1 Stepper Motor (M13) Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 2.

NOT OK: Replace
terminals:
Stepper Motor Circuit (M13)—Specification


LX1024124 –UN–18MAY00 fluctuate at the beginning of the measurement.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1074
PEC References

Harness Test Reconnect X251 at stepper motor M13. Disconnect X254 222 was stored, GO TO
at stepper motor driver A11 (SMD2) and check harness 3.
resistance:
OK: Service Code PEC
Stepper Motor No. 2 (M13) - Harness Resistance— 145 or PEC 149 was
Specification stored, check connector
Between pin-A1 (lead 862 X251 at W35 and at
/ PH1-) and pin-B1 (lead stepper motor M13 for
866 / PH1+).—Resistance ........................... 0.3 -0.4 Ohm bad, loose, widened or
Between pin-E1 (lead 867 corroded contacts.
/ PH2-) and pin-F1 (lead
868 / PH2+).—Resistance ........................... 0.3 -0.4 Ohm NOT OK: Check stepper
motor harness, GO TO 4.
LX1022671 –UN–01APR99
– – –1/1
245
PEC
53
NOT OK: Repair as
LX1022671 –UN–01APR99
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1075
PEC References
4 Stepper Motor Circuit Check stepper motor leads at stepper motor connector OK: Check all relevant
(M13) X251: connectors of the E-ICV
NOT OK: Repair as

• Check lead 862; 866; 867 and 868 for continuity.

LX1024125 –UN–18MAY00 Wiring connection:

(SE21C) from to
(PH1-) (Stepper motor (Stepper Motor
245 M13) Driver No. 2)
PEC Circuit 866 X251 - pin C X254-Pin B1
54 (PH1+) (Stepper motor (Stepper Motor
M13) Driver No. 2)
M13) Driver No. 2)
(PH2+) (Stepper motor (Stepper Motor
M13) Driver No. 2)
– – –1/1
or SMD3) and carry out an operational test of the 2nd E-ICV function (bucket).
PEC 222 does reappear
and the check of harness
and the stepper motor
driver does not reveal any
problems (no other
relevant PEC-Service
Codes are stored),
replace the PEC and
test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1076
PEC References
240, Group 10.
AG,LX12234,478NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
245
Test Procedure PEC
55
– – –1/1
1 Stepper Motor (M14) Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 2.

NOT OK: Replace
terminals:
M14 - Stepper Motor Circuit—Specification

852 / PH1+):—Resistance ........................... 0.3 -0.4 Ohm

LX1024124 –UN–18MAY00 fluctuate at the beginning of the measurement.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1077
PEC References

Harness Test Reconnect X252 at stepper motor M14. 223 was stored, GO TO
3.
Disconnect X255 at stepper motor driver A12 (SMD3,
marked with blue PVC tape) and check harness OK: Service Code PEC
resistance: 153 or PEC 157 was
stored, check connector
Stepper Motor No. 3 (M14) - Harness Resistance— X252 at W35 and at
Specification stepper motor M14 for
Between pin-A1 (lead 851 bad, loose, widened or
/ PH1-) and pin-B1 (lead corroded contacts.
Between pin-E1 (lead 853 NOT OK: Check stepper
/ PH2-) and pin-F1 (lead motor harness, GO TO 4.

LX1022671 –UN–01APR99
– – –1/1
245
PEC
56
NOT OK: Repair as
LX1022671 –UN–01APR99
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1078
PEC References
4 Stepper Motor Circuit Check stepper motor leads at stepper motor connector OK: Check all relevant
(M14) X252: connectors of the E-ICV
NOT OK: Repair as

• Check lead 851; 852; 853 and 857 for continuity.

LX1024125 –UN–18MAY00 Wiring connection:

(SE21C) from to
M14) Driver No. 3) 245
Circuit 852 X252 - pin C X255-Pin B1 PEC
(PH1+) (Stepper motor (Stepper Motor 57
M14) Driver No. 3)
M14) Driver No. 3)
(PH2+) (Stepper motor (Stepper Motor
M14) Driver No. 3)
– – –1/1
or SMD2) and carry out an operational test of the 3rd E-ICV function (Rocker switch in
front of Multi-Function Lever). NOT OK: Service Code
PEC 223 does reappear
and the check of harness
and the stepper motor
driver does not reveal any
problems (no other
relevant PEC-Service
Codes are stored),
replace the PEC and
test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1079
PEC References
245
PEC
58

111401
PN=1080
Group RCU
RCU References
Recall Codes Procedure for RCU
1. Recall Service Codes (see “Calling up and Deleting 3. Carry out a test drive according to instructions, see
Service Codes”, Section 245, Group 05. “Carry out a Test Drive”, Section 255, Group 10A.
2. Note and cancel the Service Codes.

CAUTION: Perform this test outdoors. Make
sure that no-one is put at risk.
NOTE: Service Codes are not cancelled automatically.
It is possible that Service Codes may appear
4. Recall Service Codes again and trouble shoot
referring to faults that have already been
displayed Service Codes.
rectified.
5. Test drive cannot create relevant Service Codes,
Following RCU Service Codes may be generated
trouble shoot noticed Service Codes at step 2.
as the result of an error made by the operator:
Code 27 Enable pressure not detected.

Code 32 In park without valid neutral.
Code 34 Reverser lever in direction for
too long while in park
(diagnostic mode only).
Code 40 Forward and reverse switches
are open, but not-neutral switch
is closed. 245
Code 45 Direction commanded with RCU
enable valve off. 1
Code 55 Enable valve stuck closed (no
flow).
Code 56 Powered up with reverser lever
in direction position.
AG,LX25546,676NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-RCU-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1081
RCU References
RCU Beep Mode Test (RCU 02)
The RCU primary beep mode (access Address RCU connectors while in the “beep” mode. If a “beep” is
02) can help the technician with diagnosis in two ways. heard, the display will show the address number of the
It can be used to: circuit that caused the “beep”.
• “verify” operation of devices that are part of the The circuit address number can then be accessed
control unit circuits. (using the turn signal switch) to check the operation of
• help find device information, harness and connector the circuit device, using the “on-board” diagnostic
problems. feature.
Whenever a “change of state” is detected, the warning The following diagnostic addresses support the
horn will “beep” to inform the technician of the change. diagnostic (“beep”) mode:
• RCU 03 — Not-Neutral Switch Signal / Not-Neutral
NOTE: A “change of state” would be a switch going Relay Signal / Enable Signal from Latch Relay
from open to closed or closed to open. Also,
by moving a potentiometer type control slowly • RCU 04 — Not-Neutral Switch Signal / Forward
through it’s operation range, a break or “bad Switch Signal / Reverse Switch Signal
the same way. • RCU 05 — Park Switch Signal / Vacant / Vacant
245
RCU The audible signal can be used to verify that a switch • RCU 06— Park Switch Signal / Neutral Start Switch
2
is changing state when it is activated (or is not Signal / Enable Pressure Switch Signal
“beep”). • RCU 07 — System Voltage / Enable Solenoid Status
/ Detent Solenoid Status
It can also be used to check for connector and
harness defects by moving/tugging on harness or
AG,LX24887,121NA –19–01JAN01–1/1

111401
PN=1082
RCU References
Test Procedure for Diagnostic Address RCU 03
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: Related Service Codes 29, 34, 44, 47, 53, 55 and 67.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: Service Codes that indicate problems with the
– “Engine wiring harness W3”, Section 240, Group start-in-gear circuit.
10.
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. Engine ON.
Section 240, Group 10. NOTE: After 5 seconds, the reverse drive lever returns
• For electrical troubleshooting see Functional and automatically to neutral.
– SE19 — RCU wiring diagram, Section 240, Group If any of the positions on the display are incorrect, the
15. cause of the fault can be determined as follows:
Access Address RCU 03.
Pos. on display Description/components to be checked Display

1st pos. Not-Neutral Switch 0 in neutral
1 in forward and reverse positions
2nd pos. Not-Neutral Relay 0 in neutral 245
1 in forward and reverse positions RCU
3
3rd pos. Enable signal (from Latch Relay; it is dependent on 0 no enable signal
the Not-Neutral Relay) 1 with valid enable signal
Reverse drive lever in neutral. If there is a discrepancy at 2nd position (tens digit) on
the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Not-Neutral
Display: 03:001 Relay Circuit”.
Reverse drive lever in "forward" or "reverse". If there is a discrepancy at 3rd position (ones digit) on
the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Latch Relay
Display: 03:111 Circuit”.
If there is a discrepancy at 1st position (hundreds

digit) on the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for
Not-Neutral Switch Circuit”.
AG,LX24887,120NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure for Not-Neutral Switch (S46) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the not-neutral switch S46, supply circuit (lead 622) and output circuit
(lead 691).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1083
RCU References
1 Preliminary Check for Check following items: OK: GO TO 2.

Not-Neutral Switch
(S46) Circuit ❒ Fuse F201 in Load Center 2 NOT OK: Replace fuse
❒ Not-Neutral Relay K212 in Load Center 2 F201 or relay K212.
– – –1/1
2 Check Not-Neutral Disconnect X201 (W4; SE19) and bypass pin A (lead 622) and pin B (lead 691). OK: GO TO 3.
Switch Circuit
Ignition ON. NOT OK: Display shows
0XX, GO TO 4.
Address RCU 03 - Not-Neutral Switch Circuit—Specification
Not-neutral switch circuit check—Bypass
pin A and pin B at connector X201............................................................................. 1XX
– – –1/1
245
3 Check Reverse Drive Ignition OFF. OK: Check adjustment of
RCU
Lever (S46) reverse drive lever, see
4
Check reverse drive lever S46 (connected to X201 at wiring harness W4, SE19). reference “Adjusting the
Reverse Drive Lever”,
Disconnect X201 (W4; SE19). Section 255, Group 15.
Check reverse drive lever: IF OK: Check connectors

X201 and X198 (lead
Reverse Drive Lever Check at Connector X201 691) for bad/loose
Reverse Drive Lever Continuity at connector Continuity at connector contacts.
position X201 between X201 between
NOT OK: Repair/Replace
Forward position Pin A and Pin B Pin C and Pin D (Forward defective Reverse Drive
(Not-Neutral Switch) Switch) Lever S46.
Reverse position Pin A and Pin B Pin C and Pin E (Reverse
(Not-Neutral Switch) Switch)
– – –1/1
4 Check Power Supply Ignition ON. OK: GO TO 6.

(Lead 622)
Use a multimeter and measure supply voltage between pin A (lead 622) at connector NOT OK: GO TO 5.
X201 (W4; SE19) and an appropriate ground connection:
Specification
Power supply for not-neutral switch
(S46)—Voltage ........................................................................................................... 12 V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1084
RCU References
5 Check Supply Circuit Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

(Lead 622) connectors of supply
Check supply lead 622: circuit (lead 622) for
bad/loose contacts.
• for continuity
• for a short to ground NOT OK: Repair as
Wiring connections: operational test.
Supply Circuit (Lead 622) Check

Circuit from to to
Supply Lead 622 Fuse F201 Pin A X201 Pin A X222 Pin E2
in W4 (Reverse Drive (connection to
Lever) W34)
Supply Lead 622 X222 Pin E2 X218 Pin 1 (ECU
in W34 (connection to W4) Controller)
SE19.
– – –1/1
245
6 Check Not-Neutral Ignition OFF. OK: Check connectors
RCU
Switch Output Signal X201, X222 and X198
5
(Lead 691) Check signal lead 691: at connector X201 pin B (W4; SE19) (lead 691) for bad/loose
contacts.
• for continuity
• for a short to another conductor needed and carry out an
operational test.
Wiring connections:
Not-Neutral Switch Output Signal Check

Circuit from to to
Output Signal Lead X201 Pin B K212 Pin 86 X222 Pin M7
691 in W4 (Reverse Drive (Not-Neutral relay) (connection to
Lever) W34)
Output Signal Lead X222 Pin M7 X198 Pin F3 (RCU
691 in W34 (connection to W4) Controller)
SE19.
– – –1/1
Test Procedure for Not-Neutral Relay (K212) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the not-neutral relay K212, supply circuit (lead 672), ground circuit
(lead 310) and output circuit (lead 693 and lead 694).
– – –1/1
1 Preliminary Checks Check following items: OK: GO TO 2.

for Not-Neutral Relay
(K212) Circuit ❒ Fuse F202 in Load Center 2 NOT OK: Replace
❒ Not-neutral relay K212 in Load Center 2 defective fuse F202 or
Relay K212.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1085
RCU References

(Lead 672) for
Not-Neutral Relay Use a multimeter and check supply voltage (lead 672) between pin 30 and pin 85 at NOT OK: GO TO 3.
K212 K212:
Specification
Supply voltage for not-neutral relay
K212—Voltage ........................................................................................................... 12 V
– – –1/1
3 Check Ground Lead Ignition OFF. OK: Check not-neutral

310 relay (K212) ground
Check ground connection XGND5 (W4; SE19). connection plug for
bad/loose contacts.
IF OK: Plug contacts are
Ground Circuit (Lead 310) Check OK, perform “Test
Circuit from to Procedure for System
245 Voltage”, Section 245,
RCU Ground Lead 310 in W4 XGND5 (Ground K212 Pin 85 (Not-Neutral Group RCU.
6 Connection) Relay)
NOT OK: Repair as
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for circuit diagram see SE19. needed and carry out an
operational test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1086
RCU References
4 Check Not-Neutral Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Relay Signals (Lead connectors of output
693 and Lead 694) Check signal lead 693 and 694: at relay K212 pin 87 and pin 87A (W4; SE19) signal (lead 693 and 694)
for bad/loose contacts.
• for continuity
operational test.
• Wiring connection:
Lead 693: (Not-Neutral Signal)
Not-Neutral Signal (Lead 693)

Circuit from to
Not-Neutral Signal lead K212 Pin 87 (Not-Neutral X222 Pin M3 (connection
693 in W4 Relay) to W34)
Not-Neutral Signal lead X222 Pin M3 (connection X198 Pin E2 (RCU
693 in W34 to W4) Controller)
Lead 694: (Neutral Signal)
(from K212 and signal from latch relay K213 after starting in neutral)
Neutral Signal (Lead 694)

Circuit from to to to 245
Neutral Output K212 Pin 87A K213 Pin 86 K213 Pin 87 X222 Pin M1 RCU
Signal Lead (Not-Neutral (Latch Relay) (Latch Relay) (connection to 7
694 in W4 Relay K212) W34)
Neutral Output X222 Pin M1 X198 Pin D3
Signal Lead (connection to (RCU
694 in W34 W34) Controller)
SE19.
– – –1/1
Test Procedure for Latch Relay (K213) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the latch relay K213, supply circuit (lead 672), ground circuit (lead 310)
and output circuit (lead 694).
– – –1/1
1 Preliminary Checks of Check following items: OK: GO TO 2.

Latch-Relay (K213)
Circuit ❒ Fuse F202 in Load Center 2 NOT OK: Replace
❒ Diode V202 in Load Center 2 defective component and
❒ Latch relay K213 in Load Center 2 carry out an operational
❒ Starter Relay K01, Section 240, Group 25. test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1087
RCU References

(Lead 672) for Latch
Relay K213 Use a multimeter and measure supply voltage between pin 30 at K213 (W4; SE19) NOT OK: Voltage not in
and an appropriate ground connection: specification, perform
“Test Procedure for
Specification System Voltage”, Section
Supply voltage for latch relay K213— 245, Group RCU.
Voltage ....................................................................................................................... 12 V
– – –1/1
3 Check Latch Relay Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Output Signal (Lead connectors of the output
694) Check signal lead 694: at latch relay K213 pin 86 (W4; SE19) signal (lead 694) circuit
• for a short to another conductor IF OK: Contacts (pins)
• for continuity are OK, GO TO 4.
245 Wiring connection: NOT OK: Repair as

RCU needed and carry out an
8 Output Signal lead 694: operational test.
Latch Relay Output Signal (Lead 694) Check

Output Signal K213 Pin 87 K213 Pin 86 K212 Pin 87A X222 Pin M1
Lead 694 in (Latch Relay) (Latch Relay) (Not-Neutral (connection to
W4 Relay) W34)
Output Signal X222 Pin M1 X198 Pin D3
Lead 694 in (connection to (RCU
W34 W4) Controller)
SE19.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1088
RCU References
4 Check Ground Lead Ignition OFF. OK: Perform “Starting

692/309 Circuit Test”, Section 245,
Check ground lead 692/309: at Latch Relay K213 pin 85 (W4; SE19) Group ECU.

operational test.
Wiring harness:
Latch Relay Ground Lead (Lead 692/309) Check

Circuit from to to
Ground Lead 692 K213 Pin 85 Diode V202 Pin E
in W4 (Latch Relay) (D222E)
Ground Lead 309 Diode V202 Pin A Diode V203 Pin E X03 Pin B12
in W4 (D222A) (D223E) (connection to W3)
Ground Lead 309 X03/2 Pin B12 Starter Relay K01 Starter Motor M01
in W3 (connection to W4) Pin 4 Pin 50
Ground Lead 310 Starter Relay K01 Ground connection
in W3 Pin 2 XGND9
IMPORTANT: Check all connectors of the complete ground wiring harness (from
Latch Relay K213 to the Starter Relay K01) for bad/loose contacts!
For connector location and pin arrangement see W3 and W4; for circuit diagram see 245
SE19. RCU
9
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1089
RCU References
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: Access Address RCU 04.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: Related Service Codes 15, 32, 34, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44,
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. 47, 52, 56 and 67.
Section 240, Group 10. These Service Codes indicate problems with the
• For electrical troubleshooting see Functional and reverse lever switches.
– SE19 — RCU wiring diagram, Section 240, Group If any of the positions on the display are incorrect, the

1st pos. Not-Neutral Switch 0 in neutral
1 in forward and reverse positions
2nd pos. Forward Switch 0 in neutral
1 in forward position
3rd pos. Reverse Switch 0 in neutral
1 in reverse position
245
RCU Reverse drive lever in neutral. If there is a discrepancy at 2nd position (tens digit) on
10
the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Forward
Display: 04:000 Switch Circuit”.
Reverse drive lever in “forward”. If there is a discrepancy at 3rd position (ones digit) on
the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Reverse
Display: 04:110 Switch Circuit”.
Reverse drive lever in "reverse". NOTE: After 5 seconds, the reverse drive lever returns
automatically to neutral.
Display: 04:101

digit) on the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for
Not-Neutral Switch Circuit”.
AG,LX24887,119NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure for Not-Neutral Switch (S46) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the not-neutral switch S46, supply circuit (lead 622) and output circuit
(lead 691).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1090
RCU References
1 Preliminary Check of Check following items: OK: GO TO 2.

Not-Neutral Switch
(S46) Circuit ❒ Fuse F201 in Load Center 2 NOT OK: Replace fuse
❒ Not-neutral relay K212 in Load Center 2 F201 or relay K212.
– – –1/1
2 Check Not-Neutral Disconnect X201 (W4; SE19) and bypass pin A (lead 622) and pin B (lead 691). OK: GO TO 3.
Switch Circuit
0XX, GO TO 4.
Address RCU 03 - Not-Neutral Switch Circuit—Specification
Not-neutral switch circuit check—Bypass
pin A and pin B at connector X201............................................................................. 1XX
– – –1/1
245
RCU
11
Check reverse drive lever S46 (connected to X201 at wiring harness W4, SE19). “Adjusting the Reverse
Drive Lever”, Section 255,
Disconnect X201 (W4; SE19). Group 15.
Check reverse drive lever: IF OK: Check connectors

X201 and X198 (lead
Reverse Drive Lever Check at Connector X201 691) for bad/loose
Reverse Drive Lever Continuity at connector Continuity at connector contacts.
position X201 between X201 between
NOT OK: Repair/replace
Forward position Pin A and Pin B Pin C and Pin D (Forward defective reverse drive
(Not-Neutral Switch) Switch) lever S46.
– – –1/1

(Lead 622)
Use a multimeter and measure supply voltage between pin A (lead 622) at connector NOT OK: GO TO 5.
X201 (W4; SE19) and an appropriate ground connection:
Specification
Power supply for not-neutral switch
(S46)—Voltage ........................................................................................................... 12 V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1091
RCU References
5 Check Supply Circuit Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

(Lead 622) connectors of supply
Check supply lead 622: circuit (lead 622) for
bad/loose contacts.
• for continuity
Wiring connection: operational test.

Circuit from to to
Supply Lead 622 Fuse F201 Pin A X201 Pin A X222 Pin E2
in W4 (Reverse Drive (connection to
Lever) W34)
Supply Lead 622 X222 Pin E2 X218 Pin 1 (ECU
in W34 (connection to W4) Controller)
SE19.
– – –1/1
245
6 Check Not-Neutral Ignition OFF. OK: Check connectors
RCU
12
(Lead 691) Check signal lead 691: at connector X201 Pin B (W4; SE19) (lead 691) for bad/loose
contacts.
• for continuity
operational test.
Wiring connection:
Not-Neutral Switch Output Signal Check

Circuit from to to
Output Signal Lead X201 Pin B K212 Pin 86 X222 Pin M7
691 in W4 (Reverse Drive (Not-Neutral relay) (connection to
Lever) W34)
SE19.
– – –1/1
Test Procedure for Forward Switch (S46) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the forward switch S46, supply circuit (lead 672) and output circuit
(lead 686).
– – –1/1
1 Preliminary Check for Check following items: OK: GO TO 2.

Forward Switch (S46)
Circuit ❒ Fuse F202 in Load Center 2 NOT OK: Replace
❒ Forward relay K211 in Load Center 2 defective fuse F202 or
relay K211.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1092
RCU References
2 Check Forward Disconnect X201 (W4; SE19) and bypass pin C (lead 672) and pin D (lead 686). OK: GO TO 3.
X0X, GO TO 4.
Address RCU 04 - Forward Switch Circuit—Specification
Forward switch circuit check—Bypass
pin C and pin D at X201 ............................................................................................. X1X
– – –1/1

Check reverse drive lever: IF OK: Check all relevant

connectors of the forward
Reverse Drive Lever Check at Connector X201 switch signal lead 686 for 245
Reverse Drive Lever Continuity at connector Continuity at connector bad/loose contacts. RCU
position X201 between X201 between 13
– – –1/1
4 Check Power Supply Disconnect X201 (W4; SE19). OK: GO TO 6.

(Lead 672) for
Forward Switch Ignition ON. NOT OK: GO TO 5.
Use a multimeter and measure supply voltage between pin C (lead 672) at connector
X201 (W4; SE19) and an appropriate ground connection.
Specification
Supply voltage for forward switch
(S46)—Voltage ........................................................................................................... 12 V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1093
RCU References
5 Check Supply Lead Ignition OFF. OK: Check connector

672 X201 Pin C (lead 672) for
Check Supply Lead 672: at connector X201 pin C (W4; SE19) bad/loose contact.
• for continuity IF OK: Contact is OK,

• for a short to ground perform “Test Procedure
for System Voltage
Wiring connection: Check”, Section 245,
Group RCU.
Supply Lead 672 Check
Supply Lead 672 in W4 Fuse F202 Pin A X201 Pin C (Reverse operational test.
Drive Lever)
– – –1/1
245
6 Check Forward Check signal lead 686: at connector X201 pin D (W4; SE19) OK: Check connectors
RCU
Switch Output Signal X201 and X222 (lead
14
(Lead 686) Circuit • for continuity 686) for bad/loose
• for a short to ground contacts.
NOT OK: Repair as
• Wiring connection: needed and carry out an
operational test.
Forward Switch Signal (Lead 686) Check
Circuit from to to
Output Signal Lead X201 Pin D K211 Pin 30 X222 Pin M6
686 in W4 (Reverse Drive (Forward Relay) (connection to
Lever) W34)
SE19.
– – –1/1
Test Procedure for Reverse Switch (S46) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the reverse switch S46, supply circuit (lead 672) and output circuit
(lead 687).
– – –1/1
1 Preliminary Check of Check following items: OK: GO TO 2.

Reverse Switch (S46)
Circuit ❒ Fuse F202 in Load Center 2 NOT OK: Replace fuse
❒ Reverse relay K210 in Load Center 2 F202 or relay K210.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1094
RCU References
2 Check Reverse Disconnect X201 (W4; SE19) and bypass pin C (lead 672) and pin E (lead 687). OK: GO TO 3.
XX0, GO TO 4.
Address RCU 04 - Reverse Switch Circuit—Specification
Reverse switch circuit check—Bypass
pin C and pin E at X201 ............................................................................................. XX1
– – –1/1

Check reverse drive lever: IF OK: Check all

connectors of the reverse
Reverse Drive Lever Check at Connector X201 output signal (lead 687) 245
Reverse Drive Lever Continuity at connector Continuity at connector for bad/loose contacts. RCU
position X201 between X201 between 15
– – –1/1

(Lead 672) for
Reverse Switch Ignition ON. NOT OK: GO TO 5.
Use a multimeter and measure voltage between pin C (lead 672) at connector X201
(W4; SE19) and an appropriate ground connection.
Specification
Supply voltage for reverse switch
(S46)—Voltage ........................................................................................................... 12 V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1095
RCU References

672 X201 Pin C (lead 672) for
Check Supply Lead 672: at connector X201 pin C (W4; SE19) bad/loose contact.
• for continuity IF OK: Contact is OK,

• for a short to ground perform “Test Procedure
for System Voltage
Wiring connection: Check”, Section 245,
Group RCU.
Supply Lead 672 in W4 Fuse F202 Pin A X201 Pin C (Reverse operational test.
Drive Lever)
– – –1/1
245
6 Check Reverse Ignition OFF. OK: Check connectors
RCU
16
(Lead 687) Check output signal lead 687: at connector X201 pin E (W4; SE19) (lead 687) for bad/loose
contacts.
• for continuity
operational test.
Reverse Output Signal Lead 687 Check

Circuit from to to
Output Signal Lead X201 Pin E K210 Pin 30 X222 Pin M4
687 in W4 (Reverse Drive (Reverse Relay) (connection to
Lever) W34)
Output Signal Lead X222 Pin M4 X198 Pin E3 (RCU
SE19.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1096
RCU References
• For component location and pin arrangement see: Related Service Codes 32 and 34.
– “Electronic Control Unit wiring harness W34”, These Service Codes indicate problems with the park
Section 240, Group 10. switch.
– SE19 — RCU wiring diagram, Section 240, Group
15.

1st pos. Park Switch 0 not in park position
1 in park position
2nd pos. Vacant 0 is always displayed
3rd pos. Vacant 0 is always displayed
Range shift lever NOT in park position. Display: 05:100 (in park position)
245
RCU
Display: 05:000 (not in park position) If there is a discrepancy at 1st position (hundreds 17
digit) on the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Park
Range shift lever in "park" position. Switch Circuit”.
AG,LX24887,118NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure for Park Switch (B51) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the park switch B51, supply circuit (lead 672) and output circuit (lead
685).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1097
RCU References
1 Check Park Switch 1.1 OK: GO TO 1.2.

Circuit
Disconnect X212 (W4; SE19) and bypass pin A (lead 685) and pin D (lead 050). NOT OK: Display shows
1XX, GO TO 3.
Ignition ON.
RCU Address 05 - Neutral Position—Specification

Park switch B51 open - not in park
position—Bypass pin A and pin D at
X212 ............................................................................................................................ 0XX
1.2 OK: GO TO 2.
Bypass pin A (lead 685) and pin B (lead 672) at connector X212 (W4;SE19). NOT OK: Display shows
0XX, check Fuse F202.
RCU Address 05 - Park Position—Specification
Park switch B51 closed - in park IF OK: Fuse F202 is OK,
position—Bypass pin A and pin B at GO TO 3.
X212 ............................................................................................................................ 1XX
245
RCU
18
– – –1/1
2 Check Park Switch Disconnect X212 (W4; SE19). OK: Check connectors
B51 X212, X222 and X198
Ignition OFF. (lead 685) for bad/loose
contacts.
Park Switch B51 Component Test
NOT OK: Repair as
Range shift lever Park switch B51 Continuity at connector
position position X212 between
operational test.
neutral closed Pin A and Pin D
in park open Pin A and Pin B
NOTE: If the tractor is not equipped with reverse lockout switch B50, then the reverse
lockout signal lead 684 is bypassed with the ground lead 050 at connector X212.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1098
RCU References

for Park Switch B51
Use a multimeter and measure supply voltage between pin B (lead 672) and pin D
(lead 050) at connector X212 (W4; SE19).
Specification
Supply voltage for park switch B51—
Voltage ....................................................................................................................... 12 V
– – –1/1

672 and Ground Lead X212 (lead 672) and
050 Check Supply Lead 672: at connector X212 pin B (W4; SE19) ground connection
XGND2 for bad/loose
• for continuity contacts.
IF OK: Contacts are OK,
Check ground lead 050: at connector X212 pin D (W4; SE19) perform “Test Procedure
for System Voltage”, 245
• for continuity Section 245, Group RCU. RCU
19
Supply Lead 672 and Ground Lead 050 Check operational test.
Circuit from to
Supply Lead 672 in W4 Fuse F202 Pin A X212 Pin B (Park switch)
Ground Lead 050 in W4 XGND2 X212 Pin D (Park Switch)
– – –1/1
5 Check Park Switch Ignition OFF. OK: Check connectors

Output Signal (Lead X212, X222 and X198
685) Check signal lead 685: at connector X212 pin A (W4; SE19) (lead 685) for bad/loose
contacts.
• for continuity
operational test.
Park Switch Signal (Lead 685)

Circuit from to
Output Signal Lead 685 in X212 Pin A (Park Switch) X222 Pin L7 (connection
W4 to W34)
Output Signal Lead 685 in X222 Pin L7 (connection X198 Pin D2 (RCU
W34 to W4) Controller)
SE19.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1099
RCU References
• For component location and pin arrangement see: Related Service Codes 27, 29, 32, 34, 47, 51, 53, 55
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. and 67.
Group 10. These Service Codes indicate problems with
– “RCU wiring harness W20”, Section 240, Group transmission valves and switches and with the neutral
10. message from neutral start switch (state of neutral
– “Electronic Control Unit wiring harness W34”, switch cannot be detected).
• For electrical troubleshooting see Functional and Engine ON.
– SE1 — Starter and Charging Wiring Diagram, If any of the positions on the display are incorrect, the
Section 240, Group 15. cause of the fault can be determined as follows:
15.

245 1st pos. Park Switch 0 not in park position
RCU 1 in park position
20
2nd pos. Neutral signal from neutral start switch 0 switch open (not neutral)
1 switch closed (neutral)
3rd pos. Enable Pressure Switch 0 switch open (pressure present)
1 switch closed (no pressure)
Range shift lever in "park" position (reverse drive lever Display: 06:011
returns automatically to neutral)
Display: 06:110 digit) on the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Park
Switch Circuit”.
Reverse drive lever in "forward" or "reverse".
If there is a discrepancy at 2nd position (tens digit) on
NOTE: After 5 seconds, the reverse drive lever returns the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Neutral Start
automatically to neutral. Switch Circuit”.
Display: 06:100 If there is a discrepancy at 3rd position (ones digit) on

the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Enable
Switch off parking lock (range lever NOT in park and Pressure Switch Circuit”.
reverser lever in neutral position).
AG,LX24887,117NA –19–01JAN01–1/1

111401
PN=1100
RCU References
Test Procedure for Park Switch (B51) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the park switch B51, supply circuit (lead 672) and output circuit (lead
685).
– – –1/1
1 Check Park Switch 1.1 OK: GO TO 1.2.

Circuit
Disconnect X212 (W4; SE19) and bypass pin A (lead 685) and pin D (lead 050). NOT OK: Display shows
1XX, GO TO 3.
Ignition ON.
RCU Address 05 - Neutral Position—Specification

Park switch B51 open - not in park
position—Bypass pin A and pin D at
X212 ............................................................................................................................ 0XX
1.2 OK: GO TO 2.
Bypass pin A (lead 685) and pin B (lead 672) at connector X212 (W4; SE19). NOT OK: Display shows
0XX, check Fuse F202. 245
RCU Address 05 - Park Position—Specification RCU
Park switch B51 closed - in park IF OK: Fuse F202 is OK, 21
position—Bypass pin A and pin B at GO TO 3.
X212 ............................................................................................................................ 1XX
– – –1/1
2 Check Park Switch Disconnect X212 (W4; SE19). OK: Check connectors
B51 X212, X222 and X198
Ignition OFF. (lead 685) for bad/loose
contacts.
Park Switch B51 Component Test
Range shift lever Park switch B51 Continuity at connector NOT OK: Repair as
position position X212 between needed and carry out an
operational test.
neutral closed Pin A and Pin D
in park open Pin A and Pin B
NOTE: If the tractor is not equipped with reverse lockout switch B50, then the reverse
lockout signal lead 684 is bypassed with the ground lead 050 at connector X212.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1101
RCU References

for Park Switch B51
Use a multimeter and measure supply voltage between pin B (lead 672) and pin D
(lead 050) at connector X212 (W4; SE19).
Specification
Supply voltage for park switch B51—
Voltage ....................................................................................................................... 12 V
– – –1/1

672 and Ground Lead X212 (lead 672) and
050 Check Supply Lead 672: at connector X212 pin B (W4; SE19) ground connection
XGND2 for bad/loose
• for continuity contacts.
IF OK: Contacts are OK,
Check ground lead 050: at connector X212 pin D (W4; SE19) perform “Test Procedure
245 for System Voltage”,
RCU • for continuity Section 245, Group RCU.
22
Supply Lead 672 and Ground Lead 050 Check operational test.
Circuit from to
Supply Lead 672 in W4 Fuse F202 Pin A X212 Pin B (Park switch)
Ground Lead 050 in W4 XGND2 X212 Pin D (Park Switch)
– – –1/1
5 Check Park Switch Ignition OFF. OK: Check connectors

Output Signal (lead X212, X222 and X198
685) Check signal lead 685: at connector X212 pin A (W4; SE19) (lead 685) for bad/loose
contacts.
• for continuity
operational test.
Park Switch Signal (Lead 685)

Circuit from to
Output Signal Lead 685 in X212 Pin A (Park Switch) X222 Pin L7 (connection
W4 to W34)
Output Signal Lead 685 in X222 Pin L7 (connection X198 Pin D2 (RCU
SE19.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1102
RCU References
Test Procedure for Neutral Start Switch (B36) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the neutral start switch B36.
– – –1/1
1 Check Neutral Start Disconnect neutral start switch connector X93 (W13; SE1). OK: GO TO 2.
Switch (B36) Circuit
X0X (not neutral), perform
RCU Address 06 - Neutral Start Switch Circuit—Specification “Starting Circuit Test”,
Neutral start switch circuit check— Section 245, Group ECU.
Bypass pin A and pin B at X93................................................................................... X1X
– – –1/1
245
2 Check Neutral Start Check neutral start switch B36 (connected to X93 at W13; SE1): OK: Check all relevant
RCU
Switch B36 connectors of the neutral
23
Ignition OFF. start switch circuit (lead
311/506) for bad/loose
IMPORTANT: On account of oil leaks place a bucket under neutral start switch contacts.
(B36) before removing it.
• Remove connector X93 (W13; SE1) at neutral start switch. X0X (not neutral),
• Remove neutral start switch (B36). repair/replace defective
• Install connector X93 to neutral start switch (B36). neutral start switch (B36).
• Ignition ON.
• Press the ball of the neutral start switch.
• Address RCU 06 shows X1X.
– – –1/1
Test Procedure for Enable Pressure Switch (B52) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the enable pressure switch B52, supply circuit (lead 672) and output
circuit (lead 699).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1103
RCU References
1 Check Enable Disconnect enable pressure switch connector X194 (W20; SE19). OK: GO TO 2.
Pressure Circuit
XX0, GO TO 3.
RCU Address 06 - Enable Pressure Switch Circuit—Specification
Enable pressure switch circuit check—
Bypass pin A and pin B at X194................................................................................. XX1
– – –1/1
2 Check for Hydraulic Engine ON. OK: No additional

Problems flashing of the red STOP
An additional flashing of the red STOP light together with the transmission/hydraulic oil light and
pressure light on the instrument unit will indicate a general transmission/hydraulic transmission/hydraulic oil
problem. pressure light, replace
enable sressure switch
B52 and repeat test.
245 NOT OK: Additional

RCU flashing of the red STOP
24 light and
transmission/hydraulic oil
pressure light, perform
“Transmission System
Pressure Check”, Section
255, Group 15 and repeat
check.
– – –1/1

(Lead 672)
Use a multimeter and measure voltage between pin A (lead 672) at connector X194
(W20; SE19) and tractor frame (ground connection).
Specification
Supply voltage for enable pressure
switch B52—Voltage .................................................................................................. 12 V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1104
RCU References
4 Check Supply Lead Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

672 connectors of the supply
Check Supply Lead 672: circuit (lead 672) for
bad/loose contacts.
• for continuity
• for a short to ground IF OK: Contacts are OK,
perform “Test Procedure
Wiring connection: for System Voltage”,
Section 245, Group RCU.
Supply Lead 672 in W4 Fuse F202 Pin A X193 Pin A (connection to operational test.
W20)
Supply Lead 672 in W20 X193 Pin A (connection to X194 Pin A (Enable
W4) Pressure Switch)
SE19.
– – –1/1
245
5 Check Enable Ignition OFF. OK: Check connectors
RCU
Pressure Switch X193, X194, X222 and
25
Signal (Lead 699) Check signal lead 699: X198 (lead 699) for
bad/loose contacts.
• for continuity
operational test.
Enable Pressure Switch Output Signal (Lead 699)

Circuit from to
Output Signal Lead 699 in X194 Pin B (Enable X193 Pin E (connection to
W20 Pressure Switch) W4)
Output Signal Lead 699 in X193 Pin E (connection to X222 Pin L3 (connection
W4 W20) to W4)
Output Signal Lead 699 in X222 Pin L3 (connection X198 Pin B3 (RCU
see SE19.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1105
RCU References
• For component location and pin arrangement see: Related Service Codes 15, 25, 27, 29, 31, 48, 55, 57
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. and 58.
– “RCU wiring harness W20”, Section 240, Group
10. These Service Codes indicate problems with the
– “Electronic Control Unit wiring harness W34”, system voltage, enable solenoid and detent solenoid.
• For electrical troubleshooting see Functional and Engine ON.
– SE2 — BIF wiring diagram, Section 240, Group If any of the positions on the display are incorrect, the
15.
– SE20 — SFA wiring diagram, Section 240, Group
15.
Pos. on display Description/components to be checked Display (desired value)

245 1st pos. System voltage 0 voltage OK
RCU 1 voltage too low
26
2nd pos. Enable Solenoid 0 fault
1 no fault
3rd pos. Detent Solenoid 0 fault
1 no fault
Reverse drive lever in neutral, forward or reverse with If there is a discrepancy at 2nd position (tens digit) on
range lever in park. the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Enable
Solenoid Circuit”.
Display: 07:011.
If there is a discrepancy at 3rd position (ones digit) on
If there is a discrepancy at 1st position (hundreds the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Detent
digit) on the display, GO TO “Test Procedure for Solenoid Circuit”.
System Voltage”.
AG,LX24887,116NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure for System Voltage
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the system voltage (supply lead 672 and ground lead 050).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1106
RCU References
1 System Voltage Access Address BCU 32. OK: GO TO 3.

Check
Specification NOT OK: GO TO 2.
Supply voltage - ignition ON.—Voltage ................................... between 11.2 and 12.7 V
Supply voltage - engine ON.—Voltage .................................... between 13.2 and 14.8 V
– – –1/1
2 General Voltage Check following items: OK: GO TO 3.

Check
❒ battery, Section 240, Group 25. NOT OK: Repair/replace
❒ alternator, Section 240, Group 25. defective battery,
❒ alternator belt alternator or alternator
belt.
– – –1/1
3 RCU Power Supply Most of the harness problems are related to connector problems and/or bad ground OK: Check “Electronic
and Ground Circuit connections. The following connectors and ground connections are suspect: Control Unit Supply
Check Circuit 072”, Section 240,
Check all suspect connectors for bad, loose, corroded and widened contacts (pins). Group 16B.
General Connector Test OK: If the check of the

Circuit from to to to supply voltage circuit and
ground circuit do not
Supply Lead Fuse F202 Pin K213 Pin 30 K212 Pin 30 X201 Pin C reveal any problems and 245
672 in W4 A (Latch Relay) (Not-Neutral (Reverse no other RCU Service RCU
Relay) Drive Lever) Codes are stored, replace 27
Supply Lead Fuse F202 Pin X212 Pin B X193 Pin A X222 Pin L6 the RCU.
672 in W4 A (Park Switch) (connection to (connection to
W20) W34) NOT OK: Repair as
needed.
Supply Lead X193 Pin A X194 Pin A
672 in W20 (connection to (Enable
W4) Pressure
Switch)
Supply Lead X222 Pin L6 X198 Pin D1 X211 Pin E1
672 in W34 (connection to (RCU (SFA
W4) Controller) Controller)
Ground Lead XGND2 X222 Pin A1
050 in W4 (Ground (connection to
Connection) W34)
Ground Lead X222 Pin A1 X198 Pin C3
050 in W34 (connection to (RCU
W4) Controller)
see SE19 and SE20.
– – –1/1
Test Procedure for Enable Solenoid (Y07) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the enable solenoid Y07, supply circuit (lead 698) and ground circuit
(lead 310).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1107
RCU References
1 Check Enable Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 2.

Solenoid (Y07)
Disconnect X195 (W20, SE19). NOT OK: Replace
defective Enable Solenoid
Check resistance at enable solenoid Y07 (connected to X195 at wiring harness W20; Y07 and carry out an
SE19). operational test.
or continuity checks.
Enable Solenoid Y07 — Resistance—Specification

Enable solenoid removed from circuit—
Resistance ............................................................................. 10-12 Ohms at 20°C (68°F)
– – –1/1
245
RCU
28

111401
PN=1108
RCU References
2 Check Power Supply IMPORTANT: Supply voltage and current draw can only be measured under OK: GO TO 2.2.
for Enable Solenoid following conditions:
NOT OK: GO TO 3.
• Tractor is in diagnostic mode (spare fuse is inserted in fuse box location 115 before
ignition is switched ON).
• Range lever is in park position.
NOTE: For measurement use adapter wiring harness DFLX14 (see: “DFLX14 ––
Adapter Wiring Harness”, Section 299, Group 05). RCU will only send supply voltage
to enable solenoid in diagnostic mode.
Disconnect X195 (W20; SE19) and install adapter wiring harness DFLX14.
2.1 — Supply Voltage Check
Enter diagnostic mode and move range lever in park position.
Use adapter wiring harness DFLX14 and measure voltage between pin A (lead 698)
and pin B (lead 310) at connector X195 (W20; SE19).
Enable Solenoid Y07 — Supply Voltage—Specification

RCU in diagnostic mode and range lever
in park position—Voltage ........................................................................................... 12 V
245
RCU
2.2 –– Amperage Check OK: Check all relevant
29
connectors of the enable
Disconnect additional plug for amperage-measurement at adapter wiring harness solenoid circuit for bad,
DFLX14 and measure with multimeter between connections: loose, widened and
corroded contacts.
Ignition ON.
IF OK: Delete Service
Enable Solenoid Y07 — Amperage—Specification Code and carry out an
RCU is in diagnostic mode and range operational test (check
lever in park position—Amperage .................... 1 - 1.2 A at 20°C (68°F) and nominal 12 RCU for other stored
V Service Codes).
For connector location and pin arrangement see W20; for circuit diagram see SE19. NOT OK: Check ground
connection XGND1 of
enable solenoid, for
wiring connection GO TO
3.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1109
RCU References

698 connectors of supply
Check supply lead 698: at connector X193 pin D (W4/W20; SE19) circuit (lead 698) and
ground circuit (lead 310)
• for a short to ground for bad/loose contacts.
• for continuity
NOT OK: Repair as
Check ground lead 310: at connector X195 pin B (W20; SE19). needed and carry out an
operational test.
• for continuity
Wiring connection:
Supply Lead 698 and Ground Lead 310 Check

Supply Lead X198 Pin C2 X222 Pin L5
698 in W34 (RCU (connection to
Controller) W4)
Supply Lead X222 Pin L5 X193 Pin D K210 Pin 86 K211 Pin 86
698 in W4 (connection to (connection to (Reverse (Forward
W34) W20) Relay) Relay)
Supply Lead X193 Pin D X195 Pin A
698 in W20 (connection to (Enable
W4) Solenoid Y07)
245
RCU Ground Lead XGND1 X193 Pin F
30 310 in W4 (connection to
W20)
Ground Lead X193 Pin F X195 Pin B X196 Pin B X197 Pin B
310 in W20 (connection to (Enable (Forward (Reverse
W4) Solenoid Y07) Solenoid Y08) Solenoid Y09)
see SE19.
– – –1/1
Test Procedure for Detent Solenoid (S46) Circuit
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the detent solenoid S46, supply circuit (lead 688) and ground circuit
(lead 310).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1110
RCU References
1 Check Ground Check ground connection XGND1. OK: GO TO 2.

Connection for Detent
Solenoid (S46) Check ground lead 310: NOT OK: Repair as
• for continuity operational test.
Ground Lead 310 Check

Ground Lead XGND1 X201 Pin G X25 Pin 1 X25 Pin 14
310 in W4 (Ground (Reverse Drive (Basic (Basic
Connection) Lever) Informator, Informator,
yellow yellow
connector) connector)
SE19.
– – –1/1
245
2 Check Detent Ignition OFF. OK: Replace reverse
RCU
Solenoid Supply control switch S46 and
31
Circuit Check supply lead 688: carry out an operational
test.
• Wiring connection: operational test.

Circuit from to
Supply Lead 688 in W34 X198 Pin C1 (RCU X222 Pin L4 (connection
Controller) to W4)
Supply Lead 688 in W4 X222 Pin L4 (connection X201 Pin F (Reverse
to W34) Drive Lever)
SE19.
– – –1/1
Check Forward Solenoid (Y08) Circuit
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – SE19 — RCU wiring diagram, Section 240, Group
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. 15.
10.
AG,LX25546,466NA –19–01JAN01–1/1

111401
PN=1111
RCU References
Forward Solenoid (Y08) Circuit Check
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the forward solenoid Y08, supply circuit (lead 696 and 698) and
ground circuit (lead 310).
– – –1/1
1 Check Forward Ignition ON. OK: GO TO 2.

Switch and
Not-Neutral Switch Access Address RCU 04. NOT OK: Display does
not show 110 in forward
Reverse drive lever in forward position position, GO TO “Test
Procedure for Address
RCU Diagnostic Address 04—Specification RCU 04”, Section 245,
Not-neutral switch (S46)—Reverse drive Group RCU.
lever in forward ............................................................................................................ 1XX
Forward Switch (S46)—Reverse drive
lever in forward ............................................................................................................ X1X
Reverse switch (S46)—Reverse drive
lever in forward ............................................................................................................ XX0
– – –1/1
245
RCU
32

111401
PN=1112
RCU References
2 Check Forward IMPORTANT: Supply voltage and current draw can only be measured under OK: GO TO 2.2.
Solenoid (Y08) following conditions:
NOT OK: Replace
• Tractor is in diagnostic mode (spare fuse is inserted in fuse box location 115 before defective forward solenoid
Ignition is ON). Y08 and carry out an
• Range lever is in park position. operational test.
• Reverse drive lever is in forward position kept by detent solenoid (for only 5
seconds). Supply voltage measurement can only be done in this 5 seconds. After 5
seconds the reverse drive lever returns to neutral position.
2.1 - Resistance Check
Check resistance at forward solenoid Y08 (connected to X196 at wiring harness W20;
SE19).
Forward Solenoid Y08 — Resistance—Specification

Forward Solenoid removed from circuit—
2.2 - Supply Voltage Check OK: GO TO 2.3.

245
RCU
IMPORTANT: Supply voltage can only be measured if the reverse drive lever is NOT OK: GO TO 3
33
in forward position kept by the detent solenoid.
Enter diagnostic mode (fuse inserted before ignition ON), move range lever in park
position and reverse drive lever in forward position.
Measure voltage between pin A (lead 696) and pin B (lead 310) at connector X196
(W20; SE19).
Forward Solenoid Y08 — Supply Voltage—Specification

Reverse drive lever in forward position—
Voltage ....................................................................................................................... 12 V
2.3 - Amperage Check OK: Check all connectors

of the forward solenoid
IMPORTANT: Amperage can only be measured if the reverse drive lever is in circuit for bad, loose,
forward position kept by the detent solenoid. widened and corroded
contacts.
Adapter Wiring Harness”, Section 299, Group 05). IF OK: Delete Service
Disconnect additional plug for amperage-measurement at adapter wiring harness operational test (check
DFLX14 and measure with multimeter between connections: RCU for other stored
Service Codes).
Forward Solenoid Y08 — Amperage—Specification
Reverse drive lever in forward position— NOT OK: Check ground
Amperage ......................................................... 1 - 1.2 A at 20°C (68°F) and nominal 12 connection XGND1, for
V wiring connection GO
TO 3.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1113
RCU References
3 Check Solenoid Ignition OFF. OK: Check “forward relay

Ground Lead 310 K211”, Section 240,
Check ground lead 310: at connector X196 pin B (W20; SE19) Group 25.
• for continuity IF OK: Forward relay

K211 is OK, GO TO 4.
NOT OK: Repair as
Ground Circuit (Lead 310) Check needed.
Ground Lead XGND1 X193 Pin F
310 in W4 (connection to
W20)
310 in W20 (connection to (Forward (Enable (Reverse
SE19.
– – –1/1
245
4 Check Forward Relay Check ground lead 310: at forward relay K211 pin 85 (W4; SE19) OK: GO TO 5.
RCU
Ground Lead 310
34
needed.
Ground Circuit (Lead 310) Check

Ground Lead XGND 5 K211 Pin 85 K210 Pin 85 K212 Pin 85
310 in W4 (Ground (Forward (Reverse (Not-Neutral
Connection) Relay) Relay) Relay)
– – –1/1
5 Check Forward Signal Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 6.

to Forward Solenoid
Check forward signal (lead 696) from forward relay (K211) to forward solenoid (Y08): NOT OK: Repair as
needed.
• for continuity
Input Signal Circuit (Lead 696) Check

Circuit from to
Input Lead 696 in W4 K211 Pin 87 (Forward X193 Pin B (connection to
Relay) W20)
Input Lead 696 in W20 X193 Pin B (connection to X196 Pin A (Forward
W4) Solenoid Y08)
SE19.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1114
RCU References
6 Check RCU Signal to Check RCU signal (lead 698) to forward relay K211: OK: Check all relevant
Forward Relay connectors of the forward
• for continuity solenoid circuit for
• for a short to ground bad/loose contacts.
• Wiring connection: NOT OK: Repair as

RCU Output Signal Circuit (Lead 698) Check operational test.
Signal Lead 698 in wiring harness W4 /SE19
from to to to
X222 Pin L5 K211 Pin 86 K210 Pin 86 X193 Pin D
(connection to (Forward Relay) (Reverse Relay) (connection to
W34) W20)
Signal Lead 698 in wiring harness W20 / SE19
from to
X193 Pin D X195 Pin A
(connection to W4) (Enable Solenoid
Y07)
from to
X198 Pin C2 (RCU X222 Pin L5
Controller) (connection to W4)
245
RCU
see SE19.
– – –1/1
Check Reverse Solenoid (Y09) Circuit
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – SE19 — RCU wiring diagram, Section 240, Group
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. 15.
10.
AG,LX25546,467NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Reverse Solenoid (Y09) Circuit Check
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the reverse solenoid Y09, supply circuit (lead 697 and 698) and
ground circuit (lead 310).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1115
RCU References
1 Check Reverse Ignition ON. OK: GO TO 2.

Switch and
Not-Neutral Switch Access Address RCU 04. NOT OK: Display does
not show 101, GO TO
Move reverse drive lever in reverse position. “Test Procedure for
Address RCU 04”,
RCU Diagnostic Address 04—Specification Section 245, Group RCU.
Not-neutral switch (S46)—Reverse drive
lever in reverse ............................................................................................................ 1XX
Forward switch (S46)—Reverse drive
lever in reverse ............................................................................................................ X0X
Reverse switch (S46)—Reverse drive
lever in reverse ............................................................................................................ XX1
– – –1/1
245
RCU
36

111401
PN=1116
RCU References
2 Check Reverse IMPORTANT: Supply voltage and current draw can only be measured under OK: GO TO 2.2.
Solenoid (Y09) following conditions:
NOT OK: Replace
• Tractor is in diagnostic mode (spare fuse is inserted in fuse box location 115 before defective reverse solenoid
ignition is switched ON). Y09 and carry out an
• Range lever is in park position. operational test.
• Reverse drive lever is in reverse position kept by detent solenoid (for only 5
seconds). Supply voltage measurement can only be done in this 5 seconds. After 5
seconds the reverse drive lever returns to neutral position.
2.1 - Resistance Check
Check resistance at reverse solenoid Y09 (connected to X197 at wiring harness W20;
SE19).
Reverse Solenoid Y09 — Resistance—Specification

Reverse solenoid removed from cicuit—
2.2 - Supply Voltage Check OK: GO TO 2.3.

245
RCU
IMPORTANT: Supply voltage can only be measured if the reverse drive lever is NOT OK: GO TO 3.
37
in reverse position kept by the detent solenoid.
Enter diagnostic mode (fuse inserted before ignition is switched ON), move range lever
in park position and reverse drive lever in reverse position.
Measure voltage between pin A (lead 697) and pin B (lead 310) at connector X197
(W20; SE19).
Reverse Solenoid Y09 — Supply Voltage—Specification

Reverse drive lever in reverse position—
Voltage ....................................................................................................................... 12 V
2.3 - Amperage Check OK: Check all connectors

of the reverse solenoid
IMPORTANT: Amperage can only be measured if the reverse drive lever is in circuit for bad, loose,
reverse position kept by the detent solenoid. widened and corroded
contacts.
Adapter Wiring Harness”, Section 299, Group 05. IF OK: Delete service
code and carry out an
Disconnect additional plug for amperage-measurement at adapter wiring harness operational test (check
DFLX14 and measure with multimeter between connections: RCU for other stored
service codes).
Reverse Solenoid Y09 — Amperage—Specification
Reverse drive lever in reverse position— NOT OK: Check ground
Amperage ......................................................... 1 - 1.2 A at 20°C (68°F) and nominal 12 connection XGND1, for
V wiring connection GO
TO 3.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1117
RCU References
3 Check Solenoid Ignition OFF. OK: Check “reverse relay

Ground Lead 310 K210”, Section 240,
Check ground lead 310: at connector X197 pin B (W20; SE19) Group 25.
• for continuity IF OK: Reverse relay

K210 is OK, GO TO 4.
NOT OK: Repair as
Ground Circuit (Lead 310) Check needed.
Ground Lead XGND1 X193 Pin F
310 in W4 (connection to
W20)
310 in W20 (connection to (Reverse (Enable (Forward
SE19.
– – –1/1
245
4 Check Reverse Relay Check ground lead 310: at reverse relay K210 pin 85 (W4; SE19) OK: GO TO 5.
RCU
Ground Lead 310
38
needed.
Ground Circuit (Lead 310) Check

Ground Lead XGND 5 K210 Pin 85 K211 Pin 85 K212 Pin 85
310 in W4 (Ground (Reverse (Forward (Not-Neutral
Connection) Relay) Relay) Relay)
– – –1/1
5 Check Reverse Signal Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 6.

to Reverse Solenoid
Check reverse signal (lead 697) from reverse relay (K210) to reverse solenoid (Y09): NOT OK: Repair as
needed.
• for continuity
Input Signal Circuit (Lead 697) Check

Circuit from to
Input Lead 697 in W4 K210 Pin 87 (Reverse X193 Pin C (connection to
Relay) W20)
Input Lead 697 in W20 X193 Pin C (connection to X197 Pin A (Reverse
W4) Solenoid Y09)
SE19.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1118
RCU References
6 Check RCU Signal to Check RCU signal (lead 698) to reverse relay K210: OK: Check all relevant
Reverse Relay connectors of the
• for continuity Reverse Solenoid Circuit
• Wiring connection: NOT OK: Repair as

RCU Output Signal Circuit (Lead 698) Check operational test.
Signal Lead 698 in Wiring Harness W4 /SE19
from to to to
X222 Pin L5 K210 Pin 86 K211 Pin 86 X193 Pin D
(connection to (Reverse Relay) (Forward Relay) (connection to
W34) W20)
from to
X193 Pin D X195 Pin A
(connection to W4) (Enable Solenoid
Y07)
from to
X198 Pin C2 (RCU X222 Pin L5
Controller) (connection to W4)
245
RCU
see SE19.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1119
RCU References
245
RCU
40

111401
PN=1120
Group SFA
SFA References
SFA Beep Mode Test (SFA 02)
The SFA (“beep”) mode (Access Address SFA 02) can It can also be used to check for connector and
help the technician with diagnosis in two ways. It can harness defects by moving/tugging on harness or
be used to: connectors while in the “beep” mode. If a “beep” is
• “verify” operation of devices that are part of the circuit that caused the “beep”.
control unit circuits.
• help find device information, harness and connector The circuit address number can then be accessed
problems. (using the turn signal switch) to check the operation of
the circuit device, using the “on-board” diagnostic
Whenever a “change of state” is detected, the warning feature.
horn will “beep” to inform the technician of the change.
The circuit device address number is also displayed. The following diagnostic addresses support the
diagnostic (“beep”) mode:
NOTE: A “change of state” would be a switch going
from open to closed or closed to open. Also, • SFA 04 — Solenoid 1/Solenoid 2 Signal Status
by moving a potentiometer type control slowly
through it’s operation range, a break or “bad • SFA 05 — Output Voltage at Position Sensor
the same way. • SFA 06 — Ground Speed Signal/Position Sensor
Signal 245
The audible signal can be used to verify that a switch SFA
1
is changing state when it is activated (or is not • SFA 11 — Position Power Supply Voltage
“beep”).
AG,LX25546,362NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Solenoid Valve 1 (Y10) Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – “SFA wirng harness W36”, Section 240, Group 10.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: Diagnostic Schematic at Wiring Diagrams:
– “Engine wiring harness W3”, Section 240, Group – SE20 — SFA wiring diagram, Section 240, Group
10. 15.
FX05143,00001CB –19–18OCT01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the solenoid valve (Y10), supply lead (703) and the ground lead (310)
for solenoid Y10.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 245-SFA-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1121
SFA References
1 Check Solenoid Y10 Check the resistance at solenoid Y10 (connected to X206 at wiring harness W36; OK: GO TO 2.
SE20).
NOT OK: Resistance is
NOTE: The solenoid should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance not in specification,
or continuity checks. replace solenoid Y10 and
calibrate SFA Controller
Solenoid Y10 — Resistance—Specification (see reference
Solenoid removed from cicuit— “Calibration”, Section 280,
Resistance ............................................................................. 10-12 Ohms at 20°C (68°F) Group 10).
– – –1/1
245
SFA
2

111401
PN=1122
SFA References
for Solenoid Y10 following conditions:
NOT OK: GO TO 3.
• Relieve pressure from hydraulic system ( see “Relieving Hydraulic System
Pressure”, Section 280, Group 15) to activate the solenoid valves Y10 and Y11
(SFA activates level regulation for 60 seconds after engine was started).
• Engine ON.
NOTE: For supply voltage and amperage measurements at solenoid valves use
adapter wiring harness DFLX14 (see: “DFLX14 –– Adapter Wiring Harness”, Section
299, Group 05) otherwise the SFA will detect an open circuit and interrupt the power
supply to the solenoid valve.
CAUTION: Use extension lead at adapter wiring harness DFLX14 to avoid

possible injury from running engine parts.
Install adapter wiring harness DFLX14 between solenoid valve Y10 and plug X206.
Relieve pressure from hydraulic system and start the engine.
Measure between pin A and pin B at test plug of DFLX14:
Solenoid Y10 — Supply Voltage—Specification

245
Solenoid Y10 is activated—Voltage ........................................................................... 12 V
SFA
3

connectors of the
solenoid Y10 circuit for
CAUTION: Use extension lead at adapter wiring harness DFLX14 to avoid bad, loose, widened and
possible injury from running engine parts. corroded contacts.
IMPORTANT: Connect the multimeter between the additional connector of IF OK: Delete Service
adapter wiring harness DFLX14 before the engine will be started otherwise the Code and carry out an
SFA will detect an open circuit and immediately interrupt the power supply to operational test (check
the solenoid. SFA for other stored
Service Codes).
DFLX14 (install extension lead) and measure with multimeter between connections: NOT OK: Check ground
connection XGND9 of
Engine ON. solenoid Y10, for wiring
connection GO TO 4.
Solenoid Y10 — Amperage—Specification
Y10 is activated—Amperage ............................ 1 - 1.2 A at 20°C (68°F) and nominal 12
V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1123
SFA References
3 Check Supply Lead Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 4.

706
Wiring connection:
Supply Lead 706

Circuit from to
Supply Lead 706 in W36 X206 Pin A (Solenoid X205 Pin E (connection to
Y10) W3)
Supply Lead 706 in W3 X205 Pin E (connection to X03/2 Pin B10
W36) (connection to W4)
Supply Lead 706 in W4 X03 Pin B10 (connection X222 Pin B5 (connection
to W3) to W34)
Supply Lead 706 in W34 X222 Pin B5 (connection X211 Pin A3 (SFA
to W4) Controller)
diagram see SE20.
245
SFA
4
– – –1/1
4 Check Solenoid Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Ground Lead 310 connectors of the
Check ground lead 310: solenoid Y10 circuit (lead
706 and lead 310) for
• for continuity and high resistance bad/loose contacts.
Wiring connection: IF OK: Connectors are

OK. Delete Service Code.
Ground Lead 310 If Service Code
Circuit from to to reappears and no other
SFA Service Codes are
Ground Lead 310 X206 Pin B X207 Pin B X205 Pin H stored, replace SFA
in W36 (Solenoid Y10 (Solenoid Y11 (connection to W3) Controller and calibrate
connector) connector) (see reference
Ground Lead 310 X205 Pin H XGND9 (ground “Calibration” in Section
in W3 (connection to W3) connection) 280, Group 10) new
Controller.
For connector location and pin arrangement see W3 and W36; for circuit diagram see NOT OK: Repair as
SE20. needed and carry out an
operational test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1124
SFA References
Solenoid Valve 2 (Y11) Circuit Test
10. 15.
AG,LX25546,294NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the solenoid valve (Y11), supply lead (707) and the ground lead (310)
for solenoid Y11.
– – –1/1
245
1 Check Solenoid Y11 Check the resistance at solenoid Y11 (connected to X207 at wiring harness W36; OK: GO TO 2.
SFA
SE20).
5
NOT OK: Resistance is
NOTE: The solenoid should be removed from the circuit prior to performing resistance not in specification,
or continuity checks. replace solenoid Y11 and
calibrate SFA Controller
Solenoid Y11 — Resistance—Specification (see reference
Solenoid removed from cicuit— “Calibration”, Section 280,
Resistance ............................................................................. 10-12 Ohms at 20°C (68°F) Group 10).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1125
SFA References
for Solenoid Y11 following conditions:
NOT OK: GO TO 3.
• Relieve pressure frome hydraulic system ( see “Relieving Hydraulic System
Pressure”, Section 280, Group 15) to activate the solenoid valves Y10 and Y11
(SFA activates niveau regulation for 60 seconds after engine was started).
• Engine ON.
NOTE: For supply voltage and amperage measurements at solenoid valves use
adapter wiring harness DFLX14 (see: “DFLX14 –– Adapter Wiring Harness”, Section
299, Group 05) otherwise the SFA will detect an open circuit and interrupt the power
supply to the solenoid valve.
CAUTION: Use extension lead at adapter wiring harness DFLX14 to avoid

possible injury from running engine parts.
Install adapter wiring harness DFLX14 between solenoid valve Y11 and plug X207.
Relieve pressure frome hydraulic system and start the engine.
Measure between pin A and pin B at test-plug of DFLX14:
Solenoid Y11 — Supply Voltage—Specification

245
Solenoid Y11 is activated—Voltage ........................................................................... 12 V
SFA
6

connectors of the
solenoid Y11 circuit for
CAUTION: Use extension lead at adapter wiring harness DFLX14 to avoid bad, loose, widened and
possible injury from running engine parts. corroded contacts.
IMPORTANT: Connect the multimeter between the additional connector of IF OK: Delete Service
adapter wiring harness DFLX14 before the engine will be started otherwise the Code and carry out an
SFA will detect an open circuit and immediately interrupt the power supply to operational test (check
the solenoid. SFA for other stored
Service Codes).
DFLX14 (install extension lead) and measure with multimeter between connections: NOT OK: Check ground
connection XGND9 of
Engine ON. solenoid Y11, for wiring
connection GO TO 4.
Solenoid Y11 — Amperage—Specification
Y11 is activated—Amperage ............................ 1 - 1.2 A at 20°C (68°F) and nominal 12
V
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1126
SFA References
3 Check Supply Ignition OFF. OK: GO TO 4.

Lead 707
Wiring connection:
Supply Lead 707

Circuit from to
Supply Lead 707 in W36 X207 Pin A (Solenoid X205 Pin F (connection to
Y11) W3)
Supply Lead 707 in W3 X205 Pin F (connection to X03/2 Pin B9 (connection
W36) to W4)
Supply Lead 707 in W4 X03 Pin B9 (connection to X222 Pin B4 (connection
W3) to W34)
Supply Lead 707 in W34 X222 Pin B4 (connection X211 Pin A2 (SFA
to W4) Controller)
diagram see SE20.
245
SFA
7
– – –1/1
4 Check Solenoid Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Ground Lead 310 connectors of the
Check ground lead 310: solenoid Y11 circuit (lead
707 and lead 310) for
• for continuity and high resistance bad/loose contacts.
Wiring connection: IF OK: Connectors are

OK. Delete Service Code.
Ground Lead 310 If Service Code
Circuit from to to reappears and no other
Ground Lead 310 X207 Pin B X206 Pin B X205 Pin H stored, replace SFA
in W36 (Solenoid Y11 (Solenoid Y10 (connection to W3) Controller and calibrate
connector) connector) (see “Calibration”, Section
Ground Lead 310 X205 Pin H XGND9 (ground 280, Group 10) new
in W3 (connection to W3) connection) Controller.
NOT OK: Repair as

For connector location and pin arrangement see W3 and W36; for circuit diagram see needed and carry out an
SE20. operational test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1127
SFA References
Position Sensor (B53) Supply Voltage Circuit Test
10. 15.
AG,LX25546,364NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the supply voltage (lead 703) and ground lead (710) for the position
sensor B53.
– – –1/1
245
1 Check Address Access Address SFA 11. OK: Voltage is in
SFA
SFA 11 specification. No other
8
Check display: Service Codes are stored,
calibrate (see
Address SFA 11 - Supply Voltage Position Sensor—Specification “Calibration”, Section 280,
Supply voltage for Position Sensor (lead Group 10) SFA
703)—Voltage ............................................................................... between 4.7 and 5.3 V Controller. Delete Service
Code. If Service Code
stored, replace SFA
new Controller.
OK: Voltage is in
specification. Service
Codes are stored.
Trouble shoot them and
then calibrate (see
“Calibration”, Section 280,
Group 10) new Controller.
NOT OK: Voltage is out

of specification, GO TO 2.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1128
SFA References

(703) connectors of the position
Supply Voltage below 4.7V: sensor supply circuit (lead
703 and lead 710) for bad
Check supply lead (703): and loose contacts.
• for a short to ground IF OK: Connectors are

• for continuity and high resistance OK, delete Service Code.
If Service Code
Check ground lead (710): reappears and no other
• for continuity and for high resistance stored, replace SFA
Supply Voltage over 5.3V: (see “Calibration”, Section
280, Group 10) new
Check supply lead (703) at connector X205 pin A (W36/W3; SE20): Controller.
• for a short to supply lead 706 (X205 pin E) NOT OK: Repair as
• for a short to supply lead 707 (X205 pin F) needed and carry out an
• for a short to another conductor operational test.
Wiring harness:
Supply Circuit
Circuit from to
245
X209 Pin C (Position X205 Pin A (connection to
Supply Lead 703 in W36 SFA
Sensor connector) W3)
9
Supply Lead 703 in W3 X205 Pin A (connection to X03/2 Pin B4 (connection
W36) to W4)
Supply Lead 703 in W4 X03 Pin B4 (connection to X222 Pin D5 (connection
W3) to W34)
Supply Lead 703 in W34 X222 Pin D5 (connection X211 Pin F1 (SFA
Ground Lead 710 in W36 X209 Pin A (Position X205 Pin C (connection to
Sensor connector) W3)
Ground Lead 710 in W3 X205 Pin C (connection to X03/2 Pin B8 (connection
W36) to W4)
Ground Lead 710 in W4 X03 Pin B8 (connection to X222 Pin C5 (connection
W3) to W34)
Ground Lead 710 in W34 X222 Pin C5 (connection X211 Pin D2 (SFA
diagram see SE20.
– – –1/1
Position Sensor (B53) Output Circuit Test
10. 15.
AG,LX25546,360NA –19–01JAN01–1/1

111401
PN=1129
SFA References
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the position sensor (B53), supply voltage (703) and output signal lead
(708) for position sensor B53.
– – –1/1
1 Check Position 1.1 OK: Position output

Sensor (B53) Output signal is in specification,
Signal Access Address SFA 06. GO TO 1.2.
Address SFA 06 - Position Sensor Output Signal—Specification NOT OK: Display shows
Position sensor output lead (708)— XX0, GO TO 2.
Display ......................................................................................................................... XX1
1.2 OK: Position output

signal is in specification.
Disconnect position sensor connector X209 (W36; SE20). Check all relevant
connectors of the position
NOTE: Disconnection causes additional Service Code SFA 065. sensor output circuit (lead
708) for bad/loose
Access Address SFA 06. contacts.
245 Address SFA 06 - Position Sensor Output Signal—Specification IF OK: Connectors are
SFA Position sensor output lead (708)— OK, delete Service Code.
10 Display ......................................................................................................................... XX0 If Service Code
For connector location and pin arrangement see W36; for circuit diagram see SE20. SFA Service Codes are
stored, replace SFA
(see “Calibration”, Section
280, Group 10) new
Controller.
NOT OK: Output signal

not in specification, GO
TO 2.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1130
SFA References
2 Check Position 2.1 OK: Voltage is in

Sensor Supply specification, GO TO 2.2.
Voltage Access Address SFA 11.
NOT OK: Supply voltage
Check display: is not in specification,
perform “Position Sensor
Address SFA 11 - Supply Voltage Position Sensor—Specification (B53) Supply Voltage
Supply voltage for position sensor (lead Circuit Test”, Section 245,
703)—Voltage ............................................................................... between 4.7 and 5.3 V Group SFA.
2.2 OK: Voltage is in

specification and
Disconnect X209 (W36; SE20). multimeter reading is
approximate the same as
Ignition ON. the tachometer voltage
reading (Address SFA
Measure with multimeter the voltage between pin A and pin C at connector X209. 11), GO TO 4.
Specification NOT OK: Voltage is not

Supply voltage for position sensor (lead in specification, GO TO 3.
703)—Voltage ............................................................................... between 4.7 and 5.3 V
245
SFA
11
– – –1/1

(703) connectors of the position
Check Supply Lead (703): sensor supply circuit (lead
703) for bad/loose
• for continuity and high resistance contacts.
Wiring harness: IF OK: Connectors are

Supply Lead 703 If the Service Code
Circuit from to reappears and no other
X209 Pin C (Position X205 Pin A (connection to stored, replace SFA
Supply Lead 703 in W36
Sensor connector) W3) Controller and calibrate
Supply Lead 703 in W3 X205 Pin A (connection to X03/2 Pin B4 (connection (see “Calibration”, Section
W36) to W4) 280, Group 10) new
Controller.
Supply Lead 703 in W4 X03 Pin B4 (connection to X222 Pin D5 (connection
W3) to W34) NOT OK: Repair as
Supply Lead 703 in W34 X222 Pin D5 (connection X211 Pin F1 (SFA needed and carry out an
to W4) Controller connector) operational test.
diagram see SE20.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1131
SFA References
4 Check Position Ignition OFF. OK: Resistance is in

Sensor (B53) specification, GO TO 5.
Remove the position sensor B53 (connected to X209 at W36; SE20) and measure the
resistance. NOT OK: Resistance not
in specification.
Specification Repair/replace defective
Resistance between pin A and C— position sensor (B53) and
Resistance ......................................................................................... 4000 to 6000 Ohms calibrate (see
Resistance between pin B and C— “Calibration”, Section 280,
Resistance ......................................................... 7600 to 9400 Ohms (sensor link moved Group 10) SFA
fully upward) Controller.
Resistance between pin B and C—
Resistance ......................................................... 3600 to 4400 Ohms (sensor link moved
fully downward)
– – –1/1
245
5 Check Position Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant
SFA
Sensor Output Lead connectors of the position
12
(708) Disconnect X209 (W36; SE20). sensor output circuit (lead
708) for bad/loose
Check Position Sensor output signal lead 708: contacts.
• for a short to ground IF OK: Connectors are

• for continuity and high resistance OK, delete Service Code.
• for a short to another conductor If Service Code
Wiring harness: SFA Service Codes are
stored, replace SFA
Signal Lead (708) for Position Sensor B53 Controller and calibrate
(see “Calibration”, Section
Circuit from to
280, Group 10) new
Signal Lead 708 in W36 X209 Pin B (Position X205 Pin B (connection to Controller.
Sensor B53) W3)
Signal Lead 708 in W3 X205 Pin B (connection to X03/2 Pin B2 (connection NOT OK: Repair as
W36) to W4) needed and carry out an
operational test.
Signal Lead 708 in W4 X03 Pin B2 (connection to X222 Pin D4 (connection
W3) to W34)
Signal Lead 708 in W34 X222 Pin D4 (connection X211 Pin E3 (SFA
to W4) Controller)
diagram see SE20.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1132
SFA References
Magnet Sending Unit (B35) Circuit Test
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – SE16D — Radar Sensor wiring diagram, Section
240, Group 15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – SE16E — Rear PTO for tractors without HMS,
– “Engine wiring harness W3”, Section 240, Group Section 240, Group 15.
10. – SE16H — Ground Speed wiring diagram, Section
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. 240, Group 15.
– “Transmission wiring harness W13”, Section 240, – SE20 — SFA wiring diagram, Section 240, Group
Group 10. 15.
– “SFA wirng harness W36”, Section 240, Group 10. NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the
• For electrical troubleshooting see Functional and magnetic sensor (B35), output signal lead
Diagnostic Schematic at Wiring Diagrams: (502) and ground lead (531) for magnetic
– SE2 — BIF wiring diagram, Section 240, Group sensor B35. In addition the output lead (501)
15. from BCU to BIF and SFA is tested
245
SFA
13
AG,LX25546,367NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
– – –1/1
1 Check Ground Speed 1.1 OK: GO TO 1.2.

Signal to BCU
Engine RUNNING. NOT OK: GO TO 2.
Access Address BCU 05.
BCU 05 - Ground Speed Signal—Specification

Tractor is in motion—Ground speed
signal recognized ........................................................................................................ X1X
Engine RUNNING. OK: GO TO 4.
Access Address BCU 05 NOT OK: GO TO 2.

Tractor is not in motion—Ground speed
signal not recognized .................................................................................................. X0X
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1133
SFA References
2 Check Magnetic Check Magnetic Sensor B35: (2-way connector; connected to X88 at W13; SE16H) OK: GO TO 3.
Sensor (B35)
NOTE: The sensor must be removed from the tractor for the following test. NOT OK: No voltage
reading recognized,
Connect voltmeter to sensor connector. replace defective Sensor
B35.
– – –1/1
3 Check Wiring Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Harness connectors of the
Check Magnetic Sensor (B35) Output Lead 502: magnetic sensor circuit
operational test.
245 Check Magnetic Sensor (B35) Ground Lead 531:
SFA
14 • for continuity and high resistance
Wiring harness:
Magnet Sending Unit (B35) Circuit (for 6010-6610 Tractors)

Output X88 Pin A X03/4 Pin
Lead 502 in (Magnet H2
W13 Sensor (connection
connector) to W4)
Output X03 Pin H2 X133 Pin
Lead 502 in (connection 20 (BCU
W4 to W13) Controller
connection)
Ground X88 Pin B X88 Pin D X03/4 Pin X94 Pin B X30 Pin 1
Lead 531 in (Magnet (Magnet D4 (Rear PTO (Prewiring
W13 Sensor Sensor (connection Speed Radar
connection) connection) to W4) Sender) Sensor
connection)
Ground X03 Pin D4 X03 Pin A2 X133 Pin 4
Lead 531 in (connection (connection (BCU
W4 to W13) to W3) Controller
connection)
Ground X03/2 Pin X76 Pin B
Lead 531 in A2 (Engine
W3 (connection Speed
to W4) connector)
see SE16H, SE16E and SE16D.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1134
SFA References
4 Check Output Lead Check output lead 501 from BCU: OK: Check all relevant
(501) from BCU to BIF connectors of the
• for continuity magnetic sensor circuit
NOT OK: Repair as
Wiring connection: needed and carry out an
operational test.
Signal Lead 501 Check
Circuit from to to
BCU Output lead X133 Pin 43 (BCU X26 Pin 21 (BIF X222 Pin H2
501 in W4 Controller) blue connector) (connection to
W34)
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for circuit diagram see SE2,
SE16H and SE20.
– – –1/1
245
Hall Sending Unit (B09) Circuit Test SFA
15
References for Circuitry Diagnostic: – SE2 — BIF wiring diagram, Section 240, Group
15.
• For component location and pin arrangement see: – SE16D — Radar Sensor wiring diagram, Section
– “Engine wiring harness W3”, Section 240, Group 240, Group 15.
10. – SE16E — Rear PTO for tractors without HMS,
– “Cab wiring harness W4”, Section 240, Group 10. Section 240, Group 15.
– “Transmission wiring harness W13”, Section 240, – SE16H — Ground Speed wiring diagram, Section
Group 10. 240, Group 15.
– “Electronic Control Unit wiring harness W34”, – SE20 — SFA wiring diagram, Section 240, Group
Section 240, Group 10. 15.
– “SFA wirng harness W36”, Section 240, Group 10.
AG,LX25546,368NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
Test Procedure
NOTE: This test procedure covers testing of the Hall sensor (B09), output signal lead (502), supply lead (973) and
ground lead (531) for Hall sensor B35.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1135
SFA References
1 Check Ground Speed 1.1 OK: GO TO 1.2.

Signal to BCU
Engine RUNNING. NOT OK: GO TO 2.
Access Address BCU 05.

Tractor is in motion—Ground speed
signal recognized ........................................................................................................ X1X
Engine RUNNING. OK: GO TO 6.
Access Address BCU 05 NOT OK: GO TO 2.

Tractor is not in motion—Ground speed
signal not recognized .................................................................................................. X0X
– – –1/1
245
2 Check Hall Sensor Check Hall Sensor B09: (connected to X88 at W13; SE16H) OK: Hall Sensor is OK,
SFA
(B09) GO TO 3.
16
NOTE: The sensor must be removed from the tractor for the following test.
NOT OK: Replace
1. Install a 10 - 50 kOhm resistor at the sensor connector between the sensor red and defective Hall Sensor B09
grey wires. and carry out an
2. Connect sensor red wire to battery voltage (12V) and sensor black wire to ground operational test.
terminal of power source.
3. Connect voltmeter leads to the sensor red and grey wires. Red to positive and
black to grey.
4. Slowly move a screwdriver in front of the sensor. The DC voltage reading should be
approximately 12.2 V one time and 0 V the next time.
– – –1/1
3 Check Supply Check supply lead 973 for Hall Sensor B09: OK: Voltage is in
Lead 973 specification, GO TO 4.
6010-6610 Tractors - Supply Voltage for Hall Sensor—Specification
Measure between pin C and pin D at NOT OK: Voltage is not
connector X88—Voltage .............................................................................. approx. 12 V in specification, GO TO 5.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1136
SFA References
4 Check Hall Sensor Ignition OFF. OK: Check all relevant

Output Lead connectors at hall sensor
Check Hall Sensor Output Lead (502): circuit for bad/loose
contacts.
Wiring harness: operational test.
Hall Sensor Output Circuit (for 6010-6610 Tractors)

Circuit from to
Signal Lead 502 in W13 X88 Pin A (Hall Sensor X03/4 Pin H2 (connection
B09) to W4)
Signal Lead 502 in W4 X03 Pin H2 (connection to X133 Pin 20 (BCU
W13) Controller)
SE16H.
– – –1/1
245
SFA
17

111401
PN=1137
SFA References
5 Check Supply Circuit 5.1 OK: GO TO 5.2.
Ignition OFF. NOT OK: Repair as

Check Ground Lead 531: operational test.
Wiring harness:
Hall Sending Unit (B09) Ground Circuit (for 6010-6610 Tractors)

Ground X88 Pin D X88 Pin B X30 Pin 1 X94 Pin B X03/4 Pin
Lead 531 in (Hall (Hall (Prewiring (Rear PTO D4
W13 Sensor Sensor Radar Speed (connection
connection) connection) Sensor Sender) to W4)
connection)
Ground X03 Pin D4 X133 Pin 4 X03 Pin A2
Lead 531 in (connection (BCU (connection
W4 to W13) Controller to W3)
connection)
Ground X03/2 Pin X76 Pin B
Lead 531 in A2 (Engine
W3 (connection Speed
245 to W4) connector)
SFA
18
see SE16H, SE16E and SE16D.

connectors at hall sensor
Perform test procedure Supply Circuit 973 (BCU Functions), Section 245, Group BCU. circuit for bad/loose
contacts.
IF OK: Connectors are

If Service Code
replace SFA Controller
and calibrate (see
“Calibration”, Section 280,
Group 10) new Controller.
NOT OK: Repair as

operational test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1138
SFA References
6 Check Output Lead Check output lead 501 from BCU: OK: Check all relevant
(501) from BCU to BIF connectors of the Hall
• for continuity Sensor circuit for
• for a short to ground bad/loose contacts.
NOT OK: Repair as
Wiring connection: needed and carry out an
operational test.
Signal Lead 501 Check
Circuit from to to
BCU Output lead X133 Pin 43 (BCU X26 Pin 21 (BIF X222 Pin H2
501 in W4 Controller) blue connector) (connection to
W34)
For connector location and pin arrangement see W4; for circuit diagram see SE2,
SE16H and SE20.
– – –1/1
245
Test Procedure for SFA Hydraulic System SFA
19
AG,LX25546,518NA –19–01JAN01–1/1
SFA Hydraulic Test Procedure
NOTE: This procedure covers testing of the SFA (Suspended Front Axle) hydraulic system.
– – –1/1
1 Check Hydraulic Check PFC Hydraulic System, Section 270, Group 10. OK: GO TO 2.
System
NOT OK: Repair as
operational test.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1139
SFA References
2 Check SFA Hydraulic IMPORTANT: The system pressure specification and graphic shown below are OK: Diagnostic
System depending on actual total weight of the tractor (tractor weight, front and rear completed. Check
weights). charging of accumulators,
perform “Check and
Engine running with 1200 rpm. Charge Suspended
MFWD Axle
Access Address SFA 20 and calibrate (see “Calibration”, Section 280, Group 10) SFA Accumulators”, Section
Controller. 280, Group 15.
System Pressure during Calibration—Specification NOT OK: Cylinders do

Measure system pressure at main not extend (calibration
block—Pressure in bar ........................................ between 8000 and 17000 kPa (80 and unsuccessful: SFA
170 bar; 1160 and 2466 psi) interrupts calibration), GO
TO 3.
NOT OK: Cylinders do

not retract (calibration
unsuccessful: SFA
interrupts calibration), GO
TO 5.
LX1024117 –UN–03JUL00
(1)—System pressure
(2)—Load Sense pressure
245 (HP)—Highest point
SFA (FD)—Fully down
20 (N)—Neutral
– – –1/1
3 Check SFA Load 3.1 OK: Tractor is equipped

Sense Pressure with trailer brake, GO TO
Carry out a test drive and activate brakes. 3.2.
Measure Load Sense pressure on main block. OK: Tractor is not

equipped with trailer
Load Sense Pressure for Braking—Specification brake, GO TO 4.
Activate only brakes and check pressure
at Load Sense plug on bain block— NOT OK: Check and
Pressure ...................................................................... max. 8000 kPa (80 bar; 1160 psi) repair (if necessary)
shuttle valve between
For location of test port, see “Checking Load Sense Pressure (Pilot Pressure)”, Section brakes and SFA/trailer
270, Group 15. brake and carry out an
operational test.
For PFC Hydraulic System check, see “Hydraulic System Schematics”, Section 270,
Group 20.
3.2 OK: Pressure in

Trailer Brake Pressure—Specification
Activate only brakes and check pressure NOT OK: Check and
at Load Sense plug—Pressure ....................... between 13000 and 15000 kPa (130 and repair (if necessary)
150 bar; 1885 and 2176 psi) shuttle valve between
SFA and trailer brake and
For location of test port, see “Checking Load Sense Pressure (Pilot Pressure)”, Section carry out an operational
270, Group 15. test.
For PFC hydraulic system check, see “Hydraulic System Schematics”, Section 270,
Group 20.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1140
SFA References
4 Component Check OK: Replace defective

(Cylinders do not CAUTION: The suspended MFWD axle hydraulic system pressure must SFA control block and
Extend) be relieved before disconnecting any hydraulic lines, fittings or repeat this test.
connections. Keep parts of your body, items of clothing and tools well
clear. NOT OK: Repair as
For reference, see “Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure”, Section 280, Group 15. test.
Check following SFA control block components:
• Solenoid valve 1 stuck in closed position

• Solenoid valve 2 stuck in closed position
• Bleeding valves open or defective
• Pressure relief valve defective
• Pressure regulating valve defective
For SFA hydraulic circuit, see “Hydraulic Circuit Schematics - Level Control (UP)”,
– – –1/1
245
5 Component Check OK: Replace SFA control
CAUTION: The suspended MFWD axle hydraulic system pressure must SFA
(Cylinders do not valve and repeat this test.
be relieved before disconnecting any hydraulic lines, fittings, or 21
Retract)
connections. Keep parts of your body, items of clothing and tools well NOT OK: Repair as
clear. needed and repeat this
test.
For reference, see “Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure”, Section 280, Group 15.
Check following SFA control block components:
• Solenoid valve 1 stuck in opened position

• Pressure regulating valve in SFA control valve
Regulating Valve Pressure in SFA—Specification

Measure Load Sense pressure at main
block during SFA calibration—Pressure
(4-cylinder tractors) ............................................. between 8000 and 12000 kPa (80 and
120 bar; 1160 and 1740 psi)
• Bleeding valve is open or defective
For SFA hydraulic circuit, see “Hydraulic Circuit Schematics - Level Control (Down)”,
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1141
SFA References
245
SFA
22

111401
PN=1142
Section 250
SyncroPlus Transmission
Contents
Page Page
Group 05—Operational Checkout Checking Neutral Start Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-15-6

Operational tests for Perma Clutch and Adjusting the Shift Linkage and Parking
SyncroPlus Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-05-1 Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-15-7
Operational Test for Perma Clutch 2 . . . . . . . .250-05-1 Clutch Pedal Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-15-9
Operational Test for SynroPlus
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-05-2 Group 20—SyncroPlus Transmission Operation
Layout of 12-Speed Transmission . . . . . . . . . .250-20-1
Group 10—Troubleshooting Layout of 12-Speed Transmission with
Explanation of System Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . .250-10-1 Creeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-20-2
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-1 Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-20-3
Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-2 Shift Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-20-4
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-6 Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-20-5
Hydraulic Oil Warmup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-7 Transmission Circuit - Key to Hydraulic
Connecting JT07115 Hydraulic Test Kit. . . . . .250-10-7 Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-20-8
Connecting the Sensocontrol Testing Transmission Circuit - Theory of
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-9 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-20-10
Layout of Test Ports and Sending Units . . . .250-10-10
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-10 Group 20A—Perma-Clutch II 250
Preliminary Checks for SyncroPlus Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20A-1
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-11 Clutch Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20A-3
Checking Gear and Range Engagement . . . .250-10-13 Power Flow, Clutch Pedal Depressed . . . . . 250-20A-4
Checking Clutch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-14 Power Flow, Clutch Pedal Not Depressed. . 250-20A-6
Checking the Transmission Oil Filter . . . . . . .250-10-15 Transmission Oil Pump - Theory of
System (Engagement) Pressure Test . . . . . .250-10-15 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20A-7
Adjusting System (Engagement) Pressure . .250-10-16 Perma Clutch II - Legend for Hydraulic
Check Components Dependent on System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20A-8
(Engagement) Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-16 Description of Valves and Other Hydraulic
Checking the Filter Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . .250-10-17 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20A-10
Testing the Engagement Override Valve Theory of Operation - Pressure Regulating
and Clutch Pedal Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-18 and Filter Relief Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20A-12
Checking the Modulation of the Clutch Theory of Operation - Clutch Pedal and
Pedal Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-19 Engagement Override Valves . . . . . . . . 250-20A-18
Checking Lubricating Oil Pressure. . . . . . . . .250-10-19 Theory of Operation - Cooling . . . . . . . . . . 250-20A-22
Checking the Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-20
Checking the Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-10-22 Group 20B—Gear Transmission
Checking the Cooler Relief Valve . . . . . . . . .250-10-23 Gear Transmission Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20B-1
Power Flow in 1st Gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20B-3
Group 15—Tests and Adjustments Power Flow in 2nd Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20B-4
Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-15-1 Power Flow in 3rd Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20B-5
Shift Linkage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-15-2 Power Flow in Reverse Gear . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20B-6
Range Transmission Linkage Test . . . . . . . . .250-15-2 Neutral Start Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20B-7
Adjusting Range Box Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-15-3
Gear Transmission Linkage Test. . . . . . . . . . .250-15-3 Group 20C—Creeper Transmission
Adjusting Shift Linkage at Gear Layout of Creeper Transmission . . . . . . . . . 250-20C-1
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-15-4
Adjusting Neutral Start Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .250-15-4 Continued on next page
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1
Contents
Page
Power Flow With Creeper Disengaged . . . . 250-20C-4

Power Flow With Creeper Engaged . . . . . . 250-20C-5
Group 20D—Range Transmission

Range Transmsission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20D-1
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20D-2
Power Flow, Range A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20D-3
Power Flow, Range B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20D-4
Power Flow, Range C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20D-5
Power Flow, Range D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20D-6
Parking Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-20D-7
250
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Group 05
Operational Checkout
Operational tests for Perma Clutch and

SyncroPlus Transmission
LX,25005 001828 –19–01NOV97–1/1
Operational Test for Perma Clutch 2
– – –1/1
1 Checking If Clutch NOTE: Perform this test when oil is cold. OK: Check Clutch for
Separates Properly Slippage, GO TO 2.
1. Run engine at a speed of 2000 1/min.
NOT OK: If it does move,
NOTE: The tractor must not move while the clutch pedal is depressed. check the clutch pedal
valve and the pedal
2. Depress clutch pedal and select a low gear. setting. For checking the
pedal setting, see
Group 15. For checking
the clutch pedal valve,
see Group 10.
– – –1/1
250
05
1
2 Checking Clutch for OK: Check Slip Phase of
Slippage CAUTION: Always perform this test out of doors and ensure that no lives Clutch, GO TO 3.
are put at risk.
NOT OK: If it does not
1. Run the engine at a speed of 1500 1/min. cut out, check clutch
pressure. See Group 10.
2. Depress clutch pedal and select a high gear.
NOTE: The engine must cut out.
3. Depress brake pedal and slowly release clutch pedal.
– – –1/1
3 Checking Slip Phase OK: Check Transmission

of Clutch CAUTION: Always perform this test out of doors and ensure that no lives
are put at risk. NOT OK: GO TO 4.
1. Drive tractor onto an uphill slope and stop it there.
NOTE: The tractor must not roll away.
2. Carefully hold the tractor on the clutch so that it does not roll away.
If it roll away, check the clutch pedal valve.See Group 10.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-05-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1145
4 Clutch malfunction If the clutch does not function according to specification, the cause may lie in a OK: Check for a
mechanical problem (worn clutch plates) or in a hydraulic problem (e.g. system mechanical problem.
pressure or clutch pressure). To determine the precise cause, perform a diagnosis of
the system by carrying out the tests in the order in which they are listed here: NOT OK: Repair as
needed.
❒ System (Engagement) Pressure Test.
❒ Check Components Dependent On System (Engagement) pressure.
❒ Checking the Filter Relief Valve.
❒ Testing the Engagement Override Valve and Clutch Pedal Valve.
❒ Checking Lubricating Oil Pressure.
❒ Checking the Cooling System.
❒ Checking the Flow Rate
❒ Checking the Cooler Relief Valve.
– – –1/1
Operational Test for SynroPlus transmission
– – –1/1
1 Checking the Take the tractor for a test drive and go through all the gears in turn. NOT OK: In the event of
Transmission malfunctions, check Gear
NOTE: All gears must engage smoothly and none of the gears should jump out of and Range Engagement,
engagement. They must neither catch nor touch the shifting gate. refer to Group 10.
No unusual noises should occur. To make it easier to identify the noise of the gears
250 meshing, put a load on the gears by lightly applying the brake. Do this in each gear.
05
2
– – –1/1
2 Checking Neutral Go through all gears by means of gear shift lever and try to start the engine. NOT OK: Check and/or
Start Switch adjust switch.
NOTE: Engine must only start if gear shift lever is in neutral position. If a gear is
engaged, engine must not start.
For adjusting neutral start switch refer to Group 15. For checking neutral start switch
refer to Section 240, Group 15.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-05-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1146
Group 10
Troubleshooting
Explanation of System Diagnosis
Section 250, Group 05, it should be possible to identify

CAUTION: Whenever performing checks on
any fault in the transmission circuit and power train.
the transmission circuit, always observe the
relevant safety precautions.
These tests must be carried out when power train
elements fail to operate or operate too slowly, when
IMPORTANT: When troubleshooting, always start
the hydraulic oil overheats and whenever major repairs
at the beginning and perform the
have been carried out on the power train elements.
checks in the sequence in which
they are listed here. Comply with all
Faults in the transmission circuit affect the
specifications.
transmission pump, power train elements, valves, the
oil cooler and transmission lubrication.
The checks listed here apply to step-by-step system
diagnosis. Starting with the operational checks in
AG,OUOE003,9473 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Safety Precautions
immediately, otherwise severe infections

CAUTION: If testing involves putting the
may result.
tractor in motion (e.g. a test drive), make
sure this is done out of doors in an open
250
area. Make sure that no-one is put at risk. CAUTION: Escaping hydraulic oil under 10
pressure can have sufficient pressure to 1
penetrate the skin, causing serious personal
injury. Relieve all pressure before
attaching hydraulic testers to the tractor.
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines.
Check and tighten all connections before
CAUTION: During tests that involve running applying pressure. Hydraulic oil escaping
the engine, always engage the parking lock. from pin holes is difficult to detect, so use a
piece of cardboard to search for leaks. Do
not use your hands.
checking oil lines close to moving machine
parts.
CAUTION: If injuries are caused by

pressurized oil, seek medical attention
AG,OUOE003,9474 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1147
Troubleshooting

Digital thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05800
For measuring temperatures
–UN–16AUG94
JT05800
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–2/17
250
10
2
Pressure test kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT07115
Checking various clutch valves and pressures
–UN–28JUL94
LX001339
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–3/17
LX010224 –UN–04JUL95
1
Internal half coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AL80099
Pressure-testing the clutch
1
Available through parts channels
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1148
Troubleshooting
LX010224 –UN–04JUL95
O-ring1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51M7041
Pressure-testing the clutch
1
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–5/17
Universal pressure test kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10002
Checking various clutch valves and pressures
–UN–13MAY96
FKM10002
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–6/17
250
10
3
Hydraulic flow tester, consisting of:
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–7/17
Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D01074AA
Checking the flow rate
–UN–16MAR95
LX001342
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1149
Troubleshooting
High-pressure hose (2 used) . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10408
–UN–16MAR95
LX001342
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–9/17
Tester accessory kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10406
–UN–16MAR95
LX001342
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–10/17
250
10
4
Pressure Measuring System (Stage 1). . . . . . FKM10470
“SensoControl” measurement unit for hydraulic system

pressure testing consisting of:
–UN–15DEC97
LX1019202
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–11/17
• FKM10470-1 0-1000 bar Pressure Sensor

• FKM10470-2 0-100 bar Pressure Sensor (2)
• FKM10470-3 Adapter (3)
• FKM10470-4 “Serviceman” Hand Gauge
• FKM10470-5 Power Supply
• FKM10470-6 Carrying Case
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1150
Troubleshooting

–UN–15DEC97
LX1019203
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–13/17
250
10
5
• FKM10470 Pressure Measuring Sys. (Stage 1)
• FKM10471-1 Printer Cable
• FKM10471-2 Thermal Printer
• FKM10471-3 PC Adapter with Software
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–14/17
LX1019204 –UN–15DEC97
Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10472-4
Oil temperature measurements in connection with

pressure measuring system (stage 1) and pressure
measuring system (stage 2).
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1151
Troubleshooting
Flow Measuring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10472

flow testing consisting of:
–UN–27SEP01
LX1027890
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–16/17
A — FKM10472-1 Flow Turbine

B — FKM10472-2 Connecting Cable
C — FKM10472-3 1/4-In. Coupler
D — FKM10472-4 Temperature Sensor
E — FKM10472-5 Hose, 2 meters long (2)
F — FKM10472-6 Quick Coupler (2)
G — FKM10472-7 2-Way Fitting
H — FKM10472-8 Restrictor
I — FKM10472-9 Sealing Ring (2)
J — FKM10472-10 Restriction Fitting (2)
K — FKM10472-11 Carrying Case
250
10
6
AG,OUOE003,9475 –19–12JUN99–17/17
Specifications
System pressure Pressure with engine at 2300 rpm 1200 ± 50 kPa (12 ± 0.5 bar; 170 ± 7
psi)
Clutch pressure Pressure with engine at 2300 rpm 1200 ± 50 kPa (12 ± 0.5 bar; 170 ± 7
psi)
Lubricating oil pressure Pressure at an engine speed of 2300 350 ± 100 kPa (3.5 ± 1 bar; 51 ± 15
rpm and oil temperature of 45°C psi)
(113°F).
Flow rate at oil cooler System flow with engine at 2300 rpm 54 L/min (14.3 gpm)
AG,OUOE003,9476 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1152
Troubleshooting
Hydraulic Oil Warmup
1. Use a hose to connect the quick couplers on an SCV.

For a faster warmup it may be necessary to similarly
connect a second SCV.
–UN–05DEC97
NOTE: An adjustable restrictor1 (A) can be connected for
faster warmups. The restrictor should be almost
(but not quite) closed.
LX1018200
2. Install a thermometer.
3. If equipped, place the SCV flow regulating valve in the

center position and select the manual lever return
mode.
4. Run the engine at 1700 rpm and engage the SCV.
5. Observe the thermometer until the desired temperature

is reached then move the lever back to neutral.
1
JT07120 is part of the JT07115 pressure test kit
AG,OUOE003,9477 –19–12JUN99–1/1
250
10
7
Connecting JT07115 Hydraulic Test Kit
Testing at One Point
CAUTION: Always shut off engine before

connecting testers.
–UN–26JUL94
Install internal half coupler (D), with O-ring 51M7041 in
place, on the tester. If necessary, use elbow fitting (C).
LX004397
Attach the tester so that the readings can be seen from
the operator’s position.
A—Tester JT071171
B—Hose JT071191
C—Elbow JT034371
D—Internal half coupler AL80099 with O-ring
51M7041
1
Included in hydraulic test kit JT07115
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1153
Troubleshooting
Testing at Two Points

connecting testers.
Install two internal half couplers (E), each with one O-ring
51M7041 in place, on the tester.

IMPORTANT: Keep the shut-off cocks (B) closed.

Open the relevant cock only to read the
pressure, and then close it again
immediately.
–UN–05DEC96
A—Tester JT071171
B—Shut-off cock (2 used)
C—T-fitting JT071181
D—Hose JT071191 (2 used)
LX1015742
E—Internal half coupler AL80099 with O-ring 51M7041
250
10
8
1
AG,OUOE003,9478 –19–12JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1154
Troubleshooting
Connecting the Sensocontrol Testing Equipment
–UN–21APR98
LX1019201
A—FKM10470-1 0-1000 bar C—FKM10472-4 Temperature F—FKM10471-2 Thermal P—Pressure Ports
Pressure Sensor Sensor Printer T—Temperature Port 250
B—FKM10470-2 0-100 bar D—FKM10472-1 Flow Turbine G—FKM10471-3 PC Adapter Q—Volume Measurement Port 10
Pressure Sensor E—FKM10470-4 Hand-Held 9
Measuring Unit
Connect the pressure sensors (A) or (B) with adapter Connect the temperature sensor (C) to the oil filter
FKM10470-3 to the pressure port (P) male coupler tips head.
on the tractor.
If needed, connect the flow turbine (D).
Connect the thermal printer (F) or PC adapter (G) to
the hand-held measuring unit (E).
AG,OUOE003,9479 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1155
Troubleshooting
Layout of Test Ports and Sending Units
–UN–11MAR97
250
10
10
LX1016189
A—Temperature sending unit, D—Return connection from oil G—Temp. sending unit, oil I—Test port for lube pressure
oil temp. warning light1 cooler filter restr. warning light1 J—Test port, cooling oil
B—Pressure sending unit, oil E—Test port for system H—Test port for clutch pressure
filter constr. warning light (engagement) pressure pressure
C—Inlet connection to oil F—Pressure sending unit, sys.
cooler press. ind. light
1
Temperature sending unit (G) is deleted on 6110 to 6510S tractors
with cab with effect from tractor serial number 202846, and
temperature sending unit (A) is replaced by a temperature sensor
that performs the same function as both the sending units.
AG,OUOE003,9480 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Preliminary Checks
AG,OUOE003,9481 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1156
Troubleshooting
Preliminary Checks for SyncroPlus Transmission
– – –1/1
1 General Information Ask the operator: OK: Check Condition of

Hydraulic Oil.
• How does the tractor perform in general?
• When do the faults occur? NOT OK: Repair system
• In what applications?
Check the service records to see if the tractor is
• serviced properly
• subject to unusual, frequent or similar problems
Check the tractor for:
• disconnected, broken or binding operating linkages

• kinked or dented oil lines
• other mechanical failures
– – –1/1
250
10
11
2 Check Condition of 1. Is the oil level too low? OK: Check Tractor for
Hydraulic Oil External Leaks.
Possible causes:
NOT OK: Repair system
• Improper service intervals
• External leaks
2. Is the oil milky or dirty?
Possible causes:
• Water in oil (milky)

• Filter failure (dirty)
• Metal particles (mechanical failure)
3. Is the oil discolored? Has it a burnt odor (over-heated oil)?
Possible causes:
• Kinked pipes
• Crushed lines
• Clogged oil cooler
• Wrong oil viscosity
• Internal leaks
• Mechanical failure
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1157
Troubleshooting
3 Check Tractor for OK: Check Tractor for

External Leaks CAUTION: Comply with safety instructions! Unusual Noises.
1. Check tractor for leaks with the engine shut off. NOT OK: Repair system
2. Check tractor for leaks with the engine running.
3. With the engine running, actuate in turn all the hydraulic control levers, pedals and
switches. Check for leaks.
Possible causes of oil leaks:
• Broken lines, ruptured hoses or loose connections

• Leaking O-rings or seals
• Cracked housing
– – –1/1
4 Check Tractor for NOT OK: Repair system

Unusual Noises CAUTION: Perform this check out of doors. The tractor requires room to
move.
Drive the tractor in various gears and at various engine speeds (see operational
checks for Perma Clutch 2 and SyncroPlus transmission). Operate the brakes,
differential lock, FWD1, PTO and front PTO1, if possible (Check Components
Dependent On System (Engagement) pressure).
Be alert for conditions that could indicate a problem or cause further damage.
1
If equipped
– – –1/1
250
10
12
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-12 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1158
Troubleshooting
Checking Gear and Range Engagement
CAUTION: Perform this check out of doors. The

tractor requires room to move. Make sure that
no-one is put at risk.
Test-drive the tractor. Engage all gears and ranges in

turn.
None of the gears should “jump” out. The shift levers must
not bind or interfere with the shift gate. The gears must
not be excessively stiff. There should be no unusual
noises.
If the transmission makes unusual noises, the gear

transmission or range transmission needs to be repaired.
Refer to the “Repair” Manual, Section 50.
If problems occur when shifting gears or ranges, check

the shift mechanism.
Check that none of the components are damaged. Check

tension of bowden cables; make sure they are not kinked
or damaged. If they are damaged, refer to Section 50 of
the “Repair” Manual, Group 05.
Check that the shift levers and bowden cables are 250
adjusted properly. Refer to Group 15. 10
13
Check that the shift mechanism on the transmission is

adjusted properlyRange Transmission / Gear
Transmission. See Group 15.
If all the shift components and adjustments are OK, but

the transmission does not shift correctly, the gear or range
transmission need to be repaired. Refer to the “Repair”
Manual, Section 50.
AG,OUOE003,9482 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-13 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1159
Troubleshooting
Checking Clutch Operation

tractor requires room to move. Make sure that
no-one is put at risk.
1. Run the engine at 2000 rpm.
2. Depress clutch pedal and engage a low gear.
The tractor should NOT move when the clutch pedal is

depressed, i.e. the clutch must separate properly.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
When the clutch pedal is released fully, the clutch

plates must not grind or slip.
4. Depress the clutch pedal, engage a gear and then

release the clutch pedal slowly. While releasing the
pedal, press it gently so that it rises and falls several
times.
It should be possible to regulate the clutch’s slip phase

precisely using the clutch pedal.
250 If the clutch does not function according to

10 specification, the cause may lie in a mechanical
14
problem (worn clutch plates) or in a hydraulic problem
(e.g. system pressure or clutch pressure). To
determine the precise cause, perform a diagnosis of
the system by carrying out the tests in the order in
which they are listed here.
AG,OUOE003,9483 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-14 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1160
Troubleshooting
Checking the Transmission Oil Filter
Run the engine at maximum speed for between 10 and 15

seconds.
Transmission oil filter indicator light should stay “off”.
If the indicator light comes on, change the transmission oil

filter. Then repeat this check.
NOTE: If the indicator light comes on again after the filter

has been changed, refer to Section 240 to
determine the cause (check BIF for service
codes).
AG,OUOE003,9484 –19–12JUN99–1/1
System (Engagement) Pressure Test
1. Connect pressure test kit JT07115 to test port labelled

“SYSTEM”.
2. Warm up hydraulic oil to 45°C (113°F). 250

10
15
3. Move gear shift lever to neutral.
4. Run engine at a speed of 2300 rpm.
–UN–06AUG94
Pressure should be 1200 ± 50 kPa (12 ± 0.5 bar; 170
± 7 psi).
LX001575
Adjust system (engagement) pressure if it is not within
specification.
AG,OUOE003,9485 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-15 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1161
Troubleshooting
Adjusting System (Engagement) Pressure
1. Remove plug (B) of pressure regulating valve.
2. Adjust system (engagement) pressure by adding or

removing washers (A).
NOTE: Adding or removing one washer (A) changes

pressure by 45 kPa (0.45 bar; 6.5 psi). Removing
washers will lower the pressure. Adding washers
will increase the pressure.
If pressure cannot be adjusted properly, check whether

the primary filter is clogged.
If the primary filter is clean and system (engagement)

pressure cannot be adjusted properly, check the
transmission pump. Refer to the Technical Manual
“Repair”, Section 50, Group 10.
–UN–25JUL94
LX001760
AG,OUOE003,9486 –19–12JUN99–1/1
250
10
16
Check Components Dependent on System
(Engagement) Pressure
2. While observing system (engagement) pressure, switch

the following components on and off one after the
other: rear PTO, differential lock and FWD1.
System (engagement) pressure must not drop when

any of these are switched on or off.
If pressure falls when any of these are switched on or

off, there must be excessive leakage in the system
affected. Check this thoroughly, referring to Section
256, Group 15 (FWD; Rear PTO; Differential Lock).
Before carrying out repairs, refer to the relevant Group
in Section 56 of the “Repair” Manual.
1
If equipped
AG,OUOE003,9487 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-16 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1162
Troubleshooting
Checking the Filter Relief Valve
1. Remove the temperature sending unit for the oil filter

constriction warning light. Connect hydraulic test kit
JT07115 to this port and to the port marked
“SYSTEM”.
2. Close shut-off cock (B) and open shut-off cock (A).
4. Read the pressure at the “SYSTEM” port.
5. Close shut-off cock (A) and open shut-off cock (B).
6. Read the pressure at the temperature sending unit

port.
The difference between the two must not exceed 300
–UN–05DEC96
kPa (3 bar; 43.5 psi).
If pressure does not react according to specification,

check the filter relief valve. See “Repair” Manual,
LX1015744
250
10
17
AG,OUOE003,9488 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-17 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1163
Troubleshooting
Testing the Engagement Override Valve and

Clutch Pedal Valve
1. Connect pressure test kit JT07115 to test port labelled

“CLUTCH”.
2. Start engine without depressing clutch pedal.
3. Run the engine at 2300 rpm. Observe gauge reading.
Gauge should indicate no pressure.
–UN–25JUL94
4. Depress and release clutch pedal.
Now pressure should be 1200 ± 50 kPa (12 ± 0.5 bar;
LX001574
170 ± 7 psi).
If there was any pressure before depressing clutch

pedal, repair engagement override valve. Refer to
Technical Manual “Repair”, Section 50, Group 10.
If there is no pressure after clutch pedal has been

depressed and released, check the clutch pedal valve
and the engagement override valve. Refer to Technical
Manual “Repair”, Section 50, Group 10.
250 If the gauge shows oil pressure while the clutch pedal
10 is depressed, the pedal must be re-adjusted. See
18 Group 15. If the oil pressure is still not OK after the
pedal has been set correctly, check the modulation of
the clutch pedal valve.
If pressure is too low after clutch pedal has been

released, repair the clutch piston. Refer to Technical
Manual “Repair”, Section 50, Group 10.
AG,OUOE003,9489 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-18 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1164
Troubleshooting
Checking the Modulation of the Clutch Pedal

Valve
2. Check the modulation of the clutch pedal valve. Try to

regulate the clutch pedal by “playing” with the pedal.
Using the pedal, it should be possible to regulate

clutch pressure evenly from 0 to 1200 ± 50 kPa (0 to
12 ± 0.5 bar; 0 to 170 ± 7 psi).
–UN–25JUL94
If clutch pressure cannot be regulated properly, repair
the clutch pedal valve. See Technical Manual “Repair”,
LX001574
If clutch pressure can be regulated properly but an

operational check on the clutch reveals that the clutch
does not separate or turn properly (it is slipping or
grinding), then the clutch plates must be replaced with
new ones. See Technical Manual “Repair”, Section 50,
Group 10.
AG,OUOE003,9490 –19–12JUN99–1/1
250
10
19
Checking Lubricating Oil Pressure
1. Connect the JT07115 pressure test kit to the port

marked “LUBE”.
2. Run the engine at 2300 rpm and measure the

lubricating oil pressure.
Oil pressure should be 350 ± 100 kPa (3.5 ± 1 bar; 51

± 15 psi).
If the pressure is out of specification, check the

lubricating oil relief valve. See the Repair TM, Section
50, Group 10.
–UN–26JUL94
LX001580
AG,OUOE003,9491 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-19 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1165
Troubleshooting
Checking the Cooling System
Abbreviated Diagnostic Procedures
2. Slowly actuate the clutch pedal and note the pressure

reading.
Prior to actuating the clutch pedal the lubricating oil

pressure should be 350 ± 100 kPa (3.5 ± 1 bar; 51 ±
15 psi).. During the clutch slip phase the lubricating oil
pressure should drop by at least 50 kPa (0.5 bar; 7
psi). With the clutch pedal fully depressed the pressure
–UN–26JUL94
should rise to 350 ±100 kPa 3.5 ±1 bar; 51 ± 15 psi).
3. Slowly release the clutch pedal. Note the pressure

reading during the slip phase and after releasing the
LX001580
clutch pedal.
During the clutch slip phase the lubricating oil pressure

should again drop by at least 50 kPa (0.5 bar; 7 psi).
After the clutch pedal is released the pressure should
rise to 350 ±100 kPa 3.5 ±1 bar; 51 ± 15 psi).
If the oil pressure does not respond as indicated here,

the cooling valve and the cooling pilot valve should be
250
10 checked. See the Repair TM, Section 50, Group 10.
20
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-20 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1166
Troubleshooting
Detailed Diagnostic Procedure
1. Connect universal pressure test kit FKM10002 to the

ports labelled “CLUTCH” and “LUBE”.
3. Slowly depress the clutch pedal. Regulate the clutch

pressure by “playing” with the pedal, and note the lube
oil pressure.
–UN–22MAY97
Before the pedal is depressed, lube oil pressure should
be 350 ± 100 kPa (3.5 ± 1 bar; 51 ± 15 psi). Whenever
clutch pressure drops below 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 140
psi), lube oil pressure should fall by at least 50 kPa
LX1016190
(0.5 bar; 7 psi). When clutch pressure is between 250
and 950 kPa (2.5 and 9.5 bar; 36 and 140 psi), lube oil
pressure should remain at its reduced level. When
clutch pressure drops below 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi),
lube oil pressure should rise to 350 ± 100 kPa (3.5 ± 1
bar; 51 ± 15 psi) again.
4. Slowly release the clutch pedal and regulate the clutch

pressure by “playing” with the pedal.
Whenever clutch pressure rises above 250 kPa (2.5

bar; 36 psi), lube oil pressure should drop by at least
250
50 kPa (0.5 bar; 7 psi). When clutch pressure is 10
between 250 and 950 kPa (2.5 and 9.5 bar; 36 and 21
140 psi), lube oil pressure should remain at its reduced
level. When clutch pressure rises over 950 kPa (9.5
bar; 140 psi), lube oil pressure should rise to 350 ±
100 kPa (3.5 ± 1 bar; 51 ± 15 psi) again.
If cooling oil pressure does not react according to

specification, the clutch cooling valve and cooling pilot
valve must be checked. See Technical Manual
AG,OUOE003,9492 –19–12JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-21 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1167
Troubleshooting
Checking the Flow Rate
NOTE: When checking the flow rate, connect the flow

tester instead of the oil cooler, otherwise the
resistance of the oil cooler will be included in the
measurement.
1. Connect the flow tester as shown. Make sure the

direction of flow is correct. Open the restrictor on the
flow tester fully.
3. Measure the flow rate with the clutch pedal depressed.
The flow rate must be 54 L/min (14.3 gpm).
4. Release the clutch pedal and check the flow rate once
again.
–UN–22MAY97
The flow rate with the clutch pedal released must not
drop by more than 1 L/min (0.26 gpm) in relation to the
flow rate with the pedal depressed.
LX1016191
5. One at a time, switch the rear PTO, differential lock,
FWD1 and front PTO1 on and off.
250
10 When each of these is switched on and off, the flow
22 rate must not drop by more than 1 L/min (0.26 gpm) in
relation to the flow rate measured previously.
If the flow rate is too low only when the clutch pedal is
released, repair the clutch piston. See “Repair” Manual,
If the flow rate drops too much when any of these

systems are switched on or off, there must be
excessive leakage in the system affected. Check this
thoroughly, referring to Section 256, Group 15.
1
If equipped
AG,OUOE003,9493 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-22 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1168
Troubleshooting
Checking the Cooler Relief Valve
2. Slowly close the restrictor on the flow tester. As the

restrictor closes, the rate of flow decreases. At the
same time, pressure rises until the cooler relief valve
opens.
Pressure must not rise above 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138
psi).
If pressure rises higher, check the cooler relief valve.

See Technical Manual “Repair”, Section 50, Group 10.
–UN–22MAY97
LX1016191
AG,OUOE003,9494 –19–12JUN99–1/1
250
10
23
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-23 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1169
Troubleshooting
250
10
24
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-10-24 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1170
Group 15

SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company. LX,5515 009060 –19–01NOV95–1/3
RE37996 –UN–10AUG94
Adjusting Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RE37996
Adjusting the neutral start switch
LX,5515 009060 –19–01NOV95–2/3
Holding Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To hold the shifter shaft detent in place when adjusting

shifting mechanism and neutral start switch
250
A—Flat steel bar 30 x 12 x 110 mm
15
(1.18 x 0.472 x 4.33 in.)
1
B—Weld seam
C—Flat steel bar (2 used) 30 x 12 x 20 mm
–UN–12MAR96
(1.18 x 0.472 x 0.79 in.)
LX012744
LX,5515 009060 –19–01NOV95–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-15-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1171
Shift Linkage Test
1. Check shift levers and shifting gates.
Parts should not be bent or damaged.
2. Check bowden cables.
Bowden cables should not be bent, damaged or

tensioned and must move freely.
If any damage occurs, refer to Technical Manual “Repair”,

See Range Transmission and/or gear transmission linkage

test.
LX,25015 001846 –19–01FEB93–1/1
Range Transmission Linkage Test
1. Remove shift cover.
2. Shift shifter forks through all positions.

250
15 The shifter forks must not rub against the sides of the
–UN–26NOV96
2
shift collars in any of the shift positions.
3. Adjust shift linkage if necessary.
LX1016006
LX,25015 001847 –19–01FEB97–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-15-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1172
Adjusting Range Box Shifting
1. Move the shift rods to neutral.
2. Use the threaded pins to adjust the shift forks until they
are centered relative to the shift collar.
3. Move the shift forks to all positions.
–UN–26NOV96
The shift forks should not rub against the sides of the
shift collars in any position.
4. Tighten the threaded pins to 40 N•m (30 lb-ft).
LX1016007
5. Recheck the shifting.
If shifting cannot be correctly adjusted, the range box

should be repaired. See the Repair TM, Section 55,
Group 30.
LX,25015 016753 –19–01FEB98–1/1

250
15
3
Gear Transmission Linkage Test
LX,25015 001851 –19–01FEB97–1/2
2. Attach the dealer-manufactured holder (A) that acts as

a detent for the shift rods.
The shifter forks must not rub against the sides of the –UN–14JAN97
4. Adjust shift linkage if necessary.

LX1016213
LX,25015 001851 –19–01FEB97–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-15-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1173
Adjusting Shift Linkage at Gear

Transmission
1. Attach the dealer-manufactured holder (A) that acts as

a detent for the shift rods.
2. Move shift rods to neutral position.
3. Adjust shifter forks by means of threaded pins so that
–UN–12MAR96
they are centered in relation to shift collar.
LX012745
The shifter forks must not rub against the sides of the
5. Tighten threaded pins to 40 N•m (30 lb-ft).
6. Check shift linkage again.
If it is not possible to adjust shift linkage properly, repair

gear transmission. Refer to Technical Manual “Repair”,
LX,25015 001852 –19–01JUL97–1/1

250
15
4
Adjusting Neutral Start Switch
1. Install holding tool (C) for shifter shaft detent (self

manufactured).
2. Place shifter shafts in neutral position.
–UN–13MAR96
3. Adjust guide (A) by means of threaded pins (B) until
pin tip is pointing to the center of the raised area
between the recesses on shifter shaft ( see arrow).
LX012746
–UN–13MAR96
LX012747
Continued on next page LX,25015 003923 –19–01FEB97–1/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-15-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1174
4. Attach shift cover and insert adjusting tool

RE37996 (A) into bore for neutral start switch. Push
pin of tool completely downward.
5. Remove adjusting tool. Use thickest shim (B) fitting into

adjusting tool gap.
–UN–15AUG94
Thickness of shims available
1.20 mm (0.047 in.) 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
1.40 mm (0.055 in.) 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
LX004550
1.60 mm (0.063 in.) 2.40 mm (0.094 in.)
1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
–UN–15AUG94
LX004551
LX,25015 003923 –19–01FEB97–2/3
250
15
5
6. Install shim (A) and neutral start switch (B). Tighten
neutral start switch to between 18 and 20 N•m (13 and
15 lb-ft).
–UN–28JUL94
LX004552
LX,25015 003923 –19–01FEB97–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-15-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1175
Checking Neutral Start Switch
Go through all gears by means of gear shift lever and try

to start the engine.
NOTE: Engine must only start if gear shift lever is in

neutral position. If a gear is engaged, engine must
not start.
Check neutral start switch, if necessary; refer to

LX,25015 003924 –19–01FEB93–1/1
250
15
6
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-15-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1176
Adjusting the Shift Linkage and Parking Lock
CAUTION: Do not adjust bowden cables with

engine running, as tractor may move. Switch off
ignition and remove key.
–UN–28JUL94
Checking/Adjusting Range Engagement
1. Move range shift lever (B) to and fro in neutral zone (
LX003693
see arrow).
The shift lever must neither touch nor catch against the
shift gate.
2. If necessary, disengage bowden cables (C) and (D).

Adjust by turning the respective yokes.
3. Engage the bowden cables again and repeat the

check.
Checking/Adjusting Gear Engagement
1. Move gear shift lever (A) to and fro in neutral zone (

see arrow).
The shift lever must neither touch nor catch against the
shift gate. 250
15
7
2. If necessary, disengage bowden cables (F) and (G).
Adjust by turning the respective yokes.
–UN–28JUL94
check.
4. Adjust the parking lock.
LX003694
A—Gear shift lever
B—Range shift lever
C—Bowden cable, ranges C and D
D—Bowden cable, ranges A and B
E—Bowden cable, parking lock
F—Bowden cable, 2nd and 3rd gears
G—Bowden cable, reverse and 1st gear
Continued on next page LX,5005 016095 –19–01APR98–1/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-15-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1177
Adjusting Parking Lock
1. Make sure the gear shifting is correctly adjusted, i.e.

the shift quadrants (B) and (C) should align precisely (
see the figure below).
–UN–26NOV96
2. Remove the cable (F) from the parking lock.
3. Adjust the stop screw (E) with the gear shift lever (D)
in neutral so that the parking lock shift quadrant (A) is
LX1016000
precisely aligned with the other shift quadrants.
4. Push the parking lock cable yoke firmly downward until

the parking lock function is completely released.
5. Pull lightly on the cable yoke until approx 2 mm

(0.08 in.) of free play is obtained. Hold the cable in this
position (free of play) and turn the yoke until the yoke
holes and shift quadrants are precisely aligned.
Reconnect the cable. Secure the yoke with the locknut
and make sure the is not twisted on the parking lock
quadrant.
A—Shift Quadrant, Parking Lock

B—Shift Quadrant, Reverse and 1st Gear
C—Shift Quadrant, 2nd and 3rd Gear
D—Gear Shift Lever
250 E—Stop Screw
15 F—Parking Lock Cable
8
–UN–26NOV96
LX1016001
LX,5005 016095 –19–01APR98–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-15-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1178
Clutch Pedal Adjustment
1. Disconnect the operating cable yoke.
2. Depress clutch pedal to the lower pedal stop, then

raise it to the upper stop. Measure distance “a”.
To determine distance “a” place a ruler at lower pedal

stop and measure the distance from the lower bore
edge (with clutch pedal at lower stop) to the lower bore
edge (with clutch pedal at upper stop).
Distance “a” must be 51 ± 1 mm (2.01 ± 0.04 in.)
3. Adjust distance “a” by means of adjusting screw (B).

Tighten lock nut (A) to 15 N•m (11 lb-ft).
–UN–17MAR95
4. Re-check distance “a”.
5. Push clutch pedal completely up. Turn operating cable

yoke until bores of yoke and pedal are aligned.
LX009890
Re-connect and secure yoke.
250
15
9
–UN–16MAR95
LX009874
LX,5005 016096 –19–01APR98–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-15-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1179
250
15
10
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-15-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1180
Group 20
SyncroPlus Transmission Operation
Layout of 12-Speed Transmission
250
20
1
–UN–28JUL94
LX001162
A—Gear transmission B—Range transmission
This version consists of gear transmission (A) and • 12 forward speeds (3 gears x 4 ranges)
range transmission (B). All the gears and ranges are • 4 reverse speeds (1 gear x 4 ranges)
fully synchronized.
Travel speed: up to 30 km/h (18.5 mph)
The following gears are provided:
AG,OUOE003,9495 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-20-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1181
Layout of 12-Speed Transmission with Creeper
250
20
2
–UN–05AUG94
LX004730
A—Gear transmission B—Creeper transmission C—Range transmission
This version consists of gear transmission (A), creeper • 4 reverse speeds (1 gear x 4 ranges)
transmission (B) and range transmission (C). All the
gears and ranges are fully synchronized. The creeper Creeper transmission may be engaged in ranges A, B
transmission is not synchronized. and C. Creeper is locked out in range D.
The following gears are provided: Travel speed: up to 30 km/h (18.5 mph)
• 12 forward speeds (3 gears x 4 ranges)
AG,OUOE003,9496 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-20-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1182
Lubrication System
–UN–04MAR98
LX1016020
LX1016020
250
20
3
A—Lube oil from transmission B—Lube oil from charge pump
pump
AG,OUOE003,9497 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-20-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1183
Shift Operation
250
20
4
–UN–28JUL94
LX001167
A—Shift lever C—Shaft E—Shifter shaft G—Shift collar

B—Cable D—Shifter cam F—Shifter fork
Gears or ranges are shifted from the operator’s cab via shaft movement. The shifter fork, located on shifter
bowden cables. When shift lever is moved, the shaft, moves shift collar of synchronizer unit and the
corresponding bowden cable causes radial shaft corresponding gear is engaged. Locking pins are
movement. This movement is transmitted to the shifter located between shifter shafts so that only one gear or
shaft via shifter cam, which in turn causes axial shifter range can be shifted at a time.
AG,OUOE003,9498 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-20-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1184
Synchronization
Neutral Position
In neutral position, shift collar (E) is in center position. Ball

pins (B) are pressed into V-shaped groove of shift collar
by synchronizer springs (F). Gear (C) can rotate freely on
drive shaft (H).
A—Synchronizer ring
B—Ball pin (3 used)
–UN–28JUL94
C—Gear
D—Shift collar sleeve
E—Shift collar
F—Synchronizer spring (3 used)
L113963
G—Thrust block (3 used)
H—Drive shaft
AG,OUOE003,9499 –19–12JUN99–1/3
Shift Operation
When shifting gears, shift collar (E), ball pins (B) and
thrust blocks (G) are moved axially. Synchronizer ring (A)
is pressed against conical surface of gear (C) by thrust
blocks (G). The difference in speed of parts to be coupled 250
causes radial movement of synchronizer ring. This 20
5
movement, limited by stops, causes the tapered teeth of
synchronizer ring (A) to be pressed against shift collar (E),
preventing further collar movement. The shifting force of
–UN–28JUL94
shift collar and radial movement of synchronizer ring (A)
create (via the tapered teeth) an axial force between
conical face of synchronizer ring (A) and conical face of
gear (C). This reduces the difference in speed of parts to
L113964
be coupled and finally results in an equal speed.
B—Ball pin (3 used)
C—Gear
D—Shift collar sleeve
E—Shift collar
F—Synchronizer spring (3 used)
G—Thrust block (3 used)
H—Drive shaft
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-20-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1185
Gear Engaged
The parts to be coupled now have the same speed. Due

to the continued shifting force of shift collar against
synchronizer ring, the ring is turned back until shift collar
teeth are in line with tooth gaps of synchronizer ring. At
this moment the resistance is overcome which prevented
further movement of shift collar. The shift collar can now
move and mesh silently with the gear to be engaged.
Shaft and gear are firmly coupled and the gear is
–UN–28JUL94
engaged. Should two teeth be opposite each other during
engagement, the tapered teeth of the gear to be engaged
will turn until teeth can engage in opposite gap.
L113965
C—Gear
E—Shift collar
AG,OUOE003,9499 –19–12JUN99–3/3
250
20
6
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-20-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1186
250
20
7
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-20-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1187
Transmission Circuit - Key to Hydraulic Schematic
LX1018174 –UN–18MAY99
7
9
1 2
12
5
11
14
18
LX1018174
AG,OUOE003,9500 –19–12JUN99–1/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-20-8 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=1188
1—PTO brake 8—Test port, clutch pressure 19—Filter relief valve 26—Test port for system
2—PTO clutch 9—Clutch cooling 20—Press. sending unit, oil pressure
3—PTO modulating valve 10—Vehicle clutch filter restrict. warning light 27—Oil cooler
4—PTO solenoid valve 11—Clutch cooling valve 21—Temp. sending unit, oil 28—Transmission oil filter
5—ClUTCH PEDAL VALVE 12—Cooling pilot valve filter warning light1 29—Transmission oil pump
6—Engagement override valve 13—Differential lock 22—Temp. sending unit, oil 30—Test port for lube oil
7—Test port, cooling oil 14—Differential lock solenoid temperature warning light1 pressure
pressure valve 23—Lube relief valve 31—To hydraulic circuit (high
15—Pressure regulating valve 24—FWD clutch2 pressure)
16—Cooler relief valve 25—FWD clutch solenoid 32—Primary filter
17—Transmission lube valve2 33—Main oil reservoir (sump)
18—Press. sending unit,
system pressure indicator
light
1
Temperature sending unit (21) is deleted on 6110 to 6510S tractors
temperature sending unit (22) is replaced by a temperature sensor
2
If equipped
AG,OUOE003,9500 –19–12JUN99–2/2
250
20
9
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-20-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1189
Transmission Circuit - Theory of Operation
The transmission circuit comprises the transmission oil solenoid valves for the differential lock (14), PTO (4)
pump (29), oil cooler (27), transmission oil filter (28), and front wheel drive (25)1. Excess oil is directed
the valves in Perma Clutch II and the valves for PTO, through oil cooler (27).
differential lock and front-wheel drive1. Transmission
lubrication is also included in the transmission circuit. The oil cooler relief valve (16) prevents pressures
above 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 140 psi). If pressure exceeds
The transmission oil pump (29) draws oil from the this level, excess oil is directed to the transmission
main reservoir (33) through filter screen (32) and lubrication (17) and to the clutch cooling valve (11).
forces it through the oil filter (28).
After oil has left the oil cooler it flows to the
If the oil filter is clogged, filter relief valve (19) opens a transmission lubrication (17). If lube oil pressure
passage, allowing the unfiltered oil to flow to exceeds 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi), lube relief valve
pressure-regulating valve (15). If this happens, an (23) opens, directing oil from transmission lubrication
indicator light is switched on by means of a pressure to the pump inlet.
sending unit (20). At very low oil temperatures, the
sending unit may reach the pressure at which it Engagement override valve (6) acts as neutral start
operates even although the filter is not clogged. To equipment. It is not activated until clutch pedal valve
prevent this from happening, a temperature sending (5) has been actuated once.
unit (21)2 is added which prevents the pressure
sending unit (20) from cutting in at oil temperatures Clutch cooling valve (11) supplies the vehicle clutch
below +28°C (82°F). with lube oil during the slip phase; this removes any
heat caused by the friction. The clutch cooling valve is
Pressure-regulating valve (15) limits system pressure activated at the right moment via the cooling pilot valve
to 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi). The pressure-regulating (12).
valve also supplies the clutch pedal valve (5) and the
250
20
10
1
If equipped
2
AG,OUOE003,9501 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 250-20-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1190
Group 20A
Perma-Clutch II
Components
250
20A
1
–UN–08APR99
LX1021934
A—Clutch G—Drive flange N—Engagement override valve R—Pressure sending unit for
B—Transmission oil pump H—Cooler relief valve O—Clutch pedal valve oil filter indicator light
C—Drive shaft I—Filter housing P—Temperature sending unit S—Temperature sending unit
D—Clutch housing J—Oil filter for oil filter indicator light1 for oil temperature warning
E—Filter relief valve K—Pressure regulating valve Q—Press. sending unit, light1
F—Lube relief valve L—Cooling pilot valve system pressure indicator T—Lever of clutch pedal valve
M—Clutch cooling valve light
Main parts of Perma Clutch II are clutch, transmission The clutch transmits torque from engine to
oil pump and valves. transmission.
1
Temperature sending unit (P) is deleted on 6110 to 6510S tractors
temperature sending unit (S) is replaced by a temperature sensor

111401
PN=1191
Perma-Clutch II
The transmission oil pump supplies oil to clutch, clutch from the transmission oil pump. The oil flow to the
cooling and transmission lube systems. Front wheel individual components is controlled by means of the
drive clutch2, differential lock and PTO also receive oil valves.
2
If equipped
AG,OUOE003,9502 –19–12JUN99–2/2
250
20A
2

111401
PN=1192
Perma-Clutch II
Clutch Design
250
20A
3
–UN–28JUL94
LX001387
A—Clutch drum C—Disk pack E—Housing cover G—End plate

B—Pressure piston D—Clutch hub F—Return springs
Main clutch parts are clutch drum (A), hub (D), disk
pack (C), pressure piston (B), end plate (G), housing
cover (E) and return springs (F).
AG,OUOE003,9504 –19–12JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1193
Perma-Clutch II
Power Flow, Clutch Pedal Depressed
G H I
F J
E K
D L
M
C
B
A
250
20A
4
–UN–04MAR98
P
O
Q
N LX1016019
LX1016019 R
A—Universal jointed shaft G—End plate J—Hub N—Clutch pedal valve lever
B—Flange H—Externally splined drive K—Needle bearing O—Return spring (12 used)
C—Transmission oil pump disk (2 used) L—Gear shift transmission P—Pressure-free oil
D—Drive shaft I—Internally splined clutch drive shaft Q—Lube oil
E—Clutch drum disk (3 used) M—PTO drive shaft R—Pilot oil
F—Pressure piston
The universal jointed shaft (A) is driven by the engine.

Via flange (B), torque is transmitted to clutch drive
shaft (D).

111401
PN=1194
Perma-Clutch II
Transmission oil pump (C), PTO drive shaft (M) and splined drive disks (H) and internally splined clutch
clutch drum (E) are driven by the clutch drive shaft at disks (I) are no longer compressed. The needle
the same time (regardless whether clutch is engaged bearing (K) enables hub (J) and drive shaft (L) of gear
or not). shift transmission to rotate with a different speed than
clutch drive shaft (D).
No pilot oil flows behind pressure piston (F) when
clutch pedal is depressed. Oil is pressure-free. The The transmission oil pump (C) draws pressure-free oil
return springs (O) force end plate (G) and pressure from differential housing. This oil is later used as pilot
piston (F) back to their original position. The oil behind oil, lube oil and clutch cooling oil (only during the slip
the pressure piston flows back to sump. Externally phase; not shown).
AG,OUOE003,9505 –19–12JUN99–2/2
250
20A
5

111401
PN=1195
Perma-Clutch II
Power Flow, Clutch Pedal Not Depressed
G H I
F J
E K
D L
M
C
B
250
20A
6
–UN–04MAR98
P
Q
N O LXC008276
LXC008276 R
A—Universal jointed shaft G—End plate J—Hub N—Clutch pedal valve lever
B—Flange H—Externally splined drive K—Needle bearing O—Return spring (12 used)
C—Transmission oil pump disk (2 used) L—Gear shift transmission P—Pressure-free oil
D—Drive shaft I—Internally splined clutch drive shaft Q—Lube oil
E—Clutch drum disk (3 used) M—PTO drive shaft R—Pilot oil
F—Pressure piston
When clutch pedal is released, pilot oil flows behind

pressure piston (F). Pressure piston and end plate (G)
move against spring force of return springs (O).

111401
PN=1196
Perma-Clutch II
The externally splined drive disks (H) and the internally gear transmission drive shaft (L) rotate with the same
splined clutch disks (I) are compressed. Hub (J) and speed as clutch drive shaft (D).
AG,OUOE003,9506 –19–12JUN99–2/2
Transmission Oil Pump - Theory of Operation
A B
H C
D
G
–UN–04MAR98
250
K 20A
7
L
LX003884
LX003884
A—Housing D—Suction chamber G—Pressure chamber K—Pressure-free oil

B—Input gear E—From sump H—To transmission oil filter L—Engagement oil pressure
C—Toothed ring F—Crescent shaped separator
The transmission pump is a gear pump with through the primary filter and trapped between the
crescent-shaped separator. It consists primarily of teeth and crescent-shaped separator (F) before being
housing (A), internally toothed ring (C) and an conveyed to pressure chamber (G). The meshing teeth
externally toothed input gear (B) which is driven from in the pressure chamber expel the oil and force it out
the engine via the clutch drive shaft. of the pump to the transmission oil filter.
Suction chamber (D) is located on the side where the Pump capacity is 60 L/min (15.8 gpm) at an engine
teeth unmesh to generate low pressure. Oil is drawn in speed of 2300 rpm.
AG,OUOE003,9507 –19–12JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1197
Perma-Clutch II
Perma Clutch II - Legend for Hydraulic Schematic
LX1018138 –UN–20FEB98
2
7
8
1 3 4 5 6
9
15
14
10
11
13
12
18
17
19
16
20 21 22
25
24
23 26 28
27
35
34
32
30
31 33
29 36 37
LX1018138 38
AG,OUOE003,9508 –19–12JUN99–1/2
111401
PN=1198
Perma-Clutch II
1—Engagement override valve 10—Clutch pedal valve 21—Filter relief valve 30—Test port for system
2—Test port, cooling oil 11—Sump 22—Press. sending unit, oil pressure
pressure 12—Restrictor filter restrict. warning light 31—Oil cooler
3—Test port, clutch pressure 13—Clutch cooling valve 23—To differential lock, FWD 32—Transmission oil filter
4—Air suction valve 14—Restrictor clutch1 and PTO 33—Transmission oil pump
5—Overspeed relief valve 15—Cooling pilot valve 24—Restrictor 34—Test port for lube oil
6—Sump 16—Pressure regulating valve 25—Temp. sending unit, oil pressure
7—Clutch cooling 17—Cooler relief valve filter warning light2 35—To hydraulic circuit (high
8—Sump 18—Transmission lube 26—Temp. sending unit, oil pressure)
9—Clutch piston 19—Sump temperature warning light2 36—Test port after oil cooler
20—Press. sending unit, 27—Lube relief valve 37—Primary filter
system pressure indicator 28—Sump 38—Main oil reservoir (sump)
light 29—Test port before oil cooler
1
If equipped
2
AG,OUOE003,9508 –19–12JUN99–2/2
250
20A
9

111401
PN=1199
Perma-Clutch II
Description of Valves and Other Hydraulic Components
Pressure Regulating Valve speed is exceeded, the clutch piston may be moved by
the centrifugal force acting on the oil. In this situation,
Pressure regulating valve (16) is controlled by the oil the over-speed relief valve (5) opens and the oil can
coming from the pump. From a pressure of 1200 kPa flow to the sump.
(12 bar; 175 psi), the valve is in its end position and
opens a passage to the oil cooler. Oil pressure cannot Air Suction Valve
rise any higher; it remains at this level.
Caused by oil flowing to the sump, a slight low
This pressure, limited to 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi), is pressure is formed in the oil passage when the
the system pressure. over-speed relief valve is open. As a result, the air
suction valve (4) opens and air can flow into the oil
Clutch Pedal Valve passage.
With the clutch engaged, pressure oil flows from clutch Clutch Cooling Valve
pedal valve (10) via engagement override valve (1) to
the piston of the disk clutch (9). Power is transmitted As the clutch engages and disengages, the friction
from the disk clutch to the transmission. generates heat. These are the phases when lube oil is
introduced to the clutch via the clutch cooling valve
When the clutch pedal is depressed, the clutch pedal (13). This lube oil has the effect of cooling the clutch.
valve is operated by means of a bowden cable. Oil
pressure drops and the oil flows back to the sump. Cooling Pilot Valve
The clutch piston is forced back by spring force. The
clutch is disengaged and no power is transmitted to Cooling pilot valve (15) ensures that the cooling valve
the transmission. is only actuated in a certain pressure range (i.e. during
the slip phase). It is controlled by the outlet pressure of
250
20A Engagement Override Valve the clutch pedal valve.
10
If the clutch pedal is not actuated once the engine is Oil Cooler
started, hydraulic oil is blocked by engagement
override valve (1), preventing it from flowing to the Oil cooler (31) reduces the temperature of the
clutch piston. The clutch remains disengaged. hydraulic oil so that the hydraulic system can operate
properly.
This condition is a design feature intended to prevent
the tractor from moving accidentally. The engagement When the system pressure of 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175
override valve allows oil to pass to the clutch only psi) is reached, oil flows from the pressure regulating
when it has been activated by the clutch pedal valve valve (16) to the oil cooler. To relieve the oil cooler,
switching once. Once the engagement override valve pressure is limited to 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi) by
has been activated, it remains in this position during means of cooler relief valve (17).
tractor operation.
Cooler Relief Valve
Over-Speed Relief Valve
If pressure exceeds 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi), the
With the clutch disengaged, oil in the passage to the cooler relief valve (17) opens a passage to
clutch piston is normally pressure-free. When rated transmission lubrication. This relieves the oil cooler.

111401
PN=1200
Perma-Clutch II
Lube Relief Valve Pressure and Temperature Sending Units for

Warning Lights
If pressure exceeds 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi), lube
relief valve (27) opens a passage to the transmission Sending unit, oil filter restr. warning light (22)
oil pump inlet. This limits lube pressure to the value
mentioned. • Switch point (pressure rising): 700 ± 50 kPa (7 ± 0.5
bar; 102 ± 7.3 psi)
Transmission Oil Filter • Switch point (pressure dropping): 600 ± 150 kPa (6
± 1.5 bar; 87 ± 21.8 psi)
The oil coming from the transmission oil pump flows
through the transmission oil filter (32). If the filter is Sending unit, system press. indicator light (20)
restricted, filter relief valve (21) opens and the oil filter
restriction warning light lights up. • Switch point (pressure rising): 865 ± 65 kPa (8,65 ±
0.65 bar; 126 ± 9.4 psi)
Filter Relief Valve • Switch point (pressure dropping): 827 ± 35 kPa
(8,27 ± 0.35 bar; 120 ± 5.1 psi)
If the transmission oil filter is clogged, pressure rises
before the transmission oil filter. Behind the filter, Temp. sending unit, oil filter warning light (25)1
pressure drops. This pressure difference controls the
filter relief valve (21). When the restriction starts, an oil • Switch point: 28°C (82°F)
passage is opened to the sending unit of the oil filter
restriction warning light (22). The warning light lights Temp. sending unit, oil temp. warning light (26)1
up. If the restriction is excessive, the oil flows
unfiltered to the pressure regulating valve (emergency • Switch point: 105°C (221°F)
situation).
Filter Screen
250
20A
The filter screen (37) is located in the differential 11
housing sump. It prevents dirt from entering the intake
passage of the transmission oil pump.
1
AG,OUOE003,9509 –19–12JUN99–2/2

111401
PN=1201
Perma-Clutch II
Theory of Operation - Pressure Regulating and Filter Relief Valves
B E
C
D
F
A
G
J
I
R S T
Q
N P
250 L
20A M O
–UN–22JUL99
12
LX1015320
LX1015320 W X Y Z
V
A—Oil, system 2 H—Pressure regulating valve N—Transmission oil filter T—Sump

B—Oil, system 1 I—Filter relief valve O—Transmission oil pump U—Filter screen
C—Sump J—Press. sending unit, oil P—Temp. sending unit, oil V—Main oil reservoir (sump)
D—Cooler relief valve filter restrict. warning light temperature warning light1 W—Oil, system 1
E—Cooling oil K—Restrictor Q—Temp. sending unit, oil X—Oil, system 2
F—Transmission lube L—Test port for system filter warning light1 Y—Lube/cooling oil
G—Sump pressure R—Test port, lube oil pressure Z—Pressure-free oil
M—Oil cooler S—Lube relief valve
Illustration shows tractor in normal operation
1
Temperature sending unit (Q) is deleted on 6110 to 6510S tractors
temperature sending unit (P) is replaced by a temperature sensor

111401
PN=1202
Perma-Clutch II
Transmission oil pump (O) ingests oil from the main oil has NOT flowed through the transmission oil filter
reservoir (V) and pumps it through the transmission oil flows to the other end of the valve.
filter (N). Then the oil presses against the spring on
pressure regulating valve (H). The illustration shows the normal operating condition
(i.e. with clean transmission oil). The difference in
From a pressure of 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi), the pressure is less than 300 kPa (3 bar; 44 psi). The
valve is in its end position and opens a passage to the spring on the filter relief valve holds the valve spool in
oil cooler. The oil pressure can rise no further and its neutral position and all the passages are closed.
remains at this level (system pressure).
Once system pressure has been reached, oil flows
The oil that flows directly from the transmission oil through a passage in pressure regulating valve (H) to
pump to the other valves has priority and is available the oil cooler (M) and to the cooler relief valve (D). The
even when system pressure has not been reached. cooler relief valve protects the oil cooler by preventing
This oil is designated oil from system 1. the pressure from rising too high.
The oil that flows through the pressure regulating valve The cooler relief valve is operated by pressure. From a
to the other valves only becomes available after pressure of 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi), the spring force
system pressure has been reached. This oil is of the valve is overcome and oil flows directly to
designated oil from system 2. lubricate the transmission (F) and to cool the disk
clutch or disk brake (E).
The oil that flows from the pressure regulating valve
through the oil cooler is used to lubricate the Theory of Operation - Lube Relief Valve
transmission (F) and cool the disk clutch or disk brake
(E). Lube relief valve (S) is intended to limit lube oil
pressure to 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi).
Filter relief valve (I) is intended to relieve the
transmission oil filter whenever necessary. The valve is The lube relief valve is operated by pressure. From a
250
operated by a difference in pressure. pressure of 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi), the spring 20A
13
Theory of Operation - Cooler Relief Valve force of the valve is overcome and oil flows through
the relief valve to the transmission pump inlet (short
Oil that has passed through the transmission oil filter circuit). When lube oil pressure drops below 250 kPa
flows to the spring end of the filter relief valve. Oil that (2.5 bar; 36 psi), the valve closes again.

111401
PN=1203
Perma-Clutch II
B E
C
D
F
A
G
J
I
R S T
Q
N P
L
M O
–UN–04MAR98
250
20A
U
14
LX1015321
W X Y Z
LX1015321 V
A—Oil, system 2 H—Pressure regulating valve N—Transmission oil filter T—Sump

B—Oil, system 1 I—Filter relief valve O—Transmission oil pump U—Filter screen
C—Sump J—Press. sending unit, oil P—Temp. sending unit, oil V—Main oil reservoir (sump)
D—Cooler relief valve filter restrict. warning light temperature warning light1 W—Oil, system 1
E—Cooling oil K—Restrictor Q—Temp. sending unit, oil X—Oil, system 2
F—Transmission lube L—Test port for system filter warning light1 Y—Lube/cooling oil
G—Sump pressure R—Test port, lube oil pressure Z—Pressure-free oil
M—Oil cooler S—Lube relief valve
Illustration shows the situation when transmission Behind the filter, pressure drops. This difference in
oil filter is clogged pressure actuates the filter relief valve (I).
If the transmission oil filter (N) is clogged, pressure

rises before the transmission oil filter.
1

111401
PN=1204
Perma-Clutch II
When the difference in pressure is between 300 and transmission oil filter is not clogged. For this reason,
430 kPa (3 and 4.3 bar; 44 and 62 psi), the filter relief temperature sending unit (Q)1 comes before the
valve moves against the spring. An oil passage opens pressure sending unit, making it impossible for the
to the pressure sending unit (J) for oil filter restriction pressure sending unit to switch unless the oil has
warning light. The warning light lights up. The reached a temperature of +28°C (82°F).
transmission oil filter must be replaced.
At very low oil temperatures, the switch pressure of the

sending unit may be reached even although the
1
250
20A
15

111401
PN=1205
Perma-Clutch II
B E
C
D
F
A G
J
I
R S T
Q
N P
L
M O
–UN–04MAR98
250 U
20A
16
LX1015322
LX1015322 W X Y V
A+B—Oil under pressure H—Pressure regulating valve N—Transmission oil filter S—Lube relief valve
C—Sump I—Filter relief valve O—Transmission oil pump T—Sump
D—Cooler relief valve J—Press. sending unit, oil P—Temp. sending unit, oil U—Filter screen
E—Cooling oil filter restrict. warning light temperature warning light1 V—Main oil reservoir (sump)
F—Transmission lube K—Restrictor Q—Temp. sending unit, oil W—Oil under pressure
G—Sump L—Test port for system filter warning light1 X—Lube/cooling oil
pressure R—Test port, lube oil pressure Y—Pressure-free oil
M—Oil cooler
Illustration shows the situation with extreme If transmission oil filter (N) is not changed when the oil
clogging of transmission oil filter (emergency filter restriction warning light comes on, the filter
situation) becomes more and more clogged.
1

111401
PN=1206
Perma-Clutch II
Oil pressure before the transmission oil filter continues The spring on the pressure regulating valve holds the
to increase. At the same time, the pressure behind the valve spool in its 1st stage position. With the spool in
filter drops even further. this position, it is possible for unfiltered oil from the
filter relief valve to penetrate into the entire system.
From a difference in pressure of 430 kPa (4.3 bar; 62
psi), filter relief valve (I) switches to its 3rd stage and With the pressure regulating valve in the position
the oil flows directly to pressure regulating valve (H). shown, no oil can flow to the oil cooler, and this
This oil is unfiltered. Impurities in the oil may lead to prevents the pressure from dropping further. The
damage at the valves. transmission is lubricated by the filter relief valve,
which also provides cooling for the disk clutch or disk
From a difference in pressure of 500 kPa (5 bar; 73 brake.
psi), filter relief valve (I) switches to its 4th stage and
oil can flow through an oil passage to lubricate the The fact that oil flows through the pressure regulating
transmission. This reduces oil pressure as well as valve means that the oil pressure behind the
ensuring lubrication. transmission oil filter may rise slightly, and the filter
relief valve moves back and forth between the 3rd and
Because of the low pressure behind the transmission 4th stages.
oil filter, the pressure regulating valve cannot operate.
AG,OUOE003,9510 –19–12JUN99–6/6
250
20A
17

111401
PN=1207
Perma-Clutch II
Theory of Operation - Clutch Pedal and Engagement Override Valves
D
E
–UN–04MAR98
250 F
20A
LX1018139
18
I J K
LX1018139 G H
A—Engagement override valve D—Clutch pedal valve G—Oil, from system 1 J—Oil, system 2
B—Clutch piston E—Sump H—Oil, from system 2 K—Pressure-free oil
C—Pilot cooling oil F—To differential lock, FWD I—Oil, system 1
clutch1 and PTO
Illustration shows the situation after the engine override valve. The valve remains closed, because
has been started, but before the clutch has been spring force is also acting on one end of it.
actuated.
Oil from system 2, which normally flows to clutch
Before the engine is started, the entire hydraulic piston (B), is stopped at the engagement override
system is pressure-free. The spring on engagement valve and can no longer flow to the clutch piston. This
override valve (A) forces the valve into the position is a deliberate condition and is intended to prevent the
shown. tractor from moving accidentally.
Once the engine is started, pressurized oil from

system 1 acts against both ends of the engagement
1
If equipped

111401
PN=1208
Perma-Clutch II
The engagement override valve permits oil into the

clutch only after it has been actuated by the clutch
pedal valve being switched once.
250
20A
19

111401
PN=1209
Perma-Clutch II
D
E
–UN–04MAR98
F
LX1018140
250
20A LX1018140 G H I J K
20
clutch1 and PTO
Illustration shows the situation as the clutch is Once this has happened, oil from system 2 can flow
being actuated for the first time after the engine through the engagement override valve and reach the
has been started. clutch piston. See also the illustration “Tractor driving
forward normally”.
Pressing the clutch pedal causes the clutch pedal
valve to change its position. This stops the flow of Once actuated, the engagement override valve
pressure oil to the spring end of the engagement remains in this position as long as the tractor is in
override valve. Oil from system 1, acting on the other operation, since pressure oil does not act on the end
end of the valve, presses the valve back against the of the valve with the spring while the tractor is in
spring (see arrow) and into its other position. operation.
1
If equipped

111401
PN=1210
Perma-Clutch II
D
E
–UN–04MAR98
F
LX1018141
250
LX1018141 G H I J K 20A
21
clutch1 and PTO
Illustration shows the tractor driving forward to transmit power to the transmission. When the clutch
normally. pedal is released, oil flows into the clutch piston again
and the clutch is engaged.
When the clutch pedal is released, oil from system 2
flows through clutch pedal valve (D) and engagement The speed of engagement is determined via the clutch
override valve (A) to the clutch piston (B). pedal. The slower (or faster) the clutch pedal is
depressed or released, the less (or more) oil flows
When the clutch pedal is depressed, the clutch pedal through the valve. The duration of the disengagement
valve interrupts the flow of oil to the clutch piston. The and engagement processes can thus be controlled at
disk clutch is disengaged by spring force and it ceases will.
1
If equipped
AG,OUOE003,9511 –19–12JUN99–4/4

111401
PN=1211
Perma-Clutch II
Theory of Operation - Cooling
F
E
–UN–04MAR98
G
250
LX1018142
20A
22 LX1018142 I J K
A—Clutch cooling E—Restrictor H—Sump J—Cooling oil

B—Disk clutch F—Cooling pilot valve I—Pressure-free oil or oil K—Pressure-free oil
C—Oil, from clutch pedal valve G—Cooling oil below 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36
D—Clutch cooling valve psi)
If clutch (B) is engaged or disengaged, the friction or when the clutch has just been engaged and the slip
during the slip phase produces heat. For this reason, phase has not yet started. Oil from the clutch pedal
the clutch must be supplied with cooling oil for the valve (C) is pressure-free or is at a pressure below
duration of the slip phase. Once the slip phase is over, 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi).
cooling is no longer required.
Although the pilot oil acts against the spring on the
Oil from the clutch pedal valve (C) flows to the disk clutch cooling valve, the spring force cannot be
clutch and also acts as pilot oil for clutch cooling. The overcome because the oil pressure is less than 250
pressure of the pilot oil for clutch cooling is therefore kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi). Cooling oil (G), which comes
always the same as clutch pressure. from the oil cooler, is present at the clutch cooling
valve but cannot flow any further. No cooling takes
The illustration shows the situation when the clutch place.
has just been disengaged and the slip phase is over,

111401
PN=1212
Perma-Clutch II
F
E
–UN–04MAR98
H
LX1018143
LX1018143 I J K
250
20A
A—Clutch cooling E—Restrictor H—Sump J—Cooling oil 23
B—Disk clutch F—Cooling pilot valve I—Oil pressure between 250 K—Pressure-free oil
C—Oil, from clutch pedal valve G—Cooling oil kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi) and
D—Clutch cooling valve 900 kPa (9 bar; 130 psi)
If the clutch (B) is engaged or disengaged, the friction Pilot oil flows through cooling pilot valve (F) and acts
during the slip phase produces heat. For this reason, against the spring on the clutch cooling valve (D).
the clutch must be supplied with cooling oil for the From a pressure of 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi), the
duration of the slip phase. spring force is overcome and the clutch cooling valve
moves to the position shown.
The illustration shows the situation when the clutch is
in the process of engaging or disengaging. The clutch Cooling oil (G), which comes from the oil cooler, is free
is in the slip phase. The oil from clutch pedal valve (C) to flow through the clutch cooling valve to the clutch
is at a pressure between 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi) and itself.
900 kPa (9 bar; 130 psi).

111401
PN=1213
Perma-Clutch II
F
E
–UN–04MAR98
H
LX1018144
I J K
250 LX1018144
20A
24 A—Clutch cooling D—Clutch cooling valve G—Cooling oil J—Cooling oil
B—Disk clutch E—Restrictor H—Sump K—Pressure-free oil
C—Oil, from clutch pedal valve F—Cooling pilot valve I—Oil pressure over 900 kPa (9
bar; 130 psi)
If the clutch is not engaged completely, there is no the spring force is overcome and the cooling pilot
friction to cause heat. There is therefore no need for valve moves to the position shown. The pilot oil from
cooling. the clutch pedal valve can no longer flow to the clutch
cooling valve (D). The spring forces the clutch cooling
The illustration shows the situation when the clutch is valve into the position shown. Cooling oil (G), which
fully engaged or has just been engaged, and the slip comes from the oil cooler, is present at the clutch
phase is over. The oil from clutch pedal valve (C) is at cooling valve but cannot flow any further. No cooling
a pressure in excess of 900 kPa (9 bar; 130 psi). takes place.
Pilot oil acts against the spring on the cooling pilot

valve (F). From a pressure of 900 kPa (9 bar; 130 psi),
AG,OUOE003,9512 –19–12JUN99–3/3

111401
PN=1214
Group 20B
Gear Transmission
Gear Transmission Design
250
20B
1
–UN–06SEP94
LX001208
A—Gear transmission
Continued on next page LX,25020B003943 –19–01APR94–1/3

111401
PN=1215
Gear Transmission
250
20B
2
–UN–27JUL94
LX004120
A—Idler gear E—Reverse gear H—Gear, 2nd gear K—Needle bearing

B—Intermediate shaft F—Synchronizer unit, reverse I—Synchronizer unit, 2nd and L—Drive shaft of range
C—Countershaft and 1st gear 3rd gears transmission or creeper
D—Drive shaft G—Gear, 1st gear J—Connecting ring, 3rd gear transmission
Drive shaft (D), countershaft (C) and intermediate needle bearing (K) is provided. Synchronizer units are
shaft (B) are located in transmission housing. firmly connected to drive shaft.
Reverse gear (E), gears of 1st and 2nd gear and As soon as a synchronizer unit is brought into shift
synchronizer units (F and I) are located on drive shaft. position, the corresponding gear is firmly connected to
Gears can rotate freely on drive shaft. Drive shaft (L) shaft. When shifting into 3rd gear, drive shaft of gear
of range transmission or creeper transmission can also transmission is connected to drive shaft of range
rotate freely on drive shaft of gear transmission, since transmission or creeper transmission.
Continued on next page LX,25020B003943 –19–01APR94–2/3

111401
PN=1216
Gear Transmission
Countershaft gears are an integral part of the shaft. Idler gear (A) changes direction of rotation when
These gears mesh with drive shaft gears. When reverse gear is engaged.
shifting gears, the countershaft will also rotate.
LX,25020B003943 –19–01APR94–3/3
Power Flow in 1st Gear
250
20B
3
–UN–26JUL94
LX001209
Shift collar (F) of synchronizer unit connects gear of transmission. Drive shaft (L) of range transmission or
1st gear (G) to drive shaft (D). Power is transmitted to creeper transmission can rotate at a different speed
countershaft (C) which in turn transmits power to drive than drive shaft (D) of gear transmission because of
shaft (L) of range transmission or creeper needle bearing (K).
LX,25020B003944 –19–01APR94–1/1

111401
PN=1217
Gear Transmission
Power Flow in 2nd Gear
250
20B
4
–UN–26JUL94
LX001210
Shift collar (I) of synchronizer unit connects gear of

2nd gear (H) to drive shaft (D). Power is transmitted to
countershaft (C) and drive shaft (L).
LX,25020B001401 –19–30APR91–1/1

111401
PN=1218
Gear Transmission
Power Flow in 3rd Gear
250
20B
5
–UN–26JUL94
LX001233
Shift collar (I) of synchronizer unit connects ring (J) to transmission, power is transmitted directly at a 1 : 1
drive shaft (D). As connecting ring (J) is splined to ratio.
drive shaft (L) of range transmission or creeper
LX,25020B003945 –19–01APR94–1/1

111401
PN=1219
Gear Transmission
Power Flow in Reverse Gear
250
20B
6
–UN–26JUL94
LX001234
Shift collar (F) of synchronizer unit connects reverse power to countershaft (C). The countershaft transmits
gear (E) to drive shaft (D). Power is transmitted to idler power to drive shaft (L).
gear (A), changing direction of rotation and directing
LX,25020B001437 –19–07MAY91–1/1

111401
PN=1220
Gear Transmission
Neutral Start Switch
–UN–28JUL94
LX002515
A—Upper shifter shaft (reverse B—Lower shifter shaft (2nd C—Pin E—Guide
and 1st gear) and 3rd gear) D—Neutral start switch F—Locking pin
250
The neutral start switch (D) is located in the shift start switch is actuated, allowing the operator to start 20B
cover. A locking pin (F) is provided between shifter the tractor engine. 7
shafts (A and B). This pin ensures that only one shifter
shaft can be moved at a time. Guide (E) is connected As soon as one of the shifter shafts is moved out of
to upper shifter shaft. Pin (C) actuates the neutral start neutral position, pin (C) will slide into one of the two
switch, depending on shifter shaft position. notches on lower shifter shaft. The neutral start switch
is no longer actuated, preventing the tractor engine
In neutral position, pin (C) is located between notches from being started.
of lower shifter shaft ( see arrow). The neutral
LX,25020B003026 –19–01MAY92–1/1

111401
PN=1221
Gear Transmission
250
20B
8

111401
PN=1222
Group 20C
Creeper Transmission
Layout of Creeper Transmission
250
20C
1
–UN–08SEP94
LX004818
A—Creeper transmission

111401
PN=1223
250
20C
2
–UN–18MAY94
LX004819
A—Drive shaft E—Shift collar J—Drive shaft of gear M—Differential drive shaft of
B—Double gear F—Pin (8 used) transmission range transmission
C—Countershaft of gear G—Gear K—Needle bearing N—Needle bearing
transmission H—Gear L—Axial bearing (2 used)
D—Connecting ring I—Drive shaft of range
transmission
The essential parts of the creeper transmission are the driven by drive shaft of gear transmission (J) or by
drive shaft (A) and double gear (B). The drive shaft is countershaft of gear transmission (C).

111401
PN=1224
Creeper is engaged or disengaged by shift collar (E) creeper drive shaft (A) or range transmission drive
and pins (F). With creeper engaged, speed is reduced shaft (I). Gears can rotate freely on drive shaft
at a ratio of 9.95 : 1. because of needle bearings (K) and (N).
A locking pin ensures that the creeper is locked out in Axial forces created by helical gears (G) and (H) are
range D. The creeper may be engaged in ranges A, B absorbed by the two axial bearings (L) installed
and C only. opposite each other.
Depending on position of shift collar and pins,

gears (G) and (H) rotate at a different speed than
LX,25020C003952 –19–01APR94–3/3
250
20C
3

111401
PN=1225
Power Flow With Creeper Disengaged
250
20C
4
–UN–16AUG94
LX004820
With creeper disengaged, shift collar (E) connects Thus power is transmitted from drive shaft (A) to drive
ring (D) and gear (G). Since connecting ring (D) is shaft (I) of range transmission via gear (G).
splined to drive shaft (A), the gear is now firmly locked
to shaft. Pins (F) connected to shift collar are completely
pushed into gear (G), i.e. the pins provide no
Gear (G) is also splined to drive shaft (I) of range connection between gears (G) and (H). Gear (H) can
transmission. rotate freely on body of gear (G).
LX,25020C003953 –19–01APR94–1/1

111401
PN=1226
Power Flow With Creeper Engaged
250
20C
5
–UN–16AUG94
LX004821
With creeper engaged, pins (F) connect gears (H) and The gears can rotate freely on drive shaft, since no
(G). Gear (G) is also splined to drive shaft (I) of range connection is provided between gear (G) and
transmission. connecting ring (D).
Power is transmitted from drive shaft (A) to drive shaft

of range transmission via double gear (B) and the
gears which are connected by pins.
LX,25020C003954 –19–01APR94–1/1

111401
PN=1227
250
20C
6

111401
PN=1228
Group 20D
Range Transmission
Range Transmsission
–UN–28JUL94
250
20D
1
LX001283
A—Range transmission
LX,25020D001508 –19–01MAY92–1/1

111401
PN=1229
Range Transmission
Layout
–UN–28JUL94
250
20D
LX001284
2
A—Gear transmission D—Synchronizer ring G—Gear of range C J—Gear of range A

countershaft E—Gear of range D H—Gear of range B K—Front-wheel drive gear
B—Drive shaft F—Synchronizer unit, ranges I—Synchronizer unit, ranges A L—Differential drive shaft
C—Range transmission drive C and D and B
shaft
Drive shaft (B), differential drive shaft (L), parking lock gear (K) are located on the differential drive shaft. The
and shift linkage are located in the transmission range gears can turn freely on differential drive shaft.
housing. The synchronizing units and the front wheel drive gear
are joined to the differential drive shaft. Drive shaft
The drive shaft is made of one piece, the gears are gears are in mesh with the range gears on differential
joined together. Range gears A,B,C,D (J,H,G,E), the drive shaft.
synchronizing units (F and I) and the front wheel drive
Continued on next page LX,25020D003963 –19–01APR94–1/2

111401
PN=1230
Range Transmission
Power is transmitted via synchronizer ring (D) or gear position, the respective range gear is joined to the
transmission countershaft (A) to the drive shaft (B) shaft and thus the power is transmitted to the
(description see Group 20B). The drive shaft drives differential drive shaft. From the differential drive shaft,
the individual range gears. With synchronizer units in power is transmitted to the ring gear ( see
neutral position, all range gears turn freely on Section 256, Group 20B) and at the same time to the
differential drive shaft. The differential drive shaft is not front wheel drive clutch1 ( see Section 256, Group
rotating. If a synchronizer unit is moved to shift 20A).
1
if equipped
LX,25020D003963 –19–01APR94–2/2
Power Flow, Range A
250
20D
3
–UN–26JUL94
LX001286
When shifting, the shift collar of synchronizer unit (I) drive shaft. From the differential drive shaft power is
joins the gear of range A (J) to the differential drive transmitted to the ring gear and at the same time the
shaft (L). The other range gears rotate freely on front wheel drive gear (K) transmits power to the front
differential drive shaft. wheel drive clutch.
Power is transmitted from drive shaft (B) via the gear

of range A and the synchronizer unit to the differential
LX,25020D003964 –19–01APR94–1/1

111401
PN=1231
Range Transmission
Power Flow, Range B
–UN–26JUL94
LX001287
When shifting, the shift collar of synchronizer unit (I) drive shaft. From the differential drive shaft power is
250 joins the gear of range B (H) to the differential drive transmitted to the ring gear and at the same time the
20D shaft (L). The other range gears rotate freely on front wheel drive gear (K) transmits power to the front
4
differential drive shaft. wheel drive clutch.
Power is transmitted from drive shaft (B) via the gear

of range B and the synchronizer unit to the differential
LX,25020D003965 –19–01APR94–1/1

111401
PN=1232
Range Transmission
Power Flow, Range C
–UN–26JUL94
LX001288
Shift collar of synchronizer unit (F) connects gear of From the differential drive shaft, power flows to the
range C (G) to differential drive shaft (L). The other ring gear. At the same time, front wheel drive gear (K) 250
range gears continue to rotate freely on differential transmits power to the front wheel drive clutch. 20D
5
drive shaft.
Power is transmitted from drive shaft (B) to differential

drive shaft via gear of range C and synchronizer unit.
LX,25020D003966 –19–01APR94–1/1

111401
PN=1233
Range Transmission
Power Flow, Range D
–UN–25JUL94
LX001289
Shift collar of synchronizer unit (F) connects gear of From the differential drive shaft, power flows to the
250 range D (E) to differential drive shaft (L). The other ring gear. At the same time, front wheel drive gear (K)
20D range gears continue to rotate freely on differential transmits power to the front wheel drive clutch.
6
drive shaft.
Power is transmitted from drive shaft (B) to differential

drive shaft via gear of range D and synchronizer unit.
LX,25020D003967 –19–01APR94–1/1

111401
PN=1234
Range Transmission
Parking Lock
–UN–28JUL94
250
20D
7
LX001293
A—Lever C—Shifter shaft cam E—Bearing quill G—Locking latch
B—Shifter shaft D—Roller F—Spring H—Front wheel drive gear
When parking lock is engaged, shifter shaft (B) rotates When parking lock is disengaged, the cam no longer
and cam (C) exerts pressure on roller (D) of locking exerts pressure on roller of locking latch. Spring (F)
latch (G). The locking latch is moved towards front moves the locking latch back to disengaged position.
wheel drive gear (H), causing latch and gear splines to
mesh.
LX,25020D001520 –19–01MAY92–1/1

111401
PN=1235
Range Transmission
250
20D
8

111401
PN=1236
Section 251
Power Reverser Transmission
Contents
Page Page
Group 05—Operational Checkout Group 20—Power Reverser Transmission

Operational Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-05-1 Operation
Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-20-1
Group 10—Troubleshooting Transmission Circuit - Theory of Operation . . .251-20-2
Explanation of System Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . .251-10-1
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-1 Group 20A—Power Reverser Module
Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-20A-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-6 Design and Powerflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-20A-2
Hydraulic Oil Warmup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-7 Power Reverser Module - Sectional View . . 251-20A-4
Connecting JT07115 Hydraulic Test Kit. . . . . .251-10-7 Theory of Operation - Transmission Oil
Connecting the Sensocontrol Testing Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-20A-5
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-9 Valves and Other Hydraulic Components . . 251-20A-6
Layout of Test Connections and Sending Power Reverser - Legend for Hydraulic
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-10 Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-20A-8
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-11 Description of Valves and Other Hydraulic
Preliminary Checks for Power Reverser Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-20A-10
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-11 Theory of Operation - Pressure Regulating
Checking Gear and Range Engagement . . . .251-10-13 and Filter Relief Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-20A-13
Checking Forward/Reverse Modulation . . . . .251-10-14 Theory of Operation - Forward/Reverse
Checking the Transmission Oil Filter . . . . . . .251-10-15 Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-20A-19
Checking System (Engagement) Theory of Operation - Clutch Pedal
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-15 Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-20A-27
Adjusting System (Engagement) Pressure . .251-10-16 Theory of Operation - Engagement
Check Components Dependent on System Override Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-20A-28 251
(Engagement) Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-17 Theory of Operation - Cooling . . . . . . . . . . 251-20A-30
Checking the Filter Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . .251-10-18
Checking the Clutch Pedal Valve . . . . . . . . .251-10-19 Group 20B—Gear Transmission
Checking the Disk Clutch and Disk Brake . . .251-10-20 Illustration of Gear Transmission . . . . . . . . . 251-20B-1
Checking Lubricating Oil Pressure. . . . . . . . .251-10-21 Design and Powerflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-20B-2
Checking the Clutch Cooling System . . . . . .251-10-22
Checking the Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-10-24
Checking the Cooler Relief Valve . . . . . . . . .251-10-25

Special Tool (Dealer-Manufactured) . . . . . . . .251-15-1
Shift Linkage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-15-2
Range Transmission Linkage Test . . . . . . . . .251-15-2
Adjusting Range Box Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-15-3
Gear Transmission Linkage Test. . . . . . . . . . .251-15-3
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-15-4
Adjusting Reverser Control Linkage . . . . . . . .251-15-5
Adjusting the Shift Linkage and Parking
Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-15-6
Clutch Pedal Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251-15-9
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-1 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=1
Contents
251
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Group 05
Operational Checks
Before You Start NOTE: Smoothness of modulated shifts is affected by

various factors: Tire size, tire pressure, ballast,
Always begin with this group to identify a failure. No MFWD, engine speed, frequency of shifting,
tools are required to perform these step-by-step system pressure, system leakage, oil
checks. A level area with space for driving is temperature and oil viscosity.
necessary.
Forward/Reverse Modulation Check
Always carry out the checks in the order in which they
are listed. Read each step completely before 1. Move gear shift lever to 1st gear.
performing the check. Concentrate only on the check
you are performing and disregard signals from 2. Move reverse drive lever from “forward” to “reverse”
unrelated components. This procedure allows systems position (clutch pedal not depressed).
to be checked quickly.
Modulated movement from “forward” to “reverse”
Complete all checks before making repairs, unless should not take longer than 3.5 seconds and not be
instructed otherwise. excessively aggressive.
The engine and other major components must be at Gear Engagement Check
operating temperature.
1. Move reverse drive lever to “forward”.
CAUTION: Perform checks in an open area.
2. Use the gear lever to go up through all the gears
Tractor may move when checks are made.
from 1st to 4th, then go down through all the gears
from 4th to 1st. Keep the tractor running at between
Neutral Start Switch Check
1200 and 1500 rpm all the time.
The tractor should only start if the reverse drive lever
3. Move reverse drive lever to “reverse”. Go through
is in neutral. It must not start if either forward or
all the gears (up and down) once again.
reverse travel is selected.
Gear engagement must be synchronized. During
If necessary, check the neutral start switch. See
engagement, the use of force at the gear lever 251
must not be excessive. The transmission must not
1
rattle, jerk, scrape or squeal.
Neutral to Gear Modulation Check
NOTE: Changing down from 2nd to 1st requires more
1. Move range shift lever to “B” range.
force than changing down from 3rd to 2nd in
the same space of time.
2. Move gear shift lever to 1st gear.
Range Engagement Check
3. Run engine at a speed of 1200—1500 rpm.
1. Move gear lever to 2nd gear and reverse drive
4. Reverse drive lever in forward position (clutch pedal
lever to “forward”. Run the tractor at between 1200
not depressed).
and 1500 rpm.
A modulated engagement of forward clutch should
not take longer than 3.5 seconds and not be
excessively aggressive.
Continued on next page LX,25105 010797 –19–01JUL96–1/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-05-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1239
2. Use the range lever to go up and down through all Clutch Engagement Check
the ranges. Engage ranges and release the clutch
pedal quickly enough to prevent the tractor from Depress the clutch pedal and engage 2nd forward
coming to a standstill. gear.
Range engagement must be synchronized. During Let clutch pedal rise approx. 50 to 65 mm (2 to 2.5 in.)
engagement, the use of force at the range lever above the floor.
must not be excessive. The transmission must not
rattle, jerk, scrape or squeal. Forward clutch should start to engage and tractor
should start moving.
NOTE: Changing down from range “B” to range “A”
requires more force than changing down from Repeat check in 2nd reverse gear.
range “C” to range “B” in the same space of
time. Test and Adjustments
Clutch Modulation Check If the tractor does not function according to check
description the cause may lie in a mechanical or in a
1. Press the clutch pedal all the way down to stop the hydraulic problem. To determine the precise cause,
tractor. perform a diagnosis of the system by carrying out the
tests in the order in which they are listed here:
2. Move the range lever to range “B”. Move the gear
lever to 3rd gear. • Range / Gear transmission malfunction:
❒ Check that the shift levers and bowden cables
3. At an engine speed of 1200-1500 rpm, slowly are adjusted properly.
release clutch pedal to full up position. ❒ Check shift linkage.
❒ Check range transmission linkage.
Clutch modulation is controlled by the speed at ❒ Check gear transmission linkage.
which the operator releases the clutch pedal.
• Clutch engagement malfunction:
Engagement should be smooth without any ❒ Check system (engagement) pressure.
grabbing or chattering. ❒ Check the clutch pedal valve.
251 Transmission Creep Check • Clutch modulation malfunction:

05 ❒ Check system (engagement) pressure.
2
With brakes released, press the clutch pedal all the ❒ If system (engagement) pressure is OK, the
way down. modulator valve, accumulator piston, sump valve
and forward/reverse valve will all have to be
The tractor should roll to a stop and not have the checked. See “Repair” Manual, Section 51, Group
tendency to creep after it has stopped. 10.
❒ If it takes significantly less time to change
There should not be any clutch drag with engine at direction, the adjustable restrictor must be
slow idle to wide open throttle and clutch pedal screwed in. This extends the modulation period.
depressed.
LX,25105 010797 –19–01JUL96–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-05-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1240
Group 10
Troubleshooting
Explanation of System Diagnosis
Section 251, Group 05, it should be possible to identify

CAUTION: Whenever performing checks on
any fault in the transmission circuit and power train.
the transmission circuit, always observe the
relevant safety precautions.
These tests must be carried out when power train
elements fail to operate or operate too slowly, when
IMPORTANT: In every case, perform the checks in
the hydraulic oil overheats and whenever major repairs
the sequence in which they are
have been carried out on the power train elements.
listed here. Comply with all
specifications.
Faults in the transmission circuit affect the
transmission pump, power train elements, valves, the
The checks listed here apply to step-by-step system
oil cooler and transmission lubrication.
diagnosis. Starting with the operational checks in
AG,OUOE003,9513 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Safety Precautions

may result.
area. Make sure that no-one is put at risk. CAUTION: Escaping hydraulic oil under
pressure can have sufficient pressure to
Check and tighten all connections before 251
CAUTION: During tests that involve running applying pressure. Hydraulic oil escaping 10
the engine, always engage the parking lock. 1
from pin holes is difficult to detect, so use a
not use your hands.
parts.

AG,OUOE003,9514 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1241
Troubleshooting

Digital thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05800
–UN–16AUG94
JT05800
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–2/17
Hydraulic test kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT07115
Pressure-testing the Power Reverser

251
10
2
–UN–28JUL94
LX001339
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–3/17
LX010224 –UN–04JUL95
1
Internal half coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AL80099
Pressure-testing the PowrReverser
PowrReverser is a trademark of Deere & Company.
1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1242
Troubleshooting
LX010224 –UN–04JUL95
O-ring1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51M7041
1
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–5/17
–UN–13MAY96
FKM10002
PowrReverser is a trademark of Deere & Company. AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–6/17
Hydraulic flow tester, consisting of:
251
10
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–7/17
3
Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D01074AA
–UN–16MAR95
LX001342
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1243
Troubleshooting
High-pressure hose (2 used) . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10408
–UN–16MAR95
LX001342
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–9/17
Tester accessory kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10406
–UN–16MAR95
LX001342
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–10/17

251 pressure testing consisting of:
10
–UN–15DEC97
4
LX1019202
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–11/17
• FKM10470-1 0-1000 bar Pressure Sensor

• FKM10470-2 0-100 bar Pressure Sensor (2)
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1244
Troubleshooting

–UN–15DEC97
LX1019203
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–13/17

• FKM10471-3 PC Adapter with Software 251
10
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–14/17
5
LX1019204 –UN–15DEC97

TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1245
Troubleshooting
Flow Measuring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10472

flow testing consisting of:
–UN–27SEP01
LX1027890
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–16/17
A — FKM10472-1 Flow Turbine

B — FKM10472-2 Connecting Cable
C — FKM10472-3 1/4-In. Coupler
D — FKM10472-4 Temperature Sensor
E — FKM10472-5 Hose, 2 meters long (2)
F — FKM10472-6 Quick Coupler (2)
G — FKM10472-7 2-Way Fitting
H — FKM10472-8 Restrictor
I — FKM10472-9 Sealing Ring (2)
J — FKM10472-10 Restriction Fitting (2)
K — FKM10472-11 Carrying Case
251
10
AG,OUOE003,9515 –19–12JUN99–17/17
6
Specifications
System pressure Pressure with engine at 1000 rpm 1200 kPa (12 bar; 170 psi)
Oil pressure for disk clutch and/or Pressure with engine at 1000 rpm 1200 kPa (12 bar; 170 psi)
disk brake
Lubricating oil pressure Pressure at an engine speed of 2300 350 ± 100 kPa (3.5 ± 1 bar; 51 ± 15
rpm and oil temperature of 45°C psi)
(113°F).
Cooling oil pressure Pressure with engine at 1000 rpm approx. 100 kPa (1.0 bar; 15 psi)
Flow rate at oil cooler System flow with engine at 2300 rpm 54 L/min (14.3 gpm)
AG,OUOE003,9516 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1246
Troubleshooting

–UN–05DEC97
LX1018200

mode.

1
AG,OUOE003,9517 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Connecting JT07115 Hydraulic Test Kit
Testing at One Point

251
10
7
connecting testers.
–UN–26JUL94
Install internal half coupler (D), with O-ring 51M7041 in
place, on the tester. If necessary, use elbow fitting (C).
LX004397
A—Tester JT071171
B—Hose JT071191
C—Elbow JT034371
D—Internal half coupler AL80099 with O-ring
51M7041
1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1247
Troubleshooting
Testing at Two Points

connecting testers.
Install two internal half couplers (E), each with one O-ring
51M7041 in place, on the tester.

IMPORTANT: Keep the shut-off cocks (B) closed.

Open the relevant cock only to read the
pressure, and then close it again
immediately.
–UN–05DEC96
A—Tester JT071171
B—Shut-off cock (2 used)
C—T-fitting JT071181
D—Hose JT071191 (2 used)
LX1015742
E—Internal half coupler AL80099 with O-ring 51M7041
251 1
10
AG,OUOE003,9518 –19–12JUN99–2/2
8
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1248
Troubleshooting
–UN–21APR98
LX1019201
Pressure Sensor Sensor Printer T—Temperature Port
B—FKM10470-2 0-100 bar D—FKM10472-1 Flow Turbine G—FKM10471-3 PC Adapter Q—Volume Measurement Port
Pressure Sensor E—FKM10470-4 Hand-Held
Measuring Unit
FKM10470-3 to the pressure port (P) male coupler tips head. 251
on the tractor. 10
If needed, connect the flow turbine (D). 9
AG,OUOE003,9519 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1249
Troubleshooting
Layout of Test Connections and Sending Units
–UN–26NOV96
LX1015943
A—Temperature sending unit, D—Test port, system G—Test port, oil pressure for J—Test port, lube oil pressure
251
oil temp. warning light (engagement) pressure disk brake K—Test port, cooling oil
10
B—Pressure sending unit, oil E—Temperature sending unit, H—Neutral start switch pressure
10
filter constr. warning light oil filter indicator light I—Test port, clutch or brake
C—Press. sending unit, sys. F—Test port, oil pressure for pressure
(engagement) press. disk clutch
indicator light
AG,OUOE003,9520 –19–12JUN99–1/2
Ports for testing flow rate
A—Port, inlet to oil cooler

B—Port, return from oil cooler
–UN–26NOV96
LX1015944
AG,OUOE003,9520 –19–12JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1250
Troubleshooting
Preliminary Checks
AG,OUOE003,9521 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Preliminary Checks for Power Reverser Transmission
– – –1/1
1 General Information Ask the operator: OK: Check Condition of

Hydraulic Oil:
• How does the tractor perform in general?
• When do the faults occur? NOT OK: Repair system.
Check the service records to see if the tractor is
• serviced properly
• subject to unusual, frequent or similar problems
• disconnected, broken or binding operating linkages

• kinked or dented oil lines
• other mechanical failures
251
10
– – –1/1
11
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1251
Troubleshooting
2 Check Condition of 1. Is the oil level too low? OK: Check Tractor for
Hydraulic Oil External Leaks.
Possible causes:
NOT OK: Repair system.
• External leaks
2. Is the oil milky or dirty?
Possible causes:

3. Is the oil discolored? Has it a burnt odor (over-heated oil)?
Possible causes:
• Kinked pipes
• Crushed lines
• Clogged oil cooler
• Internal leaks
– – –1/1
3 Check Tractor for OK: Check Tractor for

External Leaks CAUTION: Comply with safety instructions! Unusual Noises.
1. Check tractor for leaks with the engine shut off. NOT OK: Repair system.
251
10 2. Check tractor for leaks with the engine running.
12
3. With the engine running, actuate in turn all the hydraulic control levers, pedals and
switches. Check for leaks.
Possible causes of oil leaks:
• Broken lines, ruptured hoses or loose connections

• Cracked housing
– – –1/1
4 Check Tractor for OK: See operational

Unusual Noises CAUTION: Perform this check out of doors. The tractor requires room to checks for Power
move. Reverser Transmission.
Drive the tractor in various gears and at various engine speeds. Operate the brakes, NOT OK: Check
differential lock, FWD1, PTO and front PTO1, if possible. . Components Dependent
on System (Engagement)
Be alert for conditions that could indicate a problem or cause further damage. Pressure.
1
If equipped
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-12 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1252
Troubleshooting
Checking Gear and Range Engagement

tractor requires room to move.
Test-drive the tractor. Engage all gears and ranges in

turn.
None of the gears should “jump” out. The shift levers must
not bind or interfere with the shift gate. The gears must
not be excessively stiff. There should be no unusual
noises.
If problems occur when shifting gears or ranges, check

the shift mechanism:
• Check that none of the components are damaged.

Check tension of bowden cables; make sure they are
not kinked or damaged. If they are damaged, refer to
Section 51 of the “Repair” Manual, Group 05.
• Check that the shift levers and bowden cables are
adjusted properly. Refer to Group 15.
• Check that the shift mechanism on the transmission is
adjusted properly. See Group 15 (Check range
transmission linkage / Check gear transmission linkage)
.
• If all the shift components and adjustments are OK, but
the transmission does not shift correctly, the gear or
range transmission need to be repaired. Refer to the
“Repair” Manual, Section 51, Group 15 or Section 50,
Group 30.
251
If the transmission makes unusual noises, the gear 10
transmission or range transmission needs to be repaired. 13
Refer to the “Repair” Manual, Section 50, Group 10, or
AG,LX12234,203 –19–03AUG99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-13 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1253
Troubleshooting
Checking Forward/Reverse Modulation

tractor requires room to move.
1. Move range shift lever to range “B”.
2. Move gear shift lever to 1st gear.
3. Run the engine at a speed of between 1200 and 1500

rpm.
4. Move reverse drive lever from “forward” to “reverse”

and then back to “forward”. Do this without touching
the clutch pedal.
A modulated change of direction should not take longer

than 3.5 seconds and should not be excessively
aggressive.
If it takes too long to change direction, system

(engagement) pressure must be checked. If system
(engagement) pressure is OK, the modulator valve,
accumulator piston, sump valve and forward/reverse
valve will all have to be checked. See “Repair” Manual,
If it takes significantly less time to change direction, the

adjustable restrictor must be screwed in. This extends
the modulation period.
251
10
14
AG,OUOE003,9523 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-14 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1254
Troubleshooting
Checking the Transmission Oil Filter
Run the engine at maximum speed for between 10 and 15

seconds.
Transmission oil filter indicator light should stay “off”.
If the indicator light comes on, change the transmission oil

filter. Then repeat this check.
NOTE: If the indicator light comes on again after the filter

has been changed, refer to Section 240 to
determine the cause (Check BIF for Service
Codes)..
AG,OUOE003,9524 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Checking System (Engagement) Pressure
1. Attach hydraulic test kit JT07115 to the port marked

“SYSTEM”.
2. Heat hydraulic oil to 45°C (113°F).
3. Move reverse drive lever to neutral position.
–UN–06AUG94
251
Pressure should be 1200 kPa (12 bar; 170 psi). 10
15
If system (engagement) pressure is not OK, it must be
LX001575
adjusted.
AG,OUOE003,9525 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-15 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1255
Troubleshooting
Adjusting System (Engagement) Pressure
1. Remove plug (B) from the pressure-regulating valve.
2. Adjust system (engagement) pressure by adding or

taking away shims (A).
NOTE: Each shim (A) alters the pressure by 45 kPa (0.45

bar; 6.5 psi). Taking shims away reduces the
pressure, adding shims increases the pressure.
3. Check system (engagement) pressure once again.
If system (engagement) pressure cannot be adjusted

satisfactorily, check for clogging at the primary filter.
If the primary filter is not clogged and system

(engagement) pressure cannot be adjusted
satisfactorily, check the transmission oil pump. See
–UN–05DEC96
“Repair” Manual, Section 51, Group 10.
LX1015743
AG,OUOE003,9526 –19–12JUN99–1/1
251
10
16
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-16 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1256
Troubleshooting
Check Components Dependent on System

(Engagement) Pressure

“SYSTEM”.
4. Make sure that system (engagement) pressure is OK.

Then, one at a time, switch the rear PTO, differential
lock, FWD1 and front PTO1 on and off.
System (engagement) pressure must not drop when

any of these are switched on or off.
If pressure falls when any of these are switched on or

off, there must be excessive leakage in the system
affected. Check this thoroughly, referring to Section
256, Group 15 (FWD; Rear PTO; Differential Lock).
Before carrying out repairs, refer to the relevant Group
in Section 56 of the “Repair” Manual.
1 251
If equipped
10
AG,OUOE003,9527 –19–12JUN99–1/1
17
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-17 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1257
Troubleshooting
Checking the Filter Relief Valve
1. Remove the temperature sending unit for the oil filter

constriction warning light. Connect hydraulic test kit
JT07115 to this port and to the port marked
“SYSTEM”.
4. Read the pressure at the “SYSTEM” port.
5. Close shut-off cock (A) and open shut-off cock (B).
6. Read the pressure at the temperature sending unit

port.
The difference between the two must not exceed 300
–UN–05DEC96
kPa (3 bar; 43.5 psi).
If pressure does not react according to specification,

check the filter relief valve. See “Repair” Manual,
LX1015744
251
10
AG,OUOE003,9528 –19–12JUN99–1/1
18
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-18 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1258
Troubleshooting
Checking the Clutch Pedal Valve

“CLUTCH”.
4. Move gear shift lever and range shift lever to neutral.
–UN–25JUL94
5. Move reverse drive lever from neutral to the “forward”
position.
LX001574
6. Depress the clutch pedal several times.
With the clutch pedal NOT depressed, pressure must

be 1200 kPa (12 bar; 170 psi). With the clutch pedal
depressed, oil pressure should be zero.
7. Move the reverse drive lever to “reverse” position and

repeat the test.
If oil pressure is zero when the clutch pedal is NOT

depressed, check the clutch pedal valve and the
engagement override valve (EOV). See “Repair”
Manual, Section 51, Group 10.
If there is an oil pressure reading with the clutch pedal

depressed, the clutch pedal must be adjusted. See
Group 15. If oil pressure is still not correct after the
pedal has been adjusted, check the clutch pedal valve.
See “Repair” Manual, Section 51, Group 10. 251
10
19
If oil pressure with the clutch pedal NOT depressed is
different between “forward” and “reverse”, check the
disk clutch and disk brake. See “Repair” Manual,
Section 51. Group 10.
AG,OUOE003,9529 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-19 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1259
Troubleshooting
Checking the Disk Clutch and Disk Brake
1. Connect hydraulic test kit JT07115 to the test port for

disk clutch (C) and to test port for disk brake (D).
Close shut-off cock (A) and open shut-off cock (B).
5. Move reverse drive lever to the “forward” position.
Pressure must be 1200 kPa (12 bar; 170 psi).
–UN–05DEC96
7. Move the reverse drive lever to “reverse” position and
repeat the check.
LX1015745
If pressure is NOT correct in forward travel only, the
piston of the disk clutch needs to be repaired. If
pressure is NOT correct in reverse travel only, the
piston of the disk brake needs to be repaired. See
251
10
AG,OUOE003,9530 –19–12JUN99–1/1
20
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-20 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1260
Troubleshooting
Checking Lubricating Oil Pressure

marked “LUBE”.
2. Heat the hydraulic oil to 45°C (113°F).
3. Run the engine at 2300 rpm and measure the

lubricating oil pressure.
Oil pressure should be 350 ± 100 kPa (3.5 ± 1 bar; 51

± 15 psi).
If the pressure is out of specification, check the lube
–UN–26JUL94
relief valve. See the Repair TM, Section 51, Group 10.
LX001580
AG,OUOE003,9531 –19–12JUN99–1/1
251
10
21
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-21 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1261
Troubleshooting
Checking the Clutch Cooling System
Brief Diagnostic Procedure
1. Make sure that lube oil prssure is OK.
2. Connect hydraulic test kit JT07115 to the port marked

“CLUTCH COOL”.
–UN–06AUG94
LX001579
6. Move reverse drive lever from neutral to “forward” or
“reverse” position.
7. Depress and release the clutch pedal several times.

Read the pressure during the slip phase.
During the slip phase, oil pressure must be approx.

100 kPa (1.0 bar; 15 psi). When the clutch pedal is
fully depressed and fully released, pressure must be
zero.
NOTE: At higher oil temperatures, cooling oil pressure

may be less than the figure quoted.
If cooling oil pressure is not as prescribed, check the

clutch cooling valve and the cooling pilot valve. See
251
10
22
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-22 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1262
Troubleshooting
In-Depth Diagnostic Procedure
1. Connect universal pressure test kit FKM10002 to the

ports marked “CLUTCH” and “CLUTCH COOL”.
4. Move reverse drive lever from neutral to “forward” or

“reverse” position.
–UN–06AUG94
5. Depress and release the clutch pedal several times
and read the pressure.
With the clutch pedal NOT depressed, clutch pressure
LX004652
must be 1200 kPa (12 bar; 170 psi). Cooling oil
pressure must be zero.
6. Slowly release the clutch pedal and at the same time

observe clutch pressure.
When clutch pressure drops below 950 kPa (9.5 bar;

140 psi), cooling oil pressure must rise to approx. 100
kPa (1.0 bar; 15 psi).
NOTE: At higher oil temperatures, cooling oil pressure

may be less than the figure quoted.
7. Use the clutch pedal to regulate the clutch pressure to

less than 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi).
Cooling oil pressure should now be zero. 251

10
23
If cooling oil pressure is not as prescribed, check the
clutch cooling valve and the cooling pilot valve. See
AG,OUOE003,9532 –19–12JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-23 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1263
Troubleshooting
Checking the Flow Rate
NOTE: When checking the flow rate, connect the flow

tester instead of the oil cooler, otherwise the
resistance of the oil cooler will be included in the
measurement.

flow tester fully.
3. Move the gear shift lever and range shift lever to

neutral.
4. Move the reverse drive lever to neutral.
–UN–05DEC96
The flow rate must be 54 L/min (14.3 gpm).
6. Move the reverse drive lever to “forward” and then to
LX1015746
“reverse”.
The flow rates in “forward” and “reverse” must not drop

by more than 1 L/min (0.26 gpm) in relation to the flow
rate in neutral.
8. One at a time, switch the rear PTO, differential lock,

251 FWD1 and front PTO1 on and off.
10
24
When each of these is switched on and off, the flow
rate must not drop by more than 1 L/min (0.26 gpm) in
relation to the flow rate measured previously.
If the flow rate is NOT correct in forward travel only,

the piston of the disk clutch needs to be repaired. If the
flow rate is NOT correct in reverse travel only, the
piston of the disk brake needs to be repaired. Refer to
Technical Manual “Repair”, Section 51, Group 10.
1
If equipped
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-24 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1264
Troubleshooting
If the flow rate drops too much when any of these

systems are switched on or off, there must be excessive
leakage in the system affected. Check this thoroughly,
referring to Section 256, Group 15 (FWD; Rear PTO;
Differential Lock).
AG,OUOE003,9533 –19–12JUN99–2/2
Checking the Cooler Relief Valve

flow tester fully.
4. Slowly close the restrictor on the flow tester. As the

restrictor closes, the rate of flow decreases. At the
same time, pressure rises until the cooler relief valve
opens.
Pressure must not rise above 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138
psi).
251
If pressure rises higher, check the cooler relief valve.
–UN–05DEC96
10
See “Repair” Manual, Section 51, Group 10. 25
LX1015746
AG,OUOE003,9534 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-25 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1265
Troubleshooting
251
10
26
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-10-26 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1266
Group 15

Special Tool (Dealer-Manufactured)
A—30x12x110 mm (1.18x0.472x4.33 in.) flat bar steel

B—Welded seam
C—30x12x20 mm (1.18x0.472x0.79 in.) flat bar steel (2
used)
–UN–12MAR96
LX012744
251
15
AG,OUOE003,9536 –19–12JUN99–1/2
1
Holding tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dealer-manufactured
Holding the shifter rail detent when adjusting the shift

mechanism
AG,OUOE003,9536 –19–12JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-15-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1267
Shift Linkage Test
1. Check shift levers and shifting gates.
Parts should not be bent or damaged.
2. Check bowden cables.
Bowden cables should not be bent, damaged or

tensioned and must move freely.
If any damage occurs, refer to Technical Manual

AG,OUOE003,9537 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Range Transmission Linkage Test
Shifter forks must not rub laterally at the shift collars in
–UN–26NOV96
ANY of the shift positions.
3. If necessary, adjust shift linkage.

251
LX1016006
15
2
AG,OUOE003,9538 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-15-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1268
Adjusting Range Box Shifting
1. Move the shift rods to neutral.
2. Use the threaded pins to adjust the shift forks until they
are centered relative to the shift collar.
3. Move the shift forks to all positions.
–UN–26NOV96
The shift forks should not rub against the sides of the
shift collars in any position.
4. Tighten the threaded pins to 40 N•m (30 lb-ft).
LX1016007
5. Recheck the shifting.
If shifting cannot be correctly adjusted, the range box

should be repaired. See the Repair TM, Section 55,
Group 30.
AG,OUOE003,9539 –19–12JUN99–1/1
Gear Transmission Linkage Test

251
2. Attach tool (A; dealer-manufactured) for holding the 15
–UN–26NOV96
shifter rail detent. 3
LX1016004
4. If necessary, adjust shift linkage.
AG,OUOE003,9540 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-15-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1269

Transmission
1. Attach tool (A; dealer-manufactured) for holding the

shifter rail detent.
2. Move shift rods to neutral position.
3. Adjust shifter forks by means of threaded pins so that
–UN–26NOV96
they are centered in relation to shift collar.
LX1016005
5. Tighten threaded pins to 40 N•m (30 lb-ft).
6. Check shift linkage again.
If it is not possible to adjust shift linkage properly,

repair gear transmission. Refer to Technical Manual
AG,OUOE003,9541 –19–12JUN99–1/1
251
15
4
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-15-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1270
Adjusting Reverser Control Linkage
CAUTION: Do not perform any adjustments with

the engine running because the tractor could
move unexpectedly. Switch off the ignition and
–UN–04MAR98
remove the key.
NOTE: The length of the reverser control linkage (B) can

also be determined and adjusted when removed.
LX1019831
Measure the length (a) of the reverser control linkage.
Adjust the reverser control linkage to the specified length

using the yokes as required.
Specification
Without Creeper—Length (a) .................... 529.5 mm ± 1 mm (20.85 in. ±
0.04 in.)
With Creeper—Length (a) .................... 696 mm ± 1 mm (27.40 in. ± 0.04
in.)
When installed, the reverser control linkage should be in

the lower hole on lever (A) and in the right hole of lever
(C).
Check shifting and parking lock action.
251
15
AG,OUOE003,9542 –19–12JUN99–1/1
5
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-15-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1271
Adjusting the Shift Linkage and Parking Lock
CAUTION: Do not adjust the cables with the

engine running, as the tractor may move.
Switch off ignition and remove key.
–UN–04MAR98
Range Shift Linkage Test and Adjustment
1. Move range shift lever (B) back and forth in the neutral
LX1019828
zone.
NOTE: Shift lever must neither catch nor touch the shift
gate.
2. Disconnect cables (C) and (D), if necessary. To adjust,

turn appropriate yoke.
3. Reconnect the cables and check for correct

adjustment.
Gear Shift Linkage Test and Adjustment
1. Move gear shift lever (A) back and forth in neutral zone
(see arrow).
NOTE: Shift lever must neither catch nor touch the shift
gate.
2. Disconnect cables (F) and (G), if necessary. To adjust,

turn appropriate yoke.
3. Reconnect the cables and check for correct

251
15 adjustment.
6
–UN–15SEP97
4. Adjust parking lock.

C—Cable, ranges C and D LX1017520
D—Cable, ranges A and B
E—Cable, parking lock
F—Cable, 3rd and 4th gears
G—Cable, 1st and 2nd gears
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-15-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1272
Adjusting the Parking Lock
1. Make sure that gear shift linkage is correctly adjusted,

i.e. shift quadrants (B) and (C) must be aligned exactly.
2. Disconnect the parking lock cable (F).
–UN–15SEP97
3. With shift lever (D) in neutral position, adjust stop
screw (E) until parking lock shift quadrant (A) is exactly
LX1017528
aligned with the other shift quadrants.
4. Press the yoke of parking lock cable firmly downward

to ensure that parking lock is entirely disengaged.
5. Slightly pull the cable yoke to remove free travel (2

mm; 0.08 in. approx.) from cable. Hold the cable in this
position and turn yoke until bores of yoke and shift
quadrant are exactly aligned. Reconnect the cable.
6. Adjust the forward/reverse lever.
A—Shift quadrant, parking lock

B—Shift quadrant, 1st and 2nd gear
C—Shift quadrant, 3rd and 4th gear
D—Gear shift lever
E—Stop screw
F—Parking lock cable
–UN–26NOV96
251
15
LX1016001
7
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-15-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1273
Adjusting the Reverse Drive Lever
1. Make sure that the forward/reverse linkage is adjusted

correctly.
2. Move the range shift lever to neutral.
–UN–12MAY97
3. Pull the reverse drive lever upwards.
4. In neutral position, reverse drive lever must be
LX1016468
centered precisely in the shift gate (see arrow). It must
be possible to move the lever to forward and reverse
positions.
5. If necessary, disengage bowden cable (A). Turn the

yoke so that neutral is achieved when the reverse drive
lever is centered precisely in the gate. Engage the
bowden cable and repeat the adjustment.
–UN–26NOV96
LX1016003
AG,OUOE003,9543 –19–12JUN99–3/3
251
15
8
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-15-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1274
2. Depress clutch pedal to the lower stop, then raise it to

the upper stop. Measure distance “a”.


–UN–17MAR95
5. Push clutch pedal completely up. Turn operating cable

yoke until bores of yoke and pedal are aligned.
LX009890
Reconnect and secure yoke.
251
15
9
–UN–15SEP97
LX1017529
AG,OUOE003,9544 –19–12JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-15-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1275
251
15
10
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-15-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1276
Group 20
Power Reverser Transmission Operation
Design
–UN–05DEC96
251
20
1
LX1015543
A—Gear transmission B—Range transmission
The main components of the Power Reverser The Power Reverser comes in two versions, one for
transmission are the Power Reverser module, gear travel speeds up to 30 km/h (18.5 mph) and one for
transmission (A) and range transmission (B). speeds up to 40 km/h (25 mph).
The Power Reverser has 16 forward speeds and 16

reverse speeds (4 gears x 4 ranges, forward and
reverse).
LX25120 017044 –19–01MAR98–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-20-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1277
Transmission Circuit - Theory of Operation
NOTE: This text applies to the two following cannot flow through the engagement override valve
illustrations. (10) and therefore cannot reach the clutch or brake.
This is a design feature intended to prevent the tractor
The transmission circuit comprises the transmission oil from moving accidentally.
pump (38), oil cooler (36), transmission oil filter (37),
various valves for the clutch and brake, and valves for Oil from system 2 not only flows to the clutch or brake,
the differential lock (17), rear PTO (2), front-wheel it also flows to the differential lock (17), rear PTO (2),
drive1 (23) and front PTO1 (29). Transmission lube (27) FWD clutch (23)1 and front PTO (29)1.
is also part of the transmission circuit.
The lube/cooling oil released by the pressure
Oil ingested by transmission oil pump (38) flows regulating valve flows through the oil cooler to the
through the filter (37) to the pressure regulating valve transmission lube (27) and clutch cooling valve (22).
(25). The pressure regulating valve releases oil to During the slip phase of the clutch or brake, cooling
system 2 and for lubrication and cooling purposes. At pilot valve (12) controls the clutch cooling valve in
the same time, it limits system pressure to 1200 kPa such a way that cooling oil flows to the clutch or brake
(12 bar; 175 psi). to eliminate the heat caused by the friction of the disks
rubbing together.
When the tractor is moving, oil from system 2 flows
through modulator valve (20), clutch pedal valve (21), If the cooling oil pressure in front of the oil cooler rises
engagement override valve (10) and the over 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 140 psi), cooling oil flows
forward/reverse valve (6) to clutch (14) or brake (15). through cooler relief valve (26) directly to the
When the clutch pedal is pressed down, the clutch transmission lube (27) and clutch cooling valve (22).
pedal valve interrupts the flow of oil to the clutch or This relieves the pressure on the oil cooler (36).
brake. This also interrupts the powerflow to the
transmission, allowing the gears and/or ranges to be If the lube oil pressure behind the oil cooler rises
shifted. When changing direction of travel, oil from above 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi), the lube relief valve
system 1 (priority oil) controls the sump valve (5). The (41) opens and sends oil from the transmission
sump valve, accumulator piston (19) and modulator lubrication to the pump inlet.
valve (20) control the flow of oil in such a way that
changing direction does not take place with a jolt. To If oil filter (37) becomes clogged, the hydraulic oil can
251 change direction, there is no need to press the clutch flow back via filter relief valve (33) to the pressure
20 pedal. regulating valve (25). In this case, a warning light
2
comes on in the cab. It is actuated by pressure
If the forward/reverse valve (6) is set to forward or sending unit (34).
reverse when the engine is started, oil from system 2
1
If equipped
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-20-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1278
251
20
3
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-20-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1279
LX1017672 –UN–26MAR98
1 2 7 8
13
6
14
3 9
15
5 10
4 16
11
12
17
19 21
18
20 22
28
26 27
23
24
25
32 33 34
28 29 39
30
41
43
42
37 40
35
36 38
44
LX1017672 31 45
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-20-4 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=1280
1—Brake (rear PTO) 10—Engagement override 23—FWD clutch1 35—Test port for system
2—Clutch (rear PTO) valve 24—FWD clutch solenoid pressure
3—Rear PTO modulating valve 11—Test port, cooling oil valve1 36—Oil cooler
4—Rear PTO solenoid valve pressure 25—Pressure regulating valve 37—Transmission oil filter
5—Sump valve 12—Cooling pilot valve 26—Cooler relief valve 38—Transmission oil pump
6—Forward/reverse valve 13—Cooling for disk clutch 27—Transmission lube 39—Temp. sending unit, oil
7—Test port, disk clutch oil 14—Disk clutch 28—Brake (front PTO)1 filter warning light
pressure 15—Disk brake 29—Clutch (front PTO)1 40—Temp. sending unit, oil
8—Test port, disk brake oil 16—Cooling for disk brake 30—Front PTO solenoid valve1 temperature warning light
pressure 17—Differential lock 31—Front PTO lubrication1 41—Lube relief valve
9—Cooling control valve 18—Differential lock solenoid 32—Press. sending unit, 42—Test port for lube oil
valve system pressure indicator pressure
19—Accumulator piston light 43—To hydraulic circuit (high
20—Modulator valve 33—Filter relief valve pressure)
21—Clutch pedal valve 34—Press. sending unit, oil 44—Filter screen
22—Clutch cooling valve filter restrict. warning light 45—Main oil reservoir (sump)
NOTE: For more detailed descriptions, see Section 256 (Differential, Rear PTO Options,
Group 20A (Power Reverser Module) and Front Wheel Drive Clutch and Front PTO).
1
If equipped
251
20
5
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-20-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1281
LX1015545 –UN–18MAR98
2
7 13 1
14
4
3
8 16
6 9
17
11 15
12 18
5 10
22
27
21 36
26
42 24
19 23
20
32
25
31
34
41
33
35 39
43 44 30
40
28
29
45
37
38 47
LX 1015545 46 48 49
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-20-6 6110-6510S Tractors
111401
PN=1282
1—Brake (rear PTO) 11—Test port, cooling oil 25—Pressure regulating valve 38—Transmission oil pump
2—Clutch (rear PTO) pressure 26—Cooler relief valve 39—Temp. sending unit, oil
3—Rear PTO modulating valve 12—Cooling pilot valve 27—Transmission lube filter warning light
4—Rear PTO solenoid valve 13—Cooling for disk clutch 28—Brake (front PTO)1 40—Temp. sending unit, oil
5—Sump valve 14—Disk clutch 29—Clutch (front PTO)1 temperature warning light
6—Forward/reverse valve 15—Disk brake 30—Front PTO solenoid valve1 41—Lube relief valve
7—Test port, disk clutch oil 16—Cooling for disk brake 31—Front PTO lubrication1 42—Test port for lube oil
pressure 17—Differential lock 32—Press. sending unit, pressure
8—Test port, disk brake oil 18—Differential lock solenoid system pressure indicator 43—To hydraulic circuit (high
pressure valve light pressure)
9—Cooling control valve 19—Accumulator piston 33—Filter relief valve 44—Filter screen
10—Engagement override 20—Modulator valve 34—Press. sending unit, oil 45—Main oil reservoir (sump)
valve 21—Clutch pedal valve filter restrict. warning light 46—Oil under pressure,
22—Clutch cooling valve 35—Test port for system system 1
23—FWD clutch1 pressure 47—Oil under, system 2
24—FWD clutch solenoid 36—Oil cooler 48—Lube/cooling oil
valve1 37—Transmission oil filter 49—Pressure-free oil
NOTE: The illustration shows the tractor driving colour) is seen to better effect under these
forward normally, as the oil flow (shown in circumstances.
1
If equipped
LX,25020 010674 –19–01JUL96–5/5
251
20
7
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-20-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1283
251
20
8
TM4572 (01APR01) 251-20-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1284
Group 20A
Power Reverser Module
Components
–UN–04NOV96
LX1015530
251
A—Transmission output shaft D—Ring gear G—Planet gear train J—Transmission oil pump 20A
B—Brake housing E—Disk pack for disk brake H—Disk clutch K—Clutch housing 1
C—Brake piston F—Plate I—Drive shaft
The main components of the Power Reverser module The transmission oil pump provides oil for operating
are the planet gear train (G), disk clutch (H) and disk the disk clutch and disk brake, oil for cooling the disk
brake (C to F), transmission oil pump (J) and the clutch and disk brake, and oil for lubricating the
valves. transmission. The FWD clutch, differential lock and
PTO are also supplied with oil from the transmission
In forward travel, the disk clutch transmits power from oil pump. The oil flow to the various components is
the engine to the transmission. In reverse travel, power controlled by the valves ( see “Illustration of Valves
is transmitted by the disk brake. and Other Hydraulic Components”.
LX,25120A010656 –19–01JUL96–1/1

111401
PN=1285
Design and Powerflow
251
20A
2
–UN–05MAY98
LX1015531
Continued on next page LX,25120A010658 –19–01JUL96–1/2

111401
PN=1286
A—Brake housing F—Clutch piston K—Ring gear P—Clutch drum

B—Brake piston G—Clutch housing L—Return spring (8 used) Q—Drive shaft
C—Disk brake H—Transmission output shaft M—Planet carrier R—Transmission oil pump
D—Plate I—Inner planet gear (3 used) N—Hub S—Input flange
E—Disk clutch J—Outer planet gear (3 used) O—Return spring (12 used)
NOTE: Refer also to sectional view overleaf. Powerflow in Forward Travel
Design In forward travel, oil under pressure flows behind

clutch piston (F). The clutch piston overcomes the
The most important elements in the powerflow are the pressure of return springs (O) and the clutch disks (E)
clutch drum (P), planet carrier (M) with inner and outer are pressed together. This causes hub (N) and
planet gears (I) and (J), the disk clutch (E), disk brake transmission output shaft (H) to turn at the same
(C), ring gear (K) and hub (N). speed as drive shaft (Q). Planet gears (I) and (J) are
thus connected rigidly to hub (N). This causes the ring
Drive shaft (Q) is connected to clutch drum (P) by gear (K) to turn in the same direction as the hub and
gearing. Planet carrier (M) is bolted onto the clutch transmission output shaft.
drum, which means that the drive shaft always drives
the clutch drum and planet carrier, regardless of Powerflow in Reverse Travel
whether or not the clutch or brake is engaged or
disengaged. In reverse travel, oil under pressure flows behind brake
piston (B). The brake piston overcomes the pressure
Direction of travel is determined by the planet gear of return springs (L). The brake disks (C) are pressed
train and either the disk clutch or the disk brake. Hub together and ring gear (K) becomes positively
(N) acts as a sun gear for the planet gear train and is connected to the housing.
connected to the transmission output shaft (H) by As the planet carrier and clutch drum always turn
means of gearing. In forward travel, power is together, the outer planet gears (J) must turn around
transmitted via the disk clutch, and in reverse travel via the stationary ring gear. This means that the inner
the disk brake. planet gears (I) turn in the opposite direction. The
turning motion of the inner planet gears causes the
Regardless of whether the clutch or brake is engaged transmission output shaft (H) also to be driven in the
or disengaged, drive shaft (Q) always drives opposite direction.
transmission oil pump (R).
Powerflow in Neutral or with Clutch Pedal 251
20A
If a Power Reverser is installed, transmission output Depressed
3
shaft (H) is connected by internal gearing to the gear
transmission ( see Group 20B). In this case, the No oil flows behind clutch piston (F) or brake piston
shafts in the gear transmission rotate forward or (B). Return springs (O) and (L) press the disks of disk
backward depending on which direction is selected. clutch (E) and disk brake (C) apart. Although clutch
drum (P) and planet carrier (M) are driven by drive
If a Power Reverser is installed, the PTO drive shaft, shaft (Q), hub (N) does not rotate, since it is
which is connected by gearing to drive shaft (Q), is connected neither to the clutch nor the brake. No
also driven, regardless of whether the clutch or brake power is transmitted to the gear transmission.
is engaged or disengaged.
LX,25120A010658 –19–01JUL96–2/2

111401
PN=1287
Power Reverser Module - Sectional View
251
20A
4
–UN–05DEC96
LX1015532
A—Drive shaft H—Internally toothed disk L—Endplate S—Spring (12 used)

B—Transmission oil pump (3 used) M—Brake piston T—Plate
C—Clutch housing I—Spring (8 used) N—Outer planet gear (3 used) U—Planet carrier
D—Pump housing J—Externally toothed disk O—Air suction valve V—Brake housing
E—Clutch piston (2 used) P—Clutch drum W—Ring gear
F—Endplate K—Internally toothed disk Q—Over-speed relief valve X—Inner planet gear (3 used)
G—Externally toothed disk (3 used) R—Hub Y—Transmission output shaft
(2 used)
LX,25120A010657 –19–01JUL96–1/1

111401
PN=1288
Theory of Operation - Transmission Oil Pump
A B
H C
D
G
–UN–04MAR98
K
L
LX003884
LX003884
A—Housing D—Suction chamber G—Pressure chamber K—Pressure-free oil

B—Input gear E—From sump H—To transmission oil filter L—Engagement oil pressure
C—Toothed ring F—Crescent-shaped separator
The transmission pump is a gear pump with through the primary filter and trapped between the
crescent-shaped separator. It consists primarily of teeth and crescent-shaped separator (F) before being
housing (A), internally toothed ring (C) and an conveyed to pressure chamber (G). The meshing teeth 251
externally toothed input gear (B) which is driven from in the pressure chamber expel the oil and force it out 20A
5
the engine via the clutch drive shaft. of the pump to the transmission oil filter.
Suction chamber (D) is located on the side where the Pump capacity is 60 L/min (15.8 gpm) at an engine
teeth unmesh to generate low pressure. Oil is drawn in speed of 2300 rpm.
LX,25120A006402 –19–01JUL96–1/1

111401
PN=1289
Valves and Other Hydraulic Components
251
20A
6
–UN–05DEC96
LX1015533
A—Cooler relief valve F—Pressure regulating valve K—Temp. sending unit, oil M—Press. sending unit, oil
B—Filter relief valve G—Cooling pilot valve filter warning light filter restrict. warning light
C—Lube relief valve H—Clutch cooling valve L—Press. sending unit, N—Temp. sending unit, oil
D—Lever of clutch pedal valve I—Engagement override valve system pressure indicator temperature warning light
E—Oil filter J—Clutch pedal valve light
Continued on next page LX,25120A010660 –19–01AUG97–1/2

111401
PN=1290
251
20A
7
–UN–01AUG97
LX1016897
A—Connecting valve (no D—Neutral start switch G—Accumulator piston J—Housing

switch function) E—Adjustable restrictor H—Forward/reverse valve K—Lever
B—Modulator valve F—Sump valve I—Lever shaft L—Cover
C—Cooling control valve
NOTE: Connecting valve (A) does not function as a oil passage. For this reason, it is not shown in
valve. It merely provides a through-flow in an the hydraulic circuit diagram.
LX,25120A010660 –19–01AUG97–2/2

111401
PN=1291
Power Reverser - Legend for Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
LX1015331 –UN–30MAR98
1 2
6
7
12 3 4 5
8
13 14
17 9
16
18 10
15 11
24
19 21 23
22
20
26 29
28
33
25 27 32
34
30
31
35 36 37
40
39
38 41 43
42
50
49
47
45
46 48
44 51 52
LX1015331 53
LX,25120A010454 –19–01JUL96–1/2
111401
PN=1292
1—Test port, disk clutch oil 15—Sump 30—Sump 42—Lube relief valve
pressure 16—Sump valve 31—Pressure regulating valve 43—Sump
2—Test port, disk brake oil 17—Engagement override 32—Cooler relief valve 44—Test port before oil cooler
pressure valve 33—Transmission lube 45—Test port for system
3—Air bleed valve 18—Test port, cooling oil 34—Sump pressure
4—Centrifugal force valve pressure 35—Press. sending unit, 46—Oil cooler
5—Sump 19—Accumulator piston system pressure indicator 47—Transmission oil filter
6—Cooling for disk clutch 20—Adjustable restrictor light 48—Transmission oil pump
7—Sump 21—Clutch pedal valve 36—Filter relief valve 49—Test port for lube oil
8—Disk clutch 22—Sump 37—Press. sending unit, oil pressure
9—Disk brake 23—Restrictor filter restrict. warning light 50—To hydraulic circuit (high
10—Cooling for disk brake 24—Cooling pilot valve 38—To differential lock, FWD pressure)
11—Sump 25—Modulator valve clutch and PTO 51—Test port after oil cooler
12—Forward/reverse valve 26—Restrictor 39—Restrictor 52—Filter screen
13—Test port, clutch and 27—Restrictor 40—Temp. sending unit, oil 53—Main oil reservoir (sump)
brake pressure 28—Restrictor filter warning light
14—Cooling control valve 29—Clutch cooling valve 41—Temp. sending unit, oil
temperature warning light
LX,25120A010454 –19–01JUL96–2/2
251
20A
9

111401
PN=1293
Description of Valves and Other Hydraulic Components
Pressure Regulating Valve When the forward/reverse valve is in neutral, the

modulator valve allows only a small amount of oil to
Pressure regulating valve (31) is controlled by the oil pass through. The valve moves constantly back and
coming from the pump. From a pressure of 1200 kPa forth between the “closed” and “center” switch
(12 bar; 175 psi), the valve is in its end position and positions.
opens a passage to the oil cooler. Oil pressure cannot
rise any higher; it remains at this level. When a direction of travel is being selected, the
accumulator fills up. While the accumulator is filling up,
This pressure, limited to 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi), is the modulator valve constantly moves back and forth
the system pressure. between the “open” and “center” switch positions until
the accumulator is full up. Only then does the
Forward/reverse Valve modulator valve stop in the “open” position. The
modulator valve thus assists the accumulator and
Depending on which direction of travel is selected, the delays the engagement process.
forward/reverse valve (12) directs the hydraulic oil
either to disk clutch (8) or disk brake (9). Restrictor
Accumulator Piston The hydraulic oil that is required to fill up the

accumulator flows from there from the modulator valve,
To prevent the clutch or brake from engaging with a passing through restrictor (26).
jolt, the accumulator piston (19) takes in oil that would
otherwise flow to the clutch piston. By taking in this oil, Adjustable Restrictor
the accumulator delays the engagement process until
the accumulator is full up. Only then is full oil pressure Normally, the adjustable restrictor (20) remains closed.
available for the clutch or brake. If it opens slightly, it reduces the duration of the
modulation phase, because additional oil passes
Sump Valve through the adjustable restrictor to reach the
accumulator.
Sump valve (16) is affected by the position of the
forward/reverse valve. In both forward and reverse Clutch Pedal Valve
251 travel, the sump valve is always closed (no
20A through-flow to sump). When the forward/reverse valve With clutch or brake engaged, pilot oil flows from
10
is in neutral, the sump valve opens and the oil stored clutch pedal valve (21) via engagement override valve
in the accumulator piston quickly drains into the sump, (17) to the clutch piston or brake piston. Power is
allowing the accumulator to take in more oil as soon transmitted from the disk clutch or disk brake to the
as a direction of travel is engaged. transmission.
Modulator Valve When the clutch pedal is depressed, the clutch pedal
valve is operated by means of a bowden cable. Oil
Modulator valve (25) is controlled primarily by the pressure drops and the oil flows back to the sump.
accumulator piston. In normal travel, the modulator The clutch piston or brake piston is forced back by
valve is fully open, so that the hydraulic oil can flow to spring force. The clutch or brake is disengaged and no
the clutch or brake. At other times, the modulator valve power is transmitted to the transmission.
is constantly in motion.

111401
PN=1294
Engagement Override Valve the slip phase). It is controlled by the outlet pressure of
the clutch pedal valve.
If the forward/reverse valve is in the “forward” or
“reverse” position when the engine is started, hydraulic Cooling Control Valve
oil is blocked by engagement override valve (17),
preventing it from flowing to the clutch piston. Cooling control valve (14) feeds the cooling oil either
to the disk clutch or to the disk brake. The valve is
This condition is a design feature intended to prevent controlled by oil pressure from whichever component is
the tractor from moving accidentally. The engagement engaged at the time (disk clutch or disk brake).
override valve allows oil to pass to the clutch or brake
only when it has been activated by the forward/reverse Oil Cooler
valve switching once in the neutral position. Once the
engagement override valve has been activated, it Oil cooler (46) reduces the temperature of the
remains in this position during tractor operation. hydraulic oil so that the hydraulic system can operate
properly.
Centrifugal Force Valve
When the system pressure of 1200 kPa (12 bar;
With the clutch disengaged, oil in the passage to the 175 psi) is reached, oil flows from the pressure
clutch piston is normally pressure-free. When rated regulating valve (31) to the oil cooler. To relieve the oil
speed is exceeded, the clutch piston may be moved by cooler, pressure is limited to 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi)
the centrifugal force acting on the oil. In this situation, by means of cooler relief valve (32).
the centrifugal force valve (4) opens and the oil can
flow to the sump. Cooler Relief Valve
Air Bleed Valve If pressure exceeds 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi), the
cooler relief valve (32) opens a passage to
Caused by oil flowing to the sump, a slight low transmission lubrication. This relieves the oil cooler.
pressure is formed in the oil passage when the
centrifugal force valve is open. As a result, the air Lube Relief Valve
bleed valve (3) opens and air can flow into the oil
passage. If pressure exceeds 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi), lube
relief valve (42) opens a passage to the transmission
Clutch Cooling Valve oil pump inlet. This limits lube pressure to the value 251
mentioned. 20A
11
As the clutch or brake engages and disengages, the
friction generates heat. These are the phases when Transmission Oil Filter
lube oil is introduced to the clutch or brake via the
clutch cooling valve (29). This lube oil has the effect of The oil coming from the transmission oil pump flows
cooling the clutch or brake. through the transmission oil filter (47). If the filter is
restricted, filter relief valve (36) opens and the oil filter
Cooling Pilot Valve restriction warning light lights up.
Cooling pilot valve (24) ensures that the cooling valve

is only actuated in a certain pressure range (i.e. during

111401
PN=1295
Filter Relief Valve (7 ± 0.5 bar; 102 ± 7.3 psi)
If the transmission oil filter becomes restricted, oil Switch point (pressure dropping): 600 ± 150 kPa
pressure before the filter rises whereas pressure
behind the filter drops. This pressure difference (6 ± 1.5 bar; 87 ± 21.8 psi)
controls the filter relief valve (36). When the restriction
starts, an oil passage is opened to the sending unit of Sending unit, system press. indicator light (35)
the oil filter restriction warning light (37). The warning
light lights up. If the restriction is excessive, the oil Switch point (pressure rising): 865 ± 65 kPa
flows unfiltered to the pressure regulating valve
(emergency situation). (8,65 ± 0.65 bar; 126 ± 9.4 psi)
Filter Screen Switch point (pressure dropping): 827 ± 35 kPa
The filter screen (52) is located in the differential (8,27 ± 0.35 bar; 120 ± 5.1 psi)
housing sump. It prevents dirt from entering the intake
passage of the transmission oil pump. Temp. sending unit, oil filter warning light (40)
Pressure and Temperature Sending Units for -Switch point: 28°C (82°F)
Warning Lights
Temp. sending unit, oil temp. warning light (41)
Sending unit, oil filter restr. warning light (37)
-Switch point: 105°C (221°F)
Switch point (pressure rising): 700 ± 50 kPa
251
20A
LX,25120A010124 –19–01JUL96–3/3
12

111401
PN=1296
Theory of Operation - Pressure Regulating and Filter Relief Valves
B E
C
D
F
A
G
J
I
R S T
Q
N P
L
M O
–UN–22JUL99
U
LX1015320
251
LX1015320 W X Y Z
V 20A
13
A—Oil, system 2 I—Filter relief valve O—Transmission oil pump T—Sump

B—Oil, system 1 J—Press. sending unit, oil P—Temp. sending unit, oil U—Filter screen
C—Sump filter restrict. warning light temperature warning light V—Main oil reservoir (sump)
D—Cooler relief valve K—Restrictor Q—Temp. sending unit, oil W—Oil, system 1
E—Cooling oil L—Test port for system filter warning light X—Oil, system 2
F—Transmission lube pressure R—Test port, lube oil pressure Y—Lube/cooling oil
G—Sump M—Oil cooler S—Lube relief valve Z—Pressure-free oil
H—Pressure regulating valve N—Transmission oil filter
Illustration shows tractor in normal operation oil cooler. The oil pressure can rise no further and
remains at this level (system pressure).
Transmission oil pump (O) ingests oil from the main oil
reservoir (V) and pumps it through the transmission oil The oil that flows directly from the transmission oil
filter (N). Then the oil presses against the spring on pump to the other valves has priority and is available
pressure regulating valve (H). even when system pressure has not been reached.
This oil is designated oil from system 1.
From a pressure of 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi), the
valve is in its end position and opens a passage to the

111401
PN=1297
The oil that flows through the pressure regulating valve the oil cooler (M) and to the cooler relief valve (D). The
to the other valves only becomes available after cooler relief valve protects the oil cooler by preventing
system pressure has been reached. This oil is the pressure from rising too high.
designated oil from system 2.
The cooler relief valve is operated by pressure. From a
The oil that flows from the pressure regulating valve pressure of 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi), the spring force
through the oil cooler is used to lubricate the of the valve is overcome and oil flows directly to
transmission (F) and cool the disk clutch or disk brake lubricate the transmission (F) and to cool the disk
(E). clutch or disk brake (E).
Filter relief valve (I) is intended to relieve the Theory of Operation - Lube Relief Valve
transmission oil filter whenever necessary. The valve is
operated by a difference in pressure. Lube relief valve (S) is intended to limit lube oil
pressure to 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi).
Oil that has passed through the transmission oil filter
flows to the spring end of the filter relief valve. Oil that The lube relief valve is operated by pressure. From a
has NOT flowed through the transmission oil filter pressure of 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi), the spring
flows to the other end of the valve.
force of the valve is overcome and oil flows through
The illustration shows the normal operating condition the relief valve to the transmission pump inlet (short
(i.e. with clean transmission oil). The difference in circuit). When lube oil pressure drops below 250 kPa
pressure is less than 300 kPa (3 bar; 44 psi). The (2.5 bar; 36 psi), the valve closes again.
spring on the filter relief valve holds the valve spool in
its neutral position and all the passages are closed.
Theory of Operation - Cooler Relief Valve
Once system pressure has been reached, oil flows

through a passage in pressure regulating valve (H) to
251
20A
14

111401
PN=1298
B E
C
D
F
A
G
J
I
R S T
Q
N P
L
M O
–UN–04MAR98
U
LX1015321
W X Y Z
LX1015321 V
251
A—Oil, system 2 I—Filter relief valve O—Transmission oil pump T—Sump 20A
B—Oil, system 1 J—Press. sending unit, oil P—Temp. sending unit, oil U—Filter screen 15
C—Sump filter restrict. warning light temperature warning light V—Main oil reservoir (sump)
D—Cooler relief valve K—Restrictor Q—Temp. sending unit, oil W—Oil, system 1
E—Cooling oil L—Test port for system filter warning light X—Oil, system 2
F—Transmission lube pressure R—Test port, lube oil pressure Y—Lube/cooling oil
G—Sump M—Oil cooler S—Lube relief valve Z—Pressure-free oil
H—Pressure regulating valve N—Transmission oil filter
Illustration Shows the Situation When When the difference in pressure is between 300 and
Transmission Oil Filter is Clogged 430 kPa (3 and 4.3 bar; 44 and 62 psi), the filter relief
valve moves against the spring. An oil passage opens
If the transmission oil filter (N) is clogged, pressure to the pressure sending unit (J) for oil filter restriction
rises before the transmission oil filter. Behind the warning light. The warning light lights up. The
transmission oil filter must be replaced.
filter, pressure drops. This difference in pressure
actuates the filter relief valve (I).

111401
PN=1299
At very low oil temperatures, the switch pressure of the pressure sending unit, making it impossible for the
sending unit may be reached even although the pressure sending unit to switch unless the oil has
transmission oil filter is not clogged. For this reason, reached a temperature of +28°C (82°F).
temperature sending unit (Q) comes before the
251
20A
16

111401
PN=1300
B E
C
D
F
A G
J
I
R S T
Q
N P
L
M O
–UN–04MAR98
U
LX1015322
LX1015322 W X Y V
251
A—Oil under pressure I—Filter relief valve N—Transmission oil filter S—Lube relief valve 20A
B—Oil under pressure J—Press. sending unit, oil O—Transmission oil pump T—Sump 17
C—Sump filter restrict. warning light P—Temp. sending unit, oil U—Filter screen
D—Cooler relief valve K—Restrictor temperature warning light V—Main oil reservoir (sump)
E—Cooling oil L—Test port for system Q—Temp. sending unit, oil W—Oil under pressure
F—Transmission lube pressure filter warning light X—Lube/cooling oil
G—Sump M—Oil cooler R—Test port, lube oil pressure Y—Pressure-free oil
H—Pressure regulating valve
Illustration Shows the Situation With Extreme From a difference in pressure of 430 kPa (4.3 bar;
Clogging of Transmission Oil Filter (Emergency 62 psi), filter relief valve (I) switches to its 3rd stage
Situation) and the oil flows directly to pressure regulating valve
(H). This oil is unfiltered. Impurities in the oil may lead
If transmission oil filter (N) is not changed when the oil to damage at the valves.
filter restriction warning light comes on, the filter
becomes more and more clogged. From a difference in pressure of 500 kPa (5 bar;
73 psi), filter relief valve (I) switches to its 4th stage
Oil pressure before the transmission oil filter continues and oil can flow through an oil passage to lubricate the
to increase. At the same time, the pressure behind the transmission. This reduces oil pressure as well as
filter drops even further. ensuring lubrication.

111401
PN=1301
Because of the low pressure behind the transmission transmission is lubricated by the filter relief valve,
oil filter, the pressure regulating valve cannot operate. which also provides cooling for the disk clutch or disk
The spring on the pressure regulating valve holds the brake.
valve spool in its 1st stage position. With the spool in
this position, it is possible for unfiltered oil from the The fact that oil flows through the pressure regulating
filter relief valve to penetrate into the entire system. valve means that the oil pressure behind the
transmission oil filter may rise slightly, and the filter
With the pressure regulating valve in the position relief valve moves back and forth between the 3rd and
shown, no oil can flow to the oil cooler, and this 4th stages.
prevents the pressure from dropping further. The
LX,25120A010448 –19–01JUL96–6/6
251
20A
18

111401
PN=1302
Theory of Operation - Forward/Reverse Modulation
A L
M
B
N
D O
E
F
P
–UN–30MAR98
G
LX1014893
H I J Q R S LX1014893 251
20A
19
A—Forward/reverse valve F—Restrictor K—Clutch piston P—Clutch pedal valve
B—Sump valve G—Modulator valve L—Brake piston Q—Oil, system 1
C—Sump H—Sump M—Engagement override valve R—Oil, system 2
D—Accumulator piston I—Oil, from system 2 N—Pilot cooling oil S—Pressure-free oil
E—Adjustable restrictor J—Oil, from system 1 O—Sump
Illustration Shows Tractor Driving Forward At the same time, the valves are also affected as
Normally described below. This is important for the explanations
that follow:
When the tractor is driving forward normally, oil comes
from system 2 and flows through modulator valve (G), Oil comes from system 1 and flows as pilot oil to the
clutch pedal valve (P) and engagement override valve engagement override valve (M), which it holds in this
(M) to the forward/reverse valve (A). position (the oil pressure being stronger than the
spring on the other end).
As the forward/reverse valve is set to forward travel,
the oil flows on to clutch piston (K). Oil from brake
piston (L) flows to the sump (C). The clutch is engaged
and the tractor moves forward.

111401
PN=1303
Oil comes from system 2 and flows through modulator Oil from system 2 acts on both ends of modulator
valve (G) and restrictor (F) to the accumulator piston valve (G), but it remains in the position shown
(D), which fills up with oil. This oil also acts against the (maximum through-flow) because spring force and the
sump valve (B). However, the sump valve remains in full accumulator piston are both acting on the l.h. end
the position shown, as oil from system 1 exerts of the modulator valve.
pressure on the other end of the sump valve. This end
of the piston has a larger diameter, which means that NOTE: Operation is basically the same in reverse
the oil has a greater surface area to act against and drive, only the forward/reverse valve (A)
the force at this end is higher. Thus oil flows from supplies pressure oil to the brake piston (L)
system 1 through the sump valve to the and the oil from the clutch piston (K) flows into
forward/reverse valve, where it can flow no further. the sump.
251
20A
20

111401
PN=1304
A L
M
B
N
D O
E
F
P
–UN–30MAR98
G
LX1014894
H I J Q R S LX1014894
251
A—Forward/reverse valve F—Restrictor K—Clutch piston P—Clutch pedal valve 20A
B—Sump valve G—Modulator valve L—Brake piston Q—Oil, system 1 21
This Illustration and the Two Following Illustrations At the same time, oil from system 1 can flow through
Show the Situation When Changing From Forward sump valve (B) via the forward/reverse valve and into
Travel to Neutral the sump (C). In this way, the sump valve is no longer
actuated by oil from system 1. However, oil from
The operator moves the forward/reverse valve (A) from system 2 continues to act against the other end of the
“forward” to “neutral”. Oil from system 2 can no longer sump valve, moving it to its other non-neutral position (
flow through the forward/reverse valve to clutch piston see arrow).
(K). The oil from the clutch piston can flow into the
sump (C). The clutch is disengaged by spring force
and the flow of power from the engine to the gear
transmission is interrupted.

111401
PN=1305
A L
M
B
N
O
D E
F
P
–UN–30MAR98
G
LX1014895
H I J Q R S LX1014895
251
20A A—Forward/reverse valve F—Restrictor K—Clutch piston P—Clutch pedal valve
22 B—Sump valve G—Modulator valve L—Brake piston Q—Oil, system 1
E—Adjustable restrictor J—Oil, from System 1 O—Sump
The sump valve (B) has now adopted the switch would otherwise flow immediately to clutch piston (K)
position as shown. The oil from system 1 can flow and the clutch would engage with a jolt. This
through the sump valve to the accumulator piston (D) engagement is “smoothed” by the oil entering the
and the oil stored in the accumulator piston can return accumulator.
to the sump (C). The accumulator empties very
quickly, because spring pressure and the oil from Once the accumulator is empty, there is no longer any
system 1 both act on the accumulator piston at the pressure at the spring end of modulator valve (G). Oil
same time. It has to empty very quickly, because the from system 2 is still acting on the other end of the
accumulator must fill up with oil again (from system 2) modulator valve, causing it to move to its other
as soon as a direction of travel is selected. This oil non-neutral position ( see arrow).

111401
PN=1306
A L
M
B
N
D O
E
F
P
–UN–30MAR98
G
LX1014896
H I J Q R S LX1014896
251
A—Forward/reverse valve F—Restrictor K—Clutch piston P—Clutch pedal valve 20A
B—Sump valve G—Modulator valve L—Brake piston Q—Oil, system 1 23
With modulator valve (G) in the non-neutral position again. This causes oil to act on the end of the
shown, no oil can flow through the modulator valve modulator valve opposite the spring, and this
from system 2. This means there is no pressure at compresses the spring. Thus a permanent balance is
either end of the modulator valve. The spring forces formed, with the modulator valve continuously moving
the modulator valve into the center position, where back and forth between the closed position and the
some oil from system 2 can flow through the valve center position.

111401
PN=1307
A L
M
B
N
D O
E
F
P
–UN–30MAR98
G
LX1014897
H I J Q R S LX1014897
251
A—Forward/reverse valve F—Restrictor K—Clutch piston O—Sump
20A
B—Sump valve G—Modulator valve L—Brake piston P—Clutch pedal valve
24
C—Sump H—Sump M—Engagement overrride Q—Oil, system 1
D—Accumulator piston I—Oil, from system 2 valve R—Oil, system 2
E—Adjustable restrictor J—Oil, from system 1 N—Pilot cooling oil S—Pressure-free oil
This Illustration and the Following Illustration center position. The oil pressure is not sufficient to
Show the Situation When Changing From Neutral move the clutch piston.
to Forward Travel
The oil from system 1 that flows through sump valve
The forward/reverse valve (A) is moved manually from (B) to the forward/reverse valve (A) is present at the
neutral to forward travel. Although the oil passage in valve but cannot flow any further towards the sump.
the forward/reverse valve leading to the clutch piston Pressure builds up and oil from system 1 acts on the
(K) is open, modulator valve (G) continues to move sump valve, causing it to change its position ( see
back and forth between the closed position and the arrow).

111401
PN=1308
A L
M
B
N
C
O
D E
F
P
–UN–30MAR98
G
LX1014898
H I J Q R S LX1014898
251
20A
25
Sump valve (B) has now adopted the non-neutral (M) and forward/reverse valve (A) to clutch piston (K).
position shown, and the oil from accumulator piston However, this oil is not sufficient to engage the clutch
(D) is present at the sump valve but cannot flow any completely. Only when the accumulator is full up can
further towards the sump. all the oil flow into the clutch piston.
Oil from system 2 flows through modulator valve (G) The flow of oil to the clutch piston is deliberately
and through the restrictor (F) that leads to the delayed by this process, and this prevents the clutch
accumulator piston, which fills with oil. This means from engaging with a jolt.
only a little oil flows from the modulator valve via
clutch pedal valve (P), engagement override valve

111401
PN=1309
While the accumulator is filling up, oil from system 2 “fully open” position and the clutch engages properly (
acts on both ends of the modulator valve. Normally, see also “Tractor Driving Forward Normally”).
the extra force of the spring would move the valve to
the “fully open” position, but the oil at the spring end of NOTE: When engine speed is 2100 rpm and oil
the modulator valve also has to fill the accumulator, so temperature is over 50°C (120°F), modulation
the oil pressure at that end cannot take full effect. The takes about 3 to 3.5 seconds.
forces acting on either end of the modulator valve are
roughly equal. A constant balance of forces takes Function of adjustable restrictor (E): Under normal
place, and the modulator valve moves continuously circumstances, this restrictor remains closed. Opening
back and forth between the “open” and “center” switch it slightly reduces the time taken for modulation, as
positions until the accumulator is full up. Then the full additional oil from system 1 can pass the adjustable
oil pressure acts on the end of the modulator valve restrictor and flow to the accumulator.
with the spring on it. Now the valve remains in the
LX,25120A010134 –19–01JUL96–8/8
251
20A
26

111401
PN=1310
Theory of Operation - Clutch Pedal Valve
A L
M
B
N
D O
E
F
P
–UN–30MAR98
G
LX1014899
H I J Q R S LX1014899 251
20A
27
Illustration Shows Tractor Driving Forward disk clutch is disengaged by spring force and it ceases
Normally, With Clutch Pedal Depressed to transmit power to the transmission. When the clutch
pedal is released, oil flows into the clutch piston again
When the clutch pedal is released, oil from system 2 and the clutch is engaged.
flows through modulator valve (G), clutch pedal valve
(P), engagement override valve (M) and The speed of engagement is determined via the clutch
forward/reverse valve (A) to the clutch piston (K). See pedal. The slower (or faster) the clutch pedal is
also the illustration “Tractor driving forward normally”. depressed or released, the less (or more) oil flows
through the valve. The duration of the disengagement
When the clutch pedal is depressed, the clutch pedal and engagement processes can thus be controlled at
valve interrupts the flow of oil to the clutch piston. The will.
LX,25120A010203 –19–01JUL96–1/1

111401
PN=1311
Theory of Operation - Engagement Override Valve
A L
M
B
N
C
D O
E
F
P
–UN–30MAR98
G
LX1014900
H I J Q R S LX1014900
251
20A
28
Illustration Shows the Situation When Starting the Oil from system 2, which normally flows to clutch
Engine With Direction of Travel Selected piston (K) when forward/reverse valve (A) is set to
“forward travel”, is stopped at the engagement override
Before the engine is started, the entire hydraulic valve and can no longer flow to the clutch piston. This
system is pressure-free. The spring on engagement is a deliberate condition and is intended to prevent the
override valve (M) forces the valve into the position tractor from moving accidentally.
shown.
The engagement override valve permits oil into the
Once the engine is started, pressurized oil from clutch only after it has been actuated by the
system 1 acts against both ends of the engagement forward/reverse valve being switched once to its
override valve. The valve remains closed, because neutral position.
spring force is also acting on one end of it.

111401
PN=1312
Once the forward/reverse valve has been switched to Once actuated, the engagement override valve
its neutral position, no more oil flows to the end of the remains in this position as long as the tractor is in
engagement override valve with the spring on it. Oil operation, since pressure oil does not act on the end
from system 1, acting on the other end of the valve, of the valve with the spring while the tractor is in
presses the valve back against the spring and into its operation. See also the illustration “Tractor driving
other non-neutral position, permitting the oil from forward normally”, and the subsequent illustrations.
system 2 to flow through the engagement override
valve to the forward/reverse valve. As soon as the
forward/reverse valve is switched to “forward” or
“reverse”, oil flows to the clutch or to the brake.
LX,25120A010135 –19–01JUL96–2/2
251
20A
29

111401
PN=1313
Theory of Operation - Cooling
C D
B E
A
F
I
G
J
H
L K
M
N
P
–UN–30MAR98
LX1015328
LX1015328 O Q R S
251 A—Oil for disk brake E—Clutch cooling K—Cooling pilot valve Q—Pressure-free oil or oil
20A B—Oil for disk clutch F—Disk clutch L—Restrictor below 250 kPa (2.5 bar;
30 C—Test port, disk clutch oil G—Disk brake M—Clutch cooling valve 36 psi)
pressure H—Brake cooling N—Clutch cooling pilot oil R—Cooling oil
D—Test port, disk brake oil I—Cooling control valve O—Cooling oil S—Pressure-free oil
pressure J—Test port, cooling oil P—Sump
pressure
If clutch (F) or brake (G) is engaged or disengaged, The illustration shows the situation when the clutch
the friction during the slip phase produces heat. For has just been disengaged and the slip phase has
this reason, the disk clutch and disk brake must be ended, or when the clutch has just been engaged and
supplied with cooling oil for the duration of the slip the slip phase has not yet started. Oil (B) for the clutch
phase. Once the slip phase is over, cooling is no is pressure-free or is at a pressure of less than
longer required. 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi).

111401
PN=1314
Pilot oil (N), which is always at the same pressure as pressure is less than 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi).
the cooling oil, flows through cooling pilot valve (K) to Cooling oil (O), which comes from the oil cooler, is
clutch cooling valve (M). Although the pilot oil acts present at the clutch cooling valve but cannot flow any
against the spring on the clutch cooling valve, the further. No cooling takes place.
spring force cannot be overcome because the oil
251
20A
31

111401
PN=1315
C D
E
B
A
F
I
J
H
K
L
M
N
–UN–06APR98
P
LX1015329
LX1015329 O Q R S
A—Oil for disk brake E—Cooling for disk clutch K—Cooling pilot valve Q—Oil press., 250 kPa (2.5bar;
B—Oil for disk clutch F—Disk clutch L—Restrictor 36psi) to 900 kPa (9bar;
C—Test port, disk clutch oil G—Disk brake M—Clutch cooling valve 130psi)
251
pressure H—Cooling for disk brake N—Pilot oil for clutch cooling R—Cooling oil
20A
32
pressure J—Test port, cooling oil P—Sump
pressure
If clutch (F) or brake (G) is engaged or disengaged, flows through cooling pilot valve (K) and acts against
the friction during the slip phase produces heat. For the spring on the clutch cooling valve (M). From a
this reason, the disk clutch and disk brake must be pressure of 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi), the spring force
supplied with cooling oil for the duration of the slip is overcome and the clutch cooling valve moves to the
phase. position shown.
The illustration shows the situation when the clutch is Cooling oil (O), which comes from the oil cooler, flows
in the process of engaging or disengaging. The clutch through the clutch cooling valve to the cooling control
is in the slip phase. Clutch oil (B) is at a pressure valve (I). Pressure oil, which flows to the clutch,
between 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi) and 900 kPa (9 bar; controls the cooling control valve and forces it into the
130 psi). position shown. Cooling oil is free to flow to the clutch.
Pilot oil (N), which is also at a pressure between

250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi) and 900 kPa (9 bar; 130 psi),

111401
PN=1316
If the brake is engaged or disengaged, the cooling

control valve moves to its other position and cooling oil
flows to the disk brake.
251
20A
33

111401
PN=1317
C D
E
B
A
F
I
G
J
H
L K
–UN–30MAR98
N
P
LX1015330
LX1015330 O Q R S
A—Oil for disk brake E—Cooling for disk clutch K—Cooling pilot valve P—Sump
B—Oil for disk clutch F—Disk clutch L—Restrictor Q—Oil pressure over 900 kPa
C—Test port, disk clutch oil G—Disk brake M—Clutch cooling valve (9 bar; 130 psi)
pressure H—Cooling for disk brake N—Pilot oil for clutch cooling R—Cooling oil
251
20A
pressure J—Test port, cooling oil
34
pressure
If the clutch or brake is not engaged completely, there the cooling pilot valve (K). From a pressure of 900 kPa
is no friction to cause heat. There is therefore no need (9 bar; 130 psi), the spring force is overcome and the
for cooling. cooling pilot valve moves to the position shown. Pilot
oil (N) can no longer flow to the clutch cooling valve
The illustration shows the situation when the clutch is (M). The spring forces the clutch cooling valve into the
fully engaged or has just been engaged, and the slip position shown. Cooling oil (O), which comes from the
phase is over. Clutch oil (B) is at a pressure in excess oil cooler, is present at the clutch cooling valve but
of 900 kPa (9 bar; 130 psi). cannot flow any further. No cooling takes place.
Pilot oil (N), which is also at a pressure in excess of

900 kPa (9 bar; 130 psi), acts against the spring on
LX,25120A010453 –19–01JUL96–5/5

111401
PN=1318
Group 20B
Gear Transmission
Illustration of Gear Transmission
–UN–05DEC96
LX1015538
251
20B
1
A—Countershaft of gear B—Drive shaft of gear C—Drive shaft of range D—Differential drive shaft
transmission transmission transmission
The main components of the gear transmission are

drive shaft (B) and countershaft (A).
LX25120B 017041 –19–01MAR98–1/1

111401
PN=1319
Gear Transmission
Design and Powerflow
251
20B
–UN–29NOV96
2
LX1015539
A—Countershaft E—Gear, 1st gear H—Connecting ring, 4th gear J—Drive shaft of range
B—Drive shaft F—Gear, 3rd gear I—Needle bearing transmission
C—Gear, 2nd gear G—Synchronizer unit,
D—Synchronizer unit, 3rd and 4th gear
1st and 2nd gear
Drive shaft (B) and countershaft (A) are located in the the drive shaft. Range transmission drive shaft (J) can
gear transmission housing. also rotate freely on the drive shaft of the gear
transmission, since needle bearing (I) is provided. The
Gearwheels (C), (E) and (F), together with synchronizer units are positively connected to the drive
synchronizer units (D) and (G) are arranged on the shaft. Connecting ring (H) is positively connected to
drive shaft (B). The gearwheels can rotate freely on the range transmission drive shaft (J).
Continued on next page LX25120B 017043 –19–01MAR98–1/2

111401
PN=1320
Gear Transmission
The gears for 1st, 2nd and 3rd speeds are located on transmission drive shaft (J) can rotate at a different
drive shaft (B). speed from the gear transmission drive shaft (B).
When a gear is selected, the synchronizer unit When 4th gear is selected, synchronizer unit (G)
connects the relevant gear positively to the drive shaft. connects the connecting ring (H) to drive shaft (B). As
Power is transmitted to countershaft (A), which in turn the connecting ring is positively connected by gearing
transmits the power to range transmission drive shaft to the range transmission drive shaft (J), power is
(J). Thanks to needle bearing (I), the range transmitted in a direct 1:1 ratio.
LX25120B 017043 –19–01MAR98–2/2
251
20B
3

111401
PN=1321
Gear Transmission
251
20B
4

111401
PN=1322
Section 255
PowrQuad Transmission
Contents
Page Page
Group 05—Operational Checkout Group 15—Tests and Adjustments

Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255-05-1 Reverser Control Linkage Adjustment . . . . . . .255-15-1
Operational Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255-05-3 Adjusting Shifter and Parking Lock —
Reverser Control on Shift Console. . . . . . . .255-15-2
Group 10A—Troubleshooting PowrQuad
Lock — Reverser Control on Steering
Transmission
Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255-15-4
Use Step-By-Step Hydraulic Diagnostic
Shifter and Parking Lock Adjustment. . . . . . . .255-15-7
Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-1
Clutch Pedal Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255-15-9
Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-1
Transmission System Pressure Check . . . . .255-15-10
Connecting the SensoControl Testing
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-7
Group 20A—PowrQuad Transmission Operation
Service Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-7
PowrQuad Transmission Layout . . . . . . . . 255-20A-1
Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-8
PowrQuad Housings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-1
Observe Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-8
Planetary Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-4
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-9 Air Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-6
General Information on Diagnostics. . . . . . . 255-10A-9 Transmission Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-7
Notes on the Diagnostic Program . . . . . . . 255-10A-10 Clutch Oil Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-8
Service Code List (RCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-11 Reverse Brake Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-10
Diagnostic Address List (RCU) . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-12 Forward/Reverse Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-12
Calibration Address List (RCU) . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-13 Hydraulic Schematic - Mechanical
Calibrating the RCU1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-13 Reverser Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-14
Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-13 Hydraulic Schematic - Electrical Reverser
Adjust for Correct Pressure and Temperature Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-16
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-14 Filter Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-17
Shortened Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . 255-10A-14 Pressure Regulating Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-18
Test-Driving the Tractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-15 Forward-Reverse Modulation. . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-20
Troubleshooting System Test . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-16 EOV Circuit (With Mechanical Reverser
Major System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-18 Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-30 255
PowrQuad transmission, troubleshooting. . 255-10A-18 Theory of Operation - Electrical Reverser
Additional Troubleshooting Test Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-31
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-34 Reverse Drive Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-31
PowrQuad Transmission, Troubleshooting Park Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-32
(additional procedures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10A-34 Valve Housing on PowrQuad Module . . . 255-20A-33
Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-35
RCU1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-37
Group 10B—Troubleshooting Autoquad II Detail of Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
Transmission (Simplified). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-39
Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10B-1 Speed Control Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-41
General Information on Diagnostics. . . . . . . 255-10B-1 Speed Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-44
Notes on the Diagnostic Program . . . . . . . . 255-10B-2 Clutch Cooling Components . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-47
Service Code List (PEC) - Transmission . . . 255-10B-3 Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-47
Diagnostic Address List (PEC) - Cooling Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-48
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10B-6 FWD-REV Cooling Control Valve . . . . . . . 255-20A-48
List of Calibratable Addresses (PEC) -
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-10B-7 Continued on next page
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1
Contents
Page
Cooler and Lube Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-48

Module Lube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-49
Module Lube Flow Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-49
Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-50
Test Ports and Sending Units - With
Mechanical Reverser Control . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-51
Test Ports and Sending Units - With Electrical
Reverser Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20A-54
Group 20B—Autoquad II Transmission Operation

PowrQuad Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20B-1
PowrQuad and AutoQuad II
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20B-1
Comparison of Transmission Versions . . . . 255-20B-2
AutoQuad II Transmission Components . . . 255-20B-5
Description of PEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20B-6
Electric Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20B-6
Automatic Speed Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20B-7
Automatic Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20B-7
Group 20C—Creeper Transmission

Creeper Transmission Operation. . . . . . . . . 255-20C-1
Power Flow With Creeper Transmission
Engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20C-3
Group 20D—Range Box

Design (16-Speed Transmission) . . . . . . . . 255-20D-1
Power Flow in Range A (16-Speed
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20D-5
Power Flow in Range B (16-Speed
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20D-6
Power Flow in Range C (16-Speed
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20D-7
255 Power Flow in Range D (16-Speed
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20D-8
Power Flow in Range A (20- and 24-Speed
Transmissions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20D-9
Power Flow in Range E (20- and 24-Speed
Transmissions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20D-10
Power Flow in Range F (24-Speed
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20D-11
Parking Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255-20D-12
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Group 05
Preliminary Checks
AG,LX12234,205 –19–03AUG99–1/1
Preliminary Checks
– – –1/1
1 General Information NOTE: Perform these checks before installing test equipment. OK: GO TO 2.
Ask the operator: NOT OK: Correct any

abnormal conditions, then
• How is the machine performance? GO TO 2.
• When do the malfunctions occur?
Check maintenance records for:
• Proper service intervals

• Unusual, frequent or similar failures
• Disconnected, broken or binding operating linkages

• Kinked or dented oil lines
• Other mechanical failures
– – –1/1
255
05
1
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-05-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1325
2 Check hydraulic oil Oil level too low? OK: GO TO 3.

condition
Possible causes: NOT OK: Correct any
abnormal conditions, then
• Improper service intervals GO TO 3..
• External leaks
Is oil milky or dirty?
Possible causes:

Is oil discolored or has burned odor (overheated oil)?
Possible causes:
• Kinked pipes
• Crushed lines
• Plugged oil cooler
• Internal leaks
– – –1/1
3 Check tractor for See safety information in Section 210, Group 05 about oil leak checks. OK: GO TO 4.
external leaks
• Perform this test with engine shut off and again with engine running. NOT OK: Correct any
• Cycle all hydraulic control levers, pedals and switches with engine running at slow abnormal conditions, then
idle. GO TO 4.
Possible causes:
• Broken lines, hoses or loose connections

• Cracked housing
255
05
2
– – –1/1
4 Check tractor for Drive tractor in various gears and with engine at various speeds. Operate brakes, NOT OK: See operational
unusual noises differential lock, MFWD and PTO, if possible. ckecks for PowrQuad
Transmission
Be alert for conditions that could isolate a problem or cause further damage.
– – –1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-05-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1326
Before You Start A modulated engagement of forward clutch should not

take longer than 3.5 seconds and not be excessively
Always begin with this group to identify a failure. The aggressive.
step-by-step procedures will provide a quick check of
the system. No tools are required to perform these Reverser Control Modulation Check
checks. A level area with space for driving is
necessary. 1. Shift into first gear (without using the clutch pedal).
Always start with the first step and follow the sequence 2. Shift the F-N-R lever from “Forward” to “Reverse”
from left to right. Read each step completely before (without using the clutch pedal).
performing the check. Concentrate only on the check
you are performing and disregard signals from The reverse brake engagement modulation should
unrelated components. take no longer than 3.5 seconds and should not be too
aggressive.
Complete all checks before making repairs, unless
instructed otherwise in right column. Gear to Gear Modulation Check
The engine and other major components must be at Move gear shift lever from 4th reverse to 1st reverse
operating temperature for some checks. gear and again from 1st reverse to 4th reverse gear.
Repeat check in forward gears.
CAUTION: Perform checks in an open area.
Modulated gear to gear engagement should not take
Tractor may move when checks are made.
longer than 0.6 to 0.75 seconds. Shifting up should not
be excessively aggressive; shifting down will be more
Neutral to Gear Modulation Check
aggressive (jerky) than shifting up.
1. Move range shift lever to “B” range.
There should not be any clashing of gears, scraping or
squealing noises while shifting in any speed. There
2. Run engine at a speed of 1200—1500 rpm.
should not be any clunking when shifting up, but some
clunking is possible when shifting down.
3. Move gear shift lever to 1st gear (clutch pedal not
depressed).
Range Box Check
4. Reverse drive lever in forward position (clutch pedal
1. Move gear shift lever to 2nd forward gear and drive
not depressed).
tractor at 1200—1500 rpm.
NOTE: Smoothness of modulated shifts is affected by 255
2. Move range shift lever to all ranges. Complete the 05
various factors: Tire size, tire pressure, ballast,
shifts fast and release clutch pedal fast enough to 3
MFWD, engine speed, frequency of shifting,
prevent tractor from stopping.
system pressure, system leakage, oil
temperature and oil viscosity.
Continued on next page LX150125505,12 –19–01OCT93–1/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-05-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1327
NOTE: Shifting down from “B” to “A” range will require Differential Lock Check
a greater force on the shift lever to obtain an
equally timed shift as compared to a shift At an engine speed of 1000 rpm, drive tractor straight
down from “C” to “B” range. forward with transmission in range “B”, 2nd forward
gear. Engage differential lock and turn steering wheel
The shifts should be synchronized and accomplished sharply in either direction.
without excessive force on the shift lever. There should
not be any clashing, clunking, scraping or squealing The tractor should have the tendency to move straight
noises in transmission. forward.
Clutch Modulation Check Disengage differential lock by tapping one or both

brake pedals.
Depress clutch pedal to stop the tractor. Move range
shift lever to “B” range and gear shift lever to 3rd The tractor should now make a normal turn.
forward gear. At an engine speed of 1200-1500 rpm,
slowly release clutch pedal to full up position. MFWD Operational Check
Clutch modulation is controlled by the speed at which At an engine speed of 1000—1100 rpm, drive tractor
the operator releases the clutch pedal. with transmission in range “B”, 2nd forward gear.
Engage front wheel drive and turn steering wheel
Engagement should be smooth without any grabbing sharply in either direction. Fully depress clutch pedal
or chattering. and allow tractor to stop. Observe front end of tractor
and move MFWD switch to “OFF” position.
Transmission Creep Check
Front end of tractor should move sideways a small
With brakes released, fully depress clutch pedal. amount when MFWD switch is moved to “OFF”
position.
The tractor should roll to a stop and not have the
tendency to creep after it has stopped. This check can also be performed from reverse travel.
There should not be any clutch drag with engine at With MFWD engaged, indicator light must be on. With
slow idle to wide open throttle and clutch pedal MFWD disengaged, indicator light must be off.
depressed.
PTO Operational Check
Clutch Engagement Check
Stop tractor. With PTO switched “OFF”, run engine in
Engage a forward gear. all speed ranges.
255
05 Place the clutch pedal approx. 50—65 mm (2—2.5 in.) IMPORTANT: PTO should not be rotating.
4 above the floor.
Lift PTO switch and rotate clockwise approximately
The forward clutch should engage and the tractor 5 degrees until switch clicks. PTO should be rotating.
should start to move.
Tap PTO switch to disengage PTO clutch. PTO should
Repeat the check in second reverse. stop within seven seconds from maximum speed.
Continued on next page LX150125505,12 –19–01OCT93–2/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-05-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1328
With PTO engaged, indicator light must be on. With

PTO disengaged, indicator light must be off.
LX150125505,12 –19–01OCT93–3/3
255
05
5
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-05-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1329
255
05
6
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-05-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1330
Group 10A
Troubleshooting PowrQuad Transmission
Use Step-By-Step Hydraulic Diagnostic Charts
1. The charts are divided into three sections:

CAUTION: Whenever performing any
STEP-SEQUENCE-RESULT. Always start at the
diagnostic procedure, observe and follow
first step and go through complete sequence from
CAUTIONS. (See Observe Safety
left to right.
Precautions, this group.)
2. Each sequence ends with a result. The result will
Following charts provide a step-by-step sequence to
tell you what action to take and next step to which
make preliminary checks and to test and isolate
you should go.
hydraulic system and power train problems.
3. Work through the appropriate steps of the diagnosis
Use this procedure when there is a complaint of
and trouble shooting charts until the problem is
transmission slippage, erratic or aggressive shifting or
isolated. Perform the remaining checks, then repeat
when major power train repairs have been made.
test procedures up to the step that was out of
Always follow sequence and test specifications as
specification.
given.
NOTE: Sometimes it is necessary to repair the
Use Preliminary Checks (Step 1) to make preliminary
problem before the remaining tests can be
examination of tractor. Often, a preliminary check will
completed.
locate the problem. Make these checks before
installing any test equipment.
4. Use the transmission record sheet to record test
results.
Step 2 and beyond cover detailed diagnosis and tests
of power train and power train hydraulic system.
LX150125510,1 –19–01OCT93–1/1

255
10A
U.S. SERVICEGARD Catalog or European 1
Microfiche Tool Catalog (MTC).
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company. Continued on next page AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–1/17

111401
PN=1331
Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05791A
–UN–09JUN99
JT05791A
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–2/17
Universal Pressure Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT07115
Test and check hydraulic functions.
–UN–07APR98
RW30581
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–3/17
RW18141 –UN–29MAY91
1
Hydra-Analyze Flow Test Meter . . . . . . . . . . D01074AA
Check hydraulic flows and pressures.
255
10A
2 1
Sub for D15051NU
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–4/17
R40105 –UN–23AUG88
1
Set of Hydraulic Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05406
Flow-testing the hydraulic pumps.
1
Sub for D15022NU

111401
PN=1332
Universal Pressure Test Kit (Agricultural) . . . . . JT054701
Test and check hydraulic pressures. Use with kit JT07115.
–UN–21APR98
RW30580
1
Sub for D15027NU
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–6/17
R40105 –UN–23AUG88
PowrShift Transmission Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . JT054521
Check element pressures.
1
Sub for D15005NU
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–7/17
R40105 –UN–23AUG88
Hand-Held Digital Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . JT057191

255
Check engine speed.
10A
3
1
Sub for D05011ST and JT28201
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–8/17
RW75455 –UN–11AUG98
7/16-20 x 14 mm Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT03214
Check hydraulic pressure.

111401
PN=1333
R40105 –UN–23AUG88
Rubber Stopper and Leak Detector Kit . . . . . D05361ST
Check hydraulic system connections.
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–10/17

pressure testing.
–UN–15DEC97
LX1019202
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–11/17
“SensoControl” measurement unit consists of:
FKM10470-1 0-1000 bar Pressure Sensor

FKM10470-2 0-100 bar Pressure Sensor (2)
FKM10470-3 Adapter (3)
FKM10470-4 “Serviceman” Hand Gauge
FKM10470-5 Power Supply
FKM10472-6 Carrying Case
255
10A
4

111401
PN=1334

pressure testing.
–UN–15DEC97
LX1019203
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–13/17
“SensoControl” measurement unit consists of:
FKM10470 Pressure Measuring Sys. (Stage 1)

FKM10471-1 Printer Cable
FKM10471-2 Thermal Printer
FKM10471-3 PC Adapter with Software
255
10A
5
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–14/17
LX1019204 –UN–15DEC97


111401
PN=1335
Flow Measurement System . . . . . . . . . . . . . FKM10472

flow testing.
–UN–27SEP01
A—FKM10472-1 Flow Turbine
B—FKM10472-2 Connecting Cable
C—FKM10472-3 1/4-in. Coupler
D—FKM10472-4 Temperature Sensor
E—FKM10472-5 Hose, 2 meters long (2)
LX1027890
F—FKM10472-6 Quick Coupler (2)
G—FKM10472-7 2-Way Fitting
H—FKM10472-8 Restrictor
I—FKM10472-9 Sealing Ring (2)
J—FKM10472-10 Restriction Fitting (2)
K—FKM10472-11 Carrying Case
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–16/17
Included in “SensoControl” measurement unit. See

“Connecting the SensoControl Testing Equipment” in this
Group.
AG,LX25597,468 –19–01MAR00–17/17
255
10A
6

111401
PN=1336
Connecting the SensoControl Testing Equipment
–UN–21APR98
LX1019201
Measuring Unit
on the tractor.
255
10A
7
AG,LX25597,469 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Service Equipment and Tools

European Microfiche Tool Catalog (MTC). Some
tools may be available from a local supplier.
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company. Continued on next page AG,LX25597,470 –19–01MAR00–1/2

111401
PN=1337
Metri-Pack Connector Tap Out Lead . . . . . . . . . JDG7741
Voltage check in circuits (e.g. clutch cooling solenoid).
1
Dealer Fabricated Tools—See Section 299
AG,LX25597,470 –19–01MAR00–2/2
Other Material
Number Name Use
AR94522 (U.S.) ISO coupler Adapt flow meter hoses to selective

control valve
LX150125510,3 –19–01OCT93–1/1
Observe Safety Precautions
4. When servicing front-wheel drive equipped tractor

CAUTION: The following safety precautions
with rear wheels supported off ground, always
MUST be followed to prevent personal
support front wheels in a similar manner before
injury:
rotating wheels by engine power. Loss of electrical
power or transmission-hydraulic system pressure
1. Keep hands away from moving parts. Shut engine
will engage front driving wheels, pulling rear wheels
off before checking lines near moving parts.
off support if front wheels are not raised.
255
10A 2. Use ONLY 14 mm adapters or plugs in 14 mm
Under these conditions, note that the front drive
8 ports. Fittings of incorrect size may fit, but could be
wheels can engage even with switch in disengaged
blown out under pressure.
position.
3. Before checking transmission control circuits, place
transmission right range lever at neutral.
RX150125510,5 –19–26OCT93–1/1

111401
PN=1338
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin

causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
–UN–23AUG88
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands
X9811
and body from high pressure fluids.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid

injected into the skin must be surgically removed within a
few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar with
this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable
medical source. Such information is available from Deere
& Company Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
DX,FLUID –19–03MAR93–1/1
For functions that are the same on all electronic “Abbreviations Used on the Display”, Section 245,
control units, see the following: Group 05.
“General Explanation of Testing on Electronic Control “Entering Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05.
“Safety Measures”, Section 245, Group 05. Group 05.
255
10A
“Diagnosis with the Performance Monitor”, “Electronic Control Unit Identification Addresses”,
9

Group 05.
AG,LX25597,456 –19–01MAR00–1/1

111401
PN=1339
Notes on the Diagnostic Program
The forward/reverse functions are performed at least in voltages. See “Diagnostic Address List (RCU)” in this
part by means of the electronic control unit (RCU). Group.
The Service Code List (RCU) allows you to identify The List of Calibration Addresses (RCU) allows you
the service codes that are generated when faults to key in information required by the electronic control
occur. See “Service Code List (RCU)” in this Group. unit (RCU) (calibration). See “List of Calibration
Addresses (RCU)” in this Group.
The Diagnostic Address List (RCU) allows you to
check the individual switches, sending units and
Address Designation Information Displayed

01 Service codes The stored service codes are displayed.
02 Diagnostics address All addresses that are changed as as result of some procedure (e.g.
changing a switch position) are displayed.
03 Diagnostics address Not-neutral switch, not-neutral relay and transmission enable signal
may all be checked.
04 to 07 Diagnostic addresses -Individual switches can be checked.
-Voltages can be read.
-Functions can be selected.
20 Calibration address Various parameters must be keyed in (calibrated).
21 Calibration address Established parameter
80 to 99 Identification addresses Part number, software version, tractor model and tractor serial
AG,LX25597,455 –19–01MAR00–1/1
255
10A
10

111401
PN=1340
Service Code List (RCU)
Code no. Description

015 Fault in detent solenoid circuit (lasts less than 0.3 seconds)
017 Insignificant fault that has no effect on tractor operationa
025 Fault in detent solenoid circuit (lasts longer than 0.3 seconds)
027 Enable pressure switch indicates no pressure
029 Enable pressure switch indicates pressure, but pressure is actually zero (diagnostic mode only)
031 Fault in enable solenoid circuit
032 In park position, but there is no signal for correct neutral position
034 Rev. drive lever remains in direction too long while range lever is in “park” (diagn.mode only)
040 Forward and reverse switches open, but not-neutral switch is closed
041 Forward and reverse switches both closed at same time
042 Forward switch closed, but not-neutral switch open
043 Reverse switch closed, but not-neutral switch open
044 Not-neutral relay open, but not-neutral switch closed
045 Direction of travel is selected, but enable solenoid is still closed
047 No neutral signal after engine is started
048 System voltage too low (less than 8 volt)
051 Rev. drive lever in direction, but neutral start switch indicates neutral
053 Rev. drive lever in neutral, but neutral start switch indicates not neutral
055 Enable solenoid stuck in “closed” position
056 Rev. drive lever in “forward” or “reverse” when engine is started
057 Transmission enable voltage too low during operation
058 Transmission enable voltage too low when the engine is started
064 Fault in memory of reverser control unit (RCU)
065 Fault in memory of reverser control unit (RCU); unit is attempting to cancel the fault
067 Neutral start switch indicates not-neutral although there is no reason for this
a
Fault cannot always be cancelled.
For diagnosis of service codes, see “Service Code

Diagnosis (RCU)”, Section 211, Group RCU.
AG,LX25597,457N –19–01AUG00–1/1
255
10A
11

111401
PN=1341
Diagnostic Address List (RCU)
Addr. No. Description Display (Desired value)

01 Displays any service codes that are in the memory 000 and/or service codes
02 When a switch or sensor changes state a beep is heard and the associated address is RCU and/or 003—007
displayed (the address will be three-digit, e.g. 004).
03 Check the not-neutral switch (S46), not-neutral relay (K212) and transmission enable signal from latch relay
(dependent on not-neutral relay).
Not-neutral switch (S46):
In neutral position 0XX
In forward and reverse positions 1XX
Not-neutral relay (K212):
In neutral position X0X
In forward and reverse positions X1X
Enable signal from latch relay (dependent on the not-neutral relay):
No enable signal XX0
Valid enable signal XX1
04 Check the not-neutral switch (S46), forward switch (S46) and reverse switch (S46).
Not-neutral switch (S46):
In neutral position 0XX
In forward and reverse positions 1XX
Forward switch (S46):
In neutral position X0X
In forward position X1X
Reverse switch (S46):
In neutral position XX0
In reverse position XX1
05 Check parking lock switch (B51).
Parking lock switch (B51):
Not in "park" 0XX
In "park" 1XX
vacant X0X
Tractors without reverse lockout XX0
255 06 Check parking switch (B51) and neutral signal from neutral start switch (B36).
10A Parking lock switch (B51):
12
Not in "park" 0XX
In "park" 1XX
Neutral signal from neutral start switch (B36):
Switch open (not in neutral position) X0X
Switch closed (in neutral position) X1X
Enable pressure switch (B52):
Switch open (pressure exists) XX0
Switch closed (no pressure) XX1
07 Check system voltage, enable solenoid (Y07) and detent solenoid (S46).
System voltage:
Voltage OK 0XX
Continued on next page AG,LX25597,459N –19–01AUG00–1/2

111401
PN=1342

Voltage too low 1XX
Enable solenoid (Y07):
Faults X0X
No fault X1X
Detent solenoid (S46):
Faults XX0
No fault XX1
AG,LX25597,459N –19–01AUG00–2/2
Calibration Address List (RCU)
Addr. No. Description Display (desired)

20 Neutral signal 014
21 Established parameter 001
AG,LX25597,460 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Calibrating the RCU1
255
1 10A
Reverser Control Unit (electronic control unit for electrical reverser
13
control)
AG,LX25597,461 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Calibration Mode
– – –1/1
1 Select RCU Address IMPORTANT: On all tractors, the display should read as follows: OK: Store the value. GO
20 TO 2.
Input: 014
NOT OK: Key in and
store relevant value. GO
TO 2.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1343
2 Select RCU Address IMPORTANT: On all tractors, the display should read as follows: OK: Store the value.
21 Calibration ended.
Input: 001
NOT OK: Key in and
store relevant value.
Calibration ended.
– – –1/1
Adjust for Correct Pressure and Temperature

References
IMPORTANT: In the test procedures, 70 kPa (0.7 bar)

(10 psi) lube pressure is used as a
beginning reference for several tests.
NOTE: To insure test accuracy, it may be necessary to

heat the hydraulic oil to a specified temperature.
Use the oil heating procedure (Heating the
Hydraulic Oil) to heat the oil AFTER performing
Preliminary Checks (Step 1).
If lube pressure is above 70 kPa (0.7 bar) (10 psi) at slow

idle, adjust engine speed to get the next higher gauge
increment.
If lube pressure is below 70 kPa (0.7 bar) (10 psi) at wide

open throttle, continue to test a wide open throttle.
RX150125510,4 –19–08JUL92–1/1
Shortened Diagnostic Procedure

255
Diagnostic procedures are normally developed to cover trouble shooting and can perform the diagnosis by
10A
14 more than 90 percent of the possible malfunctions. memory use the list of ’Major System Check: below
Sometimes these procedures are perceived as being with the following ’Record Sheet’ as a shortened
too long and time consuming. It must be understood procedure.
that only the ’Major System Checks’ (normal steps) are
performed to a step that is found to be out of If you are not certain about the details of a step you
specification. Then, there is a diversion from the are performing, refer to the same step number in the
normal trouble shooting path, listing the causes for the longer, more thorough test procedure that follows the
problem. record sheet.
As you become very knowledgeable about how the

system operates, what test equipment is necessary for
RX150125510,6 –19–08JUL92–1/1

111401
PN=1344
Test-Driving the Tractor
Test-drive the tractor as described below.
1. Turn the key switch OFF.

2. Put range shift lever in PARK.
3. Put reverse drive lever in NEUTRAL.
4. Start the engine.
5. Set the range shift lever to any range (A, B, C, D, E or
F).
6. Put reverse drive lever in FORWARD and drive the
tractor for 10 seconds.
8. Put reverse drive lever in REVERSE and drive the
tractor for 10 seconds.
10. Put range shift lever in PARK.
11. Call up the service codes. See “Calling Up and
Deleting Service Codes”, Section 245, Group 05.
AG,LX25597,467 –19–01MAR00–1/1
255
10A
15

111401
PN=1345
Troubleshooting System Test
Major System Checks: • 39—Summary of transmission testing
• 01—Preliminary checks Additional trouble shooting test procedures:

• 02—Transmission oil filter check
• 03—Install test equipment • 1. Lube oil relief valve sticking (open)
• 04—Driving and first pressure checks • 2. Testing transmission oil pump for air leaks
• 09—Heat transmission/hydraulic oil • 3. Clutch and brake element air leak check using a
• 10—Speed circuit leak check blow gun
• 13—Forward clutch circuit leak check • 4. Transmission control valve housing gasket
• 16—Reverse brake circuit leak test • 5. Transmission slippage
• 19—Differential lock circuit leak check • 6. PTO clutch drag
• 21—PTO circuit leak check • 7. Hydraulics fluid over-heating
• 24—Front Wheel Drive leak testing
• 27—Transmission lube pressure check NOTE: Record sheets on following pages can be
• 34—Transmission system pressure check copied to record results of transmission system
• 36—Clutch cooling circuit test checks.
• 38—Transmission air pump check
POWRQUAD TRANSMISSION TEST RECORD SHEET
Name Model Tractor serial no. Date

Operating hours Transmission problem
Step
2. Transmission oil filter indicator light check at max. engine speed
9. Hydraulic oil temperature
10. Speed circuit leak check
Gear Lube Element System Specification
1 Lube oil pressure difference:
2 28kPa (0.28 bar; 4 psi)
3 Element system difference:
4 105 kPa (1 bar; 15 psi)
13. Forward clutch circuit leak check
Lube Element System Specification
Clutch pedal “UP” Lube oil pressure difference:
28kPa (0.28 bar; 4 psi)
Clutch pedal “DOWN” Element system difference:
105 kPa (1 bar; 15 psi)
16. Reverse brake circuit leak test
255 Lube Element System Specification
10A Clutch pedal “UP” Lube oil pressure difference:
16 28kPa (0.28 bar; 4 psi)
Clutch pedal “DOWN” Element system difference:
105 kPa (1 bar; 15 psi)
19. Differential lock circuit leak check
Lube Specification
Differential lock “ON” Lube oil pressure difference: 17 kPa
(0.17 bar; 2.5 psi)
Differential lock “OFF”

111401
PN=1346
21. PTO circuit leak check

PTO “ON” Lube oil pressure difference:
17 kPa (0.17 bar; 2.5 psi)
PTO “OFF” Element system difference:
207 kPa (2 bar; 30 psi)
24. Front Wheel Drive leak testing
FWD “ON” Lube oil pressure difference:
17 kPa (0.17 bar; 2.5 psi)
FWD “OFF” Element system difference:
207 kPa (2 bar; 30 psi)
27. Transmission lube oil pressure
RPM 38 °C (100 °F) 65 °C (150 °F) Typical pressure
1000 1000 rpm:
38 °C (100 °F): 100 kPa (1 bar;
14 psi)
65 °C (150 °F): 50 kPa (0.5 bar;
7 psi)
2000 2000 rpm:
38 °C (100 °F): 195 kPa (2 bar;
28 psi)
65 °C (150 °F): 160 kPa (1.6 bar;
23 psi)
29. Cooler relief valve test
Specification
Opening pressure: 650—760 kPa (6.5—7.6 bar; 95—
110 psi)
Full relief pressure: 930—1000 kPa (9.3—10 bar; 135—
145 psi)
31. Transmission oil pump/cooler flow test
Typical Flow:
Flow at 2300 rpm Transmission oil pump delivery:
60 L/min (15.8 gpm)
Cooler flow rate:
54 L/min (14.3 gpm)
34. Transmission system pressure
Specification
Pressure at 2000 rpm 1150—1270 kPa (11.5—12.7 bar;
167—185 psi)a or 1350—1480 kPa
(13.5—14.8 bar; 195—215 psi)b
36. Testing clutch cooling circuit in F1:
a. Clutch pedal depressed 38—50 mm (1.5—2.0 in.):
Does lube oil pressure drop?
b. Clutch pedal 38—50 mm (1.5—2.0 in.) from floor:
Does lube oil pressure drop? 255
c. Clutch pedal fully depressed and then released: 10A
Does lube oil pressure drop and then increase to previous value? 17
d. Shift lever moved from forward to reverse without using clutch pedal:
Does lube oil pressure drop and then increase to previous value?
e. Shift lever moved from neutral to any forward or reverse gear:
Does lube oil pressure drop and then increase to previous value?
a
For 6110-6410, 6110L-6410L, 6310S and 6410S
b
For 6510L and 6510S
AG,LX25597,464N –19–01AUG00–2/2

111401
PN=1347
Major System Checks
AG,LX25597,465N –19–01AUG00–1/1
PowrQuad transmission, troubleshooting
– – –1/1
1 Preliminary Checks NOTE: Perform these checks before installing test equipment. OK: GO TO 2.
Ask Operator: NOT OK: Correct any

abnormal conditions. GO
• How is machine performing? TO 2.
• When does it malfunction?
Check maintenance records for:
• Serviced properly
• Unusual, frequent or similar failures
• Disconnected, broken or binding operating linkages

• Kinked or dented oil lines
• Other mechanical failures
CHECK HYDRAULIC OIL CONDITION:
Is the oil level too low?
Possible causes:

• External leaks
255 Is the oil milky or dirty?

10A
18 Possible causes:

Is the oil discolored or does it smell burnt (overheated oil)?
Possible causes:
• Kinked pipes
• Crushed lines
• Blocked oil cooler
• Internal leaks
– – –1/2

111401
PN=1348
CHECK TRACTOR FOR EXTERNAL LEAKS: OK: GO TO 2.
Observe safety precautions for checking for oil leaks. See “Avoid High-Pressure NOT OK: Correct any
Fluids”, Section 210, Group 05. abnormal conditions. GO
TO 2.
Perform this test with engine shut off and again with engine running.
Cycle all hydraulic control levers, pedals and switches with engine running at slow idle.
Possible causes:
• Broken lines, hoses or loose connections

• Leaks at O-rings or seals
• Cracked housing
CHECK TRACTOR FOR UNUSUAL NOISES:
Drive the tractor in various gears and at various engine speeds. Operate brakes,
differential lock, MFWD and PTO, if possible.
Be alert for conditions that could indicate a problem or cause further damage.
CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK:
Drive tractor straight ahead in B2 at 1000 rpm. Engage differential lock. Differential
lock indicator light should come on.
Turn steering wheel sharply to the left or right. The tractor should show noticeable
resistance to turning as long as the differential lock is engaged. Lightly tap brake
pedals to disengage the differential lock. The differential lock indicator light should go
out and the tractor should now make a normal turn.
CHECK MFWD OPERATION:
Drive tractor straight ahead in B2 at 1000 rpm. Press MFWD switch to engage MFWD.
MFWD indicator light should come on.
Completely depress clutch pedal to stop the tractor.
Disengage MFWD. Front end of tractor should move sideways a small amount when
MFWD switch is moved to "OFF" position. MFWD indicator light should go out.
CHECK PTO OPERATION:
Stop the tractor. With PTO switched “OFF”, run engine in all speed ranges. PTO
indicator light should be “OFF”. 255
10A
IMPORTANT: The PTO should not be rotating. 19
Lift PTO switch and rotate clockwise approximately 5 degrees until switch clicks. PTO
should be rotating and PTO indicator light should come on.
Press PTO switch to disengage PTO clutch. PTO should stop within 7 seconds from
maximum speed.
–19– –2/2
2 Transmission oil filter Run engine at maximum speed for 10 to 15 seconds. OK: Light off: GO TO 3.
check
Transmission oil filter indicator light should stay “OFF”. NOT OK: Light on:
Change filter. GO TO 2.
NOTE: If light is still “ON” after changing filter, refer to Section 240 to determine cause.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1349
3 Install test Connect pressure gauges and 3 m (10 ft) hoses to transmission lube and system OK: GO TO 4.
equipment diagnostic receptacles at bottom of transmission front cover.
– – –1/1
4 Driving and first Drive tractor in all gears and ranges, forward and reverse. OK: First checks OK: GO
pressure checks TO 9.
At an engine speed of 2000 rpm, system pressure should be as follows:
NOT OK: Tractor does
• 1150—1270 kPa (11.5—12.7 bar; 167—185 psi)1 not move and no system
or pressure: GO TO 5.
• 1350—1480 kPa (13.5—14.8 bar; 195—215 psi)2
Lube pressure should be above 70 kPa (0.7 bar; 10 psi) (at an engine speed of NOT OK: Tractor does
1000 rpm or max. engine speed, if necessary). not move, but system and
lube pressure OK at
PARK: GO TO 6.
NOT OK: Tractor stops

moving after shifting: GO
TO 7.
NOT OK: Tractor missing

certain gears: GO TO 8.
1
For 6110-6410, 6110L-6410L, 6310S and 6410S
2
For 6510L and 6510S
– – –1/1
5 Driving and pressure Causes for “Tractor does not move and no system pressure”: OK: GO TO 2.
checks (continued)
255 • Transmission input drive defective. Inspect drive from engine. NOT OK: Repair. GO TO
10A • Transmission oil pump or suction circuit malfunction. See TEST NO. 2. “Additional 2.
20 Troubleshooting Test Procedures” after step 39.
• Lube relief valve stuck in "open" position. This allows air to be pulled in reverse
through lube circuit to suction side of transmission oil pump. See TEST NO. 2.
“Additional Troubleshooting Test Procedures” after step 39.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1350
6 Driving and pressure Causes for “Tractor does not move, but system and lube pressure OK at PARK”: NOT OK: Rectify the
checks (continued) problems. GO TO 9.
• Shift linkage for speed control, FORWARD-REVERSE, or traction clutch valves not
connected or improperly connected.
• Engagement override valve stuck.
• Mechanical transmission failure.
Requirements necessary to cause tractor movement are: NOT OK: Rectify the
problems. GO TO 2.
01—Transmission oil pump pressure.
02—EOV (engagement override valve) moved against spring force for oil flow to
FWD-REV valve.
03—Oil flow through 1.0 mm orifice to spring end of FWD-REV modulator valve.
04—FWD-REV modulator valve must be positioned against spring and oil pressure
from 1.0 mm orifice to route pump flow to traction clutch valve.
05—Pressure-regulating valve must open to system “2” passage for pump flow to
FWD-REV modulator valve and traction clutch valve.
06—Traction clutch valve controls oil flow through EOV and FWD-REV valve to
element.
07—FWD-REV valve position directs oil from traction clutch valve to FWD clutch or
REV brake.
08—FWD clutch or REV brake must engage to drive tractor with one of the elements
engaged.
09—Shift modulator valve and accumulator piston must allow flow to B2-B3 shift valve.
10—Speed control valve position directs oil to B2-B3 (11), B1-B2 (12) and B3-C4 (13)
shift valves.
11—B2-B3 shift valve directs element engagement oil to B1-B2 or B3-B4 shift valve.
12—B1-B2 shift valve position selects 1st or 2nd speed.
13—B3-B4 shift valve position selects 3rd or 4th speed.
14—B1, B2, B3 or C4 element engages with FWD clutch or REV brake to cause
movement of tractor if range lever is moved to a certain range.
255
10A
21
– – –1/1
7 Driving and pressure Causes for “Tractor stops moving after shifting”: NOT OK: Rectify the
• Shift linkages for speed control, FORWARD-REVERSE or traction clutch valves
improperly adjusted
Shifting within speeds:
• Speed trigger valve, speed sump valve or modulator valve sticking; orifices restricted
Shifting from forward to reverse or vice versa:
• FWD-REV trigger valve, FWD-REV sump valve or modulator valve sticking; orifices
restricted
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1351
8 Driving and pressure Causes for “Tractor missing certain gears”: NOT OK: Rectify the
1—Same speed at 1 and 2 (3 & 4 OK): B1-B2 shift valve stuck.
2—Same speed at 3 and 4 (1 & 2 OK): B3-B4 shift valve stuck.
3—Speeds 1 and 2 OK (no 3 or 4): B2-B3 shift valve stuck.
4—Speeds 3 and 4 OK (no 1 or 2): B2-B3 shift valve stuck.
5—Only speed 4 OK (no 1-2-3): Internal transmission housing retainer out of groove.
6—Shift linkage for speed control, FWD-REV, or traction clutch valves not connected
or improperly adjusted.
– – –1/1
9 Heat Set detent knobs on two selective control valves to continuous position. OK: GO TO 10.
transmission/hydraulic
oil Install a jumper hose on one selective control valve and set metering valve at half flow.
At an engine speed of 1500—1800 rpm, move both selective control valve levers
rearward.
NOTE: Hydraulic pump should be operating at high pressure.
Heat oil to 38°C or 65°C.
– – –1/1
10 Speed circuit leak Move range shift lever to neutral position. OK: GO TO 13.
check
NOT OK: GO TO 11.
CAUTION: Tractor will move during testing if range shift lever is not in
neutral position.
With clutch pedal up, engage 1st forward gear.
Adjust engine speed to get approximately 70 kPa (0.7 bar; 10 psi) lube pressure.
Record lube pressure in all gears.

255
10A Difference between highest and lowest pressure reading must not exceed 28 kPa
22 (0.28 bar; 4.0 psi).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1352
11 Speed circuit Install a second 3 m (10 ft) hose at element pressure test port for element that was OK: GO TO 12.
pressure check suspected of excessive leakage.
NOT OK: GO TO 10.
Connect system and element hoses to dual needle valve manifold JT071181 and
connect a pressure gauge to manifold.
Close valve to element and open valve to System 2 pressure.
Move range shift lever to neutral position.
neutral position.
At an engine speed of 2000 rpm, record System 2 pressure with gear shift lever at a
different gear (element) without leakage.
Close valve to System 2 pressure and open valve to leaky element. Record element
pressure.
NOTE: Circuit leakage causes system pressure to decrease; therefore, check system
pressure in a gear that has no circuit leakage.
Difference between system and element pressure must not exceed 105 kPa (1 bar;
15 psi).
1
Included in JT07115
– – –1/1
12 Speed circuit Possible areas of leakage are listed below. OK: Repair leak. GO TO
pressure check 2.
(continued) Filter housing gasket:
• System 1
High-pressure valve gasket (clutch cooling):
• System 2
• Clutch Cooling
Front cover valve housing: 255

10A
• System 1 23
• System 2
• Clutch Cooling
Front cover separator plate, rear gasket:
• System 1
• System 2
• Clutch Cooling
• Lube oil
Front cover separator plate, front gasket:
• System 1
• System 2
• Clutch Cooling
• Lube oil
– – –1/3

111401
PN=1353
Control valve housing: OK: Repair leak. GO TO

2.
• System 1
• System 2
• B1
• B2
• B3
• C4
• Forward clutch
• Reverse brake
• Clutch Cooling
• Lube oil1
Control valve separator plate, upper gasket:
• System 1
• System 2
• B1
• B2
• B3
• C4
• Forward clutch
• Reverse brake
• Clutch Cooling1
• Lube oil1
Control valve separator plate, lower gasket:
• System 1
• System 2
• B1
• B2
• B3
• C4
• Forward clutch
• Reverse brake
• Clutch Cooling1
• Lube oil1
Transmission housing, front gasket (planetary housing):
• System 1
• System 2
• B1
• Reverse brake
255 • Clutch Cooling
10A • Lube oil1
24
Transmission housing, rear gasket (planetary housing):
• System 1
• Reverse brake
• Clutch Cooling
• Lube oil
1
Flow path but not likely to leak
–19– –2/3

111401
PN=1354
Planetary brake housing: OK: Repair leak. GO TO

2.
• System 2
• B1
• B2
• B3
• C4
• Forward clutch
• Clutch Cooling
• Lube oil1
Reverse brake housing:
• System 2
• Forward clutch
• Reverse brake
• Clutch Cooling
• Lube oil1
Rear transmission seal (front diff. drive shaft):
• Clutch Cooling
1
Flow path but not likely to leak
–19– –3/3
13 Forward clutch Move range shift lever to neutral position and gear shift lever to any forward speed. OK: GO TO 16.
circuit leak check
NOT OK: GO TO 14.
neutral position.
Record lube pressure with clutch pedal full up and again with clutch pedal down.
Repeat check with gear shift lever in neutral position.
Pressure difference must not exceed 28 kPa (0.28 bar; 4.0 psi). 255
10A
NOTE: If pressure is out of specification for the clutch pedal up-down check, the 25
leakage is between clutch valve and FWD-REV valve in control valve housing. Repair
leak.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1355
14 Forward clutch Install a second 3 m (10 ft) hose at forward clutch test port where excessive leakage is OK: GO TO 16.
circuit leak check suspected.
NOT OK: GO TO 15.
Connect system and element hoses to dual needle valve manifold JT071181 and
Close valve to element and open valve to System 2 pressure; with engine at
2000 rpm, record System 2 pressure at neutral.
Close valve to System 2 pressure and open valve for forward clutch pressure. Gauge
should indicate no pressure.
Move range shift lever to neutral position.
neutral position.
With the clutch pedal full up, move gear shift lever to any forward gear and record
forward clutch pressure.
Difference between system and forward clutch pressure must not exceed 105 kPa
(1.0 bar; 15.0 psi).
1
Included in JT07115
– – –1/1
15 Forward clutch Inspect control valve housing leakage points. Refer to chart (step 12) for areas of NOT OK: Repair the
circuit leak check possible leakage. circuit. GO TO 2.
(continued)
– – –1/1
16 Reverse brake circuit Move range shift lever to neutral position and gear shift lever to any reverse gear. OK: GO TO 19.
leak test
255 NOT OK: GO TO 17.
10A CAUTION: Tractor will move during testing if range shift lever is not in
26 neutral position.
Record lube pressure with clutch pedal full up and again with clutch pedal down.
Repeat check with gear shift lever in neutral position.
Pressure difference must not exceed 28 kPa (0.28 bar; 4.0 psi).
NOTE: If pressure is out of specification at neutral, the leakage is between clutch valve
and FWD-REV valve in control valve housing. Repair leak.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1356
17 Reverse brake circuit Install a second 3 m (10 ft) hose at reverse brake test port. OK: GO TO 19.
leak test
Connect system and element hoses to dual needle valve manifold JT071181 and NOT OK: GO TO 18.
Open valve for System 2 pressure and close valve for reverse brake pressure.
Move gear shift lever to neutral position (with clutch pedal up). Move range shift lever
to neutral position.
neutral position.
Record System 2 pressure at an engine speed of 2000 rpm.
Close valve for System 2 pressure and open valve for reverse brake pressure.
Move gear shift lever to any reverse speed (clutch pedal up) and record reverse brake
pressure.
—Pressure difference must not exceed 105 kPa (1.0 bar; 15.0 psi).
1
Included in JT07115
– – –1/1
18 Reverse brake circuit Possible causes for leakage in reverse brake circuit: NOT OK: Make note to
pressure check repair. GO TO 2.
(continued) • Inspect the control valve housing
• Refer to chart (step 12) for areas of possible leakage.
– – –1/1
19 Differential lock Engage parking lock. Adjust engine speed to get 70 kPa (0.7 bar; 10 psi) lube OK: GO TO 21.
circuit leak check pressure.
NOT OK: GO TO 20. 255
Record lube pressure with differential lock engaged. 10A
27
Repeat check with differential lock disengaged.
NOTE: There is no test port for differential lock pressure.
– – –1/1
20 Differential lock Causes of excessive leakage are: NOT OK: Make note to
circuit leak check repair. GO TO 21.
(continued) • Loose connections on oil lines inside differential housing
• Damaged piston seals in differential
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1357
21 PTO circuit leak Engage parking lock. Adjust engine speed to get 70 kPa (0.7 bar; 10 psi) lube OK: GO TO 24.
check pressure.
NOT OK: GO TO 23.
Record lube pressure with PTO engaged.
Repeat check with PTO disengaged.
– – –1/1
22 PTO circuit leak Connect a 3 m (10 ft) hose to System 2 diagnostic receptacle. Install another hose at OK: GO TO 24.
check (continued) test port of suspected leaky PTO element (PTO clutch or brake).
NOT OK: GO TO 23.
Connect hoses to dual needle valve manifold JT07118.1 Connect a pressure gauge to
manifold.
Open valve for System 2 pressure and close for PTO pressure.
At an engine speed of 2000 rpm, record System 2 pressure with leaky element “OFF”.
Close valve for System 2 pressure and open for PTO pressure. Pressure at leaky
element should be zero.
Engage leaky element and record pressure.
Pressure difference between System 2 and element must not exceed 270 kPa
(2.1 bar; 30 psi).
1
Included in JT07115
– – –1/1
23 PTO circuit leak Causes of excessive leakage are: NOT OK: Make note to
check (continued) repair. GO TO 25.
255 PTO CLUTCH
10A
28 • PTO valve housing gasket leaking
• Damaged sealing rings on PTO clutch drum
• Lube cut-off valve on PTO clutch drum missing
• Damaged piston packings
PTO BRAKE
• PTO valve housing gasket leaking

• PTO brake piston missing
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1358
24 Front Wheel Drive Engage parking lock. Adjust engine speed to get 70 kPa (0.7 bar; 10 psi) lube OK: GO TO 27.
leak check pressure.
NOT OK: GO TO 25.
Record lube pressure with MFWD engaged.
Repeat check with MFWD disengaged.
– – –1/1
25 Front Wheel Drive Connect a 3 m (10 ft) hose to System 2 diagnostic receptacle. Install another hose of OK: GO TO 27.
leak check the same length at the test port by MFWD clutch solenoid.
(continued) NOT OK: GO TO 26.
Connect both hoses to dual needle valve manifold JT07118.1 Connect a pressure
gauge to manifold.
Open valve for System 2 pressure and close valve for MFWD clutch pressure.
At an engine speed of 2000 rpm and MFWD engaged, record System 2 pressure (no
pressure at MFWD clutch).
Close valve for System 2 pressure and open valve for MFWD clutch pressure. The
pressure should be zero.
Disengage MFWD and record MFWD clutch pressure.
Difference between System 2 pressure and MFWD clutch pressure must not exceed
207 kPa (2.1 bar; 30 psi).
1
Included in JT07115
– – –1/1
26 Front Wheel Drive Causes of excessive leakage are: NOT OK: Make note to
leak check repair. GO TO 27.
(continued) • Damaged O-ring at solenoid 255
• Damaged sealing rings on MFWD clutch drum 10A
• Damaged piston packing 29
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1359
27 Transmission lube Engage parking lock and run engine at 1000 rpm. OK: GO TO 34.
pressure check
Record transmission lube pressure. Repeat check at 2000 rpm. NOT OK: GO TO 28.
TYPICAL PRESSURE:
1000 rpm:
• 38 °C (100 °F): 100 kPa (1.0 bar; 14 psi)

• 65 °C (150 °F): 50 kPa (0.5 bar; 7 psi)
2000 rpm:
• 38 °C (100 °F): 195 kPa (1.9 bar; 28 psi)

• 65 °C (150 °F): 160 kPa (1.6 bar; 23 psi)
– – –1/1
28 Connect flow meter OK: GO TO 29.

for oil cooler flow
check
255
RW21986 –UN–07FEB94
10A
30
Connect inlet hose of flow meter to tube next to engine block with JT056891 (-10
ORFS) fittings.
Connect outlet hose of flow meter to tube next to side frame with JT056891 fitting and
38H1280 (-10 ORFS) connector.
NOTE: You must use hoses with an inner diameter of 19 mm (3/4 in.) on the tester.
The fittings must have openings with an inner diameter of approx. 14 mm (9/16 in.).
NOTE: Bypassing the oil cooler is necessary to prevent cooler relief valve from
opening when additional restriction from flow meter and hoses is added to cooler
circuit.
Completely open flow meter control valve and start engine.
1
Included in JT07260
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1360
29 Cooler relief valve Engine speed 1000 rpm. Slowly close flow meter control valve. OK: GO TO 31.
check
There should be a gradual decrease in flow rather than a sudden change. NOT OK: GO TO 30.
Record pressure at cooler relief valve when flow has decreased to zero.
Valve opens at:
650—760 kPa (6.5—7.6 bar; 95—100 psi).
Typical relief pressure:
930—1000 kPa (9.3—10 bar; 135—145 psi).
– – –1/1
30 Cooler relief valve Causes for incorrect cooler relief valve setting are: NOT OK: Make note to
check (continued) inspect and repair. GO
PRESSURE TOO LOW: TO 31.
• Spring weak or broken

• Valve stuck open
• Excessive system leakage
• Pump flow too low
PRESSURE TOO HIGH:
• Oil temperature too low

• Valve stuck closed
• Incorrect spring
• Restricted oil passage
– – –1/1
31 Transmission Fully open flow meter control valve. OK: GO TO 33.

pump/cooling flow
check Record flow at 2300 rpm. NOT OK: GO TO 29. 255
10A
Typical Flow: 31
Flow at 2300 rpm Transmission oil pump delivery:
60 L/min (15.8 gpm)
Cooler flow rate:
54 L/min (14.3 gpm)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1361
32 Transmission Causes for low pump/cooler flow are: NOT OK: Rectify the
pump/cooling flow problems. GO TO 2.
check (continued) • Oil temperature too low
• Leakage within valve housing at front of transmission
• Leakage within front transmission cover
• Restricted suction tube or screen to pump
• Suction air leak to pump inlet
• Worn pump
– – –1/1
33 Transmission Causes for lube pressure being low with normal pump flow are: NOT OK: Rectify the
pump/cooling flow problems. GO TO 2.
check (continued) • Excessive leakage from internal lube circuit after the oil cooler
• Lube relief valve stuck open, spring broken, or missing
• Gasket leakage on either side of separator plate between front valve housing and
transmission front cover
• Air pump piston missing in transmission oil pump housing
• Seal missing or leaking at rear of transmission module for front of differential drive
shaft
• PTO lube cut-off valve stuck in PTO clutch drum
– – –1/1
34 Transmission system Engage parking lock and run engine at 2000 rpm. OK: GO TO 36.
pressure check
Record transmission system pressure. NOT OK: GO TO 35.
• 1150—1270 kPa (11.5—12.7 bar; 167—185 psi)1

or
• 1350—1480 kPa (13.5—14.8 bar; 195—215 psi)2
1
For 6110-6410, 6110L-6410L, 6310S and 6410S
255
10A 2
For 6510L and 6510S
32
– – –1/1
35 Transmission system Adjust system pressure regulating valve as follows: NOT OK: Make
pressure check adjustment. GO TO 34.
(continued) Remove long cap screw to add or remove shims.
One shim will increase or decrease pressure approximately 70 kPa (0.7 bar/5psi).
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1362
36 Clutch cooling Observe the lube pressure reading. When the pressure drops, cooling oil flows during OK: GO TO 38.
circuit test the engagement process to the disk clutch for forward travel or to the disk brake for
reverse travel. When the lube oil pressure rises again, no more cooling oil is flowing. NOT OK: GO TO 37.
The following conditions cause cooling oil to flow to the disk clutch or brake:
CAUTION: The range shift lever should be in neutral during this test to
ensure that the tractor does not move.
• Depressing the clutch pedal more than 38 mm (1.5 in.) and releasing it with any
forward or reverse speed engaged.
• Releasing the clutch pedal from its fully depressed position 38 mm (1.5 in.) from
floor.
• The clutch pedal is fully up. The gearshift lever is moved from neutral to any forward
or reverse speed.
• The clutch pedal is fully up. The gearshift lever is moved from any forward or
reverse speed through neutral and into any other speed or direction of travel.
Watch the lube oil pressure reading for a pressure drop and perform steps A, B, C and
D.
After releasing the clutch pedal the lube oil pressure should again rise to the previous
value.
NOTE: Oil flow in the cooling circuit can be verified by connecting a pressure gauge to
the “clutch lube” test port under the transmission front cover. When the clutch pedal is
38 mm (1.5 in.) from the top or bottom position there should be a pressure reading. If
the clutch pedal is completely up or down there should be no pressure.
– – –1/1
37 Clutch cooling Causes for improper clutch cooling operation are: NOT OK: Repair. GO TO
circuit test 36.
(continued) • O-ring missing from plastic plug in bore next to high pressure clutch cooling valve.
• High or Low pressure clutch cooling valve is stuck, spring broken or missing.
• Gaskets between front valve housing and pump housing are leaking.
• Gaskets between control valve housing and transmission housing are missing.
• See “Additional Troubleshooting Test Procedures” after step 39.
255
10A
33
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1363
38 Transmission air NOTE: If operator does not complain about hydraulic oil temperature indicator light OK: Repair restriction at
pump vacuum check coming on (oil overheating) and there is no system leakage, GO TO 39. suction fitting or pump
outlet. GO TO 38.
Remove floor mat and floor plate.
NOT OK: Repair the air
Remove left air duct under floor plate for access to rear connection to air pump tube at pump. GO TO 2.
top left of transmission.
Cut plastic tubing in center of floor plate opening.
Connect a 762 mm (mercury) vacuum gauge to the plastic tube connected to the
elbow fitting at the front of transmission.
At an engine speed of 1000 rpm, typical vacuum will be 381—686 mm (mercury).
After testing or repair install a 1/8 x 1 in. NPT nipple to reconnect plastic tubing.
– – –1/1
39 Summary of A. If all transmission checks are normal at this step and there were no problems OK: See steps A—C and
transmission testing corrected that are associated with the operator complaint, heat hydraulic oil to 65°C take appropriate action.
(150°F) and repeat test procedure. GO TO 2.
B. If all transmission checks are normal at this step and a problem was corrected that
relates to the operator complaint, the systems are normal. Release the tractor for field
operation.
C. If any of these checks were not normal, repair problems and GO TO 2.
– – –1/1
Additional Troubleshooting Test Procedures

255
10A
34
AG,LX25597,466N –19–01AUG00–1/1
PowrQuad Transmission, Troubleshooting (additional procedures)
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1364
1 Lube oil pressure Transmission oil pressure warning lamp glows and tractor does not move: OK: If normal system
relief valve open and pressure is present
stuck When the tractor has not been in operation for a period of time, the oil level at immediately after engine
transmission oil pump siphons down with air pulled in reverse through the lube circuit start-up, the debris was
to the suction side of the transmission oil pump. Perform the following flushing successfully flushed from
procedure: the bore and the lube
relief valve was closed.
1. Connect a 3 m (10 ft.) hose from JT05470 Hydraulic Test Kit between the GO TO 4. Then repeat
diagnostic receptacles at hydraulic pump outlet and test port at bottom of test.
transmission.
NOT OK: If system
2. Remove hoses from number one selective control valve and select continuous pressure does not reach
detent. its normal value, repair
the lube oil relief valve
3. With engine at slow idle, move number one SCV lever to get hydraulic pump at and repeat this test.
“Stall Mode” (20000 kPa; 200 bar; 2950 psi).
NOTE: The 3 m (10 ft.) hose is highly restricted and prevents high pressure from
entering the lube circuit.
4. Accelerate the engine from slow idle to full speed. Transmission system pressure
will come up to normal by flooding the lube circuit and cutting off the air path, if the
lube relief valve was being held open by a particle of debris.
5. Accelerate the engine to full speed 5—10 times to surge a large volume of cooler
outlet oil back to the lube relief valve. This volume of oil will cause the lube
pressure to exceed the 200 kPa (2 bar; 30 psi) lube relief setting. The lube relief
valve should open and close, flushing loose debris from the valve bore.
6. Shut off engine and leave the tractor standing for at least two hours after the oil has
been heated to at least 55°C (130°F). If transmission system pressure does not rise
to normal pressure within 3 seconds at the next start-up, the front housing must be
removed for inspection and repair of the lube relief valve, suction tube and
transmission oil pump.
– – –1/1
255
10A
35

111401
PN=1365
2 Testing transmission Remove the transmission front cover from below. Remove from below the 14 mm NOT OK: If necessary,
oil pump for air leaks (0.55 in.) plug from the System 1 test port on the left front of the valve housing. repair the inlet circuit and
transmission oil pump.
Use the JT03445 JIC adapter1 (14 mm x 9/16-18) and the JT03341 90°JIC elbow1
(9/16-18) to connect the DFRW2 hose with needle valve. See “DFRW2—Needle Valve
Test Assembly”, Section 299, Group 05.
Make sure the DFRW2 needle valve is closed.
With the engine at low idle, system pressure should be:
• 1150—1270 kPa (11.5—12.7 bar; 167—185 psi)2

or
• 1350—1480 kPa (13.5—14.8 bar; 195—215 psi)3
If there is pressure with engine at full throttle, see step 1 and proceed with the check
from here.
At an engine speed of 2000 rpm allow about 8 liters (2 US gal) to flow into a clean
container. This oil should not contain any air bubbles.
Allow the oil to stand in the container for several minutes. A small amount of air in the
oil is normal, but a layer of foamy oil (thicker than a sheet of paper) indicates an
excessive air leak on the inlet side of the pump.
Check for air leaks at the inlet tube and seals ahead of the pump.
NOTE: An obstructed intake screen can cause the oil flowing from the pump to appear
as though there were an air leak on the inlet side.
1
Included in JT05452
2
For 6110-6410, 6110L-6410L, 6310S and 6410S
3
For 6510L and 6510S
– – –1/1
255
10A
36

111401
PN=1366
3 Clutch and brake Drain 19—30 L (5—8 US gal.) of oil from differential housing if transmission module is
element air leak in tractor.
check using a blow
gun Remove control valve housing from bottom of transmission. Remove separator plate
and gaskets from transmission module.
Install spacers on two of the short screws removed from the control valve housing.
Install these two screws at the locations where screws with copper washers were
removed. Tighten screws to 2.3 N•m (20 lb-ft). See I & J on illustration.
CAUTION: Failure to install these two screws will cause air leakage
between the planetary housing and the oil manifold.
Use rubber plugs (size 00 & 000), blow gun and hoses from the DO5361ST Rubber
Stopper/Leak Detector Kit to leak check transmission elements.
Remove external 1/4 in. pipe plug (A) to leak check B1 element. Stack rubber plugs in
casting groove (B) and hole of control valve housing to seal off the normal oil supply
hole for B1 element.
The reverse brake element cannot be air leak checked unless a special plate is
fabricated (DFRW85) and attached to the bottom of the transmission module. See
“DFWR85—Reverse Brake Test Plate”, Section 299, Group 05.
All other element ports have good access for holding the blow gun with rubber tip in
the port.
Install the special plate DRFW85 on the transmission. For this, use the upper gasket of
the control valve.
NOTE: Be sure to drill a 5/16 in. hole in gasket, aligned with 1/2 in. hole in plate.
Install spacers (pipe nipples) on 7 short screws, and tighten.
Specification
Spacer (pipe nipple), screw—Torque .................................................................. 2.3 N•m
20 lb-ft
Pressurize the elements. Use compressed air at 550—700 kPa (5.5—7 bar; 80—
100 psi). Listen for element engagement, air leakage, and blow back when the blow
gun is retracted from the port immediately after the air valve is closed.
255
10A
37
– – –1/2

111401
PN=1367
OK: GO TO 4.
RW30057 –UN–14SEP93
A—NPT Pipe Plug (B1)

B—B1 Element (plug Hole)
C—B2 Element
D—B3 Element
E—C4 element
F—FWD-Clutch Element
G—REV-Brake Element
H—Blow Gun Port
I—Piston Housing
J—Piston Housing
B1-B2-B3 and Rev-Brake elements normally have leakage from a 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
bleed orifice.
C4 element has very little leakage, normally past metal sealing rings.
FWD-Clutch element has slightly more leakage than C4, normally past metal sealing
rings.
Engagement of each element can be easily heard, unless there is other interfering
255 noises in the area.
10A
38 There is very good blow back from C4 and FWD-Clutch. The brake elements with the
1.0 mm orifice have good blow back, but slightly less than the clutches.
–19– –2/2
4 Transmission control IMPORTANT: Changes have been made to the transmission control valve OK: GO TO 5.
valve housing gasket housing on later model tractors. Mixing gaskets and separator plates will create
unwanted internal leakage or blockage, and improper transmission operation.
DO NOT mix these parts. Refer to Parts Catalog for correct part combinations.
Upper and lower gaskets are the same on the latest control valve housing.
Observe oil flow paths with the gaskets installed on the housing and separator plate.
Identify mismatched parts. The later transmission control valve housing has a detent
and spring at upper side of the FWD-REV valve and speed shift valve.
– – –1/1

111401
PN=1368
5 Transmission Observe the Forward clutch or reverse brake plates and disks during disassembly of OK: GO TO 6.
slippage the transmission.
If these plates and disks appear to be discolored, check the FWD-REV cooling control
valve in the control valve housing. The valve must be correctly assembled and be able
to move freely in the bore.
– – –1/1
6 PTO clutch drag Flow of lube oil onto clutch plates and disks may cause PTO clutch drag. OK: GO TO 7.
Check the PTO lube oil cut-off valve. Ensure that the valve does not stick when open.
– – –1/1
7 Hydraulic oil Causes for hydraulic oil over heating: OK: End of test
over-heating procedure.
• Restricted suction line to transmission air pump.
• Transmission air pump check valve malfunction or worn.
• Oil baffle missing or loose, in front transmission cover under the input drive ring
gear.
– – –1/1
255
10A
39

111401
PN=1369
255
10A
40

111401
PN=1370
Group 10B
Troubleshooting Autoquad II Transmission

SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company AG,LX25597,195 –19–01FEB00–1/2
Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05791
–UN–08JUN99
JT05791
AG,LX25597,195 –19–01FEB00–2/2
For functions that are the same on all electronic “Abbreviations Used on the Display”, Section 245,
control units, see the following: Group 05.
“General Explanation of Testing on Electronic Control “Entering Program Mode”, Section 245, Group 05.
“Safety Measures” , Section 245, Group 05. Group 05.
255
10B
“Diagnosis with the Performance Monitor”, “Electronic Control Unit Identification Addresses”,
1

Group 05.
AG,LX25597,191 –19–01FEB00–1/1

111401
PN=1371
Notes on the Diagnostic Program
The switch functions of the AutoQuad II transmission voltages. See “Diagnostic Address List (PEC) -
are performed at least in part by means of the Transmission” in this Group.
electronic control unit (PEC).
The List of Calibration Addresses (PEC) allows you
The Service Code List (PEC) allows you to identify to key in information required by the electronic control
the service codes that are generated when faults unit (PEC) (calibration). See “List of Calibration
occur. See “Service Code List (PEC) - Transmission” Addresses (PEC) - Transmission” in this Group.
in this Group.
The Diagnostic Address List (PEC) allows you to

check the individual switches, sending units and
Address Designation Information Displayed

01 Service Codes The stored service codes are displayed.
02 Diagnostics address All addresses that are changed as result of some procedure (e.g.
changing a switch position) are displayed.
03 Diagnostics address Same as address 02, but the transmission speed sender is ignored.
04 to 35 Diagnostic addresses -Individual switches can be checked.
-Voltages can be read.
-Functions can be selected.
56 to 65 Calibration addresses Various parameters must be keyed in (calibrated).
80 to 99 Identification addresses Part number, software version, tractor model and tractor serial
AG,LX25597,210N –19–01AUG00–1/1
255
10B
2

111401
PN=1372
Service Code List (PEC) - Transmission
IMPORTANT: Do not use a test lamp when

working with electronic control
devices. Use multimeter (JT05791)
only.
NOTE: If service codes are displayed that do not

appear in this list, they apply to the E-ICV
(electronic independent SCV). See “Service
Code List (PEC) - Independent SCVs”, Section
270, Group 15.
If a voltage, switch or potentiometer signal is not in the

valid range, the PEC will generate and store a service
code.
Service codes are only stored when the associated

component is actuated. When the service code is
identified, check the applicable components and
replace as needed.
255
10B
3

111401
PN=1373
Service Code Explanation/cause of fault Solution

028 Tractor has no E-ICVa
This service code is displayed if a replacement control unit This service code cannot be cleared. You may however
is installed and the tractor does NOT have an E-ICV. ignore it, as it has no effect on how the transmission
operates.
070 With ignition on, voltage is present at terminals for upshift/downshift on the PECb.
Upshift switch (S48) or downshift switch (S49) are Check switches at diagnostic address 4.
defective, or rocker switch (S81) is pressed or defective.
Conductor fault in the relevant electrical wires. Check electrical wires 581 and 583.
071 With ignition on, voltage is present at the terminals for switching the Auto/ECO mode function on/off or at the terminals for
changing mode.
Switch (S85) (for switching the Auto/ECO mode function Check switches at diagnostic addresses 4 and 5.
on/off or changing mode) is pressed or defective.
Conductor fault in the relevant electrical wires. Check electrical wires 585 and/or 593.
106 Checksum error.
Defaults apply when this error occurs. Check all selectable addresses. Replace PEC if fault
continues to occur.
128 Supply voltage to stepper motor driver (A13) is less than 9.65 volt or more than 16 volt.
This service code only appears when the relevant -Check fuse F204.
transmission has been approved at diagnostic address 35. -Check electrical wires 260, 349, 012 and 310.
-Check relay K203.
-Check battery and alternator.
129 Short, ground or conductor fault in the electrical wires for stepper motor driver (A13).
This service code only appears when the relevant Check electrical wires 895, 896, 897 and 898 between
transmission has been approved at diagnostic address 35. stepper motor driver (A13) and stepper motor (M15). Check
stepper motor (M15): Resistance between terminals C-D and
B-E must be between 0.3 and 0.4 Ohm.
130 Stepper motor driver (A13), software reset.
This service code only appears when the relevant Switch the ignition off and on. Replace stepper motor driver
transmission has been approved at diagnostic address 35. (A13) if fault repeats.
131 Excessive deviation of stepper motor switch signal and stepper motor position in 2nd speed.
This service code only appears when the relevant Check stepper motor assembly (M15) and/or stepper motor
transmission has been approved at diagnostic address 35. (M15). See relevant Repair Manual, “Adjusting the Stepper
Motor”, Section 55, Group 10. Check stepper motor (M15):
Resistance between terminals C-D and B-E must be
between 0.3 and 0.4 Ohm.
132 Stepper motor position switch produces no signal on starting. Stepper motor driver (A13), loose wiring.
255 This service code only appears when the relevant Check electrical wires 895, 896, 897 and 898 between
10B transmission has been approved at diagnostic address 35. stepper motor driver (A13) and stepper motor (M15). Check
4 stepper motor (M15): Resistance between terminals C-D and
133 Stepper motor driver (A13), loose wiring.
a
Electronic control unit for E-ICV
b
Electronic control unit for AutoQuad II transmissions

111401
PN=1374
Service Code Explanation/cause of fault Solution

This service code only appears when the relevant Check electrical wires 895, 896, 897 and 898 between
transmission has been approved at diagnostic address 35. stepper motor driver (A13) and stepper motor (M15). Check
stepper motor (M15): Resistance between terminals C-D and
200 Stepper motor driver (A13) cannot be initialized or feedback is not possible.
-This service code only appears when the relevant -Check fuse F204.
transmission has been approved at diagnostic address 35. -Check the electrical address wires (310) and the associated
-Service code 230 is displayed also. contact points (A2), (A3), (B3) and (C3) at stepper motor
driver (A13).
-Check electrical wires (260) and (349) for ground and
continuity.
Check plug (X256) and contact points (D2), (D3), (E2) and
(E3).
210 After engine start, no information available on wheel speed at the BUS line.
This service code only appears when the relevant -Check plugs (X221), (X222), (X227), (X270) and (X26) and
transmission has been approved at diagnostic address 35. the associated electrical wires (934) and (935).
-001 must appear at BIF address 66.
-065 must appear at BIF address 67.
-Check electrical wire 502. (X1X) must appear at BCU
address 05 while the tractor is moving.
-Check electrical wire 501. (1XX) must appear at BIF
address 04 while the tractor is moving.
219 Fault in the BUS system.
No functions (signals) on the BUS lines. -Check fuse F204.
-Check relay K203.
-Check plug (X256) and the associated electrical wires (260)
and (349).
-Check plugs (X221), (X256), (X226), (X258) and (X222)
and the associated electrical wires (944) and (945).
220 Stepper motor driver (A13) fails during operation.
This service code only appears when the relevant -Check fuse F204.
transmission has been approved at diagnostic address 35. -Check relay K203.
-Check plug (X256) and the associated electrical wires
(260), (349) and (310).
-Check plugs (X221), (X222), (X26), (X227) and (X270) and
the associated electrical wires (944) and (945).
230 Fault in address lines of stepper motor driver (A13).
-Stepper motor driver is not recognized. -Check plug (X256) and the electrical address wires (310)
-Service code 200 is displayed also. and the associated contact points (A2), (A3), (B3) and (C3)
at stepper motor driver (A13) for continuity.
255
10B
5
AG,LX25597,192N –19–01AUG00–3/3

111401
PN=1375
Diagnostic Address List (PEC) - Transmission
NOTE: Read-only diagnostic addresses (01) to (32) NOTE: For the part numbers of the relevant electronic
are listed below. Calibratable diagnostic control units, see “List of Identification
addresses (33) to (65) are dealt with the Addresses”, (addresses 80 and 81), Section
subsequent list. See “List of Calibration 245, Group 05.
Addresses (PEC) - Transmission” in this
Group. NOTE: If diagnostic codes are displayed that do not
appear in this list, they apply to the E-ICV
NOTE: Figures appear at the positions marked “X”. (electronic independent SCV). See “Service
Code List (PEC) - Independent SCVs”, Section
NOTE: Individual leads can run over several wiring 270, Group 15.

01 Displays any service codes that are in the memory. 000 and/or service codes
02 When a switch or sensor changes state a beep is heard and the associated address is PEC and/or 004 and 005
displayed (the address will be three-digit, e.g. 004).
03 Like address 02, but signals from transmission speed sensor (B54) are ignored. PEC and/or 004 and 005
04 Check switches (S48) and (S49), and rocker switches (S81) and (S85):
Switch (S48) or rocker switch (S81) (switching up through the gears)
signal not recognized 0XX
signal recognized 1XX
Switch (S49) or rocker switch (S81) (switching down through the gears)
signal not recognized X0X
signal recognized X1X
Switch (S85), power mode function on/off
signal not recognized XX0
signal recognized XX1
05 Check rocker switch (S85) and switch (S51):
vacant 0XX
Switch (S85), ECO-mode function on/off
signal not recognized X0X
signal recognized X1X
Switch (S51), clutch
255
10B Clutch pedal depressed X0X
6 Clutch pedal not depressed X1X
13 Transmission speed sender (B54) XXX
Sender speed divided by 10. In 4th gear (clutch engaged), range box speed should be
equal to engine speed.
32 PEC - power supply voltage 12 to 16 volt
AG,LX25597,193N –19–01AUG00–1/1

111401
PN=1376
List of Calibratable Addresses (PEC) - Transmission
NOTE: Calibratable addresses (33) to (73) are dealt Addresses”, (addresses 80 and 81), Section
with below. Read-only diagnostic addresses 245, Group 05.
(01) to (32) are dealt with in the previous list.
See “Diagnostic Address List (PEC) - NOTE: If diagnostic codes are displayed that do not
Transmission” in this Group. appear in this list, they apply to the E-ICV
(electronic independent SCV). See “Service
NOTE: Figures appear at the positions marked “X”. Code List (PEC) - Independent SCVs”, Section
270, Group 15.
For the part numbers of the relevant electronic
control units, see “List of Identification

33 Bulb test:
On 0XX
Off 1XX
Selecting basic informator:
Standard Instrument (BIF) X0X
Dual Gauge Plus II (BIF) X1X
After 8 engine starts, the service codes are deleted automatically:
Off XX0
On XX1
34 Pulses per revolution at transmission speed sensor:
Established parameter, value must be set or entered 033
35 Gear shift functions:
AutoQuad II transmission is activated 111
56 + 57 56 = Automatic shifting locked out in reverse:
57 = Automatic speed matching:
Lock activated 001 + 110
Lock not activated 000 + 110
58 + 59 Value for automatic shifting, power mode:
Established parameter 000 + 430
60 + 61 Value for automatic shifting, power mode:
255
62 + 63 Value for automatic shifting, ECO-mode: 10B
Established parameter 000 + 375 7
64 + 65 Value for automatic shifting, ECO-mode:

AG,LX25597,194N –19–01AUG00–1/1

111401
PN=1377
255
10B
8

111401
PN=1378
Group 15
Reverser Control Linkage Adjustment
CAUTION: Do not perform any adjustments with

the engine running because the tractor could
move unexpectedly. Switch off the ignition and
–UN–12MAY97
remove the key.
NOTE: The length of the reverser control linkage (A) can

also be determined and adjusted when removed.
LX1016459
Measure the length (a) of the reverser control linkage.
Adjust the reverser control linkage to the specified length

using the yokes as required.
Specification
W/out creeper or interm. box—
Length (a) .................................................. 299.5 mm ± 1 mm (11.80 in. ±
0.04 in.)
With creeper or interm. box—
Length (a) .................................................. 468.5 mm ± 1 mm (18.45 in. ±
0.04 in.)
When installed, the reverser control linkage should be in

the lower hole on lever (B) and in the right hole of lever
(C).
Check shifting and parking lock action.
AG,OUOE003,9577 –19–14JUN99–1/1
255
15
1
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-15-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1379
Adjusting Shifter and Parking Lock —

Reverser Control on Shift Console
CAUTION: Do not adjust the shifter with the

engine running because the tractor could move
unexpectedly. Switch off the ignition and
remove the key.
Checking and Adjusting Range Shifter
1. Move the range shift lever (C) back and forth in the
neutral zone.
The lever should not curve during movement and
–UN–12MAY97
should not contact the gear lever slots.
2. If necessary, disconnect cables (D) and (E). Adjust by

turning the applicable yokes. Reconnect the cables and
LX1016460
recheck the adjustment.
Checking and Adjusting Speed Shifter
1. Actuate the speed shift lever (B).
All speeds (1-2-3-4) should be selectable.
2. Disconnect cable (F) if necessary. Adjust by turning the

yoke. Reconnect the cable and recheck the
adjustment.
Checking and Adjusting Reverser Control
1. Make sure the reverser control linkage is correctly

adjusted.
2. Actuate the F-N-R lever (A).
–UN–12MAY97
255 The F-N-R lever should be centered in the shift slots. It
15
should properly move into and out of the forward and
2
reverse positions.
LX1016461
3. Disconnect cable (H) if necessary. Turn the yoke so

that the lever is centered in the shift slot when in the
neutral position. Reconnect the cable and recheck the
adjustment. A—F-N-R Lever
B—Speed Shift Lever
C—Range Shift Lever
4. Adjust the parking lock. D—Range C and D Cable
E—Range A and B Cable
F—1st to 2nd Speed Cable
G—Forward/Reverse Cable
H—Parking Lock Cable
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-15-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1380
1. Make sure that the reverse drive lever is adjusted

correctly.
2. Disengage the parking lock cable (E).
–UN–12MAY97
3. With the F-N-R lever (A) in neutral, adjust stop screw
(D) so that the parking lock shift segment (C) is aligned
exactly with shift segment (B; see arrow).
LX1016462
4. Press down firmly on the parking lock cable yoke, so
that the parking lock cannot operate.
5. Pull gently on the yoke of the cable so that the free

play before actuation (approx. 2 mm; 0.08 in.) is
removed from the cable. Hold the cable in this
zero-clearance position and turn the yoke until the
bores in the yoke are aligned exactly with the bores in
the shift segment. Engage the cable again. Secure the
yoke with a locknut and make sure the yoke is not
twisted on the parking lock quadrant.
A—F-N-R Lever
B—Forward/reverse shift segment
C—Parking lock shift segment
D—Stop screw
E—Parking lock cable
–UN–12MAY97
LX1016463
255
15
3
AG,OUOE003,9578 –19–14JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-15-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1381

Lock — Reverser Control on Steering
Column
CAUTION: Do not adjust shift linkage with

engine running, as tractor may move. Shut off
engine and remove ignition key.
Checking and Adjusting the Gear Shift Linkage
1. Actuate the gear shift lever (A).
–UN–02JUL97
It must be possible to shift all gears (1-2-3-4).
2. If necessary, disengage bowden cable (C). Adjust it by
LX1016981
turning the yoke. Engage the bowden cable and repeat
the adjustment.
Checking and Adjusting the Range Shift Linkage
1. Move range shift lever (B) to and fro within the neutral
zone (see arrow).
Shift lever must neither catch nor touch the shift gate.
2. If necessary, disengage bowden cables (E), (F) and

(G). Adjust them by turning the yokes.

adjustment.
–UN–02JUL97
4. Adjust the parking lock.

LX1016982
C—Bowden cable, 1st to 4th gear
D—Bowden cable, parking lock
255 E—Bowden cable, ranges A and B
15 F—Bowden cable, ranges C and D
4 G—Bowden cable1, ranges E and F
1
20- and 24-speed transmissions only
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-15-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1382
1. Make sure that the range shift lever is adjusted

correctly. i.e. shift quadrants (B)1 (C) and (D) must be
aligned precisely (see illustration opposite, above).
–UN–02JUL97
2. Disengage parking lock cable (I).
3. With range shift lever (A) in neutral, slacken off screws

(G) and adjust the stop (F) so that the parking lock
LX1016983
shift quadrant (E) is aligned precisely with the other
shift quadrants (see arrow). Retighten screws (G).
4. Press down firmly on the parking lock cable yoke so

that the parking lock cannot operate.
5. Pull gently on the cable yoke so that the free play

before actuation (approx. 2 mm; 0.08 in.) is removed
from the cable. Hold the cable in this zero-clearance
position and turn the yoke until the bores in the yoke
are aligned exactly with the bores in the shift quadrant.
Reconnect the cable. Secure the yoke with a locknut
–UN–12MAY97
and make sure the yoke is not twisted on the parking
lock quadrant.
6. Recheck the adjustment.
LX1016467
7. Adjust the F-N-R lever (mechanical reverser control
only).
A—Range shift lever
B—Shift quadrant1, ranges E and F
C—Shift quadrant, ranges C and D
D—Shift quadrant, ranges A and B
E—Shift quadrant, parking lock
F—Stop, parking lock shift quadrant
G—Screws
H—Parking lock switch (electrical reverser control
only)
I—Parking lock cable
255
15
5
–UN–02JUL97
LX1016984
1
20-and 24-speed transmissions only
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-15-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1383
Adjusting the Reverse Drive Lever
1. Make sure that the forward/reverse linkage is adjusted

correctly.
2. Move the range shift lever to neutral.
–UN–12MAY97
3. Pull the reverse drive lever upwards.
4. In neutral position, reverse drive lever must be
LX1016468
centered precisely in the shift gate (see arrow). It must
be possible to move the lever to forward and reverse
positions.
5. If necessary, disengage bowden cable (A). Turn the

yoke so that neutral is achieved when the reverse drive
lever is centered precisely in the gate. Engage the
bowden cable and repeat the adjustment.
–UN–26NOV96
LX1016003
AG,OUOE003,9579 –19–14JUN99–3/3
255
15
6
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-15-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1384
Shifter and Parking Lock Adjustment
CAUTION: Do not adjust the shifter with the

engine running because the tractor could move
unexpectedly. Switch off the ignition and
remove the key.
Checking and Adjusting Range Shifter
1. Move the shift lever (A) back and forth in the neutral
zone (see the arrow).
–UN–24FEB98
The lever should not curve during movement and
should not contact the gear lever slots.
LX1020122
2. If necessary, disconnect cables (B)1, (C) and (D).
Adjust by turning the applicable clevises.
3. Reconnect the cables and recheck the adjustment.
4. Next adjust the parking lock.
A—Shift Lever
B—Range E and F Cable
C—Range C and D Cable
D—Range A and B Cable
E—Parking Lock Cable
–UN–24FEB98
255
15
7
LX1020123
1
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-15-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1385
Adjusting Parking Lock
1. Make sure the speed shift lever is correctly adjusted,

i.e. the shift quadrants (C), (D) and (E)1 should align
precisely (see the figure above).
2. Remove the cable (J) from the parking lock.
3. Loosen bolts (F) and (I). Adjust stop (G) so that

parking lock quadrant (B) aligns with the other shift
quadrants (see the arrow). Retighten the bolts.
–UN–24FEB98
4. Push the parking lock cable clevis firmly downward
until the parking lock function is completely released.
LX1020124
5. Pull lightly on the cable clevis until approx 2 mm (0.08
in.) of free play is obtained. Hold the cable in this
position (free of play) and turn the clevis until the clevis
holes and shift quadrants are precisely aligned.
Reconnect the cable.
6. Recheck the adjustment.

A—Shift Lever
B—Shift Quadrant, Parking Lock
C—Shift Quadrant, Range A and B
D—Shift Quadrant, Range C and D
E—Shift Quadrant1, Range E and F
F—Bolt
G—Parking Lock Quadrant Stop
H—Parking Lock Switch
–UN–24FEB98
I—Bolt
J—Parking Lock Cable
LX1020125
255
15
8 –UN–24FEB98
LX1020126
1
AG,OUOE003,9580 –19–14JUN99–2/2
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-15-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1386
2. Depress clutch pedal completely, then push it up

completely. Measure distance “a”.


–UN–17MAR95
5. Raise the clutch pedal to the upper stop and turn the
operating cable yoke until bores of yoke and pedal are
LX009890
aligned. Reconnect and secure the yoke.
–UN–16MAR95
255
15
9
LX009874
AG,OUOE003,9581 –19–14JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-15-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1387
Transmission System Pressure Check
1. Engage parking lock and run engine at 2000 rpm.
Record transmission system pressure.
GO TO 2.
2. Record the pressure and compare it to the

specification.
• 1150—1270 kPa (11.5—12.7 bar; 167—185 psi)1

or
• 1350—1480 kPa (13.5—14.8 bar; 195—215 psi)2
OK: No adjustment necessary.
Not OK: GO TO 3.
3. Adjust system pressure regulating valve as follows:
Remove long cap screw to add or remove shims.
One shim will increase or decrease pressure

approximately 70 kPa (0.7 bar; 5 psi).
GO TO 1.
1
For 6110-6410, 6110L-6410L, 6310S and 6410S
255
15 2
6510L and 6510S
10
AG,LX25597,478N –19–01AUG00–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 255-15-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1388
Group 20A
PowrQuad Transmission Operation
PowrQuad Transmission Layout
The PowrQuad transmission consists of two primary pressure. The PowrQuad module selects 1st through
components, the PowrQuad module and the range 4th gears and directions of travel (forward-reverse).
box. An optional intermediate and creeper transmission
can be installed. The range box/intermediate gearbox is used to select
4 or 5 ranges (A—D or for the 30 km/h; 18.5 mph
The PowrQuad module contains a single compound version) or 6 ranges (A—F; for the 40 km/h; 25 mph
speed planetary, a disk clutch and a disk brake. The version).
disk clutch and brake are supplied with oil under
PowrQuad is a trademark of Deere & Company. AG,OUOE003,9582 –19–14JUN99–1/1
PowrQuad Housings
The cooling valve housing (E) is attached to the front

valve housing (D). Next comes the transmission front
cover (C). It is attached to the planetary brake housing (B)
which is followed by the reverse brake housing (A). Under
–UN–13MAY92
the planetary housing (B) is the control valve housing (F).
A—Reverse brake housing

B—Planetary brake housing
RW20462
C—Front cover
D—Front valve housing
E—Cooling valve housing
F—Control valve housing
255
20A
1
PowrQuad is a trademark of Deere & Company. Continued on next page AG,OUOE003,9583 –19–14JUN99–1/2

111401
PN=1389
The PowrQuad module is a hydraulically controlled

module containing planetary assemblies which produce
four fully modulated speeds in either forward or reverse
directions. The module contains a pump which provides
clutch and brake pressure, cooling and lubrication, as well
as providing flow for cooling of the hydraulic oil and
–UN–13MAY92
pressure oil for operation of differential lock, PTO and
MFWD. It uses an external reservoir (differential case)
and a small air pump to assist in the evacuation of excess
oil from the transmission module.
RW20458
The PowrQuad transmission has two major sections -
the SPEED section (C) and the DIRECTION section (B).
A—Output
B—Direction
C—Speed
D—Input
255
20A
2

111401
PN=1390
255
20A
3

111401
PN=1391
Planetary Operation
RWC70835 –UN–18AUG97
20
18 19
17
15 16
13 14
10 11 12
9
8
7
21
22
2 23
6
3
5
4
3
2
1
RWC70835
AG,OUOE003,9584 –19–14JUN99–1/3
111401
PN=1392
1—Reverse Carrier 8—Clutch Drum 14—Second Speed Brake 18—Second Speed Sun Gear
2—Planet Pinions (Outer) 9—Forward Clutch Piston Piston 19—Planet Pinion Gear
3—Planet Pinions (Inner) 10—Forward Clutch Drive 15—Second Speed Sun 20—Planetary Input Gear
4—PTO Shaft Shaft Adapter 21—Planet Pinion Carrier
5—Transmission Output Shaft 11—Clutch Drum 16—First Speed Brake Piston 22—Input Drive Shaft
6—Ring Gear 12—Third Speed Brake Piston 17—First Speed Sun Gear 23—Third Speed Sun Gear
7—Reverse Brake Piston 13—Fourth Clutch Piston
Direction (Reverse) First speed sun gear (17) is controlled by first brake
element piston (16). When brake is engaged, planet
When clutch pedal is released with speed selector pinion gear (19) is forced to “walk around” stationary
lever positioned at any reverse speed, reverse brake sun gear. The “walking action” allows carrier (21) to
piston (7) is hydraulically engaged. Ring gear (6) is rotate slower than Input gear (20), providing an
locked to case. Power from forward clutch drive shaft underdrive ratio of 0.566:1.
(10) is transmitted through clutch drum (8) to reverse
carrier (1). As carrier rotates, outer planet gears (2) Second speed sun gear (18) thru the second speed
are forced to “walk around” stationary ring gear (6) and sun adapter (clutch hub) (15) is controlled by brake
forces inner planet gears (3) to rotate in the opposite element piston (14). Larger diameter of middle planet
direction. Rotation of planet gears (3) drive pinion gear and smaller diameter of sun gear (18)
transmission output shaft (5) in reverse direction. causes planetary carrier (21) to rotate faster than first
speed producing an underdrive ratio of 0.682:1.
Direction (Forward)
Third speed sun gear (23), which is splined to fourth
Direction planetary assembly contains a forward clutch speed clutch drum (11), is controlled by third brake
which is engaged by piston (9) and a reverse brake element piston (12) using one brake disk. The resulting
which is engaged by piston (7). Direction Planetary speed reduction ratio is 0.816:1.
Input is always through forward clutch drive shaft (10)
which is splined to clutch drum (8). Clutch drum is Fourth gear (direct drive) is achieved when sun pinions
bolted to reverse carrier (1). Clutch hub serves as sun (18) and (23) are locked together by engaging clutch
pinion for compound planetary and is also splined to element four piston (13). Adapter (clutch hub) is
transmission output shaft (5). When clutch pedal is splined to second speed sun gear (18) and clutch
released with speed selector lever positioned at any drum is splined to third speed sun gear (23). Locking
forward speed, forward clutch is hydraulically engaged. two sun gears together prevents planet pinion (19)
Power flows from clutch drum to clutch hub, which is rotation on carrier shaft. Planet pinion and the carrier
splined to transmission output shaft (5). are forced to rotate with planetary input gear (20).
Speed
Clutch and brake elements are numbered from front to

255
rear. Elements one, two, and three pistons (16) (14)
20A
and (12) are brakes. Element four (piston 13) is a 5
clutch. Speeds one, two, three and four are
represented by the element numbers.
Planetary input gear (20) is driven at engine speed by

transmission input drive shaft (22). Planetary carrier
(21) is splined to forward clutch drive shaft (10) which
is always the power output from Input planetary.

111401
PN=1393
Element Engagement Chart1
SPEED B1 B2 B3 C4 FWD Clutch REV Brake

1F • •
2F • •
3F • •
4F • •
1R • •
2R • •
3R • •
4R • •
1
Chart shows the element engaged for each speed
AG,OUOE003,9584 –19–14JUN99–3/3
Air Pump
The air pump piston (B) is controlled by a return spring

(A) on the top and a follower (D) on the bottom which is
A
driven by an eccentric on the input drive shaft (E). When
the follower (D) is going down (intake stroke), the air
travels through a slot and hole on the bottom of the
piston. The lower ball (C) is free floating and allows the air B
to pass by and fill the area inside the piston (B).
255
20A
6 A—Spring C
B—Piston
C—Lower Ball
D—Follower
E—Input Drive Shaft
D
–UN–20AUG98
RWC20459
E RWC20459

111401
PN=1394
Once the follower (C) starts upward (exhaust stroke),

gravity and compressed air seat the lower ball (B) over
the piston hole. At the same time the upper ball (A) A
unseats against light spring pressure and the piston
pressurizes the inside cavity of the PowrQuad
transmission. The air pump maintains 1—2 psi to help
move oil out of the module.
NOTE: The two balls always travel in opposite directions

on both the intake and exhaust stroke.
A—Upper Ball
B
B—Lower Ball
C—Follower C
D—Input Drive Shaft
–UN–20AUG98
RWC20460
D
RWC20460
AG,OUOE003,9585 –19–14JUN99–2/2
Transmission Oil Pump
The transmission oil pump is located on the backside of

the transmission front cover. Oil is drawn in on the right
side, passes between the two internal gears and the
crescent, and exits toward the filter. The pump will supply
oil at a rate of 60 L/min (15.8 gpm).
A—Pressure-free oil
255
B—Charge oil
20A
7
–UN–20AUG98
RWC20461
A B RWC20461
AG,OUOE003,9586 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1395
Clutch Oil Manifold

B3 B1
B2
C4 engagement oil (light orange) travels through a cored

passage and fills the front annulus between the sealing
rings. A check ball in the passage prevents C4
self-engagement by unseating and sucking air. The

engagement oil will hold the ball on its seat when
engaged.
B2
B3 B1
–UN–18JUN97
RWC30033
RWC30033
AG,OUOE003,9587 –19–14JUN99–1/4
Forward Clutch engagement oil (dark orange) travels

through a cored passage and fill the rear annulus between B3
B2
B1
the sealing rings. This passage also has a check ball that
unseats to prevent self-engagement. The engagement oil
will hold the ball on its seat when engaged. C4
255
20A
8
B2
B3 B1
–UN–18JUN97
RWC30034
RWC30034

111401
PN=1396
Clutch Cooling oil also passes through its own cored

passage to the rear and sprays cooling oil on the forward B3 B1
B2
clutch.
C4
B2
B3 B1
–UN–18JUN97
RWC30035
RWC30035
AG,OUOE003,9587 –19–14JUN99–3/4
During an over-speed condition, the intermediate sump

from C4 becomes necessary when there is excess oil in B3 B1
B2
the system. The pump insures less oil will be available if

the regular speed relief does not dispense the excessive
volume oil quickly. C4
255
20A
9
B2
B3 B1
–UN–18JUN97
RWC30036
RWC30036
AG,OUOE003,9587 –19–14JUN99–4/4

111401
PN=1397
Reverse Brake Housing A

Reverse brake engagement oil (dark orange) to the
reverse brake piston travels through a cooled passage. B3
B2
B1
The 1 mm hole allows air to escape to the cooling

passage so it sumps.
C4
–UN–14MAR97
B2
B3 B1
RWC30037
RWC30037
255
20A
10

111401
PN=1398
B3 B1
B2
C4
–UN–18JUN97
B2
B3 B1
RWC30038
RWC30038
Reverse brake lube oil travels through a cored the bushings, bearings, etc. It travels through a hole in
passage and passes through the reverse brake piston the transmission output shaft to lube the rear bushing
housing to lube the lower shaft in the Range Box. and then goes into the Range Box to lube the top
Lube oil also goes throughout the module to lube all shaft.
255
20A
11

111401
PN=1399
Brake cooling oil travels around the annulus and travels

forward through the holes in the ring gear. There,
centrifugal force causes it to move outward through the B3
B2
B1
disks and plates for cooling.
Reservoir C4
The differential case serves as the reservoir for the

transmission module. The intent is to run the module as
dry as possible to reduce power losses.
The inlet screen is also located in the differential case.

Transmission oil is drawn from one end of the screen and
hydraulic oil from the other.
–UN–18JUN97
B2
B3 B1
RWC30039
RWC30039
AG,OUOE003,9588 –19–14JUN99–3/3
Forward/Reverse Controls
Mechanical Reverser Control
The forward/reverse valve on the PowrQuad module is
–UN–20MAY97
actuated mechanically.
If the reverse drive lever is moved, the bowden cable

transmits motion to the forward/reverse linkage and to the
255
LX1016623
lever on the forward/reverse valve, which then moves in
20A
the appropriate direction.
12
With mechanical reverser control, reverse drive lever (A)

is located on the console. A—Reverse drive lever

111401
PN=1400
Electrical Reverser Control
The forward/reverse valve on the PowrQuad module is

actuated hydraulically by solenoid valves. It is controlled
electrically.
–UN–20MAY97
When the reverse drive lever is moved to forward or
reverse, the electronic reverser control unit (RCU) carries
out checks to determine if all the preconditions for travel
have been met, e.g. “Is oil pressure sufficient?”, “Is the
LX1016625
park switch off?”, etc. If all the preconditions are met,
relays activate the solenoid valve for the relevant direction
of travel. This allows oil under pressure to flow to one end
of the forward/reverse valve, which then moves in the A—Reverse drive lever
appropriate direction.
With electrical reverser control, the reverse drive lever (A)

is located on the left of the steering column underneath
the steering wheel.
255
20A
13

111401
PN=1401
Hydraulic Schematic - Mechanical Reverser Control
LX1022623 –UN–20APR99
20 31
11 28 30
21 22 23 24 27 29
25 26
10
32
12
49 50
48
9
46
33
8
47
37
7 39
13
11
11
52
40
51
38
14
53
36
45
6
42
1 56
5
43
34 41
35 57
4
15
2
55
54 16
3 19 18 44
17
LX1022623
AG,OUOE003,9590 –19–14JUN99–1/2
111401
PN=1402
1—Tractor Oil Cooler 17—Inlet Screen 31—Reverse Brake Housing 45—Filter Restriction Switch
2—Primary Filter 18—Front Cover 32—Module Lubrication 46—FWD-REV Modulation
3—Filter Housing 19—Valve Housing 33—Engagement Override Pressure
4—Lube Relief Valve 20—Planet Gear Brake Valve 47—System 1 Port
5—Cooler Relief Valve Housing 34—Sump Valve 48—Vehicle Clutch Port
6—Filter Bypass Valve 21—B1 35—Accumulator Piston 49—Forward Clutch Port
7—F-N-R Modulator Valve 22—B2 36—Speed Modulator Valve 50—Reverse Brake
8—Accumulator Piston 23—B3 37—Speed Control Valve Disengagement Port
9—Sump Valve 24—C4 38—B1-B2 Shift Valve 51—System 2 Port
10—Clutch Pedal 25—Anti-Cavitation Check 39—FWD-REV Control Valve 52—B1 Port
11—“High” Sump Valve 40—Lube Control Valve 53—B2 Port
12—Clutch Pedal Valve 26—Overspeed Relief Valve 41—“Mid” Sump 54—Transmission Lube Port
13—Clutch Cooling Valve 27—Forward Clutch 42—B3-C4 Shift Valve 55—Clutch Cooling Port
14—Pressure Regulating Valve 28—Forward Clutch Lube 43—B2-B3 Shift Valve 56—B3 Port
15—Pump 29—Reverse Brake 44—Control Valve Housing 57—C4 Port
16—Temperature Sender 30—Reverse Brake Lube
AG,OUOE003,9590 –19–14JUN99–2/2
255
20A
15

111401
PN=1403
Hydraulic Schematic - Electrical Reverser Control
LX1022624 –UN–20APR99
20 24 27 28 29 31 30
11
21 22 23
12 25
26
10 32
53
33 54
52
50
11
9
8
51
46
34
7 39
13
11
35 11 11
56
47
48
55
41
57 11
38
49
14
6
45
40 42 58
1 5 37
36 11
59 11
4
15
2 43
60
61 16
3 19 18 44
17
LX1022624
AG,OUOE003,9591 –19–14JUN99–1/2
111401
PN=1404
1—Tractor Oil Cooler 18—Front Cover 32—Module Lubrication 48—Cooling Control Valve
2—Primary Filter 19—Valve Housing 33—Control Valve 49—Filter Restriction Switch
3—Filter Housing 20—Planet Gear Brake 34—Pressure Switch 50—FWD-REV Modulation
4—Lube Relief Valve Housing 35—Enable Valve Pressure
5—Cooler Relief Valve 21—B1 36—Sump Valve 51—System 1 Port
6—Filter Bypass Valve 22—B2 37—Accumulator Piston 52—Vehicle Clutch Port
7—F-N-R Modulator Valve 23—B3 38—Speed Modulator Valve 53—Forward Clutch Port
8—Accumulator Piston 24—C4 39—Speed Control Valve 54—Reverse Brake
9—Sump Valve 25—Anti-Cavitation Check 40—B2-B3 Shift Valve Disengagement Port
10—Clutch Pedal Valve 41—B1-B2 Shift Valve 55—System 2 Port
11—“High” Sump 26—Overspeed Relief Valve 42—B3-C4 Shift Valve 56—B1 Port
12—Clutch Pedal Valve 27—Forward Clutch 43—“Mid” Sump 57—B2 Port
13—Clutch Cooling Valve 28—Forward Clutch Lube 44—Control Valve Housing 58—B3 Port
14—Pressure Regulating Valve 29—Reverse Brake 45—FWD-REV Control Valve 59—C4 Port
15—Pump 30—Reverse Brake Lube 46—Forward Valve 60—Clutch Cooling Port
16—Temperature Sender 31—Reverse Brake Housing 47—Reverse Valve 61—Transmission Lube Port
17—Inlet Screen
AG,OUOE003,9591 –19–14JUN99–2/2
Filter Relief Valve

Stage 1 Closed Normal operation
Stage 2 300 kPa (3 bar; 44 psi) Filter partially plugged and valve shifts to open a passage to
activate the warning light (filter restriction switch)
Stage 3 500 kPa (5 bar; 73 psi) Further plugging causes the valve to open a passage to the
pressure regulating valve (maintenance circuit)
Stage 4 600 kPa (6 bar; 87 psi) Valve shifts further to open a path to lube
AG,OUOE003,9592 –19–14JUN99–1/1
255
20A
17

111401
PN=1405
Pressure Regulating Valve
Stage 1 Closed Passage opened to allow oil from the filter relief valve to both System 1
less than 600 kPa and 2 via the emergency circuit
6 bar; 87 psi)a
or less than
700 kPa (7 bar; 102 psi)
Stage 2 600 kPa (6 bar; 87 psi)a Same as Stage 1, but oil flows only to System 2
or
700 kPa (7 bar; 102 psi)b
Stage 3 900 kPa (9 bar; 130 psi)a All passages closed

or
1000 kPa (10 bar; 145 psi)b
Stage 4 1000 kPa (10 bar; 145 psi)a System 1 oil flows to System 2
or
1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi)b
Stage 5 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi)a Oil flows from System 1 to System 2
or
1400 kPa (14 bar; 205 psi)b
a
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
b
6510L and 6510S:
System 1 Oil (Priority) psi)1 or 1400 kPa (14 bar; 205 psi)2 and a passage
opens in the pressure regulating valve. System 2 oil
System 1 oil comes directly from the filter and acts on activates the shift and forward-reverse modulation
the upper end of the pressure regulating valve. This oil valves.
controls the forward-reverse valve, speed control
valve, modulators, accumulators, sump valves, EOV
and the traction clutch valve.
System 2 Oil Pressure
System 2 oil pressure becomes available when

System 1 pressure reaches 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175
255
20A
18
1
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
2
6510L and 6510S:
AG,OUOE003,9593 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1406
255
20A
19

111401
PN=1407
Forward-Reverse Modulation
255
20A
20 –UN–24APR97
RW70748

111401
PN=1408
A—Forward clutch D—System 1 G—System 2 I—Accumulator

B—Reverse brake E—Forward/reverse valve H—FWD-REV modulator valve J—Sump valve (FWD-REV)
C—Clutch pedal valve F—EOV
NOTE: Forward-reverse modulation is shown here The FWD-REV valve (E) was moved out of detent
with mechanical reverser control. to open the sump port and sump valve, causing the
FWD-REV sump valve (J) to move to the right.
Engine off, transmission at “Park”
The accumulator (I) can discharge its pressure to
1. Pressure at all locations is at zero. the small end of the sump valve, causing it to move
to the right.
2. The FWD-REV valve (E) is at neutral with the
speed control lever at Neutral or PARK. System 1 pressure port (D) was opened to allow
pressure to the spring end of accumulator (I),
Close the pressure port from the EOV (F) and forcing the accumulator to quickly discharge.
clutch pedal valve (C).
System 1 pressure (D) flows to sump through the
Open the sump port to sump the forward clutch (A), orifice in the sump valve.
reverse brake (B) and spring end of the EOV (F).
Another port at the sump valve was opened to
3. Spring force at spring end of EOV (F) has the valve sump the small end of the sump valve, the head
positioned to close the pressure port from clutch end of the accumulator (I) and the spring end of the
pedal valve (C), sump the passage to the FWD-REV modulator valve (H).
FWD-REV valve (E) and open a port so spring end
of the EOV (F) can be sumped at the FWD-REV 6. The spring of FWD-REV modulator valve (F) has
valve. positioned the valve:
4. Clutch pedal is released. The spring has positioned For full flow of System 2 oil (G) to the clutch pedal
clutch pedal valve (C) for full flow to the EOV (F). valve (C).
5. The FWD-REV sump valve (J) is normally positiond To close the sump port.
to the left side (on the tractor) before the engine
was last shut off and the shift lever moved to
neutral.
255
20A
21

111401
PN=1409
255
20A
22 –UN–24APR97
RW70749

111401
PN=1410

NOTE: Forward-reverse modulation is shown here 5. With the clutch pedal released, the clutch pedal
with mechanical reverser control. valve (C) is positioned for full flow of System 2
pressure oil (G) to the EOV (F) and FWD-REV
Engine running, transmission in “Park” valve (E).
1. Before starting the engine, review “Engine Off & 6. The FWD-REV modulator valve (A) reacts to
Transmission In Neutral or At Park” for valve pressure changes at the head end and spring end
positions. of the valve.
2. The FWD-REV valve (E) is at neutral with the Immediately after starting the engine, System 2
speed control lever at Neutral or PARK. pressure oil (G) from the clutch pedal valve (C) also
flows through a pilot passage to the head end of
Close the pressure port from the EOV (F) and the FWD-REV modulator valve (H) for the clutch
clutch pedal valve (C). modulation function.
Open the sump port to sump the forward clutch (A), The FWD-REV modulator valve (H) moves against
reverse brake (B) and pilot passage spring end of spring force to stage 1. This position stops the flow
the EOV (F). of System 2 pressure oil (G) and sumps the
pressure in the passage to the clutch pedal valve
The land on FWD-REV valve (E) opens the port to (C). Pressure at the head end of the FWD-REV
the sump valve. modulator valve (H) will also decrease.
3. The FWD-REV sump valve (J) is positioned to the Some pressure oil passed through the 1.0 mm
right (at bottom of tractor). orifice to the spring end of the FWD-REV modulator
valve (H).
System 1 pressure (D) is directed the spring enf of
accumulator (I). The force at the spring end of the FWD-REV
modulator valve (H) moves the valve to stage 2,
System 1 pressure (D) enters the orifice in the allowing some oil to flow via the modulator valve to
sump valve spool, but exits the large end of the the clutch valve. This flow will increase the pressure
sump valve and is sumped at the FWD-REV valve a small amount through clutch pedal valve (C) and
(E). through the passage to the head end of the
modulator valve.
The spring end of FWD-REV modulator valve (H),
fixed orifice, head end of accumulator (I), variable The FWD-REV modulator valve (H) WILL NOT 255
orifice and small end of the sump valve are all move to stage 3 (full flow position) when the sump 20A
23
sumped via the sump valve. valve is is open to sump. It continues sumping
System 2 oil (G) until the shift lever is moved out of
4. System 1 (D) moved the EOV (F) against the spring neutral to close the sump passage at FWD-REV
force to allow oil pressure from clutch pedal valve valve (E).
(C) to the FWD-REV valve (E).
The spring end of EOV (F) is opened to sump.

111401
PN=1411
255
20A
24 –UN–24APR97
RW70750

111401
PN=1412

NOTE: Forward-reverse modulation is shown here lever and FWD-REV valve (E) move in the opposite
with mechanical reverser control. direction to sump the forward clutch (A) and engage
the reverse brake (B).
Shift lever out of neutral to forward or reverse
3. Moving the shift control lever from neutral to any
1. For positions of accumulator and valves, see forward speed mechanically moves the FWD-REV
“Engine running and transmission in Park”. valve (E). Immediately, three things happen at the
same time:
NOTE: Bear in mind a modulated shift normally takes
3.0—3.5 seconds with the engine at 2100 rpm Reverse brake (B) is sumped.
and the hydraulic oil temperature above 50°C
(120°F). The pressure passage from the EOV (F) and clutch
pedal valve (C) to forward clutch (A) is opened.
2. The following explanation is for the forward shift.
Reverse shift is similar except that the shift control The sump port of the sump valve is closed.
255
20A
25

111401
PN=1413
255
20A
26 –UN–24APR97
RW70750

111401
PN=1414

NOTE: Forward-reverse modulation is shown here There will be a momentary pressure drop in the
with mechanical reverser control. pilot passage to the head end of FWD-REV
modulator valve (H).
4. Before the shift lever is moved to forward, the large
end of the sump valve was being sumped via the The modulator valve will move from stage 2 to
FWD-REV valve (E). stage 3 (full flow position), because the force at the
spring end of the valve including the pressure
Closing the sump port stops the flow of oil to the through the fixed orifice is greater than the force at
sump valve. the head end of the valve.
Pressure increases at the large end of the Systems 2 pressure (G) will flow through the
FWD-REV sump valve (J) by the oil flowing through FWD-REV modulating valve (H), the clutch pedal
the orifice in the sump valve. valve (C), the EOV (F) and the FWD_REV valve (E)
to begin engagement of the forward clutch (A).
This force at the large end of the sump valve
causes the sump valve to move left (up to the Systems 2 pressure (G) through the pilot passage
tractor). again acts upon the head end of FWD-REV
modulator valve (H).
5. With the FWD-REV sump valve (J) in the left
position: 7. The FWD-REV modulator valve (A) reacts to
pressure changes at the head end and spring end
Systems 1 pressure (D) through the orifice in the of the valve.
sump valve continues to act upon the large end of
the sump valve, closing the sump port. The modulator valve moves between stages 2 and
3 as the pressure through the fixed orifice and the
The sump port for the head end of the accumulator pilot passage equalizes at each end of the valve.
(I) and the spring end of the FWD-REV modulator
valve (H) is shut off. 8. Valve modulation continues until accumulator (I)
becomes fully charged.
Systems 2 pressure (G) through the fixed orifice
begins to act upon the small end of the sump valve, Then spring force will hold the modulating valve at
the accumulator (I) and the spring end or stage 3 for full Systems 2 pressure (G) to the
FWD-REV modulator valve (H). forward clutch (A) through clutch pedal valve (C),
EOV (F) and FWD-REV valve (E).
The pressure at the spring end of accumulator (I) is 255
sumped to allow charging of the accumulator. Pressure oil from System 1 also helps to charge 20A
27
accumulator (I) through the adjustable orifice.
6. The FWD-REV modulator valve (H) was moving
between stages 1 and 2 with the shift control lever NOTE: When the size of the orifice opening is
at neutral (stage 1). When the control lever was increased, the accumulator charges faster and
moved from neutral to forward, the FWD-REV valve shifting time is decreased.
(E) directs pressure oil to the forward clutch (A),
and the following takes place:

111401
PN=1415
255
20A
28 –UN–24APR97
RW70750

111401
PN=1416

NOTE: Forward-reverse modulation is shown here and moved to neutral, reverse brake (B) would
with mechanical reverser control. disengage.
Shift lever moved from forward or reverse to The pressure port from System 1 (D) to the spring
neutral end of EOV (F) is closed.
1. With the engine running and the shift control lever The sump port of the sump valve is opened.
at the forward position, the valves are positioned as
follows: 3. As forward clutch (A) is disengaged and element
pressure drops to zero, the overspeed relief valve
Clutch pedal valve (C) is at full pressure to the EOV opens, allowing the clutch element to draw air from
(F). inside the housing.
EOV (F) is positioned for full pressure to FWD-REV As the piston rotates, it tends to draw in oil, causing
valve (E). the self-actuation of the piston. Oil in the passage
prevents its actuation. Unlike the forward clutch (A),
FWD-REV valve (E) directs System 2 oil (G) to reverse brake (B) does not rotate.
engage the forward clutch (A). If the shift control
lever had been set to reverse, FWD-REV valve (E) For this reason, the reverse brake does not need
would direct System 2 oil (G) to engage the reverse an overspeed relief valve.
brake (B).
4. With the sump port of the speed control valve open,
The sump port of the sump valve is shut off at the following takes place:
FWD-REV valve (E).
The large end of the FWD-REV sump valve (J) is
The FWD-REV sump valve (J) is left (up in tractor), sumped.
sumping the spring end of accumulator (I).
The pressure at head end of the sump valve starts
The FWD-REV modulator valve (H) is at stage 3, moving the valve to the right (down in the tractor).
directing full System 2 pressure (G) to the forward
clutch (A). Accumulator (I) discharges its pressure to the head
end of the sump valve to move the valve all the
2. When the shift control lever is moved from forward way to the right.
to neutral, the FWD-REV valve (E) is mechanically
moved, causing four things to happen immediately 5. The following occurs with the sump valve to the 255
as the FWD-REV valve goes to neutral: right (down in the tractor): 20A
29
The pressure port from the EOV (F) and clutch The sump port is opened to sump the small end of
pedal valve (C) is closed. FWD-REV sump valve (J), the head end of
accumulator (I), the spring end of FWD-REV
The sump port for both the forward clutch (A) and modulator valve (H) together with the fixed and
reverse brake (B) is opened and the forward clutch variable orifices.
disengages. If the shift lever had been in reverse

111401
PN=1417
System 1 pressure (D) is directed to the spring end 7. See “Moving Shift Lever From Neutral To Forward
of accumulator (I) to force a quick discharge of the or Reverse” for the action of the FWD-REV sump
accumulator. valve (J), accumulator (I) and FWD-REV modulator
valve (H) for completing a modulated shift to
6. The pressure in the pilot passage will be higher forward or reverse.
than the force at the spring end of FWD-REV
modulator valve (H), causing the valve to move to
stage 1 and sump the passage to the clutch pedal
valve (C).
AG,OUOE003,9594 –19–14JUN99–11/11
EOV Circuit (With Mechanical Reverser Control)
The operation of the engagement override valve is high position. This allows the elements and
controlled by operation of the fwd-rev control valve. lines to stay nearly full of oil so the element fill
time is considerably shorter. The two trigger
Operation if start-up occurs while in neutral. System 1 valves dump to regular sump. The C4 element
oil overcomes spring pressure at 400 kPa (4 bar; 58 dumps to sump through the clutch oil manifold
psi) to provide passage for clutch pressure to fwd-rev at a point whose height is between regular and
valve. high sump. Thus, the term intermediate sump.
This allows some oil to stay in the line but
Operation if start-up occurs in gear. System 1 oil flows protects from self-engagement of C4. All other
through the fwd-rev Valve and EOV to assist EOV valving is considered to be high sump.
spring. This spring shuts off clutch pressure at the
EOV and opens a pathway from the element through Reverse—Tractor Started in Neutral
the fwd-rev valve and EOV to high sump.
System 1 oil acts on the head end of the EOV forcing
Stage 1 Closed Path from fwd-rev valve to spring the valve upward against spring pressure. System 1 oil
end of EOV also flows (only when in forward or reverse) to and
Path from fwd-rev valve to high
sump
through the fwd-rev valve to the spring end of the
EOV. Since the EOV has been moved upward, oil
Stage 2 400 kPa Path from clutch pressure to cannot act on the spring end of the valve. A path is
4 bar fwd-rev valve now open for clutch oil to flow through the EOV to the
58 psi Path from spring side of EOV to fwd-rev valve and on to the reverse brake piston.
high sump
255
20A
NOTE: The term high sump is used because the
30
dumping to sump is physically located in a
AG,OUOE003,9595 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1418
Theory of Operation - Electrical Reverser Control
The electrical reverser control consists of the forward determine if all the preconditions for travel have been
drive lever, electronic reverser control unit (RCU) and met, e.g. “Is oil pressure sufficient?”, “Is the park
various switches, relays and solenoid valves. switch off?” etc. If all the preconditions are met, relays
activate the solenoid valve for the relevant direction of
The reverser control unit (RCU) is responsible for travel. This allows oil under pressure to flow to one
controlling the direction of travel. Various signals and end of the forward/reverse valve, which then moves in
commands are sent to the control unit. These signals the appropriate direction, and the tractor starts to
and commands are checked and processed by the move.
control unit.
When the reverse drive lever is moved to select a

direction of travel, the control unit carries out checks to
AG,OUOE003,9596 –19–14JUN99–1/1
Reverse Drive Lever
The reverse drive lever is located on the left of the direction of travel, electrical current flows through the
steering column underneath the steering wheel. The detent solenoid. The magnetic field produced by the
most important components are the switch assembly current holds the reverse drive lever in this position.
and the detent solenoid.
When the range shift lever is moved to the park
Three positions may be selected. As the positions of position, the park switch sends a signal to the reverser
the switches determine how the reverse drive lever control unit (RCU). As a result of this, the flow of
operates, the switch assembly will be dealt with in the current through the detent solenoid is stopped and the
description below as if it were three separate switches: magnetic field disappears. The reverse drive lever
automatically returns to its neutral position.
1. Forward switch
2. Reverse switch In the diagnostic mode (with diagnostic fuse in position
3. Not neutral switch 115 on the load center) — and ONLY in this mode —
the reverse drive lever may move to one of the
When the reverse drive lever is in the neutral position, positions for a direction of travel if the range shift lever 255
the not neutral switch, forward switch and reverse is in the park position. The tractor cannot move while 20A
31
switch are all open. When the reverse drive lever is the diagnostic fuse is in position 115 on the load
moved from “neutral” to “forward”, the forward switch center, so it cannot cause any damage. During
and not neutral switch both close. When reverse travel diagnosis, the reverse drive lever is held in the position
is selected, the reverse switch and not neutral switch for a direction of travel for 5 seconds by the detent
both close. solenoid, and thereafter it returns automatically to its
neutral position.
Once the engine is started (with range shift lever not in
park position), if the reverse drive lever is moved to a
AG,OUOE003,9597 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1419
Park Switch
When the range shift lever (C) is not in the park position,
park switch (A) is depressed. The reverser control unit
ensures that the tractor can be driven. When the range
shift lever is moved to the park position, the park switch is
–UN–20MAY97
released. It is not possible to drive the tractor.
If the reverse drive lever is already in the position for a

direction of travel when the range shift lever is moved to
LX1016626
the park position, the reverser control unit ensures that
the reverse drive lever returns automatically to its neutral
position.
A—Park switch
B—Parking lock quadrant
C—Range shift lever
D—Gear shift lever
AG,OUOE003,9598 –19–14JUN99–1/1
255
20A
32

111401
PN=1420
Valve Housing on PowrQuad Module
–UN–20MAY97
LX1016627
Arrow indicates front of tractor
A—Neutral start switch C—Enable pressure switch E—Enable solenoid F—Forward/reverse valve
B—Reverse solenoid D—Forward solenoid (actuated hydraulically)
The valve housing underneath the PowrQuad module neutral switch to the control unit. The control unit
contains the following components: checks these signals (and others, e.g. from the park
switch), and activates the relevant relays, which in turn
• Enable solenoid activate the solenoids.
• Enable pressure switch
• Forward switch The enable pressure switch (C) checks whether oil
• Reverse switch under pressure is flowing through the enable solenoid
255
• Forward/reverse valve (actuated hydraulically) (E). The corresponding signal is transmitted to the 20A
• Neutral start switch control unit. 33
The solenoids are operated by the reverser control unit When the reverse drive lever is moved from neutral to
(RCU) and the relays. the“forward” or “reverse” position, oil flows through the
enable solenoid (E) to the solenoids for forward and
Signals from the reverse drive lever are transmitted by reverse travel.
the forward switch or reverse switch and the not

111401
PN=1421
If the reverse drive lever is in the “forward” position, oil forward/reverse valve (F). This valve changes its
flows through the open forward solenoid (D) to the position and oil under pressure flows through it to the
forward/reverse valve (F). This valve changes its disk brake in the PowrQuad module. The tractor
position and oil under pressure flows through it to the moves in reverse.
disk clutch in the PowrQuad module. The tractor
moves forward. When the reverse drive lever is moved If the control unit detects an error, it closes the enable
to its neutral position, the forward solenoid closes and solenoid. This stops the flow of oil passing through the
interrupts the flow of oil. forward/reverse valve to the disk clutch or disk brake.
If the reverse drive lever is in the “reverse” position, oil

flows through the open reverse solenoid (B) to the
255
20A
34

111401
PN=1422
Relays
–UN–15DEC97
255
20A
35
LX1019540
A07—RCU K212—Not Neutral Relay V202—Latch Relay Diode Y08—Forward Solenoid

K210—Reverse Relay K213—Latch Relay Y07—Enable Solenoid Y09—Reverse Solenoid
K211—Forward Relay M01—Starter
S46—Forward Switch, Reverse
Switch, Not Neutral
Switch and Detent
Solenoid1
1
Detent solenoid not shown

111401
PN=1423
NOTE: See Section 240 for wiring and connection

diagrams.
The relays are located in fuse box 2.
The following relays are installed:
• Latch relay (K213)

• Not Neutral Relay (K212)
• Forward Relay (K211)
• Reverse Relay (K211)
The latch relay (K213) assures the tractor cannot be

started if the F-N-R lever is not in neutral. This is needed
for safety reasons
If the engine is stared in neutral, the not-neutral switch

and not-neutral relay (K212) are opened and current flows
–UN–15DEC97
to the latch relay coils. This closes the latch relay and
sends a transmission enable signal to the RCU. The latch
relay remains closed during operation. The latch relay
opens only when the engine is stopped.
LX1019541
If the F-N-R lever is not in neutral when the engine starts,
the latch relay cannot close because the not-neutral
switch and relay are closed. No current can flow to the
latch relay coils. The latch relay is closed only by shifting
to neutral.
After the latch relay closes the RCU determines whether

the requirements for travel have been met (e.g. the
parking lock is disengaged, etc.). If all requirements are
met current flows to the transmission enable solenoid
(Y07). The forward relay (K211) and reverse relay (K210)
close. If the a direction of travel is now selected with the
F-N-R lever, current can flow to the forward solenoid coil
(K211) or to the reverse solenoid coil (K210).
255
20A
36
AG,OUOE003,9600 –19–14JUN99–2/2

111401
PN=1424
RCU1
–UN–05MAR98
255
LX1020161
20A
37
A07—RCU F115—Diagnostic Fuse K213—Latch Relay Y07—Enable Solenoid

B36—Neutral Start Switch K210—Reverse Relay S46—Forward Switch, Reverse Y08—Forward Solenoid
B51—Park Switch K211—Forward Relay Switch, Not-Neutral Y09—Reverse Solenoid
B52—Enable Pressure Switch K212—Not-Neutral Relay Switch and Detent
Solenoid
1
RCU = Reverser Control Unit

111401
PN=1425
The reverser control unit (RCU) is responsible for Once all the preconditions for travel have been met,
controlling the direction of travel. It checks, processes e.g. “Is oil pressure sufficient?”, “Is the parking lock
and controls various functions, calls up the necessary off?” etc., the forward (or reverse) relay can activate
data, uses its logic to link the data in a meaningful the forward (or reverse) solenoid.
way, compares actual values with desired values, and
controls its input and output. Apart from the links mentioned already, the control unit
is also connected to CCD communication lines. These
Signals from the reverser lever are transmitted to the lines link the various electronic control units to each
control unit by the forward switch, reverse switch and other.
the not neutral switch. The latch relay and not neutral
relay are activated accordingly and also transmit the If an error occurs while the tractor is in operation, the
relevant signals to the control unit. Signals from the Service Code is stored (see Group 10).
valve housing are transmitted to the control unit by the
enable pressure switch and neutral start switch. If the diagnostic fuse is installed in position 115 on the
Signals are also sent to the control unit by the park load center, this information is also transmitted to the
switch and reverse lockout switch (if equipped). All control unit. The tractor cannot be driven. In diagnostic
these signals are processed by the control unit and the mode, Service Codes may be called up and deleted.
relevant commands are sent to the enable solenoid The various diagnostic, calibration and identification
and the detent solenoid. addresses can also be called up (see Group 10).
AG,OUOE003,9601 –19–14JUN99–2/2
255
20A
38

111401
PN=1426
Detail of Hydraulic Circuit Diagram (Simplified)
–UN–23MAY97
255
20A
39
LX1016631
A—Disk clutch E—Forward solenoid I—Sump valve L—Oil, system 1

B—Disk brake F—Pilot valve J—Accumulator piston M—Oil, system 2
C—Forward/reverse valve G—Enable solenoid K—Forward/reverse modulator
D—Reverse solenoid H—Enable pressure switch valve
With electrical reverser control, the forward/reverse

valve (C) is controlled by oil.

111401
PN=1427
Oil from system 2 flows to the enable solenoid (G). position. Oil flows through the solenoid and exerts
The reverser control unit (RCU) checks that all the pressure on the forward/reverse valve, which is forced
preconditions for travel have been met. If they have, to change its position. Oil from the forward/reverse
the enable solenoid opens. The enable pressure modulator valve (K) flows right through the pilot valve
switch (H) checks the pressure and sends a signal to and through the forward/reverse valve (C) to the disk
the control unit. Oil from the enable solenoid flows to clutch (A). The tractor moves forward. In the case of
pilot valve (F), causing the latter to change its position. reverse travel, the forward/reverse valve is controlled
Oil from the forward/reverse modulator valve (K) can by the reverse solenoid (D), and oil flows to the disk
flow through the pilot valve and reach the brake (B).
forward/reverse valve (C).
If the reverse drive lever is moved to the position for

forward travel, the forward solenoid (E) changes its
AG,OUOE003,9602 –19–14JUN99–2/2
255
20A
40

111401
PN=1428
Speed Control Circuit
Speed Control Valve Operation
The manually operated Speed Control Valve controls the

flow of System 1 oil to act as pilot oil to operate the three
Shift Valves. The valve has four positions, one for each
speed with NO NEUTRAL position.
The speed modulator is triggered by lands on the speed

control valve. Flow paths through the valves are:
Speed 1 ............................ System 1 pressure to B1-B2 and B2-B3

Shift Valves. B3-C4 Shift Valve to high
sump.
Speed 2 ............................ System 1 pressure to B2-B3 Shift Valve.

B1-B2 and B3-C4 valves to high sump.
Speed 3 ............................ All Shift Valves to high sump
Speed 4 ............................ System 1 pressure to B3-C4 Shift Valve.

B1-B2 and B2-B3 Shift Valves to high
sump.
Shift Valve Operation
Three identical two-position valves are used to control the

four speed elements. One valve (B2-B3) is used to direct
modulated System 2 oil to either, one or the other of the
two remaining valves which then direct oil to the chosen
element. All valves are held in one position by a spring.
One of the speeds, third, is obtained without
pressurization of valves. The other position is obtained by
application of pilot pressure from the Speed Control Valve
on the head end of the Shift Valve Spool.
NOTE: B3-C4 Shift Valve is spring biased the opposite

direction of the other two shift valves.
255
SHIFT VALVE PRESSURIZATION CHART
20A
41
Element Engaged
Shift Valve B1 B2 B3 C4
B1—B2 X
B2—B3 X X
B3—C4 X

111401
PN=1429
C D
E B
G H
A
–UN–21APR97
J M
RWC70745
RW70745 L
A—System 1 oil E—Sump valve H—Forward/rev. valve K—B3-B4 shift valve

B—System 2 oil F—Shift modulator and I—Fwd/rev. cooling control L—Speed control valve
C—B2 piston accumulator piston valve M—B2-B3 shift valve
D—B1 piston G—EOV J—Control valve housing N—B1-B2 shift valve
Speed 1 to the right. System 2 oil also flows through the shift
modulator to shift valve B2-B3, which directs the flow to
In speed 1, System 1 oil flows to the head end of shift shift valve B1-B2, which in turn directs the oil to piston
valves B1-B2 and B2- B3. This causes the valve to move B1. This condition also occurs in neutral.
255
20A
42

111401
PN=1430
C D
A
E B
G H
A
–UN–21APR97
J M
RWC70746
RW70746 L
A—System 1 oil E—Sump valve H—Forward/rev. valve K—B3-B4 shift valve

B—System 2 oil F—Shift modulator and I—Fwd/rev. cooling control L—Speed control valve
C—B2 piston accumulator piston valve M—B2-B3 shift valve
D—B1 piston G—EOV J—Control valve housing N—B1-B2 shift valve
NOTE: Illustration shows mechanical reverser control. now causes the sump valve to move left, closing the
sump passage. System 2 oil flows through the 0.8 mm
Shifting To Speed 2 orifice, to begin charging the accumulator, which starts
to force the modulating valve to the right, opening the
When the land on the speed control valve moves past passage for System 2 oil to the speed control valve.
the sump valve port, the spring end of the sump valve The speed control valve now directs oil only to the
is sumped. This allows the sump valve to move to the head end of shift valve B2-B3, and oil now reaches 255
right, sumping the head end of the accumulator piston. Element 2 through B2-B3 to B1-B2. 20A
System 2 pressure acting on the head end of the 43
modulating valve causes it to move left, thus assisting NOTE: Illustration shows mechanical reverser control.
in the sumping of the accumulator piston. The spring
AG,OUOE003,9603 –19–14JUN99–3/3

111401
PN=1431
Speed Modulation
255
20A
44 –UN–24APR97
RW70751
A—System 2 E—B1 element H—C4 element K—B2-B3 shift valve

B—Speed modulating valve F—B2 element I—B1-B2 shift valve L—Accumulator
C—System 1 G—B3 element J—B3-C4 shift valve M—Sump valve
D—Speed control valve
Engine off, parking lock engaged Pressure at all locations is at zero.

111401
PN=1432
In a speed position, a land on the speed control valve System 1 (C) port is open to direct pressure oil to the
blocks the sump passage at the spring end of the head end of B1—B2 (I) and B2—B3 (K) shift valves,
sump valve. moving them against spring force.
Pressure passage open to head end of B1—B2 (I) and The sump port is open to the head end of B3—C4 shift
B2—B3 (K) shift valves. valve (J), allowing this valve to be positioned by spring
force.
Sump passage open for head end of B3—C4 (J) shift
valve. The speed modulator valve (B) is positioned for full
flow from System 2 (A) passage to B2—B3 shift valve
NOTE: The head end of a valve is the end opposite (K) and the accumulator (L). The accumulator charge
the spring. increases the spring force on the speed modulator
valve (B).
The three shift valves are extended by spring force:
The sump valve (M) has System 1 (C) pressure at
B1—B2 shift valve (I) has the sump port open for B1 spring end and System 2 (A) pressure from the
element (E). It also has the pressure port open for B2 accumulator (L) at head end of this valve. With nearly
element (F) to sump through the B2—B3 shift valve equal hydraulic pressure at each end of the sump
(K). valve (M), spring force positioned the valve to close
the sump port.
B2—B3 shift valve (K) has the sump port open for B2
element (F). It also has the pressure port for system 2 The speed control valve (D) is in a blocking position,
passage through speed modulator valve to B3—C4 closing the sump port and blocking System 1 (C)
shift valve (J) and to B3 element (G). pressure from the sump valve (M).
B3—C4 shift valve (J) has the pressure port open for B1 element (E) is engaged by System 2 (A) pressure
System 2 (A) passage through speed modulator valve through the speed modulator valve (B), B2—B3 (K)
(B) and B2—B3 shift valve (K) to B3 element (G). It and B1—B2 (I) shift valves.
also has the sump port open for C4 element (H).
B2 element (F) is sumped through B1—B2 shift valve
Spring force between speed modulator valve (B) and (I).
accumulator (L) has:
B3 element (G) is sumped through B3—C4 (J) and
Positioned the speed modulator valve (B) for full flow B2—B3 (K) shift valves.
from System 2 passage to B2—B3 and B3—C4 shift
valve (K) and (J) to B3 element (G). C4 element (H) is sumped through B3—C4 shift valve
(J).
Forced the accumulator (L) to the discharge position.
255
Shifting from One Speed to Another using the 20A
Spring force on the speed sump valve (M) opened Speed Control Lever 45
System 1 port to speed control valve and closed the
sump port for the accumulator (L).
The speed valve is at first detent position with the

speed control valve at neutral.

111401
PN=1433
B1 element E) is engaged when the speed cotnrol Sump B3 element (G) through B2—B3 shift valve
lever is at PARK or neutral and engine is running. Two (K).
things happen at the same time when the operator
moves the speed control lever from one position to Sump C4 element (H) at the shift valve.
another. (See “Speed Modulation”.)
5. Moving the speed control lever mechanically moves
The speed control lever mechanically moves the speed the speed valve:
valve to change position of shift valves.
The speed control valve (D) sump port is opened to
A landing on the speed control valve (D) sumps the sump the spring end of the sump valve (M).
spring end of the sump valve (M).
NOTE: The orifice at sump valve (M) is a restriction to
When shifting from one speed to another, the shift System 1 (C) oil flow, creating a pressure drop
takes 0.6 to 0.75 seconds with the oil temperature at spring end of the sump valve (M).
above 50° C (122° F) and the engine at 2100 rpm.
6. The accumulator pressure moves the sump valve
Speed Lever moved from Neutral to Second (M) against spring force, which:
Forward or Second Reverse
Closes pressure port to stop System 1 (C) oil flow
1. Moving the speed control lever mechanically moves from going to sump through the speed control
the speed valve: valve.
Speed valve sump port is opened to sump the head Opens the sump valve (M) sump port to completely
end of B1—B2 (I) and B3—C4 (J) shift valves. discharge the accumulator (L) and relieve some
spring force on the speed modulator valve (B).
The speed valve pressure port is open to direct
pressure oil to the head end of B2—B3 shift valve 7. With the speed valve detented at second speed,
(K). the speed control valve (D) lands close the sump
valve (M) sump port.
2. The B2—B3 shift valve (K) has pressure at head
end from speed valve to: 8. With the accumulator (L) completely discharged, the
sump valve spring moves the sump valve (M):
Open the sump port to sump B3 element (G)
through B3—C4 shift valve (J). To close the sump port, preparing the accumulator
(L) to be recharged.
Open the pressure port to direct System 2 (A)
pressure oil to B1—B2 shift valve (I). To open the pressure port and direct System 1 (C)
pressure to the speed control valve (D) and spring
255
20A 3. Spring force moves B1—B2 shift valve (I) to: end of the sump valve (M).
46
Open the sump port to disengage B1 element (E). 9. With the accumulator (L) discharged and System 2
(A) pressure at the head end of speed modulator
Open the pressure port to direct System 2 (A) valve (B), the valve moves toward the sump
pressure from speed modulator valve (B) through position (Stage 3), slightly compressing the spring.
B2—B3 (K) and B1—B2 (I) shift valves to engage
B2 element (F). 10. When the modulator valve is at Stage 2, System 2
(A) pressure through the valve can flow in three
4. Spring force positions B3—C4 shift valve (J) to: directions at a reduced pressure:

111401
PN=1434
Pressure acts on head end of the modulator valve from the spring force at the other end of the valve.
to move the valve to sump position. A balancing effect occurs as some oil is sumped
when the valve moves past Stage 2, until the
Pressure starts charging the accumulator (L) and accumulator (L) is completely charged. Then the
further compressing the spring which moves the modulator valve goes to the full flow position and
valve toward the full flow position. the element becomes fully engaged.
Some oil goes to the element to provide a During modulation of the engaging element, the
modulated engagement of the on-coming element. speed modulator valve (B) normally is not moved
to the third stage sump port.
11. The speed modulator valve (B) will respond when
the pressure at head end of the valve is different
AG,OUOE003,9604 –19–14JUN99–4/4
Clutch Cooling Components
The cooling circuit consists of the following The cooling valve reacts to the clutch pedal valve
components: outlet pressure in order to control the flow of cooling oil
to the control valve (F-N-R).
• Oil Cooler
• Cooling Valve The cooling pilot valve (F-N-R) routes cooling oil to the
• Cooling Pilot Valve (F-N-R) engaged element.
• Clutch Pedal Valve
When the clutch or F-N-R lever is moved, oil flows

from the oil cooler to the Disk clutch or brake. It is
used for cooling there.
255
20A
47
AG,OUOE003,9605 –19–14JUN99–1/1
Oil Cooler
When System 1 oil pressure exceeds 1200 kPa (12 can pass through the oil cooler to the cooling and lube
bar; 175 psi)1 or 1400 kPa (14 bar; 205 psi)2, a circuits.
passage opens in the pressure regulating valve and oil
1
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
2
6510L and 6510S:
AG,OUOE003,9606 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1435
Cooling Valve
In normal driving, clutch pressure is 1200 kPa (12 bar; pedal valve. When the pressure falls below 900 kPa (9
175 psi)1 or 1400 kPa (14 bar; 205 psi)2. This pressure bar; 130 psi)1 or 1100 kPa (11 bar; 160 psi)2, the
acts against the cooling valve spring and keeps the cooling valve spring pushes the valve to the open
cooling valve shut. position. Oil from the oil cooler can flow through the
cooling valve to the cooling pilot valve (F-N-R).
When the clutch or F-N-R lever is moved (= the slip
phase) the clutch pressure falls behind the clutch
1
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
2
6510L and 6510S
AG,OUOE003,9607 –19–14JUN99–1/1
FWD-REV Cooling Control Valve
The two position FWD-REV Cooling Control Valve shuttles

to direct the flow of cooling oil to the FWD-Clutch or the
REV-Brake element. The Cooling Control Valve is
controlled by pilot pressure from the engaged
(FWD-Clutch or REV-Brake) element acting on the
appropriate end of the Cooling Control Valve spool.
AG,OUOE003,9608 –19–14JUN99–1/1
Cooler and Lube Circuits

255
The flow of oil from the pressure regulating valve flow directly to the lube circuit. If the pressure down
20A
48 through the oil cooler goes to the transmission and stream of the oil cooler increases above 250 kPa (2.5
range box modules. If the cooler inlet pressure bar; 36 psi), the lube relief valve opens to relieve some
exceeds 9500 kPa (9.5 bar; 140 psi), the cooler relief of the oil into the inlet side of the transmission pump.
valve opens allowing the oil to bypass the cooler and
AG,OUOE003,9609 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1436
Module Lube
After the oil leaves the cooler it becomes lube oil. It is

used to lubricate all moving components within the
module as well as providing oil for cooling of the traction
elements when required. If pressure within the lube circuit
increases to 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi) or greater, the lube
relief valve opens providing a pathway for lube oil to flow
into the inlet side of the transmission pump.
AG,OUOE003,9610 –19–14JUN99–1/1
Module Lube Flow Paths
1. Oil flow from the pressure regulating valve flows to • Rear hole feeds C4 clutch and B3 disk.
the valve housing, and back through the front
cover. 3. A small hole in the clutch manifold tube, allows oil
to lube C4 clutch from support bushing.
Oil then flows through the pump body into air pump
cam cavity between bearings, and out through 4. Oil flows from the rear of the traction clutch drive
holes in the pump shaft into the traction clutch drive shaft, into the cavity formed by the traction clutch
shaft. drum. The output shaft and clutch hub lube the
traction clutch drum and rear bushing. Oil then
2. Three hoses in the traction clutch drive shaft allow flows through holes in the clutch hub to the reverse
oil flow as follows: planetary trough.
• Front hole feeds the planetary assembly. 5. Flow from the rear of the clutch manifold tube flows
• Center hole feeds the sun gears, B1 and B2 to lubricate the traction clutch drum front bushing.
disks.
255
20A
49
AG,OUOE003,9611 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1437
Oil Cooler
When System 1 oil pressure exceeds 1200 kPa (12 oil to the lube circuit. If the pressure downstream of
bar; 175 psi)1 or 1400 kPa (14 bar; 203 psi)2, a the oil cooler exceeds 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi) the
passage opens in the pressure regulating valve and oil lube relief valve routes oil to the inlet side of the
can pass to the lube circuit. If the oil cooler circuit transmission oil pump.
pressure exceeds 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi), the
normally closed oil cooler relief valve opens. Now oil Module Lube — Oil Flow Paths
can bypass the oil cooler and enter the lube circuit.
From the pressure regulating valve to the valve
Stage 1 Closed Normal Operation housing, back through the front cover, through the
pump body into the air pump cam cavity between the
Stage 2 950 kPa Oil is sent to the
9.5 bar lube circuit
bearings and through the openings in the pump shaft
138 psi into the traction clutch drive shaft.
Module Lube Three holes in the clutch drive shaft. The front hole
feeds the planetary. The center hole feeds the sun
Oil leaves the cooler as lube oil. It is used to lubricate gears and the B1, B2 disks. The rear hole feeds the C4
all module moving parts and, when necessary, to cool clutch and the B3 disk.
the shift elements. If the lube circuit pressure rises to
250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi) or higher the normally closed The small hole in the clutch oil manifold tube feeds the
lube relief valve opens to allow lube oil to flow to the C4 clutch drum support bushing.
inlet side of the transmission oil pump.
From the rear of the clutch drive shaft into the traction
Oil Cooler and Lube Oil Circuit clutch drum cavity to the output shaft and clutch hub to
lubricate the rear traction clutch bushing and through
At a pressure of 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi)1 or 1400 the holes in the clutch hub to the reverse planetary oil
kPa (14 bar; 205 psi)2 the pressure regulating valve trough.
connects the oil cooler to the lube oil circuit. Oil flows
from the pressure regulating valve via the oil cooler to From the rear of the clutch oil manifold tube to
the lube circuit to lubricate the transmission module lubricate the traction clutch drum front bushing.
and the range box.
If the pressure upstream of the oil cooler exceeds 950

kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi) the oil cooler relief valve routes
255
20A
50
1
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
2
6510L and 6510S:
AG,OUOE003,9612 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1438
Test Ports and Sending Units - With Mechanical Reverser Control

RW20463A –UN–06NOV97
I
J
E K L
F
D
G
H
B
RW20463 A
T S R O
A Q P
N M
AG,OUOE003,9613 –19–14JUN99–1/2

111401
PN=1439
A—Clutch cooling solenoid F—From oil cooler L—Cooling oil pressure R—Fwd clutch engagement
valve G—Sending unit, oil temp. M—Switch (traction clutch pressure
B—Adjustable orifice (fwd/rev warning light engaged) S—Rev brake engagement
modulation) H—Fwd/rev modulation N—Clutch pressure pressure
C—Sending unit, oil filter pressure O—Pressure test port (system T—Neutral start switch
constriction warning light I—B2 engagement pressure 2) X—Pressure test port (system
D—Sending unit, sys. pressure J—B1 engagement pressure P—B3 engagement pressure 1)
indicator light K—Test port for lube oil Q—C4 engagement pressure
E—To oil cooler pressure
AG,OUOE003,9613 –19–14JUN99–2/2
255
20A
52

111401
PN=1440
255
20A
53

111401
PN=1441
Test Ports and Sending Units - With Electrical Reverser Control
RW70333 –UN–03MAY97
AG,OUOE003,9614 –19–14JUN99–1/2
111401
PN=1442
A—Neutral start switch G—Sending unit, oil temp. M—Test port for lube oil S—Enable pressure switch
B—Adjustable orifice (fwd/rev warning light pressure T—C4 engagement pressure
modulation) H—Fwd/rev modulation N—Cooling oil pressure U—Forward solenoid
C—Sending unit, oil filter pressure O—Switch (traction clutch V—Forward clutch
constriction warning light I—Pressure test port (system engaged) engagement pressure
D—Sending unit, sys. pressure 1) P—Clutch pressure W—Enable solenoid
indicator light J—Reverse solenoid Q—Pressure test port (system X—Reverse brake engagement
E—To oil cooler K—B2 engagement pressure 2) pressure
F—From oil cooler L—B1 engagement pressure R—B3 engagement pressure
AG,OUOE003,9614 –19–14JUN99–2/2
255
20A
55

111401
PN=1443
255
20A
56

111401
PN=1444
Group 20B
Autoquad II Transmission Operation
PowrQuad Module
The PowrQuad module is the basis of the PowrQuad and

AutoQuad II transmissions.
NOTE: For operation, see Group 20A, this Section.
–UN–18FEB98
LX1018954
AG,LX25597,515N –19–01AUG00–1/1
PowrQuad and AutoQuad II Transmissions
PowrQuad and AutoQuad II transmissions are structurally

identical. The PowrQuad module is the basis for both
transmission components. The difference is that 1st
through 4th gears are selected differently.
–UN–18FEB98
The PowrQuad transmission has a shaft-mounted lever
(A) used to select gears. The lever is connected to the
LX1018952
shift lever by a cable, i.e. the link is strictly mechanical.
The AutoQuad II transmission has a shaft-mounted

stepper motor (B) which is used to select gears. This PowrQuad transmission
stepper motor is electronically actuated. There is no
mechanical connection.
NOTE: PowrQuad transmission operation is described in

Group 20A. This description also applies equally
to the PowrQuad and AutoQuad II transmissions,
–UN–18FEB98
since their components are structurally identical.
NOTE: This group describes the specific characteristics of

the AutoQuad II transmission (electrical gear
LX1018953
shifting). 255
20B
1
AutoQuad II transmission
AG,LX25597,516N –19–01AUG00–1/1

111401
PN=1445
Comparison of Transmission Versions
PowrQuad AutoQuad II
PowrQuad module (base version) Yes Yes
Electric shifting No Yes
Automatic speed matching No Yes
Automatic shifting No Yes
Power/ECO Mode Function No Yes
AG,LX25597,517N –19–01AUG00–1/4
Electric Shifting at Range Shift Lever1
On the shift lever (A) there are two switches (B) and (C)
used for up and downshifts. The clutch need not be used
for this.
–UN–11MAR99
Electric Shifting at Rocker Switch1
Press rocker switch (D) at end (E) for upshifts and at end
LX1022617
(F) for downshifts. Gears are shifted in the same way as
when using the switches on the range shift lever.
Automatic Speed Matching1
Shift lever (A) also controls range selection. The clutch

must be used when changing ranges. When the clutch
pedal is depressed the engine speed is equalized with the
transmission speed. When shifting to another range, the
ratio between engine and transmission speeds changes.
The electronic control unit seeks and selects the proper
range without requiring any operator input.
255
20B
2
1

111401
PN=1446
Automatic Shifting1
Two functions are involved here:
1. Cruise control
–UN–23SEP97
potentiometer (B). Engine speed is then held at
constant, regardless of torque effect.
LX1016154
2. Shifting with the Accelerator Pedal
Upshifting and downshifting occur automatically

depending on accelerator pedal position.
NOTE: These functions can be deselected using switch

(A).
1
255
20B
3

111401
PN=1447
Power/ECO Mode Function1
• The descriptions relating to automatic speed matching

and automatic shifting also apply to the power mode
function. The power mode function is activated by
–UN–27JUN00
pressing the switch at its (B) end.
Symbol (D) lights up on the monitor unit.
This function can be stopped by pressing the switch at
its (B)/(A) ends, or by pressing the gearshift buttons on
LX1024319
the range lever, or by pressing the gearshift rocker
switch.
At the monitor unit, symbol (D) goes out.
• The ECO-mode function is basically the same as the
power mode function. The only difference is that the
transmission shifts to the next higher gear slightly
earlier. The earlier shift makes for smoother running.
The ECO-mode function is activated by pressing the
switch at its (A) end.
Symbol (C) lights up on the monitor unit.
This function can be canceled by pressing the switch at
its (A)/(B) ends, or by pressing the gearshift buttons on
the range lever, or by pressing the gearshift rocker
switch.
At the monitor unit, symbol (C) goes out.
1
AG,LX25597,517N –19–01AUG00–4/4
255
20B
4

111401
PN=1448
AutoQuad II Transmission Components
–UN–07AUG00
LX1024318
255
S48—Upshift switch S51—Clutch switch B57—Accelerator pedal A16—Engine Control Unit
20B
S49—Downshift switch B54—Transmission Speed potentiometer (ECU)
5
S81—Rocker switch for Sender (Range Box) A19—Cruise control A13—Stepper Motor Driver
up/downshifts A09—PEC unit potentiometer M15—Stepper Motor
S85—Rocker switch for B01—Engine Speed Sender
engaging/disengaging
the AutoQuad and
power/ECO mode
functions
NOTE: The power supply and BUS line connections Unit (A09) controls the PowrQuad Plus,
are not shown. For functional schematic, see AutoQuad and AutoQuad II transmissions as
“SE21A-PowrQuad Plus Shifting”, Section 240, well as the electronic independent control
Group 15. valve (EICV).
AG,LX25597,518N –19–01AUG00–1/1

111401
PN=1449
Description of PEC
The PEC controls gear selection. The PEC controls, If any faults occur during tractor operation, the
coordinates and manages functions, recalls the applicable service codes will be generated and stored.
required data, logically links data items, compares See “Service Code List (PEC) - Transmission” in this
desired and actual values and manages inputs and Section, Group 10B.
outputs.
If the diagnostic fuse is installed in position F115 on
The control unit accepts signals and instructions from the load center, this information is also transmitted to
various switches, senders and potentiometers. These the control unit. The tractor cannot be driven then.
signals are processed in the control unit and the During diagnostics, service codes can be recalled and
resultant instructions are sent to the stepper motor cleared and diagnostics, calibration and identification
driver which controls the stepper motor. The stepper addresses can be recalled. See “Diagnostic Address
motor then selects the applicable gear. List (PEC) - Transmission” and “List of Calibratable
Addresses (PEC) - Transmission” in this Section,
The PEC is connected to the power supply and to the Group 10B. For the “Identification Address List”, see
BUS lines (communications lines). The different Section 245, Group 05.
electronic control units communicate with each other
via the BUS lines.
AG,LX25597,519 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Electric Shifting
Shift lever (A) or rocker switch (D) are used for shifting 1st
through 4th gears within any single range. The clutch is
not needed for these shifts.
–UN–11MAR99
Switches (S49) (B) and (S48) (C) are located on the shift
lever (A). Switch (C) is used for upshifts and switch (B) for
downshifts.
LX1022617
255
20B
Press the (F) end of rocker switch (D; S81) for downshifts.
6
Press the (E) end of rocker switch (D) for upshifts.
Activating the switches sends a signal to the PEC (A09).

The PEC (A09) processes the relevant command before
passing it on to stepper motor driver (A13), and the
transmission is shifted as appropriate by stepper motor
(M15).
AG,LX25597,520 –19–01MAR00–1/1

111401
PN=1450
Automatic Speed Matching
The shift lever controls speed and range selection. The

clutch must be used when changing ranges.
When the clutch pedal is depressed the clutch switch (A)
–UN–18FEB98
(S51) is actuated. During this phase engine and
transmission speeds are compared. The resultant data are
sent to the PEC (A09) by the engine speed sender (B01)
LX1018957
and transmission speed sender (B54). The control unit
(A09) then allows automatic selection of the appropriate
speed.
If a speed upshift or downshift switch (S48, S49 or S81) is

activated when a range is being shifted, the former action
takes priority. The desired speed can be selected.
–UN–14JAN98
LX1018958
AG,LX25597,521 –19–01MAR00–1/1
Automatic Shifting
1. Cruise Control:
potentiometer (B) (A19). The engine speed sender
(B01) sends the current value to the control unit. The
–UN–23SEP97
control unit compares these values and maintains a
constant engine speed setting regardless of torque
effect.
255
LX1016154
2. Shifting with the Accelerator Pedal
20B
The electronic accelerator pedal potentiometer (B57)
7
passes accelerator pedal position information to the
control unit. Upshifts and downshifts occur AutoQuad Transmission
automatically.
These functions can be deselected using switch (A)
(S85).

111401
PN=1451
3. Power/ECO Mode Function
• Descriptions 1. and 2. apply equally to power mode.

The power mode function is activated by pressing
switch (S85) at its (B) end.
–UN–27JUN00
Symbol (D) lights up on the monitor unit.
This function can be canceled by pressing switch (S85)
at its (B)/(A) ends, or by pressing the gearshift buttons
on the range lever (S48, S49), or by pressing the
LX1024319
gearshift rocker switch (S81).
At the monitor unit, symbol (D) goes out.
• The ECO-mode function is basically the same as the
power mode function. The only difference is that the
transmission shifts to the next higher gear slightly
earlier. The earlier shift makes for smoother running.
The ECO-mode function is activated by pressing switch
(S85) at its (A) end.
Symbol (C) lights up on the monitor unit.
This function can be stopped by pressing switch (S85)
at its (A)/(B) ends, or by pressing the gearshift buttons
on the range lever (S48, S49), or by pressing the
gearshift rocker switch (S81).
At the monitor unit, symbol (C) goes out.
AG,LX25597,522N –19–01AUG00–2/2
255
20B
8

111401
PN=1452
Group 20C
Creeper Transmission Operation
255
20C
1
–UN–20MAR95
LX001188
A—Drive Shaft E—Shift Collar I—Range Box Drive Shaft M—Needle Bearing
B—Dual Gear F—Pins (8 Used) J—Needle Bearing N—Intermediate Box
C—Speed Box Countershaft G—Gear K—Range Box Main Shaft Countershaft
D—Clutch Body H—Gear L—Axial Bearings (2 Used) O—Speed Box Drive Shaft
Continued on next page LX,25020C001313 –19–01MAY92–1/2

111401
PN=1453
The creeper transmission is located in the option in ranges A,B and C only (regardless of the
housing. Its essential parts are drive shaft (A) and transmission version used with the tractor).
double gear (B). The drive shaft is driven by drive
shaft of gear transmission (O) or by countershaft of Depending on position of shift collar and pins,
gear transmission (C). gears (G) and (H) rotate at a different speed than
creeper drive shaft (A) or range transmission drive
Creeper is engaged or disengaged by shift collar (E) shaft (I). Gears can rotate freely on drive shaft
and pins (F). With creeper engaged, speed is reduced because of needle bearings (J) and (M).
at a ratio of 9.95 : 1.
Axial forces created by helical gears (G) and (H) are
The creeper transmission is locked in the fast gears. absorbed by the two axial bearings (L) installed
Locking pins ensure that the creeper may be engaged opposite each other.
LX,25020C001313 –19–01MAY92–2/2
255
20C
2

111401
PN=1454
Power Flow With Creeper Transmission Engaged
–UN–20MAR95
LX004789
255
20C
3
With the creeper transmission disengaged, shift collar Thus, torque is transferred from drive shaft (A) via
(E) connects clutch body (D) and gear (G). Since the gear (G) to range box drive shaft (I).
clutch body is splined to the drive shaft (A) the gear is
now engaged with the shaft. Pins (F), connected to the shift collar, are fully
engaged in gear (G), i.e. the pins no longer connect
At the same time, gear (G) is also splined to the range gears (G) and (H). Gear (H) is now free to rotate on
box drive shaft (I). the body of gear (G).
Continued on next page LX,25020C003947 –19–01MAR93–1/2

111401
PN=1455
–UN–20MAR95
LX004790
255
20C
4
With creeper engaged, pins (F) connect gears (H) and The gears can rotate freely on drive shaft, since no
(G). Gear (G) is also splined to drive shaft (I) of range connection is provided between gear (G) and
transmission. connecting ring (D).
Power is transmitted from drive shaft (A) to drive shaft

of range transmission via double gear (B) and the
gears which are connected by pins.
LX,25020C003947 –19–01MAR93–2/2

111401
PN=1456
Group 20D
Range Box
Design (16-Speed Transmission)
–UN–16MAR98
LX1019604
A—Drive Shaft D—Range C Gear G—Range A Gear I—Main Shaft
B—D Range Gear E—Range B Gear H—Front Wheel Drive Gear
C—Range C and D F—Range A and B
Synchronizer Synchronizer
The transmission housing contains the drive shaft (A), Torque is transferred from the PowrQuad module to
main shaft (I), parking lock and shift elements. the drive shaft (A). The drive shaft drives the individual
range gears. If the synchronizers are in neutral, all
The drive shaft is a one-piece unit, i.e. the individual range gears are free to turn on the main shaft. The
gears are interlocked. The main shaft holds the A, B, main shaft does not turn. If a synchronizer is moved to
C and D range gears (G,E,D,B), the synchronizers (C a shift position, the associated range gear will be 255
and F) and the front wheel drive gear (H). The range solidly engaged on the shaft. This allows torque to 20D
gears are free to turn on the main shaft. The move to the main shaft. From the main shaft torque is 1
synchronizers and front wheel drive gear are transferred to the ring gear and front wheel drive
connected to the main shaft. The drive shaft gears clutch1.
mesh with the range gears on the main shaft.
1
If equipped
LX25520D 015728 –19–01JAN98–1/1

111401
PN=1457
Range Box
–UN–16MAR98
LX1019605
A—Intermediate Box Drive E—Range E Gear J—Range C Gear M—Range A Gear
Shaft F—Range E Synchronizer K—Range B Gear N—Dual Gear
B—Range Box Drive Shaft G—Spacer L—Range A and B O—Front Wheel Drive Gear
C—Dual Gear H—Range D Gear Synchronizer P—Main Shaft
D—Intermediate Box I—Range C and D
255
Countershaft Synchronizer
20D
2
The range box basically consists of two elements. The The extended main shaft holds the A, B, C, D and E
range box itself (as in the 16-speed transmission) and range gears (M, K, J, H, E), the synchronizers (F, I
an intermediate box which provides an additional and L) and the front wheel drive gear (O). The range
range. gears are free to turn. The synchronizers and the front
wheel drive gear are solidly connected to the main
The drive shaft (B) and the main shaft (P) in the shaft.
transmission housing are extended into the
intermediate housing by means of the drive shaft (A)
or countershaft (D). The two shafts are splined
together when connected.
Continued on next page LX25520D 015730 –19–01JAN98–1/2

111401
PN=1458
Range Box
The drive shaft gears mesh with the range gears on synchronizers are in neutral, all range gears are free to
the countershaft (D) or main shaft (P). Additionally, for turn on the main shaft. The main shaft does not turn. If
range A the two double gears (C) and (N) are shifted a synchronizer is moved to a shift position, the
to reduce shaft speed. associated range gear will be solidly engaged on the
shaft. This allows torque to move to the main shaft.
Torque is transferred from the PowrQuad module to From the main shaft torque is transferred to the ring
the drive shaft (A) and from there to drive shaft (B). gear and front wheel drive clutch1.
The drive shafts drive the individual range gears. If the
1
If equipped
LX25520D 015730 –19–01JAN98–2/2
255
20D
3

111401
PN=1459
Range Box
–UN–16MAR98
LX1019606
A—Intermediate Box Drive E—Range E Gear I—Range C and D M—Range A Gear
Shaft F—Range E and F Synchronizer N—Dual Gear
B—Range Box Drive Shaft Synchronizer J—Range C Gear O—Front Wheel Drive Gear
C—Dual Gear G—Range F Gear K—Range B Gear P—Main Shaft
D—Intermediate Box H—Range D Gear L—Range A and B
255
Countershaft Synchronizer
20D
4
The range box basically consists of two elements. The The extended main shaft holds the A, B, C, D and E
range box itself (as in the 16-speed transmission) and range gears (M, K, J, H, E, G), the synchronizers (F, I
an intermediate box which provides two additional and L) and the front wheel drive gear (O). The range
ranges. gears are free to turn. The synchronizers and the front
wheel drive gear are connected to the main shaft.
The drive shaft (B) and the main shaft (P) in the
transmission housing are extended into the The drive shaft gears mesh with the range gears on
intermediate housing by means of the drive shaft (A) the countershaft (D) or main shaft (P). Additionally, for
or countershaft (D). The two shafts are splined range A the two double gears (C) and (N) are shifted
together when connected. to reduce shaft speed.
Continued on next page LX25520D 015732 –19–01JAN98–1/2

111401
PN=1460
Range Box
Torque is transferred from the PowrQuad module to a synchronizer is moved to a shift position, the
the drive shaft (B) and from there to drive shaft (B). associated range gear will be solidly engaged on the
The drive shafts drive the individual range gears. If the shaft. This allows torque to move to the main shaft.
synchronizers are in neutral, all range gears are free to From the main shaft torque is transferred to the ring
turn on the main shaft. The main shaft does not turn. If gear and front wheel drive clutch.1
1
If equipped
LX25520D 015732 –19–01JAN98–2/2
Power Flow in Range A (16-Speed Transmission)
–UN–16MAR98
LX1019607
255
20D
5
When shifted, the synchronizer (F) shift collar connects From the main shaft torque is transmitted to the ring
the A range gear (G) to the main shaft (I). The other gear. Similarly, the front wheel drive gear (H) transmits
range gears turn freely on the main shaft. torque to the front wheel drive clutch.
Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (A) via the A

range gear and synchronizer unit to the main shaft.
LX25520D 015491 –19–01JAN98–1/1

111401
PN=1461
Range Box
Power Flow in Range B (16-Speed Transmission)
–UN–16MAR98
LX1019608
When shifted, the synchronizer (F) shift collar connects From the main shaft torque is transmitted to the ring
the B range gear (E) to the main shaft (I). The other gear. Similarly, the front wheel drive gear (H) transmits
range gears turn freely on the main shaft. torque to the front wheel drive clutch.
Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (A) via the B

LX25520D 015492 –19–01JAN98–1/1
255
20D
6

111401
PN=1462
Range Box
Power Flow in Range C (16-Speed Transmission)
–UN–16MAR98
LX1019609
When shifted, the synchronizer (C) shift collar From the main shaft torque is transmitted to the ring
connects the C range gear (D) to the main shaft (I). gear. Similarly, the front wheel drive gear (H) transmits
The other range gears turn freely on the main shaft. torque to the front wheel drive clutch.
Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (A) via the C

LX25520D 015493 –19–01JAN98–1/1
255
20D
7

111401
PN=1463
Range Box
Power Flow in Range D (16-Speed Transmission)
–UN–16MAR98
LX1019610
When shifted, the synchronizer (C) shift collar From the main shaft torque is transmitted to the ring
connects the D range gear (B) to the main shaft (I). gear. Similarly, the front wheel drive gear (H) transmits
The other range gears turn freely on the main shaft. torque to the front wheel drive clutch.
Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (A) via the D

LX25520D 015494 –19–01JAN98–1/1
255
20D
8

111401
PN=1464
Range Box
Power Flow in Range A (20- and 24-Speed Transmissions)
–UN–16MAR98
LX1019611
24-Speed Transmission Illustrated
When shifted, the synchronizer (L) shift collar connects synchronizer on the main shaft. From the main shaft
the A range gear (M) to the main shaft (P). The other torque is transmitted to the ring gear. Similarly, the
range gears turn freely on the countershaft (D) or main front wheel drive gear (O) transmits torque to the front
shaft (P). wheel drive clutch.
255
Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (B) via the 20D
dual gears (C) and (N) to the A range gear and the 9
LX25520D 015495 –19–01JAN98–1/1

111401
PN=1465
Range Box
Power Flow in Range E (20- and 24-Speed Transmissions)
–UN–16MAR98
LX1019612
When shifted, the synchronizer (G) shift collar and then to the main shaft. From the main shaft torque
connects the E range gear (E) to the countershaft (E). is transmitted to the ring gear. Similarly, the front
The other range gears turn freely on the countershaft wheel drive gear (O) transmits torque to the front
or main shaft (P). wheel drive clutch.
255
20D Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (A) via the E
10 range gear and synchronizer unit to the countershaft
LX25520D 015496 –19–01JAN98–1/1

111401
PN=1466
Range Box
Power Flow in Range F (24-Speed Transmission)
–UN–20MAR95
LX001292
When shifted, the synchronizer (I) shift collar connects and then to the main shaft. From the main shaft torque
the F range gear (J) to the countershaft (G). The other is transmitted to the ring gear. Similarly, the front
range gears turn freely on the countershaft or main wheel drive gear (R) transmits torque to the front
shaft (S). wheel drive clutch.
255
Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (B) via the F 20D
range gear and synchronizer unit to the countershaft 11
LX25520D 015497 –19–01JAN98–1/1

111401
PN=1467
Range Box
Parking Lock
–UN–28JUL94
LX001293
A—Lever C—Shifter shaft cam E—Bearing quill G—Locking latch
B—Shifter shaft D—Roller F—Spring H—Front wheel drive gear
When parking lock is engaged, shifter shaft (B) rotates When parking lock is disengaged, the cam no longer
255 and cam (C) exerts pressure on roller (D) of locking exerts pressure on roller of locking latch. Spring (F)
20D latch (G). The locking latch is moved towards front moves the locking latch back to disengaged position.
12
wheel drive gear (H), causing latch and gear splines to
mesh.
LX,25020D001520 –19–01MAY92–1/1

111401
PN=1468
Section 256
Drive Systems (Except Transmission)
Contents
Page Page
Group 05—Operational Checkout Group 20D—Rear PTO

Checking Rear PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-05-1 Description of Rear PTO Options . . . . . . . . 256-20D-1
Checking Front PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-05-1 PTO Modulating Valve and Solenoid
Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20D-2
Group 10—Troubleshooting Operation of PTO Clutch and Brake . . . . . . 256-20D-3
Front Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-10-1 PTO Power Flow (540 RPM). . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20D-4
Differential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-10-2 PTO Power Flow (540/1000 RPM,
Hydraulic Pump Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-10-3 Reversible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20D-5
Final Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-10-3
Group 20E—Front PTO
Rear PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-10-4
Front PTO Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20E-1
Front PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-10-6
Counterclockwise-Rotating1 Front PTO -
Sectional View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20E-2
Group 15—Tests Independent Hydraulic Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20E-3
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-15-1 Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20E-4
Special or Essential Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-15-1 Modulating Valve and Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . 256-20E-5
Connecting the Sensocontrol Testing Hydraulic Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20E-6
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-15-4
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-15-5
Hydraulic Oil Warmup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-15-5
Testing Front Wheel Drive Clutch System
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-15-6
Testing Hydraulic Differential Lock System
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-15-9
Testing the Rear PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-15-12
Front PTO Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256-15-16
Group 20A—Front Wheel Drive Clutch

Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20A-1
Oil and Power Flows With Front-Wheel Drive
Engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20A-2
Oil and Power Flows With Front-Wheel Drive
Disengaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20A-4
256
Group 20B—Differential
Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20B-1
Power Flow When Moving Straight
Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20B-2
Power Flow When Cornering. . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20B-3
Oil Flow With Differential Lock Engaged . . . 256-20B-4
Oil Flow With Differential Lock
Disengaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20B-6
Group 20C—Final Drives

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-20C-1
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1
Contents
256
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Group 05
Checking Rear PTO
With engine running, engage PTO.
PTO must engage smoothly. No unusual noise must

occur.
Refer to Group 10 or 15 if malfunctions occur.
AG,OUOE003,9623 –19–14JUN99–1/1
Checking Front PTO
With engine running, engage PTO.
PTO must engage smoothly. No unusual noise must

occur.
Refer to Group 10 if malfunctions occur.
AG,OUOE003,9624 –19–14JUN99–1/1
256
05
1
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-05-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1471
256
05
2
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-05-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1472
Group 10
Troubleshooting
Front Wheel Drive
MFWD does not engage Disk pack on front wheel drive clutch See relevant manual “Repair”,
is worn Section 56
Damage to cup springs, gears or See above

other components of front wheel
drive clutch
Defective solenoid valve See above
MFWD does not disengage System pressure too low See Group 15 for measuring the
system pressure at solenoid valve
Electrical defect (switch, fuse, wires) See Section 240, Group 15 for
checking electrical circuits:
Cab Tractor: with HMS (SE16i),

without HMS (SE16g); check also
BCU for Service Codes.
2-Post ROPS: (SE16b).
Defective solenoid valve See relevant manual “Repair”,

Section 56
Defective piston seal rings See above
System pressure too low Fault in transmission oil circuit Check system pressure:
(indicator lamp lights up)
System pressure check is a part of
the MFWD system check.

Section 56
Excessive wear on front tires Incorrect toe-in angle See Component Technical Manual
“Front Wheel Drive Axles” for tread
adjustment
Wrong tire combination See Operator’s Manual for correct

tire combinations 256
10
1
AG,OUOE003,9625 –19–14JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-10-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1473
Troubleshooting
Differential
Unusual noise when running Incorrect backlash between ring gear See relevant manual “Repair”,
and bevel gear Section 56
Worn bearings See above
Damage to bevel gears See above
Noise when cornering Worn bearings See above
Damage to bevel pinions See above
Differential lock does not engage System pressure too low See Group 15 for measuring the
system pressure at solenoid valve
Cab Tractor: (SE16c); check also

2-Post ROPS: (SE16c).

Section 56
Defective piston seal rings See above
Worn disk pack See above
System pressure too low Fault in transmission oil circuit Check system pressure. See Section
(indicator lamp lights up) for relevant transmission, Group 10.
System pressure check is a part of
the Differential lock system check.

Section 56
Differential lock does not See above See above

disengage
256
10
2
AG,OUOE003,9626 –19–14JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-10-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1474
Troubleshooting
Hydraulic Pump Drive
Unusual noise while in operation Wear at the taper roller bearings See “Repair” Manual, Section 56
Pump drive is defective (bevel See above

pinions)
Pump drive is set incorrectly See above
Hydraulic pump is defective See “Repair” Manual, Section 70
AG,OUOE003,9627 –19–14JUN99–1/1
Final Drives
Loss of lubricant Incorrect lubricant or too much used See relevant manual “Repair”,
Section 10 for service
Worn or damaged seal rings See relevant manual “Repair”,

Section 56
Unusual noise when running Incorrect lubricant or too little used See relevant manual “Repair”,
Section 10 for service
Worn taper roller bearing on rear See relevant manual “Repair”,

axle Section 56
Worn needle bearings on planet See above

pinions
Damage or wear at ring gear or sun See above

gear on final drive shaft, or at planet
pinions
256
10
3
AG,OUOE003,9628 –19–14JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-10-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1475
Troubleshooting
Rear PTO
PTO shaft does not rotate System pressure too low See Group 15 for measuring system
pressure
Cab Tractor: with HMS (SE16i),

without HMS (SE16e); check also
2-Post ROPS: (SE5).
Spools defective or not set correctly See relevant manual “Repair”,

Section 56
Damage to output shaft or See above

countershaft
PTO continues to run when Spools defective or not set correctly See above
switched off
PTO brake worn or damaged See above
Unusual noise when running Engine slow idle speed too low For specifications see relevant
manual “Repair”, Section 10
System pressure too low See Group 15 for measuring system

pressure. System pressure check is
a part of the PTO system check.
Worn bearings See relevant manual “Repair”,

Section 56
Damage to output shaft or See above

countershaft
PTO engagement not smooth PTO modulating valve defective See above
256
10
4
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-10-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1476
Troubleshooting
Spools defective or not set correctly See relevant manual “Repair”,

Section 56
Oil pressure overlap See above See above
AG,OUOE003,9629 –19–14JUN99–2/2
256
10
5
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-10-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1477
Troubleshooting
Front PTO
PTO shaft does not rotate System pressure too low See Group 15 for measuring system
pressure
checking electrical circuits (SE5);
check also BIF for Service Codes.
Solenoid valve defective See relevant manual “Repair”,

Section 56
PTO clutch seal rings defective See above
PTO continues to run when Solenoid valve defective See above

switched off
PTO brake worn or damaged See above
Unusual noise when running Engine slow idle speed too low For specifications see relevant
manual “Repair”, Section 10
System pressure too low See Group 15 for measuring system

pressure
Worn bearings See relevant manual “Repair”,

Section 56
PTO engagement not smooth Damper valve defective See above
Solenoid valve defective See relevant manual “Repair”,

Section 56
Oil pressure overlap See above See above
256
10
6
AG,OUOE003,9630 –19–14JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-10-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1478
Group 15
Tests
Safety Precautions

may result.
area. Make sure that no-one is put at risk. CAUTION: Escaping hydraulic oil under
pressure can have sufficient pressure to
Check and tighten all connections before
CAUTION: During tests that involve running applying pressure. Hydraulic oil escaping
the engine, always engage the parking lock. from pin holes is difficult to detect, so use a
not use your hands.
parts.

AG,OUOE003,9631 –19–14JUN99–1/1

Digital thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT05800 256

15
1
–UN–16AUG94
JT05800
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1479
Tests
Pressure test kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT07115
Pressure tests
–UN–28JUL94
LX001339
AG,OUOE003,9632 –19–14JUN99–3/9
Pressure tests
–UN–13MAY96
FKM10002
AG,OUOE003,9632 –19–14JUN99–4/9

–UN–15DEC97
LX1019202
AG,OUOE003,9632 –19–14JUN99–5/9
256 • FKM10470-1 0-1000 bar Pressure Sensor

15 • FKM10470-2 0-100 bar Pressure Sensor (2)
2
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1480
Tests

–UN–15DEC97
LX1019203
AG,OUOE003,9632 –19–14JUN99–7/9

• FKM10471-3 PC Adapter with Software
AG,OUOE003,9632 –19–14JUN99–8/9
LX1019204 –UN–15DEC97

256
15
3
AG,OUOE003,9632 –19–14JUN99–9/9
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1481
Tests
–UN–21APR98
LX1019201
Measuring Unit
on the tractor.
AG,OUOE003,9633 –19–14JUN99–1/1
256
15
4
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1482
Tests
Specifications
Pressure testing of:
• Front Wheel Drive Clutch

• Differential Lock
• Rear PTO
• Front PTO
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and Pressure with engine at 1000 rpm 1200 kPa (12 bar; 170 psi)
6310S-6410S tractors
6510L-6510S tractors Pressure with engine at 1000 rpm 1400 kPa (14 bar; 200 psi)
AG,OUOE003,9634 –19–14JUN99–1/1

–UN–05DEC97
LX1018200

mode.

256
15
5
1
AG,OUOE003,9635 –19–14JUN99–1/1
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1483
Tests
Testing Front Wheel Drive Clutch System

Pressure
1. Connect the JT07115 pressure testing kit to the test

port.
–UN–28JUL94
LX001534
4. Engage the front wheel drive and observe the pressure
reading.
There should be no pressure shown when the front

wheel drive is engaged.
5. Disengage the front wheel drive and observe the

pressure reading.
System pressure should be 1200 kPa (12 bar; 170

psi)1or 1400 kPa (14 bar; 200 psi)2 with front wheel
drive disengaged.
Check the associated circuit if there is a pressure

reading with the front wheel drive engaged or no
pressure reading with the front wheel drive
disengaged. See Section 240, Group 15 (Cab Tractor:
with HMS (SE16i), without HMS (SE16g or 2-Post
ROPS: (SE16b); check also BCU for Service Codes). If
there is no electrical problem, the solenoid valve spool
is binding. Replace the solenoid, see Section 56 of the
applicable Repair TM.
Repair the front wheel drive clutch if there is no

pressure reading when the front wheel drive is
engaged but the unit is still not operating properly. See
Section 56 of the applicable Repair TM.
256
15
6
1
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
2
6510L and 6510S
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1484
Tests
If the pressure is low when the front wheel drive is

disengaged, check the system pressure of the associated
transmission (SyncroPlus, PowrReverser,
PowrQuad).

256
15
7
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1485
Tests
Checking Transmission System Pressure

marked “SYSTEM”.
3. Measure the pressure with the front wheel drive

engaged.
4. Measure the pressure with the front wheel drive
–UN–06AUG94
disengaged.
System pressure should be 1200 kPa (12 bar; 170 psi)
LX001575
with front wheel drive engaged and disengaged.

SyncroPlus Pressure Test Shown
psi)1or 1400 kPa (14 bar; 200 psi)2 with front wheel
drive engaged or disengaged.
Adjust the system pressure if out of specification. See

Section 250 (SyncroPlus), Section 251
(PowrReverser) or Section 255 (PowrQuad). Group
10 is applicable in each case.
Check the solenoid sealing rings if the system pressure

is out of specification only when the front wheel drive is
disengaged. If the sealing rings are OK, replace the
front wheel drive clutch sealing rings. See Section 56
of the applicable Repair TM.

256
15 1
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
8
2
6510L and 6510S
AG,OUOE003,9636 –19–14JUN99–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1486
Tests
Testing Hydraulic Differential Lock System

Pressure

port.
–UN–28JUL94
LX001535
4. Measure the pressure with the differential lock
disengaged.
There should be no pressure shown when the

differential lock is disengaged.
5. Engage the differential lock and observe the pressure

reading.
System pressure should be 1200 kPa (12 bar; 170 psi)

or with the differential lock engaged.

psi)1 or 1400 kPa (14 bar; 200 psi)2 with the differential
lock engaged.

reading with the differential lock disengaged or no
pressure reading with the differential lock engaged.
See Section 240, Group 15 (Cab Tractor: (SE16c);
check also BCU for Service Codes or 2-Post ROPS:
(SE16c). If there is no electrical problem, the solenoid
valve spool is binding. Replace the solenoid, see
If the pressure reading is acceptable with the

differential lock engaged but the system is not
operating correctly, repair the differential lock. See
256
15
9
1
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
2
6510L and 6510S
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-9 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1487
Tests
If the pressure is low when the differential lock is

engaged, check the system pressure of the associated
PowrQuad).

256
15
10
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-10 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1488
Tests

2. Run the engine at a speed of 1000 rpm.

disengaged.
–UN–06AUG94
engaged.

psi)1 with the differential lock engaged and disengaged.
LX001575
psi)2 with the differential lock engaged and disengaged.

Section for relevant transmission, Group 10. See
(PowrReverser) or Section 255 (PowrQuad).

is out of specification only when the differential lock is
engaged. If the sealing rings are OK, replace the
differential lock sealing rings. See the relevant “Repair”
manual, Section 56.

256
1 15
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
11
2
6510L and 6510S
AG,OUOE003,9637 –19–14JUN99–3/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-11 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1489
Tests
Testing the Rear PTO
Checking PTO Brake Pressure

port marked “BRAKE”.
–UN–28JUL94
LX001536
4. Measure the pressure with the PTO disengaged.

psi)1or 1400 kPa (14 bar; 200 psi)2 with the PTO
disengaged.
5. Engage the PTO and observe the pressure reading.
There should be no pressure shown when the PTO is

engaged.

reading with the PTO engaged or no pressure reading
with the PTO disengaged. See Section 240, Group 15.
If there is no electrical problem, the solenoid valve
spool is binding. Replace the solenoid, see Section 56
of the applicable Repair TM.
If the pressure reading is acceptable with the PTO

disengaged but the PTO brake is not operating
correctly, repair the PTO brake. See Section 56 of the
If the pressure is low when the PTO is disengaged,

check the system pressure of the associated
PowrQuad).
256
15
12

1
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
2
6510L and 6510S
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-12 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1490
Tests

4. Measure the pressure with the power take-off engaged.
–UN–06AUG94
psi)1 or 1400 kPa (14 bar; 200 psi)2 with the PTO
engaged and disengaged.
LX001575
Section for relevant transmission, Group 10. See
(PowrReverser) or Section 255 (PowrQuad). Group
10 is applicable in each case.

is out of specification only when the PTO is
disengaged. If the sealing rings are OK, replace the
PTO brake sealing rings. See Section 56 of the

1
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
2
6510L and 6510S
256
15
13
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-13 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1491
Tests
Checking PTO Clutch System Pressure
NOTE: Check the PTO brake system pressure before

checking the PTO clutch system pressure.
–UN–28JUL94
port marked “CLUTCH”.
LX001057
There should be no pressure shown when the PTO is 6010-6610 Pressure Test Shown
disengaged.
6010-6510: System pressure should be 1200 kPa (12

bar; 170 psi) with the PTO engaged.
6610-6910: System pressure should be 1400 kPa (14

bar; 200 psi) with the PTO engaged.
The PTO actuating valve is binding if there is a

pressure reading with the PTO disengaged or no
pressure when the PTO is engaged. See Section 56 of
the applicable Repair TM.
If the pressure reading is acceptable with the PTO

engaged but the system is not operating correctly,
repair the PTO. See Section 56 of the applicable
Repair TM.
256
15
14
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-14 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1492
Tests
Testing the Operating of the PTO Modulating Valve
1. Connect universal pressure test kit FKM10002 to PTO

clutch and PTO brake test ports (marked “CLUTCH”
and “BRAKE” respectively).
–UN–28JUL94
2. Run engine at a speed of 1000 rpm.
3. Engage PTO.
LX001053
Pressure gauge connected to PTO clutch should show
pressure.
Pressure test at SyncroPlus shown
4. Disengage PTO.
PTO clutch pressure must drop to zero before pressure

gauge connected to PTO brake shows any pressure.
IMPORTANT: No pressure overlap should be

observed when engaging and
disengaging PTO.
In case of pressure overlap, the PTO modulating valve

must be repaired. Refer to relevant Technical Manual
“Repair”, Section 56.
AG,OUOE003,9638 –19–14JUN99–4/4
256
15
15
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-15 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1493
Tests
Front PTO Check
1. Connect the FKM10002 universal pressure tester to

the PTO clutch (B) and PTO brake (A) test ports.
3. Run the engine at a speed of 1000 rpm.
–UN–16MAR95
PTO brake system pressure should be 1200 kPa (12

bar; 170 psi)1 with the PTO disengaged. There should
LX004482
be no PTO clutch pressure reading.
PTO brake system pressure should be 1400 kPa (14

bar; 200 psi)2 with the PTO disengaged. There should
be no PTO clutch pressure reading.
PTO clutch system pressure should be 1200 kPa (12 bar;

170 psi)1 with the PTO engaged. There should be no PTO
brake pressure reading.
PTO clutch system pressure should be 1400 kPa (14 bar;

200 psi)2 with the PTO engaged. There should be no PTO
brake pressure reading.
If the pressure reading is acceptable but the PTO clutch is

not operating correctly, repair the PTO clutch. See Section
56 of the applicable Repair TM.
Check the associated circuit if there is a pressure reading

with the PTO clutch or PTO brake engaged or
disengaged. See Section 240, Group 15. If there is no
electrical problem, the solenoid valve spool is binding.
Replace the solenoid, see Section 56 of the applicable
Repair TM.
256
15
16
1
6110-6410, 6110L-6410L and 6310S-6410S
2
6510L and 6510S
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-16 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1494
Tests
Check the solenoid sealing rings if the system pressure is

in specification only for the PTO clutch or PTO brake. If
the sealing rings are OK, replace the PTO clutch or brake
sealing rings. See Section 56 of the applicable Repair TM.
If the pressure reading is too low in either case, test the

transmission system pressure. See Section for relevant
transmission, Group 10.
AG,OUOE003,9639 –19–14JUN99–2/2
256
15
17
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-17 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1495
Tests
256
15
18
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-15-18 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1496
Group 20A
Front Wheel Drive Clutch
Design
–UN–23MAY97
LX1015988
A—Clutch Shaft D—Piston G—Housing I—Clutch Drum with Gear
B—Bearing Cover E—Disks and Plates H—Check Valves (3 Used) J—Oil Supply Plate
C—Belleville Springs (2 Used) F—Dual Gear
The front wheel drive clutch is attached to the bottom The front wheel drive is mechanically engaged by a
of the range box. When the front wheel drive is spring and hydraulically disengaged by oil pressure.
engaged, torque is transferred from the range box via When the front wheel drive is engaged a solenoid
the front wheel drive clutch to the universal drive shaft interrupts the flow of oil to the front wheel drive clutch.
which directly drives the front wheel drive axle.
The primary components of the front wheel drive clutch

are the clutch shaft (A), clutch drum (I), disks and
plates (E), Belleville springs (C) and piston (D).
256
20A
1
LX25620AN015376 –19–01JAN98–1/1

111401
PN=1497
Oil and Power Flows With Front-Wheel Drive Engaged
F G
E
D
C
H
A
J L M
K N
I
–UN–04MAR98
P Q R LX1015989
LX1015989
A—Clutch shaft F—Clutch drum and gear K—Spool O—Return to sump

B—Belleville spring (2 used) G—Double gear L—Magnetic core P—Power flow
C—Piston H—Oil transfer plate M—Spring Q—Pilot oil
256 D—Disk pack I—Check valve N—Solenoid valve R—Pressure-free oil
20A E—Check valve (2 used) J—Inflow from pressure
2 regulating valve
When front wheel drive is engaged, no current passes position. The pilot oil from the pressure regulating
through the coil of solenoid valve (N). It therefore has valve reaches the solenoid valve but cannot flow any
no electro-magnetic effect. Spring (M) presses against further.
magnetic core (L) and spool (K) remains in its initial
Continued on next page LX,25620A011189 –19–01FEB97–1/3

111401
PN=1498
The oil inside the clutch drum is pressure-free and can transmits the power further to clutch shaft (A), which
flow back to the sump via the solenoid valve. Belleville then drives the universal jointed shaft.
springs (B) press the piston (C) against the disk pack
(D), which is thus compressed. This creates a Front wheel drive is always engaged when the engine
connection between the externally splined disks driven is shut off, as the transmission oil pump does not
by clutch drum (F), and the internally splined disks pump oil in this state.
connected to clutch shaft (A).
Power is transmitted from the range transmission via

double gear (G) to clutch drum (F). Disk pack (D)
LX,25620A011189 –19–01FEB97–2/3
Cooling and Lubrication
There is oil (not illustrated) inside the FWD clutch

housing. Oil can therefore reach the gears, the taper roller
bearings and the outside of the FWD clutch, thus
providing cooling and lubrication.
–UN–13NOV96
The three small vanes on oil transfer plate (H) also force
oil through the opened check valves (E) and into the
inside of the clutch. At the same time, oil can escape
LX1015991
through the opened check valve (I). There is therefore
always a circular flow of oil when FWD is engaged.
When front-wheel drive is disengaged, pressure oil

reaches the inside of the clutch. The check valves close.
This prevents the oil transfer plate from sending any more
oil into the clutch. When front-wheel drive is engaged, the
oil in the clutch becomes pressure-free. The check valves
open and oil from the oil transfer plate can once again
flow through the clutch.
LX,25620A011189 –19–01FEB97–3/3
256
20A
3

111401
PN=1499
Oil and Power Flows With Front-Wheel Drive Disengaged
E F G
D
C
K L M N
–UN–04MAR98
LX1015990 P Q R
LX1015990
256
20A
4
A—Clutch shaft F—Clutch drum and gear K—Spool O—Return to sump
B—Belleville spring (2 used) G—Double gear L—Magnetic core P—Power flow
C—Piston H—Oil transfer plate M—Spring Q—Pilot oil
D—Disk pack I—Check valve N—Solenoid valve R—Pressure-free oil
E—Check valve (2 used) J—Inflow from pressure
regulating valve
Continued on next page LX,25620A011177 –19–01FEB97–1/2

111401
PN=1500
When front wheel drive is disengaged, current flows Piston (C) moves and presses against the Belleville
through the coil of solenoid valve (N). The springs (B). The disk pack is released. There is no
electro-magnetic effect energizes magnetic core (L), longer any connection between the externally splined
which moves towards the coil. Spool (K), which is disks driven by clutch drum (F) and the internally
directly connected to the magnetic core, also moves in splined disks connected to clutch shaft (A). Clutch
the same direction. Pilot oil from the pressure drum (F) is free to rotate on the clutch shaft.
regulating valve flows via the solenoid valve into the
interior of the FWD clutch.
LX,25620A011177 –19–01FEB97–2/2
256
20A
5

111401
PN=1501
256
20A
6

111401
PN=1502
Group 20B
Differential
Design
–UN–25NOV97
LX1018415
A—Bevel gear case E—Left bearing cover H—Hub with drive pinion K—Right bearing cover
B—Ring gear F—Drive bevel gear I—Disks and plates L—Right drive shaft
C—Piston housing G—Differential pinions (4 J—Piston 256
D—Left drive shaft used) 20B
1
The main components of the differential are the bevel (H) which are fitted to final drive shafts (D) and (L)
gear case (A), ring gear (B), drive bevel gears (F) and transmit torque via the planetary bevel gear and the
(H) and differential pinions (G). rear axle to the drive wheels. A hydraulic differential
lock is incorporated to prevent one wheel from
The ring gear meshes with the bevel gear on the spinning in difficult traction conditions.
differential drive shaft. The drive bevel gears (F) and
AG,OUOE003,9640 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1503
Differential
Power Flow When Moving Straight Ahead
–UN–25JUL94
LX001373
A—Bevel gears B—Bevel pinions C—Differential drive shaft with D—Ring gear
bevel gear
When the tractor is moving straight ahead, driven ring around their own axis. As a result, both drive wheels
gear (D), the differential housing with bevel pinions (B), receive the same rotation and are driven at the same
and bevel gears (A) with the final drive shafts all turn speed.
at the same speed. Bevel pinions (B) do not turn
AG,OUOE003,9641 –19–14JUN99–1/1
256
20B
2

111401
PN=1504
Differential
Power Flow When Cornering
–UN–25JUL94
LX001374
A—Bevel gears B—Bevel pinions C—Differential drive shaft with D—Ring gear
bevel gear
When the tractor turns a sharp corner, only the driven As a result, the left-hand bevel gear with the final drive
ring gear and the differential housing with the bevel shaft makes two revolutions during each revolution of
pinions rotate at the same speed. Since the right-hand the ring gear.
wheel and thus also the right-hand bevel gear are
stationary, the bevel pinions on the right-hand bevel Thus, if the drive wheels have unequal resistance
gear are forced to rotate about their own axis. The applied to them, the wheel with the least resistance
left-hand bevel gear is in constant mesh with the turns faster. As one wheel turns faster, the other turns
rotating bevel pinions. This produces an additional slower by the same amount.
drive for the left-hand bevel gear, which normally turns
idly with the ring gear when the tractor is moving
straight ahead.
256
20B
3
AG,OUOE003,9642 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1505
Differential
Oil Flow With Differential Lock Engaged
E
H G
–UN–10MAR98
I L
LX001375
J K
LX001375
M
256
A—Solenoid valve E—Inlet from pressure H—Disk pack K—Spring (4 used)
20B
B—Spring regulating valve I—Differential housing L—Pilot oil
4
C—Magnetic core F—Return line to sump J—Hub M—Pressure-free oil
D—Spool G—Piston
When the differential lock is engaged, current flows moves towards the coil. Spool (D), which is directly
through the coil of solenoid valve (A). The electro- connected to the magnetic core, also moves in the
magnetic effect energizes magnetic core (C), which same direction.

111401
PN=1506
Differential
Oil from the pressure regulating valve flows via the gears attached to them — from turning independently.
solenoid valve to piston (G) of the differential lock. The two rear axles of the tractor are now positively
Disk pack (H) is compressed, thus forming a joined together and the drive wheels turn at the same
connection between hub (J) and differential housing (I). speed.
This prevents the final drive shafts — and the bevel
AG,OUOE003,9643 –19–14JUN99–2/2
256
20B
5

111401
PN=1507
Differential
Oil Flow With Differential Lock Disengaged
E
H G
–UN–06MAR98
I J K L
M
LX001376
256 LX001376
20B
6
A—Solenoid valve E—Inlet from pressure H—Disk pack K—Spring (4 used)
B—Spring regulating valve I—Differential housing L—Pilot pressure
C—Magnetic core F—Return line to sump J—Hub M—Pressure-free oil
D—Spool G—Piston
When traction has been restored, the differential lock there is no electro-magnetic effect. Spring (B) forces
is disengaged by depressing brake pedal. Current magnetic core (C) and spool (D) back to their initial
stops flowing through the coil of solenoid valve (A) and positions.

111401
PN=1508
Differential
Pilot oil from the pressure regulating valve reaches the It is once again possible for the two final drive shafts
solenoid valve but cannot go any further. The oil to rotate independently and the two rear axles of the
behind piston (G) becomes pressure-free and flows tractor can turn at different speeds.
back via the solenoid valve to the sump. Springs (K)
force the piston back to its initial point and disk pack
(H) comes free once again.
AG,OUOE003,9644 –19–14JUN99–2/2
256
20B
7

111401
PN=1509
Differential
256
20B
8

111401
PN=1510
Group 20C
Final Drives
Description
–UN–29JUL94
LX001343
A—Final drive shaft C—Planet pinion (3 used) E—Final drive housing F—Rear axle
B—Ring gear D—Planet pinion carrier
Each final drive assembly consists mainly of the final Therefore the planet pinion carrier (D) and the rear
drive housing (E), planetary drive and the rear axle (F). axle are driven in the same direction as the sun gear.
As a result the drive wheels are driven at reduced
The planetary drive is driven by the final drive shaft speed but with increased torque.
(A), which takes over the task of a sun gear.
When the final drive shaft (sun gear) turns, the planet
pinions (C) must “walk around” the ring gear (B).
256
20C
1
LX25620C 013758 –19–01NOV97–1/1

111401
PN=1511
Final Drives
256
20C
2

111401
PN=1512
Group 20D
Rear PTO
Description of Rear PTO Options
–UN–28JUL94
LX001113
A—PTO brake C—Gear E—Drive gear G—Output shaft
B—PTO clutch D—Input shaft F—Countershaft1 H—PTO stub shaft
The tractor may be equipped with the following rear to output shaft (G), or, if equipped, via countershaft (F)
PTO options: 540 rpm 540/1000 rpm reversible to PTO stub shaft (H).
All PTO options are independent, i.e. they can be The PTO is engaged electro-hydraulically via a
engaged independently of the ground drive. solenoid valve.
256
Power from the engine is transmitted by input shaft (D) NOTE: The illustration shows the 540/1000 rpm 20D
to PTO clutch (B). With the clutch engaged (by oil reversible PTO. 1
pressure), power is transmitted via gears (C) and (E)
1
If equipped
LX,25620DNA1161 –19–01FEB97–1/1

111401
PN=1513
Rear PTO
PTO Modulating Valve and Solenoid Valve
C
B D
O
H
E
C L K
D F
M
G
B
N G
L
N
–UN–06MAR98
H
P
LX007090
LX007090 Q
A—Oil passage E—Spring K—Pressure oil passage N—To sump

B—Solenoid valve F—Spring L—From transmission oil O—To PTO clutch
C—Oil passage G—Piston pump P—Pilot oil pressure
D—Spool H—Orifice M—From PTO brake Q—Return oil
When engaging PTO, the spool of solenoid valve (B) is home position. The passage to the PTO clutch is open
attracted by the magnet and opens the passage (K) to again. In this way “grabbing” of the PTO is prevented
the PTO modulating valve. and smooth engagement is ensured. Return oil from
the PTO brake flows to the sump via the solenoid
As a result, pressure oil is directed to passage (A) and valve spool.
256 at the same time through oil passage (C) behind spool
20D (D). The two springs (E) and (F) are compressed When disengaging PTO, the solenoid valve spool is
2 gradually. Now the spool interrupts the oil flow. moved to home position by a spring. Thus the passage
Through orifice (H) a controlled amount of pressure oil to PTO brake is opened. At the same time the
flows behind piston (G) which moves spool (D) back to passage from PTO clutch to sump is opened.
LX,25620D001093 –19–01FEB97–1/1

111401
PN=1514
Rear PTO
Operation of PTO Clutch and Brake
G F H I K
E
D
C L
B M
–UN–04MAR98
LX1015997
LX1015997
A—Input shaft E—Disk pack H—Brake segment K—PTO modulating valve

B—Gear F—Clutch drum I—Brake piston L—Return oil
C—Belleville spring (3 used) G—Piston J—Solenoid valve M—Pressure oil
D—Clutch hub
PTO Clutch compressed disk pack (E) permits power flow between
clutch drum (F) and clutch hub (D). Thus the clutch
The PTO clutch is a hydraulically operated disk clutch. drum rotates with gear (B).
It is driven by the engine via input shaft (A).
Depending on the position of solenoid valve (J), PTO Brake 256
pressure oil is directed to the PTO brake or via PTO 20D
modulating valve (K) to the PTO clutch. When PTO is disengaged, PTO modulating valve (K) 3
interrupts oil flow to PTO clutch. Pressure oil is
Belleville springs (C) hold piston (G) in its home directed from solenoid valve (J) directly behind brake
position. When PTO is engaged, pressure oil flows to piston (I). Brake segment (H) is pressed against clutch
the piston and disk pack (E) is compressed. PTO drum (F) to stop PTO.
modulating valve is locked in “ON” position. The
LX,25620DNA1092 –19–01FEB97–1/1

111401
PN=1515
Rear PTO
PTO Power Flow (540 RPM)
–UN–21NOV97
LX 010408
LX010408
A—Drive gear B—PTO C—Power flow
Power is transmitted directly from PTO clutch gear to

PTO (B) via drive gear (A).
LX,25620D001088 –19–01JAN95–1/1
256
20D
4

111401
PN=1516
Rear PTO
PTO Power Flow (540/1000 RPM, Reversible)
A G
B
H
J
C
D
E
I
F
K
–UN–04MAR98
L
M
LX 010409 LX010409
A—Gear E—Piston H—PTO stub shaft K—Gear

B—Drive gear F—Shift collar I—Shift position 1000 rpm L—Power flow at 540 rpm
C—Output shaft G—Countershaft with gear J—Shift position 540 rpm M—Power flow at 1000 rpm
D—Spring
Power is transmitted from PTO clutch gear to drive At 540 rpm the stub shaft moves piston against spring 256
gear (B). Speed is changed by turning PTO stub shaft. and shift collar is in position (J). Power is now 20D
A bore is located at the end of stub shaft (H) to obtain transmitted via countershaft (G). 5
the two shift positions.
At 1000 rpm pin of piston (E) is seated in stub shaft

bore. Shift collar (F) is held in position (I) by
spring (D).
LX,25620D001089 –19–01AUG97–1/1

111401
PN=1517
Rear PTO
256
20D
6

111401
PN=1518
Group 20E
Front PTO
Front PTO Operation
The front PTO is an independent 1000-rpm unit. When activated by the solenoid, pressure oil flows
from the hydraulic pump via the modulating valve to
As seen in the direction of tractor travel, it rotates the PTO clutch (E) pressure piston. The plates and
counterclockwise. An idler gear (L) is used for disks are forced together and the PTO (F) begins to
clockwise rotation. The clockwise rotating PTO stub turn.
shaft has 21 splines.
After disengagement is commanded, the spring-loaded
PTO drive (A) is direct from the engine crankshaft. disk brake (K) is automatically activated. The
maximum shaft stop time is 1.5 seconds if no
The front PTO has an independent hydraulic system, implements are attached.
meaning that the oil supply needed for shifting and
lubrication is provided by an integral hydraulic pump. NOTE: This text refers to the sectional drawing and
legend on the next page.
The PTO can be electrically engaged only when
mechanically coupled by means of shift collar (C).
The wet clutch disks are hydraulically actuated via a

solenoid. Smooth engagement is assured by a
modulating valve.
AG,OUOE003,9645 –19–14JUN99–1/1
256
20E
1
TM4572 (01APR01) 256-20E-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1519
Front PTO
Counterclockwise-Rotating1 Front PTO - Sectional View
–UN–07APR98
256
20E
LX1019211
1
Seen in the direction of travel

111401
PN=1520
Front PTO
A—Input Shaft E—Disk Clutch H—Pump Drive Ring Gear K—PTO Brake
B—Drive Gear F—PTO Stub Shaft J—Oil Distribution Baffle with L—Idler Gear
C—Shift Collar w/Shift Pawl G—Spring Modulating Valve and
D—Ring Gear Solenoid
AG,OUOE003,9646 –19–14JUN99–2/2
Independent Hydraulic Circuit
–UN–26FEB98
LX1019213
A—Integral Hydraulic Pump D—Solenoid G—Pressure Regulating Valve J—Lube
B—Filter Bypass Valve E—Modulating Valve H—Cooler Relief Valve K—Sump
C—Filter F—Hydraulic Clutch I—Oil Cooler
The hydraulic pump is installed in the housing and is When the solenoid is activated, engagement oil flows
driven by a gear meshing with the PTO clutch ring via the modulating valve to activate the PTO clutch
gear. It is a gear-type pump which supplies pressure piston.
oil only when the PTO is mechanically engaged.
Surplus oil flows to the lube circuit via the oil cooler
The hydraulic pump supplies oil to the filter at a and into the sump. 256
maximum pressure of approx. 1600 kPa (16 bar; 232 20E
psi) and a maximum rate of approx. 30 lpm (7.92 3
gpm). The pressure regulating valve maintains an
engagement pressure of 1200 kPa (12 bar; 174 psi).
AG,OUOE003,9647 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1521
Front PTO
Oil Cooler
The front PTO oil cooler is located ahead of the engine oil
cooler.
The oil cooler has an upstream relief valve.
–UN–08DEC97
LX1019264
AG,OUOE003,9648 –19–14JUN99–1/1
256
20E
4

111401
PN=1522
Front PTO
Modulating Valve and Solenoid
C
D
B
K
L E
F
A
–UN–30MAR98
G
O H
P M
LX1019215
LX1019215
A—Oil Passage E—Spring K—Pressure Oil Passage N—To Sump

B—Solenoid F—Spring L—From Hydraulic Pump O—Pilot Oil Pressure
C—Oil Passage G—Piston M—To PTO Clutch P—Return Oil
D—Spool H—Orifice
When the PTO is engaged, the solenoid (B) spool is the spool (D) to its initial position. The PTO clutch
pulled from the magnets to open a passage (K) to the passage is now open again. This assures a smooth,
modulating valve. gradual engagement of the PTO.
This allows pressure oil to reach passage (A) and to When the PTO is disengaged, a spring returns the
flow through passage (C) behind the spool (D) to solenoid spool to its original position to open an oil
gradually compress springs (E) and (F). The spool passage to the sump. The spring-loaded brake brings
then interrupts the flow of oil. Metered pressure oil the PTO to a stop.
passes through orifice (H) behind piston (G) to return
256
20E
5
AG,OUOE003,9649 –19–14JUN99–1/1

111401
PN=1523
Front PTO
Hydraulic Pump
The hydraulic pump is a gear-type pump driven via a ring

gear on the clutch drum.
–UN–05DEC97
LX1019268
AG,OUOE003,9650 –19–14JUN99–1/1
256
20E
6

111401
PN=1524
Section 260
Steering and Brakes
Contents
Page

Checking the Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260-05-1
Group 10—Troubleshooting
Hydrostatic Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260-10-1

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260-15-1
Testing Leaf Springs of Steering Valve . . . . . .260-15-2
Checking Steering System for External
Leakage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260-15-2
Steering System Internal Leak Check . . . . . . .260-15-3
Steering Unit Leak Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260-15-4
Steering Valve Hydraulic Connections. . . . . . .260-15-4
Testing and Adjusting Shock Valves . . . . . . . .260-15-5
Bleeding the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260-15-6
Group 20A—Hydrostatic Steering

Description of Steering Valve . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20A-1
Operation of Metering Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20A-2
Oil Flow In Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20A-4
Oil Flow - Neutral Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20A-6
Oil Flow - Emergency Steering . . . . . . . . . . 260-20A-8
Group 20B—Hydraulic Brakes

Power Brake Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20B-1
Brake Valve - Sectional View . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20B-2
Hydraulic System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20B-4
Oil Flow to Brake Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20B-5
Oil Flow During Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20B-7
Oil Flow During Braking (Hydraulic Pump Not
Working) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20B-17
Rear Brake Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-20B-21
260
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1
Contents
260
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=2
Group 05
Checking the Steering
CAUTION: This test must be performed

outdoors. Make sure there is no risk of injuring
anybody.
1. Drive the tractor onto a level surface and stop it there.
2. Run the engine.
3. Turn the steering wheel several times in each direction.
It should be easy to turn the steering wheel smoothly

in both directions. The steering lock position must be
distinct.
4. Drive the tractor and turn the steering wheel several

times in each direction.
There should be no need to correct the position of the

steering wheel while the tractor is driving straight
ahead.
If faults are evident, see Groups 10 and 15.
LX,26005 002383 –19–29JAN92–1/1
260
05
1
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-05-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1527
260
05
2
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-05-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1528
Group 10
Troubleshooting
Hydrostatic Steering
The steering wheel is stiff but No oil pressure Perform a hydraulic test, see Section
steering is operational 270
Leaking or missing valve ball (check Repair the steering unit, see the
valve) applicable Repair Technical Manual,
Section 60
Inner and outer spool too stiff Repair or replace the steering unit,
see the applicable Repair Technical
Manual, Section 60
Stiff front axle components Repair the front axle, see the
applicable Repair Technical Manual,
Section 80, or the front drive axle
Component Technical Manual.
Steering faulty or inoperative Faulty restrictor in priority valve Perform a hydraulic test, see Section
spool 270
Steering is stiff or noisy Loose internal components in priority Perform a hydraulic test, see Section
valve spool 270
Excessive steering wheel play Worn rotor splines Repair the steering unit, see the
Section 60
Rotor shaft upper flange worn or Repair the steering unit, see the
rotor shaft broken applicable Repair Technical Manual,
Section 60
Leaf springs broken or lack tension Repair the steering unit, see the
Section 60
Worn rotor shaft splines Repair the steering unit, see the
Section 60
The steering wheel turns by itself Weak or broken leaf springs Repair the steering unit, see the
and wheel position must applicable Repair Technical Manual,
constantly be corrected Section 60
260
10
1
Continued on next page LX,26010 002379 –19–01JAN98–1/3
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-10-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1529
Troubleshooting
Steering wheel does not return to Inner and outer spool binding Repair or replace the steering unit,
center position see the applicable Repair Technical
Manual, Section 60
Leak between outer spool and Replace the steering unit, see the
housing applicable repair Technical Manual.
Front wheels vibrate Worn wheel bearings Repair the front axle, see the
Section 80, or the front drive axle
Component Technical Manual.
Steering wheel “kicks back” Incorrect rotor shaft to rotor Repair the steering unit, see the
adjustment applicable Repair Technical Manual,
Section 60
Steering wheel does not return to Contamination or particles between Repair the steering unit, see the
center position, tends to turn by inner and outer spool applicable Repair Technical Manual,
itself Section 60
Weak or broken leaf springs Repair the steering unit, see the
Section 60
Inadequate steering assist, Insufficient hydraulic pump pressure Perform a hydraulic test, see Section
possibly only on one side 270
Excessive steering unit Repair or replace the steering unit,

leakage(check valve) see the applicable Repair Technical
Manual, Section 60
Steering cylinder leakage Repair the steering cylinder, see

the applicable Repair Technical
Manual, Section 60, or the front
drive axle Component Technical
Manual.
Continued on next page LX,26010 002379 –19–01JAN98–2/3

260
10
2
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-10-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1530
Troubleshooting
Steering wheel turns Extremely high leakage rate in Repair the steering cylinder, see
continuously, no stops felt steering cylinder the applicable Repair Technical
Manual, Section 60, or the front
drive axle Component Technical
Manual.
Rotor and rotor ring extremely worn Repair the steering unit, see the
Section 60
Extremely high leakage rate between Install a new steering unit, see the
inner and outer spool, and/or applicable Repair Technical Manual,
between outer spool and housing Section 60
LX,26010 002379 –19–01JAN98–3/3
260
10
3
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-10-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1531
Troubleshooting
260
10
4
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-10-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1532
Group 15

U.S. SERVICE-GARD Catalog or in the
SERVICE-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company. LX,26015 002342 –19–27JAN92–1/3
Hydraulic Hand-Operated Pump . . . . . . . . . . D01019AA
Testing and adjusting shock valves of steering valve
–UN–26JUL94
LX001059
LX,26015 002342 –19–27JAN92–2/3
LX001060 –UN–25JUL94
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT03248
Testing and adjusting shock valves of steering valve
LX,26015 002342 –19–27JAN92–3/3
Specifications
Steering unit shock valves Pressure 23500 to 25500 kPa (235 to 255 bar;
3400 to 3700 psi)
LX26015 017135 –19–01FEB98–1/1

260
15
1
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-15-1 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1533
Testing Leaf Springs of Steering Valve
Turn steering wheel until it contacts stop. Push steering

wheel to full lock position and release. Within two
seconds, the steering wheel should return far enough (8°)
so that steering valve spools are in neutral position.
NOTE: To test leaf springs, turn steering wheel in both

directions with engine shut off.
In the event of a malfunction, repair the steering valve.

Refer to the “Repair” manual, Section 60, Group 05.
LX,26015 002345 –19–27JAN92–1/1
Checking Steering System for External

Leakage
Check steering valve, hydraulic lines, fittings and steering

cylinder for external leakage.
If leakages are detected, repair parts as necessary.
If there is no external leakage, check steering system for

internal leakage.
LX,26015 002344 –19–27JAN92–1/1
260
15
2
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-15-2 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1534
Steering System Internal Leak Check
Start the engine and turn the steering wheel against a

stop. Then hold the wheel against the stop with a force of
10 N•m (7.5 lb-ft) for one minute.
The following rotation amounts should not be exceeding in

that time:
• OSPF 100 LS1 (Danfoss): 4.5 turns

• OSPF 160 LS1 (Danfoss): 4 turns
If the number of turns exceeds the value given above, the

steering unit should be checked. This should identify the
cause of the leak.
1
See the steering unit identification plate
LX,26015N002347 –19–01JAN98–1/1
260
15
3
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-15-3 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1535
Steering Unit Leak Check
1. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the steering

cylinder.
2. Seal off the hydraulic hoses.
3. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel against a

stop. Then hold the wheel against the stop with a force
of 10 N•m (7.5 lb-ft) for one minute.
The following rotation amounts should not be

exceeding in that time:

• OSPF 160 LS1 (Danfoss): 4 turns
If the number of turns exceeds the value given above,

the steering unit should be repaired. See Section 60 of
the applicable Repair TM.
If the number of turns does not exceed the value given

above, the steering cylinder should be repaired. See
Section 60 of the applicable TM or the Front Drive Axle
CTM.
1
See the steering unit identification plate
LX,26015N002608 –19–01JAN98–1/1
Steering Valve Hydraulic Connections
NOTE: For the following check it is important that

connections are not mixed up.
P—Pressure oil connection

–UN–28JUL94
T—Return oil connection

L—Connection, steering cylinder l.h side
R—Connection, steering cylinder r.h. side
L117929
LX,26015 002346 –19–27JAN92–1/1

260
15
4
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-15-4 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1536
Testing and Adjusting Shock Valves
Install fittings JT03248 (D) and L38860 (C) on hydraulic

hose of hand pump D01019AA. Attach hydraulic hose (B)
to “R” or “L” connection of steering valve and to fitting
L38860.
–UN–20JUL94
Operate hand pump to obtain a pressure of 23500 to
25500 kPa (235 to 255 bar; 3400 to 3700 psi). Valve is
set correctly if pressure then drops sharply.
LX001083
IMPORTANT: After testing the shock valves, oil under
high pressure is still trapped between
the connections. Therefore turn A—Hand pump D01019AA with gauge and
spool (E) to the left or right so that the hydraulic hose
B—Hydraulic hose of steering valve
oil can escape. C—Fitting L38860
D—Fitting JT03248
If necessary, adjust shock valves as follows: E—Spool
F—Shock valve (r.h. turn)
1. Remove threaded plugs of shock valves (F and G) and G—Shock valve (l.h. turn)
coat adjusting screws below with LOCTITE 242
(L41475).
2. Screw adjusting screws in or out until a pressure of

23500 to 25500 kPa (235 to 255 bar; 3400 to 3700 psi)
is obtained.
NOTE: Turning adjusting screws clockwise increases

pressure. Turning adjusting screws
counterclockwise reduces pressure.
3. Tighten threaded plugs to 30 N•m (23 lb-ft).
LOCTITE is a trademark of Loctite Corp. LX,26015 002348 –19–01MAY92–1/1
260
15
5
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-15-5 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1537
Bleeding the Brakes
CAUTION: Always follow precisely the steps

described here. This is the only way to ensure
that the tractor’s brakes are bled properly.
–UN–26JAN95
NOTE: The oil must NOT be in a foamy condition when
the brakes are bled. For this reason, do not bleed
the brakes after driving at speed, performing work
LX011046
with the tractor’s hydraulics or carrying out
hydraulic tests. If necessary, park the tractor and
wait one hour to allow the oil to settle.
1. With the engine running, turn the steering wheel slowly

and evenly two or three times from left full lock to right
full lock and back again. This fills the brake valve
housing via the steering valve return line. Shut off the
engine.
2. As shown in the illustration, slide two transparent bleed

tubes over the appropriate bleed screws. Place the
other ends of the two bleed tubes in the oil filler neck.
3. Open the bleed screws by half a turn.
4. Start the engine.
5. Brake pedals must be coupled together. Apply gentle

pressure to the brake pedals and hold them in this
position until the fluid escaping from the bleed screws
is free of air bubbles.
6. Then depress the pedals briefly and release. Repeat

this a few times. This should flush out any air bubbles
left in the fluid.
7. If necessary, repeat point 5.
8. Hold the pedals in the depressed position and close

the bleed screws.
Continued on next page LX,OMASRE014889 –19–01OCT97–1/2

260
15
6
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-15-6 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1538
IMPORTANT: If pedal does sink noticeably after

resistance has been reached, leaks in
the brake system may be the cause.
9. Shut off the engine and actuate the brake pedals

several times each (separately!) with the engine shut
off. This bleeds the last of the air out of the brake
valve. There must be perceptible resistance before
each pedal reaches its limit of travel.
LX,OMASRE014889 –19–01OCT97–2/2
260
15
7
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-15-7 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1539
260
15
8
TM4572 (01APR01) 260-15-8 6110-6510S Tractors

111401
PN=1540
Group 20A
Description of Steering Valve
–UN–28JUL94
L117911
A—Shock valve (2 used) D—Housing G—Check valve J—Stator
B—Cross pin E—Rotor shaft H—Check valve K—Rotor
C—Leaf springs (6 used) F—Valve spool I—Valve sleeve L—Suction valve
Rotor (K) and stator (J) form the metering unit. piston of the steering cylinder in question is pushed to
one side by the piston rod, allowing the pressure to
The actual control element consists of sleeve (I) and rise rapidly in the steering lines. On the pressurized
spool (F) which is connected directly to the steering side, suction valve (L) closes immediately. The
wheel. pressurized shock valve opens between 23500 kPa
(235 bar; 3400 psi) and 25500 kPa (255 bar; 3700 psi)
Sleeve (I) is connected to the rotor by means of cross and permits oil to flow into the return passage. At the
pin (B) and rotor shaft (E). same time, the suction valve on the unpressurized side
opens. The piston in the steering cylinder now draws
The leaf springs (C) between sleeve and spool ensure oil out of the return line, thus preventing an interruption
an automatic neutral position between sleeve and in the oil column at the steering cylinder.
spool.
Check valve (H) prevents return oil from flowing
If the hydraulic pump or motor should fail, check valve through the steering valve, as this would produce
(G) between the spool and sleeve ensures that the “jolting” at the steering wheel. This valve also prevents
steering continues to function. oil from flowing to the hydraulic pump when the pump
is not in operation. 260
Shock valves (A) act as relief valves should one of the 20A
1
front wheels encounter an unyielding obstacle. The
LX,26020A001709 –19–01MAY92–1/1

111401
PN=1541
Operation of Metering Unit
0 1/14 1/7
A A A
G B G B G B
F C F C F C
E D E D E D
A A A
G B G B G B
F C F C F C
–UN–04MAR98
E D E D E D
LX001426
LX001426 H I J
H—Medium pressure oil I—Trapped oil J—Pressure free oil
NOTE: For easier understanding, the following The illustration shows the following positions:
description is based on operation of the
metering unit during emergency steering. 1. Moving the steering wheel 1/14 of a turn turns the
center point 6/14 in the opposite direction. Thus
The outer ring of the metering unit (stator) is attached three cavities are open and three are closed on the
to the steering housing. The rotor with external teeth opposite side.
engages in the internal teeth of the outer ring. As the
rotor turns, the center point turns in a circle. The rotary 2. Moving the steering wheel 1/7 of a turn opens six
movement is transferred to the rotor drive shaft; this cavities and closes six.
shaft has bow-shaped teeth, since it follows the
rotation of the rotor center and must remain flexible. 3. Turning the steering wheel a complete turn brings
7 x 6 = 42 cavities into operation.
As the rotor rotates, its teeth mesh with the inner teeth
260 of the stator, reducing the cavity on one side and
20A
increasing the cavity on the other side.
2

111401
PN=1542
As these 42 cavities are all brought into operation NOTE: The normal operation of the steering valve
in one shaft rotation the advantage of a assembly is similar to that described above for
vibration-free movement and equal feeding the metering unit. Rotation of rotor is assisted
pressure is obta

Tech Man 6110-6510s TR Op Test-TM4572

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tech Man 6110-6510s TR Op Test-TM4572

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tech Man 6110-6510s TR Op Test-TM4572

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6110-6410,

For complete service information also see:

John Deere Werke Mannheim

This “Operation and Tests” manual applies to the

TM4572 (01APR01) 6110-6510S Tractors

All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on

TM4572 (01APR01) i 6110-6510S Tractors

SECTION 299—Special Tools (Dealer Fabricated)

TM4572 (01APR01) ii 6110-6510S Tractors

TM4572 (01APR01) iii 6110-6510S Tractors

TM4572 (01APR01) iv 6110-6510S Tractors

Group 05—Safety Measures

TM4572 (01APR01) 210-1 6110-6510S Tractors

TM4572 (01APR01) 210-2 6110-6510S Tractors

This is a safety-alert symbol. When you see this symbol

Prevent Machine Runaway

Avoid possible injury or death from machinery runaway.

Do not start engine by shorting across starter terminals.

Handle Fluids Safely—Avoid Fires

When you work around fuel, do not smoke or work near

Store flammable fluids away from fire hazards. Do not

Do not store oily rags; they can ignite and burn

TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-1 6110-6510S Tractors

Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from

Never check battery charge by placing a metal object

Prepare for Emergencies

Be prepared if a fire starts.

Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.

Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service,

TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-2 6110-6510S Tractors

Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong

Avoid the hazard by:

1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.

If you spill acid on yourself:

1. Flush your skin with water.

1. Do not induce vomiting.

TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-3 6110-6510S Tractors

Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin

Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before

Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands

If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid

Service Cooling System Safely

Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling

TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-4 6110-6510S Tractors

Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.

Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated

• Remove paint a minimum of 76 mm (3 in.) from area to

Do all work in an area that is ventilated to carry toxic

Dispose of paint and solvent properly.

Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines

Flammable spray can be generated by heating near

Work In Ventilated Area

Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If it is

If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the

TM4572 (01APR01) 210-05-5 6110-6510S Tractors

Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment

Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment

Practice Safe Maintenance